Buttmann. Intermediate or Larger Greek Grammar

Acerca de este libro
Esta es una copia digital de un libro que, durante generaciones, se ha conservado en las estanteras de una biblioteca, hasta que Google ha decidido
escanearlo como parte de un proyecto que pretende que sea posible descubrir en lnea libros de todo el mundo.
Ha sobrevivido tantos aos como para que los derechos de autor hayan expirado y el libro pase a ser de dominio pblico. El que un libro sea de
dominio pblico significa que nunca ha estado protegido por derechos de autor, o bien que el perodo legal de estos derechos ya ha expirado. Es
posible que una misma obra sea de dominio pblico en unos pases y, sin embargo, no lo sea en otros. Los libros de dominio pblico son nuestras
puertas hacia el pasado, suponen un patrimonio histrico, cultural y de conocimientos que, a menudo, resulta difcil de descubrir.
Todas las anotaciones, marcas y otras seales en los mrgenes que estn presentes en el volumen original aparecern tambin en este archivo como
testimonio del largo viaje que el libro ha recorrido desde el editor hasta la biblioteca y, finalmente, hasta usted.
Normas de uso
Google se enorgullece de poder colaborar con distintas bibliotecas para digitalizar los materiales de dominio pblico a fin de hacerlos accesibles
a todo el mundo. Los libros de dominio pblico son patrimonio de todos, nosotros somos sus humildes guardianes. No obstante, se trata de un
trabajo caro. Por este motivo, y para poder ofrecer este recurso, hemos tomado medidas para evitar que se produzca un abuso por parte de terceros
con fines comerciales, y hemos incluido restricciones tcnicas sobre las solicitudes automatizadas.
Asimismo, le pedimos que:
+ Haga un uso exclusivamente no comercial de estos archivos Hemos diseado la Bsqueda de libros de Google para el uso de particulares;
como tal, le pedimos que utilice estos archivos con fines personales, y no comerciales.
+ No enve solicitudes automatizadas Por favor, no enve solicitudes automatizadas de ningn tipo al sistema de Google. Si est llevando a
cabo una investigacin sobre traduccin automtica, reconocimiento ptico de caracteres u otros campos para los que resulte til disfrutar
de acceso a una gran cantidad de texto, por favor, envenos un mensaje. Fomentamos el uso de materiales de dominio pblico con estos
propsitos y seguro que podremos ayudarle.
+ Conserve la atribucin La filigrana de Google que ver en todos los archivos es fundamental para informar a los usuarios sobre este proyecto
y ayudarles a encontrar materiales adicionales en la Bsqueda de libros de Google. Por favor, no la elimine.
+ Mantngase siempre dentro de la legalidad Sea cual sea el uso que haga de estos materiales, recuerde que es responsable de asegurarse de
que todo lo que hace es legal. No d por sentado que, por el hecho de que una obra se considere de dominio pblico para los usuarios de
los Estados Unidos, lo ser tambin para los usuarios de otros pases. La legislacin sobre derechos de autor vara de un pas a otro, y no
podemos facilitar informacin sobre si est permitido un uso especfico de algn libro. Por favor, no suponga que la aparicin de un libro en
nuestro programa significa que se puede utilizar de igual manera en todo el mundo. La responsabilidad ante la infraccin de los derechos de
autor puede ser muy grave.
Acerca de la Bsqueda de libros de Google
El objetivo de Google consiste en organizar informacin procedente de todo el mundo y hacerla accesible y til de forma universal. El programa de
Bsqueda de libros de Google ayuda a los lectores a descubrir los libros de todo el mundo a la vez que ayuda a autores y editores a llegar a nuevas
audiencias. Podr realizar bsquedas en el texto completo de este libro en la web, en la pgina http://books.google.com
This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the
information in books and make it universally accessible.
http://books.google.com
Biblioteca Ateneu Barcelonis

iiiijllfi
1005708540
DR. PHILIP BUTTMANN'S
INTERMEDIATE OR LARGER
GREEK
GRAMMAR,
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN
D. BOILEAU, Esq.
WITH
A BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE OF THE AUTHOR:
EDITED, WITH A FEW NOTES,

BY
E. H. BARKER, Esa.
OJ Tlielford, Norfolk, andformerly of Trinity College, Cambriiiijc.
LONDON:
PRISTED FOR THE EDITOR,
PUBLISHED BY BLACK, YOUNG, AND YOUNG,
2, TAVISTOCK STREET.
MBCCCXXXIII.
R 310313
LONDON:
FMNTID BT WILLIAM OLOWRS,
Stamford Street.
TO THE
Rev. Dr. KEATE,
HEAD-MASTER OF ETON-SCHOOL,
THE FOLLOWING
GRAMMAR,
NOW FIRST TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH,
IS DEDICATED
RY HIS FAITHFUL AND RESPECTFUL SERVANT,
THE EDITOR.

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.
1. If " it cannot be denied that the author of a Grammar,

which contains not only sound practical rules, but the grounds
and reasons of those rules, has treated his subject philosophically,"
Dr. Philip Buttmann, of whose Intermediate or Larger Greek
Grammar, a Translation into English is now first offered to the
public, is well entitled to that praise, whether we regard his SchoolGrammar, his Intermediate or Larger Grammar, or his Complete
Grammar.
2. The American Professor Everett, who published a
Translation of the School-Grammar, at Cambridge in the United
States,1 in 1822, of which a second edition appeared in 1826,
pp. 336. thus attests the merits of Buttmann :
" The Translator has been led, not less by his own reflection,
than by the advice of judicious friends, to prepare a Translation
of the most approved of the Greek Grammars in use in Germany.
It is well known that the Germans have paid a greater attention
to philological pursuits than any other people of the present day,
and that among themselves the study of the Greek has been
carried much farther than that of the Latin. In consequence
of the zeal, with which every department of Greek literature has
been pursued in that country, that of Grammar has been enriched
with many very valuable elementary works. It will be sufficient
to quote the names of Hermann, Buttmann, Matthias, and
Thiersch.3 Buttmann and Matthia have particularly dis1 An abridgment of the Larger or Intermediate Greek Grammar has also been
published in America:A Greet Grammar, Principally abridged from that of
Buttmann, for the Use of Schools, Boston, U. S., 1824. pp. 112.
! The Greek Grammar of Frederick Thiersch, Translated from the Gerjian, with Brief Remarks, by Sl&D. K. SAMOrOBO, M. A. o/CurisI-Church,
vi
tinguished themselves as the authors of the Greek Grammars in

most extensive use. Considered as an historical analysis of the
language, the Grammar of Professor Thiersch may be thought
to deserve the preference. It is, however, as its title indicates,
a Grammar not so much of the classical language, as it appears
in the mass of the Writers, as of that earlier form of it, which is
called the elder, the Homeric or Epic dialect, (Grieciiische
Grammatik Vorziiglich des Homerisciien Dialects, 2d Ed.
1818.) While it needs but a slight inspection of this Grammar to
feel the necessity of studying Homer almost as a work of another
language, this fact itself equally suggests the conclusion, that a
Grammar, particularly founded on this more ancient form of the
language, is not well adapted to be a guide to the classical
Writers at large. The Larger Greek Grammar of MattiiijE was
translated into English by the late Mr. Blomfield, and is
thought to have made a great accession to the stores of gram
matical criticism accessible to the English student. As a philo
sophical and practical grammarian, however, Professor Buttmann, of the University of Berlin, is allowed by his country
men to hold the first rank. Three Greek Grammars, drawn up
by him, are now before the public ; they are his Greek Gram
mar for Schools, the Larger Greek Grammar, and the Complete
Greek Grammar.3 The latter work, as the title suggests, is in
tended to contain a complete Grammatical Index of the Greek
Language, in which all the facts furnished by the study of all the
Authors should be referred to their systematic place, so far as
they establish principles, or exceptions to principles. The first
Volume of this work was published in 1819, and not till the
Larger Greek Grammar of the Author had attained its eighth
edition. This Larger Grammar is a work of more than 600,
for the most part, finely printed pages, and is that, by which
its learned Author attained, in the public estimation, the place
Oxford, and Professor of Greek in the University of Glasgow, 1830.
Vot.K. pp. 528. Appendix pp. i .xxxvi. Rrmarkt pp. 1 25. But the second vulurne,
destined tocontain the Syntax, has not yet been published by the Translator. E.H.B.
8 Mr.Keigiiti.et has undertaken to translate this work into English, and I
shall hail its publication with the greatest satisfaction.E. H. B.
vii
he is now allowed to fill as a Greek philologian. The supe

riority of this work, not only for philosophical investigation, but
learned criticism, can scarcely fail to be apparent to all, who are
able to judge of it.'
3. This School-Grammar, translated and published in America
by Professor Everett in 1822, and re-published in 1826, was
reprinted, from the first edition, in England by R. Priestley in
1824, pp. 292, at the press of Mr. Valpy, with the Preface, but
without the mention of Professor Everett's name, and without
any intimation that the word Cambridge, subjoined to the Pre
face, referred to Cambridge in America.
4. The Translation of the Intermediate or Larger Grammar of
Buttmann, now for the first time published, was made from the
13th German edition by Daniel Boileau, Esq., and I trust
that it will be found to be equally correct and terse. The fact
that the work has reached a 13th edition in a country abound
ing with intellect and learning, proves of itself the value, which
his countrymen set on the grammatical labors of Buttmann.
5. The following testimony to his merits is borne by Augustus
Matthi/e in the Preface to the first edition of his Greek Gram
mar, dated Altenburg, May 26, 1807 :
. " We have not indeed of late years been deficient in Greek
Grammars, but they are chiefly employed in treating of the ele
mentary parts. More especially, since the method of Lennep has
found followers in Germany, and every one has laid claim to the
praise of a philosophical genius, in proportion as he deviated from
the old method, and attached himself to the new one, the depart
ment of Syntax has been neglected, and confined entirely to the
common rules. Even the Grammar of Buttmann, which un
doubtedly claims the first rank among those, which have appeared
more recently, is but meagre in the department of Syntax ; and
although it contains many excellent observations upon the com
mon rules, and many philosophical views, yet it embraces too
small a proportion of those philological remarks, which are neces
sary to a grammatical acquaintance even with the authors, who
are commonly read in schools."
viii
And in the new edition, dated AllenbiiTg, May 1825, Matthijb

adds :
" I did not receive the second part of Buttmann's Larger
Grammar till the greater part of ray own was already printed off.
I have availed myself of it as far as I could, without encroaching
on the property of another, in the correction of the proofs, but
still more in the Additions and Corrections."
But Buttmann has in the editions, which have appeared since
the dates of Matthias Prefaces in 1807, and 1825, greatly im
proved his Intermediate or Larger Grammar.
6. Messrs. J. Fr. Gail and E. P. M. Longueville have, in
their Translation of Matthias Grammar, (Grammaire Kaisonne
de la Langue Grecque par Aug. Matthi*, Traduite en Fran
ais sur la Seconde Edition, Premiere Partie, Paris, 1831,) thus
noticed Buttmann, p. viii. :
" Le perfectionnement de la Grammaire Grecque a t lent ;
et, grce l'esprit d'analyse et de critique modernes, appliqu
aux dtails grammaticaux, les notions se sont enfin compltes,
modifies, aprs avoir t dbattues, et il en est rsult entre les
mains d'un rudit, dou d'un esprit excellent, ce livre que nos
aeux ne sont point coupables de n'avoir pas fait, mais qu'il serait
fcheux de ne pas rpandre chez nous, maintenant qu'il existe.
On accorde sans doute une juste estime aux Grammaires de
MM. Buttmann, Thiersch, et de quelques autres savants tran
gers. Celle de M. Buttmann, en particulier, n'a pas peu con
tribu au perfectionnement de l'ouvrage de M. Matthi.e ; mais
elle n'a pas t termine ; et, d'ailleurs, ce dernier Professeur
aie mrite d'avoir runi et class avec le plus d'ordre, de clart,
et d'quilibre, les faits isols, les notions parses dans une infinit
d'crits, et les doctrines lentement labores par les autres savants.
II devait donc fixer notre choix."
But, while the French Translators here represent Matthix
to have profited largely by the Complete Greek Grammar
of Buttmann, though its learned author died before it was
finished, they hold a very different, and the true, language in their
note on Matthias Preface, p. xxv. :
ix
" M. Matthi/e ne parle ici sans doute que de la Grammaire

Abrge, dont la dixime dit. a paru en 1822. Buttmann s'tait
occup de rdiger une syntaxe plus dveloppe et proportione
la premire partie de sa Grammaire Gr. Raisonne. 11 se pro
posait de reprendre ce travail, s'il recouvrait la sant, ainsi qu'il
nous l'apprend dans un Avertissement mis en tte de la deuxime
et dernire Section de son ouvrage, qui a paru en 1827. Butt
mann est mort en 1830."
It should seem that Matthias has used only the Intermediate
or Larger Grammar, but not the Complete Grammar, of which
the first Volume appeared in 1819.
The French Translators have inserted in the text of Matthi*
the Corrections and Additions, of which he speaks ; and in the
Introduction, p. 3, where Matthij writes thus :
" The love of vivid representation produced the extraordinary
facility, which the Greek language has, of expressing those fine
shades of meaning, which cannot be fully rendered in any other,
and can even be apprehended only by a feeling formed by diligent
reading. Hence the pleonasms, which are found even in Thucydides, the most concise of all Greek Writers, and the opposite
quality of compression or brachylogia, where, though the expres
sion may seem imperfect, the condensation of thought produces
a stronger impression on the sense than completeness could have
done : hence finally those anacolutha, and frequent mingling of
different forms of speech, which, sometimes bordering on pleonasm,
sometimes on brachylogia and ellipsis, by their pregnant sense
make the fancy feel more than the words seem to imply:"
The French Translators,^. 4., give this note as from MatthijE,
which does not appear in the recent edition, (the 5th Engl, ed.)
published by the Rev. John Kenrick, 1832 :
" Ceci et ce qui suit, est ce que Buttmann Grammaire Rai
sonne p. 2 Remarq. 2. appelle individualit et nationalit, mais
qu'il rduit aux seuls Attiques, ce que j'attribue aux Grecs
en gnral, quoique dans des proportions diffrentes."
Hence I infer that the latest German edition of MatthijE
contains other matter, of which the learned Editor, Mr. Ken rick,
has taken no notice.
PREFACE OF TUE ENGLISH EDITOR.

The only other passage, which I shall extract from the French
Translators, p. xxiv., is the following :
" La France, pendant la lutte terrible de prs de quarante ans,
qu'elle eut h soutenir pour sa rforme politique et sociale, fut bien
force d'abandonner l'tude des mots pour s'occuper tout entire
des questions de faits, qui intressaient si essentiellement son exis
tence. Cependant, comme la somme de progrs marquants, que
doit l'rudition Grecque aux Philologues de chaque nation, se
rattache toujours un petit nombre de noms saillants, tels que
ceux de Heyne, Hermann, Sch^fer, Buttmann, Bckh enAllemagne, de Wyttenbacii, Hemsterhuys, Valckenaer, en
Hollande, de Porson et Elhsley, en Angleterre, le nom
seul de Brunck peut avoir quelque poids dans la balance pour la
priode, qui vient de s'couler, et mettait notre pays tt l'abri de
ce silence plus que rigoureux."
The pardonable, but amusing anxiety of these gentlemen to
rescue their country from the odium of having contributed so little,
within the contemplated period, to grammatical science, and the
lucky recollection of Brunck as the ornament and pride of critical
learning, and the pillar of national glory, remind me of my vene
rable friend, Dr. Parr's conversational attacks on the ^deChristians, as he called the men of Christ- Church. He once
encountered a clumsy specimen of jEde-Christian erudition iri
the shape of a student, who was more proud of the past glory of
his College, than emulous to exemplify in his own person its
living fame. The Doctor, after some smart displays of his pre
tended antipathies to the College, good-humoredly and playfully
allowed the Student ten minutes to name any very clever man,
who belonged to the Society; the youth modestly ventured to
name one such person, but the Doctor, to the great diversion of
the company, and the woful confusion of his pigmy antagonist,
replied that the scholar named found the impossibility of thriving
within the walls of that foundation on the nutriment sparingly
supplied there, and so was transferred to Oriel College, of
which he was then a Fellow ! On another occasion an jEdeChristian reposed, with great and conscious satisfaction, on the
xi
name of Dr. Cyril Jackson1 as a ' tower of strength,' and was

silenced by the inexorable Dr. Parr's remark, that he was a
rush-light, with no body of flame, but glimmering feebly amidst
surrounding darkness !
In a work more censured than read, a contributor has told the
following anecdote :" This seems to have been one of those
ebullitions of fancy, in which he indulged his wit at the expense,
if not of truth, at least of his more sober judgment. Hence it
was that under a similar mood, and to indulge this peculiarity of
character, he would give vent to his prejudices and partialities
about different Colleges. It was at a dinner-party at Dr. E.'s
that he said to the Rev. Thos. P., son of my venerable instructor,
the late Head-Master of the S. in B. :' Mr. P., give me leave
to ask of what College at Oxford you were a member ?' ' Of
Christ-Church, Sir.' (Now I have no doubt that Parr knew
this, but, he must have his joke.) * Of Christ-Church !'
(His eye-brows were lifted up, and displayed the ferocious indig
nity of an offended lion.) ' Then, Sir, let me tell you that I make
a point of persecuting that College, and all its members, with
the most unceasing and the most unrelenting asperity:' still
fastening his eyes upon him. I could not but look at him ; I saw
it was all play. Poor Mr. P. was in speechless terror. When
he had had his joke, and it was time to relax, he said :* But
come, Sir, notwithstanding this, I will drink a glass of wine with
you ; not, you dog, because you are of Christ-Church, but
because you are the son of that good man, your father, and he
was of Magdalen.' This was his favorite College, of which
his friend Routh is President." Parriana, or Notices of the
Rev. S. Parr, Edited by E. H. B. 1828. K.I. p. 321.
I know not that any apology is necessary for relieving the dry
ness of grammatical discussions by stepping aside to tell a few plea
sant stories. If the authority of a philosopher be required, I
1 " Although a superficial acquaintance with the productions of the Poet is no
rare attainment, there is little reason to doubt the correctness, with which the
eminent Dean Cyril Jackson, in a letter to PitoFESsoa Dai.zel, speaks of 1 the
few men, who understand Homer.' "
Sim V. K. Sakdi?oiu/s Tratidation o/Tiususui'g Gr. Or., Preface.
xii
would quote the following passage from James Harris's Philo

logical Inquiries, (fVorks 1801. V. 2. p. 462. 4to.,) which is not
without its interest in our own times :
" I shall quit the Greeks, after I have related a short narrative,
a narrative so far curious as it helps to prove that even among
the present Greeks in the day of servitude the remembrance of
their ancient glory is not yet totally extinct. When the late
Mr. Anson, (Lord Anson's brother,) was upon his travels into
the East, he hired a vessel to visit the Isle of Tenedos. His
pilot, an old Greek, as they were sailing along, said with some
satisfaction, There it was our fleet lay.' Mr. Anson de
manded ' what fleet?'

' What fleet!' replied the old man,
(a little piqued at the question,) ' why, our Grecian fleet at the
Siege of Troy ! ' This story was told the author by Mr. Anson
himself."
7. The Rev. E. V. Blomfield, whom death snatched too soon
from his useful and promising labors, conferred a great service
on the scholars of England by preparing a Translation of Mat
thias Greek Grammar, which it was reserved for his brother,
the present learned [Bishop of London, to publish. The work
has now passed into a fifth edition under the careful revisiori of
the Rev. John Kenrick, who holds a very distinguished place
among those Dissenters, who have aspired to classical know
ledge. The public have marked their sense of the excellence and
the utility of the work in a way not to be misunderstood ; but
yet with all its just fame, and its Author's merited celebrity, I am
not willing to concede to it the palm of decided superiority over
Buttmann's Larger and over his Complete Grammar, except in
the copiousness of syntactical matter ; but even here it may be
doubtful whether Buttmann does not in the particular points of
comparison, i. e. in those instances where there is a coincidence
of subject, write with more accuracy and precision, and with a
more philosophical and satisfactory spirit of investigation. His
reasonings, throughout his work, convince our judgment, recom
mended by their unsophisticated simplicity ; you pause not, as you
read, to consider whether his explanations are correct, but push
Xlii
forward simultaneously with his own mind, free from doubt and
difficulty ; he never overlays his subject with a mass of autho
rities, but is often content with a solitary, because striking exam
ple; you are never arrested by fanciful theories, which may
amuse idle curiosity, and exercise youthful ingenuity ; the table
spread before you exhibits a great variety of solid food for men,
but yet with nutritious dainties for tender stomachs ; there is no
ambitious display of learning in a multitude of references, but so
much is given, as each topic seems naturally to demand from an
intelligent pen, and even in cases, where he delivers his opinions
without the sanction of recorded criticism,the mere results of
his own individual observation, and unaided research,you feel
yourself in the presence of a master, to whose authority you are
ready to bow, because the reasons, on which he founds his opi
nions, are such as could have occurred only to one, who is well
qualified to decide on grammatical questions by the extent of his
acquirements, the profoundness of his views, the niceness of his
taste, the acuteness of his remarks, the soundness of his judgment,
the candor and impartiality, which pervade his mind, and the love
of truth, by which he is everywhere actuated without contending
for the palm of victory in ingenuity, or the triumph of argument
ation in discussion.
8. The pretensions, then, of this work entitle it to the careful
examination of all those Masters of Schools and Tutors, who
are anxious for the improvement of their pupils, and desirous to
march forward in the spirit of the times, improving and improved.
One serious objection to the universal use of Matthias Gram
mar, excellent as it is, is its large bulk, and its high price :
Students are perhaps often deterred from the examination of it by
its magnitude, and their finances frequently do not enable them to
purchase it. The book now offered to their notice combines the
opposite advantages, and will thus, it is presumed, be favorably
received alike by the Master and the Student.
E. H. Barker.
Thetford, Sept. 8, 1832,
Xiv
P. S. Ia concluding the Preface, the Editor would direct

attention to the following quotations :
1. Hiatus.
" The hiatus is avoided in every language. In Greek the
insertion of n removes the difficulty ; in Latin it is remedied by
the insertion of d in the middle, or at the end of words : thus
redeo for reeo, med for me. In French t is added : thus, a-t-il
for a-il, aime-t-il for aime-il ;thus also si-l'on for si-on. The
vulgar in this country, on the same principle, however inelegantly
and barbarously, insert r ;thus for Maria is come, they say
Maria-r is come,for / have no idea of it, they say / have no
idea-r of it. So abhorrent is the French language from the
hiatus, that in order to avoid it, it admits a solecism;thus,
instead of ma ame, it says mon ame,for sa ennemie, son ennemie.
So in English, mine eyes for my eyes."
Corrector, in the Metropolitan Magazine, May, 1832. p. 26.
II. Inchoatives, Inceptives ;
'EipExnxa, Desideratives, Meditatives.
" We pass from aorists to the inceptive tenses. These may be
found in part supplied, (like many other tenses,) by verbs auxiliar:
fiiXka [ypxQtiv, scripturus sum, ' / am going to write.' But the
Latins go farther, and have a species of verbs derived from
others, which do the duty of these tenses, and are themselves for
that reason called inchoatives or inceptives. Thus from caleo, ' I
am warm,'1 comes calesco, ' J begin to grow warm ;' from tumeo,
' I swell,' comes tumesco, ' I begin to swell.' These inchoative
verbs are so peculiarly appropriated to the beginnings of time,
that they are defective as to all tenses, which denote it in its com
pletion, and therefore have neither perfectum, plusquam-perfectum, nor perfect future,
" There is likewise a species ofverbs, called in Greek tysxrixi, in
Latin desiderativa, the ' desideratives' or ' meditatives,' which, if
they are not strictly inceptives, yet both in Greek and Latin have
XV
a near affinity with them : such are mXsiAiwniu, bellaturio, 'I have
a desire [to 'make war,' fipwazlco, esurio, 1 1 long to eat.' As all
beginnings have reference to what is future, hence we see how
properly these verbs are formed, the Greek ones from a future
verb, the Latin from a future participle. From mXeix-nau and
@pwoa> come iroXenTiatlco and jSquauu : from bellaturus and esurus
come bellaturio and esurio. See Macrobius, p. 691. ed. Var.
Plato Phced. Ou nam ys pie vuv S ye\aaelovra tTMWas yeXxaaa."
J. Harris's Hermes, {Works, 1801. 4to. V. I. p. 284.)
III. Intensive A\$a.
Dr. Lud. Doederlein has published a tract on this subject,
which I have had no opportunity of inspecting, or it would have
been noticed in the proper place, Commentatio cie"AX<p Intensivo
Sermonis Gr^ci, Erlang*, 1830.
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE

TO THE
Thirteenth Edition, published in 1829, at Berlin, in his lifetime.
This my Intermediate Greek Grammar is calculated for the

instruction of the more advanced Student.
Whatever requires a
deeper critical inquiry into the Greek language will be found in

my Complete Greek Orammar, which contains at length the
observations and arguments, which lead to the results stated
here ; but the Syntax of the Intermediate Orammar has been
particularly attended to and considerably enlarged in this thir
teenth Edition, because the Complete Grammar has, as yet, no
Syntax.
Several Grammatical points, which demand a more complete
elucidation, than is compatible with any Elementary Treatise, are
more fully elucidated in my Lexilogus or Contributions (Helps)
towards explaining Greek Expressions, and chiefly those used by
Homer and Hesiod, 1st and 2nd vol., to which Work the
Student is referred on several occasions.
Philip Buttmann.
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR
OF
Dr. PHILIP BUTTMANN,
WITU REMARKS OS HIS WRITINGS.
Doctor Philip Buttmann was born at Francfort on the Main,

on the 5th of December, 1764. He was christened Philip
Charles, and thus calls himself on the titles of some of his early
writings; but latterly called himself only Philip. His father,
Jacob Buttmann, a wholesale stationer at Francfort, was de
scended from French Protestant Refugees, who settled there
during the persecutions of Louis XIV, and whose French name
of Bocdemont was gradually changed by their German fellow
citizens into that of Buttmann. He received his first education
in the Grammar-School of his native city, which was under the
direction of the learned Purmann, but the rest of the Teachers
were greatly inferior to the Rector, and little calculated to inspire
their pupils with the love of learning. Young Buttmann's pre
dilection for the study of languages manifested itself, however,
at an early period. Independently of the French, Danish,
English, and Italian languages, he also applied himself to the
study of the Hebrew. This premature, and of course super
ficial acquaintance with seven or eight widely different languages
afforded to him the opportunity of observations and comparisons,
in which he was fond of indulging. In the spring of 1782,
Buttmann repaired to Gcettingen to study Philology under
Heyne. In 1786, he returned to Francfort, and went the same
year to visit his brother-in-law, Dr. Ehrmann, an eminent
b2
XX
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR
Physician at Strasbourg in Alsace, through whom he was intro

duced to the learned SchweighjEuser. His intercourse with
this celebrated man was of incalculable service to Buttmann.
Schweighjsuber was at that time editing his Polybius, and
availed himself of Buttmann's assistance. His university-friend,
Hugo, afterwards Professor at Gosttingen, had just then been
appointed Tutor to the Hereditary Prince of Anhalt Dessau.
It was at his recommendation that Buttmann left Strasbourg to
teach Geography and Statistics to the Prince. A residence of
eight months at Dessau introduced Buttmann to several men
of merit, and familiarised him still more to the manners of the
polite world. He employed his leisure-hours in reading the
ancients with the most particular attention, being constantly
guided by his favorite motto, Multum, non multa. He never left
any classical difficulty unresolved, but when he had thoroughly
convinced himself of the impossibility of solving it to his complete
satisfaction. On quitting Dessau, Buttmann in the spring of
the year 1788, took a journey to Berlin, where he formed the
most interesting connections with men like Teller, Biester,
Gedicke, Nicolai, and George Spalding. His stay at Berlin
had been so very agreeable, that after having again passed ten or
twelve months with his family atFRANCFORT, he gladly returned
to that city, having accepted the situation of an Extraordinary
Assistant Librarian to the Royal Library ; but, as his remu
neration was rather scanty, he saw himself forced to secure his
subsistence by private teaching, and by writing some of his first
Essays. It was in 1792, that he published his short Greek
Grammar on the plan of Gedicke's Latin and French SchoolGrammars, which is at its twenty-sixth edition in Germany, and
which has been translated into English in America by Pro
fessor Anthon. He now ardently devoted himself to the study
of the Greek language and literature. He read the Greek
Authors over again in company with George Spalding, the
lamented University-friend of the English Translator of
Buttmann's Intermediate Greek Grammar, which we are offer
ing to the English public. In 1796, Buttmann was appointed
OF DR. PHILIP BUTTMANN.
Xxi
Secretary to the Royal Library at Berlin, and in 1800, accepted

the additional appointment of a Professor at the principal Gram
mar-School of that city, called the Joachimthalsche-Gymnasium.
He contributed several Essays to the Berlin Literary Journal,
edited by Biester, entitled Berlinische Monaths Schrift. As a
Fellow of the then existing Philomathic Society at Berlin, he was
induced to write his short Mythological Essays. His Biography
of himself was inserted, in the year 1806, in the third No. of a
periodical work, edited by I. Lowe, entitled Portraits of the now
Living Learned Men of Berlin, with their Lives written by them
selves. In the same year, 1806, Buttmann became a Member
of the Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin, and was shortly
after appointed Secretary to its Historico-Philological Class.
From 1803, to 1811, he was the Editor of the Berlin- Gazette,
published by Haude and SrENER. As a member of the Royal
Academy, he was one of the first Professors of the new BerlinUniversity ; he had resigned the Professorship of the Joachimthalsche Grammar-School in 1808. It was also about this time
that he was selected to instruct the Prince Royal of Prussia
in the Greek and Latin languages. In 1821, he was appointed
Librarian to the Royal Library, and was successively elected
a Member of the Academies of Munich, Naples, and Moscow ;
and in 1824, the King of Prussia conferred on him the dis
tinction of a Knight of the Prussian Red EagTk of the third
Class.
Buttmann had married at Berlin in 1800, the eldest daughter
of the Privy Counsellor Selle, Physician to the King. His
ardent attachment to ancient Greece induced him to give Greek
names to his children. One of his daughters was called Helen,
and Hector and Achilles were the names of his sons. The
loss of a beloved grown-up daughter in 1820, gave the first
shock to his constitution, which had been uncommonly healthy
and robust till that unfortunate moment. Repeated strokes of
apoplexy, with which he began to be afflicted in 1824, under
mined it gradually, and he died early in the morning of the
21st of June, 1829, in his sixty-fifth year. Dr. Sciilkikrmacher
xxii
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR
pronounced a Funeral Oration over his grave on the 23d of the

same month.
Buttmann is one of the most distinguished Philologists of
modern times. With the most extensive reading he combined
the utmost sagacity, clearness, and conciseness. His Gram
matical writings are in the hands of all scholars, and have been
introduced into all those schools, which are really anxious to
adopt the best methods of teaching the ancient languages. The
Greek School-Grammar, which Buttmann first published in
1792, having been continually improved, assumed at last the form
of an Intermediate Grammar for the more advanced scholar.
This Intermediate Grammar had already reached the eighth edi
tion in 1818, and the thirteenth in 1829. It is from the latter
edition that the present English Translation is made. The
German original is indebted for the constant and general appro
bation, with which it has met, to the circumstance that it traces
the elements of the Greek language historically, clears them up
with great sagacity, and reduces them to a beautiful philosophical
order, as far as this can be accomplished with regard to a lan
guage spoken by so many different tribes, and improved at periods
widely distant from each other.
When Buttmann found his Grammatical observations accumu
lated to an extent beyond that, which he thought calculated for the
more advanced student, he resolved to embody them in a more
elaborate work, which he entitled A Complete. Greek Grammar,
(Ausf Uhrliche Griechische Sprachlehre.) The first Volume was
published at Berlin in 1819 ; the first Part of the Second Volume
in 1825, and the second Part of the same Volume in 1827. Had
his life been spared a few years longer, he would have added a
copious Syntax to his historical researches, and critical explana
tions of the most important Grammatical points. It was with
the same view that he published what he thought exceeding the
limits of school-books in his Lexilogus or Contributions to the
Explanation of Greek Expressions chiefly in Homer and Hesiod,
1 vol., Berlin, 1818, 1824 ; 2nd. vol. 1825.
OF DR. PHILIP BUTTMANN.
xxiii
The learned world is also indebted to Buttmann for

1.) A new edition (1811,) of Four Dialogues of Plato, origi
nally published by Biester ;
2. ) Tbe Fourth Volume of the edition (1816) of QuintUian's
Institutions, edited by the late George Spalding, which had
been interrupted by Spalding's premature death in 1811 ;
3.) The enlarged and much improved reprint (1821,) of the
Scholia of the Odyssea discovered by Maio ;
4. ) Several of the best Essays in Wolf's Museum ofArchaeology,
(1st vol., No. 1., 1807,) and in Wolf's Museum Antiquilatis,
(vol. 1. Fasc. 1., 1808. Fasc. 2., 1811.)
Of Buttmann's smaller writings, which were mostly produced
by his being a Member of the Berlin Royal Academy of
Sciences, we will only mention :
5. ) TIte most Ancient Geography of the East, a Biblico-Philological Essay, with a Map, Berlin, 1803,
6. ) The two first Narratives (Mythen) of the Mosaic History,
1804,
7. ) The Fable (Mythus) of Heracles, 1810,
8.) The Narrative (Mythus) of the Deluge, 1 812, 2nd edition,
1819.
9. ) The Fable o/Cydippe, 1815,
10.) The Mythical Period from Cain to the Deluge, 1811,
11.) The Necessity of the Warlike Constitution of Europe,
1805.
An hypothesis of the celebrated Hirt, concerning the Historian
Quintus Curtius, induced Buttmann, in 1820, to publish a
short Essay on the Life of Quintus Curtius Rufus.
The sagacious views, and elegant urbanity, which distinguish
all these writings, are striking proofs that Grammatical and
Archaeological studies are not destructive of genius, and perfectly
compatible with native wit. It is true that Buttmann combined
the most opposite talents. His conception was slow ; but this
very circumstance induced him never to relinquish any subject,
which he was investigating, before he had considered it in all its
XXIV
BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR.
bearings, and mastered it to his entire satisfaction ; and his un

common sagacity made him discover in whatever was the object
of his study, something which had not been discovered before.
In all the relations of life he was most amiable ; and though his
ready wit would frequently betray him into sarcastic remarks, his
sarcasms never proved offensive ; they were always tempered by
his extreme good-nature, and indulgent disposition. His last
literary labor was the editing of a Complete Collection of his
Mythological Essays in 2 vols., under the title of Buttmann's
Mythologus.
D. BoiLEAU.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
1. Of the Greek Language, and its Dialects in general.

2. Of the Letters of the Alphabet.
$ 35. Of their Pronunciation ; (Diphthongs ; Iota Subscriptum.)
J 6. Spiritus ; (Digamma.)
$ 7. Prosody.
814. Accents.
15. Punctuation.
16. Interchange of Letters.
1625. Change of Consonants ; 17,18. Aspirates.
1925. Cumulation of Consonants.
26. Moveable final Letters; ( ifix*iwnxw.)
J 27, 28. Change of Vowels and Contraction.
29, 30. Hiatus; Crasis; Apostrophus.
31. Parts of Speech.
Of the Noun.
32. Gender.
33. Declensions.
34. First Declension.
3537. Second Declension ; Contracta; Attic leeond Declension.
38. Third Declension.
38. Gender; 3942. Inflection; 43. Paradigms.
44. Accus. Sing. ; 45. Vocative; 46. Dative Plural.
47. Syncope of some Nouns in *(.
4855. Contracted (third) Declension ; Attic Genitive, &c.
56. Anomalous Declension ; Heteroclita; Metaplasmus, &c.
(Final Syllable $>,, 56. 04s. 9.)
57. Defectiva; Indeclinabilia, &c.
58. List of Irregular Nouns.
59. Adjectives.
6569. Degrees of Comparison, (Gradus Comparationis.)
70, 71. Numerals.
72. Pronouns, and 75. Articles.
78, 79. Pronomina et Adjectiva Correlativa.
80. Annexes; i demonstrativum.
c
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Of the Verb.
{ 81. Of the Greek Verb in general ; Division of Tenses; (Principal and
Historical Tenses.)
8286. Augment.
87. Numbers and Persons.
88. Moods and Participles.
89. Activum ; Passivum ; Medium.
9092. Tenses, Characteristic ; Double Themes: (seealso J 111. 112.)
93. Formation of the Tenses.
$ 95. Futurum Act.
96. Aoristus 1 et 2 Act.
$ 97. Perfectum 1 et 2.
J 98. Perfectum Passivi.
99. Futurum 3.
$ 100. Aoristus 1 et 2 Pass.
$ 101. Verbs in x, /*, , {.
102. Verbal Adjectives in t!{ and V.
$ 103. Verbum Barytonon ; Paradigm rurru : Paradigms of other Verbs;
Paradigm iyyi^M : Remarks on all the Paradigms.
104. Tenses in use, and not in use.
J 105. Contracted Conjugation.
Irregular Conjugation.
106, 107. Verbs in
108. "ltlfU,rHfuu,EnvfulEl/<u,?Zfii.
109. *tifu, KiT/uu, OTSa, Clrnfu.)
110113. Anomaly of Verbs; Double Themes; Syncopated Forms;
Metathesis.
113. Anomaly of Signification ; Causativa et Immediativa.
114. List of Irregular Verbs.
115. Particles and their Degrees of Comparison.
116. ParliculcB Correlatives ; $ 117. Anastrophe.
7
1 18, 1 19. Formation of Words by Terminations, (I. Verbs, II. Substan
tives, III. Adjectives, IV. Adverbs.)
121. Compound Words.
Syntax.
122. General View ; $ 123. of the Noun.
124 127. Article and Pronouns.
128. Neuter of the Adjectives in general.
129. Subject and Predicate.
$
J
$
$
$
TABLE OF CONTENTS'.
130.
J
$
$
}
$
xxvii
Object; Casus Obliqui ; 131. Accus.; $ 132. Genitive;

$ 133. Dative.
134. Verbum Passivum ; (Verbal Adjectives in tin and s.)
135, 136. Medium.
137, 138. Tenses; v 138. Futurum 3.
139. Moods ; Particles ,
and others.
140142. Infinitive; Attraction.
143. Construction with the Relative, and its Attraction.
144. Construction with the Participle ; 145. Casus Absoluii.
146. Particles ; $ 147. Prepositions.
148. Negative Particles ; 149. Expletives, &c.
150. Peculiar Phrases.
151. Particular Constructions ; I. Attraction, II. Anacoluthon, III. In
version, IV. Ellipsis.
APPENDIX.
Lists of Words, &c. for Declination.
Technical Grammatical Terms in Greek.
Abbreviations.
INDEX.
English and Latin.
Greek.
GREEK
GRAMMAR.
I.Of the Greek Language, and its Dialects in general.

1. The Greek Language, (ipwv^ *Exxivixy],) was anciently spoken,
not only in Greece, but also in a considerable part of Asia Minor,
the south of Italy, Sicily, and the Greek colonies of other coun
tries. Like all languages, it had several dialects, (SiaXsxToi,) redu
cible, however, to two principal ones, the Doric, (v Awgixî, Aupls,)
and the Ionic, (v 'Icuvixi, 'Iar,) spoken by the two chief Greek
tribes, the Dorians and Ionians.
2. The Dorians were the most considerable tribe, and founded
the greatest number of colonies ; hence the Doric dialect prevailed
in the whole interior of Greece, in Italy, and Sicily. It was harsh ;
the long a., which was prominent in it, (see 27. Obs. 5.) made on
the ear an impression called by the Greeks vXxTiHx.ay.os, (broad
pronunciation ;) and the Doric dialect was, on the whole, the
least improved. The iEolic dialect, (i Aioîx^, Alo\U,) a col
lateral branch of the Doric, early attained in the /Eolian colo
nies of Asia Minor, and the neighbouring islands,(Lesbos, &c.)
a considerable degree of refinement, which probably was confined
to poetry.
3. The Ionians resided in earlier times chiefly in Attica, whence
they sent colonies to the coasts of Asia Minor. As these were
in many respects highly civilised prior to the parent tribe, nay
even sooner than all the other Greeks, the denomination of Ionians
and Ionic applied principally, and at length exclusively to these
colonies and their idiom : and the original Ionians in Attica
itself were called Attics, A thenians. The Ionic dialect, owing to
the accumulation of vowels, is the softest of all. But the Attic
dialect, (rt 'Arnxri, 'ArSls,) which was of later improvement, soon
B
OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE,
excelled in refinement all the other Greek dialects, by avoiding,

with Attic ingenuity, both the Doric harshness, and the Ionic
softness. But though the Athenians really are the parent tribe,
the Ionic dialect of the Asiatic colonies is yet considered as the
parent of the Attic dialect, because it was improved at a period,
when it had least deviated from the primitive Ionic dialect, the
common parent of both.
Obi. 1. The ingenuity of the Attic dialect is most apparent in syntax, with
regard to which it distinguishtis itself, not only from all the other Greek dialects,
but also from any other language, by an appropriate conciseness, a highly effective
co-ordination of the principal thoughts, and a certain moderation in asserting and
discussing, which had passed from the refined tone of the social intercourse of
Athens into the language itself.
Obi. 2. Of other collateral branches of the mentioned dialects, as the Bceotic, the
Laconic, and the Thessalic, &c, we hare only solitary words and grammatical
forms in scattered fragments, inscriptions, &c.
4. We must admit, as the parent of all the Greek dialects, an
ancient primitive Greek language, of which philosophical gram
matical inquiries alone may discover or rather conjecture some
traces. Each dialect had naturally retained more or less of this
ancient language, and each must also undoubtedly have preserved
something, which had gradually been lost in the other dialects.
This circumstance obviously accounts for grammarians tracing
Dorisms, jEolisms, and even Atticisms in the old Ionian Homer.
Whatever was of habitual or frequent occurrence in one dialect,
was exclusively ascribed to this dialect, and designated accord
ingly, even if it likewise occurred, though less frequently, in other
dialects. It is thus, for instance, that we must understand what
are called Dorisms in Attic writers, and Atticisms in writers, who
are not Attics \
5. Most poetical forms and licences spring from this ancient
language. The poet, it is true, improves his idiom, and through
him only it becomes a polished language, forming a harmonious,
expressive, and copious whole. Yet the poet never originates the
changes and innovations, which he finds necessary; this would
be the surest way to displease. The oldest Greek bards selected,
out of the manifold extant forms of speech, those which best
suited them. Several of these forms became antiquated in prac1 Ex. gr. the Doric fut. ttvpxi, lâi, the Attic declension us, the Attic ?w
for ch, &c.
AND ITS DIALECTS IN GENERAL.
tice ; but the later poet, having these predecessors before him,
would not be debarred from such treasures, and thus what had
been originally a real dialect, and is justly considered as such,
became a poetical peculiarity, or what is called a poetical
licence s.
6. In all civilised nations one of their dialects generally becomes
the foundation of their common written language, and the lan
guage of polished society. This was not immediately the case
with the Greeks. They became civilised, when they still formed
distinct locally and politically separated states. Nearly up to the
time of Alexander, the Greeks wrote in the dialect, in which they
had been brought up, or to which they were most partial ; and
thus arose Ionic, MoYic, Doric, and Attic poets and prose-writers,
whose works are more or less extant.
Obi. 3. Only great works, which attracted general attention, as epic and dramatic
poems, formed an exception. Their authors unquestionably wrote in the dialect of
their country ; but an imitation of them in another dialect, which, besides, would
have required an almost equal creative talent, would not have been well received,
because all the tribes of Greeks were already familiarised to the language proper
for this species of composition, and could not separate one from the other. The
dialect, in which the first masterpieces of any species of writing were composed,
continued to be the dialect of that species. (See the Text, 10. II.)
Obs. 4. The most ancient poets, Homer, Hesiod, Theognis, and others, wrote in
the Ionic dialect; but their language is rather that apparently mixed one, which
comes nearer to the oldest language, and afterwards continued to be the poetical
dialect used in most species of poetry. The real, but more modern Ionic dialect is
to be found in the prose-writers, of whom Herodotus and Hippocrates are the most
conspicuous, though both Dorians by origin. The Ionic dialect, owing to its pectt*
liar softness and early improvement, had already become pretty general, even iu
prose, especially in Asia Minor.
Obi. 5. The lyrics are the only poets of that time, who wrote in all the dialects.
Bnt the oldest and most celebrated of them were jEoKanS ; at their head are
Sappho and Alcseus, of whom some few scanty remains have been handed down to
ns in fragments. Anacreo, (of whom we have also but a few, partly crippled, and
partly questionable, remains,) wrote in the Ionic dialect. Most of the other lyrio,
poets wrote in the Doric dialect; out of the manifold forms of this widely diffused
dialect, they selected those which suited them, and created, as it were, each his own
! But this must not be understood, as if every expression of the ancient poet*
had actually been once in common use. The privilege which, even in the most
copious language, a modern poet enjoys of forming new words, and giving new
inflections to the existing ones, must have been still more largely allowed to the
ancient poets, at a time when the language was poor. The materials, however, out
of which, and the form according to which, he models his expressions, are not of
the poet's creation, but derived from the stock, and conformable to the analogy of
the language. Neither can a slight polishing of the usual forms, practised in com
mon life even by ordinary men, be denied to him, to whom harmony is a duty, and
rhythmical metre a chain.
B 2
language. Pindar is the only one of these latter, of whom we have some entire
poems.
Obt. 6. The few prose-writings, which we have in the Doric dialect, are mostly on
mathematical and philosophical subjects. With regard to Attic writers, see the
following Obitrvaliom.
7. In the mean time Athens rose to such a political height,
that it maintained for a while a kind of supremacy over all Greece,
and became the centre of all scientific culture. The democratic
constitution, nowhere so unmixed, introduced to the Attic forum,
and the Attic stage, that freedom of speech, which, in con
nection with other advantages, was alone sufficient to raise, not
only these branches of literature, but also those congenial ones,
history and philosophy, to the highest pitch, and impart to the
Attic idiom a perfection and capaciousness, which no other dialect
attained.
Obi. 7. The most distinguished prose-writers of Greece, (we treat separately of
its poets,) of this golden age of Attic literature, are Thucydides, Xenopho, Plato,
Lysias, Isocrates, Demosthenes, and the other orators.
8. Greeks of all tribes repaired to Athens for improvement ;
and Attic masterpieces served as models in the most extensive
fields of literature. The consequence was that the Attic dialect,
which maintained its pre-eminence over all others, became soon
after, when Greece acquired a complete political unity under the
Macedonian monarchs, the court-language and the general lan
guage of books, in which the prose-writers of all the Greek tribes
and countries composed almost exclusively. This language was
now taught in schools, and grammarians pronounced, according
to these Attic models, on what was genuine, or not genuine Attic.
The central point of this later Greek literature was under the
Ptolemies at Alexandria in Egypt.
9. But in proportion as the Attic dialect became general, it
naturally also began gradually to degenerate, partly because
authors indulged in an admixture of their own provincial dialects,
and partly because they substituted for anomalies and apparently
affected expressions peculiar to the Athenians, more regular and
natural ones, or introduced, instead of a simple term more or less
obsolete in common life, a derivative one, which was now more
generally used8. Grammarians, however, (this class of them
are called Atticists,) often endeavoured, with much pedantry and
* Ex, $r, wi#ir9<n for tut, ' to swim ;' i(tr(ift for fym, ' to plough.'
exaggeration, to prevent this, and in their schoolbooks contrasted

the expressions of the old Attic writers with those, which they
criticised as faulty or less elegant. Thus arose the practice of
calling Attic only the language found in the old Attic writers, and,
in a more restricted sense, the peculiarities of those authors ; the
usual language of persons of education, which was an offspring of
the Attic, was now called xoiv^, the general language, or'Exx.*wx^,
(the Greek, i. e., the common Greek ;) even the writers of later
times were denominated ol xoivol, or ot'EWmst, in contradistinction
to the genuine Attics. But this never can be considered as a parti
cular dialect; for the xoivrj SiaXtxror continued in the main to be
Attic, and hence Atticism is the principal object of every Greek
Grammar.
Obs. 8. It may easily be conceived that in these circumstances, the denomina
tion xmtif, tunh, was considered as imputing something faulty, and though it pro
perly denotes ' the language common to all Greeks, not excluding genuine Attics,' it
rather denoted, with grammarians, ' a language which was not genuine Attic' On
the other hand, all which is called Attic, is not on that account exclusively of Attic
form, not even in genuine Attic writers. Many an Attic locution was not in con
stant general use, even at Athens, but alternated with other forms, (ex. gr. fikci'n
with piXr, g with ri,) which were generally used. Neither were the Athenians
strangers to many Ionic forms, (ex. gr. not contracted, instead of contracted ones,)
which therefore might be employed by authors, who all consulted the ear. This
approximation to Ionism, is the principal criterion of strictly ancient Atticism, such
as we find in Thucydides ; but Demosthenes wrote that later Attic, which forms
the transition to the more modern xm.
Obs. 9. To make an accurate and proper division, we must commence the more"
modern period, or the xantit, with the first non-Athenian, who wrote Attic. Of
this class are Aristotle, Theophrastus, Polybius, Diodorus, Plutarch, and the other
later authors, many of whom endeavoured, however, to excel, as much as possible,
in the old Attic language. This is especially the case with Lucian, ./Elian, and
Arrian.
Obs. 10. Of the provincial dialects, which crept into the later Greek language,
the Macedonian is the principal. The Macedonians were a kindred nation of the
Greeks, accounted themselves Dorians, and carried as conquerors Greek civilisation
into the barbarian countries, over which tney ruled. In these countries Greek was
now spoken and written, but not witnoHt an admixture of peculiarities, which the
grammarians style Macedonian forms; and as the seat of this later Greek culture
was chiefly in Egypt, at Alexandria, its capital, the same forms are likewise deno
minated the Alexandrian dialect. But the inhabitants of these countries, who were
not Greeks, now also began to speak Greek, (,Exa.ii>ig>)) and an Asiatic, Syrian,
&c., who spoke Greek, was called 'EXP.wrn's. Thus originated the practice of deno
minating Hellenistic the language, which is mixed with several forms not Greek,
and contains turns of expression peculiar to the East. This language is chiefly met
with in the written Jewish and Christian monuments of that period, especially in
the Greek translation of the Old Testament by the LXX. translators, and in the
New Testament, whence it passed more or less into the works of the Fathers of the
Church. New barbarisms of all kinds crept into this language in the middle age,
when Constantinople, the ancient Byzantium, vw the seat of the Greek empire,
and the centre of the literature of that time ; hence arose the language of the Byzanfine writers, and lastly the Modern Greet.
10. Rut the Attic dialect was not general with regard to poetry ;
the Athenians were models only in one species, the dramatic ;
and as dramatic poetry from its nature merely is, even in tragedy,
the ennobled language of real life, no other dialect reigned on
the Athenian stage than the Attic, which was in the sequel re
tained by all the other Greek theatres 4. In the dialogued part
of the drama, and especially in that which consisted of Trimetries
or Senaries, poets, though indulging in the frequent use of the
apostrophus, and of contractions, allowed themselves but few
poetical licences and changes of forms.
Obs. 11. These licences least indulged in were, as maybe supposed, by comic
writers ? but many a Homeric form would suit the tragic Senary. Of the Greek
dramatists none have been handed down to us but genuine and old Attic writers,
viz. the tragic poets, yEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and the comic poet Ari
stophanes.
11. Homer and the other ancient Ionic poets, whose works
were read in schools, continued uninterruptedly to be models for
all other species of poems, especially those composed in hexametres, the epic, didactic, and elegiac ; and through these poems
the old Ionic or Homeric idiom was preserved with all its pecu
liarities, and antiquated forms. It thus became what the Attic
was for prose-writers, the prevailing dialect or general language
for epic, didactic, and elegiac poetry in the Alexandrian period
and at a later time, when it was no longer readily intelligible to
the common people, and required a learned education to be
completely understood and relished. This language may be
denominated the Epic idiom, as it was derived entirely from epic
poetry.
Obi. 12. The most eminent poets of this class in the Alexandrian period, are
Apollonius, Callimachus, Aratus ; and later, Nicander, Oppian, Quintus, and others.
12. But the Doric dialect was by no means excluded from
poetry even in later times. It maintained itself in light and
especially rural and jocose poetry, partly because there were
predecessors in this line, and probably also because several of
these poems describe the manners and expressions of country See Obi. 3.
people and of the lower ranks, whose language, owing to the

almost general dispersion of the Dorians, was nearly everywhere
the Doric. (Compare above 2.)
OA*. 13. Hence the Doric dialect prevails in the Bucolic writers, Theocritus,
Moschus, and Bio, whose more modern Dorism is, however, greatly different from
that of Pindar. The old epigrams were partly in the Ionic, and partly in the Doric
dialect ; but the Dorism in this species of poetry was far simpler and nobler, and
confined to a small number of characteristic Doric forms, which were familiar to
the well-informed poets of every tribe.
13. The idiom, which prevails in the lyric parts of the drama,
i. e., in choruses and pathetic speeches, is also usually called
Doric, but this Dorism consisted almost entirely in the prevalence
of the a long, especially in lieu of n, which was peculiar to theold language in general, and, on account of its gravity, maintained
itself in solemn hymns, whilst the Dorians alone retained, it .in
common life 5. But this lyric language also approximated to the
epic in several respects.
8 See par. 2. There are, however, no Dorisms properly so called in the theatri
cal choruses, as infin. ending In m and , accus. pi. in us and , &c
FIRST PART.
GRAMMATICAL
FORMS.
WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION.
2.Alphabetical Letters.
The Greeks received most of their letters from the Phenicians ;
this is evident from the oriental names, by which they are called.
They are the following :
PRONOUNCED
NAMED
alpha
a, aw
A
a
Brirx
beta
b,
a c
B
gamma
v r
r
&
d,
delta
AeXtoe
e, a short
*E ^.Xov epsilon 1
E
G
Ztjto;
zeta
ds,
Z
?
n
e, a long
"Hrcc
eta
H
ijTSI
theta
th,
0
M
'luiTZ
iota, (notjota,)
i, ee
I
i
Kiwt
cappa
K
k,
K
Ao/a/So* lambda
\
I.
A
MO
m,
my
M
Nu
N
V
a,
ny
xi
x,
E
S7
I
*0 /jiixphv omicron, (short 0,)
o short
O
0
nr
Pi
it,
vs
n
P
Ps
r, rh
rho
p
2, C a, i
8,
sigma
Tau
T
t,
tau
V
U, 00
T
ypsilon 1
<Dr
f,
phi
X
xr
ch,
chi
X
*
*r
ps,
psi
01
o long
n
omega, (long 0.)
1 *E îX> and T ^<Xo> take the additional îXii, that is tene, not aspirate, because
in ancient Greek writings the figure 1 was at the same time one of the marks of the
PRONUNCIATION.
Obi. 1. The double way of writing some letters, is used indiscriminately, except
the small e and i : a stands only in the beginning and in the middle of a word, and
t is employed merely at the end8: this s must not be confounded with ?, see the
following Obs.
Obi. 2. These letters have given rise to a number of abbreviations and flourishes,
many of which occupy more space than the common character, which they are to
supply. Hence they have been rarely employed of late, and there is little difficulty
to be encountered in modern editions, in remembering that
h stands for tu
for is
r* for trr
for r3
^ for e%
^ for ).
In some the letters are but little altered, as of, J, for mi, xai, ^ for xx, &c.
Obi. 3. The Greeks employed their alphabetical letters also as numerals ; but to
have a sufficiency of them, inserted after the t the r, after the * the and after
the u the 3 *. All letters when used as numerals, are distinguished by a stroke at
the top in this manner: ' 1, g 2, 6, { 10, ul 11, x' 20,
26, 100, </ 200,
rX/3' 232, &c. The thousands begin again with , but with a stroke underneath,
a 1000, /3, &c, X0' 2232.
3.Pronunciation.
1. The ancient pronunciation can no longer be accurately ascer
tained. Of the modern ways of pronouncing the Greek, the two
principal are those of Reuchlin and Erasmus. We follow the
latter, which not only is becoming more general every day, but
also has most internal grounds in its favor, and is greatly con
firmed by the way in which Greek names and words are written
by the Latins, and Latin ones by the Greeks. Reuchlin's pronun
ciation agrees chiefly with the pronunciation of the modern Greeks,
who persist in defending it as the true and ancient way of pro
nouncing the Greek.
Obs. 1. The manner of writing Greek with Latin characters may be seen in the
names of the letters, which we have given above in Latin characters, and may be
learned from what is stated in this section, and in 5 and 6. According to Reuch
lin's pronunciation, the is sounded like i, ee, the diphthong au like ce, and the
sounds ii, ii, v, and vi are not distinguished from i : the u in all diphthongs, (except
v,) is pronounced like v or f, as airit, aftos, Ziuc, Zeus. This pronunciation appears
to be really built in the main on ancient pronunciation ; but never can have been
the pronunciation of the prevailing dialect. This is unquestionably evident from
the manner, in which the Greeks wrote Latin words and names : eiiCn, Thebe, Pomspiritut atper, (h,) and v represented also the Digamma, (or Latin V, see 6. Obs. 3.)
The epithet \f-iX was intended to distinguish them, when they were mere vowels,
from the Bigns of aspiration.
1 With some moderns also at the end of syllables: this practice, when it goes
beyond the usual compounds, cum encliticis, and with wjif, n'f, if, and perhaps )vf,
offers great difficulties.
* This character or flourish is called sti, and sometimes also stigma.
* These three numerical characters, of which the first r agrees only accidentally
with the modern abbreviation r, were originally letters of an antiquated alphabet.
10
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
pejut, Vcfurvias, C/audiia, KXi!3/. Were the modern way of pronouncing the m
like i correct, the Latins could not have made Pozat of Ylnixt, or the Greeks KkuXia
of Ciotlia; and even Kxtiixm, K*irn(, for Citcilius, Cmtar, &c, is not decisive in liehalf of <b for m, as we have no positive information respecting the pronunciation of
the Latin diphthongs. As this method of pronouncing assimilates so many sounds
to that of the iota, it is called iolaciimw, (or, from ita for eta,) itacismui ; that of
Erasmus is called etaciamus.
2. With regard to some letters, it may be observed that
7 before another y, and before the other dentals, (x, ^. ?>) is pro
nounced like ng, ex. gr. syyvs, eng-gus, (or like the Latin
angustus,) avyxpiais, syncrisis ; 'Ayytfons, Anchises ; 2(p!yJ;,
Sphinx
must not be pronounced like ts, but like ds, or the French z, dz.
In the ancient language it was sounded sd *.
m is by some constantly pronounced like <b. It is barely possible
that it was pronounced as ce or 6 according as it was derived
from a. or e.
& is generally not distinguished from r : but among the ancients
it belonged to the aspirate, and is still pronounced lisping by
the modern Greeks, like the English th.
i is merely the i vowel, not the j consonant ; and Sa/AjSor, 'lewta
must therefore be pronounced i-ambos, I-onia. Yet the
Greeks employed it in foreign names for the j : for instance
'lovXios, Julius; ITojUOTjior, Pompejus.
x is always expressed in Latin even before e and i by a c, and the
Latin c is constantly ax in the Greek ; for instance Kfatw,
Cimo, Cicero, Ktxipuv, because the Romans pronounced
the c before all vowels like a x.
v. See its pronunciation at the end of words, 25, 06s. 4.
g. See about its aspiration p (rh,) 6, 3.
a in general may be pronounced like the French q with e> cedille,
or like a sharp s.
t before i with another vowel must not be pronounced like a z as
in Latin. Say YaXxrla, Galalia, not Galazia. Kpirlas,
Critics, TegEvrioy, Terentius.
v was in modern times long pronounced like (, but it is well as
certained that the Greeks and the Latins, who made it a y,
pronounced it like the French w. In Latin names it fre' In all these cases the Latin n has the pronunciation of ng : from an inveterate
mistake we say An-chites instead of Ang-chisea.
* This sound with the progress of time became much softer, resembling the
French z ; the modem Greeks still pronounce it in this way.
DIVISION OP THE LETTERS.
11
quently supplies the short w, which was wanting in Greek ;

for instance 'Poi/a6\os, Romulus. Compare 4. Obs. 3.
a/Sioy, Fabius,) yet the Latins never used their /for Greek words with
a (p, but always wrote ph. Hence it is evident that we are
ignorant of the exact pronunciation either of the Latin f, or
the Greek tp, ph, and the case is the same with %, ch.
(Compare the following .)
4.Division of the Letters.
1. The letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants ; the
former are again subdivided according to their quantity. See 7.
2. We must first detach from the consonants the three double
letters, %{/,
, each of which represents two letters, for which
there is but one sign or character in writing. See about them
22. ; and about , 3.
3. Simple Consonants are divided
a) according to the organs, with which they are pronounced ;
/3, n, <p, n, are labials,
5, r, &, v, X, p, a, Unguals,
y, k, x> palatals :
b) according to their properties ,
1. ) Semivowels, viz.
liquids
.
.
.
"K,y.,v,p.
the simple hissing sound . a.
2.) Mutes, viz.
aspirates, aspirates
.
<p, %, &.
media, medials
.
. & y, 5.
tenues, softs
. ,
v, x, r.
Hence it appears that each organ has the three mutes, and that
these nine consonants placed in this way
1 In this division, as well as in other grammatical matters, it is proper to adhere
to the Latin denominations, which are, as it were, proper names. The ancients
found in the humming and hissing of the letters /, m, n, r, s, a transition to the
vowels, and therefore called them semi-vowels; and the first four were named
liquids on account of their mobility and easily combining with other letters. They
denominated all the other consonants mules in contradistinction to the vowels. Of
these mules, those which are attended with an aspiration, appeared to have a kind
of thickness or roughness, (Sari,) which was not perceivable in three of them j
which on that account were called thin, soft, or smooth, (^tkx, tenues,) and the three
media, medials, certainly stand ill the middle between the two former.
12
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
P X *
0 v 5
It X T
correspond lo each other in both directions, horizontal and per
pendicular.
3. Of the liquid consonants, /a, v, are nasal sounds belonging
to the two first organs ; the y before another palatal consonant
being attended with a nasal sound, is the same for the third organ,
( 3, 2.) as may be seen on comparing syllabic combinations like
EpLTTCC EVTa EyXCt.
There are thus in each organ four letters, which correspond one
to another ; the lingual organ alone, owing to the greater mobi
lity of the foretongue, and to the operation of the teeth, has a few
sounds more ; in Greek X, g, a.
4. No genuine Greek word can end in any consonant but one
of the three semivowels, a, v, p , for and \J> belong to the a. Only
ex and owe constitute an exception ; but they can be used in this
form merely before other words, with which they coalesce in pro
nunciation. (See 26.)
5.Diphthongs.
1. The ancient pronunciation of the Greek diphthongs is far
from having been ascertained ; hence we pronounce most of them
separately or distinctly but in one syllable. The manner, in which
they were rendered by the Latins, will appear from the following
examples :
ai pronounced ai, <ba.l$pof, Faidros, Phcedrus.
c
ei, NsTXof, Neilos, Nilus ; Ac/xeTov, Lukeion,

Lyceum.
oi
6i, BoiaiTt'aj Boiotia, Boeotia.

ui
ui, (like the French ui or tty in lui, tuyau.)

E'ttefovia, Eileithuia, Ilithyia.
au
au, rXauxor, Glaukos, Glaucus,

eu
1
eu EJgor, Euros, Eurus
riu
j
' r>v%ov, (from auu,) euxon.
ou
u, (oo) Moura, Musa, Mnsa. (long u.)

av is merely Ionic, for instance covtos, outos.
1 Whenever a vowel follows iv and , it is now usually written in Latin with a
v, as Ebai, Evan, 'AyaOti, Agave, and pronounced accordingly. This evidently is a
remnant of Reuchlin'a pronunciation ; but is incorrect. We ought to write and
pronounce in Latin Agaue and Euan.
SPIRITUS, BREATHING.
13
04*. 1. Bat the Latins are not steady in their manner of writing the diphthong
ii, as is proved by their writing 'Ifiyinm, Iphigenia, MijJuo, Medea, 'HfaxXnrn;, Heraclilut, nakvx*.u<ris, Polyclettu. Some few words in cut, im, undergo no change in
Latin, excepting' that the i vowel is changed into the / consonant : M/, 'A^/>
TftU, Maja, Achaja, Troj'a.
2. The improper diphthongs are written with an iota, (iota subscriptum,) underneath the three following vowels :
?> Vt VThis changes nothing in their pronunciation, and merely serves
to point at the etymology of the word, in which they occur ; but
originally it influenced the pronunciation. The ancients also
wrote it in the line, and this is still done with capital letters : as,
THI 204>IAI, -rf) <To<p/$r, to)"AiSti or aSVi.
Obt. 2. The old national Greek grammarians likewise rank nv, tie, and tit, among
the improper diphthongs, of which they say, that one of their vowels is long, and
the other short, whilst all the others contain but two rapidly pronounced short
vowels. Hence it appears that in order to distinguish nu from iv, the ( must he
sounded stronger, and the same ought to be observed with regard to an and im. It
is likewise very evident that the case must have been the same with a, , , at the
time, when the i was sounded with them, which must have been the usual pronun
ciation in the strictly classical times, as is proved by the Latins writing Iragoedut,
comoedut, for roxyvits, xv/ttiSif. But it is also eq\ially manifest from the words
adopted at a later period, as prosodia, ode, for TeosyVm, tfSit, that * was then no
longer distinguished from . We now adhere thoroughly to this equally genuine
pronunciation ; and as an improper diphthong can only be a diphthong, in which
the two vowels are not sounded, the far more practical division, which we have
adopted above, is fully justified.
Obt. 3. The tv, indeed, sounds only as one vowel, and therefore is no real diph
thong ; but we leave it in its old place, because it also differs essentially from the
three others, in which there is only one of the two written vowels sounded, whilst in
bu there is, as it were, a third mixed sound of t and v, just as a has a sound between
a and e. The short u was also in the oldest language, and remained in the j3?olic
dialect, and in Latin, as the idiom most nearly related to that dialect. It was ex
pressed by the kindred letters and u, and in later times probably by the , a com
pound of both letters. The Homeric lUktrSt is of this description. See Verb, Anom.
V. $ov\o(*ett.
6.Spiritus, Breathing.
1. The Greek letters have 2 signs or marks :
' Spiritus lenis, (wvsD/xa \},iXov, the slight aspirate,)
' Spiritus asper, (wveu/Aa $xau, the strong aspirate.)
The Spir. asper is the h aspirate : the lenis is used when other
languages begin the word simply with the vowel, as, lyu, ego :
"Opvipoi, Homerus. But in Prosody and Grammar both kinds
of words are considered as beginning merely with a vowel : thus
14
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
with regard to the apostrophus, ( 30.) and to the moveable v,

(v JpeXxi/fixov, 26.)
2. When the Spiritus falls on a diphthong, it is placed, like the
accents, on the second letter : as, Kvpmiiw, ohs. But this is not
done with the improper diphthongs : as"AiSnr, (^Swr.)
3. The Spiritus asper is attached to p in the beginning of a
word ; and two p in the middle are marked p p. This is derived
from a peculiarity of the ancient language, hence the Latins never
neglect it in Greek words : as,
prirup, rhetor, Hippos, Pyrrkus.
Obi. 1. Both spiritus are distinct letters in other languages; the lenit is the ale/
or etif of the orientals. Neither is this an idle sign. Every vowel uttered without
a consonant, and consequently every vowel which is to be pronounced distinctly and
separately from the preceding letter ', is actually introduced by a slight audible
aspiration, which the ancients had greater occasion to mark in their writing, as they
did not separate their words.
Obi. 2. The ipir. aiper was frequently neglected by the Cohans, and sometimes
by the Ion?ans : hence we meet in epics with vp.p.11 for isCt, a.t from Hwtpai,
r/iKics for xXic;, &C.
Obi. 3. The most ancient Greek language had along with these two spirithi an
additional aspiration, which maintained itself the longest among the Cohans. It
is usually called digamma, a double r, from the figure of its sign, F, and properly
was a consonant pronounced like the Latin V, and applied to several words, which,
in the better known dialects, have either the ipir. atper or the lenit. But whatever
relates to the digamma, is still involved in great obscurity, owing to the want of
monuments. The Homeric digamma, so much discussed of late, rests on the fol
lowing remarkable circumstance :A certain number of words beginning with a
vowel, the principal of which are the pronouns il, il, !, and the words i"3, !, u'rut,
{, "IXus, , Jxet, ifyav, 7r, Humrt, and their derivatives, so frequently have the
hiatus in Homer, (see 28.) before them, that on omitting them, the hiatus, now so
frequent in Homer, seldom occurs, and is then easily accounted for in the few in
stances which remain. These very words, comparatively with others, have rarely
an apostrophns before them, and the long vowels and diphthongs, which are imme
diately preceding, are much less frequently shortened than before other words, (see
7. Obi.) so that we Thust conclude that there was something in the beginning
of those words, by which both, (the apostrophus and the shortening of the vowels,)
was prevented, and the hiatus removed. And as short vowels with a consonant,
(for instance, , ,) often become long in these words, even exclusively of the
casura, as if there were a position, it has been ingeniously conjectured in modern
times, that all these words had in Homer's mouth this aspiration, (V,) with the
power of a consonant before them, but had lost it at the far later period, when
Homer's poems were written down. But as these poems are known to have under
gone so many changes and additions before that time, and even after, the instances,
where the traces of the digamma in Homer have disappeared, are very obviously ex
plained. We must also remember that the disappearance or gradual vanishing of
the digamma may possibly have commenced in Homer's time, and that many a
word may have been pronounced sometimes with, and sometimes without it.
1 For instance, when we correctly pronounce Ab-oriyinet instead of A-boriyimti
PROSODY.
15
7.Prosody.
1. Prosody, according to the modern acceptation of the word, is
the theory of the quantity of syllables, that is to say, their length,
(productio,) or their shortness, (correptio.) 1
2. Every word and grammatical form had for each syllable,
with very few exceptions, a fixed quantity, which regulated the
pronunciation of the Greeks in their common intercourse, and
must therefore be known to pronounce the Greek correctly.
Obs. 1. Hence it is evident how greatly they err, who detach Prosody from
Grammar, and consider it merely as a theory necessary for the understanding of
poetry. The error proceeds from the circumstance, that hearing no longer the
common pronunciation of the ancients, we learn the quantity of syllables from the
works of the poets, who indulged in peculiarities and licences. Thus we have in
many instances, along with the fixed quantity, a poetical quantity, of which the
most important points are stated in the Obtervationt.
3. Grammar notes the quantity of syllables with the following
two marks over the vowel, ( " ) long, ( " ) short ; for instance,
a short a, at long a.
a. doubtful or fluctuating.
4. Any syllable, the length of which is not distinctly ascer
tained, is presumed to be short.
5. A syllable is long either 1. by the nature of the vowel, or
2. by position.
6. A syllable is 1. long by nature, when its vowel is a long
one, as, for instance, the middle syllable of amare, docere, in
Latin. This is denoted in Greek partly by the characters them
selves j of the simple vowels
*j and at are always long,
e and o always short.
They therefore require no comment. But the three others,
a, , v,
are, like all Latin vowels, both long and short, and hence are called
doubtful or fluctuating, in Latin ancipites.
Ohi. 2, But this must not be understood as if there were in the nature of the
sounds a, i, u, something fluctuating between length and shortness. All vowels are
fixedly, (positively,) long in some words, and fixedly short in others ; but it is only
for e and o that the Greeks have particular characters in either case. The quantity
of a, i, u, is learned in the same way as we learn it, in Latin, of all the five vowels.
But if one of the three vowels be actually fluctuating in some Greek words, ex. gr.
1 But the ancient Greek grammarians comprise In
' whatever affects the
sound of a syllable,' and consequently alio ' both accents and spiritus.'
1(3
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
the x in xxxls, the i in it'm, the case is the same with e and o heing written in two
ways in the same words, as in rpx&v and rgu%dvt cZtt and
and visr, which
cannot be distinguished in the most ancient writing.
7. With respect to the length by nature, it is a general rule
that two vowels, giving but one sound, constitute a long syllable.
Hence
1. ) All diphthongs, without exception, are long ; ex. gr. the
penultima in fiatolXetos, kitxtu.
2. ) All contractions are long, and in this instance the fluctu
ating vowels are constantly long, ex. gr. the a in Saim for dix.av,
the i in Ipls for Upos, the v in the accus. fiorpvs for fiorpuxs. See
28.
Obs. 3. But elisions, (e-r. gr. iriyu for rj,) must be carefully distinguished
from contractions, as is stated in 2830.
8. A syllable is long 2. even with a short vowel by position,
that is to say when it is followed by two or more consonants, or
a double letter ; ex. gr. the penultima in
/xeyurTor, xai\xu,
/Se'Xe/lavov, a-âppos, x.a$i%ai, vo/jLtûi.
Obs. 4. There is frequently a long vowel along with the position. In this case
it is a very customary fault to be satisfied with the length by position without
lengthening the vowel in pronunciation. It ought, however, to be lengthened not
only in An^>, (pronounce LeAmnos,) 'lptn\, XajsJvSa,-, &c, not only where there is
a circumflex, ( 11. i.) as in /ixkXn,
but also in v(xttu, srfaSw, the length of
whose x is obvious from the kindred forms, which have the circumflex, (trS|if,
Tfiyfix,) whilst the x in txttk, ragw, is short as in rx\it . And just as we distinguish
the final syllables of KinXjnp and Kiutî we must observe the same distinction in
were the first syllable is long, (gen. 9(*f,) and in alxag, where it is short,
(gen. xSxixcs.) The length and shortness of the fluctuating vowels before a posi
tion, to obtain a correct pronunciation, must be learned by attending to the accents
according to Obs. 1 1, and by consulting the kindred forms of the word in the way,
which we have just stated.
9. Muta cum liquida, ( 4.) in general does not make a posi
tion ; hence the penultima in cstexvos-, SiSpayrjAos, yEVE'SXT), $u<s<j[oti>.os,
&c. is short. Only poets sometimes also use these syllables as
long, whence the common assertion that muta cum liquida makes
a doubtful syllable.
Obi. 5. Hence beginners ought to be extremely careful to ascertain whether the
vowel in such a word be not possibly long by nature, for in that case it remains
long of course, as, for instance, in v'tvTxSxts, which comes from 9a, (a contrac
tion of xtSxa,) and consequently has a long x. It is the same with -f'vxfis, the v
of which is long, because it comes from ^vû, (see Obs. 8.) Learners are very apt
to fancy that muta cum liquida has the power of rendering the syllable doubtful.
10. The medice, medials, (/3, y, 5,) when before the three liquids
t\, (a, v, form, however, an exception to the preceding rule, and
PROSODY.
17
make a true position. The penultima in the following words, for

instance, is long, (only the vowel must not be lengthened in pro
nunciation,) itiTiXiyiMtt, TerpzfitfiXos, Et/'oS/xor : but in the following,
It is short, yjtpoi&po., Me\txypos, poKofipos.
11. All syllables, the quantity of which is not determined by
the preceding rules, which can be the case only with syllables
with the vowels a, , v, without a position, are regulated merely
by usage ; and as this is most safely ascertained in the works of
the poets, and confirmed by passages of the same, this is called
determining the quantity ex auctoritate, and in doubtful cases the
authority of the Attic poets is decisive. The quantity of the radi
cal syllable of words must be learned from Dictionaries, and private
observations; we shall only notice the most important, and the
quantity of syllables, used in the formation and inflection of words,
will be noticed in the Grammar in their proper place.
Obs. C. But with regard to the formation and inflection of syllables, we shall in
general, (under the supposition of Text 4.) state only those, in which the doubtful
vowels are long. Every syllable, therefore, of which nothing is observed, and the
contrary of which is not apparent from the general rules, is to be presumed short ;
ex.gr. the penultima in x(iiyfiam, Xrwînni, and in the terminations employed in
the formation of words, as %uXims, iuuuttin, &c. We thus have only to notice radi
cal syllables, and a few derivatives, which are not easily comprised in the rules of
grammar.
Obs. 7. It is chiefly only the penultima in words of three or more syllables, which
is rendered sensible in modern pronunciation ; and yet it is of great importance to
be accustomed to pronounce such words correctly before the reading of poets is
attempted. We, therefore, give the principal of such only, in which the penultima
is long :
fXvcc^ci, i, futile talk.
xlfixXos, rogue.
v*jcf, sad.
axgaros, pure, unmixed.
rui^m, tiara*
Maws, young girl.
lxabis, attendant.
o-trawi, mustard.
s3a;, proud.
cmyiii, i, jaw.
with the words in ayis, derived from ayu and iyitifu, as ktâyii, captain ; nuutytt,
one who has been shipwrecked.
xa/iivn, A, stove.
xptrfcurns, old man.
ôtXiMf, i, rein*
^'i/auSos, i, while lead.
riXjiwv, parsley.
xikuQot, to, hush.
xvfurov, cumin.
fnrln. rosin.
rvMMfum, thefruit ofthe sycamore tree.
JfuXtt, i, multitude.
xuxXupim, a plant.
<rTj/3;X, i, cone of a pine-tree,
isn'nn, gift.
friiAw, shoe.
ai'vn, axe.
X1^*"! *t swallow,
Turin, a bottle having a covering of ic.So;, one who /abort for hire.
wieker-work.
exact,
xlvbuvot, o, danger.
axe'tiror, aconite, wolf's-bane.
(3'9i/y, i, cavily.
i'Xh i -fried or salt-fish.
uiMn, scrutiny.
ti, papyrus.
C
18
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
}.u{vssvt spoilt booty,

yifvâ, bridge,
wlrugtt, bran.
Sxvâ, spelt,
ayxvâ, anchor.
xoXXvâ, small loaf of bread.
and also te%voi, strong, (from ia%vu, to be powerful ;) but in ixveos and l^v^l;, forti
fied, fast, (from ix.*> *"e, hold,') and iu the other adjectives in {>, the v is short.
It is likewise safer to pronounce
ftvtfK9i, the shrub tamarisk.
xafvvii, club,
vrkn/tfiupfifiood, tide.
r*n, ladle, shimmer, [frowf/.]
long, though they also occur short. The following proper names are long :
IrvfiQaXof, 'tug/raXo;, Tlglecrss. "Afixref. An/tafaraf, 'A^KTflf,
A'L-xuT't;, I'.vQokty,;, Stfarrif, 6f*w, 'larwy, "Apart:,
Savant, (Serapis.*)
Evftxes, 'Eviribf, Stji^p;, Tâvixes, Ka\'xet,*Oftaif, Havctet;,
'Ay%irnt, Alyna, Kapaîva,'AfBat'trri,*AuQirftrti.
Atevvtr/yf, 'Aftfgveif, Kofl^Vffuf, 'Ao-^vra;. KvxvTtf, Rr.ourc;,
"A&btt, BiSvvii, llixtiyn, Kifxafa, (Corcyra.)
See in the Appendix to the third declension, a list of words of that declension,
which have the penultima long in the gen. (and in the rest of their cases.)
Obi. 8. But those words must also be treasured in the memory, the first syllable
of which frequently becomes long through interchange and composition. The fol
lowing ought to be particularly remembered on that account :
ipiXt;, bald.
Tiur,, honor.
X'^Si i,food.
tixti, victory.
Xiplf, i, hunger.
bed, couch,
pitet, fi, shin.
whirlpool.
Xtros, tmall.
\vvat, common, mutual.
Si/pot, 0, mind.
xvQos, crooked, bent,
r. - o, pole of a carriage.
^vX^t soul.
X"r"fi j"'cei *"P'
fv\ii, tribe, troop.
nXif, S, juice.
ukn, forest, materials.
Tfflo;, a, cheese.
Xvxfi, grief.
Twflf1, o, wheat.
Tvyri, buttocks.
XevrSr gold.
ffdruf, member of the same tribe,
irn, harm, ruin.
cfây);, fi, seal.
iaXes, o, firebrand.
râx^Sj rough,
(uxaii, little, small in stature.
In the verbs, which end simply with an annexed to the radical word, the i and v
are constantly long, (ex. gr. t(!I3*i, ei$t>, -\ix,) excepting yXuQai, to carve, engrave.
But the a, (ex.gr. in ay, yâfu,) is short. See the quantity of the final syllable
of the Present Tense of the Verbs in aw, i'w, i/w, 112. Obs. Of the verbs liable
to contraction we particularly notice as having the first syllable long :
xmu, to stt in motion.
}i$av, to dive, search,
ptyiw, to shudder.
ev\aa>, to plunder,
jnyau, to shiver.
Qutav, to blow, breathe,
ffiyaat, to be silent.
The knowledge of these words is useful not only for usual compounds, as an/ic;,
a^vx't, (?t{i/3s,) "iiaTû. IfifyAiif, arvXct, &c, but also for many proper names, as
Hermotimus, Demonicus, Ertphyle, &c.
' There is likewise some assistance to be derived from the Ionic dialect for the
quantity of the a, as that dialect frequently changes a into n, ex.gr. SrvftfriXac,
3 But ri(if, the gen. of xH(, <ra,fire.
PROSODY.
19
Obs. 9. The Nouns Substantive and Adjective derived from verbs, and retaining
their characteristic, may be assumed to be of the same quantity with these verbs,
until the contrary be perfectly ascertained ; for some of these nouns have not the
long vowel of the Present Tense, but the short one of the Aor. 2. This is the case :
a. with some substantives in , T{?/3n, JiarfijW, imû^ti, Tutfa^Cîi. But
^'X'i (u/.)
b. with some adjectives in lis, gen. its, tlxgms, irtffai, raXitrftfint, &c, and
the substantive muifr^r.;.
Obs. 10.The rule that a vowel before another vowel is short, which is unsafe in
Latin, is still less to be depended on in Greek. A long vowel before a vowel I(,
however, more rare than before a simple consonant, and especially the many nouns
in its, i", and /, are always short, except
xxXtsl, nest, aixtx, indignity, etna, sorrow, xavtx, dust ;
and the two last occur also as short in the Epic poets. Vowel before vowel was probably
In many cases doubtful even in the common language, and poets, and more particu
larly the Epics, enjoyed a great latitude in this respect *. Hence, as we learn the
quantity of syllables from poets only, we are left in uncertainty in many instances,
especially respecting the final syllable of the Present Tense "of the verbs in uv and
m>, most of which we are forced to leave to individual observation. Many of those)
which have a long vowel in the Future, are also constantly used as long in the
Present Tense in the Senarius, viz., o*xxavu, fimvv, Irxvu, xXuv, Jiw, Bum, p<J, Xvu,
'in, <-;/, %(i*. But several of them are fluctuating in other species of poetry. The
deserves to be remembered as long, particularly in
Xxis, if nation j
fetes, t, temple,
xiu, (for xxtu,) to burn.
nXtist, (for xXxIv,) to weep.
Long are also the penultima in 'Eviat, Bellona, and all those words in im and iut,
which take an t in the gen. ; consequently all comparatives, (fx. gr. (ZiXrlm,) and
many proper names, ex. gr. 'A/ifun, "tvitfm, Hxînr, 'ApvSim, gen. ms but the
i is short in AtuxxXinv, tmuw, gen. ,- That proper names compounded with
Xxii, are long, is a matter of course; but remember that
'Ay.pacKs; is long, oWop&ts short.
See about the particular cases, in which long vowels are employed as short in verses,
Obs. 19.
Obs. 11.Much of what regards the prosody of the ancients, concerns us only
in the reciting of verses or what is called Scansion ; and a great deal, as we
observed before, depends on the peculiarities and licences of the poets, which
we shall denominate poetical usage, observing only that the various kinds of poetry
and verses have a vast influence on Greek prosody, the laws of which differ con
siderably in the Hexametre of the Ionic epic poem, and the Iambic Trimetrc or
Senarius, the principal verse of the Attic drama, to which the Iambic and Tro
chaic verses of this kind of poetry conform. Attic poets indulged in but few poeti
cal licences, and conformed themselvesin the main to the actual pronunciation of
the people of Athens ; whilst the Hexametre, grounded on the ancient pronuncia
tion of the Ionians, allowed great freedom to the poet in particular instances. The
other species of poetry lay between these two ; hence the parts of the drama itself,
wherein an increasing emotion forsakes the common language, and above all the
Lyric passages and choruses, admitted more or less the freedom of Kpic poetry along
with its forms. Even the Senarius of tragedy differed in this respect from the
' They might lengthen the t for the take of the metre, even in 'ArxXwi, 'lxln,
in/tiit, &c. See Obs. 15.
C 3
20
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Senarius of comedy, the language of which came nearer to that of common life.
Compare 1. 10. 11.
Ob: 12.The difference is particularly sensible with regard to position. The
meeting of mula cum liquida was rather harsh in the soft Ionic dialect; hence it
generally makes a true position in the Epic poets, and especially in the ancient ones.
But with the Attics the instances of short syllables stated above, (Text 9. 10.) are
always observed as short in the Senarius of comedy, whilst Tragic poets frequently
conform to the Epic usage.
Obi. 13.Position has also its effects in two words following close one on the
other. This is without exception whenever the two consonants are divided between
the two words, as fiXn rixtt. But when the second word begins with the two con
sonants, the position is indeedjustifiable, ex.gr. Homer, "E3 ] ripiv xxri, X*T{i |
Ji/V, II. (. 73, xZrt | TjJif, yet of rare occurrence, unless the Ictut comes to its
assistance. See OA*. 16. In the Attics it is more particularly attended to; but in.
this case mula cum liquida commonly makes no position, ex.gr. Eur.7/)/t. Tour. 131 7>
pf ; t/ *tiu- | pa.
Obi. 14.It is another peculiarity of the Hexametre, that it also varies with
respect to quantity by nature, (Text 6. 7.) The words
xttXts, beautiful, lew, equal,
constantly short with the Attic poets, are long with the Epics, who therefore write
JV5. There are several other words, the quantity of which is fluctuating with the
Epics, especially
ccrnf, man, "Afwf, Mart,
of which the first syllable else generally is short. In the exclamation TA{i,-, "Ajif,
which frequently occurs in Homer, the two words, though placed together, differ in
quantity.
Obt. 15.In other instances it is clearly seen that a word had its fixed and usual
quantity, and that the deviation is caused merely by the exigency of the rhythmus.
But the licence of the old Epic poets must not be supposed to have been unbounded ;
this would have destroyed the charm of their masterly compositions. Their own
feelings confined them within proper bounds, so that it was only with regard to
certain words and forms, or to particular cases, that they indulged in this freedom.
They resorted to it especially,
1.) in proper names: 'AraXXrvf, with a long *, 'EXsiwm'Saa, with the first i
short, {Hymn. Ccr. 105. cf. 95.)
2.) in words with over-many short syllables, as in itrn'urthu, iSiv/trtf, the first
syllable of which was made long ; hence this rhythmus of i3a*T was after
wards steadily adopted by all poets.
3.) in the beginning of an hexametre: Homer has even 'Em | titand fJi'Xi
xx- | eiyvn- | fl-.
Obt. 10. Another rhythmical lengthening was occasioned by the ctesura. Me

trical science teaches us that Arsis is that part of the foot, on which the emphasis
of the rhythmus or the Ictus falls ; the remainder is called the Thesis. In the hex
ametre the Arsis always is at the beginning of the foot, where this kind of verse
requires a long syllable, which never can be resolved into two short ones. When
ever the last syllable of a word falls in this part, (the masculine caesura,) this syl
lable alone must fill the^ri. But the Epic rhythmus allows a short syllable in this
part to be lengthened by the mere power of the rhythmus, ex. gr., It. i. 359,
K 5 Observe also, that uâ,Epic,
imprecation, is short with the Attic poets, and
long with the Epics ; whilst ipi, misery to be deprecated, is likewise 6hort with the
latter.
ACCENTS.
21
plXl *at- | aiyiti- | ti xlpi- | */, 51,pi- | kit

\ irwxii i- | e}a'is. This length
ening, however, does not frequently occur in so glaring a manner as in the quoted
examples, except when it is supported by the position, which, as we observed before,
(0A. 13.) neither is of frequent occurrence, without this ictus, ex. gr.eri fi 3>nObs. 17. Another support is afforded to this productio by the following word
beginning with a liquida, which may easily be doubled in pronunciation ; ex. gr.,
11. 1. 748, "H; I Ss pi- I fiyi, S. 274, Spa | 3< rifi | unrT, pronounce (lemmattigedennephos. The f in particular is so easily doubled in pronunciation in this
case, that even the Attic poets commonly employ a short vowel as long before the ;
in both Thesis &i\d Arsis, (ex.gr. in the Arsisoi the Benarius,rJ | t(v | ru t \
pixx, Aristoph. Plut. 10G5, and in the Thesis of a spondceus among anapaests,
avToitSi f7- I txs
I , Nub. 343,) and even avoid the f, wherever a short syl
lable is required.
Obs. 18. The productio of a short syllable in the ccesura was likewise favored by
the short vowel being immediately followed by one of the words, which, according
to C. Obs. 3., were sounded with the Digamma, the breathing of which also was
easily strengthened. Hence verses in Homer end so frequently with the pron. pos
sessive S'f from 1 in this manner : Si/ynri- | { fo,xiVi- | 7 Z.
Obs. 19. It is a general rule with dactylic and anapaestic verses, especially in
hexametres, that the long final vowel or diphthong is made short before a following
vowel : ex. gr. tirXtv a- | pros,tmrai \ aXyot,- J puri^n [ aUy. But when
ever this occurs in the Arsis, the syllable retains its quantity : out of it very rarely,
excepting cases of the Digamma, as has been observed, G. Obs. 3. The Attic senarius, on the contrary, did not admit this shortening of long syllables: the case did
not occur as a hiatus. There are likewise instances of a long vowel or diphthong
being shortened before a vowel in the middle of the word, but only in certain words
and forms, which must have had something conducive to it in their pronunciation ;
as in xenli, (which is frequently written nut,) reits and its correlatives and others.
Such a vowel or diphthong is constantly shortened before the demonstrativum, ( 80.)
ex. gr. in ret/rout, etvrni, stuvsut, &c, and in the Epic ixim for \<rtibh.
8. Of the Accents.
1. Independently of the quantity of syllables, (the province of
Prosody,) the Greek language also marks the tone, or what is
called the accents ; this expression, however, according to our
habits and conceptions, still offers many difficulties. The Greek
accent falling as frequently on a short syllable as on a long one,
must necessarily impair the quantity, when expressed in our ha
bitual way: as t/St)/ai, Suxpirvis.
2. But this accentuation is proved to be as old as the language
itself by clear historical facts, and unquestionable testimonies of
the ancients. Attentive grammarians began to note it, when a
false intonation was more and more invading the language of
1 That is to say, on the whole, for in individual practice accentuation, like any
other part of the language, was exposed to fluctuations. The adopted accentua
tion is chiefly that of the flourishing Attic period.
22
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
common life, and it was undoubtedly at a far later period that

these signs, which were now taught in the Greek schools, were
generally used. They thus transmitted to us, at least, the theory
of Greek accentuation.
3! Reflection and practice have already enabled us to remove
in part the contradiction, which appeared to prevail between
quantity and accent ; and it is worthy of the exertions of the
learned to endeavour to restore this essential ingredient of the
melody of the Greek language : but this cannot be effected with
out an intimate acquaintance with the present system of Greek
accentuation.
4. But, independently of these considerations, the Greek ac
cents are not without great practical utility. They frequently
enable us by their position to ascertain the quantity of syllables ;
serve to distinguish many homonymous words, and forms of
speech ; and even where they are of no immediate import, fami
liarise us to the laws of accentuation, without which we could
be no judges of the instances, where they are of practical service.
Obs. Nothing can be more prejudical than the habit of applying the accents in
reading in a way, which perverts the actual quantity of syllables, (see the Obi. to
the following .) If learners cannot remedy this fault by study, and attend to both
quantity and accents, they ought to attach themselves principally to quantity, which
is of still higher importance in reading.
9.
1 . Every Greek word, generally speaking, has the accent on
one of its vowels ; and this properly is but of one kind, viz. the
acute, o$e7a, {sc. irpaaulU, accent,) that is to say, the sharp or clear
tone, of which the mark is '.
2. The theory of the ancients respecting any sound, which, in
our way of speaking, has not the accent, gives to it the grave, or
falling tone, fiapux, (Lat. gravis,) and grammarians had for it
a mark\ which, however, is not used in common writing.
3. A long vowel may also have the circumflex, vepntvwpuvn,
the lengthened tone, which is marked
Grammarians state
that a thus accented long vowel is to be considered as two com
bined short vowels, of which the first has the acute, and the
other the grave accent : thus do, for instance, gives u. But when
the first vowel has the grave, and (he other the acute accent,
thus od, and they are converted into a>, this long vowel then takes
only the acute accent w.
ACCBNTS.
23
Obi. The audible utterance of this difference in pronunciation has some difficul
ties. We barely warn against the two principal faults. Kvery accented long vowel,
( or ,) must be carefully distinguished from the unaccented one, (grave .) for
instance, in v9{flr, without, however, making it short (a.)* But the opposite
fault of lengthening accented short vowels, must equally be guarded against : twu,
for instance, must not be pronounced like iVif8.
10.
1. The acute accent and the circumflex can fall only on one
of the three last syllables ; the acute accent, indeed, may fall on
any of the three, but the circumflex can take place only on the
last syllable, or on the penultimate.
The 2d Obs. of 14. shews that cSnvi and such words consti
tute but a seeming exception.
2. It is the nature of the last syllable in particular, which gives
to the whole word its grammatical denomination with regard to
the accent. According as this last syllable has 1. the acute accent,
2. the circumflex, or 3. no accent, (viz. according to viii. 2.
when it has the grave accent,) the word is called
Oxytdnon, as for instance, &eoc, or, Ttrvtyws.
Perispomenon .... <pCKSi, voSr.
Baryfonon
rvitrw, itpayiux, <npiytx.a.rx.
3. Again, any dissyllabic or polysyllabic barytonon, according
as it has 1. the acute accent on the penultimate syllable, or 2. on
the antepenultimate, or 3. the circumflex on the penultimate, is
called
Paroxytunon, . . .
rvitru, nrvîws.
Proparoxytdnon .
Twroptsvor, &v6pwaos.
Properispdmenon . .
xpaypia, q>i\ouox.
See about the seeming barytona, as i^yfi, nrvfyws, etc., and
about the atona or unaccented wards, 13.
* The first syllable of ayS/vra may be accented, and yet the second syllabic
lengthened, as is done with Almighty.
* The attempt to give the tone to a short vowel has the same effect with us as dou
bling the following consonant,which creates a great difficulty, since it must obviously
be supposed that the ancients distinguished iVi from irn, and fcixi from fixXXi. Hut
in the first place this alteration of the sound is neither so frequent, nor so offensive,
as when
filXtf, for instance, are pronounced ins, /3?X, and, in the second place,
persevering application may certainly succeed at least in lessening the difficulty.
To pronounce Xox^crn; compare this word with three similar German monosyllables,
to hit er, 'so has he,' the middle one of which is short, and may yet be accented.
These words obviously differ from so that er, ' so did he,' and are nearly like so halt'
cr, ' so had ho.' To pronounce ofla without lengthening the ', appears more diffi
cult ; but not only the German wit, ' how,' but even the French Ji, ' fie !' may be
accented ; it merely requires some little practice to pronounce a short accented syl
lable immediately before another vowel.
24
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
11.
The place of the accent in words is best learned through atten
tion and practice, and at first from the Dictionary. The following
general rules may, however, be attended to :
1. The circumflex requires a syllable long by nature, (viz. by
its vowel, and not by mere position :) ( 7. 8.) ex. gr.
xr,$or, <fus, rityjis, ouros, ay.v\yt/-oL,
and
because the uncertain vowels, ( 7. 6.) a, i, v, are long in these
words. Hence a short vowel, when accented, can only take the
acute accent : as trepos, pirns, ha, Tipos, itoXv, mXiyixa.
Oil. 1.
has the circumflex only on account of the , not because of the
position yp. And as, for instance, t-.S.-,i/., ^s>.>., have the circumflex, it shews
that x is here long by itself, not on account of yp and XX : pronouucc prnghma,
mahllon.
2. But the acute accent may also stand on a long vowel : as
ootywrtpos, SitrEpos, (peuyu), Ti/Ari, fixaiXius, tydip.
3. Whenever the last syllable, being naturally long, is to have
the accent, it may be the circumflex ; and in case of a contrac
tion, as in dX-nbios, aX-nôvs, Troiiu, vmu, it almost always is the
circumflex, for the reasons stated below, 28. Obs., but else it is
not often the case. Several monosyllabic words, as itvp, (iovs,
nots, oJv, vtv, have the circumflex. But in polysyllabic words, ex
cepting the contraction, whenever the final syllable is accented,
the circumflex is placed only on
a. ) the adverbial termination us. See 115.
b. ) the terminations of the gen. and dat. See 33. Obs. 9.
c. ) the terminations eu and o7 of the vocat. See 45.
4. If the penultimate syllable, being naturally long, is to be
accented, it must be the circumflex, whenever the last syllable is
short, or long only by position ; as
pr,ixa, altos, -^vyps, j3<ZXa, gen. axos.
Obt.2. This rule does not apply to words joined together with enclitics;
hence we write UTt, tin, iSo-a-i}, fan, rovrii, &c. (See 14. Obt. 2.) The particles
101 and Hugi, (not
which are but and mi lengthened, arc the only ex
ceptions.
5. But whenever the last syllable is naturally long, the penul
timate cannot take the circumflex ; we write
prtrup, oi'vr),
^wpofc, gen. axos.
ACCENTS,
25
6. According to 10. 1. the antepenultimate can take only the

acute accent. But when the last syllable is long, whether it be
by nature or position, the antepenultimate cannot be accented at
all ; we write
^,ajx.pa.rns, aoWiyu, fi@\z%.
7. The final syllables ai and oi, though long, have only the in
fluence of a short syllable, with regard to the two immediately
preceding rules : we write
Tplxivat,
Hw\oi, avSpa/iroi, plurals
of rptaivx, 7rpotfriTT)f, itajhos, a.v%paii:os.
n/Trro/Asci, rdwrsTatt, TvirreaSai, rirvâi,
passive forms of the verb.
itoi-haau, aTr,aau, htivai, infinitives.
nolwaxi, arrival, imperatives of the middle.
Obs. 3. We except, however,
1. The third person of the opt. in ct and eti : as Qivyoi, irawtti.
2. The adv. mm/, at home; (hut the pi. sTxm, houses.)
3. Words joined together ( 13.) with enclitics; as
uioe is mc, Uroi,
both when it comes from n, certain/i/, and from 3, or.
8. Even the u in the terminations of the cases in the Attic declen
sion, takes the accent on the antepenultimate syllable, as zsoXeut,
isiXea/v, ( 51.) and (nom. and accus. sing, and gen. pi.) avaJyswv,
(37.)
Obs. 4. Likewise the u in the Ionic gen. in ut of the first declension : as ttnrinn
for hrrirct/, 34. Obs.
Obs. 5. It is obvious that a beginner, who uses correct editions, may learn the
quantity of many words by their accents :
1. The circumflex shews that the syllable, on which it stands, is long.
2. The acute accent on such words as nmtmhsi, /33ay, &c, shews that the
penultimate syllable is short. (This follows from No. 4. of the Text.)
3. The accent of such words as tru;*, auj<t. shews that the last syllable is short.
(Text 4. 6.) and
4. The acute accent on x"tai
shews that the last syllable is long, (Text
4. 6.)
Even words and forms, the accent of which indicates nothing, may yet serve to
remind those, who have read much with attention, of forms, whose accent is deci
sive. They will pronounce acmt long, and BufiXts short, because e7res has the cir
cumflex, and iplxm the acute accent. Thus will the i in Hxn, iiixis, be known to be
short, because the pi. Yuusi appears so frequently, that the attentive reader may
recollect that he never saw it with the circumflex, (Text 7 ) But the circumflex
of monosyllables decides nothing with regard to the quantity of their lengthened
cases, the monosyllabic nominatives of the third declension being always long, (41.
Obs. 3. and 42. Obs. 3.) for instance, srJ;, fiSt, gen. xipi, /tvis.
2G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
% 12.
When a word is changed by its declension or conjugation, or in
any other way, this change influences its accentuation in many
cases :
1. ) It has a necessary influence, when the word undergoes such
a change, as to prevent the accent being continued the same as
it is on the principal form of the word, conformably to the rules
stated above ; in that case
The circumflex is converted into the acute accent, as olvos, gen.
01W,
11. 5.) prifjux, gen. prt(J.a.ros, ( 10. 1.)
The acute into the circumflex ; as ripco), gen. rums,
11. 3. 6.)
(pevyco, imper. (peuye, ( 11. 4.)
Or the accent passes from the antepenultimate to the penulti
mate syllable ; a aifopantos, gen. xvbpdnou, apovqa., gen. agoupas,
(11.6.)
2.) But even when it is not necessary in conformity with the
above rules, the accent, though never changed, is yet sometimes
transposed ;
a.) The accent is removed backwards chiefly, 1.) when the
word has before it an augment of any kind, as rvitru, Tvnn
etmtte, oSor,ouvoSos, z}M$evTos}aitalîvros : 2.) when the reason,
which attached the accent in the principal form to the penulti
mate syllable, ( 11. 6.) disappears ; as zyouliua, imper. iraiSsvs.
More precise information and exceptions will be stated in the
Obs. sub 1. to 103. and in the Theory of Compounds, 121.
b.) The accent is only moved forward chiefly, when the word
receives one of the terminations, which either always are accented,
as the parlic. perf. in us : rirutpoc, partic. rervtpus, 4 or which
take the accent under peculiar circumstances, as bip, bnpos,
according to 43. Obs. 4.
Obs. With regard to the transposition of the accent, see in the anastrophe, 1 17.
2.; with the apostrophus, 30. Obs.; and on casting off the augment, Obs. 1. to
103.
13.
1. Hitherto we have considered the accent merely as it is regu
lated in itself by every word and form ; but it is also influenced
by the connection of words, but in a grammatical respect only in
* To these must be added some common terminations in the formation of words :
as, for instance, the verbal substantives in pit, (kcyirp.lt,) the adjectives iu *, tit,
to,-, rut, and some others.
ACCENTS.
27
two principal cases. It is modified through the dependence of a

word on the following or preceding parts of speech ; which is
expressed as, I. Inclination of the Accent towards the following
word; 1.) by moderating the acute accent; 2.) by casting the
accent off. II. Inclination towards the preceding word or Inclinatio. We treat (I.) of the Inclination towards the following
word.
2. Whenever an oxytonon, ( 10. 2.) stands before other
words in connection, the effect of the acute accent is moderated
and approximates more or less to the grave accent. In that case
the sign or mark of the acute is converted into the sign of the
grave accent1, which is used only on such occasions, ( 9. 2.)
But at the end of a period, viz. before a full stop or colon s, the
acute accent remains unchanged ; as,
'Opyri Se TtoWi S^jiv dvayxdiêt xscxa.
Obs. 1. We must guard against considering as barylona words which cud with
They are rather called oiytona, because their acute accent is merely at rest, and
grammar, in looking at connected words, considers each word separately.
Obi. 2. The interrogative pronouu rlt, rS, ( 770 's tne on'v exception to this
rule. With regard to the acute accent on terminations before enclitics, see 14.
3. The following monosyllablic words, which all begin with a
vowel,
ov, (ovtc, oux,) not, us, as, si, if,
sv, in, els,
into,
(ex,) out,
and these nominatives of the arliculus praposilivus, ( 75.)
6,
o[, ai,
appear commonly unaccented in speech, because they coalesce
with the subsequent word, and are on that account called atona,
unaccented words, ex. gr.
o vovs- rj\ev li, 'Aulas' iis ev itapobu' ov yap vsxp-nv.
4. But as soon as such words are unconnected with the
subsequent one, standing either alone or at the end or after
the words, which they govern, they obtain their accent ; ex. gr.
ov, no. nus ya% ov ; why not? &Eor us hrhro, (as a god,) oi/Se
xaxa/v Vz, (instead of ex xaxuv.)
Obt. 3. As these words stand with regard to the accent nearly in the same pre
dicament to the subsequent word as enclitics to the preceding word, they are now
frequently called proclitics alter Hermann. See Buttmunn't Complete Greet Gram
mar, 13.
5 It is owing to the old principle being misunderstood that mint moderns place
the acute accent before every ton,ma.
28
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
14. Enclitics.
1. A number of monosyllabic and dissyllabic words, owing to
their signification and pronunciation, may be so closely joined with
the preceding word, as to throw the accent on that word. And
as these words in that case lean or incline, as it were, (l^xX/yeo-Sai,)
on the preceding word, they are called Enclitics ; whilst, every
word, which is accented by itself, and every enclitic, when it retains
its accent, is called Orthotonon, (fy&oTovot//x6vov, a word, as it were,
with upright accent.)
2. Such enclitics are :
1. ) the indefinite Pronoun ris, ri, through all its cases, with
toD, Tii, as belonging to it. (77.)
2.) The following oblique cases of the personal Pronouns :
lj.ov, lAot, fA} aov, aol, as, oJ5, oT, , /xiv, v!v, and those begin
ning with up with some exceptions. ( 72. Obs.)
3. ) The Indicative Present of ei/xl and <pr\y.l, excepting the
monosyllabic second pers. sing. ( 108. IV. 109. I.)
4.) The indefinite adverbs zjus, srw, woJ, ttou, noSi, noSh, zsors,
which differ from the similar interrogatives, (iras ; hots,
&c.) merely by their enclitical accents, ( 116.)
5.) The particles vu, re, rut,
yl, xtv or xl, vlv or w1,
Tzlp, pat, with the inseparable Sc.(See Obs. 2.)
3. When the word before the enclitic, (compare below, 7.) is a
proparoxytonon , (aiSpviro*,) or a 'properispomenon, (owna.,) the
enclitic throws its accent, which always is the acute accent, on the
final syllable of that word, as,
avSpwltos Ian, aui\t.i y.ov,
and when it is preceded by an unaccented word, as for instance ii,
it throws its accent on this word : 11 nr.
4. But if the preceding word has already of itself an accent
on its final syllable, or the acute accent on the penultimate, the
same accent likewise serves for the enclitic, and the acute accent
of such a final syllable does not in that case dwindle into the
grave accent ; 13. 2. ex. gr.
atrip Tir- xa aof
<pt\u of yvta.iy.Sii rnwv* avXga te" Xiyen n '.
1 Thii particle, (igitur,) contradistinguishes itself by this accent from the adverb
of time *vt, {nunc, 1 now.')
* The accentuation of ymunSt rnm and Srramr, and some other cases, which appear
opposed to the general rules of accentuation, is not considered by modern gramma
rians as enclitic. See Buttmann's Complete Greet Grammar.
PUNCTUATION.
29
5. When one enclitic follows immediately after another encli

tic, the first generally takes the accent of the following enclitic,
and throws its own accent on the preceding word, and so on,
if there be several enclitics, up to the last, which alone remains
unaccented ; as for instance, st rls nvx (pvai pot nxqeTvaa.
6. Enclitics retain their own accent : (become ortothona. See
1.) whenever the inclination is obstructed : viz.,
1.) when a Paroxytonon has a dissyllabic enclitic after it ;
ex. gr. Xoyor wore Ejc&zger Evavn'or atpiaiv.
2. ) when the syllable, on which the accent of the enclitic
should be thrown, is removed by an apostrophus; as
7. Otherwise enclitics in general become orthotona, only when
there is a kind of emphasis, particularly when it is grounded on
an antithesis, resting on them, and when they begin the sentence.
But many of these words, (especially those under 2. and 5.) can
from their nature never be in that predicament, and therefore
always occur as enclitics.
Obi. I. See more details on the inclination and right accentuation of the per
sonal pronouns, and of /uu and iftiu, Sua. in 12. Obi. 2. 3., and also about C/u, if",
and itn, 108. iv. 3.
Obs. 2. As such a word through inclination coalesces almost into one with the
preceding word, many words, commonly combined with an enclitic for a peculiar
meaning, are also written close together: as, for instance, Sm, tSrt, fiimi, irrit,
Srmut, (see $ 770 The enclitic it, (which is very different from }i, but,') occurs
merely in this way in fit, Merit, i'Ji, h'ftnlt, &c. ($$ 7C. and 79- b. 110. 2. and 6.)
Such an enclitic takes the accent of a new subsequent one only when the general
rules require it, (7rv tint, SH *,) but commonly it does not, rSri n. Yet with
regard to these matters there is no uniformity in the editions of Greek books ; espe
cially in cases where the first word of such a coalition should, (according to the
Text 3.) take two accents. We sometimes meet with "Eji/WSi, elirrt, correctly, and
sometimes with the second accent only, 'Efi/W3t, dim. See about #r, 11. Obs. 3.
Obi. 4. The demonstrative pronouns, which are strengthened by it ( 79 -and
116. 6.) remove, in every occurring case, their own accent on their final syllable,
for instance, vires, veto;merit, Teterif tjjAijm;rnXutirit' tvBaifSetit' reinreiriit :
and as this is the accent of the principal word, the genitives and datives, conformably
to 33. Obi., retain likewise their circumflex on the long vowel, as ree-euit, rtrntt,
roioitrit 3 whilst the nom. and acc. are reniit, Teiovrit.
15.Punctuation.
1. The Greek has the full stop and comma in common with
our modern languages. Our semi-colon is comprised in the
Greek colon, marked by a dot over the line, (as owe ^X&ev dXXa)
The Greek note of interrogation is ( ; ).
Obi. Modern editors have begun to introduce the note of exclamation ( I )
30
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
2. The diastole or hypodiastole ( , ) must not be confounded

with the comma; it serves merely to distinguish little words
enclitically connected from other similar ones ; as for instance
o,ti, (Epic o.tti,) the neuter of oans and r6,re, (and this,) from the
particles on, (Epic 3tti,) and rors.
3. The Greek has farther marks referring to letters and syl
lables, viz.
1 the apostrophu*. ( 30.)
' the coronis or the sign of the crasis. ( 29.)
the di&resis, (the trema of the French,) over a vowel,
which does not make a diphthong with the vowel, which
precedes ; as oiV, (o-is,) zs^xbs, (pra-us).
See about the iota subscriptum i, (a, y, u,) 5.
INTERCHANGE OF LETTERS.
16. Consonants.
1. The formation of words and grammatical forms is attended
with so many changes in the letters, chiefly for the sake of euphony
and pronunciation, that the radical word is frequently so altered,
as not to be known again. But this alteration generally rests on
acknowledged fundamental laws.
2. With respect to tbe Greek consonants, we may observe that
letters belonging to the same organ, or which have the same pro
perty, ( 4. 3.) though of different organs, are most apt to inter
change, whenever there is an alteration in the word.
3. This is likewise the foundation of the difference of the
dialects, as may be seen in the following Observations.
Obs. 1. The dialects of the Greek language most frequently interchange
a.) the aspiratai for instance, for Sx, to bntise, Attice $Xmt.
Thus the denomination <pltf, a centaur, is merely an antiquated form of >>i;, beast,
' a man-beast ejv/; has generally osnfiai in the gen., Dorice otviêt.
h.) the media ; for instance, for yXnx"'i pennyroyal, Attice fiXn%ui, for yn, ancient
Doric SS, for 1/iiXet, spit, Dorice iSiXlc.
c.) the tenues ; thus the interrogatives,
tris, n'e;, irsTa, <r, &c.) instead of
the usual <r have in the Ionic dialect constantly x, {xtZ, xiii, xcim, ixust, x, &c. ;)
thus also Ten, when, is Dorice rixa, and rim,/h>e, /Eolice <r't/tTi.
d.) the liquids; thus instead of Jx.9d, fiiXririi;, ipiXTxrct, the Doric dialect has
J3a>, iT/ro;, ipltrxrei : the Ionic, instead of trrtCpur, lungs, has rXiu/tuv : the
Attic for xXlfixrsf, oven, ,.;>.,- : see about pti> and vi, the pronouns, $ 72- Obs.
e.) the letters of the same organ : the Attic prefers yiclftii, fuller, to xtuQwi,
runs, tapestry, and idm were both used indifferently ; and the Ionic dialect some
times converted the aspirates into tenues, as iixepxi for tt%$/uu, to take, (tuns for aZSis,
again ; the Attic itrfdgaysi is Jonice inrifxyes.
ASPIRATJE.
31
f ) the r especially with the other Unguals

with rfor rv, rXufln, near, IWnJiy, the Doric has to, <rXar;', Hernia:
,, 3 throughout in the Laconic dialect, as for 9if, Suntiit, nits.
,, v the termination /iu is Dorice fits, (as rvXTopsv, Tumpi;.)
fthus many Doric tribes ended the words in as, ns, is, m, with {, ns,
H>
g.) the double consonants with the kindred simple ones, especially i with
, as
for 3{J, roebuck, paiix Dorice for paTâ, dough, &c. The old Greek and
ôlic dialect, instead of { and \l>, transposed the two simple consonants ; as txitt;,
rcraXis, for girw, stranger, â\i;, shears. The Doric dialect in particular, commonly
has, instead of in the middle, ti, as, rVflri* for {iJ*>, p'uritn for fii( or fuU^tt, &c.
(Compare above J 3.)
OA. 2. The conversion of letters into those, which are not of a kin to them, is of
rare occurrence, and must he especially remembered ; as fiiyis for fuXis, hardly,
iir, Jonice for tun, to meditate, xtlxutis, xiXanh, poetically for ftikas, piXana, 1
black.
Obs. 3. Most of the above-mentioned interchanges are stated by ancient and
modern grammarians in general terms, as ' the Attic dialect changes 9 into f, the
Ionic ir into ,' and so on. But this must not lead us to suppose that such a con
version is constant in such a dialect. The examples quoted are very often the only
ones, in which that conversion occurs, and it is but in some cases that this or that
dialect inclines to some particular change, which merely serves to bring the cases,
which may occur, under their proper analogy.
Obt. 4. Two conversions founded on what we stated above, are, however, so fre
quent, that they deserve a particular notice, viz. :
rr and rt
fp and or
The former takes place in most of the words, in which these letters occur, and the
latter in a great many of them : rr and ff are chiefly peculiar to the Attic dialect,
and rr and (r to the Ionic ; as, for instance,
All.
Ion.
All. Ion.
TarruiTasaui, to arrange.
cttfnvV>rv, male, masculine.
yXeuTTcty\Zeea, tongue.
xoppnKoern, cheek.
But the Ionic forms are also met with in the best Attic writers, and particularly
in the most ancient authors. (See above, 1 . Obs. 8.)
11. Of the Aspirates.
1. Each aspirata (4.) must be considered as proceeding from
its kindred tenuis combined with the spiritus asper. Hence the
Latin writing of ph, th, ch.
2. AVhen, therefore, a tenuis meets in its combination with a
spiritus asper, it becomes an aspirata ; as, for instance, the words
ivl, Se'xa, auTos, when they throw off their terminations to be com
bined with riyiipx, make
sipritxepos, oeytf/x.epof, auSyfJiepOf.
See about these and similar instances, Buttmann's Leiilogus, II. 109.
32
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. The same takes place in distinct words ; as (om) ou% halut,

and with the addition of the apostrophus,
30.)
ilih, an'xp'ov : avTi, avr'av&' Siv.
Obi. 1. The Ionic dialect retains the tenues in both cases : as it' ten, tlx us,
IrititiftiTiraai, xxratrtf for xaSarif, (from x*3' arte.) Compare $ 1G. Obs. 1. e.
Obs. 2. A remarkable change of the tenuis takes place, when there is another letter
between it and the tpirilui, as in riînrn, four-hone carriage, from titjix- and
"rrts: it occurs also ill some Attic contractions, Uu/tirm for to </isr, (see 29.
Obt. 4.) fcfiht from
and iSV!.
18.
1. There is in the Greek language a law, by which one of two
successive syllables beginning each with an aspirata, and gene
rally the first, is converted into the tenuis of the same organ.
This takes place without exception in all reduplications: as
inQikmz, x.t%ojpr,x.a, t/Sti/lu, instead of (pEp, xEX>
But this law is observed only in few instances of inflections and
derivations, and the termination
of the imper. has this pecu
liarity, that it has no effect on the preceding syllable, but is itself
converted into n, as for instance rvpSnrt, imper. Aor. 1. pass.
2. Some few words had already two aspirata in their root, the
first of which was consequently converted into a tenuis. When
ever the second is altered by some other law of formation, the first
re-appears as an aspirata ; for instance,
Root 0PE: present rpiq>u, I nourish ; fut. Sfye\}> ; deriva
tives rpotyri, SpiTtT-npiov, hpiiMfj-x.
But such r law of formation may already have occurred in the
principal form, (nomin. or pres.) stated in the Lexicons, and not
in some of the derivative forms; whence arises a seemingly oppo
site case, (rpitpco, bpi-^m,
rpiyls,) which is, however, essen
tially the same :
Root PIX: nom. $pl%, hair; gen. rpiy^s, dat. pi. Spijiv, de
rivative rpiyj>ai.
There are but a few verbs, (see in the list of Anomalous Verbs
&ra, AO, Spuirru, rpex^, rvifu,) and the adjective -ra%vs,
on account of its comparative 'biaam, ( G7.) which belong to
these two cases.
Obt. 1. In some words the Ionic dialect changes the first aspirata, and the Attic the
second, and vena vice ; as, xiriir, Jon. xiBi/i, iwiSSn, itrav^x, Ion., i9iuri, 'nbxyrx.
4 But the form fytlfum, (for wtlfun,j from r(i and ti/w, compared with Sgaeev,
a contraction of Tugieea, shews that even without a tpirilui atpcr before the {, the
tcnues readily became aspirata!.
ACCUMULATION OF CONSONANTS.
Obs. 2. The passive termination 3n, and what is derived from it, operates only
on the preceding 3 of the verbs i>i!i, to sacrifice, Siirxi, ' place, iS>tx, \<rl$tn, tiSu',-.
There is no change in any other verb ; for instance, \x,int, agSwSw, (from 3>,)
SitfSiif, i3{i^ny, ttXixSni.The aor. 1. of the imper. pass, is the only certain in
stance with regard to the termination 3< of the imper. See below the verb tISh/ii,
J 107- Obs. 1. 5. The imper. ifiQi from fti/i), and the Homeric t$i*3i, (see SvVx,)
are deviations.All other terminations afford no examples for this rule ; for we
find SUSt, KgS<&, t>7av9i, &c.
Obti 3. In compound words the rule is followed only in ixi^nj/a, armitlice, from
VtT*J an^
*rtr'X"i see the anomalous verb
, AmfJW, where the requi
site aspiration, (according to 17- 2-) the before the spiritus atper, (ifii, ifi;,') ia
omitted. There is no change in any other compound ; iQvfxiva, i/npi^v^tis, a>9fi(H, &c. '
Obi. 4. This law extended also to the tpiritus asper, which it converted into a
/rail, as may be clearly seen in the following verb :
Root 'EX, preterit
I have, fut.
deriv. \xmxif.
But the spiritus generally remains unchanged ; as, &fii, ifaim, fei, tStt.
19.
1. The immediate meeting of consonants produces a kind of
harshness, which the Greek language avoids.
2. Three consonants, or one consonant and a double letter,
cannot, (except in compounds, as Suaipâpros, 'ixirruois, ex4>vx<>>,)
stand together, unless the first or last be a liquid, or unless there
be a y before a palatal letter; as for instance iteyifoeis, axknpos;
riyâ. In other cases Greek writers either strive to avoid this
accumulation, or one of the consonants must give way ; see in
stances below about the perf. of the pass, voice ; ex. gr. iatpik-aSai,
3. But even the meeting of two consonants only may produce
a harshness, and there are some fixed rules to avoid it, stated ia
the following .
Obt. 1. The introduction even of a third consonant facilitates the pronunciation
in some rarely occurring instances. When through the omission of a vowel the
liquid ft or comes to stand immediately before the liquid X or (, the media (/3, S,)
which is of a kin to the first, is introduced ; as from
comes îrn^/Sji'a, mid.
day ; from fci/tixvrxt arose the Epic /tlftfiXtrxi : Mf has gen. itlftf.
Obs. 2. Transposition sometimes, but equally rarely, puts a consonant in a
more convenient place. Thus the nomin. xr<4 comes from the root riTKN, retained
in the formation of the cases tuxnt, rvxi), (see the Anomalous Declensions.) But
transpositions not suggested by euphony, especially in the pronunciation of liquids,
will sometimes occur in all idioms, some of which the polished language does not
scruple to use, as in the formation of the aor. 2., xi{9a/, ?sr{a3, or for the sake of
the metre, MfsXst for xjJi' : and also versa vicej aja^ris for ir(**tf, liie}if>s fr
Af<W, etc.
D
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obt. 8. The meeting of two consonants was still more frequent in the old lan
guage j one of them was subsequently dropped, but poets often retained such a con
sonant for the sake of the metre, or to strengthen the sound of a word, as <rr<Xi,t;,
irriXw, and their compounds, instead of n'kt/tif, tri'kn. This also serves to explain
how xxptii, on the ground, and %SzfixXif, low, are connected.
Ois. 4. The r, on the contrary, frequently creeps in before other consonants ; as
for instance the Ionic-Attic ituikoIs for /nxfif, and thus arose the forms
exilav,
fi'ityv, SrirSit, and many others, from the more ancient
xiScw, Mirn, (whence
fuyuit &0.) cr&iy, Sec.
20.
1. Two mutce of different organs can meet, in Greek only, when
the second is a lingual. Hence the steady rule :
A tenuis can stand only before a tenuis, an aspirata only
before an aspirata, and a media before a media,
ex. gr. surd, vuxror, ayftos, (fi&i'vw, (?&zkvpos.
2. Hence when two heterogeneous consonants meet in the
formation of a word, the first generally must assume the property
of the second. For instance, the addition of the syllables ror, Im,
&Eir, makes
of ypdpu, I write,ypznros, *j3o]V,
of wXe'xai, I plait,nXtyfids.
3. In case of two combined homogeneous consonants, no change
is undergone by one alone, but always by both. Thus Ima, ox.ru,
give eôfjuos, 07SW, and when of two tenues, the second, owing to
the spir. asp. ( 17. 2. 3.) is changed into an aspirata, the first
undergoes the same change ; as
ewTct, 7)ix.epa^<pv)f/.tpos, lasting seven days,
wxrx
wyfi' oXw, the whole night.
4. Only the prep. Ix remains unchanged before all consonants ;
as Ix&E~yai, Ix&ouvai, Exj3aXXe<v, IxyEVEO&ai, extpeiyw. See 26. 6.
21.
1. The reduplication of a consonant is not so frequent in the
Greek, as for instance in the Germ, language, and beside the
semivowels X, /a, v, p, and a, it is the r, which is most frequently
doubled.
2. Whenever there is a simple vowel placed before the p in the
formation or composition of a word, the beginning p of the word,
from which it is derived, is always doubled ; as
eppsww, apptnw, from piiru with s and a
we/x'ôojfrom Kept and few.
,. .
See 82. and 120. 6. But this is not the case with diphthongs ;
as evpuaror, (from tZ and ptivyv/ju.)
3. The aspirates are never doubled, but take the kindred tenuis
before; as
Zaar^w, Botxjôr, Ylirêvs.
Obt. 1. The non-Attic poets frequently double the consonant for the sake of the
metre ; for instance, Smt, Srri, irrcn, ii<rt, for , &c. i and
rxirfm, for
'X> rmi$$s. This, however, is not done arbitrarily, but frequently in some words,
and never in others, (as Hn,'tnj, tttm, an/us,) yet mostly with semi-vowels. {See
also about these reduplications, } 27. Obt. 14.)
OAs. 2. Sometimes, but much less frequently, they employ a simple consonant,
where the usual language has a double one ; as 'AîXiut, 'oWiiif, (for 'A^jXXi^,
'Ofcrnfe,) and hence they also neglect doubling the {, as
from pit*.
| 22.
1. When the letters /3, ic, <f, and y, x, stand before an a, they
are converted along with this a into the kindred double letters 4or
ex. gr. the termination of <su of the fut. makes of
\eliru Xtl-^/u, yp&tpu ypi-\u,
\iyu \iifii, seixco fii^cu,
and the termination m, mv, of the dat. pi., makes of
"Apafief Apa4"> xipax.es x6pa%tv.
2. But here the prep, ex is likewise excepted : for instance
ixowtû. See 26. 6.
Obs. 1. It must not be supposed that the ^, when it proceeds from fir and ft, and
the J, when it proceeds from yt and x'i were always pronounced like bi or/>, gt
or cht. If that were the case, the double letters would have been a useless inven
tion. The fact is, that before the r the letters y and x are changed into x, and fi
and f into sr, and are then written together in the form of and ^. This is clearly
proved by a comparison with the Latin tcribo, acripsi.
Obs. 2. Though the ? is likewise a double letter proceeding from *i, ( 3.) yet in
the formation and inflection of words it never occurs as proceeding from these letters,
except in some adverbs of place formed with the addition of the syllable it, as
A3'wji for ath, ( 116.)
23.
1. Labials before an v in the middle of a word, are constantly
changed into pt, as (in the perf. of the pass, voice, and in the for
mation of words,)
yq&Qco yQxy.-n,-fi.
2. The palatals and Unguals are likewise frequently changed
before y., viz. x and % into y, as
nXixw nhiy'iMt, Ttv%o> tirvypax,
D2
36
and S, &, r,
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
into <r, as
0J. But in the general formation of words, the palatal and lingual consonants
are frequently left unchanged before ft, as ix/tii, I&a*, H/ft, xtuS/tin, rir/u; . there
are also other instances peculiar to some dialects ; as !$>, ((wn,) gives /om'ce Siftri,
and usually <r/uh
24.
1. The Unguals
&, t, , can stand only before liquids, only
before y. they are frequently converted into a, according to the
preceding .
2. Before other Unguals they are changed into <s, as
r$tti ViS-hm, TTifocO WENT-Te'oV.
3. They are generally dropped before a, ex. gr.
aSai jjc-au, OTEi'Sa; sstl-ou, auixarm au^n-ai,
Obt. With regard to the changes of r in the abbreviations of xxra, see 117. Obt.
25.
1. The consonant v usually remains unchanged only before
S, &, and t. Before labials it is converted into /x, and before
palatal letters it is changed into y, which is pronounced like vg.
Thus, for instance, the compounds of aim and ev become
ovi/.ltiayju, kfx.ficilvio, av^Lû, /*4'fXor>
eyxotXv, ovyyttris, 7XiEigi&>, *7XJUObt. 1. The addition of an enclitic, (J 14. Obt. 2.) constitutes an exception for the
sake of distinctness, but only in writing ; as rhyi, oW(.
2. Before liquids the v is changed into the same liquid, as
avKKtyu, eXXei'sw, e/H/ae'wu, avpfinru,
but the prep, ev generally remains unchanged before j, IvgaVrw.
3. Before a and the v is partly retained in compounds, partly
converted into a, and partly thrown off", (see Obs. 2.) but in inflec
tions the v generally disappears before a, for instance in the
dat. pi.
4. If in addition to the v, a S, 5, or v, (according to 24.) has
been rejected along with it, the short vowel becomes a long
one; as
"ssivr-is, 9r-ov rv+avrsr, tv\JW, ( 46.)
MOVEABLE FINAL LETTERS.
37
for which purpose, (according to 27. 2.) e is changed into ei,

and o into ou, as
oiriv$-a, flit, avel-aw exovt-w, dat. ixov-aiv.
Obi. 2. The exceptions to these rules, as r'ufatrai (2. perf. pass, of f,) rixaieis,
tXfuts, are but very few and easily remembered by practice.
Obi. 3. 'Ev remains constantly unchanged before r and , (as bnim.)2l and
xiXn convert their before a single tr also into <r, (rvtriri*, trxXUrurcs,) but if there
be another consonant following and before , fit rejects it altogether, (rirrnfia, <rurxiifa, ruûyta,) but iratX/ commonly retains it, (raXltmus.)"Ayctt simply throws
off the wherever there is no reduplication, (as iyim$n, iyafptti,) iyxeHtris,
iyax\vrtf.
Obi. 4. The ancients also pronounced the , at the end of a word, when the next
word began with a consonant, according to the principles of this , particularly in
the articles and prepositions. They would, for instance, pronounce tJ /5*//k, it
tin xnprZ, like nfifivftit, Iftruf), tvyKa^rZ. In ancient monuments, where the
words are not separated, we frequently find them written thus.
26.Moveable final Letters.
1. Some words and terminations have a double form, with and
without a consonant at the end ; the former is commonly em
ployed before a vowel, the latter before a consonant.
2. Of this nature is especially the moveable v, orv EpsX.xt/s'ixbv
which may either be thrown off or retained by the dat. pi. in m,
and in verbs by all the third pers. ending in ev and ty, as
zsaaiv eiwev avro, aaai yaq eiirs tovto,
ETwj/EV EptEj ETWlJ'E OB,
\tyovafo avro, Xeyovai vovro,
risnmi vita3 rihwoi xrx.
1 3. The following words and forms have the v 1$\xvtixov, viz.
the o-iv, which denotes locality, (from the dat. pi.) as 'OXviJ-nlqcaiv,
( 116.) the Epic end-syllable <piv, ( 56. Obs. 9.) the numeral
Eixoffiv, but which may also be used without the v before a vowel,
the adverbs nt^vaiv and voffipiv, the enclitic particles xev and vvv,
( 14.) and sometimes the demonstr. (j ( 80. Obs.)
4. The case is exactly the same with the s in ovrcas ovru, and
in /ae'%?",
: but the latter two are also frequently found with
out the s before a vowel.
Obi. 1. The Ionians cast off the even before a vowel. Poets, on the contrary,
use it before a consonant to effect a position ; and even in Attic prose it was fre
quently employed for the sake of intensity. It is besides met with in correct edi1 So called, because it was considered as not properly belonging to the termination,
and as being annexed to the final vowel merely to avoid the hiatus. See Obi. 2.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tions, conformably to ancient HISS, and inscriptions, without any regard to the
word which follows, at the end of sections and hooks ; in short, wherever the word
is not closely connected with the subsequent one.1
Obs. 2. This last circumstance clearly shews that this > is not, as is commonly
taught, a mere contrivance for euphony's sake ; but this , as well as the other final
letters of the same kind, really is an ancient grammatical form, which was dropped
before consonants, when the language was polished. Hence there are also other
forms, which cast off their final letter in the Ionic dialect, or for the metre's sake,
as the adverbial terminations Sin and xn : for instance, &>.Xe3t for HxXtSit, trtXXxxi
for mkkaxti, irgi/ix and arfifixi.The in compounds with the alpha privalivum
is exactly of the same nature with the f lfi\xurixi>, as for instance, italrui. (See
below, 120.)
6. The particle o, not, no, takes a x before consonants, and
consequently a x before the spiritus asper, ex. gr.
ou taaqifn, ovx. Eveyiv, oi/j(, Sgreriv.
But -when it closes a sentence, the x is dropped ; ex. gr. toDto 8'
ou, but this not. Ou, dkX' oravNo : but if
6. The prep. IS;, out, has this form merely before vowels, and
at the close of a sentence, ex. gr.
1% tfMov, eQotou, xaxwv e'S; :
but the a, which sticks in the is dropped before all consonants,
and it remains a x, hence
. ex rovrov, ex otka<j<ms, ex yrii.
And this x continues unchanged, at least in writing, even in com
pounds, in which it constitutes the exceptions stated, 20. 4. and
22. 2.
Obi. 3. That the two words six and ix end in a , is no real exception to the rule
of 4. 4. for both, being unaccented, belong to those little words, which are so
closely combined with the next, that they form a separate word only for the mind,
not for the ear. Hence one throws off its x at the end of a sentence, and the other
employs in that case the fuller form in J.
27.Of the Interchange of the Vowels.
1. Vowels are mutable in Greek as in other languages, with
out being subject to any steady law. The change is made through
either inflection, or derivation ; as rplitu, I turn, %Tpqniov, I turned,
rpbno!, a turn, mode.
2. This mutability comprises also the shortening and lengthen
ing of a vowel, commonly attended with some. other change. Thus
when e and o are lengthened for some reason or other, they are
1 Metrical motives induce modern critics to place this also at the end of most
kinds of verses, though the following verse begins with a consonant.
INTERCHANGE OF THE VOWELS.
39
seldom converted into n and u, but e commonly becomes et, and

o on. Compare 25. 4.
3. These changes constitute another principal peculiarity of
the dialects, which are reviewed in the following Observations :
1. The Ionic dialect in particular lengthens the i and < of other dialects in this
manner, but chiefly only when there is a semi-vowel following, as {uhti iYhm, iruf,
for ivtt, strange, tvtxa, on account of, irrif, over; vWo*, apiofta, TtvXvt,
for toret,
disease, its/iu, name, vcXls, much, xipn, girl, or when there is another vowel fol
lowing, as Xtitn for xiit, rrusi, cave, xt'*"ii golden, for -us, of which licences
poets, and especially the Epics, also avail themselves. But this, as we observed about
reduplication, ( 21. OA*. 1.) is not done arbitrarily; no one, for instance, ever
allowed himself this licence with 1rii.1t, ens, fU'i, <r<f<, etc.
2. When A and before a vowel are lengthened in the Ionic dialect, they become
m and oi, as siraV, eagle, Jttt, always, Jumce aliris,
*<x, ffrast, Ionice rolv3. In other instances the Dorians, Ionians, and poets do the reverse : they say,
for example, SSigi for fSiiJi, (from hixtu/ii,) /, xpirtmt, x'f i (Sen- f Xl'ti) fr
û'r, &c. ; the ancient language has fitXirBi instead of /Wxs<r3i, (see 4. OA*. 3.)
and instead of the accus. in <v the Dorians have . (See the second Declension.)
4. Instead of < and to the Doric and Ionic dialect frequently has , and before
an r even for v, as x<c for *';, or (,
i>.ff Tor ttiXts, slave, it, (also
Ionic,) for tot, M<rf* and Moifx (or Mai/fx, xxtift* for xxtvem, (from uxauu.)
5. The n mostly proceeded from a, which prevailed in the ancient language, and
continued the characteristic sound of the Dorians, who generally employ the long
tt for ti, as &fU(K for rifUû, fufut for fn/tti, rxtxi for rntxt and this likewise takes
place in the solemn poetry of the choruses. (See 1, 2, and 13.)
6. But when the Ionians, (in a few solitary instances,) change the into *, the a
is short, as in ifxfuTx for itnfoix, r&xXoix, etc. : hence the x must not be pronounced
long as in the Doric in such Ionic forms as xixxrfixi, (from x3,) niexpfyix for
furnttfifim.
I. The Ionians else prefer the , and commonly use it for the long a, as nuipv,
ftfiti, for -at, mo, nuts, for ar,o, xipts, in<r*is, Sitrfc, for Ixrois, physician, S*fa,
armour, (gen. l)c*^v. * ;,-.) trenfftt, trpnypx, for Taxtra-u, xoxyfjLx. Hence also nji/f, yttws,
for vf, >
and even >? for a/ in the dat. pi. ft, n, of the first declension.
8. The Ionic dialect has the instead of only in some inflections, (as fixnxiix,)
and in the diphthong u, which the Ionians frequently resolve into *<, as xXnis for
uXtis, iyyn'in for iyyun, fiariXni* for fae-iXilx, ( 28. OA*. 3.) The Dorians have,
before vowels, n instead of u, as cxftyot for enputt.
0. The Ionians are also apt to change the a before a liquid or vowel into t, as
j-Ua-igec for Titrffitois , four, 'iorr.v for xornt, masculine, otXos for ilxXts, glass, fit'ut for
praat, and in the verbs in xtj, (see 105. OA*.) In other instances they have a for
I, as rexiru, vxftttt, for ret**, Tiuyu, ft'tyxSts for piy&ts.
10. It is a peculiarity of the Ionic-Attic dialect, when a long a stands before e, to
change the former into i, and the latter into * : as, for instance, Xiit, nation, "tilt,
temple, are Attice Xu\s, tuis, ^txtfuu, I use, is Ionice xtiv/txi, and thus the Ionic
gen. in w is accounted for by the most ancient form in xt, (see the first Declension*.)
II. In the compounds of aura;, and the words SxZ/ia, wonder, (xu(ix%ti, Sec.)
and Ttxuftx, wound, the Ionians change the ov into no, (not oi/,) l/Mtortt, \uurtt,
2 This change also takes place in the adj. "Xttts, tit, for iXxts,tt, in the gen. nan for
, from taut, and in several names in Hot, as Min/.<t, ' Af*.$ixxts, or ->, but not
in those in 4(, a oitiusut.
40
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
(see 74.3.) Stiupx, r;*^., The simple airh is unchanged by genuine Ionic
writers ; and u'utIi is used merely for i cuiris. (See 29. Obi. 6.)
12. Instances of other changes are : rx/ixXis, Dorice TcfixXjf,Srt/t*, jEolice
hvfut,iri*, Ionice ir'm, hearth.
Observation on the lengthening of Syllables in general, (to 21 , and 27-)
13. The mere poetical lengthening of i and e is commonly effected in the Ionic
way, by changing them into u and nr. (04j. 1.) The is very seldom converted into
u, as "hit, Axiwts, for id, bmvres.When , i, v, in common language short, are
long in the ancient or poetical language, (as 'lkito with the middle syllable long,
ini with the long a, and some others,) it is not apparent in writing, except some
times through the accent, as in 7$ for Iris.
14. But in the most ancient writing they had no means to denote the lengthen
ing of a syllable, the letters i and serving at the same time for n and u, and for i
and mi, and the consonants, (according to $ 21. Obt. 1.) not being written double.
The writing continued uncertain until the grammarians settled it at least for the
language in common use.
15. The grammarians also introduced into the ancient poets signs to denote
syllables metrically lengthened by reduplication, or long vowels and diphthongs.
But the practice was never perfectly settled. Such words were frequently written
in the common way, and the correct metrical pronunciation was left to the learned
reader*. There are many traces of this in the poetical works handed down to us :
as ixitt, ( //. . 342. %. 5.) with a long syllable in the middle, and tn/teifan, ( Od. . 434.)
where the p ought to be sounded double, and to be written double, as in iupttSit.
And when we find in Homer the first syllable of 'Atro'AXwre;, xTentrSxi, 0-vn%ls, fy't,
employed as a long one, it may be doubted whether this was done by lengthening
the vowel, or doubling the consonant.
10. In modern times it has frequently been proposed to restore the ancient cus
tom so far as not to double the consonants ; which proposal has indeed been partly
adopted, but in a very wavering and uncertain way. Beginners ought to be informed of this circumstance, that they may not be misled on finding sometimes
mnXXHytit, and sometimes irtXnym with the same quantity, and seeing in the same
editions the reduplication observed in some words, and not in others.
But there is also frequently a double consonant close to a long vowel ; as ftmXXn,
sVvtoftj Hrrvv, Krufris, 'T/uiTTts, \\v**w, xguV***, xftirrtn. This is likewise the case
with
(Ion. irg^rr*,) Hx^xgro;, (Ion. Tlopnvfflt^) KtiQirrif, in which the vowel
must be lengthened. Several editors prefer the ancient orthography in proper
names, and write Kmris, Uxetnris, Kxfiris, &c. The proper names of places in drrx
come from -tier* : 3x#T#w"r, ntinxuvrrcu, *A^yniirexi, &c. But Iiîxivnu .evftts,
with ?i>(xxirit( short, were already in use among the ancients.(See Buttmann'i
Complete Greek Grammar, 21. Oil. 9.)
28. Contraction.
1. A vowel, before which is another vowel in the same word,
is called vocalis pura, because it sounds pure, that is to say,
without being introduced by a consonant ; and especially the
end-syllables beginning with a vowel, as a, or, w, &c. are called
pure, when they are preceded by another vowel, as in ooipia,
8 The same was done in the opposite case, when long vowels were to be shortened.
See $ 7. Obi.
CONTRACTION.
41
2. The characteristic difference between the Ionic and Attic

dialect, is that the former is in most instances fond of the meet
ing of vowels, and the latter mostly avoids it. (See, however,
Obs. 1. and 5.)
3. The usual remedies are
1. ) the elision, when one vowel is rejected, and the other
remains unchanged. This is chiefly done, when single
words meet together, and in compound words ; see 29.
and 120.
2. ) the contraction, when several vowels are combined toge
ther in a long syllable. This is done conformably to
the following main principles :
a. Two vowels form a diphthong of themselves ; thus arises
ei and oi from tT and oT, as, vs'tyû nlyêi, alSoV xl$o7, ( 49.)
The other proper diphthongs are generally not formed in
this manner, but the improper always,
a, ri, u, from a'i, w, cat, as, ynpai ynpx, ( 54.) prii<s<sa. priaui,
XaJiYor Xutos, ( 68.)
b. Two vowels are converted into a long kindred sound ; and
we generally find
i from e* tei'xe* %" xe'? xmp, (heart,)
ei from ee wo/ee woi'ei, phSpov pilSpov, {stream,")
'sco and aou -n/xaoptsv ti/xw/xev,
r
tiu.dou ti/xo),
u irom !
oa. ana vn aiooa aiSu,

'pmT&OTjrE iMahurt,
(oo zaXoos wXour,
OS
/AIIT&OO/AEV
E^ll'ffS'OE E/Alfl-Sotf,
puff&oCplEV,
eo niy^sos rtlypvs,
woie'o/xev voiovjxsv.
c. The doubtful vowels, (a, i, v,) absorb, when short, the fol
lowing vowel, and thus become long ; as,
at$\os, contest, (short a, ton.) a&Xor, (Att.) rlpae rifu*
X/ior Xibr, (native o/Xi'or,)"I<pu "I<pi, (dat.)
'tyfivis and as, (short v,~) Ix^vs, (from the sing. x$w.)
d. A long syllable absorbs a vowel without any other change :
this occurs especially with
a, e, o,
before and after every kindred long syllable, and before the
u, as for instance,
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
TifjAu ti/au, Tloaaoduv, (long a.,) noiSaJy,

\SLas Kas, (*/one,) /jLtaSoouai //.HtSovoi,
4. Whenever any diphthong, the improper included, formed
with an i, is to undergo a contraction with a preceding vowel, the
two first vowels are treated according to the laws above stated,
and the either becomes an iota subscriptum, as in
(06s. II. to 103.)
dst-Scv x-$w, aoi-Sri di-Uri,
ri/A-asi and rip-dri ri/A-gi,
or it is thrown out, if the iota subscriptum be not admissible, as in
/xktS'-oeiv (aioS-ovv, "OiroEir 'Onovs, ( 41. 06s.)
Obs. 1. These principles apply only to the regular and analogical contraction.
Several exceptions and peculiarities will be found below in the Declensions and Con
jugations ; and with regard to the crasis or contraction of two words, see the fol
lowing J. But the Attic writers have not the contraction in every instance, in
which it might take place conformably to the above laws, as may be seen farther
on. and by attentive reading.
Obs. 2. The Ionians, on the contrary, as has already been observed above, com
monly neglect the contraction, and frequently resolve a long syllable into its indi
vidual parts, though long ago disused by the other Greek tribes ; as, for instance,
the second pers. sing, of the pres. indie, in the pass, voice rixnxt instead of rirrr,,
even fiXU*^ iwmaiu*, &c, instead of f'Xii, which commonly is again contracted into
$iXri : (Attice ti/ttii, fiXu, according to Obs. 3. to 103. The Doric dialect has also
many resolved forms in common with the Ionic.
Obs. 3. It is likewise owing to this propensity of the Ionians that we so fre
quently find in the Epic poets diphthongs separated in some words, as mtiipfor <ruV,
for etyyutr, &c. ; rowels extended, as <paa.iîv) Kpr,nvov1 for
and the Ionic introduction of an i, as it for , r,ix,cs for fix,.!, iuxi<ri
for uKoffiy aiiXflog, Touriau, &C1.
Obs. 4. Sometimes the Ionians favor the meeting of vowels by throwing out a
consonant, as rifxes for t'i^xtcs, (see 49.) Compare also ti/xtih/, &c. in Obs. 3 to
5 103.
Obs. 5. There are, however, instances, where the Ionic dialect has the contraction,
and the Attic has it not ; as Ui, with a long , Ion. for !t(of. The Ionians have also,
in common with the Dorians, a peculiar contraction of u into tu, as, rXtuttt for
9-xiif, xoi-tiifiiiii from
for which we commonly have -oi/ttios. But the
Ionic dialect in the ancient Epic poets makes a much more frequent use of the con
traction than the later Ionian prose-writers.
04s. C. The ancients frequently expressed all the vowels in writing, and left the
contraction to the speaker, which is called synizesis. This custom has been retained
1 The student ought, however, to remember that grammarians speak of these
separations and introductions in constant reference to the common form ; but this
common form itself may be a contracted form, derived from such a separation. This
may be proved in some instances, as in it/' for tu, from its, since there is no word
il : separations, besides, occur only in a very limited number of forms.
HIATUS
CRASIS.
43
in many nttanoea in the works of the ancient poets, especially the Kpics, ex. gr.
II. 282. Apjtny 3i rtf9i, where the terminations f(in aud dta must be pronounced
as one syllable, a<peu>i Ji f'5> : /3. 490.
Si pa Jraj btln, (pronounce
In the Attics we have frequently in this way 3iif, Biiy, which else never occurs as a
contraction, and some proper names as NioyrAi/M?. See about Xuâxa, ot>au in the
list of Anomalous Verbs; and about a synizesis between two words, 29. the last Obs.
Obs. 7. That kind of contraction stated under d. (fixiu, pxii, and such like,)
might be considered as an elision, (viz. the dropping of the 1,) but it is more correct
to give that name only to those cases, in which one vowel is merely thrown off
without intending a mixed sound. This, (excepting such compounds as Way* for
ixi-aym,) occurs in the middle of words chiefly only in some Ionic abbreviations,
as <pofiio for ftput. (see y 105. Obs.) But in the first-mentioned instances the lan-<
guage evidently intended a mixed sound,as is shown by the analogy of the other
cases, and the circumflex where it takes place, (Obs. 9.)aud the already existing
one long vowel was retained for that purpose.
Accent and Quantity.
Obs. 8. When neither of the two syllables, which are to be contracted, is accented,
the mixed sound generally is also not accented ; as -rigi'rJ.a, iriftatt, emit r. <rifm-Aai/;,
triftuv.
. Obs. 9. But if one of the two original syllables has the accent, the mixed sound
also takes this accent, which, if it be the penultimate or antepen. syllable, is regu
lated by the general rule, ( 10. and 11.) If it be on the last syllable, it takes the
circumflex, (tits mt, fiXiet fiXa, &c.) unless the original form had the acute accent
on the last syllable, which, however, is seldom the case, and then the acute accent
is retained, as !%r, irrxitio-toW, Suit S<. Both is grounded on the theory
stated in 9. 3. and in the Obs., aud exceptions in either instance are rare, (see,
for instance, the actus, in i, $ 49.)
Obs. 10. In some few contractions the accent is transposed ; as atfyesi(yi;,
( 120. Obs. 6.) hxieerttiiXnros, &c. ( 41. Obs. 7 ) X!"""XV"""> &c- ( 60- 6.)
See also the other cases of irijiVxauf, &c, 36. Obs.
Obs. 11. Though every mixed sound is essentially long, yet the pronunciation in
some declensions, which have a contracted at or /, has again obscured this sound, so
that it is sometimes short. This is the case with the neuter pi. in , asriî, (see
J 64. Obs.) and a few datives, as KXi/3i from Kxi/3*f, (in Herod.) to which must
be added iat, ft) and a few similar Epic forms, (see 50. Obs. 6.) But some of
these instances at least may also be considered as elisions of the first vowel, as may
be seen in the 06*. to 53.
29.Hiatus Crasis.
1. When of two words immediately following each other, the
first ends with a vowel, and the second begins with a vowel, the
spiritus, which is heard between them, be it the asper or the
le2iis, produces an effect called a hiatus, still more disagreeable to
the ear of the Greeks, and especially the Athenians, than the
accumulation of vowels in the middle of a word.
This hiatus was not much tolerated in poetry, and hardly ever
suffered in Attic poetry. But even in prose, (excepting the
Ionic,) its frequent recurrence was not liked. ,
44
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obi. 1. The Attic verse allowed the hiatus only after the interrogative rt, after
the particles in and o-igi, and in the expressions ei>3i i!s, unit 7f, ( 70- 1.) i5
&c. &c.
2. The natural remedy against the hiatus is the coalition of
two syllables into one1 ; which is of two kinds: 1.) when one of
the vowels is entirely removed, it is an elision by an apostrophus,
30. 2.) when both are blended together into one sound or
syllable, it is a crasis. The latter, especially in prose, applies
only to a limited number of cases, which will be stated in the
Obs. to this .
Obs. 2. With regard to the crasit, there are first three circumstances to be
noticed:
a.) Every craiii renders the syllable long, ($ 7- 7-0 this distinguishes several of
its instances from the elision through the apostrophus, ex. gr. riXtiSit, xxîtti, (for
ti ix. xxl i(. with a short a.) Hence such as ritlfit must be lengthened in pro
nunciation, and t>.xx, (for rk aAXa,) must be marked with the circumflex, which
some grammarians will not allow, though they accent rakXa. But other cases, like
rctbri, rxirx, (for ri nM, tA kvtcc,) must be treated in the same way for the sake of
uniformity. (Compare $ 28. Obi. 7 )
b.) The iota lubtcriptum takes place only when the i is the last of the vowels,
which are to be contracted ; therefore it is used in from xxl utx, but not is
xit from xxi >*.
c.) There is commonly a ' over the crasis, which sign is called a coronis.
Obi. 3. The crasis is most used with the article : as
oiix, mrl, for i ix, i ixJ,
TaitYxtr'itVj rtZvst, for ro fvavr/ov, ri Xxtf,
Ttntfus, for ri oVo/eoe,
rxttct. rxxl. for rk iuM, ra lor),
1 ., ,
.
, .. txWx,
... tor
. Tn..ayxzx,
a< TX,
, (with
a long
rxyx3a,
xXXx,
>
m , see the preceding
TsXtidif, rxltxof, for Tff X. aS.
J
ortrxiTvt, itri^for a xirxtrut, i ftvflf 8,
with which the less frequent craiis of the ar/i'c. poslposiliv. or pronoun relative
neuter agrees : as
for ii Tsc%i, &i for <3 , &c.
Oil. 4. A crasis is not easily recognised, when diphthongs are absorbed : as
aufMt, for tl iptl,
ixxirims, for tl irx^rStrts,
(see 04s. 2. a.) and
txvt9v} txvtZj (& 7^0 a,r' Txvrofixrev. and such like,
or when d is used on account of the spir. asp. ( 17. 06*. 2.) as for instance,
1 That the r ifiXxufixn cannot be considered as a remedy against the hiatus, may
be seen 26. Obs. 2.
* This rule, through a needless striving for distinctness, is frequently deviated
from, and the writing of x, xxvtutx, and such like, adopted.
' It is unquestionable, that, at least in the most obvious instances, as itrp &Krof,
Oixptt, the only usual contraction of the Attic dialect is that of J with a into a long
i, as im(, (pronounce h/inir,) and wherever we find merely
and the meaning
requires the article, it ought to be xthf, and is mostly written thus in all new
editions. This practice, however, is not safe, the article being also frequently
omitted before &ri(, &t\x. See Heind. ad rial. Phadon. 108.
HIATUS
CRASIS.
45
Satfiarw, pi. Ssi/tarm, for to In* ra l/i.

Snftsriftv, for rsy zuiTiotu.
Obs. 6. The vowels of the article are generally contracted into Z with ln(H,
which comes from the ancient Doric form Unfit, (short a,) for iVtjos : thus,
irlftf, Zrifoi, for d IVlfoe, */ Vrltfo*,
Sxtijov, Sati*;-*, 3on*;ot, for Toy, t*7, w it.
04i. G. The crasis is even known to the Ionic dialect, but this always contracts
set into *>, as rZyaX/ia, rvkvSis, vmx tovtsv, for to <ro revrov, and at the same time
alters the ipir. asper into the /mi's, as
*5fToy, for 0 flUiTdf,AX<w, for oi aXXoi.
The same with ailVoV, tawto, for a uvrie, to aiVo, (twt#.)
Oft. 7. K also frequently makes a crtwif, f. jrr.
xv for *i if,
for xeii it, and x<
xZirura^ xixuvss, xiyZ, for xoti t-rurot, &c. (see OAs. 2. b.)
xura, for xai i7t,
xoTîTn, xtrts, for *) îTi, xou irte,
xZltf, xcixt'a, for xai oTva;, slxia,
%eirtgof} for xaj iVio; for xa< o1
Other long syllables remain unchanged :
mi, xeut xitty for xeu u, sv, tit : kux**, for xxi iT-âv.
The Ionian* and Dorians use * for i: as xif>, xHxurx.
Obs. 8. The particles to!, uirrti, irst, make likewise a long a with the particles a>
and fx, and should therefore be written as cratet, rat,
tvrZi : but we com
monly find t' J, t {, or t' {, &c in which case must not be confounded
with t!.
OA*. 9. Of many other erases, which we leave to the observation of the student,
we only notice
syZfjuu, lyZix, for lyZ tiftut, oToa.
fuvciv, ffilhtxit, Sec. for //aj irtr, i&vztv,
Tftupyev, 9TftiX!ytu, for <T{o tgyou, ixiysv.
Obs. 10. We must also consider as erases all instances, in which the first vowel of
a word is only absorbed by the preceding long syllable: as
Svitxa, for ev'ttlxa,
i&situus, for arou Zhxm, (compare Obs. 4.)
till often erroneously written S'S' <>,
m^fwrt, uuf, uta\, for Z atSfuri, attf,
For distinctness most of these words are, however, noted as elisions with the apostrophus: as
Z 'ymSi, (iy*3k,)tj 'pif*!*,
Vii", (tV',)lyZ 'v to7i, (lv.)*
OA*. 11. Many other contractions were never noted in writing, but left to pro
nunciation, as a synizesis, (compare J 28. OAs.) which, however, is not easily ascer
tained ; ex. gr. iti) ci as an iambus, (Soph. Philoet. 446-) p)i il in Attic poetry
always as one syllable. And in Homer n nVoxiv as a daetylus, {II. i, 446.)
Vr/Ji- | rm, 'nS | or, //. {. 89.
1 That there really is a cr<w* in these instances, just as Qik'ui, pkS, is a real con
traction, is proved by the analogy of many known erases like *3o|i, riri, Sarifa,
fry '",) and by the fact that such an elision never takes place after a short vowel.
To write a erasis distinctly, is often attended with some difficulty, especially when
the absorbed syllable had the accent, which in that case is frequently marked over
the empty space ; as u' "x"r"t {?X"r"-) Such instances, and those stated above,
must be considered as if they were written ftZxupi, r'neriftia, &c.
46
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
30.Of the Apostrophus.
1. In the Greek, as in other languages, a short vowel at the

end of a word before another vowel, is thrown out by elision, and
the apostrophus ' is placed as a mark or sign over the empty
space ; for instance,
lit iy.ov for in\ kfMv :
and if the subsequent word has the spir. asper, the eventually
preceding tenuis, (according to 17. 3.) is aspirated; as
dty' ot, for dltO o5.
2. In prose, some words of frequent recurrence, most commonly
are attended with an elision, especially d\Xd, apa, and apa, dva,
5ja, xara, /xefa, zsapd, diro, vno, dfxfpl, dvri, lul, Se, re, ye : or fre
quent combinations, as vn Aia, (v A/*,) wavr' civ, (forwocvra av,)
and such like. The elision occurs less frequently in other words,
and most seldom in Ionic prose. Poets, on the contrary, avail
themselves of this licence with almost all short vowels j only the
short v, the monosyllables in , i, o, (excepting the Epic pd,) and
the prep, wept never admit the elision.
Obs. 1. If the rejected vowel had the accent, this accent is always dropped in pre
positions and conjunctions ; as i<r' from ari, iXX.' from ikXa, sSt from tiii. In all
other words the accent is always thrown on the preceding syllable, and constantly
as an acute accent : for instance,
(xecxa,) x*V irrrt, (5m,) 3nV tracer, (^y*J,) Qrip' iyv,
(rayaSci,) r*yei&' aS^trai, (iwra,) 'Ixv lagtv.
Obs. 2. To determine when the elision is used in prose, and when not, is attended
with great difficulty, because even 31, ixi, and such like, are often found without an
apostrophus. This difficulty is increased by its being proved that the ancients frer
quently did actually write down the vowel, which is to be dropped in speaking.
Obs. 3- In the Attic dialect the dat. sing, in i and the particle SV; never undergo
an elision, and in Epic poetry chiefly only when there is no possibility of confound
ing them with the usually apostrophed accus. in a and the particle on, as iv 3anV,
Obs. 4. Third persons taking the mutable t, may likewise be apostrophed by poets
in case of need, and the same may be done with the dat. pi. ; only the terminations
am, mi, um, of the first and second decl. most common in the ancient language, are
then assimilated to the terminations ait, (, c, and hence admit of no apostrophus
before a vowel. But the elision of the dat. pi. of the third decl. is avoided, because
it would almost always be like another casus, ending in s. This elision is, however,
sometimes admitted by the intensive Epic form in rn, as xs'tu">
Obs. 5. Poets also apply the elision, (though less frequently,) to the diphth. ai,
but only in the passive terminations //, rtu, rai, c!}m, as fitiktrB' If*, l(Xf? >x">
1 There are also instances of elision quoted of the inf. aor. 1. act. in m, yet none
where the diphthong dropping before^ short vowel leaves the syllable a short one; the
metre everywhere requires or allows a long syllable in that case. All such instance*
GENDER.
That the datives fu), >, were elided, is still very questionable. See Bnttmann's
Complete Greek Grammar. Whatever else is stated as long syllables, which have
undergone an elision, especially xi and , ( 29. Obi. 7- 8.) belongs to Grant, and
o does the teeming elision of ri, ri, >\ 29. Obi. 2. a.) and that of initial vowels (in
the same , Obt. 10.)
With regard to the apocope in if, {, At, (instead of ,) before a consonant,
see below 117. Ob:
31.-0/ the Parts of Speech.
1. There are, strictly speaking, but three principal parts of
speech. For every word, which names or denotes an object, is a
Noun ; the word, by which something is predicated of an object,
is called a Verb ; and all the words, by which the speech thus
formed is particularised, connected, and animated, are comprised
under the name of Particles.
2. But these three principal parts of speech are generally
subdivided, so as to form eight parts of speech in the languages,
with which we are best acquainted. 1.) The Noun, which is
either substantive or adjective, gives 2.) the Pronoun, which also
includes the article ', and 3.) the Participle, which with regard
to syntax is part of the verb. 4.) The Verb remains undivided ;
the Particles are 5.) the Adverb, 6.) the Preposition, 7.) the
Conjunction, and 8.) the Interjection ; but Greek gram
marians commonly rank the latter among the adverbs.
OF THE NOUN AND ITS DECLENSIONS.
32. Of the Gender.
1. The masc. and neut. Gender of the noun is mostly shown by
the terminations, and will be noticed in each decl. It is indicated
in the grammar by the article, b, (he,) w, (she,) to, (it.) See its
declension, 75.
2. Personal denominations, (man, woman, god, goddess, &c.)
always agree with the natural sex, be the termination what it may :
for instance ft hvyimp, daughter, ri mhos, the daughter-in-laiv.
The diminutives in ov are, however, excepted, being always of the
neuter gender ; as to 71/vaiov, little woman, from ywfi, womany,
to (Mtpaxiov, little youth, from [jizTp at, youth.
are, therefore, to be considered as crasn, conformably to the rules laid down in the
preceding ; but, (if the syllable is not written in full as a synizesis,) the apostrophus must be used for the sake of distinctness ; in one case thus, yiHr
for
yiitcu ifuti, (long ,) in the other thus, yifiai soifi, (iirn{i.)
1 See the reason in the Note to 75.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 1. In the class of diminutives mast also be ranked to rixm, or ri rixn,
child, and the pi. raiiixa, used instead of the sing, to denote darling. All
words, however, which are not in immediate contact with such personal neuters,
are always construed in reference to the real sex and number. Homer even says
rlxtn flXi. The word ri itirtitreim, slave, is scarcely to be mentioned here, be
cause this denomination denotes the slave as a thing, and not as a person.
Obs. 2. Hence every personal denomination, common to both sexes, is also generis
communis in grammar: for instance, instead of
(Aic homo,) a woman is
called A xtBfwrm, (hcec fcemina.) It is the same with i and fi
god and goddess,
S and ti Tfapif, tutor and nurse, I and h fuXal, male &ni\ female keeper or guard,
&c., though several of these words have also their own peculiar feminine appella
tions, as n Stu, goddess, which are not so readily used by Attic writers.
Obs. 3. Several names of animals are likewise generis communis, as, for instance,
I and A fiiui, (ox, cow,) i and n Isrircs, (horse.) With regard to most animals, one
and the same gender serves for both sexes; and this gender, when it ismasc.or fem.,
is called genus epiccenum, (as for instance i \ixtt, wolf; i xXarrl, fux.) But even
in those, which are generis communis, one of the two genders applies to the species ;
as o TutTM is a horse in general and in an indefinite way, but a\ a!yn applies to the
whole species. The fem. is mostly preferred ; thus at, t&u, (but only in the pi.)
most commonly denotes horned cattle in general. "Aj*r, bear, and xa/wXts, camel,
when the sex is of no particular importance, are always employed as of the fem.
gender, (A xfxmi, i xapnXts,) even in speaking of the male ; and this is also fre
quently the case with ixafa, stag, and aim, dog. The fem. h iVr signifies like
wise horse, cavalry.
3. The names of trees, as t> (pnybs, beech-tree, 4> virus, pine ; and
of towns and countries, as fi Kdîv&or, ri Klyvitros, fi Aaxetial/Am,
are of the fem. gender, with very few exceptions.
Obs. 4. Of trees, i filr& palm-tree; ixx^xtts, cherry-lree ; I i(mis, wild fig-tree ;
i ximtf, wild olive-tree, are of the masc gender ; and of the names of towns in ts,
'Ofâû'flf constantly is masc, llvXet, 'E<r*3yjaf, 'AXta^rlt, 'o^M-ej, are commonly
so, and some others are sometimes masc. : the plurals in a, like ilxmai, and owing
to the constantly masc. termination of tut, Zs, gen. wurai, at, gen. avrtt, as e iavtrivt,
i SiXiSf, Tifxs. Vet there are also some in cut and as of the fem. gender ; but
perhaps in ancient authors only in poetry, (Pindarus makes 'Or'ms for 'OtrtVf, and
Ax(yas always masc.) else only in later writers, as Slrabo, &c. The names in **
are uncertain, but those most known are fem. : BafivXav is always so, and ZiKvur
commonly. Names of towns ending in tt and , gen. mi, also remain of the neuter
gender; as ri iuvXixw, ri "Atyi.
33.Declension.
1. The Greek declension has the five known cases of other
languages, without any particular form for the Latin ablative,
which is supplied partly by the gen., and partly by the dat.
2. There is an additional number in both the Greek declensions
and conjugations, viz. the dual, when the question is of two. Yet
it is not always used ; many authors do not employ it at all. It
is mostly employed by the Attic writers.
FinST DECLENSION.
3. The dual has only two terminations, one for the nomin., acc,
and vocat. ; the other for the gen. and dat.
4. The Greek grammar has three declensions^ which correspond
to the three first Latin declensions, and the terminations of which
are stated jointly in the following table :
Sing.
2d Dec!.
Nom.
os, Neuter ov
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual.
N.A.V
G.D.
PI.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
DO
COi
0V
e, Neuter ov
or (ojs)
i
a. or v, Neuter like
the Nomin.
u
OIV
E
OIV
a
aiv
at
Si
ais
is
ax
oi, Neuter a
My
01s
ovs, Neuter a
oi, Neuter a
3d Decl.
sr,
on
ffiv
is,
Ef,
Neuter a
or at
Neuter a.
Neuter %
See about what is called the second Attic decl. 37. It is

omitted here for the sake of simplicity.
5. When these terminations are pure, and admit the contrac
tion,
28.) the contracted declension takes place, as it is stated
below with regard to the three declensions. The words, which
admit this contraction in all cases and numbers, are called IXonoiSri,
(completely suffering.) This is always the case with the con
tracted first and second decl., but properly never with the third.
(See 48. Obs. 2.)
04*. 1. The gen.pl. is u in all the three declensions.
Obs. 2. The dat. ting, is i in all the three declensions; in the two first it is the
tola subtcriplum.
Obs. 3. The dat. pi. is properly eti or ci in all the three declensions ; for alt, en,
is only an abbreviation of the ancient form */<ri, <wnv, or mri, un. ( 30. Obs. 4.)
Obs. 4. The vocal, generally is like the nom. Even where it has a separate form,
thenom. is often used instead of it, especially by the Attic writers.
Obs. 5. The neuters have as in Latin three cases alike, (nam. acc. voc.) and their
pi. is in u.
Obs. G. The three Greek declensions are very much like the three first Latin
decl. ; the Greek n is in Latin us, or (in the gen.) is ; n and ui is in Latin um, and
the Greek in general is in Latin m.
Obs. 7. In the two first declensions the nomin. has a particular termination,
which is changed in the other cases. But iu the third decl. the terminations of the
E
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
50
other oases are annexed to the last syllable of the nomin., and commonly with some
alterations. These cases have, therefore, one syllable more than the nomin.; hence
the third declension is also called vtîrToirCwxfa!, and the other two teoevkXttfai.
Obt. 8. The Dual properly is only an old abbreviated form of the pi., which cus
tom afterwards confined to the num!>er 2. This is proved by the conformity of the
pt. ciftftt, Sftfu, (see 72- Obt. (i. 10.) with the dual of the third decl. Jlence we
find especially in Epic poets unquestioned instances of the dual instead of the pi.
They are, however, chiefly in verbs. (See below, 87. Obt. 0.) and in participles,
(//. i. 487. Hymn, in Apoll. 487, &c.)
Obt. 9. With regard to accents, a general rule is, that the terminations of the
gen. and dal., when long and accented, always take the circumflex, but the nomin.,
accut. and vocal, take the acute accent. Let it only be remembered that in the
third decl. the termination of the nomin. and vocal, ting, is not the termination of
a case, according to 30.
34.First Declension.
1. The words in w and as are all masculine, and those in n and
!A feminine.
2. The words in a have in the gen. as, and retain their a in all
the terminations of the sing., when there is a vowel before it, (a
purum, 28. 1.) as <so$la, or an g, as vi^x. The contracted
nouns also retain it, as pt-va, (see Obs. I.) also akxXx, gen. as,
{war-shout,) and some proper names : AriSa, 'AvSgo/xc'Sa, <f>i\oV-ri'Ka, Ti\a, Aion'/xa, which likewise have a long a in the nomin.
3. All the other words in a have ns in the gen., ri in the dat.,
but they resume their a in the acc. and voc. (See MoDua.)
4. The four terminations agree in the pi. and dual. See the
following examples, in which the changes, which the accent un
dergoes according to the general rules, have been attended to.
Sing. 1 h,
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual
N.A.V.
G.D.
Plur.
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
(honor,) ri,(tvisdom,) ft, (Muse,) o,(citizen) h,(young

veavias
HoKlTVlS
MoUira
aolplx
Tipt.7)
VEdVlOt/
aolpias
Mouans noKlrov
ri/xris
vsavia
aolfia
Nloiafi
n/xri
vEan'av
MoC<ra>
Tijj.r,v
oolpiav
vsav/a
nostra
MaDffa
oofyla
TIpUUV
aoipla
ootyiaiv
MotW
MotWiv
isaklra.
TroXiVaiv
teavlx
VEan'aiv
Ti/xa!
ti/xv
Tip< ais
Tiptar
Tfpta!
ootylxi
oolpiwv
ontplais
ootplas
oo<fiai
Moi/<7iZv
"Mouaais
Movaas
nol-Xrai
WohirZv
nokirats
noXiras
veaviai
VEanaJv
VIXVIXIS
veavtas
VEvt'a
FIRST DECLENSION.
Sing. 4i,(rujht,) ^.(optnton,) vi,{trident,)
Nom.
oYxn
Tgiaiva
y.iyjx\pa.
Gen.
yiuy.rii
retains
Dat.
TQialvri
SlXT)
yvuiLvn
Acc.
Si'xw
Voc.
St'xM
Dual
N.A.V. S.'xa
fgia/va
Tgiai'vaty
G.D.
S/xaiv
Plur.
/JLaXcupcci
Nom.
yvu'i/.ai
oYxai
tAXXatpav
Gen.
SlXO/V
lAa-Xot-ipous
TQtalvan
yvdix.au
Dat.
S/xaif
IA%xatpxr
TgiaiWy
yvdifAai
Acc.
oYxaf
Tgi'ayyaj
yvui^xi
Si'xa*
Voc.
51
o,(Atride,)
'Arqzll'ws'Argfi'Sou
'Atê/oV]
'A-rge/Syiv
'At|St]
'Argsi'Sa;
'ArgEi'Saiy
'ArgETSau
"ArgEiSa/y
'ArgEi'Saiif
'Atêi'cW
'ArgeTSai.
Examples for practice will be found in the Appendix.

5. Of the words of the masc. gender ending in %s, the vocat. is
a in those ending in w, and in several compound verbal nouns,
which simply add %s to the consonant of the verb, as ytwy.ir%My
lx,vôTrdi\r,s, ffaiSoTg//3*)r, and also in national names, Yliqansf
2xi5Sw. The others, which are the least in number by far,
have 7> in the vocat, especially patronymics in Ins, (see above
'ATgEl'Sflf.)
OBSERVATIONS.
1. The contracted nouns of this declension are all ikeraSZ, ($ 31. 5.) They all
contract the nomin. into one of the usual terminations, and are then declined regu
larly; only those contracted into a, being originally pure, retain this vowel un
changed, and those in at take the Doric gen. in a, ( Obi. IV. 4.) They are all known
by the circumflex on the end-syllable. The resolved form is generally disused, or has
maintained itself in the Ionic dialect with some alteration, as for instance,
Xurr'utkitvrtj, gen. *, &c. pi. nom. Xtgtra?, acc. Xtturat,
{lonice \wr'in, \ttvrun,) lion's skin.
'Eg/iias'EyiUs, gen. w, pl.'Ef/taT, &c, (Epic, 'f^ttu'a;,)
fiLveucîv, yen. /ivat, pi. ftnai, &c. (7o/f. fit'mt^)
f,a(malso faffit, gen. fa'fpa, &c. (The reduplication of the j is here merely
an accidental peculiarity.)
It is the same with 'A9u5, (originallyua, Ion- 'A3j/iO yn, (from TAA, Ion. yx'ec,
rarely yia,) earl/t.See about the contracted feminines of adjectives, J CO.
II. Quantity. 1. The nom. in a, which has m in the gen., is always short.
2. The nom. in a, which has at in the gen., is mostly long, but also short in seve
ral words. The accent is here a safe guide, as (according to 1 1. 4. 5.) not only all
proparoxylona and properispomena, (as pi vsuja, pup',') have of course a short a, and
it is an invariable rule in this decl. that all oxylona and paroxytona, which have at
in tht gen., are long in the nom., as rta,
trir^x, ifi'ifx, ctfla, &c, excepting only
the numeral (turn, and the proper names Htff\ Kiffa.
E 2
52
-A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. But as to accent a word correctly, the quantity of the end-syllable must be

known, and as this cannot be reduced to plain rules, it will be sufficient at first to
attend to the two following points :
a.) Dissyllabic words in six have the final a long, Gc{"a>) uut the polysyllabic
have the final a Bhort : iXt&tia, (from iXu>>if,) Mn%ut, yXvxiia, (fem. of yXuxvs,)
except the abstract substantives from verbs in sit, as hoXiix from iiiv\\iu, liairiXua,
(royal authority,') from jiatiXsiu: but Parixiia, (queen,) from fixriXtis. Sec 119.
Obs. C.
b.) Substantives of three and more syllables, which are female denomination/, have
the final a short : ^xXrîa, 1 iarugx, "O/ttrux, &c, and the adjective rirtia is short,
though all other adjectivesfem. of this kind have the final a long, as xvfias, zufla, &c.
4. The vocal, a of the masculines in tis, is short ; of those in at, long.The final
a of the dual is always long6. The termination as is long through the whole of this decl., and the acc. pi.
distinguishes itself thereby from the third decl., in which it is short. The Dorians
alone make the acc. pi. of the first decl. short.
6. The acc. sing, in conforms itself to the quantity of the nomin,
III. Accent. 1. It is the characteristic of this decl. that the gen.pl. always has
the accent on the end-syllable, let the word have the accent, where it may, in the
other cases : iUura Mtorat, xxxtSx ixxtSSr. This is owing to this gen. being con
tracted from the ancient form in xut, (see Obs. IV. 3.) Except, however, a.) the
feminines of adjectives and participles, which are bargtona in s,-, as live;, >)\i>m,
amis, xlrlxulritn, rtixrSfiitts, nrvxri/tltm : b.) the substantives Xi^n'i usurer,
si irnrlxi, monsoons, and ifin, sort offish.
2. Substantives of this decl. retain the accent, whenever the general rules allow
it, on the same syllable, which has the accent in the nomin. sing, (as for instance,
nomin. pi. o-iifiai, voc. TikTrx-) Only the voc. iirmra, (from iirrirxs, master,) is
excepted ; for the Homeric forms, ftnrltrx, &c. are accented in the same way in the
nom. in Obs. IV. 2.The feminines of the adjectives in throw the accent again,
whenever the end-syllable allows it, where the masculine has it, as &\ie;, fem. ',
pi. a\m, k%xi.
3. All accented genitives and datives, (see n/in,) have the circumflex. See $ 33.
Obs. 9.
IV. Dialects. The Doric has in all terminations a long x instead of n, (ripi, as,
5, at :) the Ionic commonly has n instead of the long a, (trifin, ns, n, nt, /ixxxifx, r,i, y,
at, i twin, Sec.) excepting the acc. pi. But Epic poets retain the a in Bsx, 9if, &c.
and in some proper names in as, hituxs. One of their peculiarities is the n instead
of the short x in suit**, SxuXXn, commonly xtittx, "ZxixXa ; and the reverse in the
Homeric vocative tiftip& for tipfn.
2. The ancient language had likewise masculines in &, which continued in some
dialects, (and consequently also in the Latin.) Homer, and the other Epic poets,
have still frequently Wkotx in the nomin. instead of irxims, and finrltrx, &c.
3. The oldest form of the gen. sing. masc. is it, and of the gen. pi. of all termina
tions Sm. Hence we find in the Epic poets, 'Arfuiat, Mivcxut, &c.
4. The Dorians contracted these genitives into x, as rev 'Acju'Ji, rat MsurSt, (for
Movrut,) rut 'Arfuiat. This Doric gen. has continued in use in the sing, of a few
words, especially of proper names ; as
'Ai//3f, (Annibal,) nv'Atnjix,
rev owtSoSriex, fowler.
1 [This is an adj. converted into a subst., being contracted from lakrwus, '.
E. H.B.I
SECOND DECLENSION.
53
5. The Iouians on the contrary made of it1, (see J 27. Obs. 10.) hut the u'
has no influence on the accent: *t\Wi, ( 12. Obs. 4.) and of k>un, imvtiui.
Hence the common language has retained this gen. sing, in the names of a few
Ionians, as 6aXu>, Airxui.When these terminations are preceded by a vowel, the
may be dropped in verses ; as for instance, iiîAi'w from iip/tiXim, Btguu from
C. Not only the ancient dialects, but also the Attic poets, and sometimes even the
ancient Attic prose, (as in Plato,) have the old form of the dat. pi. am, urn, ( 33.
Obs. 3.) as ri/uuri, Heimtit, &c. (and the same in the second decl. un, urn.)The
Ionic dialect has wr<, yn, and ks. But poets vary with the shorter form and r,;.
These Ionic forms are employed at times by the Attic dramatists.
7- The Ionic accus, hrxcrix,
are heteroclites, J 56. Obs. 4.
35. The Second Declension.
All the words in ov are of the neuter gender ; those in as com
monly are of the masc. There are, however, many feminine in
os, independent of the names of persons, animals, trees, and
towns, stated in 32. See below a list of them in the Appendix.
There are besides several substantives of the fern, gender in or,
which properly are adjectives, the substantive being omitted, as
h SidXexros, dialect, (sc. (pavw,) rt oW/xsTgor, diameter, (sc. yeia^y-rt,)
7) aromas, atom, (sc. ovalct,) h avvtiqos, desert, yjâos, and rj wsigor,
continent, (sc. %ue<x.,) n avyxXmros, (sc. fiovX*,) senate ; and se
veral others.
Sing. h,(discourse,) 7i,(beech,) b,(people,) i, (man,)
Nom.
5r,f/.or
avSqajiros
\6yos
(pyyos
Gen.
Xiyov
<f>ryov
Dat.
Xoyai
(pyycb
Acc.
Xoyov
(pnyov
Xoye
Voc.
Qyys
Dual
*'
ivSgtuVat
N.A.V.
Xoy&i
tynyw
irilji.oiv
(pnyoiv
G.D.
Xoyoiy
Plur.
Nom.
(priyol
Xoyoi
Gen.
Xoyay
dvSqcinruv
(prtyav
Sriptoir duSquinois
\6yois
Dat.
Xiyous
(pnyous
otvhgunovs
Acc.
\6yoi
Qnyol
Voc.
ri,(fg.)
avxov
avx.au
ai/xcii
avxov
avxov
auxo)
ovxoti
auxx
auxcuy
ouxots
avxa
avxa.

1. For the neuters in 0 like vKKo, IxsTvo, &c. which conform
entirely with this declension, see the Pronouns, 74.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
54
% The vocative is sometimes like the nomin. partly for the sake
of euphony, as in Ssor, and partly without any such reason, espe
cially in the Attic writers, as a (p/Xor, (Aristoph. Nub. 1167.)
3. Quantity and accent require no particular notice ; the final
a is short as in Latin ; the circumflex on the gen. and dot., (see
(fnyos,) has been mentioned, 33. Obs. 9.
4. Dialects, a.) In the oldest language the gen. ov was pro
bably resolved into oo, whence what is called the Thcssalian yen.
in oio in Epic and Lyric poets : Xoyoto, <p-nyo7o.
b.) The Doric dialect has in the gen. a>, and in the acc. pi.
us, as o yojiAoryen. ru toy.u, acc. pi. ran voûs : less frequently as
in the acc. pi. Theocr. makes of 5 XtWrus Xvkos, instead of
robs Xukovs.
c. ) The neut. pi. in a appears to have had the gen. in out in
the oldest language. See Hesiod, Sc. 7. Hence the Homeric
exuiv from Tst EA, goods, possessions. (See the Anom. em.)
d. ) See about the dat. pi. in oim, oktiv, (\6yotai, tynyoTaw,) 34.
Obs. IV. 6.The Epic poets lengthen the gen. and dat. of the
dual oiv to ony, as for instance Innow.
36.Contracted Nouns of the Second Declension.
Several words in oor and oov, bos and eov, are generally con
tracted, (as okoTta&vi, 33. 5.) according to the rules stated 28.
except that the a of the neut. gender absorbs the preceding e or o
in the contraction, and becomes long : oyeac oya, iiiKoa. LiiKa..
(Compare below the adjectives in 59.)
o, (navigation,)
Plur.
Sing
Nom. wXow, ji\ous wXooi, ttXch
Gen. TtXoov, TrXou wXoo/v, TrXeDv
wXooir, wXoiV
Dat. wXoci), n\>
Acc. wXoov, ffXoyv icXoovs, m\oX>s
Voc. wXoe, wXof1 wXoot, rcXoi'
rb, (bone,)
Plur.
Sing.
oys'ov, oyoyv oftat, oya
asiov, oyoS oYewv, oyaJv
6s"e'o), 6r<5
osiois, 6s"oIV
oje'ov, oyoDv oVe'ce, os"a
oje'ov, oyoyv oye'at, oya
Dual.
N.A.
G.D.
IcXou, wXai
wXo'oiv, ffXoiy
oH<,
OfEOIV, &s-oiv.
1 This regular vocal, is stated here for the sake of some proper names, as XliySsoi,
vocal. UxtSou. The vocal, of Sa*y|aaf, ay;, is in Aristophanes with the elision of the a,
2af*i. (Compare Note 3, p. 65.) Else the vocal, of a proper name is of rare occur
rence.
* See Buttmann's Complete Greek Grammar.
ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION.
55
OA*. Compounds of the monosyllables rXms, wit, &c, have the accent in their
resolved form, according to the general rule, ( 13. 2. a.) on the preceding syllable,
as TijiVXaot, Tt^'trXov; : and they retain it on that syllable even in all those cases,
in which it is moved forward in the resolved form, as mîVxni/, (resolved mgnr-Xsgv,)
contrary to the general rule, ( 28. Obs. 8.) and thiB syllable, when it is naturally
long, takes the circumflex before the contracted , as for instance iltoi from iStws,
(resolved tints, it>,) but the accent cannot be removed back to the antepenultimate
syllable; hence we have ti{/-Am, xxx'mi, (from xxxitevs, evil-minded3^)
37. Attic Second Declension.
The decl. of several words in a/r, (masc. and fern.) and uv,
(neuter,) is usually appended to the second decl. by the name of
the Attic second decl. It has in all its cases an u instead of the
vowels and diphthongs of the common second decl. and an iota
subscription, where this declension has oi or u. The vocat. is
constantly like the nomin.
(temple,)
Sing. Dual Plur.
Nom.
USUI
VEci
Gen. no)
VSU1V VEcSy
Dat.
veais
vew
Acc.
YECUV
veoj?
vecJ
Voc. veclf
TO, (upper room,)

Dual.
Sing,
Plur.
dvdytuv dvcuyzu
imiyeu
dvvytu
avuiyeuv dvtvysa/v
dvuysco
ocvctytuis
dvuysai
dvdyed/v
aidrycoiy
dvuyeu.
Obs. 1 . The expression Attic decl. must not be understood as if the Attics had
usually declined the words in is in this manner. It is rather a peculiar ancient
decl. of a very limited number of words, a few of which follow likewise the com
mon second decl., but with many variations ; as i \xis, ( people,} axis,\tiis, tiiis,
S \xyiii, (hare,) Ion. i \xyuls and Xxyif. Others also follow the third decl. (as
Mi'wf, gen. Miw, and Miiats :) others agree only in some parts now with this, and
now with that decl. See about all these points 5G. Obs. G. It is called the Attic
decl. merely because, when there are two forms of this decl., that of which we treat
here, is generally peculiar to the Attics.
Obi. 2. The words of this decl. have also a peculiar
Accus. in ti,
sometimes in addition to the regular one, (as ts Xxym, and Xxyai,) less frequently
indeed in some instances, but exclusively (or nearly so,) in others. This is the case
with the names of towns, KSs, Vitus, litis," Aims, and With ri 'ins, (aurora, accus. *w ?,)
which is the Attic form of the Ionic bus, (of the contracted third decl.) The neuter
(nomin. and accus.) of some adjectives is likewise in u, particularly &yti(tis, (not
subject to old age,) neut. ayifu,
Obs. 3. The gen. in tit of this decl. corresponds with the Epic gen. in m, as srirwr,
gen. mrixs, (Homer.)
3 In common life the contractions in cos degenerated almost all into abbreviations
in is. Hence the proper names in >eus have also the forms of , which, however,
constantly lengthen the preceding syllable, as for instance Y,v$iw; and El/tuns, 'Af<mvc and 'Allies, KmXWiks properly KcAAimc. See Ruunken, Hist. Oral. Or. p. xlii.
56
A GREEK C1RAMMAH.
Obs. 4. See about the anomalous accent of this decl. J 12.8. Another deviation
from the rule is that the gen. ting., whenever the end-syllable is accented, is an
orytonon, (rev mu,) contrary to J 33. Oil. 9.
38. TJiird DeclensionGender.
1. The terminations of the words belonging to this decl. are
too various to allow of any rule, and must be remembered indi
vidually. There are, however, a few, which are pretty steady.
See the Obs.
2. The final s, on the whole, is more the characteristic of the
masc. &ndfem. and a short vowel in the end- syllable is generally
the characteristic of the neut. gender. There are no neuters
whatever in 3; and \}/.
Obs. We will now state the terminations, which may in some degree be depended
on for the gender. No regard is had in the exceptions to personal denominations
like /': ,' '->;-. mother, it H/taf, wife, the gender of which is a matter of course, ( 32,
2.) But where we say ' without exception,' there are no personal denominations of
a different gender.
Of the Masculine Gender are
The words in tus, as I ifius, mule, ifuft(iiis, amphora, without exception.
The substantives, which have ires in the gen., I rim, nres, tendon, i litis, cms,
tooth, i S/tit, tares, leather-strap ; except the names of a few towns, $ 30. b. Obs. i.
Those in (, as Zue-r)i(, except the fern, i yacrr>(, belly, h xii^fate, and with poets
also h
and n aUh(, and the contracted neuters, which see below.
Of the Feminine Gender are
The words in , as
without exception.
Those in as, which have aies in the gen., as fi karris, torch, with the exception of a
few adjectives generis communis, as Xeyis, e-r-eâs, 58. 5.
Those in is, as v ii\is, ti x'("t except the masc. Sfis, serpent, i%is, viper, x'eeis, bug,
(X'i> testicle, ft***;, a measure of liquids, {yen. ia>s,) x)s, wood-worm, Xis, lion, (lis,)
SfXî;, (7ves :) and i, it, eevis, (Ses,) h, e riyeis, (ies,) , e Bis, 0f,) heap, shore.
Abstract substantives in rns, (Latin las,) as h /nxfirns, ' littleness,' parvitas, with
out exception.
Of the Neuter Gender are
The words in a, , /, v, as t rS/ta, body, xi^n, head, fiiki, honey, aurv, city, without
exception.
Those, which have a short end-syllable with t and e, without exception, as ri riTês,
co r, raj, and the neuter adjectives in is, a, .
Those in at, as ri wr*{, ri tixrat, with those contracted from -tag into *jj, as T0 ",
r.(, spring, ri xia(, *5{, heart, ri cr'tof, e-r!i(, suet, fat. Only i âp, starling, is
excepted.
The words in {, which are not personal denominations, as ri S!iv(, ri r'txfuie, &c.,
except i >x*ti (yore, matter, water of the blood,) and
(running soreness of
the head.)
Those in as gen. arts and aes, as ri rieas, ares, prodigy, ri i'tras, aes, goblet; except
o kas, kits, stone, and c or ri KPA2, xgxris, head.
There are no other neuters of this decl. beside ri seZ^fire, ri <p*s, light, ri els, ear,
ri prats, dough.
The words in as are generally masc, when the gen. is aire;fern, when it is aits
and neut., when it is arts and ass.
THIRD DECLEN8I0N.
57
39.Inflection of the Third Declension.

1. We must distinguish in any declinable word the root and
the termination of the case. The nom. sing, in both the first
decl. has itself a particular termination ; but in the third it is
added only in the following cases, as
Second decl. Xoy-or, \ory-ov, Xoy-tu,
Third decl. yp, SvtQos, dug/.
2. But even in the third decl. the nomin. seldom is an abso
lutely unaltered root like (trip : in most instances the end-syllable
of the root is changed, either by an addition,
gen, fSorpv-os, (root fiorpv,') nom. ftorqys,
or by a subtraction,
gen. auy-ar-os, (root aw/xstr,) nom. <swy.a.,
or by a change,
gen. xavdv-oj, (root xavov,) nom. xavo/y1.
Obs. To be enabled to decline a word of the third decl. correctly, it is absolutely
necessary to know the nomin. and one of the other cases, which commonly is the
gen. But it is far easier to trace the nomin. in the gen. than versa vice, because
the root, which here is of essential importance, generally is unaltered in the gen.,
whilst the nomin. seldom is unaltered. On consulting a dictionary, the gen. ought
always to be carefully remembered along with the nomin. We far more frequently
hit, in reading, on the gen. rial., &c, of an unknown word ; and to find this in the
dictionary, we must be able to discover the nomin. in the gen. &c. Some directions
for this purpose will be given.
$ 40.
1. The most general alterations, which a root undergoes in the
nomin.*, are
1. ) The addition of an s, (as Kirovs, fiorqu-os, a\s, &\-6s.)
2. ) In words of the masc. and fern, the change of the t and
o of the root into w and o> in the nomin., (as elxarv,
1 The root of a word with regard to its inflection very frequently differs from its
etymological root. To him, who does not carefully attend to this, it may appear
more natural, for instance, to consider r/ as the root, and , cms, as terminations.
But part of this termination, the at least, belongs to the formation of the word,
and not to the decl., which here is the main point. It is true that in the two first
decl. the original formation of the word and its declinable desinences often run one
into the other, (as kiy-cs, Xiy-ct/,') and cannot be distinctly and methodically
separated. But in the third decl., as the word 9>i; shews, the terminations of the
other cases are distinct from the root, which is the point to be alone attended to
here.
s With regard to all the following examples the learner must be informed that
the statement fiirfos fxttu-ti, for instance, means that ' the root jS*r{i>, which results
from thcguu./r<ip0,', becomes /kt; in the nomin.'
58
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
2. To apply this correctly, we must distinguish two principal

cases, viz. whether there be before the termination of the casus
either, 1. a consonant, or, 2. a voiuel.
41.
1. Whenever the termination of the casus is preceded by a con
sonant, and the nomin. takes the r, it first follows of course from
the general rule, that this s coalesces with the letters y, x, x, and
& is, <p, and becomes 2; and
as
xipa.% xopax-os; ow% ov^X-or,
2. These nomin. in if and 4- never alter the e and o of the root,
(<f>Xs4> tyXefios, <p\o% <Q\oyos, AISion}/ AiStovos,) excepting only n
akojltrfe, dXwlSiXOS .
3. But when the letter immediately before the termination is S
or t or
it disappears, according to the general rule, before
the s, as
oqns ogvi&or, xoqus xogu&oy, ri Tldprns TldprnZor,
4. The letters v and vr also disappear before the i, but the
short vowel is then lengthened in the way stated 25. 4. (with vt
it is constantly the case, with v generally,) as
ylyas ylyavros, yjxqteis yjtÛvros, oSour oSovror,
Semis', (long <,) $e\<p7vosl, Qoqkus ogxfyw,
l/.\ccs fj-tkaws, XTElV XTEVoV".
5. But when the nomin. does not take the s, it is only v or g of
all the consonants, which is left with the nomin., (&*jg &ig-or, aioiv
a'iwv-os,) the others must be cast off, but t is the only instance*, as
aZtMt aufjutr-os, Hevo^cSv HEVopa/vr-or.
In both instances e and o in the masc. and /em. are constantly
changed into i and u :
Xi^tTiv Xi/XE'y-oy, p-firup prirop-os, yiqcov yE'govroy.
6. A few neuters, which have aros in the gen., take an instead
ofr in the nomin. : as ^wag ^VaT-oy. (Compare 16. Obs. 1. f.)
1 Dictionaries and grammars also state the nom. of those, which have net in the
gen. as being , but in the most ancient writers we always find iiXfss, AxrU, f'l, &c.
There is only us to be added, which see below, 6 70.
* Yet yiXa yxXaxTas, (see the Anttm.~) may thus be accounted for. All other
letters take in the nomin. the s, (?, 4>) but there is no termination of a case in
this decL preceded by p aud f, or by uu K, except in the sole instance of iiKs, ikif.
THIRD DECLENSION.
59
7. The usual instances, where the termination of the casus is

preceded by a consonant, are accordingly the following :
theaer*. inf*0" X'' flof the nomin. in \\ ffV'V^
J
\pos, not, (pos)
(o/\|/, Ike.)
,,
Soj-, ror, &or of the nomin. in s, as "Kkiahxs, Xoc//,itaSos, &c.
but especially
,
{a (irufAa, aros)
sty (ripas, aros)
ag (forstg, aros)
f.i

fv (riav, TlocvhsS)
,, vos- of the nomm. in < ),
, ,
[s (jits, pwos :)
but especially
svor and ovor of the nomin. in m and m,
Xi/xs'vor, Eixciy elxovos :)
Iar, sir, ovy, t/r,
((peer (DotvTor, &ir Sevror,)
(Jok Sovran, <?>w <?6yros,)
uv, (lyigaiv, ovros :)
jj jj go* of the nomin. in g, ($g, &*)goy, &c. :)
but especially

egos and opos of the nomin. in ig and &ig,
(ai'&rig otJ&f'gor, frjrwg pnropos,)
and of two neuters in og,
aog, (sword,) and ^Tog, (breast.)
8. The following isolated instances are better remembered
each separately :
o, -ft, a\s aKos, salt, sea.
to fj.e\i /xe'XiTor, honey / to xagi xctgnTOf, head,
h w% vuktos, night; o ava% cevctxTor, king.
7i Sat/nag Sas/xagTor, wife,
i itovs icobos, foot.
and some others stated in the list of Anomalous words, 58.
especially yaXa, îfAis, y.i^rvs, ots, %s/g.
Obs. 1. The quantity of the penultimate syllable of the gen., whenever, owing to
a, i, u, it is not easily discovered, can be determined only by authorities, as is that
of the nominatives of other words ; see the list of the words, where it is long in
the Appendix, p. 458. But it may be laid down as a rule that the said syllable is
long in all the substantives, which have in the^ren.
tftt, uus,
as for instance n* nave?, rraia* veciayos, pttos, ltX$i; %ik$7,9s, ft'etrw poruvog.
Obi. 2. The end-syllables of the nomin., the quantity of which is not determined
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
above, generally are like the penultimate of the gen. Hence, (with a few excep
tions in poets,) %wf
xtiXis, (long t,) 7$os, tbu&v, "(long ,) avo;. And in similar
instances the length must be observed in pronunciation before I, $ : the accent
frequently shews it, as, S!{? *, (/on. Sa^nj; *,) in p*h<t Tntt, xriw* vxii, (with
later writers
SfJi) on l'ie contrary aJx{
&c.
Obs. 3. All monosyllabic nomin., excepting the pronoun r)s, are long; hence
04*. 4. The few words, which have &s in the gen., throw off only the 9 before
the s of the nomin., and retain, contrary to the usual practice of the Greek lan
guage, the t, as IXfutt, iX/tn&t, (earth-worm,)
Ti{i/v&f.
04*. 5. If there be an n or before the termination ur, it, the contraction gene
rally takes place ; as riftmis mpmmi, contracted n/ifs 4 n/imm, laXirins itmi
contr. pikmv; mrm. It is the same with the names of towns in oi$, with, as
'Oraui, &c.
04s. 6. The contractions, which take place in the participles of the contracted
conjugation,
fiXtitrti, vifun n/tStra, Sec.) are best learned in the paradigms
of this conjugation. We only 6bserve that such proper names as Swap**, aims,
originate in this contraction.
04. 7- Another contraction takes place, when the termination etj is preceded by i,
as xix/i xS{, (Aearl,) gen. xuifts
and also tag?;, (ipring,) of which word we have
in prose the resolved form in the nomin., and in the gen. and dat. the contracted
form, (fag, Zfts.) The same contraction occurs in some, which have a r in the
gen., but in these the accent does not conform to.the rules of contraction, and
takes a more convenient place, thus : rri<{ criarts, contracted r?f -u?, (suet,)
0
Qi'tivrts fpnrii, (well,) SiAiij, gen. hxUtrH iiktirtt, (bait, decoy.) Compare
j 28. 04i. 9. 10. with 43. 04. 4.
42.
1. Those words, which have a vowel before the termination of
the casus, (or according to 28. 1., or purum in the yen.,) take
almost all an r in the nomin., excepting only a few neuters in t
and v, and feminines in u.
2. And as, according to 38. 06s., neuters only can end in
syllables, which are short through e and o, the masc. and fern.
make of the s and o of their other casus their nominatives in or
bv, u or OV.
3. Thus arises in particular
the yen. in aos of the neuters in as, (aiXas aiXaos,)
,, ,, ios and for of the nomin. in ir, i, and vs, v,
(x!r xior, Saxgy, for,)
j) 5> i, ojos of the nomin. in us, (o)s, Swbr,)
{the nomin. in our, (/3our, /3o,)
the /em. in w and us,
(/iX,*, oor, a!5cir, oor,)
4 11. i. C05. according to Wolf't reading, which is alone correct.
Gl
TIIIfiD DECLENSION.
(the nomin. in ns and tr,

the gen. in eos (eus) of< (AnS'/ir, neut. dXrftss, grra. e'oj,)
Uhe maze, in ew, (IwwEi/r \incius,)
and as an isolated instance,
7i yt>xvs yqxot, old woman.
With regard to voivs, see the Anom.
4. But the gen. in
Eor and eais
proceed also from the change of the vowel
1. ) in the numerous neuters in os, as rtt%os nlyîs,
2. ) in most of the nomin. in is and i, and some in vs and v, as
miXis TroKeus, a?u a?sos.
OJs. 1. A more detailed account of this and of the gen. in *>; will be found in
the contracted Declension, to which all these end-syllables are more or less subject.
Ols. 2. The gen. in ni belongs to the dialects ; see below about the words in
mn and iw, and about <r'x, 50-52. See also Anom."Aons, Us, *w$os, eiit, and a
few contracted ones. 53. Obs. 5.
Ob>. 3. In all these words, (except only
the vowels , i, , before the endsyllable of the gen. are short ; hence the polysyllabic nominatives in as, is, os, are
likewise short. But the monosyllabic nominatives, adhering to the rule of the
preceding , are constantly long ; as pus piss.
43.
The following examples may serve in the main for all instances
of the usual decl.
Sing.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual
N.A.V.
G.D.
Plur.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
o, {wild
beast,)
v)pos
&)/>
S-npz
rip
o, (age,) b, r\, (good or| 5, (lion,)

evil spirit,)
Xe'&jv
\ioiras
SxlfAOVOS
\iovri
HzlfAovi
Xiovra
cuvvot
Xeov
xiav
r,pg
SripoTv
cu&ve
xliimm
Sripss
aiasvss
SvipSv
aivvan
Snpat, (v,) xtZn, (v,)
Swpxs
ananas
Sripss
almss
oaipwvoiv
Sot.lfjt.Qves
Sxtfj,6vaiv
Sxliiovas
b, (giant,)
ylyas
ylyxvros
yiyxvri
ylyxvrx
ylyXV
Xs'oVTE
X.E0VT0IV
ylyxvre
yiytttrw
\iovns
Xe'ovtwv
Xiovai, (v,)
Xiovrxs
Xiovres
ylyxvres
yiyctvTuv
yiyiai, (y,)
ylyavrxs
yiytxvns
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Sing.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual
N.A.V.
G. D.
Plur.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
o,(raven,) SA(cAfW,) h,(jackal,) o, (wood

worm,)
KxTs
xbpx%
bus
XIS
iraiSbs
buos
XIOS
xbpxxos
bui
Xi'i
xb:zxt
itxtlx
XIV
Sua.
xbpxxx
itxl
bus
xiy
xbptx.%
bus
buo7v
Xlt/
Xioly
xopxxe
xogixoiv
HXldc
wxiSoTv
xopxxts
XOf>XXUV
xog<z$;i,(v,)
xogxxar
xogaxEj
itaXSes
buis
Xl'cf
icxiScov
buUV
XlcZv
noual, (v,) bust, (v,) Xlffi, (v,)
nxC&as
xixs
Suits
nauits
xUs
(thing.)
Trqxy/xx
Trpxy/juxros
irpiyixxri
Trpxy/xx
Trpxy/xx
irpdyfAxri
irpxytMbroiv
TipxyiâTx
TTpxyv-xTcov
ttpxyiuxai, (v,)
HQzy^xxx
nqxy^xrx.

1. These examples are abundantly sufficient; for as soon as
the nomin. and gen. of a word are known from the preceding ,
and the dictionary, a little reflection readily shews, for instance,
how all the words in ? and 4- are declined after xdga,those
which have las, bos, and ros, in the gen. after wxis irxtlos,and
yjun Xibvos, woipiw ffoifxivor, after SxlfJiuv SxI/jlovos,but blovs oSovtoj,
and even bsis bevros, after \im Xiovros, and lastly r,nxp r,icxros
after itpxy^x, xros. But there are still some directions requisite
concerning the accus. and voc. sing, and the dat. pi.; see the
following ), and about the gen. in us, 51, 52.
2. Dialects. Independently of what will be stated in the fol
lowing , we merely observe here, 1.) that the end-syllable oiv
of the dual is lengthened by Epic poets, just as in the second
decl., as iroloTtv for noloTv : 2.) that the Ionic dialect sometimes
lengthens the gen. pi., when it has the circumflex, by adding an
e, as for instance, Herod, xmim for yjnvuv, from %7iv yvrtbs'^
3. Quantity. The terminations of casus in i, x, and xs, are con
stantly short in the third decl., (compare 06s. II. 5. to the first
decl., and below in 52. the exceptions to the words in tvs.)
With regard to the quantity of the final syllable of the nomin.
and of the penultimate of the gen., see the Obs. to the preced
ing
4. Accent. The principal rules in this respect, are, that :
1.) in dissyllabic and polysyllabic words the accent continues, as
ACCUSATIVE SINQULAR.
G3
long as its nature allows it, on the same syllable where it is in the
nomin. (See above, x.opa%, xiwv.)
2. ) Monosyllabic words throw the accent in the gen. and diit.
of the three numbers on the termination of the casus. On the
termination o/v it becomes, conformably to 33. Obs. 9. a cir
cumflex. (See above,
x/r.)
3. ) The nomin. accus. and vocat. on the contrary, never have
the accent on the termination of a casus '.
From the second rule are excepted,
a.) the participles, as Sets Sivros, uy ovtos, &c.
b.) the pi. of the adj. wots, way, (irxvros, wavTi,) gen. pi. ttxvruv,
dat. itoimv :
c. ) some -which are become monosyllables by contractions,
\axs Xr, gen. "Kotos, (see below the Anom.) tap rip, ni%p
xrip, gen. wpos, xypos : but not all, see above 41. Obs. 7.,
and below oTs, 50. 06s. 6.
d. ) the gen. pi. and dual of the following nine words : nous,
ws, h i/j-ais, (slave,) bTpus, (Trojan,") to (pas, (light,)
r> tyus, (burn,) 7i Sjtr, (torch,) to KPA2, (head,) and of the
anomalous to oZs, (ear,) b aits, (moth :) hence wa/Swv,
Saiuv, S/jLuiav, Tpvw, (puiTOiv, Qwl'm, SjtSoiv, xpdruv, wruv,
nicov, and in the dual wai'Soiv, &c. *
e.) the lengthened Epic dat. pi. in tat, cast, 46. Obs.
% 44.Of the Accusative Singular.
1. The principal termination of the accus. in this decl. is at s
but the words in is, vs, avs, ovs, have
the accus. in v,
changing simply the s of the nomin. into v, as in the other declen
sions, and retaining the quantity. This is the only form in those
words, which have a vowel before the termination of the casus,
as fiovs, (gen. /3oor,)o5v, oqvs, (Iqios,)Sgvv, and the same with
JjG&i<v, wokm, ypavv, ike.
2. But (hose, which have an additional consonant in the gen.,
1 It ought, however, to be remembered that in this decl. the final syllable of the
word, (euT-nt,) is constantly different from the final syllable of the casus, (Vai-Sf-ac.)
$39. 1.
* The accentuation of several of these words is still a vestige of a contraction from
the older forms, zri'ii, ip*U,
KPAAS, *f : in the others it proceeds from the
wish to distinguish them from the gen. of the words, ai TjJ, i/taai, Sub, (j>enal<y,)
i <fli, (man,) which have the same sound.
G4
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
have always a, when the last syllable of the nomin. is accented,

(as eXwis-, /So*tkiiila, itovs, nolosnola.) When the last syl
lable of the nomin. is unaccented, they generally take v, but fre
quently also a, as epts, iSorcgiv and 'iîSx, xiqus, v$osxopvv and
xoquSx, eus\iris, iSorEi!e>>w<v and eus\iriia, ttoXvvovs, otiosicoXusovv
and KokiTiolat.
Obi. I. Aauf, contr. xif, (itone,) gen. (xiatc,)
has also xSr, contr. >., in
the accui. See likewise the Anom. xXus, and 49. 04. 7- to the words in and us.
Obi. 2. Poets, hut not Attic poets, have also retained of the ancient language
/Sea for fitvv, ivotct for Ivgtfy, &C>
45.Of the Vocative,
1. It frequently occurs in this third decl. that a word might
have a distinct vocat., but commonly, and with Attic writers in
particular, its vocat. is the same with the nomin. We shall state
the rules, by which some end-syllables may form a distinct vocat.,
and leave it to the student to notice the words, in which it really
is distinct.
2. The end-syllables tvs, is, t/r, and the words noils, ypavs, /SoSr,
throw their s off, and those in els take the circumflex, (11. 3.)
as fiaoiKtls, vocat. Z fixeikevHxqi, Aoigl, Trj&y, r/5u, &cwat,
yqav, /3ou.
3. Those in as and sis, before whose ran > has been dropped,
do the same ; but then they commonly resume the v, as for in
stance rikas avos, Si raXav,Alar, avros, Si Atav,papists, svros,
Z x^S'ev- Yet several names in as, avros, barely take the long a,
as"ATXar, avros.
4. The words, of which the nomin. ends in or u, merely
shorten this vowel in the vocat. ; but in general only when the
Other casus also have or o, see above oa/pta/v and Aim : it is the
same with [/.riTTiQ, ipos, Si nyrep,prtrup, opos, Z priroq,Scwxgams',
eor, Si luaixparet.
5. The feminines in u and us make the vocat. in o~, ( 11. 3.)
RS Sawpor, Si SawpoT,'Hois, Si 'Hoi*.
Obs. 1. From the rule 4. are excepted those, which have the accent on the endsyllable ; as mpfc, if, 1 reifitit, (ihepherd ;) but only substantives, not adjectives,
(as for instance, Z xi\xni<pis .) These three rint, ,t(, litt, from <r*Tif, Me, Saijj,
(hatband1! brother,) gen. if;,also follow the general rule, but remove the accent. - 1
Obi. 2. The words, which retain the long vowel in the other cases, continue
unchanged in the vocat. : hence Z nxirwr, (gen. ,,,) Z BnnfZ,, (tnrt,) Z /htJj,
(;{,) (tmi.) There are but three among them, which shorten the vowel
in the vocat. : 'ArikXur, mti,nu3, Sin,tt>rn(, S(t, (deliverer,) vocal. I "ArcKXn, Xliniitv, rirtf, aud they likewise throw the accent back.
DATIVE PLURAL.
G3
Obt. 3. When the accent is in the nomin. on the penultimate syllable, it may be
moved farther back in the vocal. ( 12. 2. a.) on shortening the final syllable ; but
this is done only in some words, (Jsaxjatrif, "AsrtA.Xw,) not in others, as for instance,
Obt. 4. It may easily be supposed that the names of objects, which usually are
not apostrophised, when once the case occurs, retain preferably the form of the
nomin., as <S <twt, Zirixis, and such like. But this is also frequently done, especi
ally by Attic writers, with such words and names, as KsSm, Afar, raXug, ruriu, and
such like.
Ob$. 5. The word ivu$, (king,) has, on petitioning a divinity, a peculiar vocat.
u am, (cralii, um,) else it is u
46. Of the Dative Plural.
1. When the termination <nv, at, of the dat. pi. is preceded by
a consonant, the same general rules are observed, ( 41.) as with
the s of the nomin. See above xogal;, nous, aim, likewise A/>a\f/
&c.
2. If in these instances the vowel of the oblique casus differs
from the vowel of the nomin., it continues so in the dat. pi. (5aifjuuv, ovos, Sal/x.oo'i,Trous, nobos, Ttoaiv,iXdnfn^, exos, aXtoiti%iv.)
But, if vt is dropped, the vowel is, according to 25. 4. necessa
rily lengthened ; see above Xicov, yiyas : hence also oSour, ovror,
SSovat,rvitiis, ivros, ruwiiaiv. But when the v alone is dropped,
the vowel remains short, x.ri\s, xrevor, xte<t/v.
04s. I. The adjectives, (not the participles,) in ui, urn, have merely t, as fwrltn,
3. When there is a vowel immediately before the endsyllable o-iv, n, consequently when there is os purum in the gen.,
the vowel remains unchanged as in the other oblique casus,
(jzkriSw, e'or, aXySiai,ruypi, tos, retreat,Spvt, Spi/os, Spuaiv.)
But when the nomin. sing, has a diphthong, the dat. pi. likewise
has the diphthong ; as
Baoikevs, eus,
fiaaikMvoi
yâvs, ygaor,
ygxuai
$ovs, ftoos,
fiovolv.
Obi. 2. The old and Epic language has in all words instead of n, (?,) -irti, (,)
more rarely -in, (,) and as this termination begins with a vowel, it is appended
exactly like that of the other casus, as l%u-tffct, xfaxem, irufttfti, frit**!, /3a?AiOT/v,
it&xnn. In monosyllabic words this form of the dat. retains the accent on the first
syllable ; as raHtrrn, "nn, from ra~s, "t. See the dat. in ari in the following and
other exceptions below in the words in tit, and in the Anom. Mi and
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
47.Syncope of some words in r,%.
1. Some words in np, gen. egor, drop the in the gen. and dat.
ting, and in the dat. pi., and introduce an a after the % instead of
the in the dat. pi. only, as Ttaryp, {father.')
Gen. (noLripos,) -narôs, dat. (vaript,) irarqi, accus. iraripx,
vocat. Tfirtp,
PI. ttaripts, gen. irarsptuv, dat. narpxat, accus. irareqac.
2. The following, (with some anomalies in the accent,) are
declined in the same way :
(M-Timf, (/unrago?-,) t^nrpos, (mother,)
r, yaarfiq, (yaariôs,) yaarpos, (belly , stomach,)
hvyx-rnp, (ûyariôs,) bvyarpos, (daughter,)
AwpniTrij, (An/Aompr,) A?i/x7)Tgoy, (Ceres:)
the last of which also makes its accus. AvKwrpa. according to this
rule. See about iv-hp the Anom.
Ob$. 1. Poets sometimes neglect this syncope, and say, fur instance,
Suyurl'iriri, and sometimes employ it where it usually does not occur, as SuyxTfti,
Svyetrûj, &c, frTjw, (Homer.)
(Ms. 2. The accent of these forms is very anomalous : 1.) in the full form, (ex
cepting the compound ^n/nim(,) it always is on the i, and hence is removed on it in
pirns, 9wyarf, 2.) after the i has been thrown out of most of the gen. and da/.
the accent goes over to the termination, (/tnrm, uyxT(Z*, SvyaT(iri,) which else
occurs only in words with a monosyllabic nomin. ; 3.) Avur.rn; on the contrary
draws the accent back in all syncopated forms Aiptirsif, &c, but Bvydrnf, when it is
syncopated by poets, only in the nomin. and accus. (SuyaTja, 6y*r?n, Svyargati.)
Obs. 3. Tatris has in the dat. pi. yarTâtriv and yBurinpn. Even arris, iset, (s'or,)
which else is not syncopated, lias yet ioTcirn.
48.Contracted Declension.
1. There are but few of the words, which have or purum in the
gen., which are not contracted in some of their forms, though it
is by no means the case in all the forms, to which the contraction
might apply in conformity to the general rules.
2. Their contraction indeed differs in some respects from the
general rules ; a deviation of this kind is stated in the following
rule :
The contracted accus.pl. of the third decl. is constantly
like the contracted nomin. pi.
Ohi. 1. Thus, for instance, iXntiii, /tits, are regularly contracted UnitTf, lUZs,
and the contraction of the accus. iktilias, fiUti, is, contrary to the general rules,
exactly the same, even in words, which commonly are not contracted in the nomin.
pi. See the only exception from this rule 53. 2.
CONTRACTED DFXLENSION.
67
OAs. 2. There can be, properly speaking, no l\txa.(n ( 33. 5.) in thin decl.,
because the nomin. hag no particular end-syllable like the other casus. But the
termination of the nomin. may be pure of itself, and therefore subject to contrac
tion. This must then be considered as occurring in the root, and not in the decl.
(*i<t{
'On'uf 'Orivt,) and when the gen., which is contracted in the same way,
is known, {*r, xjja;, 'Or, wr;,) the rest of the decl. proceeds as usual. Hence
this contraction has already been noticed above, 41. (Hit. 5-7. It is only when
both the terminations of the word and the casus are pure, and afford a double
capability of being contracted, that it cannot be separated fr(m the usual contrac
tion ; see below, 53. 3.
Examples for the practice of the following principal instances of contraction,
are given in the Appendix.
49.
The words in ns and es, gen. eos, (which properly are all adjec
tives,) the neuters in or, gen. eos, and the fem. in ca and us, gen. oos,
are contracted in all the casus, in which two vowels meet.
Sing.
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Dual.
N.A.V.
G. D.
Plur.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
n, (o trireme,)
rpiripvis
rpinqeos, rptvigovs
TglTJÊl", TgllÊI
Tgnigsa, rqiripyi
rpiriQis
to, (a wall,)
riiy/is
niyîos, Ttl%ovs
ril-xfis
hX"
Second decl.
rpinqee, r^tripn
rpmqioiv, TgrnpoXv
rpt-npees, rpiypets
Tpmqiaiv, rpmûv
rptriqeai, (y,)
rqi-nps
Tgl!/J
rqmpees, TgiTjgeiy
n, (an echo,)
n%u
h%oos, n%ovs
n%6%, nxoX
r)Xa>
riX0'
TEijÊa, relxn
TElJÊlWy, TEIJ^WV
tei'xeiti, (,)
TEi'xEa, rtixn
Second decl.
The neuter adj. in Er, excepting this termination, are declined

exactly like the neuters in or : thus (from aXrSvts,) neut. aXyj&Er,
pi. to. aXn&E'a, aXn&ij.
Obt. 1. The feminines in *> and a; are used merely in the sing. The dual and
pI. when needed, follow the second decl. See about the masc. \us the Anom.
Obs. 2. The dual in , for instance, Aristoph. Them. 282. a rtfixaXxH etrfupiû,
deviates from the general rule, as it is a contraction from n, (see 28. 3.) The
Attics also employed the resolved form ; as tu yltu, Plato Polil.
Obs, 3. The Attic writers never neglect the contraction in these words, except
in the yen. pi. We generally find in several of those writers ivSiat, xi(bim, rpingUv,
&c and in the gen. of "A(m, (.Mars,)"A(us. The resolved forms of the words in
and *t are no longer met with even in the Ionic dialect.
Obt. 4. Several compound adj. paroxyiona in m, derived from
continue also
F 2
68
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
paroxytona in tlie gen.pl.; as tvvySii!, t rwjQui, (resolved ruttiStur,') avriikris,

alni^Kuv, &c. Compare the adverbs in 115. Obs. 1. Even the gen. pi. roir.ot.
which is accented above according to the rule, is commonly accented Tfiifut, as
coming from the adj. Tfiiifxf.
Obs. 5. With regard to the deviating contractions of the words, which have an
additional vowel before the usual contraction, Bee below, 53.
Obs. 6. The Dorians and Epic poets contract the gen. us into tut, according to"
< 20. Obs. 5., as toZ yinvs from rs y'uts.
Obs. 7- The accent of the accus. of the words in , (t nx">) is contrary to the
rule of 28. Obs. 9. Those in us, however, (and there are but two, ius and m'Sif,)
are correctly accented r)n Urn, IS. The Ionic dialect frequently has the accus. of
both in wv, as 'I* 'Uvv, rius itwv.
50.
1. All other words admit the contraction only in the nom. accus.
vocat. pi. and partly in the dat. sing. We first notice those in us,
gen. vos, as o lyftur, {fish.)
Sing. nom. iyfivst gsn. 'tjftios, dat.
accus. !x^v>
pi. nom. iyfivss, contr. !%Si/r, gen.
dat.
accus. ijfivxs, ijftvs.
Obs. I. Epic poets also contract the dat. tut 'X^"', ('*) *,) *i*ti~.
2. The words in ts, when in the Ionic and Doric dialect they
have ior in the gen., are declined in the same way; thus for in
stance, in Herod. <nokis, gen. ios,pl. itokus and nokiacs, contr. icokis.
They then have likewise in the dat. sing. (iroXii,) contr. <no\i.
See Obs. 5. and about the abbreviated dat. (KXe'o/3i,) 28.
Obs. 11.
3. Of the same decl. is /3our, (ox, cow,) gen. $obt, dat. /3oi', accus.
fiovv, voc. 0ov, pi. $6zs, contr. $6vs, gen. /3ov, dat. ou<rlv, accus.
fioas, contr. fiovf.
Obs. 2. The Dorians said /5s,
This word has this accus. in Homer, (//. ij.
238.) when it is employed in the fem. gender for an ox-hide, shield: compare It. /c.
105. fiticrn.
4. Of the same decl. is farther ypavs, (old ivoman,) gen.
ypxos, dat. yqai, accus. ypxvv, vocat. yqxv, pi. ypxss, contr. y^xvs,
gen. ypxuv, dat. ypxvaiv, accus. (yqxxs,) contr. yqxtn. The con
traction of ygSsy into ygctds deserves notice, as uncommon. (The
Ion. dialect has ypnvs, ygnos, &c, without any contraction.) See
about vxvs, which partly conforms to this, the Anom.
Obs. 3. The Attic writers frequently neglect the contraction in the words belong
ing to this , mostly in the nomin. pi., and habitually in monosyllables, as xhs,
p-its, \i%s, yt*tt, tins : often also I^Suis, &c.
Obs. 4. Through this contraction the pi. becomes again like the nomin, sing. ;
60
CONTRACTED DECLENSION.
which is very remarkable. And even when the quantity is different, the accent at
least does not always inform us of it; as i fieTfiis, and vols fairpts.
Obs. 5. Besides x)s, none retain, in common language, the formation in is, us, but
a few isolated forms of *'iy(is, tiger, -ti^ris, heifer, Tons, husband, fi /tr,ns, wrath,
h roi*is, keel, (which also partly take a S in the yen., see $ 50. Obt. 5.) farther a few
proper names like rlp, and the adjectives in and /, (see C3. 1 .) The larger
number of the remaining words in is, which do not take a consonant, are declined
entirely according to the following .
Obs. C. The word Kit, (sheep,) also follows the above decl. (Text 2.) and conse
quently has theyffn. oies, norm, and accut.pl. SV, (long <:) but the nom. ting, generally
is contracted, n Us. The decl. then, is gen. sits, dat. di, aecus. 7v, pi. tJts, c!xs, contr.
Tf, (likewise A, , and ris .) Homer has, however, in the dat. pi. Sunt, viz. in
stead of sin according to the following .
Obs. 7. Most words in m follow the second contracted decl. like tXoZs, fids, wit.
There are only two words declined like fins, viz. x'"'> (see the -Anom.) and ftSfi
when it signifies sumach, yet both without any contraction.
51.
1 . Most words in is and i, and a few in v$ and u, retain the
vowel of the nomin. in common language only in the nomin.
, accus. and vocai. sing. ; in all the other cases they change it
into a, and then the dat. si becomes ei, and the pi. ess and eas
become eis, and the neuter i becomes m : but there is no other
contraction.
2. The substantives in is and vs besides have what is called
the Attic Gen.
by making the gen. sing, us, (instead of ov,) and in the dual an ',
(instead of oiv,) and accenting the three gen., as if the last syl
lable were short. (See 11. 5. and 8.)3. Neuters in v and t have the usual gen. aarv iareos, dariuv :
viltipt neniptos.
4. Hence arises for substantives the following usual decl. :
Sing.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Plural
r,,(a city,) o,(an ell) to, (a town,)
nbhtis
noKis
am
ifh%zis
aarv
TtohSUV
\di-euv
noKzus
tfhyjiws aarz-os
noKtai{y) Tcrtyzai (v) a^sai (v)
VOKit
darzi
ni\zis n-hyjus
woXiv
am
aarv
ttoKhs nrixms
aroXi
aarv
a%-n
Dual N. A.
G. D.
aS"EE
zsoksuv
1 Grammarians state it as Attic ; but in our Attic works we have ymriotr and
Kiiwr'itn, &c.
70
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
5. Adjectives in vs, v, have the usual gen., and do not contract

the neut. pi. ex. gr.
hlis, neut. ^So, gen. hl'ios, dat. ho'eT,
pi. tiSsTs, neut. riîx, gen. YiSicov.
Obs. 1. Most words in us are declined according to the preceding . There is
only rtXtxus, and partly tyxiXvs and nptfivs, (see the Anom.) which follow the decl.
of rnx't Besides , (which, however, is nowhere found contracted,) there is a
considerable number of names of plants and minerals in i, as triixTi, *>0{/, &c.
which are declined like Srru.
Obs. 2. Attic poets have also the gen. Zrruis for the sake of the metre, and later
writers employ it likewise in prose.
Obt. 3. Ionic writers make always us of those in is, (*Zkiei, &c.) according to the
preceding article. There is also a gen. its, but only in Attic poets ; they shorten the
gen. mi for the sake of the metre ; n'oXus, Styes, &c. Epics have the Ionic forma
tion ; only in the dat. they use ei to avoid the cacophony of u, for instance, wins,
wirut, rSrt'i. Hence, when they contract this dat., they often make it u, (ofXu,)
instead of r, which is peculiar to Ionic and Doric prose, (>j.) But the Ionic form
of the words in us of this decl., excepting ty%ikvs, is us, u 'xûs, irifoiw, &c.
Obt. 4. nx<( is the only word, which, with Epics, has sriKties in the gen. and then
the accus. is rixr,.
Obi. 6. Contractions like
and (of the adj. neuter H/uru,) gen. tipitsui, pl.ra
iftlrsi, belong to the time, when the Attic writers were sinking.
52.
The words in ilt have also the Attic gen., but merely the
gen. sing, in us without any peculiarity in the accent, because the
accent in the nomin. always is on euf, and must according to 43.
Obs. 4. 1. remain on the penultimate syllable. The contraction in
these words too extends barely to the dat. sing, and nom. and
acais.pl., in which latter case tar, however, is more usual.
Sing. h, (king,) Dual.
Plural.
Nom. fiaaiktbs
fiaaiktTs
Gen.
fiacriKius (Sovsikion fSaatkia/v
Dat.
fiaafoivot, (v,)
Acc.
(ZaouXla
Voc.
Obt. I. The long a in the accut. sing, and pi. is an Attic peculiarity. Writers, not
Attics, or what are called *, ( 1. 9.) employ the accus. us. But poets, even the
Attics, sometimes contract the accut. ting, ix into S, (//. a. 339. Aristoph. Acharn.
1151.
Obs. 2. The old Attics, (Thuc, Aristoph.) contract the nomin. pi. into m, as
iVrSf, ' M<t>T<Sf, which termination is erroneously written with the iota subscri
ption, since it comes from the old mi, (see the following 04.)
Obs. 3. The Ionic dialect constantly has fiairiXms, fimfiXw, ii, ri&s, &c. The form
Us, ii, occurs rarely, and is only peculiar to the poets. See about the dut. pi.
xUcti, and, (from imriiif,) irxwri, 4G. Obs. 2.
CONTRACTED DECLENSION.
71
53.
1. There are some deviations in the Attic contraction of the
third decl., when there is a vowel either before or after an e. The
termination sa then is not contracted into
but into a, as vyms,
(sound,) accus. sing, and neut. pi. vyiia, contr. uyia, (and the
same with Evipua, evXeS,) xXeos, pi. xXiex, xXia.
2. Even those terminations of the words in svs, which com
monly are not contracted, absorb in this way the e before %, as,
and m, in some words ; as yj>*us, (measure of liquids, see the
Anotn. ypvs,) gen. %ous, (for %oi(os,) accus. %o2, accus. pi. %o%s :
HstQxiels, gen. ricipcaws, accus. Ylsipzici : dyunus, rovs ayuiZLs, and
a few more.
3. This produces in proper names ending in xXlws, contr. xXys,
a double contraction, but commonly merely in the dat., as
Nom. TlepixXiwHeîxXtis
Gen. YlspixXiios, con tr. IlspixXious
Dat. TlEîxXisi YlspixXistTlEpixXsT
Acc. UeîxXsesYlegixXex
Voc. TleîxXieaTltplxkus
Decline in the same way 'H^xxXris, (Hercules,) and others.
Obi. 1. The doubly contracted accut. occurs seldom ; for instance, 'HfaxXn. That
we also meet with 'u^xxXh, (but only in later writers,) may be accounted for from
what is stated, J 56. Olis. 4.
Obi. 2. Sometimes there is, instead of a contraction, an elition of one of the
vowels, for instance, vocal. "HjaxXis, (by way of exclamation in the later prosewriters,) and in the poets the gen.
dat. 'Hja*xiij Homer uirijjia, (instead
of i,) for imoi'Aa from -thf, tnrirvt for erivrri.
OAs. 3. This elision may also serve to account for the unaccented termination a,
ex. gr. in ra xkia, which, because of the contraction, should be long, being short in
the Epic poets. Compare 28. Obs. l\.
Obi. 4. The learner must carefully notice which words, and which terminations
of each word, have the usual form, or this peculiar contraction. We constantly find
iXiix, iXiixt, (from kXnii), but of iymt the accus. pi. iyiui, never -ii.
Obi. 5. The Ionic dialect always has iyiix, 'IWxAita,
&c. and the ancient
poets contract the two first i into u or : for instance, from xXics, rir'ui, we find the
gen. x\ues, pi. xXtTx, dat. mil and srSi', farther 'HjoxXiw, i, ijx. See the Anum.
about %(us, xt'iif.
54.
1. Of the neuters in as these two, xspxs, horn, and ripas, pro
digy, have aros in the gen., but cast off the r in the Ion. dialect;
xiparos, xipaos, ripxvos, ripaos,
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
72
and the three following, y'ipas, old age, ytqas, honor, xtkas, flesh,
constantly have merely aos.
2. This produces the following contraction :
Sing.
N. A. V. xegar
Gen. xiâos, xequs
Dat. xeqgc'i, xiqa
Dual.
xsQote, xiqx
xepxoiv, xipZv
Plural,
xipaa, xiqa
xipdav, Xcpuv
xiqxat, (v.)
Obt. 1. The word rifxi admits the contraction only in the pi. (t!;, ti{,) the
Attics use solely ri^xTi; in the ting. ; and of xi^xs also the form xnt has continued
in use along with the contraction. The three others commonly occur only con.
tracted ; cui is in all writers a mere Ionic form.
3. The remaining neuters in as, aos, take only .the forms a
and a, for instance, ai\as, (light,) Siitas, (goblet,) rai ai\a, iiira,
pi. ra. ai\a, Siirx. It is the same with Sepas, oQtKas, and others.
Obt. 2. The middle syllable (x is originally long in xi;at(, (x!{t, Anacr. 2.
Eurip. Bacch. 919.) Hence the lengthened xifixrx and ri(wr< of the (later)
Epics.
Obt. 3. But the end-syllable, for instance, of ri ylcx, *!<*, is also used as short,
(see 28. Obt. 11., and more particularly, Buttm. Cumplele Gr. Gr.) In Homer
xfix is likewise a monosyllable, (see 5 28. Obt. 6.)
Obt. 4. The of these words is often changed in the decl. into an i by the
lonians, as if the nomin. were in : for instance, xtfw, rk yiftx, xf'uren, and
others. Some old words hare barely this form, see the Anom. fifirxf, iHmt, and
partly xr'if&i.
55.
1. The comparatives in uv, neut. ov, gen. ovos, ( 67. 68.) drop
the v in the accus. sing, and in the nomin. accus. and vocat. pi.
and contract the two vowels, but without this contraction the v
never is dropped, not even by the lonians ; ex. gr.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
Sing.
/xe/^cuv, (greater,)
tEiovor
/u,ei'ovi
/AEi'ôva, contr. {mi'm
/AEiÔV
Plur.
{ae/ôvej, contr. petrous
txtltpai, (v,)
tx.iiZpvas, contr. (jit'ityus
(Aeiôns, contr. nelsons
Neut. pi. ra /xsiôva, contr. /aeio>.

Dual unchanged.
The Attics are as fond of the forms /tiova and (Aslôvas, as of the
contracted forms ; but utiôvas occurs rarely.
2. The Attics contract in the same way, though it is rather
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
73
harsh, the accus. of the two names 'AwoXXwv, wos, and Yloust^m,
urns, (Neptune.)
Accus. 'AntiXKum 'AwoXXw, IToireiSa/va TIoubû.
Obi. The poets also have xuxiai*, {drink of various ingredients,') xvx'uitxxoxim,
(Epic, xoxuS.)Compare about this construction, and some similar ones, ilxin, Min,
the following . Oh. 6. d. Obi."].
56.Anomalous Declension.
1. There is an anomaly in a decl., when one or more cases of a
noun are declined in a particular way different from the nomin.;
see, for instance,
xvwv, yaka, in the list of Anomalous or
Irregular Nouns.
Obi. 1. Among these mere deviations of the decl. must also be ranked the decl.
of foreign and later Greek names in with a long vowel, as
tiXni, gen. *<A.?, dot. *iA>j, accus. *jXij, vocal. *iA?,
'lrireut, gen. 'Invov, accus. 'Ijjrsuv, vocat. 'Irtcw.
2. But most deviations from the regular formation consist in
what is called an interchange of forms. In the Greek language
one and the same word, especially in the old Greek, frequently
had more than one form of inflection, though its signification did
not vary. It is true that in the polished language there was but
one of these forms in use; yet the other often maintained itself,
sometimes for the sake of euphony, and sometimes by mere chance,
especially in poetry ; for instance, A^-hrnp and Ari/x7iTa, (Ceres;)
Hxpuov, anciently Sdxpv, vos, (tear.)
Obs. 2. Under this head must also be ranked when a masc. in is at the same
time a neuter in as of the third decl., as, i and to xxtros, darkness, exvQas, a drinking
vessel, Sx'i, chariot ; farther prolongations of the fern, endings of the first decl., as
riAn'rq, atiyxn, Ion. rtXtirxtn, imyxxlt, 'ASmi, (Minerva,") with Epics 'ASu'wi,
Ion. 'a9hu', and a number of female names in n with the Epic form u : Tlnnxixr,,
UmiX'frua, Tliîfntix, Ti{^/^(i/, Sec.Several proper names have already double
forms in the nomin., (for instance, -Xnt and -xXic, 'IfixXHt and "JfrnXt,) and poets
may use sometimes one form, sometimes the other, as the verse requires ; Homer
always has UaT(txXns in the nomin., but in the accus. nirfcxXm and UxrftxXw, in
the vocal. nir^x\t and Uarfcxkus ; and yet this cannot be considered as a mela.
plasm, of which we are going to treat presently.
3. As such double forms originated at a time, when people had
no idea of grammar, but every form and termination was always
alone before their eyes without any regard to the others, it natu
rally followed that of two inflections, especially in declensions,
they used in one case one, and in another the other, and thus the
noun in use became a true anomalon; for instance ywfi should
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
follow the first decl., but makes -yuvaixoy in the gen. from the un
used nomin. TTNAIH : vavs has in the accxis. vaSv, but in the
dat. vr/(, (from the form v-nus, which is merely Ionic.) See these
words below in the list, and compare Zeus-, vb'ojp, yow, Se'vfyov, wvp.
4. But frequently these double forms were used, more or less,
together in one casus, as vVos, gen. uhv, and, (after a nomin. of
the third decl.) v\ios: see this word in the list, and compare also
j Howl/Is, ogvir, yovs . Such a word is called in Latin abundant.1
5. When such double forms presuppose but one nomin., from
which they differ in their decl., the word is called a
Heterocliton:
for instance OWnrovs, gen. OiSiwoSor, and after the contracted
second decl. OiSi'woy. But when one casus presupposes an obso
lete nomin., it is called a
Meiaplasmus :
for instance, fc'vfyov, ov, dat. pi. Ss'vfyoir, and (as from to AENAP02,) iiyipean.
6. It is likewise a metaplasm, when neuters pi. in a are made
of masc. in or, which is done in proseespecially with
These forms are used in some particular connections instead of
ol isa[/.ol, &c.
\ Obi. 3. The greatest part of the common and poetical anomalous nouns consists
of Heterociites and Melaplasms, or is a mixture of both. Those, which must he
noticed separately, are stated in alphabetical order in 68. hut we will previously
bring several classes, to which many belong, under one point of view.
Obs. 4. Heleroclitei are the words in ns, which are declined after the first and third
decl., some throughout, as /tvxtii, mushroom, gen. au and htk : especially proper names,
as Aafii,-, gen.tu and r,m : (see Anom. eXiij :) others in part. All compound proper
names in particular, which have in the gen., form the acc. in n and : 2ux(xths,
gen.
ws, acc. luiîrn, (Plato,) and Sa*{tTi, (Xenopho.)And the Ionians
form versa vice, the acc. sing, and pi. of the words in n; of the first decl. after the
third, as,
-ray h&rortu, pi. Tovi liwrorutf, from hff-ro'rns, so,
Hikrte&ia from bliXriefitii, cu?
Obi. 5. Some words in if, which partly take a J in the inflection, and partly not,
constitute another kind of Helerocliles ; for instance, /<>>;, (wrath,) u v.r,;, and
1 Many, however, can only he said to be (abundantia,) abounding for us in the
grammar, since we are under the necessity of noticing at once In the aggregate,
what was the practice at different periods, in different dialects, or of different writers ;
for instance, the various inflections of Sipii.
! Names formed like patronymics, as M<XtiiS>i,-. eJjiti Jw, and most of those which
are not compounds, like 2>iTi, &c, as AiV^/W, Bi^st, Tiymwith the excep
tion of this Ioniim, constantly follow in Greek the first decl., though they are
declined in Latin entirely after the third, (</ai. Milliadis, Xtrxis, &c)
ANOMALOUS DECLENSION.
75
pmila;, and several proper names, m 'Aii^xtxis, itss, (Aristotle,) and iut, (Plutarch,)
and the feminine) in is, iS, a* xxnyvei;, fuSnti*l*H> dins, &c. commonly have ins in
the Doric and Ionic dialect.Under this head must also he reckoned some Epic
datives with the shortened i, (according to 28, Obs. 11.) as iai for ixtii.
Obs. G. The nominatives ending in us, wv. , occasion likewise several changes,
in some of which it is, however, doubtful whether one of the forms ought not rather
to he considered as a contraction. Of this kind are
8.) Nom. us and as. Even sûs, urns, (desire, love,') which clearly is of the third
decl., has a poetical double form, Ifst, acc.
It, therefore, cannot sur
prise us, if some words of the Attic second decl. have cases of the common
second decl. ; for instance, mis, nomin., pi. tJ and rani. See also Anom.
xiXus, and ylXus.
h.) us, gen. u and uos. Thus M/r, vrxrous, finrûs, yet in the pi. commonly
r rûts, &c. See Anom. xfcXus, and compare fyus.
c.) us, yen. arcs. These words sometimes drop the r : i fyus, (sweat.) Slaun,
Hiurx, has an Attic double form rS i$p, rit Heu, considered as a contrac
tion, (like xUxn, *>>) hut agrees likewise with the forms of the Attic
second decl., just as {t;, xt?> {Anom. %(u;.) See a more obvious transi.
tion to the Attic second decl. in the Anom. yiXui, and omo adjectives
(iu{u'j[ijf, &c.) 63. Obs. 5.
d.) Nom. us and xn. Here the change partly takes place already in the nomin. ;
o txus, gen. u, and rxuv, gen. uves, {peacock,) h <rvQus, u and ru f-.v, uves,
{whirlwind,) n alXus, {thrashing-floor,) gen. u and uos, also xXuv, unsi The
forms of the third decl. are more usual with all of them in the pi.) The
areas. 'AtriXXu, iltnim, xoxiu, 55. may be compared with them.
e.) The forms ix,>(>
{water of the blood,) acc. iîja, and (Homer) iia
likewise point to a nomin. in us and a.
Obs. 7. Some feminines in ui have a collateral form in *, gen. tits : yXfaut, ""<!
(pennyroyal,)yx%ii, els, Tt^yin, ins, in old authors Vsoyu, tus. Thus it is ac
counted for, when
of ilxuv, his, {image,) we find also gen. tixtvs, acc. ilxu, acc. pi. ilxeis,
of xnbuv, erss, (nightingale,)gen. Sauf,
of iXiJ, o, (swallow,)voc.
though we might also assume a contraction in the manner of /ullut, &c.
Obs. 8. Lastly we find in Epic and Lyric poets, instead of the usual termina
tions in the eases of some words, others of a shorter or simpler form, the analogous
nomin, of which Is wanting ; especially forms of the third decl. with the termina
tions of, i, , is, ifi, instead of the usual ones after the first and second decl. ; for
instance,
instead of iXxy, (of iXxv, strength,) iXxi of AAH
xgixrjy, (of
woof in weaving,)xîxx of KPOS
,, iittv, itiS*, &tim, (of i itins, infernal regions,)iiies, &ih, ailx of
'AIS
,, xXxiu, (of i xXx&ss, twig,)xXx"Si, pi. xXxhtiri of KAA2
., xôxtoôis, (of rro ailoa.'Xoiai, slave,)avt^xToilirffi as if of ANAPAnors
3 All these appearances are cleared up, when we have correct notions of the
uniformity of all the decl., and perceive that the first and second decl., with their
double forms, are properly nothing but old contractions and mutilations of the third.
Thus the acc. u of the Attic second decl. is connected with the contracted acc. u of
the third ; that in v of the third with the first and second ; the Ion. aVs-oVsa appears,
less irregular, &c. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gram. 33. 04s. 3.
76
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
instead of ie/tltn, (of i itfun, battle,) itplv of TJMI5

and some others. Of this kind are likewise
a! riyUt for rxyinH, drops.
3ifir, Biexnt for Siodrotra., t;, attendant.
ftarT, pirn, (of MAITIS,) for futrsyt, , of h fuinl, scourge.
Some of these forms cannot even conveniently be considered as known metaplasms,
but barely as isolated casus of old words ; for instance,
riit >lfx, (snow,) of Nil' :
for the usual name of snow is
and
has a derivative meaning, (snow falling
in largeflaket.) Farther the casus
rfis *X* Pl- ri'x'tt as >f of STIB>
cannot be traced to the prosaic i T'X'i, ('"") on account of the difference of the
gender.
Obt. 9. A very particular anomalous decl. is effected in Epic poetry by the very
frequent use of
the termination fit or fi,
employed instead of the dot, or gen. sing, and pl. and is appended chiefly according
to the following analogy : as
sfn to nouns of the second decl. ; for instance,
rifn to those of the first decl. ; for instance,
trfa to the neuters in it, gtn. ut, for instance,
Peculiarities and deviations, (as x(dnep of KPA2, xâret,) must be left to individual
observation. It may, besides, safely be admitted that this form originally had a
mere adverbial, and chiefly local signification, exactly like the similar terminations
Si, Sif : hence Sfirfn, (in the mountains,) xifuXityi (Xa/3i<~V,) at the head, Bvfufi, out of
doors; and the meaning was frequently determined by the addition of a prep., as
W Ixfiifn, on the deck of a ship, Jii riSirfi, through the breast, and thus originated
the habit of adding this form to all prepositions, which else govern the dat. or gen.
in lieu of these casus. This continued to be its most frequent use by far, and it is
but in few instances that we meet with this form without a prep., instead of a casus,
for instance, iyXxttifi nruBi/t, trusting to courage ; fclrtyi, byforce ; and most rarely
instead of the pure gen., as irttyit Bis, a heap of bones. But this form also assimi
lates to the real casus, as it often is grammatically connected with it, as ire <rXric
irruefiv, and even frequently added to both the subst. and the adj. xân^t jiinQt,
which, however, is also done with the undisputed local syllable It in i'tit iifuth.
57.Defectives and Indeclinables.
1. Defectives are chiefly such words as owing to their nature
occur but in one number, as <ti$r>p, and the following plurals, ti
iyxara, (third decl.) entrails, ol errisieti, monsoons, al SVu/xai,
setting of the sun, west ; and the names of festivals, as ri Aiovvaioc, &c.
4 As grammarians assume that this syllable is a mere appendage to the requisite
casU3 they place the iota subscriptum under the n, when it is the dat., in order to
distinguish it from the gen. This is evidently incorrect.
DEFECTIVES AND INDECLINABLES.
77
2. Words, which are in common use only in particular con

nections, the principal of which are
the neuters ovag, (dream, vision,) and Snap, (true appari
tions,) merely as nomin. and acc.
to oQikos and to r$os, (use, utility,) merely as nomin., for
instance, ri av hiuv oipeXis ems; of what use wouldst
thou be to us ?
fj.ihn, (the ancient form instead of pxayjiKm, shoulder,) in
the expression tiro (j.i"hw, (under the arm.)
See also Z y.i\t and u rdv, in the list. Of this kind are likewise
several, which from original nouns are become perfect adverbs, as
the accus. litix.Xr)v, i%dl<^vns properly sj; aYtpwn, and the like, 115.
Obs. 3, 4. Lastly those, which want some cases, see the Anom.
dpvos, npiafius, oaoe.
3. Indeclinables are only some foreign words, (as to <na.ayrjt,)
the letters of the alphabet aXtya, im>, &c., and, of genuine Greek
words, most cardinal numbers, ( 70.) The participium neutrum
to xpeuv of the impers. %pri, is also in some respect indeclinable.
See about Toy xj>iuv, Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 57. Obs. 4.
Obs. 1. The name of the letter eiypa. is found declined rk ely/tarx, &c. This
might easily be accounted for from its having completely assumed the form of a
Greek word ; but the correctness of the reading is questionable.
Obs. 2. It is not proper to rank among the defectives several old and poetical
words, which occur but seldom in the oldest poets, and have by mere accident
maintained themselves in some casus, or other, as rif* mentioned in 66. Obs. 8.
(See also the Anom. \ir), 4x1,) and among the indeclinables those of the same kind,
which have accidentally maintained themselves merely in the nam. (or neuters in
the nom. and ace.) as i liii, gift, ri }tft*s, body. There may be many words among
the latter, which the ancients never used in the gen. or dat., as ii/icLi in particular ;
in that case they are defectives ; they would be indeclinables only, if for instance they
occurred in the gen. without changing their form, as rii litâ.. See the list about
Xttrss,
Obs. 3. Some such short collateral forms of known words, as we have seen $ 5G.
Obs. 8. in other cases are also met with in the nomin. only, and therefore impro
perly pass for being indeclinable. And it is still more incorrect to consider them
as arbitrarily abbreviated from forms in use by the ancient poets, since they rather
are remnants of the old language before it was analogically polished ; more perfect
forms have subsequently been adopted in lieu of them. Such are :
rc Sai,1 perfect form, ro "hupx, house.
ri k(T, (barley,') perf. A x(iS>i, of which the former cannot be an abbreviation,
since the gender is different.
rt Skfi, (barley-flour,) perf. ixfmt. The former simple form was probably
declined like /tixi, irsg.
1 Hesiod has it as a pi. (Th. 933. x(""
considered as a contraction.
but, (like the pi. **{,) it may be
78
A GREEK GRAMMAS.
t yXaipv, (cave,) evidently the neuter of an adj. rAA*TS, instead of which

yXxfvei>, (excavated,) was afterward! used.
See also the Anom. xaea, i;n, which is considered as an abbreviation of xag>i{ or
nisr.iw, and some adjectives, S G4. Obs. 3. 4.
58.List of Irregular Nouns.
Prefatory Remark. With regard to the arrangement and
tise of this list, compare below the prefatory remarks to the
List of Anomalous Verbs. What is there observed about obso
lete themes, applies likewise here to obsolete nomin. ; they are
distinguished in both places by capital letters. Whatever relates
to common prose, is printed in a larger type, or partly so ; what
ever is of rare occurrence and poetical, is printed in a small type.
'A5r, 56. Obs. 7.
a; S, &c. 56. Obi. 8.
iX*i, y 56. Obs. 8.
57. Obs. 3.
ix*( and Sxtn, $ 56. Obs. C. a. d.
aufu, } 78. 4.
utx, voc. 45. Obs. 5.
ayloxxiiitiri, 56. Obs. 8.
avng, (a man,) belongs to words like <jrarr,q, ( 47.) but admits
the syncope in all the cases, which have a lengthened termi
nation, and inserts a S", ( 19. Obs. 1.:) therefore, etvfybr, dvSql,
avlipx, oi avEg, pi. avo'pes, avoga/y, avSgairiv, avSgar.
In the Epic poets also regularly iA^s, &c. and in the dat. pi. also iiijirm.
*AiroXXa>v, acc. 55. 2. oc. 45. 06s. 2.
4{y<T;, /, Epic abbrev. Instead of the gen. i(yr,rss, dat. S, from ieyrii, (white.)
*Apns, {Mars,) gen. "Apws, does not contract this gen. but it does
the dat."Apuacc."hp* and "Apiv. 56. Obs. 4.
In Kpics "Ajwj, "Afiii', "A{. We also meet with the gen.'Apus. See Buttm.
Complete Gr. Gr.
dpvoS, (tov, Tr,y, of the lamb,) agvi, aqua, pi. agvEr, dat. uqviai.
The nomin. sing, is supplied by a//,vdr.
These are the cases of an obsolete nomin. APHN or APPHN, gen. ins,
whence by st/ncopc ifs, &c like the similar cases of itfy.
irûji, J 47. Obs. 3.
BaTTor has the metaplast. gen. of the first decl. Barrett in
Herod.
fyirm, (to, an image,) gen. fy'iTUf, pi. /3{<th, (see $ 54. Obs. 4.)
fiat, acc. 50. Obs. 2.
(to, mi/A:,) makes ydkaKrof, y\axn, (compare 41. 5.
with the note.)
yiku:, (sister-in-law,) yen. yiXu, Ion. nom. yaXtis, gen. yakiu.
J*ni{, J 47. 2. and Obs, 3.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
70
lyiXn, (a, laughter,) gen. urn, acc. yixura, and, (according to the Attic second decl.)
yix*., ( 56. Obs. 6. c.)
Homer has also the dat. yiXy, and in Oil. v. 34G. the acc. yiXiy, hut with
the various reading ytXu, ( 37- Obs. 2. and 5C. Obs. 6. a.)
5,Xaa5, ^ 57. Obi. 3.
|
&6770W, (to, Ae knee,) gen. yovxror, &c. da/, pi. yovao-o-iv, (as if of
TONA2 :) compare S6pv, Sogaror.
Jon. yau'*arf, &C. and with poets yovvos, yetn), pi. yovia, yevwv. Compare
Tfy*,, $ 56. Obs. 7.
ymr\, (wife,) yuvaixor, yvvaixi, yvmtxtx, Z yuvm, pi. yvvuiMS, at,
yv\quY.uiv, yuvai^lv, (of TTNAIS.)
Compare the two. yimi with Sue, 45. Obs. 5. The accent in yintuias is an
exception from 43. 04j. 4.
iaf, $ 56. 0J. 5.
|
itTia, $ 73.
tivtipov, (to, iree,) has the dat. pi. commonly SevSêui of to Se'vSgor,
which occurs in Ionic writers : compare xg/vov.
The pi. iiti(ix, Js5;6'i;, comes from another Ionic form, and occurs like
wise in common prose.
Aiof, Ail', see Z^r.
loû, (to, spear,) gen. lopotrot, &c. dat. pi. Sopaoi, (of AOPA2 :)
compare yovu, yivarot.
Jon. iiv(xrnf, &c. Tlie (rather poetical) casus J{$, iati, Ion. itofit, iet/e),
pi. tivfte, hvoat, Icviiw, come from a still simpler form. Compare ydtu.
voc. see 61. note.
I
l, 57. Obs. 3.
fog, H(tsi see 41. Obs. 7.
I
'*, see lit.
ly%iKvs, (f>, eel,) vos, has in the pi. Ion. ly%iKvst, &c. Alt.
lyXt\i\s, lyyjXtan, ( 51. Obs. 1.)
iinin, 56. 06. 7.
Its, (good,) an Epic word, of which there is only the gen. inn acc. Itt. Also, ivt,
acc. r,i>, neut. it. The 'Epic gen. pi. ieun, (see 33. a. Obs. i.e.) comes from
another form, EOS, , and its neui. />/. i EA, {goods.)
lat, $ 37. Oi. 2.
Zeit, (Jupiter,) gen. Aior, da. Ait, acc. A/a, (as if from AI2,)
and a still less frequent form, Znvor, Zwi, Zjva, (from
ZHN,) voc. Zeu.
1 The gen. iUtt in Homer was formerly distinguished from it hy the spiritus,
where the sense seemed to require the pron. possessive thy ; for instance, miit
ir,m, of thy son. It was then considered as the gen. of an old form 'ETS for his,
which, like other forms of the third pers. (see the Syntax, 127. 04s. 5.) was used
for the pron. poss. of the second pers. But tms is the only correct reading. The
pronoun here is not expressed, and the adjective iif supplies it in some degree ; just
as iff-3xf, (excellent,) is sometimes very ingeniously employed where the pron. poss.
might he used ; for instance, //. i. 469. t. 573. Compare especially Od. y.
with
//. . 422. See Buttm. Lexilogus, I. 23.
80
A GRKEK GRAMMAR.
if, 64. 06s. 2.

II. . 128. fg'irxs M, (madman!) a meat, abbreviated from the equally rare
(0(2. 0. 243. f(ims nXxi.)
?{, a defective accui. in the Epic poets, (love, aisittance.)
Hftn, (hero,) gen. tut, contracts in the Attics the accui. if**, 'bruits, into f,(n, fyut.
The short vowel is also absorbed in the other terminations for the sake of
the metre, dat.
nom. pi. r.ous. Compare 56. 04t. C. b.
Ait, see
seXijr. grew. i\ini, dat. a\ri, acc. asXijv. We find this name
in the oldest and best writers with the accent removed only
in the gen., and with the Ion. gen. (Herod. Plato, &c.) The
gen. a\ov, and the form
x\-nros, nn, -nra, are
later. To accent the first syllable of the casus after the
first decl., excepting i\tu, is incorrect.
St/tit, (n, right, Themis,) has in the old and Epic writers St/urts, Dor. ei/tirts, in
common language ei/uiti, Ion. eifta;. Even the goddess, with Plato, is in the
gen. BtptiTcf.
Si(xrx, Sifxrts, 56. Obs. 8.
Sfi?, (, hair,) gen. r(%is, &C. dat. pi.
after 18.
."J{*s, 56. OA*. 6. c
|
'Itirwi, J 56. Obi. I.
!xi,(, 56. Obi. 6. d.]
xaiXa;*-, (6, cable,) gen. u, acc. <uv, pi. also xiXwEf and xd\oi, acc.
Htzkavs, (from KAA02 :) see 56. 06s. 6. a. b.
xaji, Ait.
/on. (r, head.) Of the first form, though so frequent in Attio
poets, there are no other casus met with in them but the dat. xx\x. We have
stated above, 41.8., that the cases xi^nrsi, <ri, belong to xipi, but there is be
sides a more perfect form in the Epic poets, xx(r.xrci, from a more rare nomin.
r.ier.cf. Compare 41. Obi. 7. We have in the Hymn to Cerei, (v. 12.) the
pi.
(for -km or -tiet.)
To these must be added the poetical forms KPAAZ and KPAS, the nom.
ting, of which is not to be met with. The first is Epic, and neut. pi. xedxrx ;
the other x^xrii, ri, is common to all the poets, and generally masc. acc. ling.
x(xrx, Homer. There is a third form peculiar to Sophocles, nom. and acc.
ling, tc XfXTX, (Philoct. 1457-)
{{, $ 54.
1
xkxl), 56. Obs. 8.
xXslf, (w, key,) xXeiSw, has in the acc. xXeio*, commonly x.\e7v, and
in the pi. xXelSsr, x\e7$as, contr. xXsTV.
xrifxt, (darkness,) prefers in the gen. the form -c, (xAftvi, Aristoph. JEccl. 290.)
and in the dat. xi, x, ($ 54. Obs. 4.)
xenmh, (partner,) Xenopho has, instead of its regular pi. xmZvn and a;. Compare
$ 56. Obt. 8.
RPAAS, KPAS, see *'{.
xtixf, $ 54.
|
X(7, 57- Obs. 3.
xtfm, (ri, lily,) has a collateral form in the pi, ru xfinx, (Herod.) x(!nn, as if of
KPIN0S. Compare Si5g.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
81
K(l*, 56. Obt. 8.

|
wxui, t> 55. Obt.
xvojv, {dog,) Xfvoy, ximi, xuva, 5 xiJov, pi. xyver, xi/vtiv, xu<ti, xt/vas\
xStcs, (t, fleece,) gen. xaus, pi. umix, ( 54. 04. 4.)
Xx*s, contr. XSf, (J, stone,) gen.
<Ja{. Xii', (S 43. 04*. 4.) ace. Xixt, XS, ( 44.
04. 1 .) dat. pi. xittttt. But we meet also with the gen. Xcuu after the first
decl. (as from xi&s.)
xlrtt, an old subst. neuter, (oil, gretue, fat, Hippocrates,) for which we also find
xlrxs. The dat. xirxi, X'irx was shortened in pronunciation, and sounded
again like AiV>, particularly in the expression xlrx &\ilfi<rSxi, to anoint one's
telfwith oil. Hither belongs also Homer's Xl*' iXai*, which may be considered
as the dat. of Xlrx iXxut, (olive-oil.)
XT, (i, lion,) acc. xTt. No other casus occurs in the ancient authors.
x)s, adj. see 64. Obt. 3. 5.
Xirt, Xitx, dat. and acc. of a nam., which is wanting, (fine linen.)
ftaXti, 57- 2.
t^x^Tui, (ivitness,) makes y.iprvpost &c. acc. y.iprv%x. and y.ie?vp,
dat. pi. //.aqruaiv.
ftxm, it, 56 . 04*. 8.
I
fuyas, see below, 64.
/his, is the Ionic nomin. of fti)t, (S, month,) gen. funis, &c.
fisXi, a vocal, which occurs only in familiar conversation, S ftixt, and is addressed to
both sexes *.
ftnTMts and M/wfj 56. Obt. 6* b.
vtzvs, (4), ship,) the Attic decl. of which is,
Sing.nom. vavs, gen. vsus, dat. m$f acc. vzvv,
pi.nom. vms, gen. vaa!v, dat. vaual, acc. vocvs.
The old and Doric form is gen. ties, (whence nits, according to 2704*. 10.) &c, the Ionic tnZs, tvcs, &c. acc. n* and tmt. This gives a second
Ionic decl. gen. nis, acc. tut, pi. tits, tuts. Thucydides has tint for the dat.
of the dual,
ti^x, $ 56- * 8OM'mous, gen. OMinotos and OWntov, dat. -oSt, acc. -o5*a and -ow,
voc. -OV.
There is an Epic and Lyric collateral form, (as if of the nom. O/WaJnf,)
viz. gen. oSitriitu, Dorice, -A, Jonice, -in, dat. -ri, acc. -tit, voc. Oismoix.
oiV, oh, 50. Obs. 6.
SvEigov, (dream,) makes as a neuter mtipotros, &c. pi. ovilpara,
(comp. vpoaojirov.) There is also 0 ovsi/jor, ov.
opvit, (b, v, bird,) opr&os, has in the pi. a collateral form, (after
iroXts,) opveu, opnm : compare 56. 06s. 5.
We also meet in the Attic poets with the acc. pi. SftTs, ( 50. 2 , 5C.
* This is considered, (like r.xi above,) as an abbreviation, instead of ft'iXu from
ftixus, unfortunate. But it also frequently occurs in a good and flattering sense,
(Plato Theatt. 90. Schol.) It may be considered as the expression, ' my friendj
which is used in both senses.
G
82
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
OAs. 5.) The Dorians said S(tTx'i, (*ix*> &c. ( 16. Obi, 1. a) without
making the nomin. in .
left, nom. and acc. (eye,) is a dual only ; it makes the gen. and dat. merely after
the second decl. in a pi. form : oafm, Sfftotf, weaan.
elias, (to, ground,) eShii, eShi, (6 54. Oif. 4.)
o?r, (to, ear,) jren. wros, &c. jen. pZ. tov, ( 43. 06s. 4.)
pi.
dalv, contr. from ovccs, am, Doric nom. us.
vtdis, (child, boy,) waiSor, has in the dissyllabic Epic form rsxis,
Tfzh in the accus.
**t{(, 56. OAs. 6. b.
|
Xluâiis, gen. 53.
7l\ies, 68. G.
nwi,, (fi, the place where the people hold their assemblies,) made
anciently zsvmos, wwcvi, zsukvo. ; afterwards also zsvukqs, &c.
jrtxis, 64.
IIoo-eiSiSv, Sjvos, acc. HoastSu, voc. Hoasiiov, ( 45. Obs. 2. 55. 2.)
The oldest form is, n/>>, em, Dor. nwuiav or n#r!<Sv, ,-, Ion. nwiitrim, 50. 04s. 5. and 6 51. 04s. 3.
vetfUt, vrêtvf, 6 64. 2.
nqiofius, (5,) when it signifies oW man, has only the acc. -nqtofiuv,
voc. Tspiafiv. As ambassador, it is used only in the pi. (o
zjgiafieis, datf. zzpiafizuu.) Its deficiencies are supplied by
itfiiofcvrris, old man, and npt(s^,tvrr\s, ambassador.
Isolated and poetical instances, as v\<r$uit, of the ambassador, Aristoph.
Acharn. 93. irfafcvws, old men, Soul. Here. 245. prove nothing against the
common use.
iffwirtt) i, face,) pi. Epic v^ncuxecra, xôffaiiraffti. Compare ovuocv.
vrôyrpos, (ji, ewer,) Attic <n^>y^pvs, gen. zspoyrpv, ( 36. Obs.)
passes over to the third decl. in the pi. : dat. pi. tspo%ou<sn,
(Aristoph. Nub. 272. Eurip. Ion. 434.) like /3oyr, fioueiv.
zsvp, (ro, fire,) makes its plural after the second decl. ra. tsvoa.,
dat. 'asvôTs, (Xen. Anab. 7, 2.)
citts, ffSf, 64. 3.
evt, (J, moth,) gen- nit, pi. r'w, r'tas, gen. nit, 43. 04s. 4. In later times, tnrlt, Sec.
ffxi/f, (, ordure,) gen. emurtt, Sec- (see 23>{.)
tyu3', (, weal,) makes rfuliiyym, &c.
nrlot, J 53. 04s. 2, and 5.
(rrayit, J 56. OAs. 8.
|
tr'ut^, rr(, gen. trnrit, 41. OAs. 7.
*T'Xi> (?) rr'Xf) 5 66. OAs. 8.
;, 64. 3.
|
(rurtig, ooc. J 45. OAs. 2.
Tv, a rav, (a salutation in common life, O thou!* rarely O ye!)
8 The reading S 'rat rests on the absurd derivation from hm, friend, u im.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
63
ruin, 56- Obs. 6. a. d.

|
'(X'h &c- see ^S'Srvf*tgy b 5G- Obs. 6. b. d.
vSup, (to, water,) yen. vlaros, Sic, dat.pl. vSacaiv.
See above,
maris. The old nomin. is"TAA2: its interchange with
vh;t (compare 54. Obs. 4.) accounts for the Epic dat. Shi.
vibf, (son,) is regular, but very frequently, and especially in the
Attics, also has the following casus, after the third decl., gen ',
vlios, dat. vU7, (acc. v\ia,) dual, uUe, uUow, pi. vU7s, vieaiv,
v'tiaiv, v'liixs, (uU7i.)
Of these the gen. and the whole pi. are mostly used, even preferably to the
regular form. The acc. el'ut is rejected, as well as the reading of the gen.
mint. The Ionians make the gen. vmi, &c. All this is a mere lengthening
of the casus, derived from the simplest old form 'TIS, used by the Epic poets,
and the accent of which in the gen. and dat. sing, points to a contraction of
vi, gen. vTaf, dat. vlt, acc. via, pi. vTts, dat. vlaci, with the a inserted, (like
wrfitn, iftirir,) because the diphthong vi is not used before a consonant.
ifuTti, 66. Obs. 8.
fdfvyl, (r, throat,) vyytt, poetically fifvytt, &c.
gen. Q(iirts and ires, contr. <Pc*rii, &a See 41. Obs. J.
yt\p, (r>, hand,) has in the gen. and dat. of the dual x,e?o"v, and in
the dat. pi. xeP"> (with poets also xePs< XSP*' a,K' X.J?''V-)
XiXtUn, see 66. Obs. 7.
|
X*V"> &e> an<1 xk"x> $ "8.
ypvs, (o, ' a measure of liquids,' congius,) is partly regular, (after
firth) xoos> X'j X"v> pl- Xf> Xxs) DU* as
properly is a
contraction of x^s> (Hippocr.) the better Attic forms, gen.
%ous, acc. x*> acc. pi. xo<*! 4 come from this according to
' 53. 2. But x0"') > (earth heaped up,) has merely gen.
Xoosi acc xvv> &c- See tcc^xovs.
Xfitn, $ 67. 3.
j^'e'ws-, (to, debt,) is an Ionic-Attic form for %/>s'or, (yen. XP*0VS>)
has again xp*ui) pi- XP*X< ( *>3. 06s. 2.) &c. The dat. is
wanting in both numbers. The Epic poets have %/jeioj- and
XfEiW in the nomin.
XP^s, (5, skin,) gen. xzvros, &c. Ionic xsrJ XP*> xfa' The
Attic dat. xph> is used merely in the expression iv xp<?< ( 56.
Obs. 6. c.)
u rkv, see rat.
|
<T, tee off.
* Which must not be confounded with
, from a! x"^> libations in honor of the
dead.
' Hitherto xt'1"' frequently occurred In our editions as nomin. and accus.; it has
now been restored also as a gen. from MSS., for instance Demosth. c. Timoth. 1189,
25. 1203, 16. The form itself may be explained by the verb XV*"- Tne oldes'
form of the substantive was XPA02, gen. XPA0T2, and from this arose the nomin
and gen.
juit as hMk and Xatvs made huisis the abbreviation.
G2
84
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
59. Of the Adjectives.
1. The Greek language, by its distinction of genders, (motio,)

has several adjectives of three and two terminations, in the last of
which the masc. and fern, have a common form ; (they are, as in
Latin, communis generis.)
2. The fern, of adjectives of three terminations always follows
the first decl.
3. The neuter always has in the nomin., and consequently in
the three similar casus, ( 33. Obs. 5.) a particular form, but
which in the other casus is declined like the masculine.
Obs. To decline adjectives correctly, we need only to know the gen. masc. beside
the nomin.
60.Adjectives in -os.
1. The adjectives in -or are the most numerous; they corre
spond to the Latin adjectives in us, and either are, like them,
of three terminations,
Masc. os,
fern, -nor a,
neuter ov :
or of two terminations,
common os, neuter ov.
See the few, which have the neuter in o, among the pronouns, 74.
2. Most adjectives are of three terminations ; whenever there
is a vowel or g before the final syllable, they have in the fern,
a, gen. as, else always m. Thus, for instance,
xoCipoy, xoi/pn, xouipov, (light,)
<pl\os, tplXvi, (pi'Xov, (dear, friendly ,)
Seivov, (dreadful,)
but
vios, ve'a, ve'ov, (young,)
(plXios, fnXi'a, (pi'Xiov, (benevolent,)
e\i6Bepos, -tfOL, -ipov, (free,)
itvppbs, -a, -ov, (red.)
Obs. 1. Only those in ut have in the fem.ti: Syitcs, lyhiti, Stii, Soil. But when
{ precedes, they also make the fern, in a. : iSjo'iif, i3(o*. The fan. in <t is always
long, except in Kit, i7a, iin, (divine,) and some adjectives in int. See Bnttm. Com
plete Gr. Gr., and riruu, 64. Obt. 3. Respecting the accent, see 34. Obs. III.
1.2.
3. The following adjectives in or are partly always, and partly
usually, of two terminations, viz. b and v ftipQxpos, ov, ^wXor,
ADJECTIVES.
85
Ti&aaof, apnos, xai'îor, zsirpios, fSaolXeios, yvtlpifjLOf, &<$i\iyMS, &c,

and with the Attics and poets many more, which commonly
have the three terminations, as eXwQspot, xdo-puoy, &c.
4. Compound adjectives in os in particular are of two termi
nations ; as o, j S$aQ6x.o\Tros, evtpuiws, aXoyos, apyos, (for aeyor,)
dwixX-npos, lyxiixXios, 'Sii'kivx.os, (though the primitive is Xeuxos-, ri,
ov,) itokvypatyos : also those derived from compound verbs, as
hitfopos, SitviKoos, e%alpETot. Those, however, which in their deri
vation add the syllable xw, have always the three terminations, as
tiriJeixTixor, m, ov, (from the verb eViSeixvi///.!,) siSaipiovixor, a, ov,
(from EuSai'punv.)
Obs. 2. All adjectives in s, which having their final syllables in
Mf, Xes, vos, MS, T*f, and tos,
clearly added, as a mark of their derivation from other words, for instance, /tmrixcs,
iiiXes, twos, Qxvioz;, trXix-rflf, xfva-ws, have generally, at least in prose, the three ter
minations. But among those ending in
fUf, tot, tlef, alios,
there are several communis generis. Poets only sometimes allowed themselves, for
the sake of the verse, h Xttftrpii, fxtt^cs, xktirls, and the like.
Obs. 3. It is also a pretty general rule, that the adjectives in which in making
theirfern, in n or a would render it similar to'the abstract subst., have it partly
always, and partly frequently in as, ex. gr. eairfyas, iXwSiîas, ficuiXiut, because of
h <ra>Tvtet, tXtuBtaia, {Setriy.ua : thus Qfaos, which has thefern. tpiXla, has also n $l}.ias,
because of the subst. A pxU.
Obs. 4. Comparatives and superlatives communis generis are very rare, and never
in'the Attics, except sometimes those, whose positive is communis generis, as Thuc.
3, 101. lufto-fioXunzres ri Aaxgis. But Homer has also oXovraras oiftn.
Obs. 5. The poets, on the contrary, employ also compound adjectives, which
generally are communis generis, with the fern, form.; as iSmuirn, ififiXuxn, Homer,
ai/iim, Sophocles. And several of the adjectives in ies, (, &c.) when they are
compounded with the alpha privalivum, have, even in prose, the fern, termination
as xva^ta.
Examples for the practice of the adjectives in as are given in the Appendix.
5. Some adjectives in oor are contracted, viz. :
a. ) The communia, like evvous, uiwvv, well-disposed, gen. evvou,
&c. They all are compounds of contracted words of the se
cond decl., as vovr, wXour, &c, and conform also in the neu
ter to the rules given respecting their accents. The neuter
pi. in oa remains unchanged : ti avoa of avous, senseless.
b.) The multiple numerals awXoor, SiwXoor,
ov, &c. (simple,
twofold.) They have this peculiarity that they all con
tract cm and 6a into ri and a : hence SWXour, ShtXtj, SiwXoiiv,
pi. SwrXoV, SiwXar, JWXa '.
1 These numerals must not be confounded with the compounds of erXtus, (naviga.
Hon,) which are communis generis, as i, h asrf.m, tCxXsvi, &c. neul, tvs, neul. pi. ex.
86
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
6. Some adjectives in sos, denoting a material, are contracted

and transpose the accent; as yguiMs, {golden,) xpvaia., -xgiiasoi,
contr. ftpvaovs, %pvari, XQvaovv, gen. ov, ris, ov, &c. If there be
another vowel or g preceding the final syllable, the fern, is not
contracted into y>, but into a, as ege'eoy, {woollen,) contr. epeovs,
epeci, epsovv : dqyupsos, {made of silver,) contr. apyvpovs, dpyvpa,
agyupovv. The neuter pi. is always a: ra yjivaot., (like oite'iz, bara,
see above, 36.)
61.Adjectives in us.
Adjectives in us after the Attic second decl. (see 37.) are
generally communis generis, as o and^ "Xsus, to 1\tuv, {propitious,)
and partly have the neut. u, as iyripus, neut. dynpuv and iyrigu/.
(See 37. Obs. 2.)
Obs. About those in -yiXus and -xtjax, see 63. OAs. 5. The simple txIii, {full,)
xix, trxim, neut. j>l. x\'ul, has the three terminations, but its compounds conform
to the above rule. See about tut, 64. 3.
62.
The remaining adjectives of three terminations are
1. vs, Eia, v, as y\ux.vs, y\vx.a, yXvKv, sweet,
{gen. eos, decl. 51.) gen. {masc. and neut.) yXvxios.
Sv'kvs, Sriteia, 9>i\f, female, fern,
gen. SwXsos,
Examples : fiapvs, heavy, Spalls, slow, fipa^vs, short, sbpvs,
broad, rtivs, pleasant, b%us, sharp, arnvs, swift.
2. eis, taaa, ev, as %aplns, xaqlsaaac, yrjzpiev, graceful,
{gen. evror, decl. 43. gen. xaP'E'JTOrf
Obs. 1. and 46. Obs. 1.)
Examples : aiixarotts, bloody, uX-hiis, woody, (Qmwis, vocal.
3. as, aiva, av, as fjie\as, /*s'Xaiva, fjt,e\xv, black.
{gen. avos,)
gen. pie'Xavor.
There is but rihas, miserable, like (j.i\a.s.
4. The following isolated ones,
Ttpnv, TEgEiyot, ripBv, gen. svos, {tender,)
Ixftiv, sHovca, |)tbv,
gen. ovror, {spontaneous,)
&a.s, zsaaa., way,
gen. navros, {the whole, all,)
and all participles of an active form, 88. 8.
Obs. 1. The adjectives in us are also communis generis with poets : as iivs ivr/in,
Horn., SriXus mXam, Theocr. The Ionians have instead of the /em. timU and /,
ADJECTIVES.
87
as ixia, p9iit,' (Homer.) Of V'"*i (half,) the older Attics also made k/Amm
instead of npletnt. See the note to Plato Mcno. 17. and Buttm. Complete Gr. Or.
Obs. 2. There is a compound of Uiv, ;*, (involuntary,") which is contracted
iixuv, tma, ixa*. The neut. sr5 is long, merely because it is a monosyllable; but in
its compounds it is, conformably to analogy, short, {{,, Sriirx,
(all taken to
gether.) With regard to the accent of r-iimn, trxei, see 6 43. OA*. 4.
Obs. 3. The adjectives in u; give rise to contracted adjectives ; nm, mrrx, m>, ars
contracted into ji, nmt, mand ens,
, into
eue-e-x, o-jv, for instance,
rtftris, <Tt(Ln*'eit, Tipw, gen. <rtft.viiTesfrom np.r,us, honored.
ptXirevs, fitXirwffffx, ftiknem, gen. f&tXtrevvresfrom pi\irous,full of homy.
gee about them tj 41. Obs. 5.
63.Adjectives of one and two terminations.
1. Adjectives of two terminations all follow the third decl.
They are
1. nr, neut. Efas aa-tyris, aa<pet, clear,
(gen. ios, contr. /$,) gen. o-Ktyovs-.
Examples : ih-nQw, true, dyevvris, ignoble, Scx^ris. accurate,
aiSaJnr, (long a,) proud, Sypicloris, brutal, n\r\pns, full,
xhris, amassed, ^vlw, false, zs%m%s, bending forward,
dywf, see 53.
2. cov, neuter ov as niitm, Tfeirov, ripe,
(gen. ovor,)
gen. nittmos.
Examples : iixiûv, (long v,) blameless, iitîytLut, idle,
ilyyai/jLcov, well-meaning.
3. it, neuter i as iSgir, topi, knowing, gen. TSptos,
{gen. ior,) has very few examples.
4. The following isolated one :
appm or apaviv, neut. appev, auv, masculine,
gen. uppwos, agtfEvor.
2. But beside these, there are adjectives compounded with
subst., of which they retain the final syllable and declension, as
far as it is possible, as is best seen from the examples. They all
are communis generis, and have a neut. gender, when it can be
formed agreeably to analogy ; for instance,
ivyji^s, tvxctpi, graceful, gen. tros, from w mips, tros,
aSxxgvs, al'ctxpu, tearless, gen. vos, from to Saxpu, vos.
Sometimes the conversion of -n into co, and t into o, takes place in
the final syllable ; for instance,
from zsar-hq, epos, comes iitirup, op, fatherless, gen. oqos,
from (ppriv, ipgEvbr, comes aw$%m, oy, icise, gen. ows.
3. If no analogous neut. gender can be formed, the adjective
88
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
has but one termination, which, however, is only communis generis,

(not, as in Latin, omnis generis,') ex. gr. b and r> aitais, Sor, child
less ; 6 and /> /x-axpox^p, longimanus, ' having long hands.'
4. There are some ad jectives communis generis of one termina
tion, in w, nros (ritA&vris,) in us, uros (ayvas,) and in 2; and vf',
(%hi%, xos, fJLVwvv%, %os, aiy/XivJ/, nsos.)
5. Common ones of this kind are also several adjectives in as,
gen. ados, as Xoyar, (select,) (Qvyxs, voixis, airoqis, and some in is
and vs, gen. iSas, vlos, (avaXxis, tnrikvs, o&yxkus.) But generally
those in as and is are only of the fern, gender, and on omitting a
subst. become subst. of the fern, gender ; for instance h (jucaitis,
(jyvvri,) a bacchant, 7) wst-rglr (yri,) native country.
6. Several adjectives of one termination are only of the masc.
gender, especially yepwv, ovros, (old,) TrqtoGus, (old,) nirns, dtos,
(poor,) and after the first decl. ibeôvrvis, (voluntary,) ymaSas,
(noble,) and several in txs, (as rpottias, /juntas.) See also Obs. 7.
Obt. 1. Some common adjectives of this kind have collateral fern, forms, but are
mostly confined to poetry, as /uuny'iiux, riiuirna, from the masc. in m- See also
64. Obt. 3.
Oil. 2. As (according to J 58. 3.) the neut. always is declined like the mate, the
gen. and dnt. of words, which have no neuter gender in the nomin., may be employed
as being of the neuter gender, and such casus then actually are omnit genera ; but
this is done only by poets, as Eurip. Or. 834. tp/tari ;.tf
Nicander Ther. 631.
iayvri
Obt. 3. Else the neuter, which is wanting, is supplied, in case of need, by a deri
vative form in sv, as pXMxjxi*, apiraxrittir, fiMw^n, for
etpru%, fiu-n\.
Obt. 4 . Those compounded with trout, rtSii, (foot,} are regularly declined like
their subst., as Vtrtui, tin : but in the neuter they take tut, (as
of the
contracted second decl.) and yet decline this neuter according to the general rule,
58. 3. like the mate, ri inretn, rtv 2jV2?.
Obt. 5. Adjectives coming from yiKuf, arts, (laughter,) commonly forsake the
decl. of their subst. and follow the Attic second decl. (see 61.;) those made of
xifx;, arcs. (Aom,) change the at into , and follow the same decl. ; but both have
also the gen. unt, and the neut. tn then has the same anomaly as the adjectives
compounded with rtSs for instance, QiKiyiXw, ilxtfm, neut. tn, gen. and *rtt.
Those compounded with im retain nothing of the Attic second decl, but the accent
in the nomin^ as }irtpn, gen. arts.
Obt. 6. The compounds of riXat take a ) in their declension, ex. gr. Q,XmXx, ;,
gen. A*.
Obt. 7. But adjectives and substantives in Greek run so much one into the other,
both in form and connection, that not only many of the abovementioned adjectives,
(as Tftrfiv!, trim,) may be considered as subst., but also several real subst. (in ,
* ***' ** for '"Stance, ifnirns, t,) may be looked ou as adjectives, and become
eommunit generit with poets, even when they are of the mate, gender ; see J 123.
ADJECTIVES.
89
64.Adjectiva Anomala and Defectiva.

1. The two adjectives y.h*s, great, and ttoXus, much, derive
only the nom. and acc. sing. masc. and the neuter from this simple
form : fj-iyot-s, ftiyav, itokvs, noKuv, ttiyx, noKu : all the rest and the
whole fern, comes from the obsolete MErAACXS, n, ON, and
iroWor, ri, bv, thus :
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Sing.M. F.
niyas, /JueyiXm,
lAsydXou, lAiy&kw,
fjLsyz'Kcfi, iêyiKrt,
/xeyav, /xeyaXw,
N.
txiya,
fJ.Byx\ov,
tîyikta,
fidryot.
M.
F.
N.
irohut, vtoWri, ?[o\u,
noWov, itokyjris, 7ToXKovt
itoXKu, noWr), nok\it>,
The dual and pi. are regular like those of adjectives in or : (Asyd\co,
a, u, fj.syx'kot, act, a, otoXXoi, cu, a, &c.
Obs. 1. The forms -rokkts, mXkit, are Ionic, and the regular forms of taXus are
found in Epic poets ; for instance, rcXus, rsXtt;, ui, &c. They hare also xtuXtii,
mvkl, and employ the mate, likewise as fern. (ex. gr. II. x. 27.)
2. Utfos, mild, is employed in this form only in the masc. and
neuter sing. : the whole fern, and neut. pi. are borrowed from
dialects, as upabs, (Ion. irp-nbs,) fern. irâeTa, neut. pi. zjpxix. We
also find the masc. pi. nomin. wgjioi and n$a.iis, gen. merely icpaim,
dat. it^-xois, and Trpasaiv.
3. 2<Zy, (safe,) contr. from 2A02, has of this form only aus,
(communis generis,) acc. and neuter awv, acc. pi. aZs. Rarely
fern. sing, and neut. pi. <sa. All the rest is of awos, a, ov, (Ion.
coos.)
Obs. 2. The acc. pi. nZs is easily accounted for as coming from SAOTS. But the
nomin. pi. trvi, which also occurs, points to the third decl. irs, rits : just as 2AOS
produced ait, ZA02 produced the Homeric
whence the common gf. (Com
pare the verbs rixia, J, i
Sâm.)
4. The principal defective adjectives i
a.) ax\7)Xv, 74.
b. ) ayJ^ta, 78.
c.) (ppovSos, gone, evanescent, which is used merely in the
nomin. of all genders and numbers, (see 151.)
Obs. 3. We notice also a few rare and poetical occurrences, as
1. rirriK, in the Epic poets xtm, (venerable, mistress,) only fern.
2. ftixx(, (blessed^) is communis generis, but has also pitaâ. in thefern. The
neuter does not occur.
3. A few adjectives masc. have a less frequent derivative form for the fern.
x'tnit?* of Trim, T{i/3{ of trfUjiiis,
90
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
4. Some cnmmon ones have a similar collateral form, (see aboveua. for those
in ns :) rUipa of I, n vim, (fat,*) ffyftttv* of a, n vre&Q^M, (kind.)
0. There are also older poetical simple forms, such as we have noticed of sub
stantives, (and which are likewise erroneously considered as abbreviations,)
trgitrfia for rgio-fitiftt, kts for \t?ari, (smooth?)
6. About its and fits, see the list of Anomalous Noun:
1. The facility, with which, (according to 63. 2. &c.) adjectives may be formed
of substantives, induced poets to make them as often as it suited their
convenience, and to use them with isolated casus, of which the nomin.
sing, frequently cannot even be presupposed, conformably to any correct
analogy : as iauirei^f*atTis "tttst, (from
ttros,) srtXva^n %o\fv*, from the
gen. <{,) and the like.
65. Of the Degrees of Comparison.
(GRADUS COMPARATIONIS.)
1. The Greek language has, like the Latin and English, positive,
(long,) comparative, (longer,) and superlative, (longest,) each of
which is formed in the same way for the three genders, and
differs only in the terminations of the genders.
2. The most usual forms of comparison are the terminations
-reqos, a, ov, for the compar. and
-txtos, *), ov, for the superl.
3. Adjectives in or reject the r before these terminations, and
retain the o unchanged, if they be preceded by a long syllable ;
as s?aios\, /3sjSaioTSoy, hyjuôreôs, miaraxafos \ and also after a
muta cum liquida, for instance, ofyobgos atpoSgoraros, nvxvos zsvxvorsgor, (see Buttm. Complete Greek Grammar, 65. Obs. 2.)
4. But when these terminations are preceded by a short syllable,
o is changed into a>, ex. gr, o-opor ootywregos, xa/gior xxtpiwTxros,
e^vqdrepof, xadaûrarof, &C.
Obs. 1. There are, however, exceptions for the sake of the metre: the occurs
in Epic poetry after a long syllable, as si'âroror, xaxoguvaVigu, Homer, and in the
Attic poets after mula cum liquida, as }ti<rirorfirtzrts, Kurip.
Obs. 2. In some adjectives in a there is more commonly at or i; or if inserted
instead of this t or tt, especially by the Attics ; for instance, pitts /uetiirxm, \p"pufunt i'ppxfi%>'irri(s, XaXts XtXlrrtfH' The first form is peculiar to the Attics, the
second to the Ionians, the third is the least frequent ; but the common form is also
in use along with them.
Obs. 3. Some adjectives in mts, viz. yt(aics, old, txXhiis, ancient, <rx'Xa7ss, slow,
generally drop the of the termination : yi(<tlri(iS, rxXairxTtsObs. 4.
(dear,) commonly does the same, or introduces at: flkrtfn, p'Xrmrt,
or piXaintts, fiXxlrans. For the Doric fimfts, see 16. Obs. I. d.
Obs. 6. Contracted adjectives in ifm change us into , for instance, srsjpvji*runs, Teffu^rxTiis, but those in cmw( according to Obs. 2. take u in the resolved
form irXetf, ixXntrarts : hence the contraction is ixKns, arXsitrcms.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
91
Obs. G. That the degrees of comparison in are sometimes communis generis, has
been noticed above, 60. Obs. 4.
66.
1. Adjectives in vs barely drop the s: evqvs, ev^vrepos, ivqvraros.
2. Those in as, gen. avor, do the same, but resuming the v, which
has been rejected before the s : as /îXxs, (gen. jusXavor,) fî\dvTtQOf.
3. Adjectives in wr and sir convert those terminations into ss,
for instance xfcnSris, (gen. ios,) aXrfyiararos, ni-ins, (gen. wror,)
vriviaraTos, yâptsis, /jzpiiara.ros.
4. All other adjectives take the form iartpos, less frequently
ianpos, and undergo the same change as before the final syllables
of the cases ; for instance, aipgcuv, (atppovos,) &Qpov-areQos, 'ipitaS,
(ipTlxyoi ,) a. pnot,y-loTgt.TOS* .
Obi. 1. The end-syllable m of the first decl. being, as we have seen above, 63.
Obs. 7.) frequently an adjective termination, allows a comparison, which always is
-ifrarsf, as xXi*rlffraTcf from x\%iwis, {thief.) Only vêiffTvis, {insutter,) has for
euphony's sake ifyrriri(ts.
Obs. 2. ^mJiif, in, {false,) also has-iVri{, and according to the doctrine of
grammarians the case is the same with ixfirhs, {immoderate^) because ix.(tr'wrif>i
is the compar. of Sixains, {pure.) But in our editions, at least, we also meet with
ax^xTiimfof from the former word, {e.r. gr. Xenoph. Mem. 1, 2, 12.) just as we have
iyx^xTtffTiâe from lyxârtis, {moderate.)
Obs. 3. The simplest form is in paxec^ fietxdfTxrts, ^xaits oixaVtr'Ttt0^
67.
1. Another, but far less frequent, form of comparison is :
'lav, neuter iov, for the compar.
-kttos, m, ov, for the superl.
See above in 55. the decl. of this compar.
2. This form of comparison is used in
1. ) Some adjectives in vs, in this way, ribs, vfiiesy, ^taros:
2. ) Some in pos, dropping the p, as alaxphs, a.\<syjm,
aioyyoros :
3. In some compar. of this form the preceding consonant along
with the i is changed into aa, or tt, see Obs. 7. The adjective
1 In Xenoph. Mem. we twice meet with fiXaxmn^ts, *tt, (3, 13, 4. and 4, 2,
20.) from 0x*{. This is unquestionably wrong, because of the *>, since the in
jSiUg, /3x*jtf, is long. The correct reading unquestionably is (IXaxixunî, txtis :
for whenever a word did not readily admit the degrees of comparison, they were
generally made of the derivative form ixis. Compare 63. Obs. 3.
92
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
rx^> (swift,) superl. rtLyyaros, is written with a & in the compar.

haaauv, neuter Zvoov,Attice &osttwv, &ttov,
whence it appears that the t in rajûs arose from a 3-, according to
18.2.
Obt. 1. This form of comparison always has the accent on the antepenultima,
when the quantity of the last syllable allows it : hence, viit, Mir, neut. tint, nimres.
Obt. 2. The i of this compar. is also used as short by poets, especially by Epic
poets.
Obt. 3. Of the adjectives in vt, none but H&s and
commonly have this form ;
most of them have the regular form of in^; and i/t*t, and but few also take the
Other form, particularly with poets.
OAs. 4. Of the adjectives ending in
the following have this form of compa
rison, viz.
*'"XS<I 'Xfy'S! IXT{Jf, Xl/2jOf,
and they also use the other collateral form more or less, but oixrjit never lias the
compar. in mi. The form 'an, tms, appears to be derived from some old potitivet iu
vs. (See J 69. Obt. I.)
Obt. 5. We must also notice under this head fiaxfis, (long,) because of its compar.
pirviei, (for wtxim, ftfatrTtt. This change of the vowel in the supcrl. is likewise
found in the subst. t prixtt, (length,} and other derivatives. But here too ptixeiTion;, fi.etxfiraraf, are more usual.
Obt. G. A few more comparatives of this form may be seen among the Anomalous
Adjectives of the following sections. Some are used only by poets, as fikim, flXi*rt, from <piXes.
Obs. 7. The compar. in-ea-m, -rrtn, except Silm/i and a few mentioned in the fol
lowing sections, occurs but seldom, and is poetical, as xiten, (Homer,) from r*x*f>
pAetui from /3a3tif, Sec. &c.
68.
Several adjectives have an anomalous form of comparison.
This anomaly mostly consists in forming their degrees from obsolete
positives, and when there are more forms derived from one posi
tive, (see iyoihos, and xaxbr,) each generally has one of the more
particular meanings of that positive, or at least is preferred in
some connections. This must be left to the individual notice of
the learner.
Comparative,
Superlative,
1. aysc&os', (good,) aptei'vaiv, aptEivov, (better,) apiaros, (best,)
fcXrlcvv,
/Ss'Xtkttos-,
xpzloacov, or xpelrrm,
xqzTurTor,
Xaiiwv, commonly \yajv, "Kuiaros, commonly
We find in old poets the real compar. of apioros, viz. aêluv
and
1 "Arm, the God of War, probably identical with it, and the abstract subst. iftrti,
are still evidences of the positive.
1
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
93
of xpirtaros even the positive xparut. The Ionians have xpiaaut

instead of xpuaam, the Dorians xdppuv, (for KAPSflN,) from
another form of the positive, whence comes also the adv. xipra,
(very much,) and the poetical superl. xipriiras. The Epics have
/3e'XTEgorj Xuivspos, instead of jSsXrlcav, Xunuv. (See 16. 06s. 1.
d. about the Doric fiivrtaros.)
2. xotxos, (bad,) xctxiojv,
xixiaros,
yj-ipm,
xe'Ptaros>
riaam, or farm, rtxiaros.
The regular form xaxunpos is used by poets. Instead of %tlpuv
the Ionians have yjeptiuv, and the Dorians xsqyuiv. We find in
the Epic poets the dat. %ipvii, acc. %i^na, pi. x*P'/lS'> r* X*PB'X
employed instead of the compar., though they are properly the
casus of an old positive *.
The comparative worn, (Ion. ham,) only signifies worse, infe
rior, weaker, and is everywhere the opposite of xqtiaom. The
superl. seldom occurs as an adjective ; the neut. pi. rixiara. occurs
very frequently, but simply as an adverb. 115. 7".
3. y.iyas, (great,)
ixsiâ/v, (Ion. juiv,)
fjisytaro,
4. yuxqbs, (small,) iiXoiaauv, rvcov,
iXdî^ros,
5. oXiyos, (little,) 1 //.eia/v,
oXiyidTor.
As these two ideas are so nearly related, the forms iXxaam, iXol~
X'ffTor, and pcEio/v, serve alike to express the notions of smallness
and fewness. The old positive iXayjus is still found in poets ; puxgorEgor, raros, is likewise used ; and poets have also the compar.
oXl^cuv, and superl. /jliTutos.
6. sjoXyr, (much,) zsXelcat or
otXeiittwj
ssXim, (more,)
(most.)
The Attics have also zsXsTv instead of the neut. zsXuov, but only
in such a combination, as vsXuv 3 pupm. The Ionians and Do
rians make the contraction zsXiov, -nXtvv, zsXiovis, otXeuvej. Homer
has also zsXies, wXias, in the plural, the positive instead of the
compar '.
! They commonly are considered as syncopated forms of the compar. (the same
as irXlic,) but a comparison with the old German basz, (whence the Germ, better,
the Kngl. belter,) which was used not merely as a posittae, but also as a compar.,
authorises our view of the subject. (See Luther's German Bible, Gen. 12, 13. 19, 9.)
3 It is as an adjective in //. i/-. 531. according to the only correct rending.
See Buttm. Lcxilogus, I. 4. This form of comparison stood formerly very improperly
under fuitfit in Greek Grammars, merely because the adverbial form may be trans
lated into Latin minus, minime. K*>- is the only positive of Srrtn.
* Compare the note to x'tfin &u- ôr
's obviously an abbreviation of th^'hi,
as the compar. rte'im itself is derived from this abbreviation of xtxit.
94
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
7. xx\os (beautiful,)
xaWiaiv,
xaKKiaros.
8. pgîos, (easy,)
p?w,
pharos.
The Ionians, with whom the positive is pnihos, have pnim,
prt'iaros, the Epics p-nireqos, raros, all from PA12, PHI2 : and
from its neut. pi. PHI A came the adv. pua, pia, (easily.)
9. uXytivos, (grievous,)
dXylaiv,
aKytaros.
But the regular form aXysivorepos, raros, is more usual in the
masc. and fem.
10. vsiituv, (ripe,)
zsmatrepos,
osnia'tra.ros.
11. vtian, (Jat,)
zstoripos,
zsioraros.
Obs. The old superl. in t is peculiar to poets, furxTt, (middlemost,) from
pitcs, and of , (new,) t'txm, mW, (last,) of which the contracted /n. mith de
notes, in prose, the lowest, (with us /Ae highest,) string of a musical instrument.
69.
1. There are also defective degrees of comparison without any
positive, (see the 06s.) and several of the above anomalous forms
Tike r,rrm, xptirruv, XSioros, &c, may be considered as such.
2. Under this head must also be ranked those, which are de
rived from particles, and those which denote a sequence : for
instance, ss'K'naiairsqos, raros, from wXWov, (near, like the Latin
prope, propior, proximus ;)zsôreqos, who is before, prior, zspwros,
the first, from zspo, (before ;) vmionpos, raros, tmAvnaros, higher,
highest, from Cuep, (over, above;)\oyjx.ros, extreme, outermost,
from e, (out of;) varsgos, Taror, (later, last,) and others'.
3. Sometimes degrees of comparison are given to substantives,
which may be taken in an adjective sense ; for instance iraTpos,
(friend,) makes eraiqoraros, yXinrms, (thief,) yXiisriareuros. (See
66. 06s. 1.)
Obs. 1. Some old grammarians erroneously ranked among compar. and super/.,
made of substantives, some defective ones in out and imt, of which there is a kin
dred abstract subst. in , as 'ity'im, (more horrible,) xi(iirm, (most cra/ty.) iîtnt,
(most high;) substantives, <rl fyn, (shuddering,) x'tfin, (cunning,) Sl^n, (height,) and
some of the above-mentioned deviations are explained in the same way ; for instance,
i%Stvrot from to i^Sos, (hatred,) /u-nxio-rts from prixes, (length,) xaWttros from xaXXo,-,
(beauty,) &c But it is unquestionable that these subst. and those compar. and
superl. rather presuppose a corresponding positive, and this is so much the more
certain, since the positive of some few of them may actually be found in the old
poets; ex. gr. xfxrv;, from which comes xfxnmi, and ri xfini, IXtyx'ut, (shameful,)
\tiyxiims, and ri !ktyXeS. Compare 119. 3. e. and 10. d.
1 We frequently meet with compar. and superl. of i, Mm, &C. as iwrifn, i'3.
txtu. &c but they are in-many places obvious corruptions of_the adverbial form
JMvr((w. See 115. and 125.
NUMERALS.
95
Obt. 2. The poets, especially the Epics, have several of those degrees of comparison
belonging to this section ; for instance, <fsjn , ifi^totx, and tp'tprm, (braver, most
excellent,') which may be considered as belonging to iytSis :kiWijus, (more impu
dent,') from xCuv, xvtof, [iu7u-iC-:i'><. (more powerful,) from fixfiXius, Trvpxrot, ftv^trtt,
itrkirifn, and others, which are sufficiently explained in dictionaries.
Obt. 3. We meet, but very rarely, with compar. and super/, made of a word,
which already expresses a degree of comparison ; they give greater intensity to its
signification ; for instance, irxanirecrst, ifiritrts. Expressions of this kind are
found in later writers, not Attics. When Epic poets at times combine both forms
of a compar. as X"ZT'zh puirseei, it is done for the sake of the metre, and not to
strengthen the expression.
OF NUMERALS.
70.Cardinal Numbers.
1. sis, iiia, v, gen. Ivor, p.lis, ivhs, * one.''
There is an anomalous change of accent in ilia, iiias, iiif, iilav.
Epic poets have also instead of ihlsfem. "a, gen. Ins.
From the composition of this word with the negations oi5Ss
and /iwSe arise the negative adjectives,
ovdeis, oude/iix, oudh, and
/iridsls, iiribtiiia, [inidev, no one, none.
They retain in their decl. the accent of sis : oudevls, ouSspuSr, &c.
The separation of ovSe els, /i-nde ?v, &c, in writing, gives inten
sity to the negative signification, not even one, not the least. Se
veral Greek writers, mostly later ones, have also ouSus, ncut, ev,
but the fern, as usual.
2. duo, (nomin. acc.) Suotv, (gen. dat.) two.
The Attics have duiiv, but merely in the gen. : they also use
duo as indeclinable in the gen. and dat. Un-Attic are
N. A. duu, G. luuv, D. dual, dualv : Ion. duoHo-iv : Epic
Soici and Soioi, which is completely declined. The word
aiiQw, (both,) is noticed below, 78.
3. TQtis, (comm.) rpia, (neut.) three, gen. ryuv, dat. rptol, (v.)
acc. like the nom.
4. resaaqes or ri-rraês, four, neuL a, gen. m, dat. riaaapai,
rirrapai, (poet, rerpaai,) acc. as, a.
Ion. rlaatqss, Dor. rirropes, reropss, old and iEol. -alaupes.
The remaining simple numbers up to ten, and the decimal ones
up to a hundred, are not declined at all.
96
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
10 I
... 60
t%
6 uxoat or <tiv ... 20
iQ'&oiA-nxovToi . . 70
luri
7 rpixxotrx
30
oySo^xovra .... 80
bxTw
8 reaaxpxxovra . . 40
bvctwcovt* .... 90
E*ve'a
9 irevTiixovTa . . . . 50
ixarov
100
Not only the long a in tqixxovtx, but also the short one in tetjzqxxovtx, is converted by the Ionians into n ; rqi-nxovrx, naasp-nxovra. Other Ionic and Epic forms are eei'xo<h, oyWxovra, ewjXOVTCt, Doric
5, EIXaTl, 20.
The compounds with ten commonly are
evSex*
11
reaaxpterxxltiixx 14 iirraacxlo'exx . . . 17
.... 12
15 oxrwxx&exx . . , 18
13
ixxcwdEXa . . ...16 EWEatxa/Sexa . . 19
AExaTgEir, SExamrEVTE, &c, occur, but seldom, TêIV and riaoxpis
are also declined in these compositions ; for instance, riaax^xxai
liexx, rtnaxâixxiitxx, îxxrîuv, &C.
AuuSexx and Suoxxfiexx are Ionic and poetical. The forms
Tgiffxa/SExa, Exxai'SEx*, shew that the rest of the numbers com
bined by xxl up to 19, must not be written separate. Ttaatpiaxxlltxx is indeclinable in Ionic, (ex.gr. Herod. 1, 86. has it twice.)
The rest of the compound numbers are usually written separate,
and when the small number precedes, the two are joined by xxl :
if it comes last, the conjunction generally is omitted ; for instance,
we'vte xal sYxoatv, or eixoiri tte'vte.
The round numbers after 100 are regularly declined :
diasxojioi, at, a
,
800
200
oxraxoaioi
rpixxoatot ........ ,
300
envaxoMoi (without e, not 900
TETgaXOlTIOI
400
EVVEz)
WEVTaxomoi
500
Xioi, mpxxia%l\iot, i 1000
it/xxoaiai
600
irevrxxtiyîXtoi, &C. . . '
Ihtux6<sioi
700
(liipioi1, hafiipim, &a, 10,000. (Compare 71. 2.)
The a in 5ia and rpiaxoaioi is long : Ionice lir,xo<sioi, &c., Evve'aX<">-oi, $Exaxf^01 a|*e old forms in Homer. These large numbers
may be used as collcctiva in the sing. : Sixxoolx tmtos, (r> iWor,
cava/rt/.)
Obs. 1. Instead or the numbers compounded with 8 and 9, a frequent use is made
of a circumlocution ; for instance, instead of 49, we find iris Hn-rn, (or piis Suvnir,)
nirriwra., viz. 50 lest one, or wanting one, ius7 iinrmt xiirrixnra., 48, and also iris or
iuiit i'tmrn, the verb tut signifying both to be in want of and to want.
1 Mvgi'u, many, numbcr/est, is contradistinguished from it by the accent.
NUMERALS.
97
Obs. 2. When other words are compounded with these numbers, the Greek has
for the unit ftsw(gtmti single,) for 2 itfor 3 r^tand for 4 vtrâ, as /uhiiîv,
iixifu;, iiruXXafaf, turns, (<t,) itufitXn, (l(io\ii,) rfirevi, Tirûrsvs, &c.s The rest
of the numbers are generally joined with a and o, as ritri-ftirpet, i^d-yutc;, thutmr
iSjflf, Tiirnxwri~yvMt IxarBrra-pvates, îXM-rfltXawtff. Vet we also find ^rtrruttta,
\xaTifi-*u\tis, ixrnxvf, (!?,) and the like. The Ionians make of ima uiirx,"s> &c.
In these combinations the a sometimes remains before a vowel, and sometimes not ;
the o is always dropped or contracted in the compounds with ins, {year;) hence we
have isrrairn;, (of leven year*,) better Wrirns, ramxsvTxirni or rûtxunmrm, (for
c'tTtit?) Observe likewise ittnirns, (of nine years, nine yean old,") and
(for or
during nine days.)
71.Ordinal Numbers and other derived ones.
1. The two first ordinal numbers are two defective forms of
comparison : npuros, first, primus, or in speaking of two, aponqos,
prior; and hvrepos, second'. The others are: rpiros, rirapros,
mifj-itros, exros, efSoftor, oy$oos, evvcctos, îxaros, htiixaros, SojiSixaros,
rpiaxaiiixaros, reaaaqaxatiixaros, &C. s'ixogtos, (20,) rpiaxoaros,
(30,) TEJiTagaxourof, ixxroaros, (100,) SiaxoffiouTor, &c. jciXiouTor,
ixupioaros. In compositions the small number with xal again pre
cedes, or it is placed last commonly without xal, (rpiaxoaros npuros,
or npwros xal rpiaxoaros.) The interrogative mwros, quolus ? is
answered by an ordinal number '.
Tirparos is used instead of rirapros for the sake of the metre ;
the Ionians have slvai-or instead of evvaros, 'haras : the
Epics have rptraros, efod/xaTor, oyZoaros : the Dorians
ttparos for irpairos.
2. The numeral adverbs answering the question, jE/oic many
times ? are : Sm^, (once,) Sir, rg<V, Tfrgaxir, nevraxis, oxrdxis,
hvtaxis or Ewaxir, IxarovTaxir, jîXiaxir, &c. {poet, -xi.) Interroga
tive, iroffaxj*.
3. Multiples answering the question, /iou> manifold? are aTrXoor,
contr. <XoSf, (simple,) oWXoCj-, TgiwXour, reTgawXoIk, &c. (see
60.) or also SiTrXafftor, &c.
4. Numbers as subst. all end in as,' gen. doos, as: 71 y.ows,
* The composition with in-, t(h-, is used only when the meaning of Jif, rfU,
twice, thrice, must be expressed, as in ittrSmiif, (Homer,) ittfki^tu, VeifSm, rfiriS>usf,
and the like.
3 These words have it;, ivs, in the gen. and are generis communis; but they also
have a fern, in ts, <rftaxoitrovrtiis rvrevieii.
1 The superl. hirxTti, {last,) made of it, is merely poetical.
' Farther rtXXnr<rii, one of many, iXtytrris, one offew, Uence ri xiXXart' /<(>,
one of many parts, via. a very small part.
H
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
98
(unity,) Syar, rqiaf, rer^cif, neurits, (also inyntris and ws/xwar,)

h%as, loo//,ar, oyooar, Ivveiir, Ssxaf, &C. sixar, (20,) Tîaxar, (30,)
TEffaagaxovTar, &c. knotroyris, xiXixi, i^vpixs.(Articles, see 75.)
PRONOUNS.
72.Pronouns Substantive and Possessive.
1. The pronouns substantive or personal of (lie first and second
persons, are tyu, I, hiûs, ive, av, thou, v/x-sTs, (long v,) you.
2. Thepronoun of the third person has no longer its nom. sing.,
like V, the Latin se, with which it also corresponds in the Attic
language in its reflective signification. In the plural it has a
particular form for the neuter, which, however, occurs but rarely.
Oil. 1. This pronoun is altogether not frequent in the Attic writers ; for even in
its reflective signification they prefer the compound 'uunh, ( 74. 3.) and in the
direct sense of him, her, it, they employ the oblique cases of the pronoun mtirtt,
74. 2. It occurs more frequently in the Ionic and Epic writers, who use it indis
criminately for him,her, and it, and for the Latin le. (See the Syntax, 127. about
this reflective pronoun.)
3. These pronouns are declined thus :
Sing.
thou,
Nom.
iyco
ou
Gen.
ly.ov, and i*.ov,
aou
Dat.
ifMH, and (Mi,
mi
Acc.
Ipti, and
n
Dual,
N. A.
G. D.
We both,
vui, vw,
vcSi'y, vyv,
the Latin Se
o5
you two,
PL
We,
you,
elpeTr, neut. atpeot
Nom.
(J.WV
Gen.
a/pwv
hfj.iv
a(ptai, (v.)
Vf/AV
Dat.
oifais, neut. atfitx.
T,IJ.0CS
1/y.a.s
Acc.
Obt. 2. The oblique cases of the second and third person are enclitical, yet, ac
cording to the principles of $ 14. Obi. 1. they may also be orthotoned. It is only
the monosyllabic form of the cases of iyu, which is enclitic ; the disyllabic form
must be used, when orthotoned. Of the forms beginning with ftp, only the oblique
cases of the third person, and the forms of dialects noticed in the sixth Observation,
are enclitic ; yet trip and ripZ; with the circumflex, are excepted, but in their
resolved form, (rfin, rf'uct, Obi. 6. 8.) and when efas is made short by Poets, they
also are enclitic.
1 See about this very rare nomin. and its actual occurrence in Attic writers,
Buttm, Complete Gr. Gr.
PRONOUNS.
99
Obs. 3. When one of these pronouns has a preposition prefixed, it generally con
tinues orthotoned, as -rigi rtv, iv til, m(i rfirn, and consequently, (of iyi,)hit'
Obs. 4. The particle yi, (6 150. 2.) is often appended to these pronouns for the
sake of emphasis, in which case iyZ, i/wi, and iui throw the accent back : tyayt,
(equidem,') i/uiyi, iptyt, riyt, &C.
Obs. 5. The oblique cases r.ud; and iuiis are, according to grammarians, equally
capable of being inclined, and, in every instance, when they are enclitics, instead of
throwing their accent on the preceding word, they remove it : r,/mr, fiftri, tfut, &c.
which rule, however, is not generally observed in our editions.
Obs. 6. Dialects.
1. The Dorians and Epics have an old form iyvt for \yi.
2. The Dorians have tu for n, and in the enclitic acc. again ri. The acc. ri
occurs rarely, and only orthotoned, (Theocr. 1, 5.) even the Dorians and
JJolians retain n instead of it. Ti is an old form of the nomin. with
the Epics.
3. In the dat. the Dorians and Ionians have * for ni, but only when it is
enclitic.
4. The gen. co of these pronouns comes from to, hence the Epic poets have
iuio. <r'le, is,
or ifuio, rue, i7o, whence the Ionians and Dorians have IptS, /ctu, riv, iJ,
(see 28. Obs. 5.) and the Dorians instead of rtZ also tiS and tws. The
gen. ruu for s'sc, <ri7c, 11. 9-. 37. is quite anomalous.
5. The Poets make use of a peculiar gen. formed by the appendage of, (compare
116.) the syllabled:
whereof VS-ir, in its direct meaning, (Obs. 1.) is enclitical, for instance,
11. a. 114.
6. 'E,Ki, Tin, or tiiV, "i, (with the sp. lenis,) are orthotoned, ( 14.) Doric datives
for tfui, 7, . (Yet lit sometimes is also acc. Theocr. 11.)
7. The old Ionism of the Epics lengthens the pronoun of the third person with
an i, gen. ivo, dot. \o7, acc. U. This form, (like tôtj,) always is orthotoned.
8. The Ionians resolve the contraction of the pi. and say n/tuc, v/t'us, cp'i'Si
gen. rip.inv, &c. (Epice, xpuuv, &c.) acc. r.uiu:. &c.
9. Poets shorten the end-syllables and asfi/uit, iifiiv, kua;, i/tii, rfit. If
enclitic (Obs. 5.) they are written S/in, &c.
10. The final syllable of the nomin. i/nif, Ifits, is also shortened by the Dorians,
and in the acc. they take the (dual) termination i
i/A, for i/tStt,
ifias, all with the a and u long. This change of pronunciation and accent
gives the following old .lEolic form, which the Epic poets have retained :
A 'in. appii, CfjLfiiSi
Dal. uftuTv, vfj.ji.ty, or afj/zTf vfiftt,
Acc. eifAfii, Z/iftt.
If ifii or ti/ipt also occurs instead of IfH, (Theocr. II, 42.) it is the same
figure by means of which l/ius often is used for iyu. Compare Obs. 7. 2.
1 1. There is a similar abbreviation of the pi. of the third person,
Dat. trip) or '7r',
Acc. ft,
* Some grammarians excepted only
fit, and it really occurs mostly thus in
the Attic writers. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. and Jacob's Prasf. ad Anthol.
100
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
both enclitic. The Attic poets also make use of the ace. rf\, but in all
numbers, (for xiri>, hi, i, and ulrevs, is, a.)
is very rarely used for
the sing. See Buttm. Lejci/ogus, I. 17. 14.
12. Lastly there is another enclitic ace. of the third person,
Ion. fiii, Dor. and All. th,
which also is used for all genders and numbers, but only in the direct
meaning, (Obt. 1.) of him, her, il, pl./Aem. The Attics make use of their
>) merely in poetry.
4. The pronouns possessive derived from these personal pro

nouns are regular adjectives of three terminations. They are
generally formed from the gen. sing, in this manner :
gen. e/Aov gives ij/.os, spri, ty-ov, my,
gen. aov
,, aos, ari, aov, thy,
gen. ol
os, v, ov, his, (of the fern.) her.
And from the nomin. thus :
7)fji.s7s gives ^ptETegos-, at, ov, our.
vy.t~s ,, viAsTspot, a, ov, your.
oQiTs ,, o-spETEgoy, a, ov, their.
Obi. 7. Dialed$ :
1.) The Dorians and Ionians have instead of elsnis, , (>ij) and for St,
sir, i, (,) .With regard to the pretended form Kit, see above the
Anom. Ms, with the note.
2.) There is an old shorter form for the possessive pi.,
upas, it, if, vfiis, *, j *Q*f, h, if,
used by the Dorians and Epic poets, but the latter pronounce the first
person with the ip. lenis,
afids, if, or:
the Attic poets do the same, yet only in the meaning of the ting, (for Ipls
compare Obi. C. 10.) for instance, Eurip. Electr. 555. Soph. Eteclr. 588.
Obi. 8. Poets also make of the dual of the first and second person
,m ntirifit both our, of ui both,
efm efuinf'i both your, of you both.
73.
We must also rank among the pronouns personal
o, r>, to Se~v*, a certain person, some one, such and such a one,
(the French un tel ;) it is declined
nom. and acc. SeiVa, gen. Ssrvor, dot. foTvi,
pi. ol Seives-, &c.
Obt. It is sometimes, though very rarely, indeclinable : for instance, r Jt", rl?
rJ iuta (un,) Aristoph. Them. 622.
PRONOUNS.
101
74.
1. The following four pronomina adjectiva are regularly declined,
except that they have o in the neuter:
avros, avr-h, avro, himself, herself, itself;
exsTvos, ixelm, exeivo, this, that, yon ;
aXKos, XX*i, aXKo, other;
os, vi, o, see 75.
Obt. 1. The Ionians are fond of introducing an t in some forms of alrls, as alrU,
svtm. ( 28. Obt. 3.)
Obt. 2. 'Exiivts comes from Ixu, gander, in that place. The Ionic form is xi'ttf, n, ,
and the Doric rwts, a, . The JEoMc was xrms-See J 29. Ob. 6. about ikkti for
ci iXXei.
2. The pronoun avros has three significations: 1.) self; 2.) in
the oblique cases him, her, it; 3.) with the article the same. See
the Syntax. We merely observe that in the last signification it
frequently coalesces with the article, (according to 29. Obs. 4.)
ravrov, ravru, ravrri, for Toy adrov, &c, and in this instance the
neuter is both in bv and 6 :
raiirb and ravrov, for to avro.
The forms ra&ry and ravri, especially when the coronis ' is
wanting, must not be confounded with ravr-r, and ratine from
olros. 76.See about the Ionisms uvros, ravro, 29. 06s. 6.
3. It is with avros that is formed
the pronoun reflective,
which being compounded with the acc. of the pronouns personal
(e/ae, as, ,) is declined thus in the oblique cases :
gen. lyMvrov, \y.avrr\s, dat. enavrZ, ri, acc. iy.avrbi, w, of my
self, to myself, myself,
gen. atavrov, or axvrov, &c. ofthyself, to thyself, thyself
gen. eavrov or avrov, &c. of himself, or herself, &c.
The pronoun of the third person has also an acc. neut. kavro,
avro, and is declined in the plural : kavrZv, iavrovs, &c. The
two words are written separately in the pi. of the pronouns of the
two first persons : rii*uv and viiwv avrwv, &c.
OAs. 3. Originally the ring, was also naturally written separate. Homer still has
J cumZ, ii xln-S. We likewise find separately in his works, l ctirm. i/i aire; &C,
II. a. 271. ?. 1C2. . 490. ; and Od. \. 185. <ra c aiinu, <r" airif, (or cruirov, Jf) is con
sidered as an elision of ri o-i.
Obs. 4. In these compositions the Ionians have tin instead of mi, ( 27. Obi. 1. 11.)
and commonly do not elide the i in the first person, They say IptviiTtu, riMrtrj
Uvrw, &cSee about ivvrim, &c. Qbt. 1,
102
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
4. But it is with aWos that is formed

the reciprocal pronoun
in the strictest sense : 1
gen. dWriXaiv, dat. dW^Xot^, an, acc. dXkriXovs, as, a,
dual, dWr)\a), a, oiv, aiv, one another.
75._ The Articles.

1. The Greek grammarians give the name of articles, (t<z apSpx,)
to the two simplest adjective-like designations of subst., which in
a proposition have a reference to each other in two connected
sentences. One of these designations is called in modern lan
guages the definite article, (the,) the other the pronoun relative,
(who, which1.)
2. Of these two articles one is
Articulus prapositimis,
o, ft, to, the,
which is declined like the pronomina adjectiva, 74, except that
1.) the nomin. sing, and pi. of the masc. and fern, gender
are unaccented, ( 10. 4.) and have the spiritus asper ;
in all the other cases a r is prefixed.
1 It is thus called, because it is used when the action of the verb falls on the
subject. The distinction between reflective and reciprocal is sufficiently clear in
English, the reflective verb being construed with self, and the reciprocal with one
another, each other. The word reciprocal comprises in some degree both cases ;
hence some grammarians call reciprocal, what we call reflective.
! This dual serves for an action, which is reciprocal between two individuals ; but
the plural may equally well be used in such cases.
1 The following is a proposition, in which the two Greek articles occur: ' This
is the man, who will save us,' oZrit Wit S
Si e>tu iftas- As these two little words
act like articulations, and join two sentences like joints of limbs, the Greeks called
them i-A a3j, articuli, joints. But that the first of these two articles i, v, rl, (the,)
often stands alone in an unconnected sentence, and strictly speaking acts no longer
as a joint, is owing to the circumstance, that in a great variety of such instances we
keep the reference in our minds, for instance, the man was here, i. e. the man whom
you know, the man of whom we spoke before, or something of that sort. Hence
language gradually annexed the articulus pr&positivus, ' the,' to any object, which was
considered as sufficiently designated by a previous observation, or by circumstances.
The grammars of modern languages retained the denomination of article for this
articulus praposilivus without attending to its origin ; but gave to the articulus
postpositive, very properly on considering it by itself, the name of the pronoun
relative. And as in modern languages, another pronoun a, an, which in fact is
nothing but a feebler t)s, ti, quidam, designates indetermined objects, just as this
designates determined ones, the latter, (the,) was called the definite, and the for.
mer (a, an,) the indefinite article, though these words have nothing of the nature
of articulations or joints. In a Greek grammar we ought to abide by the old Greek
denominations, since they are so well-founded. But articles are needlessly con
sidered as parts of speech in any grammar. They really are pronomina adjectiva.
ARTICLES.
103
2.) not only the neuter, as in the adj. pronouns, but also the
masc. in the nom. sing, ends in o, (5.)
The other is the
Articulus postpositivus,
os, w, Sj who, which.
This is declined exactly like the pronomina adjectiva, 74. 1.
Articulus praspositivus,
the,
Sing.
M.
F.
N.
<
Nom.
0,
TO,
D>
Gen.
TVS,
TOV,
TOV,
Dat.
TV,
tSi,
Acc.
rm,
TO.
TOV,
Dual,
N. A.
ret,
To),
TU,
rah,
G. D.
To7v,
TOiy,
Plur.
Nom.
01,
XI,<
rat,
TcifVj
tSv,
Gen.
tx7s,
Tols,
TOIS,
Dat.
robs,
txs,
TX.
Acc.
Articulus postpositivus,
who, which,
M.
N.
F.
.\
*
OS,
n.
*
OU,
oi,
fc>
t
r
D,
v>
A
ov,
S,
oh,
J
ah,
oh,
oi,
uv,
ois,
ovs,
at,
3>v,
als,
*
as,
<\
a,
r
01V,
ois,
It
X.
Obs. I . The deviations in the dialects are the same as in the end-syllables of the
first and second decl. ; for instance, rue for rev, i for fi, ras for rrit, &c. Homer has,
though but rarely, eeu for the gen. oZ of the articulus postpositivus.
Obs. 2. Both articles were alike in form in the old language, and were only dis
tinguished by their position and accent, as is still the case with >), el, til. The Epic
poets have also J, (incorrectly S,) for St, and all the forms of the art. prcep,, which
begin with r, are likewise used by the Ionians and Dorians for the corresponding
forms of the postpositivus,
re for S, rm fo*r ijv, &c.
The Dorians also have re), rn), for both el, a!, and el,
Obs. 3. The two articles are in fact nothing but the old simple pronoun demon
strative, (this,) and are frequently employed for it in the works of the ancients in
many contexts even in prose, as is shown in the Syntax. See the usual pronouns
demonstrative derived from it in the following Section.
3. The articulus postp., or simple pronoun relative, is strength
ened in several combinations partly by the enclitic particle m\p,
(osntp, J>irep, faep, &c.) partly by being compounded with the pro
noun tis, (ootis, &c.) See 77. 3.
Obs. 4. With regard to the enclitic ri, which in Epic poetry is appended to Si, as
?s ti or trri for Ss, 1W or ritri for S>, see 149. under ri.
104
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
76.
1. The Greek has a double form for the general pronoun de
monstrative, ' this.' One is made by appending the enclitic h,
( 14. Obs. 3.) to the articulus prcep. :
oSs, ^Se, roh, gen. rovfo, rwl's, &C. plur. o'&e, ctiSe, TatSe,
ravage, &C.
2. The other form oSror comes from the same article, and
conforms itself entirely to it in its very anomalous decl. Whereever the article has the spiritus asper or the r, the pronoun has
the same, and where the article has o or u, the pronoun has in the
first syllable ov, but where the article has w or at, the pronoun
has av: for instance, 5ovros, o'iovrot, twvrovrm, itavrn,
rirxvra, &c.
Sing.
Plur.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nom.
ovror, avrn,
tovto,
oiroi,
avrxi,
rxvrx,
rovrcov, rovruv, rovrun,
Gen.
tovtou, rxvrw, rovrov,
rouroit, rxvraif, rovrois,
rourai, rxvm, rovrta,
Dat.
rovrov, rxiirret, Toyro,
rovrovs, rxvrxs, rxvra.
Acc.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Dual, N. A. rovru,
ravrx,
ravru,
G. D. Tot/Toiv,
rzvraiv,
rovroiv.
Obi. I. As the arlinulut prarp. was the only pronoun demonstrative in the oldest
language, ( 126.) but gradually lost this meaning, it is obvious that both these
forms only give to it more intensity, and that ivrts in particular is in some degree
the mperl. of i.See the still greater intensity given to both by annexing , 80.
Obi. 2. The dialects offer no peculiarity, but the Ionic i in ?vr'uv, nvr'ttn, &c.
aud the very anomalous Epic form
of the dat. vUvhari, TwVSirf/ for reirit.
Obi. 3. The nom. tires, aim, is likewise used as a kind of vocative or exclamation
in the sense of the Latin heut! ho! you yonder! hark!
77.
1. The simple Pronoun Interrogative
ris, neut. rl, gen. Ti'vor ; who or ivhich, what ? quis, qua,
quid ?
always has the accent on the i, (river, dat. pi. rim, &c.) and dis
tinguishes itself by that circumstance, and by its nomin. constantly
having the acute accent, from the simple pronoun indefinite,
r\s, neut. ri, gen. -nvbr, any one, some one,
something, aliquis, aliqua, aliquid,
PRONOUNS.
105
which besides is mostly enclitic, and written without an accent.

They are both regularly declined after the third decl., and the i is
everywhere short.
Obt. 1. In those rare instances, in which tIj or r! gets the acute accent, because
it is followed by other enclitics, the connection or the accent of the preceding word
must distinguish it from the pronoun interrogative : as, atif <ris t.
Obt. 2. Poets, and also the Attic Comic writers, employ instead of the interroga
tive rl the emphatic rm, what then, why then, why to t
2. The following forms are often used instead of the gen. and
dat. of both pronouns :
rov, ra, (in the three genders,) orthotoned for t/voj-, rlvt, and
enclitic for riiios, -rivi, as rib rsx//.alpsi rovro ; how dost
thou prove that ?yuvaixor rov, of a certain woman,
Xgna'ba't Tco to use something :
and for the neut. pi. of the pronoun indefinite arrx, Ion. aaaa,
for nva, but always orthotoned, as,
Seivz arret, for Ssiva rival, Od. r. 218.
3. The compound pronoun relative oarts, (who, which,) an in
tensive of 'is, has a double decl.
Nom. oarts, arm, o,rt, (see 15. 2.)
Gen. ovnvos, fonvos, dat. arm, rintt, &c.
It also admits one of those collateral forms of r\s, which we have
just mentioned (2) :
orov, oroi,for oSrivor, arm, (but not for the fern.)
arrx, Ion. iaaafor ariva.
Obt. 3. The collateral form rm, r, must not be confounded with the article,
from which it is totally different, as is shewn by the triple gender and the dialects.
The riZ of the article is resolved by the Epics into two, but the nu for rim, rim,
into r'u, whence Ion. and Dor. ril.dat. Ion. t*.The same in the compound
pronoun relative ano, i'rrsa, orw, onu.
Obt. 4. The Tonians have this collateral form also in the gen. and dat. plural, t!,
r'uitri, for tivy, nrit, and the Attics even hare, though rarely, in the compound
pronoun relative, aruv, Srtift, Xen. Anab. 7, 6, 24. GZcon. 3, 2. (see Schn.) Soph.
OSd. T. 414. Aristoph. Eq. T5S.) lonice irwt, ir'nnt, and also in the fern, irinrn.
Obt. 5. Epics also have the compound pronoun relative with the first syllable
unchanged in all the casesens, Srux, (for Jtrnm and ,) irnmt. Whenever they
use the double t, they write the neuter thus : 1,rru
(See 80. about 'mrttvaut, iruevv, &c.)
4. Tir compounded with ou and /xri gives the negative pronouns
o'vns, (Arirts, i, no one, none, which are declined like r)s, ( 78. 2.)
106
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
78.Pronomina and Adjectiva1 Correlativa.

1. Correlativa are words, several of which stand in such a
connection with each other, that one contains a certain question,
and the corresponding ones express the simplest relations, which
answer that question. The general correlatives have already
been stated above, viz. :
the pronoun interrogative rls, who f
the demonstrative b, SoY, ovros, this :
the indefinite r\s, any one, some one :
the pronoun relative or, compound oans, which :
the negative oimr, otitis, ( 77. 4.) or ouSeis-, pmSsir, 70. 1.)
no one, none, each, of course, with its fern, and neut.
2. When these expressions are expressly confined to two
objects, or two parts,
the interrogative is zsorepos, a, ov, which of tlie two?
the demonstrative the same with the above '.
the indefinite b trepos,
Irlpa, &c.) one of the two.
the relative bnbrtpos, which of the two.
the negative ovêrsqos, pwiSs'TEgor, neither.
Obt. 1. 'O l'ri; '8 exactly the Latin after, and when one of two is already named,
S iVsfo; becomes definite, and must be translated the other, (4.) See about the.cnjm
trtfH, 9Ti{t/, &c. 29. Obi. 5.
3. The answer to n's and zsorcpos may also be each. This has
in Greek the form of a compar. and superl.
ixareqos, at, ov, each of the two,
exao-Tor, %, ov, each or every one (of several.)
4. Other general answers may be given to tiV, as
&Wos, another, ( 74. 1.)
Tsis, zjxira, all, ( 62. 4:)
The question tsbrspos may be answered by
b ?TEgor in the sense of the other, (see Obs. 1.
dîpirtoos, at, ov, a/xiporEgOf, ai, a, both,
and in some connections instead of dix/fonpos simply the dual,
N. A. cifj!.<pco, G. D. a/>upo7v with the accent removed, which is
used for the three genders.
Obt. 2. In Poets ipf* is sometimes indeclinable, and used for the gen. and dat.
See about xx and Kti{, i 127. 4.
1 Pronouns cannot be so precisely defined in theory, as not to admit many word*)

which may also be considered as atfectivei.
PRONOUNS.
107
79.
1. Independently of these general correlatives, there are also
some definite or particularising ones, referring to the properties
and relative circumstances of the object, (ofwhat nature ? in what
place?) These are formed in Greek after a very distinct ana
logy ; but as they are partly adjectives, and partly adverbs, we
shall treat of the latter separately, 116.
3. Each series of correlatives has a common root and inflec
tion ; but distinguishes itself by the initial letter. The interro
gative begins with a ss, for instance, -novos, quantus? how great?
how much? The same form, but usually with a change in the
accent, serves for the indefinite, aoahs, aliquantus, of a certain
size or number. When there is a r instead of the initial ot, it is
the demonstrative, tocos, tantus, so great, so much; but if the
initial consonant is dropped, and the word begins with the spiritus
asper, it is the relative, '6aos, quantus, as great as, as much as.
There is in common language no negative to answer to these
questions.
4. Beside the simple relative, there is also a compound one,
which in some circumstances is generally preferred. It answers
to the correlative oans, orov, and is formed by prefixing an o to
the interrogative,
vsoaos, relative oaos and hnoaos, (poet, bwxoo-os.)
5. The simple pronoun demonstrative, Qroaos,) is mostly used as
a perfect demonstrative by Poets only ; but in prose sometimes
merely in the restricted instances, when there is no particular
stress on the relations of quantity, (or quality, in row,) ex. gr.
aau fiekrim lar), roaco [aocKKov (pv\&TTZTai, (Xen. Cyrop. 1, 6, 20.)
twos x.a.1 roaos. Hence we generally find a more emphatic form
Used, and just as the article 6, (the old and weaker demonstrative,)
is strengthened either by the enclitic Se, (8Se,) or by being changed
into ouTor, the same is done here ; -or in the second instance is
changed into -ovros, as
roaostojotSe or rovovros.
The former is declined in the middle of the word
nxrofjSe, Too-n&i, TtxrovSe, gen. roaav^s, &c.
(see about the accent, 14. Obs. 3.) The latter conforms en
tirely to ovros respecting the diphthongs ov and au, but has in the
neuter both oy and o, thus
108
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
roaovros, rooavrri, roaovrov and rodouro
gen. roaovrov, rooavrms, &C.
pi. roaovroi, roaavrat, roaavrat, &c.
The following are the three completest series of this kind :

Interrog.
zsoaos ;
how great ? hoiv much ?
quantus ?
sjoio ;
ofwhat kind 9
of what nature ?
qualis ?
wnXixor ;
how old ?
how great ?
Indef.
zsoaos,
ZJOIOS,
Demonstr.
roaos,
roaoaHs,
roaovros,
roTor,
Rel.
oaos,
bwbao,
oios,
roiovroi,
zjriklxos, rnXixor,
rn'kixooo's,
rvikixovros,
rfKlxos,
o'nrikiKOs.
See about the Ionic forms xoW, xo!os, hxioos, Sec. 16. Obs. I.e.
Obs. 1. There are also a few incomplete correlative!, which, (like rin^m, <roTi{,
in the preceding Section,) have only the compound relative beside the interrogative ;
of this kind are especially mparts, ircixris, (where born, of what country, of what
place,) the derivatives of Tons, like Torras, srefraics, T#rarXsrftintvrls, &c. and
the demonstrative rims, rwniirts, (tiny, to very small, tanlillus,) is also a correlative.
Obt. 2. This class of words derive their correlative power from the initial letters
t, t, &c. but some of them denote also other relations, when compounded, especially
with the general correlative), "rifts, \kts, *<*t, (} 78-) fc>r instance, the interrogative
crrf is al.so answered by Irtfucs, ix\>7es, of another hind, ofa different nature, reifn'as, of all sorts, of every kind. It is the same with (niaris,) which gives iWila<ris, retmiaxes, ipitaris, (belonging to our country, our countryman,) and the like.
Obs. 3. To consider <rwm<ris, &c. as a compound of aim is improper. The final
syllable turn here, and in the word euros by itself, is nothing but the superl. of is, as
will be clearly shown below, in treating of the particles, (itmuâ, imZStt, 116.)
80.Appendages.
r 1. The compound and strengthened pronouns relative like
tarn, orov, oairsp, hiroaos, &c. annex to all their cases the little
word ouv, which retains the accent, and in this composition exactly
answers to the Latin cunque, denoting the completeness of the
relation ; as tans, who, hariaovv, quicunque, whosoever, rinaovv,
hrtovv, otuovv, acc. bvrivaovv or ovrivoyv, &c.ooT!regot)v, owoaoaovv,
oTrnXiKououv, &c.
Obs. 1. The form SuVjti imparts still greater force to this signification; as irririvrtri trw, whosoever it may be, itctiriTtn, but it is frequently written separate.
?, In the language of familiar intercourse, the Attics, to give
VERBS.
109
greater intensity to the pronoun demonstrative, annex to all its

forms the
/ demonstraticum,
which likewise draws the accent on itself, is always long, and
absorbs all short final vowels ; for instance,
oirosovraai, this here, (Latin hicce, French celui-ci,) avrni, (from
awn),) T0t/r!, (from rouro,) ixsivoal, (celui-ld,) JxEtvovi, &c.
roffovrovi, rtxrovSi, (viz. so much, so great as you see there,) &c.
See about long vowels and diphthongs being made short
before this .', 7. Obs. 19.
Obt. 2. Whenever the enclitic yl is annexed to the pronoum demorulralive, the
.' takes the place of the i, as nZri yt, Tturtyl.
Obt.3. If there be an r before this i, it is sometimes found with the moveable r,
as tirta, rtmntii. (The case is the same with the adverb airtitit from lim.')
81.-0/ the Verb.
1. The essential forms of the Greek verb, as moods, tenses, &c.
may be supposed to be known from other languages ; but the
Greek is more copious than the Latin, English, or German verb,
especially with regard to having a middle voice distinct from the
active and passive voice, the optative as a particular mood distinct
from the conjunctive, the aorist as a particular tense, the dual as
a particular number, and a greater variety of moods and par
ticiples for the several tenses. It must not be imagined, how
ever, that every form is perfect and in constant use in every verb,
though Greek grammars necessarily state all the forms complete
in one verb.
2. It also happens much more frequently in the Greek than in
other languages, that a form, which according to a strong analogy
should be confined to one signification, has the opposite signifi
cation ; for instance, the passive voice often has the signification
of the active. Hence we must first be acquainted with the forms
themselves, remembering at the same time what their principal
destination is conformably to analogy.
3. But these significations can be thoroughly developed in the
Syntax only, and what is absolutely necessary for their intelli
gence may be supposed to be known from other languages, as
for instance the notions of the passive voice, the conjunctive and
imperative of the present, &c. There are, however, a few pre
vious remarks stated respecting the optative in 88. 2. and re
110
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
specting the middle voice in 89. We now proceed to treat

more particularly of the tenses of the Greek verb.
4. The most satisfactory division of the tenses is according to
their reference to the present, past, and future. But the past, in
common language, is susceptible of a greater variety than the
two other. The tenses referring to time past are known by the
general name of preeterites ; there is, however, this essential dif
ference, that, in one of their forms, the thought is confined to the
present time, and facts or circumstances are mentioned simply as
having occurred ; this is the perfect : in the other forms the
thought is transferred to the past, and facts and circumstances
are narrated as they occurred at that particular time1. This
narrative species of the prceterite introduces new subdivisions,
and gives, in Latin, German, and English, the imperfect and the
plusquamperfectum, and in Greek an additional tense the aorist,
of which the import is stated in the Syntax, 138.
5. None of the known languages distinguishes the two species
of preeterites by forms so strongly marked as the Greek. The
perfect adheres in the main to the analogy of the present and of
the future, whilst the narrative species of the prceterite has its
own distinct analogy, on which the Greek grammar builds a
second division of the tenses, and calls
Principal Tenses
the present, perfect, and future, and
Historical Tenses
the imperfect, plusquamperfectum, and aorist.
6. There is a double distinction in the form. 1.) The tenses of
the Greek verb are distinguished one from the other by their
terminations ; and 2.) the praeterites by an additional prefix,
called the augment. The historical tenses again distinguish
themselves from the other tenses, and consequently also from the
perfect by a peculiar augment, and particular inflections of the
terminations of their numbers and persons*. We proceed to the
augment, and shall treat of the inflections and conjugation in
87.
1 Even in a lively narrative this transfer of the thought to the particular time
past, frequently betrays the narrator into the use of the present tense, (especially in
the French language.)
! That our classification of the Greek tenses by augments and terminations is,
as it were, firmly rooted in the language, and, of course, essentially important, is
very obvious. A present tense, preterite, and (perhaps periphrastic) future, are
the three most indispensable tenses, with which the scanty old language may be
VERBS.
Ill
82.Of the Augment.

1. The augment is an alteration in the beginning of the word,
which in most instances consists of a real addition, and when
this is not the case, is yet derived from an original addition.
2. The augment is different according as the Greek verb beginswith a consonant or vowel. When the verb begins with a con
sonant, the augment makes a syllable of itself, and is then called
the syllabic augment. But when the verb begins with a vowel,
this vowel, when short, generally becomes long. This is called
the augmentum temporale, {xvfynais xpovixvi,) the word xpows refer
ring likewise to the quantity of syllables.
3. But there is again in every verb a double augment of the
perfect and historical tenses. We first state both with respect to
the syllabic augment, because this is, as will be seen, the> founda
tion of the other1.
4. The augment of the perfect, when the verb begins with a
consonant, consists in prefixing the initial letter of the verb with
the vowel , as
rvitrca, perf. ri-ru(pac :
hence this augment is also called the reduplicative augment, or
simply reduplication. If the verb begins with an aspirata, it
follows from 18. that the corresponding tenuis is prefixed, for
instance,
The fut. 3. which comprises the meaning of the perfect, retains
this augment, % 99.
5. But the historical tenses barely prefix the e, as,
rvirtu, imperf. 'i-rwitrov, aor. 'i-wvj/as,
supposed to have been satisfied. They, therefore, are justly called principal tenses.
This praterite unquestionably served for the purposes of narration ; it is. indeed, to
the need of narrating or relating, (the oldest want of men,) that we trace the origin
of all language; yet this praterite was at the same time a mere perfect, just as we
hear even now in several parts of Germany the uneducated class deliver their nar
ratives exclusively in the heavy German perfect. It was only in proportion a3 the
language was cultivated, that it gradually separated from the praterite the historical
tenses, with their modifications, and left the old prteierite to keep its station, as a
pure perfect, among the principal tenses. To observe the analogy, which in the
Greek so clearly distinguishes the principal and historical tenses, is highly interest
ing. The learner must, therefore, direct his particular attention to the syllabic
augment, and the terminations of the tenses particularised in 87- 3.
' We combine the theory of the reduplication of the perfect with that of the
simple augment, of which the former is the foundation, because this combination
best shews wherein the two augments agree, and essentially differ.
112
A GREER GRAMMAR.
and the plusquamperfectum, which adds the historical meaning to

the signification of the perfect, puts this e before the reduplication
of the perfect ; as
runrai, perf. ri-rvtyz, plusq. e-rerutfittv.
6. There are au<j7nents in the active, passive, and middle voice.
But with regard to moods and participles, as the indicative alone
has the imperfect and plusquamp., we consider here none of the
historical tenses but the aorist, and in this respect have the fol
lowing rule :
The augment of the perfect is retained in all moods and

participles ; but the augment of the aorist takes place
only in the indicative.
Thus of rvifrcu,
the PERF. is Ttrutpz, inf. rtrvtplmi, part, rsrvtyuis,
A OR.
si-iAâ rir^/ai
"rivets,
and the fut. 3. is like the perfect. (See 4.)
Obi. The rule may be expressed still more accurately. Any reduplication, or
whatever supplies its place, continues through all moods, (hence the irregular redu
plication of the aor. XtXa5, part. XtXxSir, and the like 83. Obi. 7-) but any simple
augment takes place merely in the indicative, (hence the irregular aor. Hyecyn drops
merely the augmentum temporale in the in/in., &c. iyxyiit, J 85- Obs. 2.) See about
any founded or unfounded exceptions, the Anom. ayivpi and tirt'r.
83.
1. The preceding Section stated the syllabic augment in its
proper capacity and regularity ; the present will shew its devia
tions and peculiarities.
2. Whenever a verb begins with an p, this p is doubled after
the s, as
pdirrco, imperf. tppxTnov.
(See 21. 2. and the exceptions ibidem, Obs. 2.) and the perfect
and plusquamp. have only the same augment without the redu
plication
Perf. eppxtpa, plusquamp. ippxtytiv.
3. When a verb begins with a double letter, it takes merely
the e instead of the reduplication, which e then remains unchanged
in the plusquamp. ex. gr. -^dMu, perf. %â\x, plusq. Eâ'XxEiv :
^r.Ttoj, %iai, perf pass. htymtAat, s$E<rp<.ai. And this is done in
most instances, where the verb begins with two consonants, ex. gr_
perf. tySopa. of tpStlpw, perf. pass, inmpfteu of amipu, sktwiaou of
xt'ck, 'ivTuyiMti Of arvaau.
VERBS.
113
OA*. 1. From this last rule are excepted, and consequently subject to the prin
cipal rule
a.) Two consonants, of which the 6rst is a mute, the other a liquid, (mula cum
liquida,') for instauce, y^xfu yrygaQet, xi-xXtf&at, vt-mmM, t'iSXxkx, &C.
But yi takes merely the i, and yX, fix, are fluctuating; ex.gr. yinû
\yvu(inrftxtt xstT'SyXajTriffitya;, ii-iyXuXTKi and hx-yiyXvxriu, fiXaxrw /3</->Amflat, fj\xcx\'jj tfiXttfnxtz .
b.) The perfects pipvrificti and xixrvifjuu of fiyew and xriofiui. The Ionians,
however, (and even the Attics sometimes, ex. gr. Plato, Meno. 39.) have
Ixrqwu. All other verbs beginning with py and *r, take simply the i,
ex. gr. ipvnftonvKat, ixTtunr/txt, ixtovx.
c.) The perfects a-tiTrat/**/, TFiTmxx, vi-rrvKa, Tirrrviitt, (see the Anom. yrirnvttifu, r'm/txi, xitrnt, mVw,) all of which rather are syncopated verbs of
the root nETn. Any perfect immediately and regularly derived from
ct, has merely i, as the usual perfect of XTneoai itm%cc, and 'nrrin/uu,
timet***.
OA*. 2. The same kind of augment, peculiar to verbs beginning with {, may
have taken place in the old language with other semivowels ; hence the two per
fects t/t/tisx and Irruftai, see the Anom. /cilfo/tai and a%iti.The Epics double all
liquids for the sake of the metre, but only in the imperf. and aur. ixXafay, ip/taSt.
See the Anom. iiiirai about iiiun.
OA*. 3. A few verbs of the common language beginning with liquids, hare,
instead of the reduplication, the syllable il or tl, ex. gr. tlx*fa. See the Anom.
XoLp.fca.yu, Xay%uyv, Xlyu, fiugtfrtai, and PEft under uVl7t>.
Obt. 4. Homer's figvmpira is the only instance of a reduplication before j.
06*. 5. In the three verbs favXeftaj, (to be willing,') idx/iai, (tobeable,~) and ftixXu,
{to be about to do, intend to dn,~) the Attics commonly strengthen the sijllabic aug
ment by the addition of the temporal one ; ex. gr. ibmi/im instead of iluydfiny, the
same in irtXaiu, see J 86. OA*. 2.See about the syllabic augment before a vowel,
J84.'sOA*. b.elc.
OA*. 6. Non-Attic poets often omit the augment in the historical tenses ; ex. gr.
fcaXi for ifiaXt, /35 for ifcn, yitem for \yimrc, &c. * Compare about the accent,
OA*. 1. 2. to 103.This omission in the plusquamp. is also very common in prose :
rtTufurxy, r'trvTre, for irirvûrar, WiTinrrc, iilitt, (Plato, Phaedr. 251.) for Istliu, and
the like. But the omission of the real reduplication is very rare and doubtful.
See about iSix and the like 110. 8. and about the Epic redv.pl. hi, instead of Si,
the Anom. Siteiti and ittxvvfu.
OA*. 7. The aor.2. (of the active and middle voice,) has also frequently the redupl.
in Epic poets, and this redupl. continues through all the moods, (see 82. 0. with
the Note,) ex. gr. rixXnyov, XtXxBiiv, rtnBtsr, XtXttfUcSxi, &c. In some few verbs
the simple augment is added in the indie.
Wifâity, (see the Anom. and com.
pare aiXtfuu and *ENn.)The present and the fut. active have this redupl. only in
some mostly poetical forms derived from reduplicated tenses ; see 1 1 1 .
1 Observe that yy, yX, fix, belong to those instances of muta cum liquida, which
are also excepted from the rule of the others in prosody, (see $ 7- 10.) The other
exceptions stated in that Section do not occur in a way, which applies here ; for
litfirifuti is a syncope. See the Anom. %'ipu.
* With Attics for the sake of the metre but seldom ; see Herm. on Eurip. llec.
p. xxxii. In prose, never, not even in Ionic prose. The sole exception is zt"'See the Anom.
x%n.
I
114
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
84. The Temporal Augment.
1. When the verb begins with a vowel, whether it has the sp.
asper or lenis, the augment coalesces with the initial vowel into a
long vowel, and this kind of augment, called the temporal augment,
(see 82. 1.) continues unchanged in all the prceterites. A or s
generally becomes w, and o u, ex. gr.
dvuco, imperf. wuov, perf. rnvxa, plusq. mixw,
Wnity, imperf. %\irtfyv, perf. riKmxa, plusq. nhnlxw,
oîkiu, imperf. </w.i\sov, perf. ui/j.l'knxtji, plusq. aiy-ik-nxtit.
2. The following verbs sxu> I have, eden, I let, t\xui, / drag,
(see the Anom.) ipwu and ipiru^co, I creep, e&/<y, J accustom,
iXliou, I ivind, fcioLto, I give a feast, siren, (see the Anom.) and
iiroftxi, I follow, epyaôiAoii, I work, do not change the s into r,,
but into ei, for instance, imperf. eixv, perf tlgyoto^m, &c. (See
Obs. 4.)
Obi. 1. See also Cxu, ikt'r, in the Anom, al('ui, tu3* in the Anom. J3v, and the
verbs belonging to the root 'Efl, 108.1
3. The vowels i and v can only be augmented, when they are
short, and they then become long through the augment ; ex. gr.
Ixsreuw, (Eurip. Med. 971.) aor. Ixmuax, (338.) and even when
the syllable is already long by position, the augment must be
rendered sensible in pronunciation, ex. gr. 'ta^vu '{<s%vai, fovea,
V/MVOVV.1
4. Of the vowels long in themselves, a (according to Text 1.)
commonly becomes n, the others <n, a, r, v, are not susceptible of
the augment, ex. gr. w-rraoptai,
imperf. irrri^m, perf. rjTT)/Aai, plusq. vtrrrii^riv,
except by the removal of the accent. See Obs. 4.
5. A diphthong may be augmented, when its first vowel can be
changed in the way mentioned above, and if the second vowel be
an i, it is subscribed, thus :
av\ia v>u\ovv,
euyfi/jiairiiypiJ.m, '
atriarirovv,
riSov,
olxiuuxovv.
But many verbs neglect this augment, (Obs. 2.) and it never
takes place with ov, (oirdûouTaôv.)
1 The following are improperly considered as belonging hither, viz. ?<r and i{i>.
Sec the Anom. u1. about il,a. See 108. 2.
and .W., ubout wvia,
\,tu-rm, which forms belong, however, to the Ionic tifim, il^ni*.
VERBS.
115
Obs. 2. Those verbs, in which the augment would produce a cacophony or indis
tinctness, remain in general unchanged, especially a few beginning with a, at/, a/,
followed by another vowel, xta, unfit, attSt&fitat, ava'tvu, e'uxxlfy, eliu, and some others ;
only that the short x, for instance in Ha, is lengthened : imperf. aim, (long a,) wiiim,
oi'ax/sv, &c. But itlla makes rfuJov according to the general rule. Neither do
some other verbs beginning with a, take the augment, titlfy, tixtvîa, elrgia, or
those beginning with u, (as ux, sT*a>,
with the solitary exception of unify,
which, however, is only augmented by the Attics, and that but rarely, t'Sxxea, i'Uae-tixi, Alt. Sxowa, ixxr/ixi.In the verbs beginning with tu the augment nti is Attic,
and the usage is fluctuating, niî/mv and ti%Zfim, tifiSm, very seldom tiifiBnt. See
about compound verbs with tl, 86. 3.
Obs. 3. But the Ionians and non-Attic poets frequently neglect this augment as
well as the syllabic one in any verb, ex. gr. iful/im for tuulfim, lm for
(oflaw,)
&c. even in the per/, and plutq. past. ex. gr. ilu/ixi, tlxxftxi, (of tt, tlxli,) Herod.
The Dorians, instead of changing those beginning with a into , merely alter the
quantity, i.
Obs. 4. The temporal augment arose unquestionably from the contraction of the
syllabic augment with the vowel of the verb, ex. gr. xym t-tvyn nyti : the contrac
tion of it into n, and u into u, is, however, a deviation from the general custom,
( 28. 3. b.) but that of ta into , and n into u,
l-t%n, ux"i) agrees exactly with
it.Hence the accent of some compound verbs is accounted for. As the accent,
(according to Obi. 1. 1. to 103.) always rests, as far as possible, on the aritepenultima, itSrrn of itxrru, for instance, has the circumflex on the penultima, because
of the contraction. And thus the augment sometimes is to be known only by the
"accent, ex. gr. -reanxv, (from itxu,) imperf. trftinxm, irtifyi is the imperative of
ItTiUyv, and imTiyt the third person of the imperf.
Obi. 5. But the syllabic augment has actually been retained in some instances
before a vowel. Beside several Epic forms, the following three verbs of the com
mon language, which by the rule are not susceptible of the temporal augment, have
the syllabic one :
0/}iw, uriofiai, ouftv,
imperf. iafôuv, ivvsvfttir, iavgouv.
The case is the same with the verb Am, (see Anom. Symfu,) I break, aor. lo&t, &c.
to distinguish it from Hy*, I lead.
Obs. G. The temporal augment arose from the even in the perfect. For as the
usual redupl. ( 82.) consisted in the repetition of the first consonant with an i, this
i alone could be prefixed, when the verb began with a vowel, and it formed
the temporal augment along with this vowel. The is still found unchanged
in the first mentioned verbs, (as iayx, twtrftai, imti/txi, iotlgyxa,) and besides in
tmxac, fflAfra, Xtfiyot,
from t'xti, ti.ni, i(yu. The in these perfects comes from the change of the vowel
in the root, (of which below,) and i is redupl. : i(y X-etyx, like 2<;x iihotut.
Obs. 7- This augment retains the sp. asper of the verbs, which have it, ex. gr.
LCuw, ixûxa, from 'AAOfl. See Anom. x\trxoftm, also avSawv, tnv/u.
Obs. 8. Just as we have seen above, (83. Obs. 6.) the syllabic augment increased
by the temporal one, the latter is commonly increased in the verb split, (/ see,) by
the syllabic one, and retains the spiritus : imperf. Upn. See about the perfect
iu^xxx, ifaa, and also ciym, xmyu, among the Anomalous Verbs. The Epic poets do
this likewise with other verbs, ex. gr. lan>o%Ui of ihsôlii, WvSavi of av&xvu.
Obs. 9. When a verb begins with u, it is the second vowel, which takes the aug
ment. This occurs in the verb i{T J, {tJv, and the perfects of Obs. 0. iu the
plusq. ufxuv, letkiru*, iweyu*.

11G
A GRIiEK GRAMMAR.
85.Attic Reduplication.
1. There is no redupl. like that of the syllabic augment in

verbs, which have the temporal augment. But several of them,
all radical verbs, have in the perfect a peculiar redupl. called
the Attic redupl., which, however, is not exclusively peculiar to
the Attics ; most verbs, which have it, disdaining the above
simpler form. It consists in the repetition of the two first letters
of the verb with the vowel unchanged before the usual temporal
augment in the perfect ; for instance,
dya'poj, (vryepnx,) sLy-r.yipx.z, a.ynyicp.%1,
ogi/rra>, (aiqu-xp.,) hp-dipvyjt, opupvy/Mou,
oû, (cSXct,) oS-wSa.
2. This form is fond of a short vowel in the third syllable, and
on that account makes long vowels short, as for instance, in
dXtltyco perf. dXriKiî, aX-n\tlJ.i/.ati, cLkovu, perf. aM.rtv.oct.
Obs. 1. This shortening of the vowel enabled Homer to make IfXftWa/ even of
Xûia, which commonly gives l(*(ur/*ai : see Obs. 4. to { 103.That by this means
the short radical vowel becomes prominent, is obvious, according to J 92. 4. 9. Kven
the temporal augment of the second syllable is sometimes neglected by the Epic
poets for the sake of the metre, ex. gr.
ififuix, of ifu'ro, "APn.See about
Other peculiarities of this redupl. the Anom. etloiu, iyilpw, i/iutt, ixmi 'bcf"'
3. The plusquamp. sometimes adds a new temporal augment,
most commonly in axTjxoa row)ieo6i> : but it is omitted in the gene
rality of instances, (compare 83. Obs. 6.)
Obs. 2. The aor. 2. of some verbs among those, which belong to this y, (as $ 83.
Obs. ,.) has in the poets a redupl. corresponding to that of the perfect, yet so as to
give precedence to the temporalaugment ; ex. gr.
APfl, perf. aâa. aor. r.faom.
The case is the same with %>tx%n, (c(tt, and some other forms, (see the Note below.)
The verb iyx, (see Anom.) has this aor. nynyn in the common language. This redupl.
continues also in the other moods, which only reject the temporal augment :
MEfrv, ityttyin, (see 82. Obs.)1
Obs. 3. A very extraordinary redupl. of the aor. at the end of the word is found
in the Epic poets in
igux*/, aor. fyvxKKay, l^vKttxlln, (foriT,)
and also ia l'rv, Ami-art. See the Anom.
1 Grammarians formerly used to explain the Epic forms ^(i; <fff, as perfects
made by transposition of
Sûfx : but
or other perfects of this kind are
nowhere to be met with in the genuine old Poets. These third persons have every
where the signification of the aor., and there are in Homer and other Poets other
aorists as 3 pi. afaj for
part, ija^v. The other similar aorists do also agree
with them, as iyayut, i**%,7,, i*axl7t, iiTufu,, iXaXxiT., and \nyxui, (for which
see the Anom.) and also those beginning with a consonant, as snnlu,, MXaSe/V &c.
VKRDS.
117
86. Of the Avgment in compound Verbs.

1. With regard to compound verbs, the principal rule is this :
when the verb is compounded with a prep., the prep, stands
before the augment in the augmented tenses, ex. gr.
irpoo(pipa>} itpoo-ityepw,
xno&vu), ait-io'vax, aito-iiavKoty
ovKhtyto, ovv-eXtyov,
iicaKkirru, ait-viKkotTOv,
but in most of the other compound verbs the augment stands
first, ex. gr.
IxiKoitOiiai, ii/.tkomlovv, ptE/AEXowoiVixa;,
TrXn/jLfjLsXiu, itc'nX-nixi^tK-nx.a,
ettppoiia/, Titppitiouv, oixoSoyAw, untoSafi/nau.
2. Verbs compounded with sv and the inseparable particle
Sus take the temporal augment only in the middle, as eue^yersu
tunpytrovv, JWargerw Ivanpisow : but when an immutable vowel
or consonant comes after those particles, the augment is in the
beginning, as hovcwnovv from Svaanrieu, i&varu-xriax from tvartrxjtu,
"Stlutsruxnua, tiuSoxi'/aouv from ivôxi/jiiu, only those in tu are more
generally ( 84. Obs. 2.) without any augment, eutppahsTo, eSuxov~
Obs. 1 . The prep. *y frequently makes a craais with the tyllabic augment, t(>irt/iâ, T(KTi/t4"' ' see 120. Oba. 7.
Ota. 2. Some compound verbs, which frequently occur in the language of familiar
intercourse, and of which the primitives are to be found only in the dialects or
poets, take the augment before the prep. ; as i'3ik3,
iflm (of ifltifu,)
yet we find also ex. gr. xjtdqvSm in most authors, and itrcXaii always gives AwiXatm.
and sometimes, (according to (13. Oba. 5.) with the double augment imXscun,
though there is no primitive verb to it. See also ifi*i% in the Antsm. >x", and
ipfiimpu, 108. 3. About iftToXxt, see Obs. 5.
Obs. 3. Verbs, which are not compounded with another word, but derived from a
compound word, have the augment in the beginning; as itncTaBui, ihneriSnn,
from iimrxShs, tlzih,ul* from lixohiptt. Of this kind are, as we shall see in 4121.3.
all verbs, which are not compounded with prep., though their second part should be
perfectly similar to the primitive verbs, as /nkemiiu, ifymiv, &c.
Obs. 4. In conformity to this principle some verbs compounded with prep., also
take the augment in the beginning, as ivunTisupxi riiHtrrtsvu-w, amo\Z riirtfitXttn,
the former coming from irf merely as a compound, and having no primitive
simple verb.
Oba. 5. Yet even in such verbs the augment most usually is after the prep. Homer
has im&iXnn1. The Attics generally have ifi*Xiir*wl itttw/ti'a^y, T(ttfiinmrti,
wri(yti, Wirirniivx*, \tix"'f'<", and many more, though there are no simple primU
1 Sec Buttm. L'.xdagus, 63, 13.
118
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tires of all these verbs, (ixx^nei^v, lyxfuml^*, x^pnrivv, rvn^yiu, X-rirnhilti,

*Xut*ui) which are derived from ixxXtiirla, iyxufitav, T^nm;, eini^ylf, 'frlrriSss, and
from l and xl'li' K-zrttyoguv, {to accuse,) comes from xarriy^m, (the accuser,) for
there is no simple verb nytfisi, yet we do not say ixxrnyi(eui, but xxTnyiêm, per/.
t;t;i, &c where the augment has entirely vanished, because the belongs to
the word. '^mXfi, (/o trade, from ifinxi, merchandise,) has indeed commonly
tiuToXwmix, but Lucian has i/irtTiXtixa.Even verbs compounded with substan
tives, have the redupl. in the middle, having no augment in the beginning, as
tirToTirt)$riKa. from iirtrorgoQ'iai.
Obs. 6. The following verbs commonly take the augment in both places together :
av$g3ooi rivugSovY, f>7.sw hvSi'^/.r.ja., A/t%apcti MUx'ofirii, irxânu* crtTaftuvyxtt. The
anomaly is still greater in the verbs lixxovut, 2/ae/Tav, faetnxwxa, xaTihifanvit, since
they come from iixxms, ilxirx, in which the does not belong to another word.
Common practice has been betrayed into this irregularity by the mere similarity of
the composition.
CONJUGATION.
87.Numbers and Persons.
1. All the terminations of the Greek verb in its tenses, numbers,
and persons may be divided into two very distinct principal
classes, one for the active, the other for the passive voice. Hence,
though the import deviates in some tenses, one class is called the
active conjugatio7i, the other the passive one.
2. The principal tenses of either conform in some respects to
a particular analogy, by which they are distinguished from the
historical tenses.
3. This appears more distinctly from the following table, which
shews the terminations of the three persons and numbers in the
different tenses and their conjugation. But it refers merely to
the indicative ; the way, in which it is to be applied to the con
junctive and optative, will appear from the following
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
Principal Tenses,
Active,
Passive,
1 Person, 2 Person, 3 Person,
1 Person, 2 Person, 3 Person,
TM
s
wanting roy
TOV
/xev
VTXl.
(Tiv, ai
/x.$ot
Historical Tenses,
TO
f
M
wanting rnv
TYi'J
vro.
/XEV
T6 v or o-qlv
Thus, for instance, Xvo(aqci, XiXv/âti, \6ao[Aai, \vhrio~oiJ.<ii, are all

first persons of the principal tenses of the passive voice of the
VERBS.
119
verb Xiu, and the syllable or syllables between the" termination

pat and the root \u, is the particular mark of the terminations of
the tenses, of which we shall treat more at large hereafter.
Obs. 1. The terminations in this table begin at the consonant, from which back
wards the rest of the verb is alike in the same tense. Some of the verbal forms
annex this consonant immediately to the root of the tense, (see below the perfect
of the passive and the conjugation of the verbs in pi:') but by far the greater part
admits another vowel between the connecting vowel, (Xu-e-ftsr, Xu-u-rt, Xv-u-s.)
But as this vowel is variable, the particulars of the annection of the terminations
must be learned from perfect examples, and this table is only calculated to bring
under one point of view that, in which the different kinds of tenses agree.
Obs. 2. The terminations of the first and third person singular of the active are
not given in this table, because in most instances they have no consonant, but only
the connecting vowel, and generally alone, which connecting vowel 1 is, however,
very different in different tenses. Compare, for instance, ] . kov, 3. \i-tt, with
Xvt jui or lXoe-a, iAw-i with iKoru-fut. But in most historical tenses the first
person has a steady y, (iXy-*-y, iAiXvxity,) and the third person, when its vowel is
an i, the mutable y, (iku-ir or i.) In the less frequent conjugation of verbs in /ti,
both persons have a very peculiar termination in the present, viz. tu, ri. See 106.
Obs. 3. The third person pi. of the principal tenses of the active is given here as
it is in use in the common language. But it is proper to observe that in the Doric
dialect it ends in yn, and that the vowel of the a of the common form is always
long, because there has been a y dropped ; rvrnwi, Dor. ritrntrirrirofKei, Dor.
rirvfrnm- See the Obs. V. 4. to 103.
Obs. 4. The terminations rat and of the second pers. pass, are only to be
noticed as a foundation or basis, since they have remained unchanged but in very
few instances. The manner, in which they coalesce with the preceding letters, so as
not to be recognised, is explained below in the Observation* III. to 103.
04s. 5. With regard to the peculiarities, which distinguish the historical from
the principal tenses, the following points must be carefully attended to in the above
table * :
a-) A characteristic, which runs through the whole active and passive form,
is, that the third pers. dual, which in the principal tenses is always the
same with the second, (as act. TWTiTy, Tvvrtm, pass. TifXTivît, ruirrie&ov,)
constantly ends in m in the historical tenses, ex. gr. imperf. act. 2. WJxriTsty 3. irtwrirttv, pass. 2. irv&riefav, 3. irvtrnff^nv.
b.) The third pers. pi. of the active affords also a steady distinction ; it always
ends in m with the mutable y, (oi/my, ami, or a, iu the principal tenses, but
in the historical tenses constantly with a steady y, (, at, neat, neat.)
c. (In the passive form the two kinds of tenses are completely different
throughout the singular, and in all the third persons. The termination
f>uu in the principal tenses is always fttiv in the historical ones, and <rat,
(sing, and pi.') always becomes t. The difference of the terminations
coming from rsu and rs is equally steady. (See Obs. 4.)
1 Though in this instance it has nothing more to connect, it is yet identical with
it, and is consequently dropped in any formation, which has no connecting vowel.
Compare, for instance, WlBrt with ir/Sn-y, and ir/Si-^y, where i or n belongs to the
root
1 AU these differences are of particular use in reading the Epic poets, where they
frequently are the only means of recognising the tenses, when the augment is
dropped. (See above the Obs. to 83. 84.)
120
A GRKf.K GRAMMAR.
0!>s. fi. The first ptrion is wanting through the whole active in the dual; that
is to say, it does not differ from the pi. That the dual, as an old pi. especially in
verbs, has sometimes the signification of the pi. with Poets, has been remarked
above, $ 33. Obi. 8. See particularly, Od. 9. 49. Hymn. Apoll. 487. 501 .
88.Moods and Participles.
1. The imperfect and plusquamp. exist only in the indie.
Other moods and participles may be formed of the other tenses.
The future, however, has neither conjunctive nor imper., and the
perfect seldom has a conjunctive, optative, and imper. See below,
137. Obs. 11.
2. The opt. derives its name from serving to express a wish,
but is also frequently used in a variety of other connections, as
will be seen in the Syntax. We only observe here that its sig
nification corresponds almost thoroughly to that of the Latin
imperfect of the conjunctive, which is wanting in Greek.
3. This observation is closely connected with the following
principal rule concerning the conjugation of the conj. and opt. :
The conjugation of the conj. of all tenses has constantly for
its basis that of the principal tenses, while that of the
optative is always grounded in the conjugation of the his
torical tenses1.
The table of the preceding Section thus contains in its upper
series the terminations of all conjunctives, and the lower one
those of all optatives. The peculiarity of each mood thus lies in
the modifications of the connecting vowel, or where there is none,
of the radical vowel.
4. The conj. in particular combines throughout the vowels a>
and n with the terminations of the principal teuses instead of the
final vowels of the tenses of the indie. The conj. of the present
(act. and pass.) of the usual conjugation, (see ti/b-tw,) may
therefore be learned from the following rule :
Wherever the indie, has, o, ov, a, the conj. has u :
Where the indie, has s, s, v>, the conj. has n or ip.
Hence Ind. rvitru, o/aev, ovaiv, oia.ch, &c.
Conj. IWTttl, MfMV, WITIV, UfMClf &C
Ind. twtete, erai, &c.
Conj. tvitTrtTi, nroit, &c.
1 Thus, for instance, the opt. even of principal tenses always has *> in the third
f the dual, and in the panive constantly ia the third person ting, and pi.
i
VERBS.
]21
Ind. riiitms, ti, n, &c.

Conj. TVTCTtiS, ri, -/), &c.
The conjunctives of the different tenses and conjugations are all
without exception analogous to the conjunctive of the present of
the usual conjugation.
5. The characteristic letter of the optative is i : it coalesces
into a diphthong with the preceding vowel, (whether radical or
connective,) which diphthong continues the same through all
numbers and persons. The termination of the first person in the
active is either /*i or m, (as tuktoi/jli, ti&e/w,) and in the last in
stance this i) continues along with the diphthong in all the other
terminations : oijai, ois, oi, &c.sl-nv, tins, ew, einuxv, Sec. In the
passive the diphthong is immediately before the historical termi
nation, (rirtTTOi'-fAW, TI&E7-TO, &c.)
6. The imper. has a second and third person in all the num
bers ; its terminations in all tenses are
2. 3.
2. 3.
2.
3.
Act. sing. . . , rca,
dual, rov, ran,
pi. re, ruaxv or vtoiv.
pass. sing, (ao,) o8a, dual, aQov, a8aiv,
pi. oQs, aQwaccy OX o&uv.
7. The infin. has the following terminations :
act. civ, or xi.
pass. oxi.
8. All participles are adjectives of three terminations, and the
fern, of course, (according to 58. 2.) always follows the first
decl. The masc. of the active has in the gen. vror, which gives
f or v for the nom. and ax for the fern., thus
toy or ovs, ovaa, on,
as, xax, <Sv,
gen. ovros,
gen. avros.
Eif, naa, e,
vs, vaa, tv,
gen. evros,
gen. tnros.
The participle of the perfect active deviates from this ; it always
has
wsf Viae, or,
gen. 6ros.
The participles of the passive voice all end in
/xevoj-, *), ov.
Oii. These terminations experience some modifications in their application ; they
nndergo a contraction not only in the contracted verbs, ( 105.) but also in some
parts of the usual conjugation, which are grounded in contraction. See $ 95. 7
and Obt. I. 3. to 103.
122
A GKEEK GRAMMAR,
| 89. Active, Passive, and Middle Voice.
1. The idea of a passive includes also the case, when the

action, which I suffer, is inflicted or done by myself. It may
therefore be expressed by the passive form, as versor in Latin
does not merely signify ' I am turned about,' but also ' / turn
myself about.' This meaning of the passive is called the reflec
tive 1 ; but the Greek goes still farther, and employs the passive
voice in connections, where the verb has only a collateral rela
tion to the subject, (for instance, ' I prepare a dwelling for my
self.') All these cases, which will be more fully explained in the
Syntax, give the significatio media, and the passive, when it has
this signification, is called medium, ' the middle voice.'
2. With regard to their form we have already shewn the differ
ence between the passive and active voice, 87. Each active
tense is accordingly changed into its natural passive in the way,
which we are going to point out here for the first persons of the
indie, of all tenses.
Active, Passive.
Active,
Passive.
Present,
u,
opai
Imperf. ov,
o/xnv
Perf.
a., xa,
y.ou
Plusq.
eiv, xsiv, ptTjv
Fut
{'
ooij.ai
Aor. f x'
<*W
\ ai,
oD/xcti
I ov,
0//.7)V
3. The four following tenses of this natural passive, viz.
the pres. and the imperf.
the perf. and the plusquamp.
comprise the medial signification in all cases, where that medial
signification occurs, so that through the connection or context
alone we can discover whether they are of the passive or middle
voice. But in the aor. and fut. the above natural passive is
generally only a medium, or middle voice : the passive has a
particular form for both these tenses, which have this peculiarity,
that the aor., notwithstanding its passive signification, assumes the
active form in its conjugation, whilst the future, formed from this
aor., goes again over to the passive form.
Aor. pass. { *m>
Fut. pass. P**"""'
In contradistinction to these forms, the above natural passive of
the fut. and aor. is called in grammarfut. and aor. medii :
1 Compare above the Note to 74. 4.
VERBS.
Fut. tried. {
123
Aor.med.
But the four first tenses, which have only the natural passive form
for both significations, and consequently should be called passivomedia, are simply denominated passiva in the theory of gramma
tical forms, and can only take the name of media, when they
have the medial signification in the context, that is to say in the
Syntax.
Obs. The medial or middle form of the aor. is omitted in all verbs, which have not
such a medial signification ; it is the aor. pass, in
or v, which assumes this
signification in several verbs, ( 13G.) and therefore the medial form occurs only in
a limited, though considerable, number of verbs. We begin, however, by consider
ing every Greek verb as perfect, and shall notice, farther on, which tenses are
actually in use in each verb.
4. The old Greek grammarians have in their grammars a com
plete medium, or middle voice, in which the present and imperf.
of the passive are given at length as tenses of the medium; but
instead of letting them be followed by the perf and plnsq. pass.,
which also have the double signification, they have a separate
Perf. and plusq. medii,
the import of which is the following.
5. The perf. act. has two different forms, each of which ends
in a. in the first person. The common form, as will be seen below,
either aspirates the radical consonant, or introduces a x, (Xe'yw
XeXsj^Zj <PJ Wpfxa,) the uncommon one does neither, ((pivyu
zsityzuya, laiu SeSna.) In most instances the latter form, which
differs so little from the other, really is the true practical perfect
belonging to the regular pres. of the act., from which it is derived ;
and in but few instances the present has a transitive, and this
perfect an intrans. signification. (See 113.) This anomaly of a
small number of verbs ought not to have had any influence on
the theory of the Greek verb in general ; yet because the intrans.
signification is in some instances the same with the reflective sig
nification of the medium, (as for instance, ' J have frightened
myself or ' I am frightened,') and because both forms of the
perf. exist together in a few verbs, the old grammarians placed
this perf. with its dependent plusq. in the conjugation of the
medium, though in every instance, where a verb has a medium, it
is only
the perf and plusq. pass., which have the true medial sig
nification along with the passive one. (See 136.)
124
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
6. Modern grammarians have, therefore, abandoned this mis

leading method, and as the double formation of other tenses is
marked by numbers in the theory of the Greek conjugation,
90. 1. they now call this more uncommon perf. and plusq.
Perf. and plusq. secundum,
but it occurs only in the active voice. The perfect of the passive
is always made in a uniform way from both forms of the perfect
of the active.
90.Tenses.
1. The Greek tenses partly have a double form, marked in
grammar by the first and second, though this does not establish
a difference in the signification. The perf. has a double form
only in the act. voice, ( 89. 6.) but the futures and aorists have
double forms in the active, passive, and middle voice.
2. The passive has besides a peculiar fut. 3, or what is called
paulopostfut., which takes the reduplication of the perfect, ( 99.)
See Syntax, 138.
3. All the tenses of the Greek verb are distributed or classed in
the following table under the head of what is more correctly called
the active, passive, and middle voice.
This table notices the augments and terminations of the first
person. The strong line is the space left for the root of the verb,
the small one in front for the initial letter repeated in the aug
ment. The sp. asper over the termination denotes the aspiration
of the preceding consonant.
Act.
01
Pres.
Imperf.
e ov
-6 Or xa
Perf 1.
Plusq. 1. 6-S EJv or XEIV
E
Perf. 2.
Plusq. 2. 1-6 Ely
aw
Fut. 1.
Aor. 1.
aa
u
Fut. 2.
E ov
Aor.2.
wanting
Fut. 3.
Pass.
ojAai
e d/xrjv
-e y.ai
flw
e r,v
-E
U01X.XI
Med.
as in the pass
m
G0/J.SU
e oxnm
oD/xai
o/xriv
wanting.
4. The manner of combining these terminations of the tenses

with the root of different verbs requires a particular explanation,
VERHS.
125
called the theory of the formation of the tenses, previous to which

we have to state what is called in grammar the characteristic of the
verb, and the theme of the verb.
91. Characteristic of the Verb.
1. The letter, immediately preceding the principal vowel of the
termination of a tense, is called the characteristic, (distinctive
mark,) of that tense. Thus, for instance, in the above tables is the
characteristic of the fat. 1. and of the aor. 1. in the act. and med.
2. But that letter, which remains at the end of the root of the
verb, after having rejected all which serves merely for the termi
nations of the inflections, is more particularly the characteristic
of the verb. On rejecting, for instance, the u> of the present, we
find that the letter, or two letters, which precede the a, constitute
the characteristic of that verb, ex. gr. in Xsy-w the y, in (povtu-u
the iv.
Obt. The question is not here about the etymological root of the verb, which in
ifmiv is the syllabic
but about the radical letters of the verb, (compare the Note
to 39.) to which w belongs. Thus in tyiXut, Ti/iiu, it is and s, not X and pi,
which are the true characteristic). Verbs, of which the characteristic is a vowel,
are called verba pura. See $ 27. 1.
92.Double Themes.
1. In Greek, as in Latin, the present is considered as the
principal tense, that is to say, the tense, which serves for the
formation of all the other tenses. This process is easy in most
verbs, since, on rejecting the eo, we find the root and characteristic
of the verb, which are the basis, on which all the other forms of
the verb are built.
2. But in many verbs, that which remains after rejecting the <w
of the present, is not to be immediately taken for the pure root
of the verb ; for on stripping other tenses of the same verb of
their peculiar terminations and augments, we find a root left,
which is more or less different from the root of the present, so that
we must discriminate which form of root is the primitive one.
3. This difference consists in one part of these verbs merely in
the vowel, and chiefly in the alteration of the three short vowels
e, a, o. As there is nothing in simple vowels why one should be
considered as the radical vowel preferably to the other, the vowel
of the present tense is, for uniformity's sake, considered as the
12G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
radical vowel, as, for instance, in rpitpw, erpaQ-nv, tirpotpz, exactly

like cleave, clave, cloven, in English.
4. But the root of the verb in the present lense is in many
verbs'ofa lengthened and fuller form, partly' through a long vowel,
or through a diphthong, whilst the other tenses have a short
vowel, and partly through a greater number and variety of con
sonants ; ex. gr. Xe/ww ekiirov, rwco hraum, (iaXKv sfixXoy, rvnrtii
Irvifm, rxaau irxyn-j. There is even a considerable number of
verbs, of which the present offers a still greater variety, and some
times an additional syllable, as Xatt.fia.Maj, where the root is Xa/j.fizv,
whilst other tenses %\a@ov, X^vJ/o/xai, make the root Xafi, Xn/3. This
is the principle, on which the present tense of a verb frequently
appears in a fuller form than other tenses of the same verb.
5. It is, no doubt, more natural and easier to adopt the simple
root rather than the fundamental one, but as it would disturb the
uniformity of the grammatical process, if the present of such
verbs were derived from other tenses, grammarians have intro
duced the following theory. As there are verbs with double
forms of the present, one simple and the other fuller, for instance,
Xtlrtu) and ~k\y.nitw,
and iahlu, one of which generally is less
used or even obsolete, we assume for tenses not analogous with
the present, another disused verbal form, and give to it the form
of a present tense for grammatical purposes ; for instance, eXafiov
is considered as coming from a disused pres.
or
and
such imaginary or supplementary forms of presents are printed
in grammars in capital or initial letters and without any accent,
AAB.Q, to point them out as not being in use. (See the second
prefatory remark to the List of Anomalous Verbs )
6. Any present tense, whether in use or obsolete, which serves
for the formation of other parts of the verb, is called a theme,
i[Aa, and any verb, which requires a supplementary verbal form
along with its real present tense, is said to have a double theme.
The characteristic of the simple theme in contradistinction to
other forms, where it is not easily recognised, is called the pure
characteristic of the verb ; as y in the theme TArXi in contradis
tinction to the <r<7 in raaau1.
7. This plurality of forms in one and the same verb is pro
perly an anomaly ; hence the annexed List of Anomalous Verbs
1 To avoid too great an accumulation of such themes, this Grammar, instead of
noticing disused themes in n, simply states the root, Tin, TAr, &c.
VERBS.
127
mostly contains verbs of that kind. But when the difference

between the usual theme, and obsolete or imaginary one, is not
very great, or common to several verbs, which have the same
characteristic in the usual present tense, it is considered merely
as a variety of the usual conjugation, that the anomalous one
may not be needlessly increased.
8. We reckon here chiefly verbs, of which the pure cha
racteristic in their usual present tense is disfigured by the intro
duction or change of a letter. They are of three sorts :
1.) In verbs with the characteristic ott, the t is a strength
ening addition ; their pure characteristic is one of the
labials /3, w, <f>, (compare 20.) ex. gr.
xqvutw,
rvTiru,
fixirrcu,
KPYBX1,
TYrm,
PA<Dft.
2. ) Most verbs with aa or tt have as pure characteristic one
of the palatal letters y, x, % : for instance
"ESîfsati),
typivav,
fiwaaw,
riPAm,
fPiKa
BHxa
in some few it is also a lingual letter. See Obs. 2-4.
3. ) Most verbs with
(Dor. o$,) have S for their pure cha
racteristic ; as
but several have also y, as
Kpi^ct,KPArn.
All these verbs retain the fuller form and impure characteristic
only in the present and imperf. of the act. and pass, voice ; the
rest of the tenses are derived from the simpler theme. But for
the sake of brevity and uniformity we grammatically treat the two
themes as one conjugation, and consider the matter, as if, for
instance in tiaJ>&/, ruttus, and the like, the r of the pres. twtw
had been rejected, or as if , and not the pure characteristic S,
had been dropped before the a in Qpdau, (fat. of (pacn.)
9. To these verbs must be added those, which in the j>rescnt
tense barely differ in quantity, the pure characteristic being
doubled in the present, which in common language is done only
with the \, as fidWu E/3aX.ov, ariXKu arsKu lardXra, or the pres.
tense having, instead of the short vowel of the other tenses, a
diphthong or long vowel ; as Xsiwa/ Xsiâi eXtvov, rvxu rrfew irxwi,
<J>aivo tyzva zjetyzyxa, (peuyu <$su$,w styvyov. They, too, have a simple
theme, as BAAft, Ainft, QTTD,, (Lat. fugio,) etc. ; but such
J 28
A GREJJK GRAMMAR.
trifling differences are not sufficient to throw these verbs out of

the usual grammatical method, which considers the present tense
as a basis ; hence they are stated below, among the regular con
jugations, as mere abbreviations of the root of their present tense.
Obi. 1. Verbs in , with the simple characteristic 5, exceed the others in number
less by their primitives, as
%>(>, tZfuu, 'x!'X"j than by the multitude of
derivatives in / and i%u, which follow the same conjugation. To the charac
teristic y belong all verbs denoting a call or sound, as
rnw, rgiw, tlfiaZ",
&c. with a few others, of which we meet in prose with
ffraû, rriû,
tr^vû, fiairriÛj
and some, which are fluctuating between the two formations ; see the Anom. kfr*wt
irxi^n, facTaû, tutri^m We even find in some other verbs the pure characteristic
to be yy. See the Anom. tA*^, xXaÂf, rakriû, fut. trXaygw, &c
Obi. 2. The simple characteristic of some verbs in rr or rr is not one of the
palatals, but Unguals, and hence follows the analogy of those with , as
srXarrw, fxffffu, vriffffu, /3XiVra, Pgctfiru, xvdrtru, Xivfftrv, Ipotarai, ipiepv,
XOfVMl, >.'lCffO(JLOU, VlffffOfJLOLI,
{.fut. rXstr*, &c.) and two are fluctuating: see the Anom. itpieru, littu.
Obs. 3. Some verbs have the preient tense indifferently with or rr, but follow
only one of these double prescntt in the rest of their tenses ; as in particular, rfurru
or r$agu. (Jo kill, foy,) /"I. rpajjai, &c. and i?/*ia or kppirru, (to join, fit,") fut.
&c.
Oii. 4. It will be stated, 95. Obi. 2. that the Doric dialect has a palatal letter
in some tenses of the verbs, of which the characteristic is a lingual.
Obi. 5. We have remarked above, in general, that the characteristic <rr always
contains one of the three mutes of the labial organ, and rr, rr, either a palatal, or
(according to Obi. 2.) a lingual. But which letter it be, is generally indifferent: we
shall see below that most verbs are used only in those tenses, (fut. 1. aor. 1. perf. 1.)
which must also change this pure characteristic according to the general rules,
( 16. &c.) and the three mutes constantly in the same way. For instance, the
fut.
merely shews that the pure characteristic of the verb fiwru is a palatal
letter, but does not indicate which palatal it is. This may indeed be inferred in
these instances from other kindred words !, but as it is of no importance with
regard to inflection, all those verbs, of which the pure characteristic does not appear
from the conjugation itself, may be considered, if they be with vr, as having the
characteristic a-, and if with rr or rr, as having either the characteristic y, or (those
1 It is obvious that in most of these verbs we cannot suppose the real original
characteristic to have been y, but that the anxiety to avoid the meeting of r, (trim
rJWj, (ixtrxMs,) caused many verbs in
itjn, to assume the other form. See
Obs. 0.
' Thus in the above example fiirrt, (to cough,) the radical letter has been asserted
to be x from tlie subst. I&l, (cough,) gen. fagis. Again in <rXarr*i, (to form,fashion,)
the radical 3 may be inferred from such subst. as iVmtXS{, (maker of ovent.) But
the inference is not always safe, because the radical letter in such derivations fre
quently is different without any apparent cause; for instance, aor. pais. i*i/'/3nr,
adv. kpoQx, adj. xrvfm. This and similar instances shew, what was indeed to be
expected, that the radical letter is not always steady, but frequently fluctuating, as
in Knglish, to weave and Webster, in German, decien, ' to cover,7 and ein dach, ' roof.'
Yet in most cases there is a correspondence between the verbal and nominal forms,
and in doubtful cases the grammarian is warranted in considering the simple vowel
of a verb us its radical letter, or pure characteristic.
VERBS.
129
of Obs. 2.)the characteristic 5, which is grounded in the kindred termination J. We

therefore have only to notice the few verbs, which really shew, in any of their tenses,
another letter than any of those, which we have mentioned, as their pure charac
teristic. They are
a.) With tt,
li\i<mi, xioxrti, pure characteristic 0,
fcaxrv, paTTu, Sctxr*, ffxarrv, ptrrtt, fyvirraj,p.
b.) With tt, only the Anom. ipflrr*x, Anom, *.!irrsfiiu,T : and
%fi*tm3, ( 98. Obi. 5.)
0b. 6. But we cannot repeat too often that in all this we do not mean to assert
etymological truth, but grammatical analogy. Though such formations as <r;irru
rirfxya, x\iyyu xX*y%*>, can hardly be accounted for otherwise than by assuming
an older form, it would yet be absurd to pretend that derivative verbs like kixirrm,
came from an old form in y* and in : the former, however, really has an
aor. 2. pais. iXXuyirmt, and the other the Ionic 3 pen. pi. of the per/, past.
xtX"(!trai. It is rather evident that other verbs have been formed after the
analogy of those, which previously existed in the language. But to draw the line
is impossible; at least it would needlessly complicate the statement of grammatical
principles. It is far better to bring all the verbs, which agree in that kind of for
mation, under one point of view ; and it may be supposed that several of the simple
themes have actually been formerly in existence, (this supposition is, indeed, con
firmed by verbs of that kind occurring in the old poets, such as QXifit, iJrfuu,
iauifu for itirtu, i;iv for <;iW*i, and others,) and that in the progress of the
language other verbs were formed on the analogy of similar roots.
Obt. 1. The modes of strengthening the present tense, not comprised in this Sec
tion, especially the lengthening of some present tenses with -i and -, are re
viewed below in 112. as belonging to the anomaly of the verb.
93.Formation of the Tenses.
1. The annection of the terminations of the tenses, as stated in
90, is not always a straightforward operation, but frequently in
fluenced by euphony, and when the characteristic of the verb does
not harmonise with those terminations, it necessitates changes
and differences, besides other peculiarities in the usual language.
2. It is, therefore, of importance to know which tenses are de
rived one from the other, or agreeing with each other. Some
tenses, connected in signification, are evidently derived one from
the other ; ex. gr. the imperf. from the pres. tense, and plusquamp.
and fat. 3. from the perf.
3. Of other tenses it cannot be properly affirmed that they are
derived one from the other ; but as they agree more or less in
their derivation from the common root of the verb, grammar
considers them, for the convenience of the learner, partly as
derived from each other, (ex. gr. the aor. 1. in an from the fut.
in sw,') and partly as exhibiting an example, which serves to point
K
130
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
out once for all in one tense what else would require to be re
peated in each tense.
4. The tenses are accordingly classed in the following three
series, in the order in which they are derived from each other in
the generality of verbs, or stated in the grammar :
I. Pres. and imperf. act. andjoae*.
II. Fut. and aor. 1 act. and med.
Per/, and plusq. 1. along with perf. and plusq. pass.
and fut. 3.
Aor. and fut. 1. pass.
III. Fut. and aor. 2. act. and med.
Aor. and fut. 2. pass.
Perf. and plusq. 2.
And though one of these tenses may not be used in a verb, yet
grammar states it to serve as a uniform basis for others actually
in use.
5. Any change, which the verb undergoes in one tense of the
first series, applies also to the following tenses, unless there be
particular rules and exceptions.
Obs. That, in which the tenses of each of the three series agree, chiefly consists
in this :
The tenses of the first series never change the real root of the real preient
tense of the act. voice ; and if, (according to the preceding ,) that present
tense is of a lengthened or full form, that form takes place in the whole
series, whilst the second series in most instances, and the third in all, is
derived from the simple or imaginary form.
The second series comprises nil the terminations, by which the characteristic
of the verb is in most instances changed, especially through the addition
of a consonant in the termination.
But the third series constantly retains the characteristic of the verb unchanged,
and only alters the root at times. This series alone shews the pure cha
racteristic of the verb, if there be a lengthened or full form in the first,
whilst in the second series, when it is, for instance, a palatal letter, we
can only recognise one of the palatals, but cannot know which it is.
94.
1. The formation of the tenses, and their differences among
themselves, are pointed out for each tense in only one of its forms,
which always is the first person of the indie. All the other per
sonal and modal forms are conjugated alike in all verbs, as soon
as that first person is known, as will be seen below in the pa*
radigms, (compared with 87. 88.)
VERBS.
131
Obt. Only the per/, pass, is of such a nature, that its formation must be studied
in its several modal and personal terminations ; see 98.
2. Several tenses are formed in a manner so simple and con
stantly uniform, that they are easily known from the examples
below. We will only previously state those of the usual con
jugation in ai :
1.) The present u gives the imperf. ovrvirrai, ertntrert.
2. ) Every tense in a> is in the pass, o/xai. Thus the pres. a>
gives the pres. of the pass, rvnroi, -ruitroixm : and the fut.
the fut. med. rvû, rvôixai. The 95. 7. shews that
the /iff. 2. or circumflexum in Si, med. -oCptai, is comprised
in this rule.
3. ) Every tense in ov is in the pass. o/xw. Thus the imperf.
ov gives the imperf. pass, 'e'-rwroy, hruitrotrnv : and the
aor. 2. the aor. 2. med. trvnov, irwofjum.
4.) The aor. 1. med. annexes merely the syllable
to the
aor. 1. Ty\}/a;, irv^d^rm .
5. ) The per/, always gives the plusquamp. in the act. voice
by changing a into eivrirvtpa, etetêiv : and in the pass.
by changing ixai into y.vnrrt/ptpiati, etetoju+wv. See about
the other persons of the plusquamp. pass, in particular
98.
6.) Both forms of the aor. pass, give the fut. pass, by
changing w into y)<ropiiirutySm and etwtjvTv^-naaThe rest of the tenses require particular rules.
95.Fulurum Activi.
1. The principal form of the fut. in Greek is the termination
su. It occurs in by far the greatest number of verbs, and is on
that account called fut. 1., ex. gr.
zsolvui, fut. vs&vaw.
2. When the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, it causes
the changes usually connected with a, ex. gr.
Xiyco,
otXe'xo;, Tiuyju,
fut.
zsXiâi, nvâi,
SXi/3cu, "Kutcu, ypaiQu,
SXi\}/a;, XeiÔ', ypd-^co,
aiiivSui, zsifoa/, zsipâi,
amvrsu), zsiiaui, Tsipaw.
Ok. 1. When the characteristic of the verb is a lingual letter preceded by t, a
change takes place before the <r of the fut. according to $ 25. 4. But the case is of
rare occurrence ; it is most distinct iu rr'niti,fut. mien. See also the Anom. via*.*,
K 2
132
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. The verbs in nr, aa, or tt, and having the pure character
istic, (according to 92.) change ttt into 4<, aa (tt) into
and
into u, ex. gr.
riitrw, (TTnO,)
5>J*>,
pxltTUl, (PAOfi,)
px-J/OJ,
vxaau, (TATfi,)
Tst<y,
<paco, (OPAAfX)
tppdaco,
and in rarer instances ( 92. with'"the Obs.) is changed into
and <t<j (tt) into a, ex. gr.
Y.piZu, (KPAm,)
x.%x%co,
zskdaaoi, fITAAfl,)
zsXdaw.
4. When the characteristic of the verb is a vowel, (verba pura,
91. 06*.) the syllable, which precedes the termination aw, is
generally long, let its quantity in the present tense be what it
may ex. gr.
oxx.qvw, (Zi,)
(ixxguaw, (u,~)
rial, (i,) !
riaai, (J,)
and consequently e and o become -n and a, ex. gr.
See the exceptions in the Obs. 3. 4.
5. The characteristic a. is changed into -n in the fat. except
when the vowels e, i, or an ^ precede, in which cases the in the
/itf. is long s, ex. gr.
Ti/Azw, dnardw,
rii^haco, dnatrriaw,
fiodw, iyyvdca,
fionam, eyyunaai,
idta, //.eioidui,
extra/, /jt.si%idac<i, (a,)
Spdai, Qcopxoj,
Sqiact)f Qwpdaco, (a,)
See the exceptions in the Obs. 6. 7.
6. But the penultima of futures in daw, law, uaw, is always
short, when they come from verbs in , or aa, tt, ex. gr. in ippdaw,
Sixdacu, toiîau, nXuaui, coming from tp^xt^w, 5ixz<y, vo/ai'^&i, yXvôj :
and in zshxaw, zsrlatu, from z:\daau), zsrlaaw
Obs. 2. The Doric dialect has g instead of c, (in the fut. and aor. 1.) not only in
most verbs with ex. gr. Ktfil%tv, iixxû, from xtpufri,
but also in verbs, which
1 The probable reason of it is stated in the Obs. 15.
* T/r is taken here in its usual quantity, though Homer uses it also as long.
3 Compare the analogous rules of the first decl. S 34. 2. and of the fern, in adjec
tives, 60. 2.
* The vowel in all these verbs is short by itself, and not lengthened in the fut.;
were it long by itself, it would continue so in the fut., as it does in xt*Z"i Xti'"Whether verbs like xvwtrru, vtrroftat or tuWûa/, actually made xv&irtv, uffofcat, nUoftut,
in the fut., as is generally assumed, is not absolutely decided. See Buttm, Complete
Or. Gr.
VERBS.
133
have a vowel before the in the present tense, but chiefly, only when the vowel in
the usual fut. is short ; ex.gr. \y'\Xu.%i. (See Obs. 3.) The Dorians have, however,
the common form along with this, and use both indifferently in verses according to
the exigency of the metre 5.
Obs. 3. Several verbs, of which the characteristic is a short vowel, keep this
vowel unchanged in the fut. especially,
ytXtito, %aXaa/, SlXaat, xXtt&t, (to break,*) fxtiv, fut. yiX&fv, &C.
etXiar, ecexliv, ifiiw, xciX'.ai, riXiai,
io/, rolei, atatoftat, otxlofteci,
fut. eiXtffe*, ati'iffofjtxt,
aôu, fut. khvai,
ituu, apv9, iXxvv, filSva/, rr-jai, fut. uvuvu, &C.
and some poetical verbs, (*ari<v, nixiv,
rati*,') as well as a few rare and obso
lete themes, from which the tenses of some anomalous verbs are derived, as x<;ira,
xttftxn>, iXiru, &c. The quantity of the prei. tense of the verbs in i* belonging to
this class, is yet unfixed, though on the whole it may be assumed to be short ; all
the other verbs, which have vrtt in thefut., are partly long, partly undetermined in
the present tense : see 7- Obs. 10.
Obs. 4. Some verbs are fluctuating between the two formations, partly in the fut.
itself, and partly in the tenses derived from it, (according to 93. 4.) which are
the following :
ama>, (to praise,) fut. ttW\au, aor. wifx, perf. pass, rumputi, aor. 1 . p. yt'&**,
(Epic, cttwffoj, nine*.)
*
tMu. (to desire,) fut. Tc'-i'iau and lira, perf. mxfoiixa, pass, nfiui,
aor. I. p. i<r3ir9ti.
iiv, (to lie, bind,) fut. 3>ira, perf. Yihtx, pass, tpai, aor. \.p. iViSmctifiw, (to tahe.) fut. algwiv, perf. pass. feitp.eti, aor. 1. p. fyiSm.
See also the Anom. yxfi'm, rrtaiu, iuj/mik, li/ut, and PEfl under ilmTt. To these must
be added some disyllabic verbs in in, i/ra, which shorten the v again in the perf,
and aor. 1. pass., though with the Attics even the u of the present tense is long:
perf. pass. xiXO/iai, aor. 1. pass, ixiSxr, liuBnt, injUnt, with a short v,
perf. act. xixixx, t'iSHxx, or Viivxa1.
Obs. 5. All verbs, which retain the short vowel in the fut., may in non-Attic
poetry double the a in both the fut. and the aor.: as tu.'iism, ixoftiffti, lixforv, iyU
Xetffffl, xaXtrrecftitaf, ttivvattt 8.
Obs. 6. The verb ixôio/tm, (to hear,) has ixaiirt/iai contrary to the analogy of
/W, etXouw, fut. lira, and xt*" X^P^'t nas XZ*ru>
contrary to the analogy of
iâiai, are*.
Obs. 7. That the Ionians have in verbs, which usually make their tenses with a
* The instances are more rare, when this form, 1. takes place also with the long
vowel, as yixa^?:, and, 2. passes over to other tenses, as lXvyi%3m, (for -jVSijv from
Xi/yiZ*,) in Theocr. It is, however, evident that this Dorism was a partial practice,
which gradually went over from the verbs, in which the radical letter is a palatal,
into other verbs by a specious analogy. We have in Obs. 8. a perfectly similar and
unquestionable instance with the Doric a.
The verbs irva, (to accomplish,) and ifiu, (to draw up water,) have in the pres.
tense an Attic collateral form itirn, ituTu.
7 Compare also some verbal nouns of the disyllabic verbs in iu and wv, as tytint,
rint, xrlrci, firiif. See below, 119. Obs. 2. 0.7.
8 That in some of our editions, (especially in the old ones,) verbs, which never
have a short vowel, are written with a double <r, to shew their quantity, offends
against correctness. Yet there are verbs, in which the point has always been dis
puted, and still is partly so ; as in itvofiai, (to preserve,) in finrimtrt, &c.
134
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
long , an instead of this long x, (as Bwcum, titwa,) and the Dorians, on the
contrary, instead of the in verbs in <u always i, ( nuJum, i/isAex,) follows of course
from the general principles stated 27- Obi. 5. 7. Only \uu has in all the dialects
itctrai.
Obi. 8. But the Dorians also frequently introduced i in the conjugation of verbs
in ia/, as iptXctiru, iatra;, iTevdSti, from
3i<v, irffftw. It is particularly frequent in
the later Doric writers.
Obi. 9. The following six verbs,
x\iv, / navigate,
trtiu, I blow,
nai, I swim,
Siv, J run,
piai, IJJow,
îu, I pour,
have in the fut., or at least in its derivatives iu'9, ex. gr. TXiute/tai, ttrnsra,
&c.
and the two following,
xalv, 1 bum,
nXmm, I weep,
the primitive form of which, peculiarly retained by the Attics, is tiu, xkati, with i,
have itv : xavaw, ixXaueec, &c. See the Anom.
Obs. 10. That several verbs in have mri in the //., is noticed below in 112. 8.
7. The trisyllabic and polysyllabic futures, which have a short
vowel before the final syllable aco, viz., d, e, f, are susceptible of
a collateral form, which, rather peculiar to the Attics, is usually
called
Futurum Atticum.
The instances of this kind are all agreed in this, that the a is
dropped, and that the final syllable becomes a circumflexed or
contracted termination. This is effected in two ways.
8. In the verbs, of which the future ends in dau or taw, the two
vowels xoj or soj, after having dropped the a, are contracted, and
the same contraction takes place in the other persons, according
to the general laws of contraction, so that these futures are con
jugated exactly like the present tense of the contracted verbs in
doj and ia>, as will be seen hereafter. But here, too, the Ionians
leave the form ia>, hit, uncontracted ; ex. gr.
/3i/3a,/ /3i/3at<T, (j3i/3a'<w, /Si/3eir, &c. not in use,) fut. Att.
/3i/3a/, ifs, 5, pi. oi/xev, an, uai, (v,)
tsXeoj, f. rtXlaoi, Ion. again teXe'o/, teXeW, fut. Att.reXZ, us,
si, pi. ov/jlsv, eTrs, ovai, (v,)
with which the fut. med. likewise agrees, a/ptoci, jfc, &c. oS/xai, et,
&c. Compare the present tense of the verba contractu in the
active and passive voice, 105. with the 06s.
9. No contraction of the vowels can take place in the fut. in
7au after the a has been dropped, but the second vowel u alone
* It is remarkable that all the six verbs denote a flowing current-like motion.
See them all in the list of Anom. Verbs, especially on account of the nou-Attic con
jugation, of fut, and the quite unusual one of
with iv.
VERBS.
135
takes the circumflex, and they are then conjugated like the con
tracted verbs in iu, St, ex. gr.
KO/J-OÔJ, f. HOf/.tSW, (-iftli) flit. Att. KOfJUaJ, ltlsy lit,
pi. iov/j-sv, teirs, tovat, (v,) med. kofj.ioviJ.iii, n't, lErrai, &c.
Obi. 11. This fill. Att. thus has its first foundation in the Ionic dialect, to which
the dropping of the r between the two vowels is peculiar. See above, 28. Obi. 4.
and compare Obi. III. 2. to $ 103. The Attic dialect afterwards contracted thetwo
vowels, whenever it could be done, and something analogous was remarked in the
verbs in <>.
Obi. 12. We have instances of afut. in in in this resolved form : rtXiu, II S. 415,
x0fft/r, v. 831, for xa^tvut. See the Anom. xopivw/it. But the form u, us, like the
corresponding prei. tense of the verba contractu, is not resolved by the Ionians,
(Herod, iixat, ixif, !x,) but the Epics have the lengthened form, (Homer, x(tfita,
Ixix, xi;y, like the present tenses of ij 105. Obs. 10. The instances, however, of
both the resolved and contracted form are not frequent. The most uncommon are
those verbs, in which the usual prctent itself ends in in and in : rsXln, tiXiS, fut.
tiXik, (Homer,) tiXi?, (Plato Protag. 331.) xakiu, xxXii, fut. xxXt7r^t, (Demosth.
Lept. 5.) xxkoivrxs, (Xenoph. Hell. 6, 3, 2.) for xxxUeirxs See likewise the Anom.
No change can take place in most instances, that is to say, either when the
fut. ru comes from a prei. in
(ex. gr. %,xxt for iixairut, of iixxû, />//3, Plato
Phadr. 7. for pifiaru, &c.) or when the simple present tense in iu and <ui is obso
lete, (ex. gr. iufiv, iupuri. for x/if/tiru, &c. of AM*IEn:) see below 'imifii, J 96.,
and xagius above ; ?xs^c for sr.Chaeu, see the Anom. rxi&xnvftt and others. To this
Obi. belongs also the fut. of some verbs in in, which is like the prei. See the Anom.
Igvn, Txyuu.
Obi. 13. The long vowel, especially the u in the futures in atru, is very seldom
shortened so as to admit this contraction ; ex. gr. Ux/hZti for ifiti, lixmhrxs
for tixuinnrxs, Thuc. 3, 58. 6, 23. (See about this and some doubtful similar in
stances, Buttm. Complete Or. Or., 95. Obs. 16. with the Note.)
Obs. 14. In the verbs in / the fut. in In, really is more in use than the regular
form in iru : it also occurs with the Ionians, but never in the resolved form, ex.gr,
uy}.z,u -^ f.t. Si^mi'v, rofitov/ttv, &c. in Herod, and Hippocr.
10. The tense, which is called in grammar
Futurum Secundum,
after having shortened the radical syllable, annexes in the Tonic
dialect the termination iu to the pure characteristic of the verb,
and in the common language contracts it into >, conjugating it in
both the act. and the medial voice according to the rules of con
tracted verbs.
11. This fut. occurs only in verbs, whose characteristic is
X, fj., v, p, and which in general have not the future in o-u. We
shall treat of them in particular in 101. Grammarians for
merly assumed a fut. 2. in all verbs even in those, in which it
never was used, for the bare purpose of deriving from it the aor. 2.,
of which the formation will be shown in the following . The
fut. 2. pass, stands in a very different predicament ; for, as it is
13G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
derived, not only in grammar, but in the regular process of the

language, from the aor. 2. pass, (see 89. 3.) it really occurs in
every verb, which has this aor., about which see below, 100.
Obs. 15. To bring all this under an analogous point of view, we take the termina
tion >, (Jul. 1 .) for the Imis. To this was prefixed s, either with or without any
connecting rowel ; but the short form was preferred in common use, and ico> was
also abbreviated into in, a, (ful. 2.) chiefly in the verbs, of which the characteristic
is X, ft, , { Whenever a short vowel of the root of the verb was placed before iru,
the two vowels coalesced, and the word was lengthened, Text, 4. 5. (piXtm, riirn.)
But when such a short vowel was prefixed to ru, (nxi-ru, ve/il-irv,) these forms
remained unchanged, or the same purpose, which originated the ful. 2., produced in
this instance the several forms of the ful. Alt.
Obs. 16. There are in the verbs with x, /i, , {, a few exceptions respecting the
ful. 1. in , which will be stated below, and also instances, where the form of the
ful. 2. occurs without the characteristic A, p, , j >0. The instances are all of the
middle voice, viz.
fax^-su/^cci, and along with it the fuller form, fta%'tes/iai, which has maintained
itself, see Anom. (i*%/*w n,
iiavftMt, xetSi&evfAai, see Anom. tfyfitai,
mmfitu, a form censured by the ancient critics, instead of the still more anoma
lous rltfuu, (see Obt. 18.) from mn, see Anom. trite,
and there are a few poetical instances : nxu<rStu, Horn. Hymn. Fen. 127- from TEKfi,
(Anom. t'iktu,) /taSwfuu, (Dor. for .ei/uti,) Theocr. 2, 60. from MHen, (Anom. fixrMtoi.The note to or,u in the Anom. Ah, shews in what respect the Epic forms xilu,
ir.u, belong hither.
Obi. 17- The Dorians use iu instead of su in all circumflexed future; and in the
contraction in general ; which contraction they have according to 28. Obt. 5. in
common with the Ionians, whenever the latter use any : ex. gr. (Hxxu, fut.
pi. fax'tipi*, faxiipu, compare 105. Obt. 13. But the Dorians also circumflex the
common ful. 1 . in ra, and conjugate it as if it were a contraction of to, ex. gr. rv^>i,
mnptvpuy, (for -tVftty,) rmûri, wîZ/tai, (for -tefuui) &c. and this form is more or
less used in some verbs by Attic and other writers by the name of
the Fulurum Doricum,
but merely as aful. of the middle voice, (compare 100.4.) and always with the Attic
contraction en, ex. gr. <piiy*i, fut. usual tpwlevfiui. See also among the Anom.
%t&, xXotlv, irXiw, 3tv, nu, vlvra/.
Obs. 18. We meet with a very deviating form of afut. in rlc/tai, I will drink, and
Titfuu, I will eat, which have the exact form of the pres. tense of the past, voice of
the simple themes, to which they belong, and about which see the Anom. trhu and
10 Exactly as'in other verbs the aorisls tz,x> u*u, &c. which correspond to those in
A, /, v, {, (fruXa, fpnwt.) It is very probable that just as this form of the aoritt
became more general in the Alexandrian dialect, (seethe Note to J 96. 06s. 1.)
futures of that kind got into use in some dialects without being admitted into the
more polished ones. Hence the old method of stating a ful. 2. rvxSia ike paradigm
of Tu<rr*.
11 These two futures, as being the regular and Attic one, might be derived from
the pres. tense fta^'ioftm. which was really in use among the Ionians, but it is more
conformable to analogy to suppose that this Ionic present tense was introduced by
the very forms, which have the appearance of comingfrom it. That it was thesame
with x<t\>v, will be shown in 5 1 10. 11. 2., butas this present teuse is alone in use,
grammar must derive the fut. xxxiea from it.
VERBS.
137
96.Aor. I. and 2. Act.

1. The aor. in a is called aor. 1. It ends either in ax, or
simply in x. Whenever the Jut. ends in au, that is everywhere
except in the verbs in X, im, v, p, the termination of the aor. 1. is
ax, and it undergoes the same changes as we observed respecting
au, for instance,
T'JTtTU,
TV-\l<tl, trv-^x,
xo/ai'^Wj
xo/j.iau, Exo/AKTar,
(pt\u,
ipiXnau, ilplXviax,
aviu,
mtvau, 'innivax, (see 95. Obs. 9.)
But in the verbs X, /x, v, p, where the termination of the fut. is
not au, but S, the aor. 1. likewise does not end in ax, but
merely in x : the rules will be stated on treating of those verbs in
101.
Obs. 1. A few anomalous verbs, though not verbs in X, . , {, make their aor.\.
in et instead of ?a, for instance, viv. fta. See also the Anom. xa'iv, uVftv, riiw,
K>Aiwti, iaTtt/iai, and r,nyxtt under ^lfa/1.With regard to the aor. 1. in * of some
verbs in /ti, (cx.gr. tivxa,) see below the verbs.in /*/.
2. The aor. in v is called aor. 2. In the common conjugation
it is the termination ov, which is added to the characteristic of
the verb in the following manner :
i. ) the aor. 2. is always made from the simple theme and
pure characteristic of the verb, whenever, (according to
92.) the latter has a lengthened form in its pres.
tense ;
ii.) it generally renders short the penultima of the present ;
iii. ) it partly changes the e of the radical syllable into x.
3. By these changes alone the aor. 2. distinguishes itself from
the imperf., and all verbs, in which none of these changes can
take place, (as d%uu, ypxQu, and the like,) or in which the bare
quantity of the vowel would constitute the difference, have no
aor. 2. act. whatever*.
4. Moreover it does not occur in any derivative verb, formed
from other words with fixed terminations, as xû, iZu, xlvu, vvu,
tuu, 6<ii, xu, ku.
1 The Alexandrian dialect, 1. Obs. 10.) formed of several verbs, which com
monly have only the aor. 2. in , an aor. in a, ex. gr. i73a for uln, faint* 3. pi. for
tXimt, and the like. See the Note to Obs. 9.Hence also some media/ forms of the
aor. 2. are found in non-Attic writers fluctuating between t> and *, for instance,
li/'gavrd for tvgtiro.
8 But they may form au aor. 2. pais. ; for instance, iyjcef
See below 100.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
138
5. Most verbs have the aor 1., and but few, comparatively
speaking, the aor. 2. In the grammar, however, the latter is set
down in many verbs, which in reality have it not, because many
verbs, though destitute of the aor. 2. act., yet form the aor. 2. pass.
on the same principles ; hence this formation is preferably shown
once for all in the aor. 2. act., and the aor. 2. pass, is derived
from it *.
6. The changes and abbreviations of the characteristic and
radical vowel of the pres. tense into the characteristic and vowel
of the aor. 2., mentioned above 2.) are effected in their several
instances in the following manner :
Characteristic
Pres. \\. Aor. 2. X
tuhtu, *stowov
XgliWTOI, *6X.pV@0V
j>XHTU, *SpflX(pOV
TIT
>>
p
>>
5)
(ppovâ), *e<ppaSov
xpii^co, txgatyov
)'
>
nraipoi, 'iirrapov
a Vowel
I!
1\
a
a
i
e or
in the verl is X, y., v, p, of which we

treat 90.
tyeuyu, tipuyov
cV
rplvca, ETâwov.
06. 2. The form of the aor. 2. bears the same relation to the simple theme as the
imperf. to the pres. tense in use ; but distinguishes itself from the imperf. partly
by its aorii/ic signification, (of which we treat in the Syntax,) and partly by having
its own moods and participles, made after the form of the present. And there is
this constant analogy, that the real imperf. of a verb always conforms itself exactly
to its usual pres. tense, and that consequently a true aor. in the indie, differs from
the usual imperf., and that in the other moods it differs from the usual pres. tense.
Hence, for instance, iyâfn necessarily is the imperf. and y{f*s the conjunctive
present, &c.
8 With regard to the aorists stated Text 6. as examples, the learner must be
informed that the forms irwrav, tzgvfiov, tppecQov, irstyss, never occur at all, or at least
only in a very few passages, which on that account are suspected of being corrupted,
(they should he iruâ, ifroga, &c.) they are stated here merely on account of the
aor. 'I. pass, (as irir>!, i*{!lj3>i>,) which is really in use.
Of the verbs, which in their rr conceal another radical letter than y, ($ 83.)
which must of course re-appear in the aor. 2., there is none but the poetical lirrtfun,
it.4Tcp.nY, (see Anom.) which has an aonst of that kind.
VERBS.
139
Obs. 3. Same imperfects seem to form an exception to this general rule, and to
be aoriiis at the same time ; but on examining them more closely, we find that
they all are, at least in practice, mere aorislt. Such are
(see 109. fti/ti,) and
irsiî:!, y^',um (from ifo/ixi,) tSiyav, about which see the Anom. Homer has xXuai,
(to hear;) its prei. tense is in use, yet ixXver always has the signification of the nor.
Homer also frequently uses the imperf. of other verbs as aoritlt, particularly for the
sake of the metre ; but it would be very improper to consider as imperf. i3jzd>,
Inr/tit, Sâir/tev, and some others, of which the pret. tense occurs nowhere, and
which of course are employed only as aoritlt. That nxctqm, >..x*n, and the like,
are still more improperly considered as imperfect!, appears from 85. O'is. 2. with
the Note5.
Obt. 4. The same analogy respecting the distinction of the aor. 2. from the imperf.
obtains also in those verbs with double themes, which on account of their more
considerable deviations can only be noticed in the list of Anomalous Verbt, as \apr
afixprivu, &c. For in them too the aor. 2. is constantly the imperf. of the
obsolete form,
môjtov, from AABO, (AHBl!,) 'AMAPTd.
04s. 5. Hither belongs also the aor. of some verbs in in and aw. These termi
nations are not derivative in some verbs, but mere lengthened forms of the primitive
simple one, (6 92. Obs.T. and below, 6 112.8.) of which the aor. 2. as xrvwUt
Ixrorm, yaia iym, (from KTTnn, ron,)8 has maintained itself as other tenses have
maintained themselves in some verbs. (Compare the perf. 2. $ 97- Obt. 4. and the
aor. 1. in tiie Anom. yx/t'iu.)
Obt. 6. The abbreviation of the peuultima, (Xi&ai ikxStv, fivyu iipuya;) may also
be justly considered as a return to the old form of the verb, which frequently, (as
we have seen above, $ 92.) had been lengthened only in the pres. tense. And even
the change of i into may be considered in that light, since we likewise find this a
in the Ionic dialect in the pres. tense of some of these verbs, as t^tk, rxutu. But
5 The separation of the aor. 2. from the imp'rf. might be historically accounted
for in this way. The Greek language originally made no distinction between the
signification of the aorist, and that of the imperf , and both historical preslerites in
v and a, (Jrvrov or irvrrsv, and irv^x,) were probably formed for that mixed signi
fication without any distinction, just as the German and English languages have
imperf. of one syllable and imperf. in ed, (/find, found; 1 print, printed ) Hence
the import of the aor. and imperf. is not fully distinguished one from the other in
the oldest writers,
137- Obs. 3.) But when the Greek language began to
observe a marked difference between the signification of the aor., and that of the
imperf, the latter gradually assumed the fixed form , but the aor. did not on that
account immediately confine itself to the form n. This form in many verbs was
probably as unusual to the Greeks as / sued, failed, named, is to an Englishman
instead of / saw, fell, ran. When, owing to the great variety of the Greek verbal
forms, the pra?tente in ci also acquired a double form, it may have been derived in
a different manner from the same pres. tense, (iXuxov, iXrrov,) or from an already
existing double theme of the verb, (s'Xav, ikipfiani,) the signification of the aor.
would naturally be gradually attached to one of them ; hut the inclination to attend
to analogy would have the effect of confining the aor. to that form in , which was
farthest removed from the usual pret. tense ; and when later wants required the
separation of the moods and participles, which originally had probably a common
form with the pres. and prateritc, they were made partly for the aor. conformably
to analogy, (from the form in ,) and partly (for the form in ,) recourse was had
to the mods and the participles of the unusual pres. tense, which was likewise the
basis of the indie., yet with some deviations in the accent, which the ear required in
the infin. and participle, (Xinh, Xirr'nixi, \itoi,) because they generally denote the
past, and their terminations, uv, trStxi, uv, remind us too distinctly of the present.
6 See also the anomalous cr/ri, cTvyla, rental, tinxtUpim, poxae/tai, and compare,
XtjKM and
in XecrKV, tûrxv.
uo
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
as, notwithstanding the probability of some instances, we never can arrive at an

absolute certainty on the whole, the kindred words, ex.gr.Qvyn and the Latin fugio,
may, just as well as itpuym, have been abbreviated from fiiyu : the Ionic rîm may,
just as well as fffira, have been derived from tjit through a change of the vowel ;
and as there are, besides, so many verbs, which change nothing but their vowel, it
is better not to increase the number of verbs of double forms or anomalous verbs,
particularly as changes of the vowel in prrcterites are also frequent in other lan
guages. At the same time it is very probable, that in part of these verbs the primi
tive short radical syllable of the present tense was lengthened and strengthened,
whilst in another part the originally long radical syllable was actually made short ill
the aor. and other forms
Obs. 7- I" some verbs, however, the syllable, which precedes the termination, is
long in the aor. 2., and offers no difference but a simpler form, or the change of the
vowel into a, ex. gr. tuoat, (fiXeta-rot, iTaoaw. (see the Anom. ilolexu, âraw, v\p%u,
and others.)The length by position is destroyed, in some few poetical forms, by a
transposition, ex.gr. Sjjxw itoaKo* : see also the Anom. vt^Su. Zaflaitu,
Obs. 8. With regard to the aor. 2. in tit, ut, in, and the syncopated aorists of the
act. and pass, voice, see below the verbs in pi and 1 10.about the a instead of a in
some medial forms, (ex. gr. tî/tm,) in non-Attic writers, the Note above to Obs. 1.
and about some anomalous verbs, which impart a neutral signification to the
aor. 2., whilst their aor. 1. has the transitive meaning, 113.
Obs. 9. AVe have just seen in the first Obs. to this Section, that some verbs form
the aor. 1 . with the characteristic of the aor. 2. ; but we also meet with the opposite
case, viz. the aor. in with the characteristic , of which we have a most complete
instance in the aor. of the verb irixr* : this is commonly derived from nETn, and
makes ixieit, riirut, and to this may be added the Epic 7%ot, l&tinn, thinrt. See
the Anom. Smtis/uu, (htutv, 3tw, and some imper. ; 7 compared with the fat. elm, see
the Anom. pi^w, and the Epic îti from Siyet, kiîo, epa-to, (see the Anom. xiytj, ipvftt,')
compared with the imper. fiwtt, iuru of the afore-mentioned indicatives ".
97.Perfectum 1. and 2. Activi.
1. The perf. act. has the same terminations, (a,ar, ev,oi"e, &c.)
in its different forms, but varies in its characteristic. The perf. 1.
has its own characteristic, but the perf. 2. always has the un
changed characteristic of the verb.
2. But the perf. 1. also varies its own characteristic.
7 That most, if not all analogy in language originates in this way, is an incon
testable truth. It was natural that, as the narrative form (of the preterite) became
more frequent, the plastic form (the pres.) was made more prominent by a stress
laid on the principal syllable ; but it was equally natural to endeavour, by way of
contrast with the pres., to accent the distinctive syllables of the praterite, and thus
obscure the principal syllable of the verb, which the vivacity of narration would,
moreover, cause to be pronounced with greater rapidity.
8 The custom formerly was to consider all these as forms derived from the //.,
contrary to the analogy of the language. The above statement makes it sufficiently
obvious that, as the language had formed the two aorists in it and a without r,
ilxet and iTa-u, iiht and iT3a, (see Obs. 1. with the Note,) it might likewise form both
in est and ra with e, torte-a, (see T;Vrai,) and 'iriffet, te'vr&putt, and tiveeftr,t. The
aorists in ra and cut were, however, generally preferred ; yet there are remnants of
the formation in a. and it. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 90. Obs. 10.
VERBS.
Ill
a. ) When /3, it, tp, or y, x, %, is the characteristic of the

verb, this characteristic becomes (or continues) aspir
ate, and an x is annexed ; for instance,
rpifia), XiHU, y%x<pw,rirpfyx, XiKBlpx, yeyqxtyx,
Xiyai, irXixca, riv-î, XiXsy^x, irin\s%x, rirsvyjx.
If this characteristic of the verb be changed in the
pres. tense,
83.) it may be known from the fut., and
as the same letters, which give an or -\> to the fut., are
here changed into % or <f>, we need only convert those
double letters into aspirate ones ; for instance,
TaTfT&J, (t41) rirxy^x,
rvnru, (Tj/vJ/a),)tirv^x.
b.) The termination of the perf. 1. in all other instances is
-xx. This in the verbs, which have -au in the fut., is
annexed in the same wray, and with the same changes
of the vowel and characteristic as the ou of the future,
for instance,
rial, (tiW, i",)
rerixx,
riy.iu, (ti/xîtw,)
nrlixrixx,
sguSpixcu, {Ipv^pixau, a,) -npuhplaxx,
eitoLOj, (anxvoj, a,)
\iitaxx,
irviu, (ti)w,)
itimsvxx,
and the lingual letters are dropped
nt'&oj, (vtlaai,)
miicuxx,
XO/aIÛ, (XOIMOW,)
XixifMXX,
but the liquids are retained. See below the verbs in
*J
v, p, 101.
3. The perf. 2. (formerly called jierf. medii, see 89. 4-6.)
annexes the same terminations to the characteristic of the verb
without any change, for instance,
Xyi&ccj XiXviSa, rs-hnco aia-nux, (psi/yw zsitysuyx. '
4. But three circumstances must be attended to:
a. ) When the characteristic is impure in the pres. ( 92. G.)
the simple root and the pure characteristic appear as in
the aor. 2. for instance,
rihrhaaoi, (rTAHTfl,) vs^lKrtya,
(ppiaato, ($PIKfl,)
tai^ppTxx,
o, (OAft,)
oS5.
b.) This form is, on the whole, fond of a long vowel in the
142
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
root, even when it is short in the tenses, which have the

simple radical vowel. Hence the pres. is again lengthened
in the above instances.
Qtuytv, aor. 2. epvyoy,zsitpsvya,,
Xoj&w, aor. 2. s'Xa&ov,Xe'Xi&a;,
a-hitia, aor. 2. pass, iaimt,aitrwrac.
The is assumed in the per/, only when the strength
ening of the present tense consists of a diphthong, or of
a length by position,
1. ex. (jr. $qc.ta, (aor. 2. e'Saov,) SsJwst
2. ô-XXoi, (flit. S-aXiS,) Ts'&TiXct,
But after p and after vowels, we have a. instead of n, as
for instance,
xpdû, (sxâyoy,) xexpayx,
eayoi, eceJce, in Anom. ay\vix\, avSctvw.
c.) But this per/, is also particularly fond of the vowel o, and
Consequently this alone not only remains unchanged in
xowto), (KOnf!,) xixana., (Homer,) but is also used as a
change for e, as
(pEg/Sco, niQopfiac,
TEKfl, rirana., (see the Anom. t/xtw.)
This has a different effect on the diphthong ei of the pres.
according as e or i is the radical, which may be discovered
in the tenses, which shorten the vowel. When the radical
vowel is e, (which, however, occurs only in the verbs
X,
v, p,) ei is changed into o, but when is the radical
vowel, ei is changed into oi, for instance,
ont'ipu, (/ut. azuepu,) 'kattopa.,
XfiWi, {aor. 2. e'Xittov,) \k\onzijt.
5. The per/. 2. like the aor. 2. (^ 96. 4.) occurs only in pri
mitive verbs ; and the greatest number of verbs, especially the
derivatives, have also the per/. 1 . It may also be observed that
the per/". 2. prefers the intransitive signification. See Obs. 5.
Obs. 1. Some perf. 1. have likewise the change of the vowel into , as ripxx, (to
send,) -rs ,,"* xkifTu, (to steal,) xixXofa*, r^tra, (to turn.) and Tjip, (to nourish.)
1 It is not correct to write liiza, and Tiififta, wirfps, &.C. neither here nor in the
corresponding instance of the aor. 1. of A, V, , {. The perf. 2. always has the
simple or abbreviated root of the verb, (here AA, *AN, &c.) for its basis, and
lengthens its vowel. According to the analogy of
vifivyx, it might indeed
resume the mi of thepres. ; but there is no motive for its further change into y.
! The usual aor. 2. pais, lukirm shews that the pure characteristic is not <p, (in
which case mxMftt might as well be the perf. 2.)
VERBS.
143
Wtjjôi*. See also xlyai, ratuXtxt, among the Anom., and the change of n Into ti
in }tiiit* of AEIft, see the Anom. iurxi.
Obi. 'I. With this conversion of into a corresponds the change of n into m in the
per/, of the Anom. fnywfii, (PHTO,) iffvyx *, and related to both are the and
intercalated in some per/., which else would be disyllables ; the a according to the
Attic reduplication : for instance, f9, (iTJU.)
See also in
the list of Anomalous Verbi, 'ChrHtxx under %c%m, \mnxa under
im&x and
MieS*, each for itself, and the pan. forms aucm under ;', Imotu, in a Note to
^ 108. i5.
OAi.3. That according to the Attic redupl. the rowel is shortened in iuw ixrxut,
ixiifv iktlkifx, 'EAEren IxUkZHx, has been noticed, 85. Epic poets were allowed
for the sake of the metre to rechange the * of this perf. into a short 4 in the parti
ciples fern, as rtrx^vix, r&aXtrix, aâ^via.
Obi. 4. The case is the same with the few instances of the perf. 2. in verbs in in,
and ecu, like piyit* ipptya, ftvxxof&xt, {aor. \uC*y... u.\-j
as with the aor. 2. in 96.
Obi. 5. They point to simple forms Pirn, MTKfl. See also the Anom. ynHiw, onnr'ui,
Obi. 5. That the number of perf. 2. taking even those into the account,which occur
only in poets, is but very limited, has already been noticed in Text 5. We will just
mention in particular0 among those belonging to transitive verbs, xxnxex, XtXenrxy
rtroxx, Jxrmtf *>i<T03a, oi5, 1jtw, irra^ya, a-rutx, tiisnx?., and among the intransi
tive, xxxfStyx, \l\xxa, rtrfiytt, Tlpoixx, ipptyx, totxx, ttciSx, Xxba, obulx, iXr.XvSx,
e'ur.ox. r'iBxKm, riSnva, fi'iptnra, xi%nra, y'xynx, xsâSa, vi'rtf&x. fi'tptuxx, ( uyxxvutri.}
along with some, which properly are intransitive, and only become transitive in
particular connections, as klXnStx, x-iQivya, i'slix. To these may be added from
} 113. OA*. 3. 4. those belonging to verbs, which are partly transitive, and partly
intransitive in some of their tenses, and in which the perf. 2. in particular has the
intransitive signification.
Obi. 6. But as the perf. is not so much needed in the copious Greek language at
in other languages, the perf. act. does not occur, or occurs but very rarely, in many
verbs, which have no perf. 2. and of which the perf. 1 . would sound harsh or strange ;
it is supplied by the aor. or by a circumlocution with the perf. pan. (See below,
$ 134. OA*. 1.)
See about the perf. of the con}., opt., and imper., $ 137. Obi. 11.
OA*. 7- Thex of the perf. 1. in xx is sometimes dropped by the Ionians, when it
8 TirfiQx, as coming from rp'iQ*, (when it may also be considered as perf. 2.)
occurs but seldom ; in Od. ^. 237. it is intransitive, in Soph. OSd. C. 1 86. it is transi
tive. Ab perf. of rfiru we find it without any various readings in the old writers,
Soph. Trach. 1009. We meet in later writers, (Matthia's Gr. Gr., Engl, transl.
5 183. 3. p. 228.) with rirgnfa.
* Compare Tivrruxx in the Anom. iri<mt.
' See, in Buttm. Lexihgus I., towards the end, a more detailed explanation of
these forms.
We merely state here the perf. themselves, and observe that, though they all
are formed from their themes according to the above rules, they mostly belong to
Anomalout Verbi stated below in the list, with which the learner must already be
familiarly acquainted to trace every one of the perf. mentioned here (o its right
verb.
7 It was a general rule with the Greeks that, if any form of a verb sounded dis
agreeably or strange, or was attended with obscurity and equivocation, it was dis
used, though it might appear of great grammatical importance ; another turn of
expression was preferably resorted to. Little attention, however, can be paid to
this circumstance in the theory of grammatical forms, which notices what analogy
requires, and leaves practice to individual observation.
144
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
is in verba pure, whereby the ptrf. I. becomes the per/. 2. Hither belong the Homeric participlts,
xtxxipwi, Tirinif, titX>i(, and others, for-i*af.
The same is done in Epic poetry, on making the vowel short, in the 3 pers. piand in the participle of some verbs, as
iSaa, /SiCauw, for /3iSn'w/, /JiSwtif, from BAH, (Anom. Qxlru,) *ifvan, -aiQviit,
for x-ifvKuffi, t'.Quxu;, from Qvu,
and there are some old per/., of which these forms only and none whatever in xa
occur ; as, fUfi&Bu/i, fufictui, it&atari, itixa/s, (see the Anom. MAO, AAtiS) But the
Anom. AEIft, SiiVa;, has both 5i2/*, and SiSm, which are used alike, and conjugated
throughout. Hence the 1 pert, ting, is also assumed for the above forms, though
it occurs nowhere : Kr'npvu, ftiftaa, "M%ttot, fitSxet, and likewise irraa, (for Irrnx* or
tttmt, see below irmpi,) y'.youi, TiSraa, titXo*, (see the Anom. ySyrtftm, dtwuu,
rAffyai,) whence some tt/ncopated forms like (zltstp.iv, r&rdteci, (for /SiCao/tsr, Ti3*aiv/.)
See 110.
98.Perfectum Passim.
1. The perf. pass, annexes the terminations (jw, ami, rai, &c.
and the plusq. /aw, uo, to, &c. not as is done in the other pass.
forms, by means of the connecting vowel, ( 79. Obs. 1. o/axi, etch,
&c.) but immediately to the characteristic of the verb, as it stands
before the termination x or xx of the regular perf. 1. conformably
to which the perf. pass, is generally formed for the sake of uni
formity.
Obs. 1. Hence when there is no per/, in use in any verb, grammar presupposes
one, as in 3uia-, (xixwroc,) the per/. 1. AiXupa is supplied, aud the per/, pan.
(xikii/ificci,) is formed after it.
2. When the perf 1. has <p or %, these letters are changed
before ft, <r, t, according to the general rules, 20. 22. 23. Thus,
for instance, rirvQx and zsissXe'/jx. give
reru-ixfji.au, rirv-^xi, tItv-ictqii, for -Ip/Jixt, tyaxi, (prxi
zsin/Ke-y/jLoci, tsiitXt-Zp.i, otewXe-xtok, -X/*a'>
XTa'j
and to prevent the meeting of three consonants, ( 19. 2.) the a
must in the farther conjugation of this perf. and of the plusq. be
dropped before the terminations a$e, abxi, o$u, &c. for instance,
2 pers. pi. TETf-<p&E, for -q>a$e or -4<&e,
tn/n. ctewXe'x,&<i -x.sS'cei or -$&<gu,
but instead of the 3 pers. pi. vtcsi, vto, there is generally a cir
cumlocution used with the verb etvau, to be, rtrvy.y.iw^, (at,) ei'iiv,
and in the plusq. waxv.
Oil. 2. The Ionians, however, have no occasion for this circumlocution, because
instead of -vrau -t, they may use -arm -st>, which the Attic writers sometimes
imitate in these tenses. See more detailed remarks about this in Obi. IV. 3.
103.
VERBS.
145
3. But, secondly, whenever the per/. 1. ends in xz, this termi

nation is merely changed into {mu, &c. and
a.) When the characteristic of the verb is a vowel, the con
version generally is effected without any other change ;
for instance,
zsoiico, wsiromwz,aenomfjuu, aoci, tjsi, &c.
(ve'o;, VEyffcu,) vevsuxqc,veveu/xch,
and then there are no further difficulties in the rest of the
conjugation, (the conj. and opt. excepted, see below, 4.)
b. ) But when a lingual letter has been dropped before xa.,
(just as before the termination au of the fut.,) a is put in
its stead before the terminations of the perf. pass., begin
ning with and t, as
atlbai, (ae'a'Eixa,) we'ctei<t/X4ci, u/xs^hc, zsizuarai,
ffiov, (paw, rix*,)
yifjt.sci, r\ari,
ipqzôj, (zjitppaxx,) - -csiipspirsiJ.cn, arai.
Yet this <t is again rejected before another <s, as 2 sing.
Gsinei-aai1, 2 pi. zssTttiaSe ; the 3 pi. as above.
c. ) See about the verbs \ //. v />, 101.
Obs. 3. The change of t into t does 'not take place in the pass, voice ; ex. gr.
nXirr*, (xixXtpx,) xixXtpifUu. But the three verbs rgiaw, (to turn about,') rfifa,
(to nourish,) and tr(i$u,(to turn,) have the % in the perf. pass. riTfctfituai, tst{<z^.;,
&C Ttfyaftfion, (from r^Qoi, Sgi\poi,) ifrga/ipai.
Obs. 4. Some verbs change the diphthong w, (which they have in the pres., or
take only in the fut. into u in the perf. pass.; ex. gr. nu%, (ririâ,) rimy/axi.
The same with <pivya>, and Tnai, ((TmiVw, vtirvtuxet,) vix-vvftai. In x'w,
this
is already done in the perf act. xixixa, x'txipm. See J 95. Obs. 4. about the al
tered quantity of some verbs in lu and vu.
Obs. 5. The t in the perf. pass, is properly (\ 23.) the changed lingual letter of
the root itself before the ft, which lingual letter has maintained itself unchanged in
some few forms in Epic poetry, xixccSfuu, *if(u$fcxj, from KAAft, (see Anom. xaltofssu,) Pf*Zv, xixifuSfuii, from KOPTen*, xifumi.
Obs. 6. The j, however, is also adopted by several verbs, of which the character
istic is a vowel, and not a lingual letter ; as,
ixcuai itxotHTf&Ki, xiXtvu xtxlkivf/ieci.
The same with ng/w, xt'*>
m!*, f
Su, fitiv, giiw, and
and generally with all verbs, which do not change their short vowel ; ex.gr. riXut,
rn\iffv,) TtriXifffia-t, as well as iw, kxUfiMi,
$Xau, atuu. See the Anom. x\uu,
rut.
Obs."]. In case two yy should be requisite before /i, one is dropped, as \\iyxu,
1 Homer's tiTwictu is only a poetical or metrical redupl. instead of ritvirxi, (Plato
Prolog. 310.)
! This radical 3 is confirmed by the subst. xiû;, uSoi. Else it might be considered,
according to the old fashion, as an intercalated > in lieu of r, (xXttoS/ioi, i^nS/tii,
6 110. Obs. 3.)
L
14G
A GRF.F.K GRAMMAR.
per/. i\iXiyx*i pass. iknXty/iai, irfiyyu trfiyftxi* : the rest of the terminations
generally remain, iXvXsyât, yxrai, &.C. it%iy%ai, &.C.
Obs. 0. In the same way, when the per/, pan. requires two /i/t and the root has
a third /i, one of them is dropped of course : xi/nxTaxixxppsu, xixau^xi, Sic.
4. It is partly on account of the difficulty of their formation,
and partly because they are seldom wanted, that the conj. and
opt. generally are not formed at all, but a circumlocution with
Eivai is resorted to, nrvy.iA.iws, (n, ov,) <5 and eirjy.
Obs. 9. These moods can he formed only when there is a vowel before the termi
nation, which easily emerges into the terminations of the eon;', and is readily com
bined with the characteristic < of the opt.; for instance xrdsftm, xixmfteu,
conj. xly-ruuni, it, *jtsu, &.C.
opt. xsKTy-ur,*, xtxrrie, xtxryre, &c.
There are but few isolated forms of trisyllabical per/., which all are anomalous.
Thus Plato has the conj. ixr'trfiwln, (ripou rirfiiificu,) Andocides the conj.liafilSXtitd,
(/accXXiu. fiiGxrifiai.) See also xlxkn/uat B.nd piprtftai under xxxiu and /i^vro-xw. Even
when the radical vowel is i or u, the opt. may be formed by absorbing the additional t,
which renders the vowel long, but Homer's x'iXCts, Oil. 0. 230. (Xv xixu/uu, 95.
Ob). 4.) is probably the only instance, which occurs*.
99.Futurum 3.
The third fut. or paulo-post-fut. pass, derives its signification
( 138.) and its form from the perf. pass., of which it retains the
augment, substituting adfim for the termination of the perf.; hence
we need only compare the 2 pers. of the perf. in aai, (^'j
and change m into opm, for instance,
rervfji.fji.xi, (rsTt/\J/(H,)
rtrvôfxai
rirpafi.fA.at, (rirpa-ât,)
nrpa-ôfi.ai
WBtplKrifJim, (ws^/Xtjffai,)
<7ii$ikriaof/.m
tjinsHiMti, {ysiiciiam,')
analaaij.mObs. 1. Whenever the vowel of the fut. 1. is shortened in the per/. jrnss., the
/ut. 3. takes again the long vowel : SiSnVqtut/, XiXvftfixi, (see 95. 06*. 4 l.)
Obs. 2. There is no 3/ut. to be met with of the verbs X fi t (, and there are but
few of those, which have the temporal augment.
' There is no doubt that this y by itself is then the nasal sound ngj compare
4.3.
* Others insist on xixnrxi, XtxZrt, &c. but I have adopted the accentuation
of some HISS, as alone conformable to analogy; for x'urw/ixi and
must
stand in the same relation to xixTx/uu, and Xi/.ira to XiXv/iai, as ru<rri/>icci and
TuTm-i to nrtt/uu. SeeButtm. Complete Gr. Gr. and about the opt. forms xixrr,
fti/triyn, see the list of Anomalous t u bs.
1 But it must not be supposed on that account that the 3 /ut. is formed from the
] /t of the middle voice with the redupl. ; for I do not know whether the above
TiT(xêfcxi occurs anywhere, but Ûr^n, xtxXwiixi, which actually occur, dearly
confine us to the per/. (See the Anom. /SoXX*, xaXiu.)
vnnns.
U7
100. Aoristus 1. and 2. Pass.

1. All Greek verbs have the aor. pass, either in Stjv, or merely
in w, and several have both kinds at once ; the former is called
aor. I., the latter aor. 2. (See 89. 3.)
2. The aor. I. pass, annexes $m to the characteristic of the
verb, for instance,
vjtxtSeuu,
EWaiSet/Sw,
tribal,
Eore'cpSriv.
It follows of course from SO, that, when the characteristic of the
verb is a tenuis or media, it is changed into an aspirata, for in
stance,
"ktiitu, cciAeifia,
iXeltpSwv, r/lu.i^S,r,v,
rvzsrv, (TTIlfl,)
erii^nv,
riasu, (TAXTi,)
iri-^m.
3. With regard to the other changes of the radical word, which
occur in the jut. 1.
93. 4.) the aor. 1. pass, chiefly follows the
perf. pass., taking a in the same cases, for instance,
xopu'a>, (xExo/x.iff/^.ai,)
ixofjLtaSnv,
Te\ew, (tete'Xec7^(.i,)
ereXiaSriv,
and mostly changing the vowel of the preceding syllable in the
same way as the perf. j>ass., for instance,
aoilaif {zstzsbinfj.ua,,)
Iwoni&rjv,
Ti/Aaw, (rn'/*if*i,)
irifj.-nbtit,
Tiuyju, (TETfy/xoci,)
eti/%&7)v.
Obs. 1. A few verbs, which have a vowel for their characteristic, take the r in
the aor. 1. paw. without having it in the per/, pass. ; for instance, nitt, wlrm/tai,
aor. 1. \ r
and ixxvaSti'/, ftvaefuxi, pluvn/zeci, ifjtvr.fSnv. see also the Alton, trviu,
Xi^"i rtrxnupu. That ImISw, which comes from crai^, has not the t, is owing to
this verb having a double form. See the list of Anomalout Verbs.
Obs. 2. See about the verbs in in, which have in the perf. pats, and i again in
the aor. 1. pass. $ 95. Obs. 4.
06j. 3. Those which, without being verbs in X ft v {, change their i into a in the
per/, paw. 98. Oil. 3.) retain their i here : irrfifa, (i/rrfa/tftai,) IrrfitpSm, r;!n
tr^t^Sqv, Toiâ) 'iSîfSr,*. But the Jonians and Dorians have WpaQSw, igî^^n*.
4. The aor. 2. pass, annexes w to the pure characteristic of the
verb, and follows the rules given for the formation of the aor. 2.
act. Hence we need only form that tense, whether it be in use
or not, and change ov into w, for instance,
tuvtoj, ETt/irovIrvitm,
TgEfl-oi, erpqevov,erqxum.
L2
148
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obt. 4. The aor. 2. past, is after all nothing but a softer form of the aor. 1 .
Hence it commonly exists along with the aor. 1., but chiefly in primitive verbs only ;
and in most verbs, which make their aor. 1. in x$*'
fBm, it is preferred, this
aor. 1. being used only by poets, when they want a long syllable, or by tragic
writers, who prefer full and antiquated forms. Yet even in prose both were used
indifferently, and the choice was probably determined by euphony.
Obs. 5. Though the formation of the aor. 2. pan. agrees so perfectly with that of
the aor. 1. act. that it follows the latter in grammar, it is yet absolutely independent
of it ; for in almost all the verbs, which have the aor. 2. pass., the aor. 2. act. is not
in use, as in U/.^t^. from xXictto/, txî/Cqv, itvthv, IfiXuGnv, t^'/fqy, from kouttu,
ti/st, (SXairru, plimi, It{P>s from rfifu. Only the verb t{!t prefers the aor. 2.
as it is stated above, in both the act. and the pais.
Obs. 6. As there is no such interchange in the pan. as in the act. between the
aor. 2. and the imperf, some verbs, which, according to 96. 3. cannot form an
aor. 2. act., form an aor. 2. past. It may in such a case be made after the imperf.
instead of the aor. 2. act. ; only the rule that the long vowel becomes short in the
aor. 2., holds out here also, for instance,
yga$v. {imperf. lyoatyo*,')
iygei$7iv,
tÎZu, (imperf. irjiCay,)
ir^'tZnv, (r.)
Obt. 7. On that account some verbs, of which the radical vowel is , form an
aor. 2. pass, without changing the i into a: for instance, Qk'syvitpxiyw, and fixir*
and Xiyu, (see the Anom.) See also about the unchanged long vowel in iTAiiyny
the Anom. ve\neeu.
Obt. 8. The verb vJ-u'^x commonly takes a y in the aor. 2. pan. iîynt. See
Buttm. Complete Gr. Or.
Obs. 9. The characteristic 5, 9, r, does not take place in the aor. 2. past., and
instances with a vowel before the termination are hardly to be met with, except
ixar.f from kx'm, and these three i'idr.s, Vffvvit, ifiint. (See the Anom. AA, f'w, puv,)
which have the signification of the act. The rest of the verbs in u puram and
contraclum, and those in iu. 3, and
have only the aor. I. past.
Obt. 10. There is a striking agreement of the two aor. pass., in point of form
and conjugation, with the act. of the verbs in pi. Compare the aor. pass, in the
paradigm of rixrtt with the imperf. and the collateral moods of the pres. tense of
riBn/u.
101. Verbs in X, /x, v, g.
1. The verbs, of which the characteristic is one of the letters
X, fx., v,p, deviate so much in the formation of their tenses, that it
is necessary to bring them under a particular point of view.
2. All these verbs are generally without the fut. 1. orfut. in
oa>, but they always have the fut. 2. ( 95. 7. 8.) Thus
vifAoj,
fut. Ion. ve/xicu, commonly veâo;,
l*ho>,
/xeve'w, commonly /xev<Z,
of which the conjugation, vs/xw, z!s, ti, ovuev, sire, ouuiv, med.
oTifAoci, ei, eTrau, &c. may be seen in the paradigm of ayykXKu, and
be compared with the pres. of the verba contractu in ea/, 105.
3. If the syllable, which precedes the termination, be long in
the pres., it is always made short in this fut. without any excep
tion ; for instance,
VERBS.
149
^xWco, arlWa,
F. -^/tfXw, art\u}
xplvoj, ay-vvw,
xpiiw, a/Auvdi.
For this purpose the diphthong i is converted into a, and ei into
e, for instance,
culpa, xretva),
F. aitpSi, xtevsS1.
Obs. 1 . The Ionic forms, xyy'lXXu, fut. iyyiXto/, xt>h'lut XTlw'iw, Q:ln& from fxtvw,
itXm'ui from rXvw, &c. p/. iî>, and so on, are now easily accounted for, as well as
the Doric verbs, with the contraction uw : for instance, frxUZpit. %%>.<J',uiu, (95.
Obs. 17.) See about the forms in ra, Obs. 3.
4. These verbs also form the aor. 1. without <x, merely in a.
They retain the characteristic as it is in the fut., but make the
syllable before the termination long again ; yet independently of
the pres., for either they barely lengthen the vowel of the future,
ex. (jr.
t'iWu, (rl\u,) etiXcc,
xphu, (xgfvc3,) exqhiz,
dfAuvcv, (a/xt/va/,)-/)ptt/va,
or they commonly change the e of the fut. into ei, and a into w,
for instance,
fAEVOJ, s-eXX&i, TEIVW,
(/AEVcU, TEXiZ, TEVftl,) EpCSIVSt, eVeiXj ETEIVSt,
(\|/aXa!, (pstvc2,) E\]/rAa, Eifîvas.
Several verbs, however, having a in the pres., take a in the aor. J .
for instance,
Itlfd'wtii, Vepavoj,inipava, inf. Ttepavoti.
Obt. 2 The x is taken by the verbs in -<u and -m'mt, ex. gr. ii<Pfxtxi, fixfxrxi,
irutlw, -riuteti, except rtrfivxi and fiwcti. Most of the others in ol'.im and a\ow are
always found with n in the Attic writers, ex. gr. ffnftxlvai enfiii*xi, %x*.vrr,Yxi, ?.vy.y.-.%ffSxi, &c.i^Sa'tû i^r^xtxxSri^xi, &c. excepting, however, xatkayat, Xivxxtxi,
xvznxau, xifixvxi, ofyZrxi, tr^mm. Later writers, or what are called xm), (see
{ J . 9.) make also many other verbs with , (as rti/ixlm, /umW, \y-itaict,, &c.) and the
Dorians of course do this throughout, whilst the Ionians again have almost every
where their n.Verbs beginning with a,
(to raise,) and &y.\epMi, (to leap,)
have x, which is changed into n in the indie, only, because of the augment : fifx,
aoau, xgxs, &C. nkxfiw, U\xfxi, &C. 1
1 Other verbs requiring the short vowel, as those in (, , u, Xpu, r/tv, or with the
vowels n, , and the like, do not occur at all in common language ; and the old
poetical verbs, of which we have the forms tvirw, 'M^/tire, and the like, arc defec
tive; similar ones in the common language, ixxti, rip.ni, x*v. favXa/txi, arc
anomalous.
8 The learner must here be put on his guard against two errors : 1. nothing is
more common than to find
xpxi, lp.imx, &c. with the iota lubtcriptum, which is
to be condemned for the same reasons, as above with regard to the per/. 2. (see
97. 4. the Note.) ; 2. in editions, which on the whole may be considered as good,
the accentuation often is still Ti-rxtxi, cv/ixmi, and the like ; its incorrectness,
however, is sufficiently obvious from what we have observed here, and in 11.
150
A ORHKK GRAMMAR.
OAs. 3. The oldest language and the Julian dialect also made the ful. and the
aor. 1. of these verbs with r\ Homer, txtêt, Theocr. irurm, from xuw, rilgv, and
this formation alone continued to be used in common language with respect to
some verbs, like xixxai, (/ /and,) txt\ect, $i(tt, (I knead,) Qvgra. See also the Anom.
5. The aor. 2. retains the vowel exactly as it is in the fut. ; for
instance,
fitzWu, (/3aXa!,)e/3aXov,
(paivco, ((pave?,) aor. 2. pass. eQzwv,
xKit/oif (xXfvw,) aor. 2. pass. txXi'vnv, (i,)
except that in disyllabic verbs the e of the fut. is changed into a,
(compare 96.) for instance,
XTEiva;, (xteviS,) EXTavov,
s-e'XXcu, (fEXaJ,) aor. 2. pass. iwtKw :
the polysyllables retain the e, dyyiWaivyyiXov, vr/yiKriv.
Obi. 4. The aor. 2. act. is used iu very few of these verbs, and, where both occur,
rather poetical: thus ixravov occurs more rarely than ixmra". But inthepasj.
the aor. 1. whenever it retains the consonant before the S, is generally peculiar to
the Poets, (compare 100. Obt. 4.) It is the aor. 2., which is most in use, ex. gr.
ôtUu ttpdvriv, ffXXu Wa\m, câXXw iVpaXtjv, tu^m ita^riv.Yet
and all polysyl
lables have merely the aor. 1. pan. excepting iy^tXAw, which has %yy'o,3r,> and
iyytKnt.
6. The per/. 2. is completely comprised in the rules given
above in 88. a. 2. 3. : hence
(pxtvoj, Tfelpwz.
There is this peculiarity, that the diphthong ei, having arisen in
these verbs not from the radical vowel i, but from e, as appears
from the fuf., is not changed into oi in the perf. 2. but merely
into o, for instance,
XTEiva/, (xrsva!,) sxrovo,
<pElpco, ((p&Eja/,) EpS'oga.
7. The perf. 1., the perf. pass., and the aor. 1. jiass., also
follow the general rules ; they annex the terminations xa, (aou, &c.
*iv to the characteristic, and retain the changes of the fut., for
instance,
afyaWu, (o-QaXw,) ta(pix\xx, EapaX/Aai,
(fa/vw, (<pavi2,) irtyxyxa, iîthm,
ai'pu, (acS,)
riqxct, vtffxon, pari, -nîxhof, %pnv, part. a'g&Ei'r.
The perf. pass. ( 98. 2.) also rejects the a of the terminations
<j&ai, o$e, &c. ; for instance,
* The case is the same with xyyixx.*, of which the aor. 2. act. is even questioned,
it is only required an i or x to be omitted by the transcribers to produce it. See in
Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. the list of Verbs.
VERBS.
151
E<TpaXjt*ai, 2 pi. saQaXSe,

(pvpoj, "nityvîMii, inf. nttyuf&ai.
But there are other additional peculiarities to be attended to.
8. When the fut. has an e, the disyllables also take in these
tenses the a in its stead ; for instance,
fiWu, (ysXiS,)e'raXxa, tsoik&xi, ffaX&7)y,
(aor. 2. pass. EjaXnv,)
WEi'gcu, (a-EgcS,) Ttinapua, Ttiita.py.tu,
{aor. 2. pas*. B7tdqm.)
Obs. 5. A general rule is, that the polysyllables retain the i unchanged, (e.r. gr.
kyy'iWu,HyytXxx, iyy'txSnt.) But the i is likewise retained by the disyllables
beginning with i, ttk/uu, u^xi, from the Anom. ifx, ilga/.
9. The following verbs in hat, sivu, uvu,
XglVO), xXlVO/, TElViW, xriivu, TtXvv&i,
reject the v in these tenses, and take the short vowel of the fut.,
but those in ei'vw still change the e into a according to the preced
ing rule,
xgiW, (x/jfvi),) xs'xgfxse, xixel/juu, EXfiSw,
TEJVftl, (tEVo),)
rETOSX*, TETOptSH, ETa&nv *j
wXi/vw, (7rXuvc5,)TtinXvux, itin\viJ.xi, iit\uQw.
Olt. C. But the of the nor. 1. pass, is often retained in verses for the sake of
position, ex. gr. xrstQtU, iixx(i>S>ui, IxXttSh) iirA.i/>3j|. Later writers have it also in
prose.
Obi. 7. The retaining of the is attended with some difficulty in the per/, past. ;
yet it is retained unchanged
a.) in the 2 ting., where it even remains before r, for instance, fx'm*xifttttrxi,
b.) in the terminations beginning with r3, in which, however, (according to
text 7-) the <r gives way to the i, ex. gr. inf. tripxtSxi, rex%vm, inf. ric.) in the 3 sing, ex.gr. xityxirxi, (he appeared,) irx^<t,viTtu, (he was exasperated.')
Whether the 3 pi. was formed in this manner, (ex. gr. xixfxtrxi, Eurip.
Hipp. 1255. of xgxiix, from which of course one has been dropped, (com
pare the following Obi.) is questionable.
Obs. 8. Three things are to be attended to with regard to the > before termina
tions beginning with {/. :
a.) the t regularly becomes ft, ex. gr.
%<r%vftftxit Homer //. <r. 180. from air^vvu,
i^r.axfcfixi, Athen. 3. p. 80. d. from %r,fxiiu,
b.) a is most commonly substituted for the v, ex.gr.
fiixUu, (tpxyu, ftix*,)
TttyXfftXl,
c.) when
the isftifjLlXBflXi,
rejected altogether, which is very rare, the vowel remains
long, ex. gr. nr(xx"î"tt Aristot. H. A. 4, 9 s.
* Compare also the Anom. 4'ENfi, vifuiuu. There is no occasion to recur to the
old4 themes
TAfl,per/.
KTAd,
*An.
Even the
1. act.
fluctuates between the two formations, and as it was
seldom wanted, ($ 08. a. Obs. 5.) the Greek writers probably consulted their ear for
the most part of time. We meet, hut not in the old writers, with x'tfxyxx, fti/tlxyxx,
and
See also the Anom. xipixltu.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
152
The two last ways may also be explained as owing to the terminations mm and v>u
having been originally lengthened from >> and Cm.
Obs. 9. About the few verbs in p.u, which, as well as fam, take, for euphony's
sake, 99. 2.) the forms of 1v, (iyifinSw, fiifilwiut,) see the Anom.
102. Verbal Adjectives in riot and ros.
1. After having stated the formation of the tenses, we pass to
the formation of the two kinds of verbal adjectives in te'oj- and tos,
which in their signification and use approximate to the participles.
(See Obs. 2.)
2. Both kinds constantly have the accent on the termination,
annexed immediately to the characteristic of the verb ; this
undergoes the changes prescribed by the general rules, and in
several instances the vowel, which precedes the termination, is
likewise changed. These changes agree in every respect with
those of the aor. 1. pass, only that where the aor. has
the
verbals take mr, xr. They therefore may always be compared
with the 3 pers. sing, of the per/, pass., which also has a t.
But this 3 pers. deviates in several verbs from the aor, 1. and
from these verbals, with regard to the radical syllable.
3. Verbals are formed thus :
Xiyu,
yo&tyta,
?p((pa,
(pwpdaj,
(piXiu,
a'ipita,
HU.UW,
(\i\exrm, eXe'xSw,)
{yiyâ-nrai, iypxtySm,)
(?rpr, EsÊip&nv,)
(netficup/zTtti, i<pa/pxr>v,)
(nz$t'krir*i> tpiXriSw,)
(yqwrcti, ripiSw,)
(niiravTai, EWauff&nv,)
Xextoj-,
ypaitros,
spiiiTos,
tyoiptzrios,
tyikvirios,
aiperos,
i:av(srios,
nlvu, (TE-nzTai, Era&mv,)

rarior,
X,Eiu,
(yJxvrat> ^X^))
Xvros,
nvieo, [isinivrxi, ETrvE^Sw,)
nnvaros.
Obs. 1. The r is sometimes dropped before the termination of several verbals in
if in the Ionic dialect, and by the old Attic writers, especially in compounds, like
aia/tarcs, xiyxl.a.mK, and Poets even allowed themselves to say, Sav/ixrii from
Obs. 2. See in the Syntax, 134. 8. the peculiarities in the use and import of
these verbal adj. ex. gr. rpxrw, ttvisted, and which can be twisted, revrrios, which
must be twisted ; and the neut. rjurriM corresponding to the Latin vertendum est.
\ 103. Verbum Barytonon.
1. We are now going to give the conjugation of a barytone
verb, (tuhtw,) to which we subjoin various examples, to shew
VERBS.
153
the difference of the use in some verbs, and lastly the conjugation
of one of the verbs in \ y. v g, (dyyiWa.)
2. A barytone verb is, (according to 10. 2.) a verb in its
natural form, in which the termination of the pres. always is
unaccented ; in contradistinction to those verbs, which contract
the two last syllables, and therefore take the circumflex. The
latter are called verba contracta or perispomena ; they are par
ticularly stated in their proper place.
Prefatory Remarks to the Paradigma Tiirru.
1. The verb rvvru, which we too select for a paradigm, is not
so improper for it, as some suppose. Since it is necessary to shew
first the whole foundation of the Greek conjugation in one verbi
there is scarcely one more convenient than tvistoj to be hit on ;
for it is only in a verb, which has like this a perfect form in its
pres. tense, that the exact nature of the aor. 2., as stated above,
96. 2., can be fully explained.
2. The learner must, however, be reminded that ruitru is here"
a bare paradigm, that is to say, an example, in which a complete
view is given of all the tenses, which may occur in verbs of this
kind, though neither tvhtu, nor any single verb, has all the tenses,
or employs all the tenses, which are set down here. See 104 l.
3. But we have only stated in the paradigm those tenses,
which are warranted by the analogy of similar verbs, as aor. 2.
act. and perf. 2. The old grammars had also
the fat. 2. act. and med. ;
but as this belongs to the verbs in X ft v 5, we omit it here, and
conjugate this future completely in the paradigm of those verbs
4. To give a view of the whole, we annex a Table containing
the first pers. of the flexible moods, the second pers. of the imper.,
the infin., and the masc. of the participle of all the tenses of
the act., pass., and middle voice. And this Table is immediately
followed by the paradigm of rittru conjugated once more at length.
5. Observations on the accentuation of verbs, and peculiarities
of the different dialects, are given after all the paradigms.
1 These tenses of tkVtm are those, which really are in use. See below the list of
Anomalous Ferbs, to which ti/ttiu also belongs on account of the Attic formation of
the fut. rwxTWN.
154
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Verbum
Indie.
rutlru,
Pres.
Imperf.
Perf. L
Plusq. 1.
Perf. 2.
Plusq. 2.
Fut. I.
A or. 1.
Put. 2.
Aor. 2.
Conj.
tvhtu,
TtTi/tpa,
STE-rufpeiy,
ETETl/ffElV,
(See in the paradigm iyyiWco,)

TU7TU,
trwrov,
-<
Passi-
Pres.
Imperf.
Perf.
Plusq.
Fut. 1.
Aor. 1.
Fut. 2.
Aor. 2.
Fut. 3.
Tt/WTO/AiXI,
IruVTOfj.m,
ruitruy.a.1,
*
ErETI^j^MJV,
ETlJ<f>S'r)V,
ETtiarnv,
TV11W,
MedFor the Pres., Imper/., Per/, and Plusq . see the Pass. Voice,
Fut. 1.
Aor. 1.
Fut. 2.
Aor. 2.
(See in the paradigm tkyyiWu,}
* This con;, and opt, can be formed only in very few verbs. See 98. Obs. 0.
the verb upui nwp/tiw, (,
VERBS.
155
Bauytonon, riitru.
vum.
Opt.
twtoi/xi,
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
TVXTl,
tvhtuv,
rirmre,
rerunas,
TETt!<f>Oi/XI}
TETWroifAl,
TlJ-vJ/ElV,
r p^*-*"
rum,
TUWSIV,
rvnut.
Tuitrov,
TVTirtoboU,
TV7fTOI/.&V0S,
reruipSai,
TSTO/X/KeW,
Tulp&Eiw,
TutpSrivzi,
rvTtslm,
TVBr,vaut
rtriJÊff&ai,
Tutp&Eir,
Tvn-naoi/.tvos,
Tunels,
TET(nJ/d/x.svOf.
TUltTOIlAW,
*
ZUOT.
Ty\J/d/xEvor,
TWOI/AW,
rvnov,
In most instances they are supplied by a circumlocution with the conj. and opt. of
,and tJm. See 108. IV.
156
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
A cti-
Pres. Sing.
rvnrus, thou sfrikest,

rvicrei, he, she, it, strikes,
Conj.
rvuru, (that) I may
strike,
TUlfTYIS,
rvirrri,
tutttetov, you two strike,

twtetov, they both strike,
tvit-roii.it, we strike,
rvirrers, you strike,
rvurovut, (v,) fhey strike,
TvirmTOV,
rvitmroi,
rvltront.il,
rvisrrin,
Twxruai, (v,)
rvisra, I strike,
Dual,
Plur.
Imperf. Sing, 'irvitrai,

eTWTrsr,
'trvurt, (v,)
Per/. 1. Sing.
Dual,
eruirrsroy,
irmtrirftt,
Tsrutpx, I have struck, &c.

TSTUlpZS,
T6Tt/<pE, (v,)
Plur. irvirro/ji.iv,
frvirren,
itwrtov,
rtrv$u, like thepws.
Dual,
TSTUQOCTOY,
TETutyxrov,
Plur.
nrvtyxre,
Tsrulpam, (y,)
Plusq. Sing, etetiêiv,
Dual,
Plur. ETETi/tpEiyxEv,
STSTVîlf,
ETETtJlpEITOV,
ETETt/pEfTf,
ET6Tu!p='>
irsrvptirm,
\rtrufynaxv,
Perf. 2. TfTwri, through all the moods like the per/! 1.
Plusq. 2. Itetêu, like the plusq. 1.
Fuf. 1. <S'i;i(/.
rvû, Ishall or will strike, conj. is wanting,

like the pres.
^4or. 1. <Sin</.
trv-^x, I struck, or / have

tru-^xs,
[struck, &c.
ETl/vJ/E, (v,)
rv-ôj,
like the pres.
Dual,
Plur.
Aor. 2.
iTV^XTOY,
Tt/\J/asT7)V,
6Tt/\J/a/XEV,
ETlnJ/aTE,
ETlnJ/aV,
ETI/WOy,
like the imperf.
rvltoi,
like the
* See below,
157
VERBS.
vum.
Infin.
Part.
Opt
Imper.
ruTTToi/jn, I might strike,
to strike, Tinrrvvax,
were I to strike,
Tvirn, strike,
rvmrat,
TVTTTOIS,
rwrniru, let him, her, it
striking,
TVHTOl,

[strike, gen. runrovros.
rvirrerov, strike rje (both,)
TVITTOirOV,
rvvrirm,they (both) may or must strike,
ruirTolrm,
TVXTOIfJLiV,
TuirriTe, strike ye,
[must strike,
TI/37T9IT6,
TVTTTOliV,
rWTsruaecii or tuwtovtuv, they may or
\l did strike, thou didst strike, &c.
TtTUtpOll/.!,
like the pres.
like the pres.
TETVpuTx,
gell.TiTVtyOTOS,
I had struck, &c.

or euaiv.J
like the pres.
imperf. is
wanting,
like the pres.

Ttn|>a(,
tu^xis or tu^hxs,*
rv^xi or Ti/4-sie, (v,)*
nJvJ/ov, strike,
TU^XTU,
TV^XiTOV,
TU\J/aiT7)V,
rv-^xifx-ev,
Tl/vJ/aTOV,
rv-^xruv,
t<a|/2uev or rvêixv,
TUÔLTOJtJXV Or
Tildas,
rvâax,
gen. tu-^xvtos,
rvxsXv,
pres.
Obi. II. 4.
like the pres.
tuicwv, ovax, ov,

gen. ovror,
158"
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Passi(To be
Pres. Siny.
Dual,
Plur.
Indie.
Conj.
TUTTTO/Aal,
Tui!TaitJ.a..t
tutitti, or ei, (see below, Ohs. Tv-xrrt,
Tvnmai,
[I II. 3.)
TUWTOfAE&OV,
TVTITCUIA&O-i,
WWTEcSoV,
TVTCTTlaSoi,
jWTEir&ov,
TWTO/XS&a!,
T^TrTEff&E,
u/wrovrai,
rvTiTCiivrat,
Imperf. Sing, erwroum, Dual, ETt/zrro/xE&ov,

ztutttov,
IrvnTi&QV,
trviCTtro,
Irvitriahm,
Per/. Sing. TE'rt//x/w.aij
TETtlvJ/al,
TETt/WTlJCI,
Dual, TETIZ/X/XE&OV,
TE'ri/ip&ov,
TE'TUtp&OV,
Plur.
TETîp&E,
3 ^jers. wanting, in its stead,
TETK/X/AEVOI, (,) fiffiv,
Plusq. Sing. tTtrvwrn, Dual, eTETi/w<.e&ov,
srsruô,
.rin/ôy,
ete'totto,
treruip^riv,
Fut. 1.
TMf)3>)<TO/xai,
TH<f)&)(T7], Or El,
and so on like the pres.
Plur. Etwro/xe&a,
irvTCTiê,
eti/tttovto,
See the Note to
Plur. ETET^/xe&a,
mrutySs,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. is wanting,
Aor. 1. Sing.
Tufty,
Dual,
STV(priT7)V,
TvtpSrirov,
Plur.
rvtp'bnrs,
TUipSwlt, (v,)
Fut. 2. wT)<ro/xai, through all the moods like the Fur. 1. '
Aor. 2. irvrniv,
through all the moods like the Aor. 1.
Fut. 3. rsTuôfAcci, through all the moods like the Fut. 1.
* The abbreviated form is most generally employed in
VERBS.
159
turn,
struck.)
Opt.
tvjttoio,
ti/wtoito,
TuirrotaSov,
TVTlTOiaSm,
TI/'TJ'TOIIT&S,
TUWTOIVTO,
Imper.
Infin.
runrw,
Part.
rvvroiMvos,
VI, ov,
rwri'jJuiy,
Tuitrta'be,
rvwriabuaav,
or Tvitriaiani,
:
the Table, p. 146.
,
rervâtt,
.
TETO/X/XEVOf,
), OV,
TETt/(p&0),
tztv$3cov,
or TTti<p&UV,
in its stead reru/xiJ.hoi, (at,) %<t*v,

imper. is
wanting,
Tl/tySriGOtO,
and so on like the pres.
ruty'&ri'yt&a.t, rutpSrisopiEvof
ov,
Tvtpbeim,
rvfovivxt,
ri/^&Err,
Ti/lp&sJ'o'a,
gen.
TMp&ErWTOV,
TuQlV)Tm,
TUf&ElV./XEV, TWÊI/AEy,
Tl/^S'rjTOV,
Tii<pSr;TE,
(rvtySit-naav,) rutpSeTsv *,
the yf/ s< and second pert., and almost always in the third,
ICO
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Med(To strike
The pres. and imperf., perf. and
Indie.
Fut. 1.
Conj.
wanting,
like the pre*.

Aor. 1. Sing.
CTljyl'XTO,
Dual,
Plur.
Aor. 2.
like the imperf. pass.
these two moods as
Verbal Adjectives, (
See Herod.
VERBS.
161
turn.
one's self*.)
plusq. are the same as in the pass.
Imper.
wanting,
Opt.
like the pres. pass.
tv-^/ouo,
Infin.
Part.
TtnJ/o/xEvoj,
n, ov,
71, OV,
rv^dahm,
Tt/\J>aiVTO,
ruiroifjLm,
the pres. pass.
Tv^xcfocaaav, or
rv^dahm,
ruirov,
ruwiaSiooav, Or
rvxiaSwv,
102.) rvitrios, rvicros.
2, 40.
71, 0V.
A GREF.K GRAMMAR.
162
EXAMPLES OF OTHER BARYTONE VERBS, AS THEY ARE IN USE.
vxiltvu, (to educate.)
Med. (to cause to be educated.)

Activum.
Pres. Ind.
vatisvu, &c.
Conj.
Opt.
nai&svru,
woaSiiiri, &C.
in/in.
araiSet/oir,
naaSevot, &C.
Pari.
Imper.
irquituirw, &c.
Imptrf.
enaideuov, er, e, (v,) &C.
Per/. Ind.
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
'nmaiSivxa,
Mircutisuxco,
wearaiJeyxoi/xi, not in use,
. au, s, (v,) &c.
Infin.
Part.
7r7roLi8ev)iivzt,
'TtiTtai&tvKws, v~a, bf,
Plusq.
tirevraiSeuxeiv, ttf, , &C.
Fut.
voul'euou,
Opt.
nxiSevaoifju,
Infin.
Part.
Aor.
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
at, s, (v,) &c.
ipr, -p, &c.
itotilsvoxis
TraiSEuuiTw,
naibsuoau, &c
&C
7n/in.
Par*.
iCatBsvaau,
vtatSevaxt,
TtaiStvaaoa.,
f?re? form,> "-fJiwiHif, in, urn are understood here of course, as well as
in the following paradigm:
VERBS.
163
Passivum.
Pres. Ind.
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
itai&evoiLXi,
naiStuov,
nocttSturi,
naÊurt or 81,
nxiSsvoio,
'TixÊusrxt,
TraiSei/Tirai,
TTXIÊVOiTO,
&c.
&c.
&c.
&C.
Infin.
Part.
iraidiiisisbai,
itxx Sauo/tAEvor, -n, ov,
Imper/.
EWaiSci/O/ATlV, ETTiZlSElJot/, EWaiSfÊTO, &C.
Per/! Indie.
Dual,
Plur.
HcTtxlêu/xxi,
itE'jiai&Evfj.E'Sot,
TTE'ffaciSEi/ftES'aj
TtiHoLiîvtsctt,
HEitxiÊvaâv,
TreiraiÊva^s,
'TitTioti&ivTa.i,
WcTra/SEt/CT&ov,
wswaiSEuvrai,
Conj. and Op<. are wanting,
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
7ts7taiSivao,
BEitaiÊva^xt,
ntTmtitvti.inos,
niirxiStua'âi, &c.
Plusq.
ETtETrxiOEU/Jt.m,
ETrEICXiatVISO,
E'B'E'ffa/SEtiTO,
Dual,
EWEtfaiSElJ/XESoV,
EWEWai'Sei'ff&OV,
ETTEWaiOEl/JJnv,
Plur.
E'B'E'a'aiSEy/XE&a,
E'ffETrai'Êyff&E,
EltEHXtÊVtrO,
Fu<. Jnd.
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
7raiSEy9'7)iT0/M,ai, Trxio'euSriOolfJLW, XaiHsvSriOfoSa.i, nxtOEuBnao/JLEVOi.
-<4oj\ Ind.
Conj.
iratfeuSu,
Opt.
hx&ev'Sieiw,
Infin.
SxiÊu^rinxi,
Imper.
na.ibtu'St-nri,
Part.
WaiSEiz&Eirj
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
Fut. 3. Ind.
HEituihtvao^xi, "nETtoiibivo-oliMv, neTrxiHevaeaSai, itEiixioEvaoÊws.
Medium.
Opt.
Infin.
Part.
Fut. Ind.
iraioeuaottxriv,
<7lutêvaeaât,
irxihuoofxevoi.
^xÊvaofxxi,
Conj.
Opt.
Imper.
A or. Ind.
nxiÊuaai/xxi, nxiÊuaaif^m, vxi'.iivaxi.
EVaiSEtWuAW,
ri, nra-i, &C. aio, aero, &C. wxioeuoxoSco, &C.
au, aa.ro,
&c.
Infin.
Part.
TrxtOEveaoSai,
naio'Euaxn.ivos.
Verbal Adjectives, vaioEvrios, naifovror.
M 2
161
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Se/s;, (to sliake,) Med. (to be agitated.)

Activum.
Pres. auu, conj. uuoj, opt. oiioi/m, <xsiW, , &c.
imper. <ts~e, antral, &c. infin. trsieiv,
part, as'icuv, aeiovax, crsiov,
imperf. eaetov, perf ak<]HK.x, plusq. Iteiteixeiv, fut. aeluu.
aor. e<max, conj. os!<rai, opt. atlixifM, aelsxis, aeiaxi, &C.
imper. ueTo-ov, xru, &c. infin. attaxi,
part, isdixs, utiaxax, aHixv.
Passivum.
Pres. atlonxt, imperf. gasii/j.nn,
perf. ahsiay.xi, dual, aeieia/xeôv, plur. asaelaneSx,
eiauisxi,
aiatiuSov,
aeaetaê,
aissiarxi,
(ts'uekt&ov,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. alanso, aetretvSw, &c.
infin. aiatiaSxi, part. ffecTEU/xevor,
plusq. iatoiliiJ.w, dual, ete5ci'<t/xs&ov, plur. Easaetafji&x,
iaianao,
ialaiurSov,
e<ts'<tei<t&e,
iaiasiavo,
e<xe<jei<7&*)v,
3 pers. wanting,
fut. otiahviaoiJ.xi, aor. eseia^m, fut. 3. <XE<TEi'(TO/xai.
Medium.
Fut. atlaoftai, aor. iaaaxiAm, {imper. auoxi.)
Verbal adjectives anarios, gustos.
Aelirai, (to leave,) Med. poetical.

Activum.
Pres. XsIttoi, conj. Xi'iTta, opt. Xeiis-oiî, "Ktlnois, \elmi, &c.
imper. Xeitte, infin. 'Xeiweiv, part. "Kiinuv,
imperf. e\emov,
perf. (2.) \i\oivx, plusq. eteXotireiv,
fut. \tl<\>U,
aor. (2.) eXimv, conj. XiVw, opt. XiVoi/xi, imper. \!ire,
infin. htneTv, part. Xmuv, ovax, dv.
VERBS.
165
Passivum.
Pres. Xs/vojuai,
perf. Xe'Xsi^/Aai,
XeXeivJ/osi,
XeXemrxt, &c.
plusq. iktkttwnv, \{/o, wto, &c.
fut. XEKp&i<T(;/Aa<,
fut. 3. XsXeiij/o/Aai,
imperf. eXeitto/ai'iv,
conj. and opt. wanting,
imper. XeXeivJô, teXttyScu, &C.
infin. XXE?<p$ai, part. XEXsifA/AiW,
aor. tXEi'ipSw,
Medium.
Fut. XEiô/xai,
aor. |(2.) eXiwo/xw, conj. XAra/fMu, op<. XictoiVw,
imper. \mov, &c. pZ. X/weuê, &c.
infin. XiWEo&ai, par<. Xiwom-evos-.
Verbal adjectives, XeittWo*, Xeiwtw.
Tpdipu, (to write,) Med. (to accuse.)

Activum.
Pres. ypdtpu,
imperf. eypmfov,
perf. yiypatyct,
plusq. eysypdipeiv,
fut. ypd-âi,
aor. iypa^x, conj. ypd-^/co, opt. ypd-^zifAi, ypd^txis, yqd-^/ai, &C.
imper. yd-ôv,dTu, &c. infin. ypd-ât, part, ypdâs.
Passivum.
Pres. ypa<fo/jixi, imperf. eypa(p6(x.w,
perf. yiyqz/AiAat, yiypa^/at, yiygzirrcci, &C.
plusq. tytypdi^/AW, xj/o, otto, &C.
fut. I. and aor. 1. (iypd^hm,) seldom used,
fut. 2. ypa.tyriaoij.xt, aor. 2. kygdtym,
fut. 3. ytypdôpxt.
Medium.
Fut. ypd-ô/j.ai, aor. lypx^dyLr,v, (imper.) yga\J/ai.
Verbal adjectives, ypanrios, ypaitros.
166
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
a.q%u, (to take the lead, rule over,) Med. (to begin.)
Activum.
Pres. aq%a>, imperf. ypxov,
per/. (npxa>) and plusq. hardly ever occur,
fut. aqifii,
aor. riefcoi, conj. a($fi), opt. apôu/At, apifus, apât, &c,
Wiper, apiflt, dp^dru, &C.
infin. ap^cci, part. aas.
Passivum.
Pres.a.p%o\t,cn, imperf. wg%cW/v,
perf npyfMu, dual, vtpyn&oii, pi. ypyn&bo:,
np%ai,
%%Xov,
%px$ey
vpxrat,
%px$ov>
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. rtfip, %qxû> &cinfin. ripxâci, part. -hpyy.itos,
plusq. ypy/Mov, dual, mpyiA&ov, pi. ripy/AEâ,
wpx.ro,
^x^m>
3 pers. wanting,
fut. dpx^'naoiJLQLi,
aor. %px$m, conj. dpx$&> opt. dpx^m, imper. apx^ri,
infin. dpxww> port, dpx^h
fut. 3. wanting, (see 88. c. Obs. 2.)
Medium.
Fut. a^cpiMu,
aor. mp%dn,7\v, conj. aûât, opt. ap%al^m, imper. agjjoti, d&w, &c.
infin. api,aahxi, part, dpifl.ti.iws.
Verbal adjectives, (in the tense of the active and middle
voice3) dpxrioi, dpxros.
"Lxtvdtyi, (to equip.)

Activum.
Pres. axsvaû, imperf. eoxEvafyv,
perf. EixxEt/jwc*, conj. iaxtvixu, opt. eaxBuaKoiî, imper. not used.
VKRBS.
167
plusq. iaxivixetv,
infin. eaxsvxxivai, part, iaxevxxds,
fut. anLiva.au,
aor. iax.sua.aa., conj. axsuaau, opt. axevxaxifxt, an, axevxaga, &C.
imper. ox.eiia.aov,
infin. axtuxaai, part, axtviaxs.
Passivum.
Pres. axtvxCpy.a\,imperf. iaxtvatô^m,
per/, iaxtva.aii.ai, dual, ioxivxaixeSov, pi. saxfuxoiAsSa,
iaxivxaxi
haxtvxaSov,
iaxevaoSe,
iaxivxaroci,
ioxtvaobov,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. \axevxo~o, iaxtv<itdu,8ic.
infin. iaxeux&xt, part, iaxtvaaixhos,
plusq. iaxiviafxm, aao, ttaro, &c.
fut. axtvaa^vtaoixai,
aor. iaxivxoSwv,
fut. 3. (ioxtvxaon.ai,') does not occur.
Medium.
Fut. axtuzaofj.a.1,
aor. iaxevxaxivnv, conj. axivxauiut\, opt. axevxaxlfiDV,
imper. axevxaxt, axevxoctaSu, &c.
infin. oxevxaaaSai, part. axtvaaiiMms.
Verbal adjectives, axtuxarios, axeuaaros.
Ko/x/^w, (<o bring,) Med. (to receive.)

Activum.
Pres. xvyAXju,
imperf. ix&Lutyv,
perf. xex6[Mxa,
plusq. ixexouiixuv,
fut. xoy.iau,
fut. Att. xo/xiw, dual,
pi. xopuoDpwy,
xopcistV,
xo/AisTroy,
xo/xieIte,
xoiutT,
xomsTrov,
xopuowi, (y,)
opt. xo/Kioi/yii, ois, &c.
infin. xotuttv,
part, xopni/v, ovax, ovv, gen. oyyror,
aor. ixo/juax, conj. xvy.\aw, opt. xo/j.laattJ.i, xoy.laais, xoiiloai, &c.
imper. xo/xiaoy, infin. xo/xijom, part, xopioxs.
168
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Passivum.
Pres. x.o(ji.I%oix.cci,
imperf. exoîô/xw,
perf. xtx6fi.iofi.ai, (compare eoxevaofAxi,)
conj. and opt. wanting, imper. xexifuao, lo$u, &c.
infill. xexofA.lo^fai, part. xtxofA.iafA.iws,
plusq. txsxofA.iOfA.riv,
fut. XOfJUO7IOOfA.ai,
aor. ixoy-'iahm,
fut. 3. (xExo/Ai'cro/xai,) does not occur.
Medium.
.FW. xoi/.leo[ji.au,
fut. Att. XOfA.lOVfA.Oll, dual, XOfAAOUfA.t$OY, pi. X0fA.lOVfALt^QC,
xofA.it!
xo/Aietadoy,
xof/utioSt,
xofjuitTou,
xofjutiajov,
xofjuovvrou,
Opt. XOfA.lolfA.ftTI, XOpHOW, &c.
tn/Jn. xoptiErir&ai, pari. xofA.ioifA.tws,
aor. lxofA.iaaiA.iiTi, conj. xofA.iaajfA.ou, opt. xofA.ioaliA.rn, imper. x6fA.iaou,
infin. xofA,iaao~eu, part. xofA.iaafA.itos.
Verbal adjectives, xofA,iorios, xo(A,tor6s.
(puXdaau, (to guard,) Med. (to be on one's guard.)

Act.
Pres. <pu\cleea>,\
<fv\*rru, |
perf. iti($iv\ayjx.,
fut. <fvj\a%u,
imperf. ItpvXaaaovA
EtpuXarrov, j
plusq. ii7t<fu\dxttv
aor.
i<p6\aâ.
Pass.
Pres. ipvXxaaofA.ai,\
imperf. ttQvj\xaoLfA,m,\
<fukirrofA.ai,\
l<$u\xTT0fj.i)v,l
perf. 7re$Li\ayfA,ai, dual, lttipvKxyfA,tôv, pi. nt^vXayfAt^x,
9e<p6\fyu.
iZBlpi/jKayftov,
iriipv'Ka^^s,
nctyvXaxrai,
7re<pv\aôv,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting; imper. irttpuXxô, nttyv'Kajfiu, &c.
infin. in($v\aifixi, part. irt<pu\ayfA.iws,
1 Sae below, the Note to Obt. III. 3.
VERBS.
169
jdusq. Efl-EpuXaSyfAW, dual, lnt($uka.yp&ov,pl. lireQv\dynea,

ewetpuXaxTO,
fut. tyvka.yfi-naotJ.a.i,
aor. stpuXdyftm,
fut. 3. wslpi/Xizijo/xai.
li:zQvka.jfim,
3 pers. wanting,
Med.
Fut. $v\%of/.sut
aor. 6(piAai;a/x?)V.
Verbal adjectives, QvXotxrios, <pv\axrbs.
bpuoaa, (to dig.)

Act.
Pres. bpuoau, bgyrru,
imperf. aipvaaov, w^vrrov,
perf. opcli^w/jn, conj. bptapvyja, opt. ogaipvyptui, imper. not in use,
infin. oQtopvyjtvou, part, bû^vyus,
plusq. bpu^vy^tv,
fut. optima/,
aor. u>qu%a, conj. bquip), opt. oQu^xifju, bpvtpus, bqu$ai, 8cc.
imper. opvôv, infin. bpv%ai, part, bgvfyis.
Passivum.
Pres. ogiJ(Tjopiai,l
imperf. aipvaooiAm,^
Ogt/TTO/Aatl, J
<fy>l/TTO//.W,J
perf. iqu^vyfjLai, conj. and opt. wanting, imper. ogiwgui-o, bpu%6y$u,&ic.
infin. bûqvyâi, part, bpugvypirns,
plusq. bpcapvypm,
fut. 1. bqvjftriGOf/.ai, fut. 2. bpuyriaofjixi,
aor. 1. ajQvyfi'w,
aor.'Z. aiqvym,
bguyftrivxi, &C.
bquyvvxi, &C.
fut. 3. wanting, (see 88. c. Obs. 2.)
Med.
Fut. bpv%0(jwu,
aor. wpv^d/jim, conj. b^v%eapai, opt. opuêclf/.m, imper. opv%ai,
infin. bqu%xaxi, part. bqv^xfjatos.
Verbal adjectives, bpvxrios, bpvxros.
170
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
EXAMPLES OF THE VERBS INX(4V{.
'AyyiXKu, (to announce.)

Act.
conj. dyytKKu, opt. dyyi>XoifM, itnper. ayyeXXe,
infin. dyyeKkeiv, part. dyyiXkm.
Pres. ind.
iyyiWu,
itnper.
perf. ind.
conj. nyyiXxai, opt. ffyyiKwiî, imper. not in use,

infin. -ff^yikxhxi, part. wyyEXxcir,
plusq.
wyyeXxEiv,
fut. (2.) indie
ayythw,
dyytKiis,
ayyEX,
Dual,
dyy&tirov,
dyye\s7rtn,
opt.
sing, dyyikow,
dyy&ois,
dyyiKot,
pi. dyyt\<w^tv,
dyyeXeTrs,
dyyeXovai, (v,)
Dual,
pi. dyyikoitiw,
a-rysXoTrov,
dyyEKotre,
dyyt\oirnv,
dyys\o7ev,
or,
dyytkolw, oivti, ol-n,oi'rjTov, owrnv, oi'ti/xev, oinrs, ot-natzv,
see Obs. II. 3. to rvwrm,
infin. dyys\sitv.
part. &yys\uv, dyyiKovaa., dyytXovv, gen. dyyt\ovvros,
aor. 1. ind.
r,yytiXa,
conj. dyytlXu, opt. dyyiihtuiM, imper. ayystXov,

dyys'iKan,
dyyeiXai, &C.
infin. dyyiiKai,
part. dyytiKa.s>
aor. 2. ind.
rtyytkov
conj. iyyi\u, opt. dyyi"Ko\yn, imper. ayy&e,

infin. dyye\e7v, part. dyye\wv.
1 See about the use of this tense In this verb the Note to 101. Obi. 4.
VKRBS.
171
Pass,
(to be announced.)
conj. dyyiWaiAizi, opt. ayysXXoi'ptw, imper. ayyiWou,
infin. ayyE'XXeix&ai, part. dyyeXk6ix.evos ,
Pres. ind.
ayyiWofMu,
imperf.
rtyytWo/Am,
per/, ind.
viyyi\y.a.i,
ioyysXsai,
riyyeXrou,
Plusq.
rryytkWi,
7iyye\ao,
KyyeXTO,
Dual, r,yyi\iA.&ov,
pi. iiyys'X/iAE&a,
ijyyfX&ov,
SyysX&E,
vryytKâv,
3 pers. wanting,
conj. and opt. wanting,
imper. yiyyiKao, riyyeXSa, &C.
infin. r/yysX&aii, part. wyyEX/AEW,
Dual, oryyE'X/AS&ov,
ijyyEXSov,
nyyixSw,
pi. rnyyiKfJ-i^x,
riyy&Xhe,
3 pers. wanting,
fut. 1.
ayyEXSrjfTO/jicH, &c.
aor. 1. ind.
rr/ysK^m,
conj. dyyO&w, opt. ayyEX&Ei'w, imper. dyyi\bnrt,

infin. ayyEX&fjvai, part. ayyEX&eir,
fut. 2.
ayyeXwofAai, &c.
aor. 2. ind.
iryys'Xaiv,
conj. ayyikv, opt. dyyeXewv, imper. dyytkrfot,

infin. dyytknvou, part, dyytkiis,
fut. 3. wanting,
(see 99. Ois. 2.)
Med.
(to announce one's self.)
Fut. indie.
ayyEXouptai,
Dual, ayysXoi//XE&ov,
ayyeXT), or e7,
ayyEXeiV&ov,
ayyEXErrai,
dfcyyeXeiir&ov,
pi. ayyEXou/XE&a,
ayyEXEiff&E,
ayyfiXouvrai,
172
A. GREEK GRAMMAR.
Opt.
Sing. dyye\olfjt.w,
Dual, ayyeXoiptE&ov,
pi. ayyeXoi'/AS&i,
dyyt\oio,
uyyeXoXobov,
dyytkoToSt,
ayyEXoiro,
dyytXoloSw,
ayyeXoivTo,
infin. ayyeXe~o-&ai, part, dyytkouimias, w, ov,
aor. 1. ind.
wyyEiXa/xw,
conj. dyytWa/iMai, opt. dyyiiKa.iy.'ni, dyyt'tKoao, &C.

imper. ayytikqii, dru, &c.
infin. dyyelXaaSat, part. dyyn\dfj.ims,
aor. ind.
wyyaXdptOT,
conj. dyyiXuôti, opt. dyytkoifim, e'Xoio, &c.

imper. dyyskov,
infin. dyyikiaSai, part. ayyeXof/.svor.
Verbal Adjectives dyytkrios, dyytKros.

See in the Appendix an alphabetical list of Barytone Verbs,
partly for practice, and partly stating the particular use of each.
OBSERVATIONS TO ALL THE PARADIGMS.

I. Accent.
1. The basis of the theory of accents in verbs is that the accent stands as far
back as possible ; consequently in disyllables always on the first syllable,
tvtto/, Twirn, XnV, AtjVi,
and in trisyllables and polysyllables, whenever the nature of the final syllable
allows it, on the antepenultima,
T(JflTTfl/*iv, rv-rraviFi, Tirutpdfi, rvxre/ieti,
and the imper.
î/Xarn, îl/.^5v, <pt/Xu%ou,
(but xtiihtiu, QvXaTnn, &c. because of the long final syllable.) Hence disyllable
compounds throw the accent on the preposition, whenever the eud-syllable allows
it, for instance
2. When an accented augment is dropped, the accent in simple verbs always
falls on the next syllable, ex.gr. Ka\t, iiptuyi,/3Xi, Qtiyi . but in compounds, on
the prep., ex. gr. iiXi, KfoMn,tfcSaXi, rîeS*. And in the former instance,
monosyllables, the vowel of which is long, always take the circumflex, ex. gr.
/3.
3. There are seeming exceptions to this fundamental rule in instances grounded
on a contraction ; hence independently of the verba contractu in the following tenses
of the usual conjugation :
1.) The/u/. 2. and/W. Alt. of all kinds, ($ 95. 7-11.)
2.) The con;, of the aor. pan. ruipSu, rvxu, '. c.
1 These conjunctives, as well as those of the conjugation in /u, are actual contrac
tions, since the x of the indie, first became la, ir.s, &c. and this again , is. See
below, Obi. V. 14. compared with 107. Ob*. 11*1. 2.
VERBS.
173
3.) The temporal augment in trisyllabic compounds, (ex. gr. kiim*, >?,) see
84. Obi. 4.
4. But the following are real exceptions :
1.) The aor. 2. (to distinguish it more clearly from the pres. tense, see 96.
the Note to 04s. 3.) throws the accent in the following instances on the
termination :
a. In the infin. and fart. act. and infin. med. always
ruflrtiv2, tvxu*, TVztfSxt.
b. In the ting, of the imper. aor. 2. med. usually ex. gr.
yitw,
but in the pi. y'mvSt, XuSsrSi.
c. In the ting, of the imper. aor. 2. act. merely in the following verbs :
nVl, ixSi,
and according to the correct Attic pronunciation also
kxSi, tit.
The compound imper. follow again the general rule, \<rtX&$av, &mX&tt ttrih.
2.) The infin. and part, of the per/, past, are distinct from the rest of the
pats, conjugation even by their accent, which they always have on the
penultima,
rtrvftftirtt, 9ttrtittfiittt'
3.) All infin. in mi, (except the dialectic form funu, 04. V. 9. ) have the
accent on the penultima, rtrvQiteit, tvQSmcci, rmrnnu. See also the infin.
of the conjugation in fti.
4.) The infin. aor. 1. act. in at and the 3 pers. of the opt. act. in a and
at always keep the accent on the penultima, even when they are poly
syllables, ex. gr.
infin. QuZ.%cu, xaibtueat,
3 pert. opt. ^tt) fvkaêci, xu.thivca.?.
6.) All participlet in us and us have the acute accent on the last syllable,
Ttrvfilf, TufStit, ro*\tt, and in the conjugation in pi those in us, as, os, ft.
6.) Wherever the mate, of a part, has the accent, the other genders have
it also, without any regard but to the nature of the syllables, ifvXxttuv,
^jmtww, QoXdmt, Ti/Anrwv, npne-ouea, nfinffov, tltvQus, nruQuia, rtrvfos.
7-) In compounds the accent never can go farther back than the augment.
The few instances, in which there is only a short syllable after the aug
ment, keep the accent on the augment, when compounded, a/tr%e*, iv'trav.
But if the augment be dropped, the rule is as stated in Obs. 1. (t{V/3.)
II. Some particular Ionismt and Mticitmi.
1 . The Ionians make of the imper/. and of the two aor.
iterative! in .tun, pan. form -rui/tnt,
* The infin. aor. 2. act. might be classed among the seeming exceptions (2.)
because the Ionians form it like the fid. 2. in iu>, ex. gr. XmtUn for XaCiit, But the
case unquestionably is here the reverse. The accent was thrown on i<V from the
same motive as on > and 'ut&ki, and the Ionians, who were fond of vowels, let this
accentuation dwindle into a lengthened termination.
3 It is by this and the third peri. ( 12. Obi. 3 ) of the opt. never taking the cir
cumflex on the penultima, that the three similar forms of the aor. 1. are distin
guished, ex.gr.
infin. act.
3. opt. act.
imper. med.
tctt&wreu,
trm^tveai,
wsuhvfev.
But as the number of syllables, or the nature of the penultima, seldom allows this
accentuation, we generally can distinguish only two of these forms, and in such
verbs as tiJtto we cannot even distinguish any of the three. See, for instance,
below in rim, xeftiX", yfcifv.
174
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
for the purpose of denoting the repetition of an action. They are used only in the
indie, and commonly do not take the augment. In the verb tuttm they would look
thus,
ruvrifxtt, rvxrifxapm, from 'iruvrtt, <>f*xv,
rv^ttaxot, ruâffxounv, from irv^tt,
ruxtrxtt, ruinvxcur.v. from trvxer, ipw.
See also the Obs. to the contracted verbs, and to those in ui. There are some
remarkable Epic forms of this kind, which combine the vowel of the aor. 1. with
the characteristic of the pres. and imperf., îirnnn, xfinmuxi, ftlâsxit, iiamiarxt,
{Hymn. ApollAOZ.) Sea Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. $ 94. 4.
2. The plutq. (1. and 2.) act. in m with the Ionians made the first pert, m and
the third n or at, (iriri/fic, InriQu, or -u.) Hence the Attic contracted form of
thefirst pert, in n (from
ex. gr.4
Wivc&n for ImrevStt),
which form appears to have been the usual one among the old Attics. But the
tecend perton , (from uc,) and the third m, (from n,) before a vowel, for instance
xttrilSut for irtxtiBu, Aristoph. Nub. 1347. ir>f<, //. 691. (compare below the
third p. imperf. nrxtn, 105. Obs. 3.) were perhaps less common with the Attics ;
whatever has been stated about these forms, and about a third person n (for u,)
beside theplusq.nhw, (see below uhtt, t) 109. III.) rests solely on a few isolated passages,
and vague remarks of the ancient grammarians. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr.
$ 17- Obs. 14.
3. There was instead of the opt. act. in /u a collateral form in dm, tin, t'm,
pi. elv/iit, tlnrt, Vm, called the Attic form ; but it chiefly occurs only in contracted
verbs, ( 105.) and consequently also in the fut. circumfl. ex. gr. Iftix for l(u, of
the fut. ie*, Cyrop. 3, 1, 11. fattlxt, Soph. Aj. 313. In barytone verbs it occurs
merely in the per/. ; ex. gr. Tuptuydm, IktikuSu'm *.
4. Instead of the opt. aor. 1. act. in aipi, the Cohans had a form in in, (rityus,
ims, tut, &c.) of which we have given in .the paradigm three terminations,
sing, second pers. rtyua:, third rtyui, (.) for -tut -tu,
pi. third pers. rvûxv, for -am,
which are far more usual than the regular ones.
6. The form of the third pers. pi. of the imper. in -t, pass. -<ruv, is called the
Attic, because most usual with the Attics, though it occurs in other dialects. In
the act. form it always is like the gen. pi. of the part, of the same tense, excepting
the perf. (xuro&irurxv or xixc&tvraii,part, r: tsjSotwv.)
III.Second Pers. Sing. Pats.
1. The primitive termination of the second pert, of the pass, form rxi and , (see
87. the Table,) has maintained itself in the usual conjugation only in the perf.
and p/usq., and in the verbs in pu, ( 106. Obi. 2.) It is merely in the less polished
dialects that we find the second persons ruxritxi, irvrrtrt, imper. rotmrc, aor. 1 .
vied. Iri^/art,con), rurrnfeu, &CS
' 2. The Ionians rejected the of this old form, and thus made it */, , it, at,
which the common language again contracted into y, to, u, for instance,
* Except these instances, it is only the anomalous aor.
from 1%v, which
always has ffx9'1919 m the opt.
8 The second pers. pres. pass, of the contracted verbs appears to have been of
frequent occurrence in the popular language ; we find, for instance, in the New
Testament, xxvx&tai for xmîtm, commonly xau%x, the contraction of juutgifa, (see
below rifutw.)
VERBS.
175
/on.,
common,
Ion.,
common,
2. Pret. ind. rvirrtai, rirrri,
imper. ri/rrii,
rvrrau,
conj. rv^rrwt, rvvrry,
2. imperf. \tvxt16, Irtrrrtv,
2. aor. 1. med. Ion. irvêu, common Irvipai.
Thus the opt. utt was made , which continued to be the common form, not being
susceptible of contraction.But the is never dropped in the per/, and plusq,
excepting Inn. See the Anom. tiim.
8. The Attics had also this peculiarity, that they contracted the v, which came
from tai into u. This form, which has on that account been added everywhere in
the paradigm, was unquestionably the usual one in genuine Attic writers, excepting
the tragic poets, as well as in the popular language, and in the verbs (StuXt/tcu, t'ifttu,
and /ut. S\j,epx,, (see the Anom. .) the second per:
thus remained alone in common use, so that /Wx>< and c% can only be conjunc
tive!.
4. The Doric and Ionic dialects have instead of or m>, (ituVtiv, imper. rimu,)
see 28. 04s. 5.and the Epic poets may lengthen the i of the imper., and make
it u, but it occurs seldom, to. gr. t(ui for 1(u, from
(//. X. 611.)
IV,Ionic form of the third pert. pi.
pass, in arott, ttro.
1. In the third pert. pi. of both the indie, and opt. pats., but never in the eon;'.,
the Ionians changed the into *, and consequently had, for instance,
opt. Tovrtlar* for rvirrtitrs,
perf. *rt*enhvarai for Xivra.'ibxmru.i,
MiKklartti for %'ixXtvrett,
which form was sometimes imitated by the Attic poets, for the sake of the metre.
See also below the verbs in 'm and .
2. The Ionians sometimes do the same with the termination , changing the i
into >, ex. gr.
\$m\'w for i/WxT.
But orreu, (rv^mvrai, rvôtreti, &c.) and the termination of the conj. urrui, always
remain unchanged.
3. The third pert. pi. perf. and plutq. past, may by means of this Ionism be thus
formed, (and even Attic prose-writers, as Thuc. and Plato, do it sometimes,) when
the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, (see o 98. 2. with Obi. 2.) for instance,
TlrvQeirai, for r^ra<,
ieriXxTM,
Kurca,
from tmtk. rirru, rrlxXti, and the like.In airixsrw, (Ion. for iflxxrxi, see the
Anom. Ut'uftah) the characteristic of the verb is retained unchanged instead of
4. The lingual letters appear again iu lieu of the e, which is dropped before vreci,
res, for instance of <ru'3, v'ururitm,
3 pert. pi. TitrtiittTcci for xi<r%i*rm,
and of itii. SîMpc*
lir.'/'.'azrai, (Hom.) for iffffljyr*',
(where the diphthong is made short on account of the Attic redupl. o 85. 2.) and
with the J, which is concealed in the , being restored, ( 92. 8.)
XtMoathtLTtu, xixaiff&arai, from ffxtvetfa,
6. We find in editions of Homer verbs formed in this manner, which have neither
3 nor ? in the pret. 'Effdiarai, (from fxita, if(*r/uii, 101. Obt. 8. b.) may, how
176
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ever, be derived from a collateral form PAZfl, from which firrari occurs in Homer.
The others cannot be safely relied on in grammar*.
V.Miscellaneous Remarks.
1. Some unpolished dialects, and especially the Alexandrian, (1. Obs. 10.) gave
to the third peri, pi., in the historical tenses, and the opt., the termination cat :
hence we frequently meet, particularly in the Greek translation of the Old Testamerit, with forms like ifaltocat, X^vyocat, XuTurat, (for i?o:nw. tpvytt, Ai/owiv,) &c.
2. The Dorians and the Poets, on the contrary, have in some cases a bare >, with
a short vowel instead of cat, the termination of the third pert. pi. This occurs
especially in the aor.
third pen. pi. irvQ (Tiri>, for -war.
(but never r,t, for with respect to Homer's uiatBtit see fua'nu in the list of Attorn.
Verbs.) The other instances belong to the conjugation in ui.
3. The same unpolished dialects (1) by a still stronger anomaly gave to the third
pers.pl. of the per/, act the (historical) termination at: hence in the New Testament
tytuxav and
in the Batrachom. 178. Usyat. See about the interchange with
the third peri, of the dual in a narrative, ex. gr. II. a. 364. imiumt, instead of -nr,
87. Obi. 5.
4. The third pi. of the principal tenses has commonly iti instead of at or in
the Doric dialect, as we remarked 87- Obi. 3. explaining by it the long vowel before
the c in the usual form : thus,
rvxritrt, Tiriipatn, for rvirrtva, rirvfacit,
conj. vvTTvtm, for rvtrmcit,
fut. 2. ftitUtTty /imvtri, for (uitUvci,) fiitwcn.
<
This form does not take the XftX%vrT*{t~Another Dorism is rvtrnui for tuttiwi.
5. Even in the terminations euca and as, Ara, of the participle, the long vowel
comes from the omission of t or , which appears from the gen. mate. The Dorians
always have and ai in its stead :
rvTreica, for Tvrrowa,
aor, 2. ijtZoita 7, for XaZoZca,
Tu^/ai; rvâica, for rvipaf, ara.
C. The Epic poets allow themselves to make the accented long in the oblique
cases of the part. per/. ; for instance, riTfiyiraf for -crat. See about the Doric
part. per/, in m, coca, } 111.
7- The Dorians also introduced their A into the terminations Xrurrlfiat, Xrirv/ifiat
rum'ifiat, &c. for -fi.r,t, and, (though less frequently, and only in the later Dorisms,)
into the termination of the aor. pass., ex. gr. Xrotrat, (Theocr. 4, 53.)
8. Thefirst pert. pi. act. in pttt is in the Doric dialect fin, (<ri*rtftii, \riyfm/uii)
and thefirst pers. dual and pi. pass./uSa, piSit, is with the Dorians and Poets
(ttrHit, with an c inserted :
TV*T0/&tc3x, TVTTOUtcSot.
9. The infin. in in and tat had, in the old language and the dialects, the form of
fatai and uit, thus,
Tvirriuitat, rvxrifist, for vutfvur,
riTvipifjiitai, TimQifitt, for nrupXtat,
vvxriuttaiy rti^rr,fitt, for rwnftat,
' II. f.637- axtixiiarai from ax^î/iai, (see Anom. anax'tp,) and Od. n. 86. IXtiXaixri from \\au, \y.rXapMi, both with doubtful various readings. See Buttm. Complete
Gr.Gr. $ 98. Obt. 18.
' Not teMca, because there is here no contraction. See J 13. Obt, 13. Not*.
VERBS.
177
and sometimes they were syncopated, tipim.(See also below the Contracted Verbs
and the Verbs in pi.)
10. But the Dorians in particular make the infin., instead of in1 or , without
either removing the acute accent backwards, or changing it ; Tor instance, /ntisiu,
tvitt, kiThit, for pigjîn, tuSm, Atliuv, aor. 2. ayxyit for etyetyiTvXa*irlv ôr X^'V*
(not x*J(m.)
11. We also sometimes find in Doric writers the second pers. pres. act. if instead
of us, likewise without any change in the accent ; ex. gr. ipixyts for ipikyut,
Theocr.
12. The old language had in the second pers. act. instead of s,
the final syllable r9,
which in Homer and other Poets is frequently annexed to the conjunctive, and less
frequently to the opt. ; er.gr. iSixwSx for iSiXitt, nXmlurU* for kXm'uh, but which
has maintained itself in the common language only in a few anomalous verbs, (see
below, 108. 109. tip), dpi, <ptip), and 73.)
13. The three terminations, which are considered as peculiarities of the conjuga
tion in fu : 1 sing, pi, 3 sing, si, imper. Si, probably belonged to the verb itself in
the most ancient language. Hence the imper. 9/ not only in the aor. pais., but
also in the syncopated per/. (C) 1 10.) The first pers. pi has maintained itself in the
usual conjugation only in the opt., but the oldest Epic poets had it also in the con
junctive, ex. gr.
IMSffU, kyiympt, for Vasai, ttyayu.
Lastly, the third pers. sing, ci or is also very usual in Epic poetry in the conj., ex. gr.
ri/XTyrn, i%*fft, for tihttii, IxV'
(See about the indie, mi instead of the usual form, J 106. Obi. 10.)
14. The circumnexed forms are either resolved or lengthened by the Ionians, viz.
the infin. aor. 2. act. in is im, as Quyitir for Quyuv from i$uym, (see the Note to Obs.
1. 4.) and the conj. of the two aor. pass. is iu, Epic tin, (see the Note to Ols.
I. 3.) thus:
conj. aor. 1. pass. ilftS'i*, for littSZ, (from iJ!9>;,)
Conj. aor. 2. pass. Twi*i, Kpic vwri'm, for rwr*.
In the persons of this conj., which end in , the Epics sometimes lengthen the
preceding i in this manner, and sometimes double it,(,) for instance, (liiprs, iupu,
iaptm,") ietpt'tr,;, $etpur., Ii. y. 436. %. 246. (Irao'igv, ffwru, ffuTlla,) f&Tnri, t. 27>
Compare below, the dialect forms of the verbs in pi, which must be here considered
as a basis
15. The conj. in Epic poetry sometimes loses its long vowel, and takes s and ! for
i and ii, ex. gr. Upt>, let us go, (see below dpi, conj. ?,) iyilftpit, for -*pn, {II. (3. 440.)
Xfuvrtpu for conj. aor. 1. Ifitetpii, (a. 141.) ipupirai for fir&t, (Qd. n. 41.) jwr/XAir*/,
(3. 6/2.) See also tiUpn under oTia, ( 109. III. 6.) It occurs most frequently in
the conj. aor. pass., for instance ietptltpir, iapu'm'.
" There is a third reading in the quoted passages, (//. y. 436. x- 246.) and others,
where it clearly is the conj., viz. iapiim, iapiin, without the iota subscriptum. See
about it, the Note to J 107. Olis. IV. 9.
* This has been attempted to be considered a mere deviation from syntax, as if
it were the indie, instead of the conj. But as this interchange occurs only where
the metre does not allow the conj., it is obvious that, whilst the language was not
settled, pronunciation came to the assistance of the metre. And this view of the
matter is placed beyond all contradiction by instances, where there is no indie.
similar to the abbreviated conj. This is the case with tlt+pn, Sue/ft, (for Suyur,)
jV<>, and all conjunctives of the aor. pass. We cannot presuppose in Homer an
indie, ilia, J know, Sslu, I put, Ii, I go, for else these forms would as readily occur
as real indie, and be met with also in the other persons, (iiJ, itiwri, &c. with the
signification to know,) which, however, is not the fact.
178
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
1. The rules, which we have just given, shew merely the man
ner, in which the different tenses are formed. But no language
affords fixed rules to know which formation each particular verb
follows, when there is a diversity of formations possible. A great
part of this is matter of memory, and just as we are obliged in
Latin to remember the per/, and supinum of every verb, especially
of the third conjugation, we must in Greek remember in each
verb every one of the tenses, of which we have been hitherto
treating in particular Sections.
2. It is of the most material importance to know whether the
aor. 2. act., the perf. 2., and the aor. 2. jwss. of a given verb are in
use. These tenses are certainly related to each other in form ;
but it does not follow, (as has frequently been observed,) that a
verb, which has one of these tenses, has also the others. On the
contrary we have seen that the aor. 2. act. and pass, seldom
occur together in one verb. The lexicon, or the lists in the
Appendix, must be diligently consulted. Actual instances must
have been met with of each of these tenses, which is a very un
common occurrence, or it may safely be assumed that the verb
barely has the other tenses, viz. the aor. I. act., perf. 1., and aor.
1, pass1.
3. It may be considered as an invariable rule that all trisyllabic
and polysyllabic derivative verbs, which end in
at2,a>,
echaif vvu, evu, 6u, dui, iu,
from
from
from
from
OKiVD,
from
from
from
from
VO(JLOS,
TtaTs,
Tl/AMJ
have only
the aor. 1. act., perf. 1. (in xa,) and aor. 1. pass.
Obs.\. Some of these terminations, however, are not derivative in some verbs,
that is to say, not derived from a nounmbtt., or adj., but mere lengthened forms of a
1 Exactly as in English the greatest number of verbs by far have ed, in the impetf. and part, pail, (/ love, loved, have loved,) and the smallest number have the
monosyllabic imperf. and a pari, past differing from it, (Isee, taw, have seen.) And
in German most verbs have the imperf. te, and the part, past t, (' ich sage, ich tagte,
ich habe gesagt,') and comparatively few a monosyllabic imperf. and thepor/.n, ('i'eA
trage, ich trug, ich habe getragen' ;) the first form alone is used in German for deri
vative verbs, which in Greek have also merely the aor. 1. &c.
VERBS.
simple radical pret. tense, and thereby rendered anomalous. (See 92.) These
verbs may make a second aor. from this simple form, ex. gr. iXiraim from AAIT1J
HXim, Ictfiiu from AEM'l iHpm : they are all stated in the list of Anomalous f-'erbsOb$. 2. Hither belong also those derivative verbs, which, according to 119. 4.
end in rru, rru, XX, &c. and are derived from nominatives. The verb ikXatrm is
the only one of these verbs, which has an aor. 2. past. (fiXkiyw.)
105.Conjugation of Verbs contracted.
1. The Greek verbs in koi, da, and bu, conform in the main to
the rules stated and examples given, and in the Section on the
formation of the tenses we have attended to their peculiarities.
But in the pres. tense and imperf., act., and pass., when the
vowels at, , and o happen to stand immediately before the vowels
of the termination, (and partly remain unchanged iu the Ionic
dialect, see below, Obs. 1.) they undergo in both the Attic and
the common language a contraction.
2. This contraction follows the general rules of 28. excepting
some terminations in the verbs in bu. Instead of contracting oei
into ou, and ori into a, according to the general rule, the i of the
second and third person predominates, and the final syllables oeis
and oris are contracted into on, and osi and oy into o:. Thus
Second pers. indie, act. iMoSben, }
-
a,
conj.
îffSorir,
J> contr. /xiuJoir,
Third pers. indie, act. /xkj&oei, )
. _
conj.
HiO-Sori,
a..
J> contr. untjoi,
^ '
and in the same way
Second pers. indie, and
conj. pass. nio-Sbr,, contr. fMoSoT,
and as ooi is likewise contracted into o, three moods, viz. the
indie, conj., and opt. of the act. voice become perfectly like
in these two persons. The infin. bw is correctly contracted :
fAKT&osiy, contr. (Aiajovv.
3. The whole indie, and cory. ac<. and pass, of the verbs in dai,
are also perfectly similar, being contracted according to the gene
ral rule, viz. ae and an into at, ati and yi into jt, and ao as well
as aou and aw into w.
N 2
as o
o w M PI H n
/AlO'S'OUTOy, /Alf SoUTOV, /xif ijoD/kCEy, (w.kt&o5te,
/Xitf&oy ,
/e
hire,)
(/o
for
ow<
(*ioyen.
,&o yTOj',
jxifyen.
&ouyror.
yen.
ri xaovrot,
T\y.uvros,
yen.
puuôoiy,
&oov,
Sooveay
(y,)
/îf &o yf i,
(XKxSoETDy, JAKT&OETOy, (/UtSo /xev, jL*l<7&OETE,
fx-iaiJoeis,
Ti/!Aa TiptSroy,
rov,
fX4<T&0Ely,
Tifjuars,
Ti/Ajiy,
honor,)
(to
ocoy,
ano/xvauway,
rusee,
wy,
ifZ-uv,
Activum.
Prisons.
(v,)
Ti/xaot/ir ,
1S173.eep.
Ti/xaerov, TiptaSETOV, Tipcaopctv, TI/X0(ETE,
Tt/JLsLsti, TlfJ-OLtl,
aroiEiroy,
TtfAaEiy,
woiov/aev,
woieite,
yen.
iroieovTor,
9TOIEIV,
jfe/l.
woioy ror,
do,
(to
make,)
uttov,
moivaia,
(v,)
iroieavai,
TlOlisTOV, woie'erov,
woiitre,
itoikis,
noitu,
Sing.
Indie.
Dual,
Plur.
contr.
In
fin.
Part,
< n ta csCD
fj,taSuai,
(y.)
fj.taSa>,
fLtaburov, fj.taSurov, fj.iahSjfj.iv, fj-taSwre,
fj-taho,ti* fxtaSoT,
puaSotTov, fjuaSolmv, fj.taSo7fi.ev, fjuaSoTre,
fMaSoifl ,
fuaSoTs, tuaSoT,
fMaSoTev,
"'
(oiWay.)
-own,
oitijacV,
otriTWV,
Attic,
or
o'm,,
foins
j,taSolv)v, -OITJTOy,
2
"Seep.
179.
S179.3.p.
ee,
(v,)
fuaSiuat,
pU(T&OT]T0y, /Ajf &onToy, fi.tcsSoaiJ.zv, fMoSonrt,
/ANX&OYir,
fxtaSo trov, fjnaSo irvtv, fJ.toSoOlfJ.iV,
fj,taSo tfj.t,
fitoSo tn, fMoSoonv,
fj,taS6ais, puaSoot,
(y,)
nixwot,
rtyJirov, Tipiaroy, rtfj.S>fJAv, Ttft,xre,
TlfJ.?S,
Ttflu",
riftaiTOv, rtfj,u>mv, rtfi.ufj.tv, rtfj-urs, rtfJ,5liV,
TltujifU, rtfj.as,
Ttfif-,
((jrâv.)
-amn,
amfi.it, See
Ob*.
below,
this
form.
about
Attic
4.
rtfj-aiv ,
cyfl,
j4fitc,
or awir,
-at rov,
(y,)
rtfiiwat,
Ti/xawirov, TI/XalTOV, rtfA.iwfjt.ev, rtfiAmt,
npMCOITOV, Ti/xaoir iv, TJ/AiOI/XEy, TI/AOITE, TI/AIXOIEV,
Tl/XaOI/lAI,
rtfji ots, TtfLOLOl,
(v,)
nsotwat,
T 0l)TOV,
W01OIT0V, WO(0THV,
notufJAV,
sroiijte,
woioir, vcuot,
9roi<5,
owi7f)JT.e,v,
-oio'inTiomyv, (oinuav.)
oWis,
ntotolm,
am,
or
(v,)
noteaiat,
notimrov, itotinrov, notiufi&v,
-xoteai, noieys,
itoieotfi.
noti-n ,
notion,
TTOIeV),
Sing.
voi oirov, J -OJcOlTDV, <3XOliotfJ.eV, not otre,

notioni,
2T0IE01,
Dual,
Plur.
Sing.
Opt.
Dual,
Plur.
pnu&Or
o Tft/i av,
p.Infin.
/tx(Ej/.xina&farxmEWai, Pari.
&c.
iteif,
(U.ia&o2TOV, E/AKX&OI/T IV, /xi(;&o5piEv,
pmr&ouraiv,
ftNT&OyTE,
EpWf &Ol/V, iyuia'bovs.
EU<T&OyT, E/il'f &OUV.
/xi'irS'oy,
/xifOr&OEro/iTav,
/XKT&odvTO/Vj
jIAKT&OETOV, j(il(T&OE'T<UV,
E/AICTJOErOV, E/AKJ&OEry/V, E/XKT&0 / .EV, EpKd&OETE,
EpMf &O V, E/xia'9'OEr, EpUJ&QE,
jIAi(T&OEr,
(lua&i a i,
in
following
The
four
the
like
conjugated
tensessame
aretunru.
>(<r&o ,
orriy-aruitrm,
&c
Part.
xus,
TEInfin.
Tl/*7)KE'vai,
Tl/CAfUVTO/V,
ETiptarov, ETI/XOSTW, ETi/AlZ/LtEVj Iny-art, ETl'/X.t (Vj
Tj/x.otrai, TI/U.5T0V, TIptS TCUV, 1TI/XatTE,
OrTif as-raieav,
TI/HOS VTt l',
EnptaETOv, etihaose't ivj irifjuiofisy, ETfltOCETE,

ETifAStOV,
Tt/XaBTOI, rifJt.isrov, TlfJLatT VTI,

ETl'/lAaOV, ETIplaEf, STi/ME ,
ETETIJIAWEIV,
TETIptWaj
Tl/Jirta ), iTt/Mria ,
Part.
&c.xus,
naiOrslrua t,
Infin.
it itwrpilvou,
fl-OIEITiUV,
woiEi'ra;, flTOISlTOV,
sroi'si,
eVoiOI/V, EWOIElf, EWOiEl,
et oieTtov, EWOIEl'mv, ETtOl,OVfASV EWOIEITE,

BTrolavv,
ewo/eov, ET OIE f, eWee,
ewme'etov, eVoIE T IV, E9rO<EO/XEV, ewoie'ete,

eVoi'eoy,
itooritirca av,
WoiEovnwy,
EftWOI^XEIV,
aroiEe'ify, jrotisirov, 5J-0IE TOIV, T OiE TE,
T OIE ,
Sing.
Imper.
Dual,
Plur.
Sing.
vperf.
Dual,
Plur.
Plusq.FutA.
1.
\Aot:
tJ.ioSavLi.ai,
fJ.lAovAe,
ixiAovt.oi,
puAwfj.Aci,
puAuAs, /JuAuvrai,
jjuAoi*,
fj.iAo7*,
fj.iaboifj.Aov
fJuA&OLCXt,
IXiAuTai, /xiaS'ci/xaS'o*,
fj.fAwfj.ai,
fJuAisAlV,
(AlAilTXl,
/J-lAogAxi, IxiAo ij.svos,
/Al T&06(T&E,
fJ.lAiufJ I.i,
(juoAiri,
(JuAou(AEOV,
(uAimAov,fj.iAonAov, fj.nhouLi.Aa, (juAvnAt, fJA oUVTXi,
TifJ.UfJ.AoV,
TlfJ.xAov, TlfJ.xA,oV Tifj.ufj.Aa, Tifj.aAs, TlfJ.WVTXI,
TlfJ.XULI.AoV,
TlfJ-XTlAoV, TlfJ.Xr)O0V, Tifj.xufj.Ax, TlfJ.X7>Ae, rifj.xuvratf
vrotufj-Aov,
WotriAov, VOiyAov, Hoiufj.Ax, noiviAt, VOiUVTXIj
(JLlAoTiTXi,
fuAorrt,
179.
3.
Sp.
ee
TlfJ.UfJjAoV,
T\fj.ufi.ai,
Tifj.ara.1,
TifAaAov, TifjJxAov, TlfJ.UfJ.Act, Tifj.xAe,
TtfixoAxi, rifj.difJt.evof,
Tifj.,ufj.ai
Tifjjjt,
Ttfjuarxi,
Tt/j.p,
Pas ivum. Prwsens.

Tl/J.XOfJ,Aov,
TifjA.ofj.xi,
TtfJ.XSTXi,
TI(J,xeAov, TlfJLXtAoV, Tifj.xifj.Ax, Tifj.acAs, TifjLaovTa ,
TlfJLasAxi, Tifj.a6fj.svos,
rifjL3.afj.ai,
TlfJ,X7ITai,
TroitTAov, vrot tAov, 'xoiodfj.Ax, TlOlSlAs, TIOl V TtX ,
nonTAxi, noi ufj.evoi,
hoiul xl,
JtoiriTxi,
Tifj,xrt,
sT,
orroT),
TlOi VLJ.Xi,
3FOI01/ XE&OV,
xoieitxi,
Koirt,
in,
oraroiEip,
noi oy.aL,
ironi/jiAov,
VOl iTal,
ItoiesAxt, irotiofj.evos,
voi eAov, BothAov, itoitofjizha, 9T0IE<J&E, voi ovTai,
S179.
eep.
7COlid>fJ.AoV,
noi viAov, noi nAov, kolzui jlAx, noi -nAe, HOi lUVTXi,
Dual,
Plur.
ZOlSMfJLat,
iroi rt,
Sing.
Indie.
Dual,
Part.
Plur.
Infin.
Sing.
Cory.
lx.iabolfj.Yiv,
|jr
o fAiobMouabu,
> fjutabov,
vabua v,
fx.Otabovabuv, fx.ig
abovabsf fjnabog
fj5
.iabovabuv,
fX.tabolfj.ibov,
fjuabolo, /XIJ&oItO,1
fi aboXa,bov fx,tabolabYiv, fx.iabolfj.tba, fj.iaboltobe,
fX.iabouabov,
Efx.taboufj.ebov,
EfX.taboVfX.YIV,
Efj.iabovTO,
fj-iaboivTO,
Ifjuabouabov, Efx-tabouabYiVj Efx.iabovfx.eba, Efx.iabovabE,
E/JLtaboilVTO.
Efx.tabov,
fx,taorboeabua v,
fj.tabo tfx.ibov,
fx.iabo lfj.Yiv,
fitabo to, fjnabo iTo,
ft abo tabov, fj.tabo ia,bYiv ftAdbo lfj.tba, fx,iab6otabe, fX.iaboOiVTO,
fx.iaboeabu, fx.iab6iabov,
fxiaboeabuv,
fx.taboiabuv, fx.taboeabe,
ifX-iaboETO,
TI/JLCOfAEboV,
Tt/JLUTO,
Tifj,dabu,a v Ttfx,iabuv,
TlfX-uaboV, Tt/jLcoabviv, Tifj.cofj.eba, TtfjMabe,
TifMatbuv,
Ttfx.dabu, Tiftavbov, Tifx.dabe,
TlfJ.S>VTO,
ETlfJ.ufJ.ib0V,
ETifj.a bov, ETifj,a br,v, ETifj.ufj.eba, ETifAa be, ETiflUIVTO.
ETtjJ.a6jJ.EboV,
ETifx-deabov, ETtj ,a(abnv, ETtfX.a6fX.Ebcf, ETifx-aEabs, ETlfXIXOVTO,
EltOtOVfJ.ebov,
ET Oietabov, ETCOtEtabYiV, EHOtovfx,eba, EironXabe,
ETlfJ.UfJ.fiV,
ETIfJLXTO,
ETlfX.U,
TlfX.U,
TlfJ.010,
efx-taboeabs, efx.iabo vTo,
Efx,tab6ov,
fx.tab6ou,
Tl X.UfJ.Vi ,
EfJ.ldbo6fJ.EboV, Efj,tab6eabov, ELuaboiabYiv, efj.iabo6fx.eba,
EfJ.lO-boOfJ.YiV,
Tt/xOraiabua v,
Tifx.aolfx.ebov,
Tifx.aoifj,Yiv,
TlfxioiTO,
TifX,doiabov, TlfX.!toiabYiV, Tifj.aoliJ.iba., TlfX-doiabi,
Ti/x iabuv,
Tt/xatabov, Ttfx.xiabuv, Ti/jLaeabs,
nfxaoivro,
ETIlJ.aOtJ.YiV,
ETifX.%OV, ETlfX.aETO,
TI/ AOt /,
T!otolfx.Ebov,
iroioio, ZOIoTtO,
WOlEIT&OKTfltV,
notoTabov, irotolabYtv, vototfAiba, uoto'iabe,
noio'tvTo,
eicot vfx.Yiv,
^roiEr<;&ov, WOIEIJ&WV, woiEi rS'e,
inotitTo,
E1S01 V T0.
inotov,
WOI6EOr'<T&iU<TaV,
noieoifxebov,
1tOliOlfX.YiV,
asoteoio, 9roOITO,
9TCJJI<t3'OV, notioiabYiv, 'XOlEoljX.ibx,
WOlE 'f ^Ci/j woie'ej&ov, fl'OfE 'f Sft'V,

W91E01VT0,
note abuv,
W>ie'e<t&e,
EirOtEO/XE&OV, ETrOIEW&OV, EWOlE tr&TlV, EWOIEOpt-E&a,
Esroi0/u,nv,
EBWoZ/, et oie'eto,
'B OIe'(t9'E,' EVQtEOVTO,
VERBS.
185
The rest of the tenses suffer no contraction. We give, how

ever, the complete conjugation of the perf. and plusq. pass, to
render the analogy with the same tenses of vouSevw more evident.
Indie. Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
<neitoii\fj.ai,
ntnolvKJai,
neTfowTM,
6woiM/x,E&oy,
TtwoirttiSov,
weiroiwSov,
nenm-nij.t^ci,
nrtitoi-n&e,
wewoiwrati,
Perf.
teti/miaczij
rtr'nj.i\<sa\,
nrlfj.r\rat,
TiTifA-niAeSov,
tetiVmct&ov,
teti'/xjkt&ov,
TtTifj.v\fj.&a,
rtTifAwSi,
rtrlfj.riyrai,
TSTl(J.riaSat,
Infin.
nsiroirioSdi,
TETIjtMl/XE'yOfj
Part.
itsitoii\y.iios,
Conj. and opt. wanting, See the few verbs,
them, 88. 6. Obs. 9.
TSTifjmao,
Imper. sing.
TtTifj.i\aSu, &c.
nsnowaSai, &c.
Plusq.
sTSTtfj.r]fJ.rl\i,
smuoi-nfrnv,
Sing.
iTSTifJ-WO,
snsnol-nao,
IrtrliJ-nro,
STiTifJ.7lfJ.sSoy,
sirsilovriiJ.sSov,
Dual,
STSTIfJ/TiaSoU,
eVcWOI'WIT&OV,
ETETlpf)<X$T)V,
sirsirotrioSnv,
E'TSTI/lX7)/XE&a,
sTrs?roiy}fj.sSa,
Plur.
ETcT/A7)5&E,
litsiloiriaSs,
etet//xt)vto,
invnoiriiTO,
Fh<. 1.
,4 or. 1. EVoiri&i'iv,
fW. 3. WEW0i7)(T0/[X.a;i,
JW. 1.
Aor. 1.
OTOinaofj.ai,
inoinaafJ-W,
TifJ.riSr\aofJ.ai,
e'ti/atiSw,
Ttrnj.rii3oiJ.oii,
Medium*,
nix.TtaoiJ.ai,
sTifj.Daxfj.m,
Verbal Adjectives.
TtfJ.miO!}
notnrsos,
rtfrnros,
<ttWt\TQS,
fj.sfj.laSaiiJ.ai,
fj.z/j.to$uaat,
fj,sfj,laa>TXi,
fJ.SfJ.iaSufJ.tSoi,
fj.sfj.iaSuaSov,
fJ-SfXiaSuaSoV,
fj.synaStifj.sSa,
fj.Sfj.laSa>aSs,
fj.sfj.iaSa/vTat,
fj.sfj,iaSwoSai,
fj.sfj.iaSa>fj,hos.
which can form
fj.sfj.taSaiao,
fj.SfJ.iaSaiaSu, &C.
sfJ.ifJ.iaSufJ.riv,
sfj.sfj,'toSuao,
sfJ-sfJ-loSuTO,
sfJ.siJ.iaSufj.sSov,
sfj.sfj.!aSuoSov,
sfJ.s/j.iaSuaSr)v,
sfJ.sfj.taSufj.sSa,
S/J.S/J.taSuaSs,
sfj.sfj.iaSuvTo,
sfj.taSuSnv,
fj.sfj.taSuaofj.at,
fj.iaScuoofj.ai,
efj.taSuadjj.nv.
fMoSuTSOf,
(J.taSuTOS.
9iuttu, to make for one's telf; n/uirfxi, to honor, (like the ac/.) (iirhi<r6xi, to
hire, take to hire.
186
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 1. It was laid down in ancient Grammars without any limitation, that the
resolved form of contracted verbs was Ionic. This conjugation may more correctly
he styled the old or fundamental form, hut can only with respect to the verb3 in m
be strictly called Ionic, that is to say, that form of conjugation, which was emploved
by all Ionic writers, and by the later Ionic prose-writers exclusively. Epic poets, on
the contrary, often made use of the contracted form, and sometimes only preferred
the lengthened im to in, ex. gr. ixniv, v\uur, vuxuitrKt, &c.The resolved form of
the verbs in j can only so far be called Ionic, as Epic poets made use of it on but
few occasions, ex. gr. io^tiu, rrtivxavra, i/xuriaviriv, &c. The verbs in tin are found
resolved only in theJtrsl person ; they else generally occur contracted or lengthened
in a way peculiar to the Epic poets, (see below.) The verbs in in and in never are
used in Ionic prose, but either contracted, as in Herod.
Itixm,
luwra,
/3iJ for fiiim, i*Xu, i^^SsJyrs, 1tiwti, &c. or with the peculiar deviations in point
of formation and contraction, stated below, Obs. 7. etc.
Obs. 2. In the Attic and common language none of the contractions of this con
jugation were ever neglected, not even in Attic poetry, (that is to say, in the
dramatic senary.) Little words in s, of which the pres. act. is disyllabic in the
resolved form like
are alone excepted. They only admit the contraction ,
ex. gr. tju, ?t;s;, mT> : they are resolved in all their other forms, ex. gr. fin, x'upxi,
H'lt/tit, s>iv<, <r>iy, &c. excepting however, ,", (to tie,) ex. gr. ri JE, tu tsSin,
Plato Crat. () imlnr, Aristoph. Plut. 589, iaiiuifuu, See. But hit, (to lack,) makes
TO YlOV, "hitfiOLt, &C
Obs. 3. The third pen. sing, impcrf. takes the moveable in the reBolved form,
(Homer, i'ût, Unit.) but not in the contracted one. Yet Homer once has wxm of
irxin. (Compare the plusq. Obs. II. 2. to 103.)
Oil. 4. The form known by the name of the dttic opt., peculiar to contracted
verbs,(see Obs. II. 3. to 103.) has been given atlength in the paradigm, p. 181. that
its analogy may be thoroughly understood. It must, however, not be forgotten that
the Attic language, guided merely by euphony and clearness, employed parts of
both forms ; especially
1.) the pi. of the Att. opt. was little used, (particularly of the verbs in u> and
in.) because of its length. The third pert. pi. in tiinu, farm, was much
less used. The Attics always said truent, rt/tmv, /urUutv.
2.) but the opt. in aim of the verbs in in and in was much more in use in the
sing, than the other.
3.) In the verbs in in the Attic opt. (n/xnni, &c.) is used in the sing, almost
exclusively, and also much more employed in the pi. (the third pert.
excepted,) than the other two.
Obs. 5. Some verbs in in take after their contraction ' for a, as in the Doric
dialect, (see below Obs. 15.) This is particularly known of the following four
verbs,
(to live,) xfwSai, (Jo use,)
<riyt, (to be hungry,) ii^h, (to be thirsty,)
from
%(i, (gee both among the Anom.) rutin, i,$it>, ($, JS, iZ<i, XV*'"U> &*0
But the following three verbs, which approximate much in their signification,
xtin, (to rub,) r/iin, (to wipe,) -i-i*>, (to cleanse,)
were contracted in the same way, at least by correct Attic writers.
1 See, however, the Anom. tin.The third pers. sing. aor. 1. f^ta of the verb x'tn,
(see the Anom.) must not be confonnded with the third pers. sing, imperf. : the latter
is contracted, (iXn, ixu,) the former not, ex.gr. Aristoph. Nub. 75, KriXm.
VERBS.
187
Obs. 8. The verb fiyiu, (to be cold,) deviates in its contraction ; it has u and y
instead of tu and , ex. gr. vijht, fiyit, opt. fiy^ti; but it is not constancy observed,
at least not in our editions. The lonians have the same deviation in a verb of tha
opposite meaning, lifiu, (to perspire,) gives <5{<mr, U. i. 27. <3{i>i, Hippocr. tie Aer.
Aq. IjOC. 17.
...
Dialects.
Obs. 7. As the lonians form the second pers. pass, in their usual conjugation in
si and i, they have in the verb3 in ( an accumulation of vowels, which the Ionic
prose-writers retain in the pres. (roiiixi, Uranism, &c.) The Epio poets sometimes
contract the two first vowels, ex. gr. u>',tu*>, (just as mJHtrsu, uv'.h'ho,. > Sometimes
one 1 is elided, that of ill always is ; ex. gr. pv^'tai, (puSiapai,) Od. fi. 202. tpt&ic,
(fa/i'upai,) Herod. 9, 120. aWu, Vc,iyi, &c. The forms of this second pers. in i*, iy,
in, Uu. aw. iw, which we inserted in the paradigms for the sake of uniformity in
the analogy, do not occur anywhere.
Obs. 8. The lonians, as we have seen, do not commonly resolve the verbs in am
into their proper vowels, yet frequently chauge the into 1, ex. gr.
egtw, loUfiil, for egav, i^dofilv,
Qiirinrtf, for fttrinrlt,
XfllTeii, finx*nwSoii, for arou, arSot,
and the like. Sometimes they change > into i, ( 27. Obs. 1. 10.) ex. gr.'/mx*VtUMTOtl, Vi'- >,'//. &C.
Obs. 9. In the third pers. pi., where the lonians, (according to Obs. 4. to 103.)
change the into a,
for jt,) they sometimes use this termination for ir#,
(eliding one 1,) but probably only of verbs in in, as i,^>tTO for -aim, intra
usually iftyixamtTB.In the per/, and plusq. they not only change wrxi and mrxt
into narat, ma-rat, (ex.gr. rirrtrnxrai, KiôXvart, Horn.) but commonly use 1 instead
of , ex. gr.
tlxtarat, irirtuiaro, for mxyvrat, iriri/lrjvra.
Obs. 10. The old Ionian Kpic poets employ the contraction at times, and at others
not. The verbs in au, however, were seldom resolved, (Obs. I.) but the Poets were
at liberty to lengthen again the contracted vowels by placing a similar short or long
vowel before ; thus they made of a in
(i^dtn,) oaav,
{av8,
(ifX**-*"') MX"*-?'
atrxaXaa,
2 pers. pass, (/unif,) ftti,
/tia,
ayaoaffSi, i:cj.'}ii,
AyofdarSij ptutaeScct,
and of 6 or u in
(efOAf,) fym,
ifem,
imper. pass. (aXeuv.) aXm, aXem,
(faaoufft,') fiamri,
faaun,
opt. (aineioira,) ainiira,
atnamra,
(iadavrt,) daunt,
^mufft,
part. fern. (xWa,) rSvJieu, i&mftu
Such lengthened syllables seldom occur in Ion. prose, Herod. 6, 11. riytfium,
4, 191, Mpivti.Sometimes the is put last, ex. gr.
iifiuorrtf, rif&matftt, for nf&vrtt, nfimpi, (from amis, ecai/it9.')
8 See about the iota subscriptum the Note to Obs. 15.
This lengthening bymeans of the m produced in some verbs a peculiar formation
mis, tin. See the Anom, %dm,
and piim (in pi/twrxu.)
188
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Thus Poets could use instead of yixOtru either ytximtru or yiXtmru according to
the exigency of the metre.Homer's part, fern, ituvriuira. for aeura, or iotea is a
peculiar anomaly.
Obt. 11. AU the forms lengthened with eu are also common to the verbs in in,
though they cannot originate in them either by resolution or lengthening; for
instance,
(aâsvc.,) aewci, Epic attain,
(iniMtr*, intomv,) "hnwuvra, or.toUv, Kpic ^n'lomrcy Sij'omcv.)
Obt. 12. The Ionians make a less frequent use in these verbs of the imperf.
iterative in *, {Obt. II. l.to 103.) ex.gr. Qik'nrxn in Herod. /3w*Xiincif in
Homer. This form is never contracted, but sometimes syncopated by the old Poets,
(by dropping the ,) ex. gr. iîfxi, (for nîia-xi,) from fix'">
from tiu, and
lengthened wirwnif from raurau.
Obi. 13. That the Dorians instead of contracting u into cv, commonly make it iv,
and that this contraction is also used by the Ionians, has already been noticed
above, J 28. Obt. 5. Thus they make of m>
ruivpLtty rrttuifitti, mtvurtf, itd'hm.
But also of the verbs in we frequently find in Herod, and others, instead of m
contracted into tv, the contraction iv, which is contrary to analogy, for instance,
liixatiuv, iiixaiiv, T/.s.ciCvn:. from S/xaw0A>,
and by the interchange of and i, (06s. 8.) the same contraction occurs also in the
verbs in ,
uouTlviy iyanurrif, from ueuram, ayttTuu,
Lastly m is not only used for uu, and consequently for am, but also for ttv, ex. gr,
irnv9tt Qikivf* 10, for vmouff^ tvrij QiXiouret) tvrtt,
ytXturx, for yiXaivcet, Zffa,
ilKMUffly for ilKUIMVffl, BVtt.
Attentive reading will shew which of these different forms occurs most frequently
in either of these two dialects. But it follows of course that the third pert. pi. xtnuri,
ytxiin, can only be Ionic, since the Dorians have TouutTi, yikiSm, (compare Obt. V. 4.
to & 103.)
Obt. 14. There is another more j93olic than Doric contraction, which causes the <
to be absorbed by a preceding a, which thus becomes long, ex.gr. Queatrts for fori'
vrif, third pert. pi. TurZm or rlMW.
Obt. 15. If the Ionians change the contracted a or a into n and >i, ex. gr.
Qtnm, IwSxi, and the like, it agrees with the nature of their dialect, but it is done
only by some of their writers, for instance, Hippocr. : Herod, has ojf>, >, and even
X(Zr&cu, xt*} &c. The Dorians, on the contrary, who generally use 2 instead of *,
prefer the in these contractions, omitting, however, the iota subscriptum in the
contraction of an", (compare Obt. V. 10. to 103.) for instance,
lyi for i;S,
rtXpUTi for TcXuin, and the like, whilst in conjugating they yet say riX/tSm, and
so on. They have the same contraction in the infin. of the verbs in in, ex. gr. w
r/t*v for Kigftuv.
Obt. 16. The Epic Poets have likewise the * as a contraction, but only in some
10 The Doric iurx becomes through contraction s7, not -, which occurs only
in the part. aor. 2. (x/3*r,) where there is no contraction ; see Obt. V. 6. to 103.
11 The omission of the iota tubtcriptum was formerly general in the in/in. of verbs
in u, ex. gr. n/tit, 0Sr, 5. It is but lately that the correct orthography has
again been generally adopted. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. J 105. Oil. 17.
Some grammarians always omitted this iota tubtcriptum in lengthened syllables ;
VERBS.
189
forms of both in and t, and chiefly in the dual t, ex. gr. rprmiinm, l/utgrnrw,
(from mihiu, i/ucfTim,') and in the lengthened in/in. in
/iimi, instead of ut and
St, ex. gr. ipcpitxi, (from Qefiv,) f&AfUtm, yaii/iKai (for
OJ. 17. The Epic iflp/uuu for Ajeuv is the only instance of this in verbs in 1*.
See a list of Contracted Verbs in the Appendix.
IRREGULAR CONJUGATION.
106. Verbs in (u.
1. We begin the anomaly of the Greek verbs with what, from
the termination of the first pers. pres. indie., is called the con
jugation in /At. This does not include a great many verbs, like
the two preceding conjugations, but only a small number of verbs,
and parts of verbs, which in some essential points deviate from
the numerous other verbs, though connected by a common ana
logy.
Ob. 1 . The verbs, which are conjugated in Grammars as examples of this con
jugation, are pretty nearly the only ones, which adopt this formation in all the parts,
where it is applicable ; whatever else belongs hither, consists merely in isolated
parts of some anomalous or defective verbs, or of Epic forms. But even the verbs
in fu, which are in use, do not all agree among themselves in all their parts ; each
verb must, on account of its peculiarities, be stated completely as an anomalous
verb.
2. All verbs in /. have a root, which according to the usual
formation, would end in u purum,
28. 1.) and chiefly in iu,
aw, 001, via. Hence it is usual in grammar to refer that more
uncommon formation to this more usual one, and to say, for
instance, that the verb n'&ai/xi comes from a simpler form Efl.
3. The peculiarity of the conjugation in
is confined to these
three tenses,
the pres., imperf., and aor. 2.
and consists chiefly in this, that the terminations of the inflection,
ex. gr. /aev, re, v, y.a.1, are not appended by means of the connect
ing vowel, (optEv, te, ov, optai,) but immediately to the radical
vowel of the verb itself, for instance,
1! Consequently o'fjja; mentioned in a Note to the last Ob. in j 106. and BwBai,
(see the Anom. Sax,) belongs hither. Compare also 13>iJt in the Anom. Sicfiui.
Both kinds of contraction, (that into , and that into 11 and i,) which became pecu
liar to some dialects, when the language was polished, were unquestionably, like
many other peculiarities, in general, but fluctuating use in the oldest language. The
form even continued in common use in some instances, (as
&c.) Need we
then wonder at meeting in Epic poetry with many other forms, which were retained
for the sake of euphony ?
190
A GREER GRAMMAR.
Ti'Se-piEv, "yst-ptai, S/So-re, Itielxvu-re, i-S^-v.

See Obs. 6. 7.
4. To this peculiarity must be added some peculiar final syl
lables
jx<, first pers. sing. pres.
oi or ait,third pers. sing, of the same tense,
9-i
,second pers. sing, imper.
But in the imper. of the aor. 2. act. some verbs have, instead of &i,
a simple s, bis, oh, is, (see rib-nfu, SiJwpw, 7*i/a, and compare a%is
and ipger in the Anom. 'eôj and (pqiu.) Moreover the infin. of
those tenses always ends in van, and the nomin. ma.ic. of the part.,
not in v, but always in r, dropping the v, which lengthens the
radical vowel in the usual way, as, eis, ovs, us, (gen. vros,) and
this termination constantly has the accent, wbich is the acute.
5. The conj. and opt. make a contraction of the radical vowel
of the verb with their own termination, which contraction always
lias the accent. It is in the conjunctive, when the radical vowel
was s or a, u and n,
Si, ys, ri, aêv, rire, aai, (v :)
when the radical vowel was o, it constantly is u,
u, Sis, u, iZ/aev, wrs, Siai, (v.)
In the opt. it is a diphthong with t, to which m is always joined
in the act.
TI&-EIW, ITT-ai*)V, SlS-Ol'nv.
See 107. Obs. 3. 2. etc.The verbs in vy.i most commonly
form these two moods according to the usual conjugation in -vta.
6. Several short radical forms combine a tedv.pl. with them,
repeating the first consonant with an additional i before the
radical verb, ex. gr.
ACQ 5S/*i, ESl ti&h/xi.
But when the radical verb begins with <jt, itr, or an aspirated vowel,
the i alone is prefixed with the spit, asper :
2TAQ "sn[/u, IITAft IWaptau, 'Ef2 uspu.
It is this which renders the aor. 2. possible in this conjugation, as
it distinguishes itself from the imperf. and from Ihe pres. tenses
of the other moods chiefly by omitting this redupl. (See 96.
Obs. 2.), ex. gr.
ridn/ui, imperf. eri&ny, aor.
7. The radical vowel in its combination with the terminations
of this conjugation always becomes long in the sing, indie, act. of
VERBS.
the three tenses; a and s always become n, {indie, pres.
o becomes u, (indie, pres. u/m,) and v becomes 7>, (indie, pr. vpi.)
In the rest of the terminations it most usually occurs in its ori
ginal short form, e, a, o, v, ex. gr. rlSy/xi,rfoepsv, E&Effav, ti&e'vzi,
n'&STi, Ti&Eputi, &c. with some exceptions, which are best learned
in every verb separately, from the paradigms, or from the list of
Anom. (as wjpjvai, St^n/uu.)
OJi. 2. The termination of the second pers. past, in the common conjugation,
(j, ,) being derived from im, i, (see Obs. III. 1. 2. to 103.) and the connecting
vowel being omitted in the conjugation in fti, it is simply sm, co, in the verbs in pi,
(exactly like the per/, and plusq. pass, of the common con jugation,) n'9i-nu, ir/Si-,
"nz-exi, &c. But here, too, the contraction with the radical vowel is more or less
used in some verbs,
riBis, WiSov, (irf,) '/fa* for "meat, "iiu.sa. See the AWe to p.
and as the Ionians, after rejectingthe a, change the radical vowel a into i,(see below,
6 107- OAs. 4.) they make of It-arxi, (7ruu,) "m. The contracted form (i9ou, XSav, Sc.)
is probably the only one in use in the aor. 2.
8. All the other tenses are formed according to the common
conjugation from the radical verb without any redapl. ; ex. gr.
ti'S)/aj, (EH,) fut. Srivcu. Some anomalous verbs of this kind
have, however, peculiarities in these tenses, which must be kept
distinct from the conjugation in pu. We shall first review the
peculiarities common to several verbs.
9. The two verbs V*m*( and StSu/M shorten the vowel also in
those tenses of the pass, voice, which belong to the common con
jugation :
Act. swu, per/, est)**, pass. perf. fcaepuu, aor. EVa&nv,
Both ri$niM and tntut ( 108. I.) do the same merely in the aor,
pass, and in the fut, which is dependent on it :
ete&hv, (for e&e'&^Vj from Efi,)
eêis-, part. aor. 1 pass, (from 'Efi.)
They both change the radical vowel into 11 in the perf. act. and
pass.
vibcixa, ribiiy.au, eTxai, eT/ash.
10. The three verbs T(&*)/*t, Tti/ai, liluyn, have a peculiar form
for the aor. 1. in xcc,
iSrixa, r,x.x, sowxa,
which must be carefully distinguished from the perf.
Obs. 3. There are no verbs in tt/u and u/ti of three or more syllables without the
redupl. in any of the principal dialects, excepting perhaps
and some deponents
in npuu, (for i/tai,) ufim, and s/uti, (from *,) which must be looked for among the
Anomalous Verbs, ex. gr. 'ii'0/.u.ca, iitt/ixi, mfuu.
192
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 4. The verbs In upi are also anomalous as far as they belong to a class of
verbs derived from different themes. The termination upi or
&c. is only a
strengthening syllable of the pret. and imperf. The other tenses are formed of the
simpler radical verb, in which this v or ,v is also wanting, ex. gr. 'huxmpt of AEIKH,
r(\nvpi of ZBE11, and are therefore stated here as defective verbs. See $ 112.14.
There are but a few parts of a few anomalous verbs, which conform, beside these,
to the conjugation in upi. To know instantly when the u is long or short, we
need only to compare 'Irrnpi : hlxwpi is long like "errtpt, iuxvupir short like 'Irrxptv,
aor. 2. (see the Amm. Ji!*,) isi is long like !rn;>, &c.
Obs. 5. All verbs in pi increase their anomaly by having in the pra. and imperf.
persons and moods, which desert the conjugation in pi, and follow, as contracted,
the conjugation of in, au, iu, retaining, however, the redupl. (as if the verb, for
instance, were TieEn,) and those in upi, as if of its. In the meantime they must
be conjugated entirely in pi to have a distinct idea of their analogy, and the Notes
will point out where the simple form predominates in the common language.
Wherever this is not done, it may be assumed that the formation from TI8EQ
occurs little or not at all, as is the case with the first peri. sing. pres. . The con
jugation in pi belongs, on the whole, to the strictest Atticism.
Obs. C. We subjoin a few general remarks. There are in many languages two
terminations in the conjugation of verbs, one with a connecting vowel, the other
without it ; for instance, in German da lebest, du lebst, in English thou drinkest,
drinkst. There is no absolutely general principle, by which it can be ascertained
which of the two ways is the oldest ; but it is more natural, if there be no prepon
derating analogy for the contrary, to consider the longer form grammatically as the
basis, and the short one as a syncopated form of the long one. In this sense the
conjugation in pi by virtue of the peculiarity stated above (3.) is unquestionably a
syncope of the common conjugation, and wc have no right to assume that the fuller
form had anciently prevailed and been abbreviated.
Obs.T. The syncopated form is the most natural when else two vowels would meet
in pronunciation. Whilst the fuller form was preferred in Greek in the most con
siderable number of verbs, and became gradually contracted, (fikii-pit, piXtvpit.)
the syncopated form maintained itself in some others, (3i-/ti.) This syncope, how
ever, could not have taken place in those terminations of the common conjugation,
which consist of only one vowel, (Si'-a, Si-n, 9i-t,) and it is exactly in these instances
that another form of terminations pi, a, Si, maintained itself, by which a conso
nant was now immediately appended to the radical vowel. To this was added the
lengthening of this vowel, and thus arose, for instance, out of the root 3 the
forms Sfi-pi, i9-r, St-pit,
&c. The redupl. probably served only to strengthen
such short verbs in the pres. ; and thus originated, (according to 96. Obt. 2. and 4.)
a simpler form, (f3r,) for the aor., and a longer one for the pres. and imperf. (rltnpi,
in'Snn.) See an anomalous redupl. in the Anom. ivlttipi.
Obs. 8. Heme it appears that the formation of the essential particulars of the
verbs in pi might just as well have taken place in parts of any other verb, and it is
therefore quite superfluous to assume a peculiar first pert. pres. in pi for every
tense or form, in which that kind of inflection is found. We shall see below,
110. 10. perfects, of which the plural is formed in that manner, and (ibid. G.) aor. 2.
of this kind in verbs, which have either the usual form in the pra. (fciiv, Ji/,
aor. 2. 10/wf, iiin,) or a very deviating one, (tWw, yiyiexu, aor. 2. ('>!, tyyvt )
The following paradigms of the few complete verbs in pi serve at the same time for
most of the anomalous forms of this kind, to which we shall occasionally refer.
Obt. 9. The deviating moods and participles of this conjugation will yet be found
VERBS.
193
on examination to correspond to the analogous ones of the common conjugation,

with the requisite modifications. Hence there is no occasion, when similar moods
occur, to presuppose old fret, tenses in /</, as about the aor. past, (i rCf^r.v, rufSiitir,
TtifSvmi, &c. see above $ 100. Obi. 10.) and isolated Epic forms, like f<;w, fiXiifutM, ( 105. Obi. 16.)
OA*. 10. Some Doric dialects, however, really had the firtt pert. pret. of many
verbs in pit instead of u, ex.gr.t^tim, $l).nu.i, for ogaw, Qtxlu, and the third pert. ting,
a, ex. gr. xfttnri for nflm. Hesiod has altufu, and grammarians also rank in this
class some Homeric forms, especially the third pert, nn, ex. gr. II. t. 6. rx/ifxitnn,
i. 323. rpfifnri ', and the second pert. past, Spmi, {Od. %. 343.) as of Spi/tm (for -fuu,)
of fist, rifu
107.Paradigms of the Conjugation in (u.
Act.Pres.
To put,
(of Ell,)
to place1,
(of 2TAX2,)
to give,
(of AOil.)
to shew,
(of 5tixvu<y,)
Irnai, (v,)
SiSwai, (v3)
XEixvur,
oWxvuffi, (v,)
i'suTOv,
S/Sotov,
S/Sorov,
S/So/XEV}
Sl'SoTE,
SiXaatfi, (v,)
or SiSoDji,
Stlxvurov,
SclXVUTOV,
Se/xviz/aev,
Seixvi/te,
Stixn/an, (v,)
or SeixvSti.
Indie
Sing.
Ti'&yjr,
rlhnat, (v,)
Dual,
Plur.
Tl'&fcTOV,
rlBsrov,
TI$S/X.EV,
Tl'&ETE,
TI&eWi, (v,)
Of TIÊIffl,
"ya/AEv,
"ffltTE,
<ya<ri, (v,)
Obtervation I.
1. The /Airrf per*, p/. in -wv, (,) is the only one employed by the best Attic
writers ; in old Grammars it is called Ionic, merely because it was erroneously
considered as a resolved form ; far from being Ionic, we find the circumflexed form
alone in Herod. nSiiro liSew, hixtiri, and this creeped into the common language,
but in later times.
2. The contracted form riBut, Stripe, See. ( 106. Obs. 5.) is the least used in the
pres. by the Attics. Herod, has the third pert. iihT, from tiiu/u.
1 But this form occurs in Homer only after a pronoun relative, (Sm, it, &c. :)
hence we ought to write >in, (as is now done in most of the passages.) and consider
it as a free use of the conjunctive.
1 Some only of the old grammarians accent the word in this way,
: others
write ifr.ai, and then it is nothing hut ifdtai contracted according to 105. Obi. 15.
into n for k, which is preferred here for the sake of euphony, Homer having every
where else the regular ifirai, Sfirs, &c.
1 See about the anomalous signification of this verb the Obi. II.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
194
Jnfin.
isavott,
| rAi
Part. '
Ti&elr, (e'vw,) Uis, (xvtos,)
Seixvuvosi,
fflffOVdW,
SiSour, (ovror,)
SEixyuoa,
Seikvuv,
SiSov,
TI&EV,
Conj.
Sing.
of Seixvi/a;.
Dual, 7)T0v, rtroi, r)TOV, 7)T0V, utov, wtov,
Plur. a/fj-et, tits, aoi, uifj.iv, ijre, Sitsi, ufj.ii, Sin, cuai,
See below, 06s. III. about these conj.
Opt.
Sing.
TI&EI7)r,
Tl&EIT),
<S"at*l,
Dual,
Tl&ElWov,
Ti&Eirinov,
Ti&Ein/xEy,
TI&El'yiTS,
(ti&e/)(Tv,)
Plur.
SiSoi'mroy,
lyati'ri/AEV,
of OEIXVWU.
SlXoiTi/AEV,
SlSoiVjTE,
(SiSoi'no-atv,)
3. We also meet with liiJnt. but this is an incorrect spelling of the later writers
as well as in the aor. 2. iftn.
4. This is the peculiar opt. of the verbs in fu, to which the aor. pais, of the com
mon conjugation corresponds, and this, too, has a very usual abbreviated form for
the dual andja/., which is used almost exclusively for the third pert. only.
Dual,
Ti&ElTOV,
Plur.
Tl&EI/AEV,
TI&EITE,
jraiTov,
IfaiTW,
fcatfj.zv,
OliOlTOVj
SiSotTr/v,
Sidoi/tiEV,
trouev,
Jmper.
3 pi.
rihert,
ircu, 8cc.
T&i-rwaatv, or
iVaî, comm
Sei'xvC&j, comm.
7fT*), aru, &C.
ora, &C. Seixvu, uto, &C.
lyarwffav, or SiSoToitrav, or Sfiixvi/Tojffav, or
iVavnyy,
SeIXVI/VTWV.
5. See about r!Bm instead of -9(j 17. 6. 4. The tecond pen. sing, in S/is not
much used ; the abbreviated form with lengthened vowel is preferred,
t/S"
I
Urn
I
ilhu
I
itSmi.
VEBBS.
195
Imperf.
ETl'Sw,
Sing.
ET7&7),
'fir,
r/
ET('&TO)|,
ETI&ET7JV,
IfiXTDV,
E&MV,
like the
imperf.
>MV,
eW,
EST),
iSi'dW,
ESEixvUr,
ini'xvv,
Dual,
eSeiXWTOV,
eSeixvi/t)Vj
Plur.
EoWxvt/^tEv,
ETl&ETE,
eSi'SoTE,
E06IXVKTE,
Eo"ixvt/<jav.
6. Excepting "rrti/u, the sinj. of this tense is most usually after the contracted con
jugation and the form -vu :
ir/Savy, ;<>-, [l, Ui'3i/y, flvf, 0P, Di/xvimv, tf, f, (y.)
Perf. te'Sei;
EtJT7)Xa,
EfTTTflXEIV, Or
Plusq. ETE&E.
eo'eSuxeiv,
of AEIKft.
l(7T7)XEIVj
With respect to Tmyu we must notice in this per/", and pfauj'.
1.) The augment, contrary to the other verbs, (see 7"- 6.) the i, which is
here instead of the redupl., has the ipiritui asper, and the pluiq. frequently
has its augment increased by the temporal augment u.
2.) The more usual abbreviated forms 'itTa/tti, &c. instead of the regular
conjugation, (see below, Obi. II.) ,
3.) The deviating signification, {ibid.)
Fut.
of AEIKO.
Aok. 1
ttanut,
8. This irregular aor. in ku is chiefly used by good writers in the sing. : the Attics
generally preferred the aor. 2. for thefirit and second pert. pi. There are neither
moodt nor participle! made of the form in mm, except the part, of the middle voice,
which with its indie, is, however, confined to the dialects. See below the Medium.
Indie.
Sing.
Aor. 2.
e'S&iv,
like the
imperf.
wanting.
Dual,
Plur.
EfTlTOV,
ST)T7}V,
ESTIJXEV,
SHT,
9. The aor. 2. Itmt deviates from the analogy of the imperf. and of the verbs in
w in general, ( 106. 70 by its long vowel in the dualani pi. The 3 pers.pl.
is exactly like in sound with the 3 pers. pi. aor. 1. so that the sense must be deter
mined from the context. (See below, Obi. II.)
10. The sing, indie, act. aor. 2. ISm and Utn has not continued in use. But in
the other parts of the verb it is used either exclusively or preferably. {Obi. 1. 8.)
11. Compare the aor. 2. of some anomalous verbs below 110. 6.
O 2
196
A GREER GRAMMAR.
S&tvxi,
rovai,
Souvai,
Sets, bsTaa, &ev,
%is, sxvx, yav,
Sotr, iovsx, $ov,
&ipr, &C.
yaJ, ripr, &c.
S&/, Sur, Sw, &C.
&i'nv,
sxlm,
Soi'tiv.
The co/i/. and o/><. tire conjugated like the pres
(&',) &r,
(SoS1/,) Sor,
Imper.
Soto/,
S>5tov, ra/y,
Je'tov, &>v,
Sotov, TO>V,
stjte, Tftidav, or
&e'te, To/tray, or
Sore, Taiirav, Or
&e'vtv,
Sxurcuv,
Sovtwv.
12. The case is the same with the conj. and opt. as what we remarked of these
moods in the pres.
13. The monosyllabic imper. Bit, tit, (100. 4.) does not throw the accent farther
back in composition than on the penultima; ex.gr. rifidn, ix'iitt.
14. The imper. erUBi is sometimes abbreviated in compounds in this manner :
rmfirri. The same is done with /3ii9i. (See the Arum. fWw.)
Inf.
Part.
Conj.
Opt.
Indie.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
r&saeu, poet.
Pass.Pres.
oiooftou,
Isxaxt, or
SiSoaxi,
T&STXI,
tiê'/xeôv,
'Itxtxi,
IS*flt/XE&OV,
Ti&E'/x.sS'aj
TIÊffS'E,
Ira/^tE&o!,
Ti'&EffSaij
Infin.
Partic. TIÊ'/tAEVOf,
Conj.
r&a/juxi,
Sing.
Dual, I Ti&a/ptE&ov,
Plllr. I TI&dJ/AE&a,
Si'Sorai,
JiJo/xE&oy,
Sl'Soff&OV,
S'So<t3'ov,
ieiKwoai,
SEixvurai,
Seixv^/ae&ov,
"sxvtxi,
oYSou&E,
Sj'Sovtck,
Seixvi/it&ov,
Seixviz/aeîz,
SEIXVt/<X&E,
SEIXVt/VTai,
lyat/AEvor,
Si'Soir&ai,
SlSo/AEVOf,
5Ei'xvt/o-&ai,
SEJXV1//XEV0S-,
of
ieixvvoj
hr,rxi,
lyaJ/xE&ov,
Jyiiff&oy,
ifr)<r&oy,
ISU/fJL&X,
SlJoi/XE&OV,
SlX(2<T&0y,
SiSoI/aeSo:,
SiScSu&e,
SiSoivrsi,
ISWVTXI,
See below the 06s. III. about the deviating accentuation of
this conj.
* The abbreviations of the forms in -trai, -arm, into -, are partly questionable,
partly poetical. See Buttm, Complete Gr. Gr. $ 107. 8'.
VERBS.
Opt.
Sing, j nÊi'/xtiv,
| Wal/jtm,
Jyaio,
I Irarro,
lya/pte&ov,
I ti&eito,
TI&EIJAE&OV,
TI&sr<7&OV,
ri&EiirSnv,
Dual,
197
| SiSoipiiv,
I SiSo7to,
SlSoi'/LtE&OVj
SiSorir&ov,
SlSo/ff&TJV,
of
Seixvi/o).
I
Plur.
S"sho-.7e,
IfflElVTO,
n&EivTo,
See below 0>s. III. about the Attic opt. t&oito, 7ya<ro, SioWo, &c.
/mper.
n'&ea-o, or
rfoov,
T&oU, &C.
lyaffo, Or
Si'SWo, or
v
&c, 5"iSoo-Sto, &c.
Imperf.
Sing.
Dual,
Plur.
irfoeaOf or
.ETI&OK,
ETl'&ETO,
ET|5e'/XE&0V,
etj&eit&ov,
etiSeVSw,
ET&E'/AE&a,
ETl'&Eff&Sj
ETI&EVTO,
TEJEI/Xai,
T&El(Tai, &C.
Plusq. TE&Etptr)V,
t1?xao, or "sw,
iVaro,
fraptE&ov,
(fEIXVftTO,
Seixvi/a&Wj &c.
EOIOO/M1V,
eSi'oWo, or
eS/Sok,
sSi'Soro,
eSjSo/aeôv,
ESiSoV&rjy,
Ira/xE&a,
"yaff&E,
<V*vto,
Perf.
KaaeUf &C.
eSi'Soj&e,
EOl'5ovTO,
iSsixviVtw,
eSe i'xVW(TO,
E$EIXVl/TO,
eSeixviz/ae&ov,
eJeixvi/oôv,
e$eixhJo"&,v,
E$EIXVI//Ae3'2,
eSeIXVI/(TÊ,
eSeixvkvto,
Se'So/aou,
Se'Soovxi, &c, of AEIKH.
eSeoo/x*iv,
15. The following tnooih of the per/, are easily formed, viz. in/J. ndiiirdau, ii}rSi,
part. rtSutt'trts, imper. 'iftut, &c. but the con/, and op/, are never met with.
Fut. 1 TE^TJCTO/Xal,
Aor. 1 ETE&rlV,
So&7)iro/xai,
EYa&niv,
of AEIKft.
16. Thesyllable ti in iti$>i, TiSw/in, must not be mistaken for a reduplicative

augment ; it is the radical syllable St, which is changed, because of the $ in the
termination, according to 18. These words stand for i91Sn, StStrtuai.
Fut. 2. and 3, and Aor. 2. are wanting8.
8 The aor. 2. and fut. 2. pats, are not possible in this formation, (except that some
verbs in tv/u can form them of the radical verb, Arum. Ziiyiv/u,) and there is no
Jut. 3. of these verbs occurring; yet the anomalous fut. Xrri^tfuu, (Ob. II. 4.) may
be considered as such.
198
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Medium,
Fut. 1. h-naoiMU,
I sôo/xau,
I Jolio/xai,
of AEIKft.
Aor. 1. eSwa/Anv,
| efrisifji-nv,
| iSaixium,
17- The aor. iSr.zium, li**i/tm, and their part. are known only to the tonic and
Doric dialects ; the other moods do not occur. Attic prose employs merely the
aor. 2. of the middle voice of these verbs. Compare the Obi. to the aor. act. But
the aor. 1. irrnrxftrt is much in use. See below Obi. II.
Indie.
Aor. 2.
EdO//.)V,
(eSeao,) e&oi/,
(eSouo,) eSoy,
wanting,
and so on,
and so on,
is conjugated after the imperf. pass.
Inf.
*ritAEVOS')
Part.
5d/xEVoy,
Conj.
oa/fMCl,
Opt.
(&e'<to,) &oy.
Imperf.
18. All these are conjugated after the pm. pass. See below, Obi. III. about the
Attic forms of the opt. and conj. (vôffSoiro, ?rfoVSA^*/, &c.)
19. The infin. keeps the accent even in composition, intirtxi, iniir/iu. The
tmper. retains the accent in thei^. only when the prtpoiilion is but of one syllable ;
ex.gr. Tfirdu, Tfmriisi, ifsv, (ot'lv/u :) when the prep, has two syllables, the accent
is removed on it, ex. gr. Tiplhv, air&ov. In the pi. the accent always is on the prep.
20. The aor. 2. med. of lirtqti does not occur : it is stated here for the' sake of
analogy for other verbs, ex. gr. irri/itn of "rrxfuii, (Anom. ritipxi.)
Verbal Adjectives,
rTE'9r, I Wo,,
ofAElK:fli
farof, J boTos,
II.Observatiom to imifu.
1. The verb Irtayu is divided between the transitive signif. to place, and the intrans. toitand, ( 113. 2.) In the act. voice, the tenses, which denote lb place, are,
the pro. and imperf. iVnyu, 'Irrm.fut. crriri,
aor. Xffrvteot :
those, which denote to iland, are,
the per/, and pli/stj. Xffrvxa, \arn*ui, aor. ffrif*.
The pass, throughout means to be placed ; but the pres. aniimperf. "rri/ixi, -ftn, as
middle voice along with the fut. med. erriim/itii, signify sometimes to place VMft ielf,
and sometimes to put up, (to erect, for instance, a monument.) The aor. 1. med.
always has the latter signif.
2. The per/, act. from its signif. is here not a per/., but a pres. tense, and the
plusq. of course an imperf. (j 113. Obs. 11.)
Xtrnxx, Island,
lrti*w, I stood ; irrnxar, standing, Slc*
* But in some compounds, of which the middle voice has the iutrans. signif., the
VERBS.
199
3. In the dual and pi. and in the collateral moods, there is generally an abbrevi
ated form df the per/., and plusq., which becomes the pres. tense in pi : this form
being also peculiar to other verbs, is explained 110., and is stated here merely to
complete the verb 'Urnfti.
Perf.plur.irrafi.ti, igrltri, Ifran, (*,)
dual, Xrr&rfFj
pltttq. plur. irrxpiv, trrurt, Xftotaai,
dual, iffrxrev, \ffrxrrti,
conj. iffru, ns, n, &C. opt, irrxinv,
imper. 'isrxii, iffrxru, &c.
in/in. isrxixi,
part, (irrxus,') \ctus, iffrurx, \crus fl, gen.
Ion. Xirrins, tiros,
so that this per/, and plusq. have assumed in most of their forms the formation and
signif. of both the pres. and the imper/.
4. It is on account of this signif. of the pret. (and because the /ut. rnrv means
/ shall place, rrirtfuu, shall place myself,) that Xtrnxx, I stand, has produced a
peculiar anomalous
/ut. \irr 'iv or itrrrfafixt, I shall stand,
with which you may compare a similar /ut. in the Anom. Svnrxw.
5. But there is also for the transitive signif. a
per/. 'Urxttx, I have placed,
which belongs, however, to a later period. The old Attics use, in both significa
tions, instead of the per/, the two aor. or a circumlocution. (See 97- Obs. 6.)
6. There is in some editions of Homer the syncopated form of the plusq. 3 per*,
pi. Xarxtxi in both the transitive and the intrans. signif. ; but the correct reading
seems to be 'Urxrxt as usual in the sense of the imper/. they were standing, and
irrxexi abbreviated for trrtirxt, (of the aor. 1. irrtirx,') as aor. they placed, (Orf. <r.
307.) which, like other aor., might be used in the sense of the plusq. they hadplaced,
(//. ft. 56.) Compare a similar abbreviation >v;tri in the Anom. xiftx-fnfti.
7. There is also a Homeric abbreviation Xrmrt, you stand, (/<. 3. 243. 246.) for
iffryiKttTl or XrTKTt.
III.Obs. on the Conj. and Opt.
1. The conj. and opt. of the verbs in fu have always in their regular formation
the accent on the termination, whilst these moorfj in the common conjugation con
stantly throw the accent, whenever the termination allows it, on the preceding
syllable, (rCvryt, rvxrvftu, rvtrrti/ti, rvxruvrxi, &c.) Thus rtfu, ii^vftiv, ruUa:.
nhtvro, &c.
2. This accent arises from the circumstance that the syncope, which is essential
in the verbs in fu, cannot well take place in these moods ; for their characteristic is
not in the terminations ftiv, n, /ttu, &c which they have in common with the indie,
but precisely in the vowel, which precedes these terminations. This they cannot
reject, but combine it with the vowel of the radical verb, and thus make it a long
vowel, which, in conformity to the rule, takes the accentuation of the contraction.
($ 28. Obs. 9.)
per/, act. may be conceived as a real per/, in English, ex. gr. ivlirrnfti, I raise up,
i/irraftxi, Irise, stand up, i/itrnxx, I have risen, stand. The corrupt Greek formed
from this per/, denoting the pres. time a peculiar pres. tense ; hence 1 Corinth. 16.
13. vrrixiTt, stand.
s See about the irregular contraction of the neuter Urit, in Buttm. Complete Gr.
Gr. the verb 'limp, in the list 0/ Verbs.
200
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. This combination differs, however, from the usual contraction of the same
moods in the verbs in
in, vat. The difference of the opt. in the two conjugations
is obvious. In the conjunctive of contracted verbs the vowels
m, <,n, Un, coalesce
in various ways ; the conjunctive of the conjugation in fu is more simple. Verbs
having n in the indie, (rth/ii, iVriyu,) retain also throughout this >i and the > of the
common conjunctive ; but those in upi have * and instead of and <i, (see the
paradigms.) The conjunctive itTZs, Ivrx, which is also stated, belongs to the form
iVrav, and is not so good, and less frequent, 106. Obs. 5. See Obs. IV. about the
Ionic resolution or lengthening of these forms.
4. The accentuation of the conjugation in /*i does not differ from that of the
usual barytone verbs, but the wish to make these moods conformable to analogy with
regard to the accent, occasioned deviations in the pass, voice, which were more or
less used in some verbs, and this induced us to state the regular form for unifor
mity's sake, and to render the deviations more sensible. In the two verbs Ttlr,^
and tnpu, ($ 108.) the Attics drop the radical vowel, and take the terminations of
these two moods from the common conjugation, throwing the accent back, wherever
it can be done, so that these forms look exactly as if they were made of the indie, in
0/uu. The difference in the conjunctive is simply in the accent :
Tt^stfuu for TiSrSfuu,
aor. 2. med. trpoo-Strai, rgotiTai, &c.
but the opt. has the additional diphthong u, ex. gr.
(Compare below xaivtuai in
and p\p.vniMti in /up.wica/.')
5. It is only the opt. of "erxfiai, which, preserving the regular diphthongs, takes
this accentuation in all Greek writers,
(Vt*, 'UretiTfij 'itrxiffa, Ifrauvre,
but the conj. always is SrrS/uu, etnirT^Txi, &c. These two moods in iiie/tai are, how
ever, sometimes met with accented in the following way, which passes for an Atti
cism,
COnj. itlatrai, opt. enro&oivro*.
In all the other verbs, which are conjugated like Irrxfuti and ilta/uu, these two
moods always are proparoxytona, ex. gr. Hit/txi, tSrmirs, mum, Itritrnrtu, from
Ivvafiai, evlvocftxij Wlaritftat, (see the Anom.) Svetra, from the anomalous ocoâ/, (with
the radical c.) We also find in the verbs in xftai, as in rUt/uu, instances of their
going over to the form e/jUfiv, see the Anom.
and xoiftetft&i.
6. The verbs in vfii usually form these two moods from i*, Qux,*ir,s, tuxtuci/ii:)
yet there are instances, shewing that they also followed the analogy of the others by
taking merely i instead of the double vowel : opt. txitora, II. . C65. rvyyira, Plato
P/iad. extc, conj. 3 pers. sing, nuitanri, (according to the oid form rvsrrjin, rtSrin,
ibid, p.n.d.1)
IV.Dialects.
I. Much of what has been stated respecting the different dialects in the common
conjugation, is also applicable here ; ex. gr. the iteratives in rxn, which always have
the radical vowel short before this termination, ex. gr.
' Fischer on Wetter, 2, 409. 470. 472. 484. 485. has collected instances even of
Ionic writers, but they are far from being sufficient, and this Atticism is in general
so fluctuating, that there is yet much room for farther inquiries.
7 See below 110. 6. (piiit,) and compare ibid. 7. ffifmt. The accentuation, which
we have adopted above for the pass, form Ja<W, xiytira, is grounded on the analogy
of the instances stated in the preceding Obs. Compare above hiy-i, 08. Obs. 9,
VERBS.
201
imperf. rlttnn, Hierxn, hixytieiut,

aor. 2. rreiffKov, iorxov,
and the infin. rtttfttv, ifr&fui, tfTa.fi.Mxi, (for ntirxi, ifravxi,") Sifitv, Sifttvxi, Mfttvxi, (for
JWhu, Icvvm,) crriftitai for a<nixi, &c. ; and farther the Ionic termination of the
3 pert. pi. in xrxi, xro, ex. gr. ritixrxi for r'thiTxt, iiiiexre, Sec. That the Dorians
have x instead of in verbs, whose radical is x, is a matter of course, "crri/ti, otxixi.
2. Epic Poets for the sake of the metre use the infln. nH/utsu, pari. past, nti/ttnt,
and llSmvxi for iiiitxi, or retain the rcdupl. where it is not usual, ex. gr.
3. In the verbs in n/ti of the Ionians are fond of changing the x before vowels
into i, ex. gr. Urixti, (for lerxxri, commonly Irrxn.) Compare above 105. Obi. 8.
Hence they say in the 3 pert. pi. pats, itrixTxi, (instead of i<trxxrxi,) for "rrxtrxi,
Obs. 1.
4. The Ionic omission of the in the terminations rau and r#, (OAs. III. to} 103.)
occurs somewhat less frequently here : Herod. isnVruu, (for -xai,) from Xtrim/uu,
Iwimfsu, Horn. Stis for %i<ra, ftiftmt for fux^txfo, mxm for ihx'mvea.
5. The Dorians instead of < have tj, in the n'no'. rtfum for ritnet, and in the p/.
restoring the (compare 06*. V. 4. to 103.) t/0ivti, Iffrxvn, hiom for
as-/,
6. The Dorians and Epic Poets cut off a syllable of the 3 pert. pi. of the imperf.
and aor. 2. act. in , and use merely the with a short or shortened radical vowel
before it ; consequently instead of im1, ex. gr.
triti* for 'nltiffxt,
instead of xrxt, nfxvay, ex. ^rr.
iâv for ifxrxv, (see Qnpi,')
<V<rai>, 0av, for iWwray, ifinffxv,

instead of *v, iwyf , </*, ear. $r.
S'Stfv, tbuv, for tleffxv, tbvffwi.
7. The Ionians have instead of 1tjVir/Vio for the 1 pert. ting, of the imperf.
8. As the conjunctive of this conjugation (according to 06. III. 2. 3.) is formed
by a kind of contraction, it is resolved in the Ionic dialect into the accented radical
vowel prefixed to the usual termination of the conjunctive in the following manner :
a.) Verbs with the radical vowel i and a use alike the i as radical vowel,
(Obt. 3.) thus,
for rttu, nt, &c. */*xi, &C. nti*/, ritint, nttnri, vtttwfft, rihupxi, &.C. and
for la, lit, &c.I'm, tint, tix/ixi,
for irri, vtu, rrnt, Sec.ifrtv, ifTint, rrlut ffiint, VTttiftiv, &c.
b.) Verbs with the radical vowel o make it throughout ; thus for J<2, J*, IZt,
&C.S*3fi!au, 3aJ, "hunt, &c.
9. The Epic Poets also resolve like the Ionians ; but can do it in two different
ways according to the exigency of the metre :
a.) They lengthen the i. This, according to the general principles, should be
done only by u, and thus they have ttiu, hint, tiiufiti, &c for IS, &c. and
mm for rrS. But where the vowel is *, they may either lengthen or double
it, ( 28. Obs. 3.) so that there is again an n instead of i. This is commonly
done in verbs with the radical vowel a : hence they have for <tt, rrHs, crn,
&c. mlu, errant, rrnn, but with respect to the radical vowel the usage is fluc
tuating, and we meet with both hint, tun, hinn, and fart, Inn
8 The old grammarians do not agree on this point; hence we meet with both
readings in the best editions, and also with a third one, which omits the iota subtcriptum in the 2 and 3 pers. {hint, hln,) and thus completely assimilates them to
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
b.) They shorten the characteristic vowel of the conjunctive (according to
103. Obi. V. 15.) but in general only when they lengthen the radical
vowel | thus,
tuoftMt, ffrua/ilv, for fftai/Aai, ffr'iv[/.tv,
o-tiiitm, for (ittStoit,) Tlf>lTr,
aiwi, for
10. As the Epic Poets make the 3 pert. sing, of all conjunctiva in n, (see above,
103. Obs. V. 13.) there arise here forms, which must carefully be distinguished
partly from the indie, and partly from the 3 peri, pi., ex. gr. Irriri for Irry, Jain for
if.
11. The opt. is not resolved, except that the Ionians say tul/un for til/im, as if of
6EO.
108. Verbs in m< from 'Eft, 'Eft, 'Ift.
There are among the rest of the Anomalous Verbs in (u some
little verbs, of which the root is partly 'Eft, partly 'Eft, and 'Ift,
and which consequently may easily be mistaken one for the other,
especially in compounds, when the spiritus is lost in part; ex. gr.
OTgojEivcH may come from eWi and itvxi, whilst in ocifeTyai and
airtiwi the spiritus may be recognised, but not in Ionic writers,
who do not aspirate the consonant in these cases. The radical
form 'Eft has three principal significations : 1.) to send, 2.) place,
and 3.) clothe, put on; 'Eft signifies to be; and 'Ift to go.
I. sI*)jxi, ' to send, throw,' from 'Eft.
1. This verb may throughout be compared with tIShixi, from
which it differs but little. The i (according td ^ 106. 6.) sup
plies the redupl. ; in the Attic language it is long. Whenever
the short radical vowel s is the initial, it may take the augment,
being changed into ei, ( 84. 2.)
Remark.The comparison with rlfa/u being presupposed, we barely state what
tenses occur of this verb; it is rather uncommon as a simple primitive, and most of
the forms mentioned here appear only iu its compounds.
Act. Pres. "hijm, ms, &c. 3 pers. pi. last, (v,) or UXai, (v,) the
former a contr. of leccat, comp. r.&sWt.
Inf. lhai, part, lets, eonj, lw, opt. Uim, imper. (ieS<() com
monly Ui of'IEft,as rfl of TI0Eft.
the opt. But this reading does not appear well founded, and seems to rest only on
the opinion that the / had passed over to the preceding vowel, (rip, Mr.) See Obi.
V. 14. to 103. and connect with the contents of the Obi. 8. 9. what has been there
stated respecting the eonj. aor. pcut.
VERBS.
203
Tmperf. Trjv, and (oF 'I Erf,) "owv, Compound iQlwv or fykuv,
(see 86. Obs. 2.) 3 pers. pi. vQhaxv.
Per/. eTjcz1, plusq. elxetv.
Fut. %7o>, aor. I. fob, ( 106. 10.) Ion. Mxx.
Aor. 2. m, &c. (not used in the sing., it is supplied by the
aor. 1.) pi. tfAsv, ire, hxt, commonly with the augment :
slfjjsv, eTte, tiffsev, (xaflEijAEV, dveTre, <iipEi<rav.)
Jn/". thai, part, eh, conj. Si.
Opt. elm, pi. eT/xev, eTte, eTev, for eiti/xev, &c.
Ifnper. sr.
Conjugate in the same way particularly the compounds ;
ex. gr. xtyeTvxi, dtpui &<Qts, &c. opt. pi. inTpev for
&c.
PAss. and Medium, compare tWhim, for instance,
Pres. "le/iai, perf. el[izi, (MGeT/jû, (neQeXaQxi, iJ,eSela6a>, &c.
Aor. 1. pass. e9w, commonly with the augment ei9iv,
ex. gr. d<pei9nv, part. dQeQels, &c.
Aor. 1. Med. rini^m, (more in use than the same aor. of
ti'97)(U,i, yet only in the indie.')
Aor. 2. Med. tpm, commonly with the augment e"f/.m,
ex. gr. iipeiro, etpeivro*,
fTorn which e'aflai, eiêvos, (wpoeaQxi, aft/Mews,) conj.
Imper. oS, (a<pov, nôov, irpoebQe, &c.) See p. 186.
Verbal Adjectives, er'eos, eros, {atyeros, &c.)
2. Compare the Obs. III. and IV. to the preceding about
the Attic conj. and opt. ex. gr. itpoui^xi, gpimra.i, 'loiro, dtptomro,
ifpooia&e, and about the dialects ex. gr. dtpew, d<petv, for the conj.
difw, %at for the 3 pers. sing. conj. y.
3. There is, however, a peculiar Ionic-Attic form of the imperf.
in -fiv instead of -*iv in the compounds : mpaien, Od. x. 1 00. rxpleiv,
Plato Euthyd. 51. See Buttm. Complete Greek Grammar.
4. We must also notice the Homeric fut. and adr. dveaet,
dveaoutJ.i, &c. according to another more regular formation, but
which occur only in the compound with dvx, and, as it appears,
merely when this prep, signifies back, again.
1 Like riiuxx. There is a more uncommon form, fuxi, with the intercalated u,
according to 97- Obt. 2. of which the patt. ifiurrai occurs in the New Testament.
See Buttm. Lexitogtu, I. p. 296:
* The accent is not drawn back, because of the mtgnt'enl ; see 84. Obs, 4.
204
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
5. There is a primitive verb 'lil assumed as theme, especially

the compounds ANIH, ME0If2. But the forms, which belong .
hither, and are chiefly Ionic and poetical, rest mostly on the
accent*. We may, however, rank more safely among these
forms Homer's %vnov, and the Ionic ptE/xETipte'vor of METIH,
(imperf. ^rliroor s/astUto,) Ion. for ME0IO, commonly y*WvnyA,
II. eha, I placed, and foxi, I sit.

1. A defective verb, of which the following forms occur in its
transitive signification, but only in particular fixed meanings, to
erect a building, lay an ambush,
Aor. 1 . Ursa., med. eivdfAm,
where the diphthong properly is the augment ; whence the part,
toots, {Od.
280.) and for the sake of the metre infin. taaxt,
(iQiooau,) eaaxro, and with the syllabic augment ieao-xro,
295.) which forms are liable to be mistaken for the similar ones
of ?vvi//xi :but the diphthong ei served also to strengthen the
other forms, imper. slaov, part, e'axs, tlo-d/jt-tvos. The fut. med.
e"(7om. occurs but rarely. Whatever is wanting, is supplied by
T&piw.
2. But the perf. pass., which mostly has the power of an intran
sitive pres. tense, is
fifj-xi, I sit.
Pres. rjnai, foxi, forai, &c. 3 pers. pi. farou, {Ion. Zxrxt,
Epic Ei'ciTai,)
Imperf. [rj/xw, yeo, riaro, &c. 3 pers. pi. faro, {Ion. ixro,
Epic sla.ro,)
Infin. jo-Oat, part, rf/AEvor, imper. -nao, r,aQw, &c.
3. The compound xdOvi^xi is, however, more in use. This
does not take the a in the 3 pers. except when it has not the
syllabic augment in the imperf. ; thus
xdOv\y.xt, 3 pers. xdOnrxi,
Exafiri/xnv or xaS^pmv, 3 pers. exdtoro or xaOriaro,
Infin. xxOrivQat*, part. xx6-hfx.evos, imper. xd9moo,
Conj. xdOufj^ti, if, 7)t<zi, &c. opt. xaQolum, 3 pers. xdQoiro,
(compare 107. Obs. HI. 4.)
3 If we write, for instance, the 2 pert. sing. pro. fuduf, it belongs to IEO, but
(liHui to in.
4 Be careful to observe in the compounds the difference in the accentuation of
%i4nfuu and xatwfat, just as in tup.*!, ( 109. II.)
VERBS.
205
Later writers employ also for the 2 pers. the form xdQri, and in
the imper. x*8ou for Kctt-naati, xdBnao. The Ionians have in their
usual way a rnirnôti, 3 pers. pi. xariotrai, &c.
4. Whatever is wanting, is supplied by s^saQat or IfyaQai, and
its compound with xxrd.
III. "EwwfAi, (Ion. slvvfu,) Iclothe, put on, follows the conjugation
of folxw/M, and has its deficiencies supplied by the theme 'ED,.
See 112. 14.
When not compounded, this verb is merely poetical, and we
find the
Put. saw, saaai, aor. saam, infin. saai, saaat, tned. \aaiy.m,
per/, pass, sliâi, slum, street, &c. whence the 3 pers. pi.
Plusq. s'letro, (II. a. 596.)and of the form ?<rpwu, plusq.
2 pers. saao, 3 pers. saro,
and with the syllabic augment aor. ssaaa.ro, plusq. ssaro.
The compound /AêW/xi is used in prose :
Fut. d/Mpisaco, Attic tifjUpiu, aor. 1. rifji^tsaa, kfjuQiioou,
Per/, pass. v>iA$lsaix.ai,ri(A(pieaai, ni/.Qieorai, &c. infin. hy.iQiiaQat.
The compound with sari, commonly without eliding the i, is like
wise used ; ex. gr. aor. 1. med. sirisaaadai.
IV. si/ii, I am, of'Efi.
1. The usual conjugation of this verb is the following :
Pkes. Sing. sI/ai,
sis, commonly s7,
sarin, sari,
Dual,
sarbv,
sarov,
PL
io/Asy,
sars,
tialv, s'tai,
Infin. s*vxi, part. <>v, (gen. ovros,) ovaa, ov,
Conj. a, ys, y, yrov, of/xev, wrs, Zai, (v,)
Opt. ei't)Vj sms, s'lvi, eiVitov, s\virviv, sm/asv, seldom sfasv, smre,
seldom e?te, emaav, commonly e^v5.
Imper. 'tadi6, saraP, Dual, sarov, earuv, pi. sars, saruaav, or saruv,
Imper/. sing, w,
is, commonly riado?, vv,
Dual,
wmv, or yi<ttov,
rimv, or "harm,
PI. wfAsv,
virs, or wars,
vtaetv.
' The particle
well ! be it >o .' appears to have arisen from the 3 peri. ting, it*,
for it requires the ting, whether you supply touts or txutx.
* This must not be confounded with Mi, know! See in the following tTSa.
' Plato, Hep. 2. p. 3G1. has a singular form %tu.
8 With later writers Is. Compare 103. Obs.V. 12.
206
A GREEK. GRAMMAR.
The fut. is formed as merf. :

Ejofiai, 2 pers. $<yy or efffi, 3
fra<, commonly 2Wi,
infin. eaeoQxi, See.
Verbal adj. (neuter) eute'ov, (aynariov, &c.)
2. There is, moreover, of the med.
1 pers. sing, imperf. %/x.riv,
the same with the act., but of less frequent occurrence in the old
writers. See about a pretended 3 pers. pi. ei'sto for 3vto, Od.
v. 106. Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. The 2 pers. sing, of the imper.
wo, suffo, is found in Doric and Epjc writings.
3. The present e\y.\, &c. is enclitical, but is only used as such,
when it merely is, the logicql copula, (connecting the predicate
with the subject ;) whenever it denotes a being, an existence, or
has a particular emphasis, it retains its accent. The 3 pers. sing.
in particular then has it on the first syllable ; ex. gr. Sebs tarty,
ion imi lovXos. It is also always in this form earw after the unac
cented particles ws, olx, el, and after tovto and aXKa, when these
words have the apostrophus, oux eVn, rovr %ern. Else, when the
encliticality is barely prevented, (see 14. 5.) the accent is on
the final syllable ; ex. gr. Xoyos e<tt, ayaflor V iarh. The 2 pers.
iT or sTs never is enclitic, but the dialectic form east is so (4.)
4. There is no verb, in which the dialects differ more than in this.
We simply mention those particulars, which do not follow of
course from what was stated in this respect in the 06s. to 103.
Pre8. Doric sing, infM, eaal, iurt, which also serves for the
3 pers. pi. eIcti :Ionic 2 pers. sing, also iaai, 1 pi. eijiaev,
3 pi. , (v :)there is likewise a poetical form iy.it for
eay-h.
Imperf. Ionic sometimes r,a and Ifa, 2 pers. ear, 3 pers. tie or
%ev, 2 pers. pi. exre, &c. and sometimes eov, (the 1 pers. in
Homer,) of the primitive form 'EH, and eaxov. The Attic
form of
the 1 pers. % for
comes from the form ex. Instead of the 3 pers. sing, h,
Epic Poets have likewise the lengthened qm and em9. By
a singular anomaly the Dorians have -he for the same
3 pers. The 3 pers. pi. is Ion. %ax\ and Doric eaxv 10.
II. X. 762. has U< for the 1 perf which is doubtful. See Buttmann's Complete
Gr. Gr. p. 551. Note.
10 That m is also quoted for , rests on a few passages of Poets, where J> is
VEBBS.
207
Infill, old and Ionic efiev, tpevfi, enftev, EfxpiEvai,

Doric -ny.it and
Lastly, the Ionians make of the primitive form 'EH part,
saiy (with the accent on the final syllable,) conj. %u, opt.
5. In the compounds of this verb the prep, takes the accent,
whenever it is not contrary to the general rules; (see Obs. I. to
103.) for instance itapayu, 2 pers. iti^n, but na%nv, (because of
the augment,) naîarai, (because of the syncope,) wageJvai, (ibid.
Obs. 1.4. 3.) conj. itxpa, ris,
&c. and the opt. 3 pi. ira%a7ev, be
cause of the formation in jai. The part, too keeps the accent ;
ex. gr. wagtiv. (See below 117. about ndpx, ht, &c. for wcipsri,
&c.)
V. sJ{uf I go, of 'Ifl.
1. The radical vowel of this verb is i, which lengthened be
comes i, and is attended with many an anomaly in form and sig
nification. The conjugation of what is in use, is as follows :
Pres. Sing. sT{m,
sir, commonly ef,
sfm, (v,)
Dual,
iroy,
iVov,
Plur. 1/aev,
1'te,
i'xoi, (v,)
Infin. levai,
Part. My, always with the accent on the final syllable, like
the part. aor. in other verbs.
Conj. iai, apt. i'oipu or io/nv,
Imper. iSi, (in compounds eF, as nqioet, &c.) t'ru, &c.
3 pers. pi. I'rciiaav, or Iovtwv,
Imperf. sing, wv, commonly fiice, or ipa,
TpEir, or r)EiG-Ja,
rin, or tieiv
(/on. we or wev,)
rieifAtv, Or ^/xev,
flElTE, Or 71TE,
riEtxav, (/on. ijio-av, Homer *po-av.)
The dufli according to the analogy of the 2pers.pl.
construed with a plum/, butpreceding it, as t?(
tîTi xifxlxi, Heshd, e. 321. in
which case it is a peculiarity of syntax. See below, J 129. Obt. 2.
11 Both Doric forms are also the 1 pert. pi. imperjf.
" Chiefly only before vowels.
208
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Med. (with the signif. to hasten, hasten on,) or away, is used

only in the pres. and imperf.
iefjuu, it'/xw,
and is conjugated like "epxi, (of mijm.)
Verbal adj. Item, \r"os, or \rvtrias, \mros.
2. The compounds take the accent in the same way as those
of tifjA, ex. gr. wipufu, itipn, and thus agree with the same per
sons in that verb, as does the 3 sing, wdpewi with the 3 pi. in ei/il.
3. This verb is the only instance of a verb in im having i for its
radical vowel". As the verbs with the radical vowel f keep this
vowel in the pi., but change it into *i in the sing., so does e?/x<
lengthen the T into ei, (st(u,tiat, 1/x.ev, IVe, like tiSti/ai, *)<ti, e/aev, ete.)
In the infin. is'vai, and in the med. ttfjuu, &c. the e is a mere inter
calation ; it should properly be Uau, i/juu, (as ti'8-h/ju, -eWi, -Efx.ai,)
and the old and Epic infin. I'^tEv, 1/xEvai, (like ti6e'(xev or tiSe'voi,)
agree with this analogy. The Homeric opt. tim, (II. ai. 139.
Orf. . 496.) is perfectly analogous with ei instead of 7, according to
the analogy of (pDw. see 107. Obs. III. 6. with the Note. Tra
dition has also admitted one instance of the opt. i'eitiv, like ti9eiV,v
in 11. r. 209. according to the literal analogy of thcu, (nShxt.)
Homer has elvQx instead of its or tt.
4. No tenses, but those stated above, are in use in the common
language ; this verb is really a defective one. The active forms,
which we have mentioned, belong to the mixed anomalous verb
tpx^y-ou, yXQov, (see the Anomalous Verbs,) and supply some of
its less usual forms.
5. There is a singular anomaly in this verb in point of signifi
cation ; the pres. ei/lu conveys the meaning of the fut. I shall or
will go, without any genuine exception, but in Epic poets and
later writers. This e/x.i thus supplies the fut. etevaonai, (see the
Anom. fyxfiuuu,) which, owing to its heaviness, particularly in
compounds, is less used14.
6. The other moods of si/u, whose nature allows it, may also
convey the meaning of the fut., though this does not imme13 The pi. of Him, and the aor. 2. med. i<ptl/tw, (see the Anom. iunu, fUi,~) are
isolated syncopated forms, which follow the same analogy, (compare j 106. Obs. 8.)
' This is by no means confined to the Attics ; see, for instance, Herod. 3, 72.
(trafijitiK,) Horn. //. k. 450. Only that in Homer there are also instances of its being
the pres., (ex. gr. Od. x. 191.) but there are no genuine instances of this in the Attics,
at least in prose ; for those are not genuine, which may be expressed in English by
npret., though the sense unquestionably points to the Jut.; for instance, / am now
going home, instead of lwill, shall go home, am on the point ofgoing home.
Verbs.
209
diately appear in accessary or dependent sentences, in which they

generally are employed
It is most distinctly seen in the part.,
ex. gr. irxQiaKevattyro as dirtuv, he equipped himself as one who
will go away l6. But in the generality of instances all the other
moods and the part, have the signif. of the pres. and are thus
used for the same moods of eôfj.ai, to which they are commonly
preferred, as being less heavy.
7. The anomalous accent of lav must not mislead the learner
to mistake this participle for an aorist. The same anomaly takes
place in the Ionic iuv of si/xi and in xttiv. See the Anom. xia 1T.
8. Instead of the imperf., which we have given above, ancient
grammarians have another, e?v, eTs, e?, i'fxsv, IVe, I'vxv, and along
with it an aor. 2. i'ov, wf, &c. to which they erroneously annex
the part. lav, merely for the sake of its accent. Whatever occurs
of these forms, is barely Epic, and fluctuates like other old prceterites between the signif. of the imperf. and of the aor. ; but \\e
never meet with any except the 3 pers.
Vie or Viev, Vitw, taatv
IB .
Grammarians alone supplied thus the two other forms according
to analogy ".
9. Out of these two simple preterites arose in common use
two more complete forms, viz. from Toy, with the Epics w'ov or w>v,
and from e!v, in common language, the tie.v mentioned above.
This last form at the same time became viia. or
which is the
Ion., just as in t&dim, er&m gave the Ion. iriJ;, and in eI/xi,
(/ am,) yv became the Ion. ?ia, with this difference, that this
ri'ia, rise, continued also in use in the Attic language, along with
5e.v. Very incorrectly the old grammarians stated this
ya, as
a perf., and -jeiv as a plusq. derived from it, though the signi18 Ex. gr. Thuc. 6, 7- 'F.vtfii i initsu irirai faixurxi, he thought he should be able
to go awny, when he liked, where we also could say in Knglish, he hoped to go away.
Again, after Sf*,vfu, ex.gr. u/tortr an'tvxt, juravit se abiturum, he swore to go away.
See also Plato Fluid. 1U3.
" It is plainly the fut. in Xenoph. K. A. 2, 3. er."H|r rmumfifum, i.*ifyn
Ipa; tif rylt 'EXXdia, xeii aiirit itrrmv Wi rr)v ifJMiirtv oj^kv.
17 The part, <* may be considered as a pralrrite, in connections, like ex. gr. II. a.
179. ttxaS \uiMujiuMtinvv arx<r<ri. But we shall shew in 145. Obs. 7., that evi
dent pres. tenses are thus employed. There is uo true part. aor. hut ixBm, (see
Anom. ifâfitai )
ttripir, Xfofir**, and the like, be found as imperf. in the editions of prosewriters, they are either false readings, (ex. gr.lfutter Sjhi,) or the incorrect language
of later writers.
19
namely, bears the same relation to ilfu and "rxt, as iriSw to rlStifti and
P
210
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fication militated against it, and there are no other characteristic

forms of a per/, riia., (in am, Evai, part. us,~) occurring any
where'0. This imperf. yz, yets, &c. has chiefly continued in use
to supply the place of the imperf. riô/xriv of EpyofiM, which
because of its equivocal meaning, u.%y>f>\i.<H having the same im
perf., was seldom employed21.
10. We must further notice in the Epic language another
medial form : but without including the accessary idea of haste :
Fut. and aor. 1. eYaoi/,su, sladfj-viy,
which are both liable to be mistaken for the similar forms of ei'Scu,
especially since Homer also has hlsxro without eliding the vowel
of the prep., xarmtuxTo, went down.
' a Compare with this hit and Hi as a lengthening of iT and ", the form h'iiut
for iiSuv or Hint in the following Section, tinder T2. For the reading im with the
iota tubscriplum has unquestionably been introduced by grammarians merely for the
sake of this derivation from iia, and the lengthening itself is owing to the wish of
applying the augment without preventing the syllable u being recognised. But the
forms rufi.it. piifi, f,trat, which really occur, have undoubtedly been introduced
solely by the seeming analogy of the ptutq., since in the beginning w'fttt, n'iri, wear,
were alone used ; hence the latter form (fiifai) has really continued in the Ionic
dialect.
11 It will be proper to give some examples of !f as imperf. Plato Rep. 6. init., where
Socrates relates a conversation, and after having stated the question of the inter
locutor. ' what kinds of malice he meant,' continues, Km lyii pit Jpa ras Ifi^n;
,
i Si n*xiwo v!f Ixrutat vptrnyaytra xai tXtytt arret. Here any language,
which makes a distinction between aor. and imperf.. absolutely requires the imperf. :
in eo eram ut iticerem, ' j allot* dire' in French, and in English, / mat going to my.
Xaoph. K. n. 0, 4. 10. II. (5.C.) where the conversation of two persons meeting
together is related : 'O Kvêt utiv, 'Zyit it reii <ri iipn. Ivirxt^lfittH, Snt t%tn, ftuifint, (a various reading has f'ia instead of ifn without i-nnuiun.) 'Ej.i Si y',
ifl i Va'tti-ri/.;. tai pa rebf Oiti,-, r't IrataStarifitttc Hia.l'lato Charm, init. *Hxy pit
rtp vôrtealaavo rov erâroxiiov' oJov Si ita %pottu aîypttat aepttut r.a ifi ras evtr.Stif
iixr^tfiut, xai Sfl xai lis rrt* 1'avtteu vraXairtxtlirzXSet, xai ai/ro&i xxrlAafc, x. r. X.
The first lines here, as in the introduction of others of Plato's Dialogue*, describe
the existingcircumsthnces at the time of the occurrence ; r.a ivi ras SiTj//sif denotes,
as the pi. shews, a duration, and is consequently an iviperf. ; but immediately with
the action, lis rin Tav^hv wxXmrfxt ucr.xSn, begins the fact related in the aor.
Demosth. c Strph. I. p. 1 106, is also clearly an imperf ; for the preceding tytutat is
a time past, and the following, 'Eywii, tins iilxu fit, iri reur t,a, is the well-known
hypothetical statement, where imperf. denote the present time; consequently r.a as
a necessary imperf. cannot be changed. But this passage being rather involved, let
us take Herod. 2, 42., where the conditional or contingent, "Eyeiyt it HiaTtXXaxi
rt at "r^ct tfiiavrlt, stands without any premises, and, as the context shews, cannot
possibly be time past. These and other distinct passages, in which the natural
order of thoughts, and the known practice of the language, suggest the imperf.,
must serve as a foundation to judge of passages, in which the uor. may appear more
proper, nod the same with other passages of the ancients, where real imperf. stand
in n connection, which leads us to expect an aor., since it frequently happens that
the action, which our mind conceives as rapidly performed and past, may be conidered by the speaker in its duration, or in its co-existence with another action
related by him, when it must, of course, he expressed iu the imperf.
VERBS.
211
109.
The following verbs must likewise be stated here :
I. $7)fAi, / say, of <S>Afl.
Pres. sing. (pn/Ai,
Qrif,
tynot, (v,)
Dual,
(parov,
Qxtov,
PL <pxfi.it,
pare,
<pam, (y,)
Infin. tyavxt, Part, (pas,
Conj.
Opt. <p*/w, Imper. <p&i,
Imperf. sing, 'iipnv, 'iqms, commonly e$7>o$a, etpy,
Dual, sipxrov,
iQxrw,
PI. Epa/XEV, ?(paT,
etpxaxv, (poetically etpav,)
Fut. <pri<Ta>,
aor. l.*<pnaa.
The med. QzaSat, ttpan-nv, (imper. <pxo for <pxuo in Homer,) is
used as well as a few perfects of the pass, voice, like
THtyxabw, (be it said,) Ttetyxottivos .
Verbal adjectives, (fxreos, (pxros.
1. The pres. indie, with the exception of <pr,s, is enclitic accord
ing to 14. The compounds are accented aCfj.ipniMi, av^r,s,
diTltpn/j.!, dvTKpris.
2. With respect to the signif. of this verb, we must distin
guish 1.) the general one to say, 2.) the more particular ones to
affirm, assert, pretend, concede, and the like. The pres. (pnpcl
includes both ; but in the first signification it is chiefly the pres.
and imperf. act. with all their moods, which are in common use,
the rest is supplied by the Anom. tliruv, &c. which see. The fut.
and aor. ip-nnu, tpnnx, have preferably the more particular signi
fications, which in the imperf, infin., and part. pres. to avoid
ambiguity, are more usually expressed either by (piaxeiv, which
else is not used in prose, or by the middle voice *.
3. We have arranged and denominated the forms of this verb,
as their formation requires; but with respect to its use, we notice
further that the imperf. i<pr,v commonly is likewise aor., and may
be interchanged with eIWov as perfectly synonymous. To this
t(pnv must be joined the infin. (pxvxi, which in a narrative is always
used in the sense of the preterite. If in the affirmative we say,
for instance, Eifn 6 TIsîx'Kyis, Pericles said, we say in sermone
1 For instance, t$n rxev^ccZuv, he said that he was in haste, ifecrxi r<TevhetZ,tti, he preitnded to be in haste, finun, pretending, asserting ; ci fxftiw, denying, (for iS Qn/ti it
exactly the contrary of <fn/ii, I affirm, assert, see 148. Obs. 2.)
P 2
212
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
obliqno, fl-.xi tov YltûCKix, Pericles (is reported) to have said.

Whenever the infin. pres. is required, Xiysiv or (pxvxin, which we
mentioned before, must be employed.
4. In the language of daily intercourse an apheeresis, (sub
tracting from the beginning of a word,) has given rise to the
following forms,
n/xl, say I, ('inquam,') the French dis-je,
on repeating one's self in a lively speech ; and the same in the
imperf. vrt, n, for tipriv, s<pn, (Qw, (py,) merely in such locutions, as
7jy 5' iyu, said I,
?i V os, said he,
in relating a conversation ; and to this must be added the Epic
ri, (he or she said it and,)
after having related a speech by way of a transition to the con
tinuance of a narrative.
II. xs7fMi, I lie, of KEIft, KEft.
Pres. xitaai, xeTtosi, &c. 3 pers. pi. xthrau,
Infin. xiiahai, part. xEtptsvor, imper. xtiao, &c.
Conj. xicou.x.t, xe'ti, &C. opt. xeoi/xtj*,
Imperf. ixsl^nv, exeiiio, exeito, &c
Fut. xsiao/xxt.
Compounds xxri.xmt.xi, xxrxxnuo, &c but the infin. xxrxxitabxi.
1. The Ionians also have of the radical verb KEfi, xs'sTai, xe'ovrai, xiiabxi, besides other forms as xtiartu, xixrxi, for xeTvti, and
the iterative xiixero.
2. The act. form xilu, xiu, in Homer, conveys the meaning of
the fut. I will lie down. See below the Note to SrW in the
Anom. AA.
3. This verb, according to some grammarians, had no conjunc
tive mood; hence we find here and there xsTpxt, xeTtsu, in the
sense of the conjunctive, ex. (jr. SiaxEi/xai, Plato Phatd. 84. and
xEirai in Homer, where other critics read xyrxi.
4. Along with its simple meaning, xsi^xt is also considered as
a perf. pass, of ri$*nu: hence all its compounds correspond in
their signification to the compounds of rOy/At, ex. gr. AmT&npu,
I consecrate, dvxxu/Mxt, I am consecruted *.
* The difference between this and the real perf. fast, of r/Ssi/u is simply, that it
denotes the continued passive state, and hence has not as generally as the other the
VERBS.
213
III. Olo, I know, of eI'Sw.

1. The old verb tiiu properly signifies to see, a few of its tenses
only signify to know. None of the forms of one signification
occur in the other ; and as the forms, which mean to know,
have many other anomalies, it is of great practical use to learn
them here separately. Look for it in the sense of to see in the
list of Anomalous Verbs under tiow and h%xw.
2. OrSa is properly the per/. 2. of sl'ou, like eWz, Ionic o'Ua of
sYxu, (/ have seen, perceived,) but has the power of a. pres. tense
in the signification of to know, and the plusq. has, of course, that
of the imperf. (see below, 100. Obs. i.) The 2pers. oTSas and
the whole pi. oi'Sa/xsv, oI'S^te, ol'Sotui, are of very rare occurrence
in the Attics as the regular conjugation of oiSae, which is supplied
by syncopated forms ; as,
Pres. sing. otSa,
olahat,
o75s, (v,)
Dual,
i'ittov,
i'o-rov,
PI.
lapel),
"an,
"aaut, (v,)
Tnfin. etSiioUf
part, elicit, via., is,
Conj. siX<S,
opt. t!$(jv,
Imper. ia$i*, "aru, &c.
Imperf. sing, ydeiv, Att. ffin, I did know,
rlhis, commonly yfeiaSa, Ait. ^SrnrSsc,
rfSst, Att. y'Seiv, and
PI. JiSei/xev, or rtufjuv,
ipdciTE, or ri ars,
t)o"eo"v, or yuan,
Fut. ilao^M, more rarely eiW-w, I shall know or learn.
Verbal adj. (^neuter,) Iseov.
The aor. and the true perf. are supplied from yiyvaianu.
See the list of Anomalous Verbs.
3. The Ionians and Dorians have i'S/xev for IVpiEv : the Epics
rS/AEvai and i'S/aev for eISe'vî, and instead of the plusq. r,hiv, they
also have a lengthened form, for instance, 2 pers. neihis, rutins,
3 pers. w/5h,
(//. x. 280. Od. .. 206. Apoll. Rh. 2, 822.)
subject of the act. with <r or
connected with it, for instance rmrSSnfu, I put
together, compote, rtnr'tBiiTxi ' xircii, it has been put together, computed 4y Aim,
rvyKitrai, it it composed, contitts of.
* A syncopated form instead of tlixri*, oli-rS*. See Obt. V. 12. to h 103.There
is an evidently incorrect, yet old and Attic form ittSut, see Pierson ad Mar. 283.
* M'hich must not be confounded with IrSi from il/ti.
214
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
and Herod. (1, 45.) has with a shortened termination 7)EiSe, see
the Note to page 201.'Homer has instead of ^<xaviWv with the
first syllable shortened, (Od. I. 772.)
4. Formerly grammarians used to mention here a particular
verb,
to which they gave all the above forms beginning with i, and these
were considered as syncopated ; the forms oTSx, tliivM, were
merely stated in the list of Anomalous Verbs under eI'So/. The
Doric dialect has indeed a verb taapu, "a-ns, taari, but supposing
even that all those forms are derived from it, usage has most
certainly intermixed them, and the popular language of both old
and later times has constantly employed in the sing. oTSa, and
in the pi. IVpiEv. The above mixed conjugation is, therefore,
best calculated for a Grammar, which is to teach the practice of
the language.
5. But on looking a little more narrowly into the anomalies of
the Greek language, we soon perceive that those forms actually
belong to <n$z or si'So/. It is obvious that the Ionic i'Vsv did not
come from IV/aev : the latter, conformably to general analogy,
(see 23.) rather came from the former, and I'S/aev as'well as the
infin. 1'5/AEvai evidently belong to siou, and not to Tod/m. Add to
this the striking analogy, not only of the language in general,
which so readily transfers the forms of the per/, by means of a
syncope to the conjugation in (u, (see 110. 9.) but also the
analogy of this verb itself, as no one can deny that the forms of
the plusq. riv/Aiv, yvre, differ from rtâixiv, t!Seite, barely by this
syncope. Now "o-piEv, "are, stand exactly in the same relation to
oiSa/AGv, ol'SaTE, for the difference of the very changeable vowel in
this and similar verbs is of no weight whatever. The imper. !trSi
was submitted, exactly like xUpaxî, aM%$t, to similar abbre
viations, ( 110. 9.) as well as the 3 pers. pi. \'axaib, from which
the collateral form 't'on/M appears to be derived.
6. The syllable u instead of oi in the other moods of oi$a has in
'The point is completely decided by some striking analogies, especially irtmSfti*
and iixrnr, which are compared below, 1 10. 9. But it will not he amiss to review
here the analogy of all the forms proceeding from ',,* and Jim. Just as wt'.Sm
makes
so do ", and
make
and properlv also ink, the i supply
ing the place of the redupl. ($ 84. Ob>. 6 ) A shortened form
passed Irom the first verb into the Iouic dialect, and the second into the common
VERBS.
215
its favor the analogy of mix*, (Ion. oTxa,) emus, (Anom. e'txw.) See
the Note below.Here too we plainly see the transition to the
conjugation in tti : for, whilst the part. fiSir continues in the
usual analogy, the conj. and opt. take the terminations of that
conjugation, sldu, (circurnflexed,) eiSsinv. But the Epic Poets
may shorten the long vowel of this conjunctive, and neglect its
accent as readily as in other conjunctives : "va ti'Sopisv for s!Sa//xev.
The radical vowel i was also shortened, conj. iS<='o;, part, i&i/ise,
(Homer6.)
A GENERAL VIEW OF THE ANOMALY OF VERBS.
110.Syncope and Metathesis.
I. It is true that, whatever deviates in language from the larger
mass of what is regular, still follows some analogy even in this
deviation ; but this, especially in a dead language, is not always
apparent, a variety of instances of the usage in common life, and
of the different dialects not having gone over to the language of
language. But the complete form mm, Uiia, by changing ti into /, and by contrac
tion (as it were of una, iTJ,) produced
the part. (<*if, tlaas, and
the moodt
iStlti, stated above, 6. Tlie written language itself furnishes the
proof, that practice retains sometimes several forms at once, and sometimes a single
one ; the pari, of imxa occurs in the three forms, itixiis, lixii;,
but that of tiix
occurs only in one, ithis The plutq. required a new augment: Uixu commonly took
it according to the analogy of lo^raû ieZfrafyv, Itfuut: but there was likewise a
regular plutq. with the syllable m shortened. This appears from the putt, form (of
the per/, iiy/iui, plutq. mypw,)
'i pert, plutq. ifiurt, without the augment ukt:
In the same way arose from Uiia,
plutq. (nf3ii,) jSSi/v.
To this was added the syncope, which, as we shall see below, produced out of imxa,
(altering the vowel,)
the 1 pert. pi. of the per/. Uiyfui, 3 dual of the plutq.
and out of i!ia, (with the same alteration,) the forms
(T3-ff$Tt, ) ir$a,
T&piy and irptv, lmt
but in the plutq. out of SJn
yrftu, jrrri, vira*.
Homer's "rat, (instead of It-rat,) differs from this
(instead of fii-rat,) merely in
the omission of the augment The accent, moreover, shews thut Iran did not come
from Utifu, since the 'A pert. pi. of impi must necessarily be Iran, (see Iti/u,) aud this
is continued by the additional analogy of the verb w,
feixa, (oi into i, ux-rant,) u\arit,
eiia, (oi into i, la-rant,) tram.
Both are Attic forms instead of the regular isUan, tliari, which establishes the commini anomaly of the termination ran, instead of the generally prevailing final
Byllalile an of the per/.
6 To facilitate the use of most Dictionaries and Indexes, we observe that all the
above statements must be looked for in the pret. tenses of iUu, i/JU>, and "rn/xi, and
in their compounds.
216
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
books. Such isolated instances, which can only be learned and

remembered singly, constitute anomaly in its strictest meaning ;
but deviations, which occur in several instances, are consequently
smaller analogies, which ought properly to be added in particular
rules and conjugations to the more general ones. This, however,
would be rather inconvenient ; those smaller anomalies, and
isolated instances are, therefore, investigated separately, and con
sidered as the anomaly of the language, which in the Greek verb
in particular is very considerable.
2. Part of this anomaly has already been stated as exceptions ;
the rest is arranged in an Alphabetical List. But to promote
individual observation, and guard against a mere mechanismus,
not only the smaller analogies, to which these deviations conform,
are mentioned under the head of each verb in the List, but we
previously review some classes, which comprise a greater variety
of instances.
3. A. main class of deviations is produced by syncope. The
conjugation in fti, being, as we have seen above, a kind of synco
pated form, those parts of a common verb, which agree with that
conjugation, must be ranked in this class of anomaly.
4. Some verbs drop the vowel out of their root, ex. gr. ntKai,
3 pl.imperf. eweXe or ewXe, ntKxw, aor. I. pass. Eir\x$m, nira^m,
fut. VTîjo/jLat1. There are two things principally to be attended
to here:
a. ) In some verbs the aor. 2. is formed merely in this way,
Ve'to/xoi, (imperf. eVeto/awv,) aor. 2. htroymv, syelâ) iy&lpofj.at,aor. 2. Tipyo/ATiy, (/ woke,) dyziqu, part. aor. 2. med.
dypo/Aivos, [assembled ; but part. pass, aynpo/^svoi, who are
assembling.) Farther eVôv and eWov, (see exu and
and r)\v$ov, tjX&ov, (see igô/Mu.)
b.) This syncope is most natural after a redupl. : hence
vrnrpdoxw from nspdu, itimru from IlETfl, y.'nMu from
MENH, and in the perf. as linu, perf. (SeSe>7)x,) SeS/xnxa, (see, however, other similar forms at 11. under
Metathesis,) itinrayMi from nETAfi, see -ETawt//Ai. See
also /xe'm^Xeto.1 in /j.i\cu. Hither belong also the aor.
IxExXopinv and eVf^vov from xiXo/xai and <[>ENX2 with a
double augment according to 83. Ob. 7.
1 Many instances, which seemingly belong to this syncope, are more properly
ranked under a metathesis. See below, 11. 2.
VERBS.
217
5. The most usual syncope is that of the connecting vowel',

of which the principal instances will be investigated, viz. under
A the pres. and imperf, under B the aor., and under C the per/.
A) In the pres. and imperf. (when this continues to be the
imperf.) the syncope takes place in oi/xai, u/jL-nv, for ototMct, wcvaiiv,
and in the Epic pva^xi, eqvoSai, epvro, for pueoSxi, epuioSat, epviro,
(see e$va>,) compare also below in the List otvai, and Eleven from
e$a>. Hither belongs likewise the Epic uTEorai, anvro, (to strive,
threaten,) and (according to 106. Obs. 6.) all the verbs in
6. Several verbs have (B) an aor. with this syncope, which
must be compared with the aor. 2. or considered as such. In
the 1 pers. act. nothing remains as termination but the v, and as
this can take place only with a vowel preceding, it produces a
form, which mostly agrees with the aor. 2. of the conjugation in
fAt in all its moods and part. And the vowel of these aor., whe
ther long or short, whether x or n, conforms generally to the
perf. 1. of the same verb, and remains unchanged in all its persons
and moods, except that n and are commonly changed in the
opt. into ei, at, oi, and in the part, into ei, x, on. Thus,
ofUvwiu, 2BEX1, Eff/37)xa,Eir/3r)y, Eff/SwpiEV, o-|3ijvai, t/Se/tiv.
/3a/va, BAfi, fiifinxx,E/Sriv, s^-nixev, (3wcut fialriv, firii.
SiSpxaxu, SiSpaxx, Efyav, el'pat/.tv, ipxvxi, ipaiviv, Spas*.
KTetvu, EXTaxa,EXTav, EXTaptEv, XTa'vai, x-rxlw, xtV.
yiyvcioxai, eyva/xa,ayvcuv, Eyvw/AEv, yvwvxt, "yoi7)v, ywvs.
fiiiu, fiefiiantx,ifitaiv, sfilu/Asv, fitwvxi, fiicZw, fitoui.
(f'ju, vitpt/Kx,'itpvv, EipUpCEv, (pSvai, Qvnv 4 for <pvlm, tpus.
See the more complete aor. of this kind in oX/oxo/mci, fiiP%daxv,
$vu>, WETo/xai, o-xe'XXg;, T\7jvai, (f)5otv<y, and isolated and uncommon
forms in fixKku, ynpiaxai, x\xu, ovtxu, itXiu, tttîtu.
Obi.A. The aor, In-Xt/v, from irX, (for
is the only one, which coming
from 5rXI, (not *Xoti,) retains the even in the pari. xxAi, (WirXvs, 11. .291.)
which undoubtedly had Sms, (for tii,
in the gen.
* That we call this a syncopated formation, merely because the usual connecting
vowel docs not appear, without intending to assert that it had been there primi
tively and dropped, follows already from what we stated, 106'. Obi. 6. 78 The length of the a appears from instances like the close of an anapaestic verse
of Aristoph. (np. Heroditm. Pirrsoni, p. 4C5.) Si? | fi 3' it tin \ irfya- | /tit, and
from the lonismus ilpr.t. Compare with it particularly yr.fitai, in the Anom. yr(irun. We see that the {, which everywhere preferably has i after it, also prevails
here.
* Theocr. 15, 94. where formerly the reading was incorrectly fm. Compare
above 107. Obi. III. 6.
218
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
04i. 2. As we have seen above, j 106. 107. that the termination 3/ of the imper.
belongs likewise to the syncopated formation, since it has an immediate con
nection with the root, the imper. of the above forms, as far as it occurs, is formed
in the same way ; ex. gr. /39/, JjSS/, <ym3i, HB,, (pi. (3Sti, SSti, &c.) Thus the fol.
lowing four imper. in 3j and its abbreviation <, ( 106. 4.) must be ranked among
the aor. mentioned here, viz.
See in the Liit, <r/w,
^x"< ft'"-
7. To these aor. act. must be added a corresponding pass. aor.

in ixri-t, oo, to, &c. which thus corresponds to the aor. 2. med. of
the regular conjugations. But it must be remembered, 1.) that
most instances have not the medial, but the perf. pass, signif.
2.) that with regard to the vowel they conform to the perf. pass.,
and 3.) that they are exclusively confined to the most ancient
Poets. Some of them actually belong to one of the mentioned
aor. act. as pass. viz.
E^XTi.anv, opt. (skiifj.m,of tpKriv, (ZvitfiXriTm,) see fiaXKu,
KTapt*iv, UTtzibxt, KTa.jj.sws,from t'xTstv, see XTEiva/.
See also in the List in the proper place the forms
avyyuoiTo, ovTiixsvos, and in reference to the mentioned xXy&,
the old part. xXvuswi.
Whence it follows that those, which follow the same analogy
without any act. form occurring, must be considered in the same
light ; ex. gr.
una, icenwi/.'xi, (ewvi/pitiv,) ajj.'SwTO,
Xvcu, KsXvijlxi,
(eKuj/itiv,)
Xvto,
ipj/ai, i(pi[j.zt, EpSf/AW,
<p&i'ptEvor, opt. (p9-7|U.T)v.
See the List. See also inX-ruim in sri'/xwX*)pu, Evaa&E in va/w,
hao-viAm in atvai, tyv[j.ny in %e', and the part, xti'/xevoj-, WTapisw,
(in wsTaswupUi) St^/xevoy, u.pniii.tios.
8. Neither must the syncopated aor. pass., having a conso
nant before their termination, (eXexto, Hyfim, &c.) be separated
from them. They are derived from the simple theme of the
verb, and when this simple theme is at the same time the usual
one, they distinguish themselves from the impcrf. and the moods
of the pres. tense barely by this syncope, on account of which
they also agree exactly, like the preceding, with their perf. and
plusq. pass, without a redupl., with which tenses they may be com
pared, but with which they must not be confounded. In their
act. and pass, and medial signif., they all follow the pres. in (*jm,
and they too belong exclusively to the most ancient poetry,
VERBS.
219
Sexoputi, IhUynw, etehfy, &c. SeSe'x^'aor. syncope,

(iSEy/AW,) eSeô, eSexto, in/in. Ss'x&ai, imper. Se'I-o.
/Aiyvyî, (MI TO,) (1/u.iV/Anv,) /xi'x-ro.
XE&eo-âi,(i\iyif.w,, Xe'1;o, Xe'xto, Xex^ssiwocXXa;,(EWaX/xw,) tlaXro, &C.
opvufju, (OPfi,)imper. oaao, ipyvw, <3to, ir/Zr. og&ai,
parf. o/j/xEyor, and some others like eVevto for eyinro,
iVKro, (see EiJxo/Aai,) aXro, (see aXXojx.cn,) eXe'Xixto, (see
eXeXi^w,) 'UfAtvas, ag/XEVOr.
04. 3. That the is dropped in terminations beginning with
is understood
of course here as in the perf. past. Hence 3i^9/, SfOai. Hither belong also the
dual ftiiySm, (see below, fiialtu,) and dropping two consonants, wis&su, (see below,
tri(S>.)
Ohs. 4. When the indie, of these pats. aor. retains its augment in any verb, of
which the redupl. is the simple augment, it cannot be distinguished from the plusq.
in poiut of form: u^fim, ixra/iw, lp9//fi, xsnftni.
9. Lastly (C) in the perf. and plusq. lengthened forms are some
times shortened by this syncope, and when such per/, have, as we
shall see in 113. the signif. of the pres., they have a 2 pers.
imper. with the termination 5i, ( 106. with the Obs. 8.) This is
the case with
xixpxya,XEXgayjAEv, ixtxpnypiev, imper. xixpacyPi, (see xgstc</,)
avuyx, (see the List,)avaiyix.Ev, imper. avayfit.
EiX7jX9t/9st,EiXriXof9/xev, Epic forms for eX^Xi/Sj;, (see epx^xi.)
The syllable oj from ei generally becomes i through this syncope,
iii-irofox, from nefoco,lui'mh^, (Homer,)
'ioixa, from tlxai,EoiyfAsv, 3 pers. dual,
Perf. e'Vxtov, plusq. eixtw, all poetical forms, and this
proves the correctness of our afore-stated derivation
from "(t/xev, &c. viz.
oTSst, (from e'i'Sw,)iS/aev or tapitv, "ore, 3 pers. plusq. Epic
iWv, imper. "ff&i,
Infin. Epic io/x-E'vai for eISe'/xsvcci, (commonly EiJc'vai,) with
the Att. plusq. yoii.iv, titte, ViTay, for tiSeiêv, tSJeite,
ri'SEaav. See about the forms from mix* and otSac, the
A'ofe to 109. HI. 5.
5 These considerations will enable us to appreciate the merit of the usual state
ment, that not only Xikts, $i%3xi, &c. but also faHrSrsu, mrltatf, &c. are instances
of per/, and plusq. rejecting their redupl. It is obvious that linn, ttyumt, are in
the same ])redicament with Xarc, xrifttut, and these again with îwSm, nrisattu
But to separate the latter from the net. flKtrm, iW<tv, would lie contrary to all gram
matical criticism. All the above forms must, therefore, be placed in one category ;
they are our. like iktx>, f/3nv, and explained by their syncopated formation, which in
one part of their forms contains the formation in su.
220
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obs. 5. When through this syncope the consonant of the radical form comes
before a r in the termination, this t, liecause of the similarity of sound with the ter
minations of the pan. (rirvpSi,
and the like,) sometimes becomes a 3. Thus
the rest of the ptrsont of the imper. a*a>%$i become instead of
r .-. - in. itt/ytrttjava-r 5;, aviiv^w, and of the per/,
tyfnytga, iyer.y'oân, ly{nyt(3i,
(see iyt!(i,) and this accounts most naturally for the Epic a-tr<3f, (see below,
that is to say, as soon as the 3 came before the r, it was changed into r, (as it/at,
1m,) and the > was dropped, (twti,) which was erroneously made a past. rinrBi.
10. This syncope is more natural, whenever the characteristic of
the verb is a vowel. But, as we have seen in 97. 7. it is but in
a very few verbs, that this vowel is pure before the termination a
of the perf, ex. gr. in
StSia, (see SfiVai in the List,) whence perf. pi. ScSi/aex,
SeSite, for StSl'a/AEV, TE,
Plusq. eSe'Si/ixev, eSe'S'ite, eii^mav, for eSeSi'ei/iaev, te, ilstit'saxv,
Imper. SeSi&i,
and as some of the perf. in rm.%, when shortened by the Epic Poets,
have their radical vowel (a) before the termination, fiifiwxx,
(ftifix*,) Qifixavt, f&e$(t.us, this ancient form, and this syncope
jointly serve to account for such perf. in the Attic and common
language in the dual and pi. of the indie, and in the infin., ex. gr.
of TETXuxa, (see the Anom. rXrvai,) TETAAAte'tXci/aev, &c.
infin. TETâvai, (for tetX-eW) This agrees perfectly with the
pres. of the conjugation in /xi, lura/xEv, lardvoti : hence most of the
other parts of the conjugation in pti adopt this form of the perf.
thus,
Perf. Te'tX5|U.EV, TETXitTE, TETXa<7l, (v,)
Dual, te'tXiztov,
Plusq.pl. ETETXa/xEv, ete'tXte, ETETXauaV,
Dual, ETETXarov, etetXostw,
Infin. TETXavai, (short a,)
Imper. TErXa&i, nrXiru, &c.
Opt. TETXai'nv.
The conjunctive of this verb is not used in this form ; we give
that of $i$rf*.a., /3E/3apiEv, &c.
Conj. /3f/3, rir, ri, &C
The part, alone does not follow the conjugation in pti> but is con
tracted of ausus, so that the tnasc. and neut. become homony
mous, (aus and aos, gen. kotos, contracted us, uros,) and this con-
VERBS.
221
traded form has a peculiar fern, in una., ex. gr. of fiifinxic, part,
gen. @e(3wTos.
Of these perf. there is none in common use, but the sing, indie.
of the perf. and plusq. (rir\r,xx, as, s,sTSTXr/xeiv, sir, si :) all the
other parts have the above collateral forms, which mostly are
more in use than the regular ones. See in the List, besides
rXijvaj and fialw, vh<jxcn, rsbvnxa, and above in lar-ny-i,
107.
Obs. II. 2. 3.) the perf. h-rnxx.
Obs. C. We observe farther,
a. that except the 3 peri. pi. of the per/. (rirXan, nBtxtiy, ieratit, &c.) the a. is
short in all the other forms, the short vowel of the termination having
been removed by syncope, not contracted with the radical vowel ; and that
consequently we ought not to write TirAawu, nMreu, lermxi*.
b. that it is only the contracted part., which has the fern, tm : the Epics em
ployed it regularly in via in the resolved form, ex. gr. jSi/ucu,-, (3i/3Diai,
c. that the termination xui, neuter ait, of the part, (j 27. 10.) becomes tit in
the Ionic dialect, (see "mutt, \ 107. Obs. II. 3.) which is the usual Attic
form in nlnis, of hntxu, (see the list, and compare farther irtrriis,
irriif, in the Anom. rjVr.)
11. Sometimes a metathesis of the vowel with a liquid, ( 19.
Ohs. 2.) changes the radical verb, chiefly, in two cases :
1.) In the aor. 2. see 96. Obs. 7. and compare also the
Anom. apuigTavw and ripnu.
2. ) In several verbs, of which the simple theme has a liquid
for its characteristic, ex. gr. in the root AN, aor. E&avov,
fat. xwvt*ai, a transposition of the vowel NA takes
place to facilitate the conjugation ; hence r&vmx, t&vxptev, &c. and this transposition in some verbs produces the
new usual pres., in this instance Swaxa. The same is
done with the root MOA. But owing to the difficult
pronunciation of /jX, a /3 is inserted between these letters
in the middle of the word, according to 19. Obs. 1.
fj.iiA$\wxoi for iiittXuxx, and the /x itself is changed in the
beginning of the word into a /3, $\u<sxw 7. Thu supposi' The quantity in comedy, ex. gr. tsMhu, Aristoph. Ran. 1012. shews that the
short a was in common use. But this did not prevent Poets, particularly an old
ona like jEschylus, from employing in the infin. for the sake of the metre, the con.
tracted form nitimi, (Again. 550.) The Epic infin. nimpirM, rifodfiu, are ex
plained on comparing them with 107. 06s. IV. 1.
7 Exactly in the same relation are /Uij to pz\<txi;, ^t.Wru, (/ squeeze out,) to
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tion renders the analogy of the three following verbs evi
dent and complete,
Svriaxw, &stvou/xa, E&avov, Ts'&vyjxar,
(AN, NA,)
Spdiaxai, SogoD/xai, e'Soôv,
(OP, PO,)
$\<Laxa>, yi.oKovix.ai, e/aoXov, fj.ifj.fi'Kaixx, (MOA, MAO,)
which see in the List ; and the defective forms 'iiropov, miwptuTxi, (see below woêiv,) belong together in the same
way8.
Under this metathesis can be ranked with perfect certainty
only those verbs, in which the transposed vowel is recognised in
some forms, as the a. in TE^vctva*, teSWhv, and the o in /ae'/x/3Xo/>cc.
But where there is merely an n, it may appear doubtful whether
we are to call it a metathesis, or simply a syncope ; ex. gr. whe
ther it be Sf'/xaj, (AEM, AME,) îl^nxa, or (like niyuu, vEVE/xnxa,)
leixw, (SeSeVwoc,) Se'S/ATixa. Hither belong with a differently
formed pres.
riy.vu),fut. repu, aor. ete/xov, perf. riry.r,xix,
v.a.iMoi,fut. xxfjiovfAai, aor. txaptov, perf. xixy.i\x%.
Yet a more distinct analogy appears to class tbese verbs in the
category of a metathesis, (TEM, TME, KAM, KMA.) and this
is still more certain with respect to the verb xaKiai, though the
succession xaihiu, xxXiau, xixX-nxa, seems to point to a bare syn
cope. The fut. xxXiau, or with the best Attic writers, xaXu, is
unquestionably the fut. of the primitive KAAfl, (compare 95.
Ols. 12.) but the usual pres. xxhiw comes only from the fut. as
the Ionic pres. ju.a%E0pi.ai does from the fut. ix.xyinofj.xi,ou/xxi,
(see 95. the second Note to Obs. 16.) The radical form KAAfl
gave xixXnxa by the same transposition, (KAA, KAA,) as the
above perf. : hence the poets have also, corresponding to the
form Sv-naxai from ANX1, a pres. xix\y\sxw. Thus
xx\iu, xix\ri<sxti>, fut. xaku, perf. xix\wxf (KAA, KAA.)
See in the List fiaXku fiifiXnxx, o-xiWu 'iaxXmxx, and also ttiXxcu,
ffTogEvvy/xi, n-Egacw, and the Note to xiqdvwfAi.
fiiXt : see Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 108. And a still stronger analogy for ftixCt. ftif*
/3a.wxa. QxcZexu, is afforded by the following two instances, /*%><, (death,) fSiri/tfiftris, ifiafTU*, ififynTM, iPfirifrn.
' The corresponding radical form of /Ji/3jrx hat been preserved only In the
verba/ tubil. fiefA,
VERBS.
111.New Themes derived from the Tenses.
1. There is another, but not very common species of anomaly,
when any other than the pres. becomes a new theme, partly
because it could be taken in the sense of the pres., and partly
because it was more familiar to the ear than the pres. This
occurs only with the perf. and the aor. 2. act. and pass. ; for we
have assigned their proper place in 96. Obs. 9. to those forms,
which by an irregular assumption of the characteristic s, used to
be derived from the fat.
2. A. The perf. ha\ing frequently the signif. of the pres., (a9
we shall see in ^ 113.) it sometimes actually forms a new pres.,
but chiefly only in the Doric dialect, or with Epic Poets.
Thus we read in Theocr. (15, 58.) XeSo/xw for Xe'Soixa, 1 fear,
{Anom. Sfiffai,) and in Homer xsxXTiyovTEr, (yinom. xXa'ôi.) Hence
the imperf. in ov derived from perf. ; ex. gr. Hesiod, eititpuxov, (as
if from IlE^TKfi,) from nitpuxtx, to which also belong the 3pers.
like yiycove, ohwofe, aicuye, which in Homer are not only perf.
(that is to say pres. tenses,) but frequently also imperf (or aor.)
Hither belong likewise the fut. kcn/ifa, (see 107. Obs. II. 4.)
and T&vhiw, {Anom. Stwxco.)
Obs. 1. The statement of this anomaly is rendered rather difficult by the circum
stance, that we have unquestionable vestiges of part of the Dorians having given to
several persons of the actual perf. in general, terminations similar to those of the
pres.: as the in/in. ytyiittti, Pind. {Anom. yiytstuu,') "iiivxni, (for -uf.) Theocr. instead
of litvx'v.xt, mirlttns, mQvx*, (for -ui, n,) instead of as, i, Theocr. ; and the part, in
v, eutra. instead of if, v7et, ex. gr. irtpîxevrscs, Pind. /jtifttvaxeoerec, (from uû'urxa.}
Archimed. See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. Ij 88. Obs. 11. and 14. 111. Obs 2.
Reduplicated aor. like trixiit*, aâgsv, &c, ( 83. Obs. 7* J 85. Obs. 2.) are erroneously
considered as belonging hither.
Obs. 2. The accent of some Epic part, and in/in. points likewise to a prrf. pass.
having assumed the form of a pres. ; ex. gr. inrrAuiio; and in'.am;. axaxwtai,
under
\\r,\afi%vot under
3. B. The aor. 2. produces in some verbs a new formation as
if from <u, and the aor. 2. act. in particular, because of the infin.
in tit.
It cannot be presupposed that there have been verbs supev,
rvyiio, &c. but the aor. tlpov ivpiTi, trvyjiv Tvyttv, gave birth to
the formation itqwa;, tvpwxa, reTvxnxa, &c. which produced, but
later, a pres., see cuplaxv, ruy/jiiiu, and similar forms in /xav&ava;,
fiXaardnu, yi'ywixat, &C.
In some other verbs, of which the aor. 2. pass., as deponens, has
224
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
an act. signif., there was a per/, in ni formed of nv in the same

way :
ip'pvviKx, from ip'pum, {I flowed,) see piu,
xexapv)xif and xi%d^v,nxi, from câpm, (I rejoiced,) see
%t'ipa,
SeSanxa and SeSawi/xai from eSaTiv, (J learned,) see AA.
112.Anomalous Mutability of the Root.
1. By far the greatest part of the anomalies of the Greek verbs
consists in the intermixture of forms derived from different themes,
so that several derivative tenses conjugated regularly presuppose
another pres. than the usual one. Some instances of this kind
have been treated of above, 92. separately for practical pur
poses, and as belonging to the usual conjugation. We shall
now review those, which either deviate too much, or offer little
uniformity in their class of verbs.
2. The different way, in which the root of a verb is conjugated,
constitutes the diversity of themes ; and these different radical
forms very frequently co-exist together through the whole verb,
or some of its parts, especially in the pres. The relationship of
some letters, love of euphony, anxiety of the old Poets to have a
variety of forms of words for their verses, and lastly also some
less important motives, which to us have the appearance of
-mere chance, occasioned the formation and combination of such
collateral forms. The language of daily intercourse generally
adopted either one or the other of such forms. But it was also
very natural that, considering the great number of parts of a verb,
the differences arising from the different radical forms were
necessarily intermixed. This is the anomaly, which actually is
so frequent in the Greek verb.
3. We must remember here what is evident from 92. that
the regular process of the verb is by no means the primitive and
natural one, and in particular that it did not proceed from the
pres., but that in the most essential verbs expressive of natural
wants, the most ancient and true root lies in other tenses, and
most readily in the aor. 2. when there is one ; and that the pres.
is merely a derivative form, in which the root is enlarged and
made fuller and more sonorous ; ex. gr. from AHBH or AABH,
\xy.$%vu.
But this radical form generally does not extend
VERBS.
225
beyond the pres. and imperf., so that this alone already renders
such a verb anomalous, when the whole is considered as conform
able to method ; ex. gr. Xx^xtta, iXxiifixvov,Xt)>J/o{a*i, s'Xa/3ov,
&c.
4. The circumstance that there is a double form of a pres. in
actual use, occurs even in common prose ; and many double forms,
like Xeiwai and Xi/xTravw, xniw and xv'mviu, are found in the best
prose-writers. But one of the forms frequently belongs to a cer
tain dialect, as, for instance, xyitico for iyu, (puyyxvcu for (ptuyu,
were more familiar to the Ionians. Poets of all times were par
ticularly fond of such collateral forms, as were handed down to
them from days of yore. Frequently also such a fuller collateral
form became most current in popular language, and was com
pletely conjugated with aor. &c, whilst the equally complete
radical form receded from the language of daily intercourse, as
TriqQu eTteqax, gave way to iropQieo iiro^naa.
Obt. 1. Such modifications of the radical form were frequently attended with dif
ferences in the signif. Instances of this kind belong to Dictionaries, or to the
Section on the Formation of Words. But here, too, it is impossible to draw a strict
line of demarcation. The idea of duration, which in those fuller forms was to be
rendered more sensible as a stronger contrast to the idea of the aor., gave rise to the
modifications of repetition, {iterative,) of frequency, (frequentative,) and of habit,
(habitual, usual.) Thus it was very natural that of two co-existing forms of the
pres. one adopted such a modification preferably to the other. For instance, the
verb figia made of <fi(u, which is formed perfectly analogous to the above-mentioned
rt^lin, and to several other correct collateral forms, lias, however, generally some
more restricted peculiar meanings, as 1 to wear a coat,1 *put it onusuaUy? But there
is no fixed rule to be established on that head, and no Writer, no Poet in particular,
considered himself bound by it. Without attending to any particular shade of
meaning, the fuller form was frequently preferred, whenever euphony, the conve
nience of the metre, or stress to be laid on the thought, required it ; and fi'ui, for
instance, was often employed for <pUa. But all this can only be hinted at here.
Obs. 2. Whenever there was, along with the usual regular form of the verb,
another rather deviating one in the pres., this also produced, it is true, an anomaly
in the language ; for the same writer being obliged to render the thought, for
which he used, for instance, kifvrtiru in the pres., by Xuif>u in the fut., it may be
said that the fut. of Xjprxiv. M Xitya/. Yet as in this case it is not two defective
verbs, which constitute an anomalous whole as in the former, but there merely is
along with a regular perfect verb, (Xutx, kttyx, &c.) a defective one, (Xipram,)
which Poets and Orators use for their own purposes, all such defective collateral
forms must be left to Dictionaries. The grammarian can only direct the attention
of the learner to the analogy, according to which the lengthened forms resemble
each other in many instances, as will be seen in the following .
5. But it does not follow that all the themes, which are or
appear to be the basis, on which some tenses were formed, have
Q
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
therefore existed. It is, indeed, possible that the simple radical
form, which is in the other tenses, may have existed formerly
in a pres. (compare 83. Obs. 6.) but on the whole it is not
probable ; and it often would happen that the habit of seeing
various formations combined in one verb, led tothe preference of
an easier conjugation, or introduction of some change, neither of
which circumstances necessitates the supposition of a correspond
ing pres. of a similar theme. Of this nature is, beside the in
stances mentioned in the two preceding . the transition of the
verbs in a> to the formation (iw,) huu, &c. (see 8.)
6. There are frequently several of these circumstances con
curring, so that the conjugation of a verb is mixed up with that
of three or more forms. Thus we have of the primitive form
FIHQfZ orFIAQfl, barely the aor. ivz8<n : another form, strength
ened with v by position ITENQH, maintained itself in the perf.
iciirovQx, &c. but both were forced to give way in the pres. and
imperf. to the form irxayjii, which now gives its name to the
whole verb. From IlETAfi comes issraau, &c. in the perf. pass.
through the syncope we'wTa/xsu, whilst the lengthened form thtxvis alone in use in the pres. and imperf., &c.
7. Some of the derivative forms of verbs are of such a nature,
that there are scarcely any instances remaining in the language
of a similar change of the radical verb ; ex. gr. in uyiviw from
aycu, Baayju from riAQfi, cs9iu from e'Sw, iXdutca from Ixiu, &c.
Most of them, however, conform with others to the same obvious
analogy, which must be comprised under one point of view, the
better to commit to memory the anomalies of their conjugation,
and the numerous collateral forms of the whole verb, or its
pres. tense, which occur especially in the Greek Poets.
Remember that, when in the following examples two forms are
combined by and, they are both in use ;where from is men
tioned, the latter verb either is quite obsolete, and to be recog
nised only in the tenses derived from it, or is found merely in
the old Poets ; and when for is mentioned, the first form is
peculiar to the Poets. Verbs belonging to the first and third
category are not stated again in the list of Anomalous Verbs, unless
there be some particular reason for it.
8. One of the readiest changes was
uinto ecu, more rarely da>, contr. a :
piitru and jmniu, nrvniu from KTTIlfi, (whence enTUTrov,) yay-iw
VERBS.
227
from TAMfi, (whence %yay.x,) yvxioy.xi from MTKft,

(whence Sfjw/xov,) lay.xa from AEMfi, (whence ioa/xrjv.)
Whenever the regular inflection of a verb was attended with any
difficulty, or might be productive of cacophony and indistinctness,
it was conjugated as if the^res. ended in ecu. (See above, 5.)
Ob: 3. To this class belong the verbs, of which the characteristic already is or
in thejores., X^*,Jut. tynt*,
$ww. It is the same with the ptrf.ot verbs
in fiu, see above, $ 101 OA*. 9. Farther, fttui /tifi'tvuxet, rim, city*., and rvxrnru,
fiixku ftiWwtc, if'fti iffwti, xcthuSu *mtivMrn, &c. When the Jut. and other forms of
such verbs have an i, as St%iftcti i^Cira/un, (see also fidxepxi, llt>, and &n 2.) it may
be viewed in the same light, yet it is more correct to recognise here the old forma
tion mentioned above, tj 96. Obs. 15. which maintained itself from the same causes,
which in other instances induced the formation of the Jut. in Vu.
Obs. 4. Though both kinds offuture do not presuppose, or at least do not neces
sarily presuppose a pres. tense in in, yet such a pres. tense often was formed, sooner
or later, in consequence of these Jut. Thus undoubtedly originated, already in the
oldest language, xaXiu from xx\ir&, (see the List,) and probably also firnv ^r,
which was much in use, from fimiti. But the proof of this is rather difficult; wo
are, therefore, perfectly warranted in deriving everyJut. in <r and nftt from a pres.
tense in ii, if there be such a one in use.
Obs. 5. We must, however, remark, that the Ionians in particular are fond of
forming single parts of the pres. or imperf. as if of iu, without the whole pres. tense
occurring ; ex. gr. ufXti, Styii, tuftfiaXXiifUtif, otiîiîw, Herod. <riiit, for i<j7tay,
Homer, &c.
9. Several disyllabic barytone verbs, of which the first syl
lable has an t, give collateral forms by changing this into o, and
taking the termination iai,
(piqai and tropica, rpiy.ai and rpoyiai, $y.a> and So/xe'cy, wt'^Sw and
vopOiu. Hither belong, therefore, the forms h$oxny.ivos
for SsXeypUyof, exrovnxx, y.ty.6gnrat, iokwro, (see Siôyxi,
xrshai, y.ei'poy.xi, eiXw,)
or the radical syllable has u with the termination xu,
rpcayjkca, tcay.iu, and also fipu^xco, tiuy.a.ca, rpuitxca, ttrûîai,
for (Zpiyoi, ve/Atd, rpkma, erpityco.
The verb Triroy.au alone has, beside the collateral forms woWoptai
and nura.oiJ.xi, another worioy.cu.
10. Verbs in u purum sometimes take the termination -axu,
retaining their radical vowel,
yngiai and ynpxaxu, 'ika.oy.xi and \\x<sxoy.a.i, tyxaxu from $Af2,
(whence iprio-u, see 109. I. 2.) puoyxt and pvaxoyxi, and
lengthening the radical vowel yiyvdiaxat from TNOH.
But those in iu most commonly become -laxw,
xviai,xvlaxco, orepiui,arepiaxu,
and as the infin. aor. 2. terminates in eTv, this sometimes occa
Q2
223
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
sioned a new formation in iu, (see 111. 3.) out of it, and a
pres. tense in laxw,
from ETPX2 aor. tvpov, Bvpgtn,ivpluKU,-flit, gupwoai :
see also d/j.itXxx.laxoj, itatyimtu, inxupioxo/Axi.
Obs. 0. This form may be compared with the Latin verbs inchoative, since several
of these verbs denote a beginning, increase, growing ; but they seldom distinguish
themselves by this signification from the simple form, as the Latin rubeicere, for in
stance, does from rubere. We have, however, an instance of this kind in ti&if, lam
arrived at puberty, 'nfc&vxu, I am growing up to puberty. Commonly the simple form
had the same signif., or was quite obsolete. But verbs in rxu sometimes have a
causative or transitive sense, (see 113. 2. to cause or get another to be in the
state, or to perform the action, of the simple verb,) ex. gr. piti*, I am drunk, ptilvrxv, I intoxicate, (see the List ;) rlnrmv, I give to drink, from /, inn. See below
<'*i about fc^rxifuti. The learner has been cautioned already, (in the Obi. to J 103.
II. I. Note,) carefully to distinguish the Ionic imperf. and aor. in i> from these
verbs.
Obs. 7. The x in the termination tx is, however, sometimes radical, and the <r a
mere strengthening addition ; ex. gr. Xjittm from AAKf!, itrxa, {to lUen, compare,)
from iizv, (to be Hie, resemble,") Tirirxn for riu%*i. The case is different with
akuexw, 6'iiiexv.
11. Some verbs have Attic and Poetical collateral forms in &a>,
with different vowels preceding,
Q\yt8oj for (pXiyu, veixiQoj for vs'/xw, q>Qtvv8u> for (pSiviu.
Hither belongs also the lengthening by means of the letters a&
before the termination, which occurs even in Attic prose, but is
found only as a prceterite, imperf., or aor. in -aflov,and in the
dependent moods. Those, which occur of this kind, are,
SiwxatSeiv, iiiuxxBov, from Sia/xw, sixafleiv, e!xz9oim.i, from eI'xoi,
a/xuvstfleiv, d/ju/vx8o!ixviv, from dixvva, e'tpyxStiv from ei'y<u,
and the Epic uLercxlxQov from nits.
Compare with them the forms introduced at a later period instead
of via), (I spin,) d\ea>, xvda), vriQw, dXriû, xvnQat : see also ir\ri9a>
and itpMoj, in win&Kvifu and niixTrpvuM.
12. Sometimes a v is inserted before the termination,
5a'xv<y from AAKH, (whence t'Jaxov,) see also below, renvoi,
XX/J.VOJ.
Hence iu and vai becometvcu and vvoj,
trhu from II I ft, rut and rivtu, Si/a/ and Suvw, hruu and
EVTt/vw, see also (pSiw, ivw, lip voj,
and aw becomes -xUu, seldom ata,
/3/v<u from BAD,, <p$dw from OQAfL
13. The trisyllabic and polysyllabic verbs in dw, and some in
ahu, have, however, a theme in u for their radical form, which,
VERBS.
229
(coming from the aor. 2., see 111. 3.) produces some tenses,
as if of ioi :
av%co and av^dvai, fiXaardvai from BAA2TX2, aor. 2. efiXxarov,
jut. fiXaorrifjcv, aniyboixai and dutyfidvotxau, see also below
(j.a%Txvu, ouoQdwixm, &c.b\ioQdvta and oXioQalva, aor. 2.
ai\ioQov, jut. okia^rtau.
The verbs in va> usually insert a nasal sound in the radical syl
lable of the verb, and shorten the radical vowel, when it is long,
in this manner,
XsiVo* and "kifVltdvu, (psvyco and (puyydvu, epivyai and l^vyydvu,
XriQco and Xorthdvaj. See also below, avfldvio, biyydvu, X.*/x/3ayft>, "Kay/jxvu, [/.onddvco, nvvbdvoiAaiy rvy^dtai.
Obi. 8. With respect to the quantity of the doubtful vowels before the final syl
lable m, it may be remarked in general that i'w and mi are long, ex. gr. i(m, tym,
fyaivm, but am short. However, if we follow the Epics,
QSdm, /MM*, xi%umf
are long: but the Attics are so far deviating, that they not only make
rim, Qi/m, short, but also include again
Qldru, ^w', in the analogy of the other verbs in dm, and make them
also short.
14. A very frequent change is that of
u into wixi, (see 106. Obs. 4.)
olyu and oYyvv/jn, Se/xvc/uu from AEIK.fi, (whence Se/^w, &c.)
see below, ayvv/xi, opvufxi, o/xopyvvixi, fyvywixi, &C. and also
nralpu and 9rTvuM.i, (primitive form IlTAPfi, compare
above 92.9.)
When a vowel precedes the termination, the v is commonly
doubled, and o becomes a,
xge/xcw and xpe/xdyyvixi, see below, Kepdwum, <ntrdvwn.i, <jxeSavvypii, tycu and îvwfM, see below, Kopevvv^.1, afiimvixi, aroptwvtxi, rlu and rmvtxt, yjiai and yyuvvvy.i. See below
<wvvi/|U.i, pamvixi, arpdmvixi, y^pamvti.1.
15. A change, which is rather confined to Poets, is the insertion
of a v before the termination aw, thus,
dta into votw, vr//.i,
$otfiM and Sa/xvaw, $d//.vv)fj.i, migydui, mipvAixi, from sregow,
and changing e into >, xigvaw, nipvntu, from xspau, (xepdvvuu,) and also ffi'Xvn/uu, w/tw/uu, ax.iSmiJ.1, from 7reXa!<v,
IlETAft, 2KEAAX1 ,
. 1 In this word the Attics made the syllable *< long, which else as a redupl. is
short, and actually is so in- xi^tai, &c. See in the Lit the quantity of the other
forms belonging to film and <pdm.
230
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
16. Several verbs, not only those in iu, but many others, take
the redupl. in the pres.
yiyvuaxcn from TNOfl, whence yvaiaoâi, tMixvhax-co, wiwgatfxar,
&c. and tx.iio} and n,iy.\ai, it'iyuiircii* from IlETfi, ylyvofx.ai
from FENX1
17. Lastly, some verbs form single tenses from very different
radical verbs, exactly as in Latin/ero, tuli, latum. And the very
same verb is an instance of it in Greek,
Qipu, flit, olaa, aor. rjveyxov.
The other most decisive examples may be seen in the List, under
atêco, Eiffelv, g%oy,ai, iaSlcu, bqxu, rpiyju. Compare also the ad
ditional remarks to aklaxofxat, ioiaQai, %dai, $iu, itXriaaw, rXrimi,
113.Anomaly of Signification.
1. Whatever relates to the signif. of verbal forms, is properly
the province of Syntax, since it cannot be separated from the
theory of the construction of the language. The most general
points, without which the subject of conjugation could not have
been understood, have already been stated ; and the deviations
of meaning, as far as they are more or less firmly established
in some verbs, cannot be kept distinct from the anomaly of the
formation of verbs, exactly as in Latin, ex. gr. odi, hortor, audeo,
ausus sum; but the instances in Greek are at once more various
and frequent.
2. We must, however, previously elucidate a subject, (which,
on the whole, concerns only the Dictionary,) because it enters
in various ways into the anomaly of the Greek verb, viz. the immediative and causative signif. of verbs. The former denotes
the action or situation as belonging directly or immediately to
the subject ; the latter denotes the action or situation as being
caused or effected in another. There is in the regular way a
particular verb for each of these signif., though the causative
verb may be derived from the immediative. Thus in English
fall, lie, awake, are immediative, and from them are derived the
causatives to fell, lay, awaken, which cause the falling,'[lying,
awaking of another object. But it is an anomaly, when, as is the
E The i in r/srrv is long according to the Eltjm. 31., and the first syllable of
Ki%ivu, "yi/hi, is acknowledged to be long. The inferences to be drawn from this with
regard to redupl. in generalj are stated in Buttm. Cumpl. Gr. Or.
VERBS.
231
case in all languages, one and the same verb combines both signif.1
in Greek, for instance, k\avveiv, immed. to Tide in a coach, move
hastily towards a place; caus. to drioe, x6isiv, to sit and to set.
This appears to have been the case with many more verbs in the
old language, and this accounts for the circumstance, that in
several verbs, which for that very reason belong to the anomalous
verbs, the immediative signif. has been retained in some tenses,
and the causative in others, as we have seen above in the verb
Obs. 1. The causatives are by their nature transitivet, and as the immedialives aro
also intransitive* in most eases, it has given rise to the very general, but incorrect and
misleading practice of treating this subject as an intermixture of a tram, and intrant.
signif. But independently of this denomination being much too broad, (since verbs
may be trans, and intrans. without changing their meaning, ex. gr. the transitive to
see, may also serve to denote the situation of one, who has his eyesight ; the intrans.
fiiytn, to flee, is likewise transitive, tfiiytn nrx, to avoid one, which cases very fre
quently approximate without being identical, ex. gr. when mihiv, to hasten, be
comes transitive, rtrtSUn rt, to hasten something, but never tnSiin risk, to cause one to
hasten;however, in all cases where causativum and immediativttm actually bear the
same distinction as transitivum and intransitivum, we may employ the latter deno
minations equally well, when the causative relation has been previously fixed, or may
be supposed to be well known.
Obs. 2. The pass, or med. form is also employed in several verbs to express what
is here called the immediative signif., because any immediative idea, whenever the
mind supplies a causativum, may be considered as the pass, or med. of this causativum,
ex. gr. to He, as to b laid or to lag one's self. Hence of xxiil^tn, to set, the signif. to
tit, or more accurately, to set one's self down, belongs properly to the medium xxli^y
tint, yet the act. nmilfyn was as readily employed in the same sense. And many of
these verbs of double meaning have undoubtedly creeped into most languages by the
pronoun se in Latin, or the Greek iavrh, having been added, omitted, or understood;
of this kind are almost all the Latin verbs of this class, ex. gr. abttinere, (scilicet,) se,
to abstain from. See also 130. Obs. 2. The particular cases, where a verb com
bines both signif., are stated in Dictionaries ; Grammar, besides stating the gene
ral view of the matter, attends only to those instances, where assigning the two
signif. to different forms of the same verb renders that verb anomalous. Thus the
aor. 2. and perf. of some primitive verbs are the tenses, which particularly assume
the immediative signif. j see beside, Irrn/u, irttflrxv, fixitu, 5k', iet'ixa, lû'ru, Ifvfu,
tr&mvpi, rxixxa, fim, in the List, and the following Obs.
Obs. 8. That the perf. 2., as we remarked, } 97. 6. Obs. 5., especially belongs to
the intrans. signii'., id seen in particular in verbs, in which the two signif. are inter
mixed. HfxTni is one of those, where the pres. act. has the two meanings, and its
two perf. at least in the most current prose *, actually have the two different signif. :
x^xttu, I do, make, perf. tritrji^n, v^xrru, Ifind myself, (ex. gr. xxXii.) perf. irt1 Ex. gr. in English to burn, immed. to be on fire, cacs. to setfire to, the Latin
snppedilare, immed. to be at hand, caus. to cause something to be at hand, to supply;
the French sortir, I si med. to go out, caus. totaheout, drop; immed. tofait, caus.
to let fall.
8 See in Buttm. Compl. Gr. Or. the List'of Verbs.
232
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
vrciya. This appears to have been originally the case with all such verbs as OAn,
nurn, V*, <rixu, &c. : they all had both meanings, and that of the per/. 2. was the
intrant, one. But the pass, or med. of most of those verbs had the, intrant, signif.
(compare 135. 4.) and as the per/. 2. has the same, the per/. 2. of the following
verbs, (which also ought to be seen in the list of Anom.,) appears to belong to the
med. or pass, voice, to which, however, it belongs as little as the per/. 1. Tifw,
IVtjixh, which is exactly in the same predicament :
aytv/u,iyto/im, I break, intrant.; per/, 'ixyx, lam broken:
itum,iaU/iai and i'iitm, 1 burn, intrans. :
lysu$/t\yi\^6fmu, I awake, iygnyoga, I watch :
iAfr, (/ cause to hope,) tXvropxi and ioXta, I hope:
xHia, (I afflict,) xnbtptLi and xixnlx, I am anxious about any thing :
fitzivbi, )xv :,.-, ,>, I drive mad,) pxlvopeu and u-.uiwi.. I am mad :
eiyw, otvofyv, attu%ec,airotyofiai, I yet open, xi'iuya, I stand open :
o\\vfj.i, c\u\ixx,oXXvfiett, Jgo to ruin, oXaiXx, I am undone :
vWuxx,xuSeftxi, / believe, <x'vrofcx, I trust :
xriyfufii, vrtyivfAai, I become fixed, vixnyx, I am fixed :
pfiyvupi, pYiytvpat, I rend, intrans., tppwyx, I am rent :
cnTu, (/ make putrid,) eriro/txi, 1 become putrid, ainntx, I am putrid:
trtxtu, (/ melt, trans.) rrixo/txi, I melt, intrans., per/, rirvxa :
tpx'nu, (I shew,)<pul>6[teti, I shine, per/, vi^wx.
See about (Silt* the following Obs. The per/, of some deponents, like ylyti/txi,
y'tynx, are explained in the same way.
Obs. 4. Every transitive may be considered as the causative of its pass., and this,
of course, may be looked on as an immcdiative. Sometimes the language really gives
the act. form to a pass, idea, as in Latin vapulo, which thus becomes au intrans. im
mcdiative, ofwhich /erio is the causative. It is thus that the few instances in Greek,
where particular tenses of a verb, though of act. form, have yt a pass, signif., are
accounted for ; especially some per/. 2. like iffuyx, ixyx, lam broken, /orced asunder.
The Homeric rtrivâts, (see the Anom. Ttv%a>,) and the pei/. 1. ixXeaxx, (see iXiVxaâi,)
are still more exact instances. Fluctuating ones, between the trans, and this neutropass, signif. are, of tphiâ, I spoil, (trans.) l/iipicfx, I have spoiled, and am spoiled;
rivlnyx, I have struck, with some Writers / have been struck, and rirfmpx, see the
Anom. Tôt.
3. It is likewise an anomaly of signif., when the act. med. or
pass, meaning of the verb does not correspond to it in all its
forms. That the act. voice should have a pass, signif., is of most
uncommon occurrence : see the preceding Obs. But it is fre
quently the case with the deponens, a verb which combines an
act. signif. with a pass, or med. form. This anomaly is uncom
monly frequent in the Greek language. Whenever the act. form
is quite wanting in a pass, verb, which has an act. signif., it con
stitutes a real or defective deponens, which, according as the aor.
is taken from the pass, or med., is ( 89. 3.) a deponens pass, or
deponens medium : ex. gr. Ivtotâi, tSwnbw, to be able, dnioâi,
r>*.co-dfA.nv, to heal, nvîwi^m, invSiimv, to learn, hear.
VERBS.
233
Obt. 5. The frequency and variety of verba deponentia in Greek comes from the
intermixture of the med. voice, which partly partakes so much of the past, both in
signif. and form, and partly implies so often the complete, or almost complete mean
ing of the act. Any principles bearing on this point in general belong to Syntax,
(see 135. Obt. 4. and 8.) and their application to particular verbs is the province
of Dictionaries, which must l>e consulted about the very numerous defective verba
deponentia.
Obt. 6. But the Greeks often allow themselves to form tenses with a past, signif.
from a deponent. This is done 1.) in the per/., where the construction imme
diately shews whether it is to be understood in the pats, sense ; ex. gr. Plato de
LL. 710. Tlavret eMrit{yBLfctt
(from a.Tioyiiôâi, I make, perform,) where the
dot. must be rendered by the English by, All hat been made, completed by the Divinity.
2.) In the aor. patt., when the deponent as such has an aor. med., ex. gr. faiXenau, I
force, Ifimfiftm, 1 forced, i/3m-3iv, / wat forced; hl-aftmi, who hat taken, Ji^Si/j,
accepted. Compare 13G. Obt. 2.
4. It frequently happens that the fut. act. of act. verbs is little
or not at all used, and the
Fut. Medii
has the trans, or intrans, signif. connected with the act., when
the rest of the med, with its peculiar meaning does not occur of
such a verb. This is the case with a number of the most familiar
verbs, ex. gr. daovoj, I hear, axouaoixai, (never axouaw,) I shall or
. will hear.
Obt. 7. We subjoin some fut. of this kind : iyvmnpiti, Sn/ix:, (from t2,)
ktwrf^ffifiat, avtXttvrcftcu, fiaSiovfutt, ârifftfiai, yiXetirapiett, yrigeirafieu, iyxufitaffo/Ltai,
txeunrafuti, ifie^xriffofACLi, Beeu/jturtfien, Sriâffofiai, and SrigtCnpat, xX'npo/ieti, xoXttirepat,
oiUM%opeti, -rrMtfafiau, wiôfjLat, fftyrifofLoti, and nwnco/Acti, ffxu^rOfjMi, f<xovba.90fjLat, tfvî\f
(jtai, -ro&arftjUai, {*;rtytj : to which must be added the verbs Uf*k and a73*. See
also in the list of Anom. Verbt especially upxeruvu, /3a/v,
$\<*vxw, yiyjurxm,
Sccxyof, iafSecva, ittffeu, iifyatrxat, S'tai, Siyyavot, 9yflV*, Sûgxu, xotfiw, xXuiu, XayyîvK,
\ap.{ia*M, fiavSavv, vim, (vturtyta;,) o/ti/pt, iêlai, vat'tCp, Tei<r%u, fttVrw, T\iu, srtitt, piv,
rlxTti, r(ix, Tfiiyti, Qiiyv, x'i&must, however, be observed that practice was
as little fixed and constant in this respect as in others : many fut. of the act. may
be met with, where other writers used the fut. med.3 ; but we must carefully exa
mine 1.) whether such passages may not be corrupted, and 2.) whether the Writer
does not belong to the later Writers, or what are called *), who often forsook again
the Attic usage in this respect *.
5. But the fut. med. was also employed as pass. : yet this
usage was not so steady in particular verbs as the preceding ; it
depended chiefly on the exigencies of euphony, and consequently,
with Poets, of the metre. In polysyllabic verbs the still longer
3 Nothing, for instance, is more easy or common than to mistake the Attic form
of the 2 pert. med. in u, (for ,) for that of the act. in tit. Hence in several pas
sages, where we have f
, for instance, we ought to read ftiû, which form of
the 2 pert, was not so familiar to transcribers.
* The learner must be careful not to mistake the conj. aor. 1. for the fut.; ex. gr.
in Hit axoutu
139. 06*. 7.
234
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fid. pass, was thus avoided ; ex. gr. a^sX-n^roii for iqsk'n'b-hawrai,
vrepiQeoSai, (Herod. 7, 149.) for ireptetySrueirSai, and the same in
a,u.ipT/3)r6rv, o/xoXoyEiv, dnxWirrsiv, (puXxrmv, yvfMxCw, aoixsly,
^/aiovv. There are, however, instances also of shorter verbs as
Obs. 0. It may easily be supposed that this was rather uncommon in verbs, of
which the med. voice had a signif., which corresponded too closely to the transitive
act. one ; but it occurred still less, and perhaps not at all in those verbs, of which
the fut. med., According to Text 4., steadily had the signif. of the act.
Obs. 9. There are very few instances, and these few chiefly in Epic poetry, where
the aor. med. too occurs as pass. Yet some compounds of rx'irSeit are also used
passively by the Attics, as KttriwxitSui, opins, liurip. Hipp. 27. Plato Pluedr. 49.
ffvf%lofii'to;1 Thetfft. 58.
6. We rank among the instances of an anomalous signif. of
the tenses, those in which the per/, has the signif. of the pres.
tense. We shall easily conceive this transition from the former
tense to the latter, when we consider that in using the perf. we
generally think less of the action, which is past, than of the state,
which resulted from it. Thus ribmKa properly signifies / have
died, but on thinking of the state, which resulted from it, as still
continuing, it means / am dead; and in this sense it is a pres.
tense. In other yerbs the original perf. was still more lost sight
of, ex. gr. x-rao/xai, / acquire, consequently xix-m/x.xt, I have ac
quired. But the consequence of acquisition is possession ; hence
xsx-rrvAsii was taken to denote / possess, without thinking any
looger of any previous acquisition. In all these cases it follows
of course that the plusq. becomes the impcrf.
Obi. 10. Thus it is not exact to assign to the verb /3 in the pres. tense both
significations I see and knout; ti2 meant / see, perceive, and the per/. ui, I have
perceived, and consequently know.
Obs. 11. But when ideas were nearly related, the pres. tenso itself might easily
take the meaning of the new derivative pres. expressed by the perf., or versa vice.
Thus it happened, especially in poetry, that the pres. and per/, frequently had the
same signif.; ex. gr. p-'iXn, properly it goes to the heart, it concerns, fciftnXi, it went
to the heart, hence both signify it grieves ; Hp**, I perceive, iiJ, / have perceived,
hence both mean / see.
Obs. 12. The application of these principles to occurring instances, of which the
most familiar are noticed in the list of Anomalous Ferbs, must be left to individual
notice, as the same case may often be viewed in different lights. But we must
particularly notice some instances, where in Epic poetry the plusq. supplies the place
of the aor., or of the imper/., though the per/, of that verb does not occur as a
pres. tense.
Obs. 13. The case of the prrf. becoming the pres. tense, iiârticularly frequent in
verbs denoting a sounding and raising 0/ the voice: xixfxyu, I cry out j and farther,
'/,i?.HKa! ytymx, amya, fiifyvxu, /tiftuxet, fj.'iu,r,Kx, xik\ayyx, r(f(iy.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
235
114.List of Anomalous or Irregular Verbs.

PREFATORY REMARKS.
1. The following List comprises the anomalous verbs, which
occur in common prose, in the most familiar dialects, and in
poetry. Whenever such a verb is not of frequent occurrence,
or when it is Poetical, it is printed in small type ; the same is
the case with verbs in use, stated merely on account of some
anomaly, with which they are attended in Poets. Whatever
refers in all other verbs to their use in prose, is printed in a larger
type.
2. Forms, which are completely obsolete, and merely pre
supposed for the purpose of explanation, are printed in the List
and in the whole work in capital or initial letters, that the eye
may not accustom itself by the usual print to a number of useless
imaginary verbs, and thus become less able to detect barbarisms.
But every theme, which really occurs, were it but once, in the
ancient Poets, is printed in the usual type ; yet it does not follow
that the 1 pers. of the pres. tense must occur on that account.
Any form of the pres., and even imperf., may in most instances
serve as a proof or evidence of the whole pres.
3. The imaginary obsolete themes, (which, however, have not
been stated in every place, as the more advanced scholar may
supply them of himself,) are grammatically formed after the
analogy of other existing verbs, but their existence is by no means
historically proved ; whence it happens that the same form is
often derived from different themes in different Grammars, accord
ing as one grammarian judges of the origin of a form differently
from the other.
4. In addition to the anomalous part of each verb stated in
the List, its use, as far as it is not understood of itself, is fully
explained ; but always, (according to 104. 2.) under the sup
position that the usual fut., the aor. 1. and perf. 1. are the tenses
in use of any verb, of which the fut., aor., and perf. are not ex
pressly mentioned. Whenever there is an aor. 2. or per/. 2., or
when the fut. med. supplies the fut. act., these forms are fully
stated. The numbers 1 and 2 are seldom annexed to these tenses,
because they are known of themselves. If, for instance, ufAuprxva)
is solely attended with aor, waprov, it shews that-this verb barely
2,3(3
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
has this aor. 2. and no aor. 1.When MED. is found alone, it

denotes that the med. or middle voice occurs.
5. The verbal forms to be met with in Greek Writers are
generally indicated simply by the 1 pers. indie, of the tense em
ployed, but sometimes single forms are stated, as a pers. of the
pi., a conjunctive, &c. This is done for safety, because in some
more uncommon Epic and other forms we cannot always con
clude that the 1 pers. indie, belonging to them must have been in
use.
6. The same siguif. , be it act., pass., med., or intrans., which
the pres. has, is likewise that of ev ery tense, to which there is no
particular signif. subjoined. Thus, for instance, if with fiovXo^xi
the fat. med. fSovkriooy.ou, and the aor. pass. tfiouXriSm are noticed,
it shews that only these two forms occur in the sense of the pres.
tense, /3oi/Xopuzi, and that consequently there is neither an aor.
t$oukmady.m, nor a fat. fiovkr&rioon.xi occurring.
7. To facilitate the consulting of the List, obsolete and ima
ginary forms have been inserted in alphabetical order, wherever
it was thought necessary, and not only those, of which the sup
position is calculated for elucidation, but also many specious
ones, when a change not grounded in the regular conjugation,
(by syncope, for instance,) is referred to a fictitious theme.
Supposing, therefore, that the student knows, on reading the
inflections, which occur, how to form a regular theme according
to the general rules, he will find the radical form in its proper
place along with the needful information of what is actually in
use ; thus, for instance, for iirpd^nv, he will find 11PA,see
'Bwsi&ax.u.
8. The List, moreover, is so complete, that nothing occurs in
known Prose-writers and Poets, which does not find its expla
nation here. Whatever is met with in Authors of less note, or in
less familiar dialects, has been noticed here, and in the whole
course of this Grammar, only as far as it explains the connection
between the grammatical forms and the dialects, or tends to
elucidate one particular dialect.
9. With regard to Epic poetry, the student must bear in mind
that the later Epics of the Alexandrian and subsequent periods,
like Callimachus, Apollonius, were mere learned Poets, who did
not by any means derive all the forms, which they employed,
from the actual stock of the language, but copied or imitated
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
237
them from Homer and other ancient Poets. Nothing but what
is found in Homer and Hesiod, and in some fragments of those
old times, can safely be looked on as belonging to the general
analogy of the language. The peculiarities of later Writers may
also belong to it, since they had older Authors, lost to us, before
their eyes, but historical certainty is wanting. Whenever we have
been able fully to trace the formation and use of a verb in the
. old Writers, we have had no regard to the peculiarities of the later
ones, or it is only in very important instances that we have
referred to them by name.It also follows from 1. 11. that
whatever is noted as Homeric, (especially with the mention of
Homer,) does not exactly occur exclusively in Homer's Poems,
but is likewise to be met with in the subsequent Epic Poets, to
whom Homer served as a model.
10. And lastly we observe that we have generally omitted those
collateral forms, which, though perfectly synonymous with a form
more in use, do not create any difficulty, being either a pres.
tense, or easily reducible to a pres. tense, and consequently
readily found in the Dictionary. All which Grammar can do
with respect to the formation of such collateral forms, is to direct
the attention of the learner to some general analogies ; and this
has been done in the preceding Sections.
A.
' Kico, {I hurt,) Homer has of this theme, the 3 pres. pass. aSrai,
aor. 1. act. acta*, contr. aaa, (Od. X. 61.) pass, and med.
aai&w, daad^m l. Both are sometimes long, sometimes
short ; the case is the same with the verbal adj. daros, whence
with the a priv. ddaros, (w Z " ) invincible, which cannot be
hurt, inviolable, Horn. It is from this old form that came
the subst. am, (a,) and thence shortening the a. the new
verbal form draco used by the Attic Poets.
Compare also &*, I satiate.
aydfjjxi, (I admire,) pres. and imperf. like ij-apiai, fat. dydao/j-ai,
aor. rryda^m.
The Epic pres. tenses iydtuai, iyxUfcxi, occur with the collateral meanings
of to envy, to be angry.
' 1 An might also be assumed as the radical theme, from which the other forms
were derived by lengthening. But the lengthening of a long vowel, which did not
originate in contraction, (, &<m, >,) would be contrary to analogy :
on the
contrary, really belongs to in, I satiate. The Homeric verbal adjectives iiam and
irn are, moreover, best explained in this way. See Buttm. texilogus, I. 50.
238
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
iyt!(ti, (/ assemlile,') per/. pas. iynyif/uu, aor. 2. med. injtn. Epic ctyifirSm, part,
iyfiptiw See J 110.4.
aywy-i, (I break,) fut. a$,u, ( 112. 14.) The prceterites have the
syllabic augment, ( 84. 06s. 5.) aor.
(Horn. r,%a,)
aor. pass. Hym, (a.) The perf. 2. soya, (/on. en-yce,) has
the pass, signif. / am broken, forced asunder, ( 113. Obs. 4.)
The aor. 2. pau.' \dym was also shortened in the Epic metre. Compare
ijrAijyn* and xartTkttyw.
This augment is found even in forms, which from their nature ought not
to have any; tx.gr. particip. compos. x<momf, Lysias p. 158. Heiske'.
The xuvuZm! of Hesiod stands for xxrxîui, (opt. nor.')
ayvntvh), See UTlTv.
|
ayîfjLUtt 860 kyuû.
ayu, (I lead, bring,) has in aor. 2. a redupl., riyxyw, dyacyetv, &c.
85. 06s. 2. perf.
and aywx*, ( 97. 06s. 2.) perf.
pass. r,yy.m.MED.
The aor. I.
</, a'aeStu, occurs also, but seldom in the Attics'. See
9G. OA.,, g. about the Homeric imper. <t|i.
'AAThe forms ueui, aaact, (to satiate,) which are classed under
this root, may be seen below in aco, but the following belong
hither, viz. atiwai, Hnxhau, (to be satiated, weary of a thing,)
as if from AAEfi, which in Homer are commonly written
aSSjjuai, &CS.
aSeiv, &C. see avSavtt.
Ai/{, see n\m.
|
'AEfl, see itifu andj.
imfu, {I blow, breathe, see &,) keeps its everywhere, infin. &wtu,pass. ar/iai, com
monly with the act. signif., but also to be blown, Od. . 131.
am'*, see } 95. Obi. 4.
See Heind. ad Plat. Gor^. 50. and PArf. 79. The endeavour to distinguish
this verb from xttrxyv has probably produced this striking anomaly, which was
favored by the circumstance, that this augment is irregular even in its proper place.
'Thissingularformissatisfactorilyexplained by ihedigamma. The verb iy*, ttyn/ti,
is one of the words, in which we trace in Homer the vestiges of the digamrna men
tioned in C. Obt. 3. This verb was originally FArn, and this F was a consonant
(V.) On being compounded with cans, it became of course KAFFArn, just asBaXX.iv
became xaftSaAXa, &c. (117- Obi. 2.) No wonder that' this double spiritus, chained
as it were by the metre, was retained here, whilst the digamrna vanished every
where else. Considering the intimate relation, or rather what may be termed in
some respects the identity of the sounds T and F, U and V, (see the Note to p. 8.)
it was very natural that it became a u. Compare below iZu&n in iJav*.
4 We must guard against mistaking for this aor. that of the Attic verb &ttk for
itcru, which sometimes approximates to it in signification*.
5 This spelling has been introduced by grammarians, because some kindred
words, (as aim, satiety,) are short, and yet Homer employs the first syllable of the
verb always as long.See Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 1C.
[* "Att or aerv as a contraction for iirru or itrrti, should have the iota sub
scriptum, &ttw or atrrv.E. H. B.]
ANOMALOUS VEEbS.
239
algew, {I take,) a'tpr,au,iSs'0y)v, ( 95. 06s. 4.) aor. act., ef\ov,

iXE7v, &c. from* EAft.MED.
It has a fut., which very seldom occurs, viz. ix, ex.gr. Aristoph. Eg. 290.
Non-Attic writers formed the aor. 2. med. in -x/mr, (xifuXxr; instead of -i<ro.
See 96. Obs. 8.) The Ionian* had a particular redup/. in the per/, ifmlfwu,
&(<z!(/tai, with the spiritut /enis. In the sense of to take, catch, lay hold of,
xXltxtptxi may be considered as its real pau. : see below.
x\u, contr. of iil^n, {I lift up,) is regular. Observe only, 1.) that the Attic Poets
use the tinaugmented moods of the aor. 2. med. (ex. gr. iw'ur.v, Soph. El. 34.)
when they want a short syllable, instead of using the usual aor. 1 ., of which
the x is long according to $ 101. Obs. 2. ;2.) that Homer in the same case
also uses the indie, aor. 2. med. without the augment,
but else gene
rally in the indie, the aor. 1. and in the other moods only the aor. 2. (noxu.**,
ifirBiu, ifsl/tnt, &c. :3.) that the Epics use as imperf. (floated, was hoisted,
hung,) the plusq. iifn instead of {to or Ht^n, see 97. Obs. 2.:4.) that the
Attic Poets also make the of the fut. ioZ long, as if it were a contraction of
i<v. See Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr. See also Sfvopxi.
alo8a.voLt.Qti, (2 perceive, am sensible of,) fut. ala&^<joiJi.ait, &c.aor.
^(jflo^nv, ( 112. 13.) from the more uncommon pres. aYaSoixat.
ixax'iZv, (Igrieve,) derives", from the theme AXn, which takes an i in the conju
gation, the following forms, aor. Hxax"> xxxx'~;fut. ixx%wv, aor. I. nxd%r,cx,
Jill. 2.MED. &x'ftx' or tbgnfuu, (I afflict myself) aor. tixxî/itit, perf. (Iam
grieved,) ixxxifuu, and without any augment &xx%>iftxi. See about xxnxiixrxt,
the Note to Obs. IV. 6. to 103., and about the accentuation of axtix'f'fi
(II. G. 29.) ix*%n(tnti, A*4gr9m, 111. Obs. 2. The part. pres. act. ix'"',
tvrx, (afflicted, grieving, sighing,) has the same intransitive signif.
oiw/jiivos, (sharp-pointed,) part. perf. pass, of a verb AK.fl,
(from which are derived the subst. axvi and xxukw, a jtoint,
edge,) with the Attic redupl., but no temporal augment, and
retaining % before
(compare 98. 2. with 23. Obs.)
eikiov.ni, (I stray,) has according to 111. 06s. 2. a. perf. aXaXnaâXnuSsti, aKotKîms, which becomes the pres. tense,
and is synonymous with it.
(I ward off,) fut. SXtl-hau, ( 112. 8.) and (from AAEKft,)
aor. med. a\i%aa6xi, see 96. 06s. 9.
This root AAEKfi, AAKn, gives also the Poetical aor. HxxXxn, (HxxXxti,)
iXxXxiTt, &XxXx*r, &c, with the redupl. according to 85. Obs. 2.
ixisftsu, (I avoid,) aor. 1. xXtxeStti and ix%vx/ix, xXwicSxi, ( 9C. Obs. \.)eonj. aor. 1.
xXtuiTxi for 'ttrxi, (Homer.)
otkiu, (I grind or pound into powder, Lat. molo,) fut. aXiau,
(a\w,) perf. pass. dk-nKso-y.ou : d\ri8w, ( 112. 11.) was an
other form of the pres.
aXvivm or ak-hjj.iyqn, indie. eaKviv, see e\\u.
240
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
akianofMu, (I am taken,) forms its tenses from'AAOfl, hence fut.

aXwiro/xai, and (with the act. form, but pass, signif.) the syn
copated aor. ( 110. 6.) 7>\uv, better taXav, pi. iiKu^v, with
long , but the unaugmented forms with short a, infin. d.\Svxt,
conj. aXSi, at, &c. opt. iXolnv, {Ion. aXanv,) part. aKohs, per/.
(likewise with pass, signif.) %\ukv and IxKwxx with .
Homer also has ix'nn with long , //. a. 487- *i(ui was used for the act.
of this verb ; ixirxi/uu is its pan., but only in its strict sense. See iumXUmm.
aKiraiiu, (J transgress, sin,) fut. d\trr\o-ui, aor. rikirov, ( 112. 13.)
The act. and med. have the same signif. The adj. part. iXirn/tiMs, (sinner,)
Od. i. 807. may be explained by the per/, according to 111. Obs. 2.
AAK, d\a\xe7v, see dXti-u.
aWo/A.M, (/ leap,) is regular, iXovfj-ai, &c.
Practice is wavering in the aor. between aor. l.fikd/tnf, SXmtHcu, (, 101.
Obs. 2.) and aor. 2. ixiftni, iXwShu, (a.) Homer merely has the syncopated
aor. ( 1 10. 8.) which takes the spiritus lenis, and of which there is the 2 and
3 pers. i\tt, ixn, part. iXfittn, IriX/imt " The conj. is also commonly, but
erroneously found with the lenis ixnrai, and shortened <!xiti, (06. V. 15. to
103.)
AAO,see iklaxoixai and avaXiirxcv.
aXiiixxa/, (/ shun, escape,) fut. d\v%a> 7, &c. It is different from
aXutD or aKvaau, Horn. (/ am beside myself.)
u/jLaqravui, (I err,) fut. ifjLaprvtaoiJ.au, perf. vi/juLprnxa, aor. %fj.apTov,
( 112. 13.)
Instead of r/ft(Tn Homer has tipfytm with the lenis, (compare aXXs/un,)
with a transposition, ( 96. Obs. 7.) and with the insertion of /S according to
5 1 8. Obs. 1 . and compare 110.11.2. iVore.
dtxfiKio-xu, (I render abortive, miscarry,) fut. dn.$\waa, &c. from
ctufi\6oj, of which the pres. occurs only as a compound Eâ/x/3Xouv, &c.
dixitiyju and dixTtiQ-yjioviAcu, see s'x*'.
dixv'kotx.laxu, (I commit a fault, err,) fut. dixn'ka.xriau, aor. r>/j.~
TiXaxov, dixitXaxuv, ( 112. 10.) also dufikaxlaxu, and with a
short initial syllable d-nXzxeiv, dixtytivvvixi, AMIEf2, see
above hvviu, 108. III.
dva.lvofj.zi, (/ refuse, deny,) aor. wrivztJ.riv, dvnvao-Qat.
This verb is not a compound, (see Buttm. Lexilogus, I. 63. 10.) The aor.
is perfectly regular, like ixu/tiv<z/xr,*, and the like. But there is no other
tense to be met with.
See about the lenis, $ 6. Obs. 2. and compare ip^r***. The length of the a
denoted by the circumflex is an anomalous augment ; whence WiXrt, not ItxXti.
This verb evidently is derived from iXtit/uii, the r is not intercalated in the
pres. (after the analogy of J 1 12. 06s. 7.) but omitted in the //. Compare iiiww.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
241
avXi<rx&>, (I consume, expend,) forms its tenses from dvahoui,

imperf. dvdXovv. Both duriKuaa and dvatXaxTx were used, and
as a double compound x.mviKua<x., and the same in the
perf.
This verb differs from ixirxeftxi in the quantity of the a, and the regu
larity of the signif. There is no aor. 2.
Mew, (/ please,) imperf. Uriaviv, lintam, Milam, ful. abneu, aor.tiln, Sin, perf. iiix,
(Dor. Si}*,) see 112. 13.
This Ionic and Poetical verb must be considered as perfectly identical with
the regular rilu, (I delight,) fta/tai, (I am delighted,') which only differs in
construction. Compare \mvu and Xn'&u, and the like.Homer has also
tSxhn' for Stn in the aor.
win;, iviexifu, see 108. 1. 4.
irinS*, a perf. with the signif. of theprej., 1pierce, penetrate through, from a theme
ANen or ANEen, whence comes 5>j/, flower, and irSi*, I bloom, see J 97.
Obi. 2. and compare below mmx.
dvoiyui or dwlyvvfj.1, see o\yu.
ivuya, (/ order, command,) is an old perf. 1 pers. pi. avcoyêv,
imper. xvarxfit, dvuyiroj, dviiyere, or irregular dvo>x$oj, ava>x$h
( 110. Obs. 5.) plusq. as imperf. (wwyeiv,) /on. r,vwyt%.
This per/, having the signif. of the pres. originated the corresponding
form, (Herod. 7, 104.) 3 pert. pres. imyu, imperf. Utaiyn, fut. kiucp, aor.
m*\a.The perf. iiuya. itself never has the augment.
i*at)(iu, see ATP.
itrafirxu, (I deceive,) aor. Hcrxfn, ixupln, &c. is an aor. redupl. (6 85. Obs. 2.) of
'A*ft, (whence ifri and iwvifuu,) properly / touch, feel, stroke, Lat. palpo, from
which the new pres. has been formed, according to 112. 10. ; fut. imfwv.
The middle voice has the same signif. as the act.
iraXxou, augment, see 80. 2.
[
irevett;, see ATP.
'ifitji.au, Att. 'ifiafuu, depon. med. (/ supplicate, imprecate.) We find only once,
(Od. .322.) the infin. act. iutrtfiinu, perhaps aor. 2. pan. of APOMAI, see
Buttm- Compl. Gr. Gr.The Homeric part. 'i(ti/tim has a different signif.; it
means injured, worn down.
ianîtKu, (I Jit, adapt.) The radical theme API2 gives the fut. a^ru, aor. 1. r(ttt,
&(r*i, &c. ( 101. Obs. 3.) aor. 2 i>a(<it, (see 85. Obs. 2.) from which came
the new pres. (according to 112. 10.) imperf ififiriu, Od. \. 23.But the
theme AP1J combines with the causative signif. tofit, the immcdiative or intrans.
one to be adapted, quadrate with, (see 113. 2.) The perf. 2. aîâ, Ion. u^noa?,
as a pres. tense has only this latter intrans. meaning, (part,fcm. Epic iti^wx :)
* This form too, (like xxoilxii, above under tytv/u,) is explained by the Epic
digamma, for the verli itiim is one of the words alluded to in 6. Obs. 3. From
FAATI comes the syllabic augment in iuia, and this
which is derived from the
double F after the augment, (EFFAAEN. like iXX/3!:) the digamma here made a
position, and could, therefore, not be dropped entirely, as almost everywhere else.
The seeming importance of this w, (as if it were meant for the adverb well,) may
have favored the retention of this form.
"A{{i, transitive, Od. i. 248. is incorrect instead of ioniai.
242
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the aor.
though less frequent, is likewise inlrans. Theperf.pass.ifi(tfuui0,
formed after the analogy of the fut.
agrees in meaning with
This
fut. itself, with other forms derived from it, (see *{/,) has obtained the par
ticular signif. to adapt one's self to, conciliate, which some of the above forms
also have sometimes, (//. a. 136. Soph. El. 147.)"Ayam, (fitting,) is the
tyncopaled aor. ($ 1 10. 8.)
agiaxaj, (I satisfy, please, conciliate,) fut. apiou, perf. pass. jjgEo>tai.
MED.
It is derived from APfl, of which if'tr*, (according to 95. Obt. 15.) is
the old fut., which exclusively assumed this particular siguif., and produced
the rest of the tenses along with the new pres. tense.
igvu/j-ai, (belonging to ouqaj, as nrxpvvixxi does to irratqw,) is used
instead of oupoiMu in a particular sense, (to get, obtain, as
the reward of exertion, or as booty.) The rest of the tenses,
except the pres. and imperf. are derived from the radical
form".
jtJ^: (/ plunder,) has with the Attics kfitiru, (i^xirs/ixi,) ijf<rs*a, tifrirSm, Slo.
with the later writers, (;,) k^ri\u, i^xiyni, See. Homer has both formations, (see 92. Obt. 1.)"
APO, See aâgiffxa*.
allu and
(J increase,) fut. al\mv, ( 112. 13.)The past, with the fut. of
,
the middle voice, / grow.
ATP, to this root with its principal meaning to take, belong the following two com
pounds" :
1 .)
(/ take away,) of this verb we find in Poets only the imperf. (in
the sense of the nor.) irxifvt, and aor. 1. med. iTnuîftm, (from ATPn.)
To these tenses must be added the part. aor. I. act.
and med.,
(with pass, signif.) imv(tt/ttvts with a particular change of vowel. These
forms are strictly related to the former in point of meaning.
2.) i!r.TO,r<t,, (J reap the fruits of, enjoy,) fut. Wmftrtfiw, aor. Irntigiftxt,
iiraufirSai, and in un-Attic writers, IrxvfxrSai.(See 90. 8.)
The old Poets have also the act., and chiefly the aor. IrxS^n, Pind. Pyth. 3,
65. conj. ithOû, infin. itxuûi or imtiî/uy. The pres. WavAu, which is made
from it, is iu Hesiod.
ityvoav, (I draw from, as water from a river,) fut. d$u%u, aor.
fyua*, 92. Obs. 2.
A$see \a$S*, and ottaQitrxu.
xVb (I am angry,) iyîsoixai, ri-/îabnv, ( 112. 3.)
AXn, see iu^,
10 In Jpollonius,vrhere the reading ipîfiim is incorrect. Compare ix^x'r1" and
Compare //. . 446. with 121. and x. 160. with i. 124.
t'Aj*"^ na ifiri in the /<., but the /W.
cornea from ipritrtt or
i^TxrTa, which is a Doric and dialectic form. , H, B.J
" See about both, Buttm. Lexilogus, I, 22.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
243
, this theme occurs with four different signif.

1.) to blow, imperf. &t, (Apoll.) commonly Sti/n, (see above.)
2.) lo sleep, aor. arcc, and ( 112. Obs. 3.) aua, Horn.
3.) lo satiate, ful. in, aor. tlira, whence in the pres. pass, arai, and lengthened
iirxi, (Hesiod, A. 101. as a fut. according to $ 95. Obs. 12.) infin. act.
i/tttcti, (Horn.) contr. from aiftivcti. Verbal adjective iref : hence with
the friv. , Hhtos, (Hesiod,) ins, (Horn.) insatiable. Compare above
'AAand the Note to &&u.
4.) to hurt, in which sense it is stated above as a contr. of iiu.
aufrt, see cuft).
B.
fixlyui, (I go,) fut. ^-haoixai, perf. fiifimx, aor. 2. /3mv, after ernv :
thus, sôi/aev, firivau,
finru, fialw, fiw.Some of its
compounds have also a pass, voice, for instance, vxpa.fid.lvu,
(fgo beyond, transgress,) perf. pass, Tra-pxpifiaiAzt, aor. pass.
lea^fioiSnv. Verbal adj. paris.
All these forms are derived from BAI2, and are conjugated like "njui, ex
cepting the pres. tense ; but Homer has even this with the redupl., part,
pistil, and /3j0*.The plusq. I/3i/muv has in Epic poetry the signif. of the
imperf. or aor., ex. gr. It. . 495. '513. Compare /3<* l/Si^Xn'xuv. See
about /3i, 0u', r,>i, the similar conj. of ?s->i, 107. Obs. 4. The shortened
forms of the perf. (ex. gr. fitfiari, /3i/3ai, /3i(3ij, 1 10. 10.) occur seldom except
in the Poets and Dialects.Homer has the aor. 2. shortened /3aT for \$imi,
lir%ig*uixi for vrti$r,Tia.The Epics too have an aor. med. (as act.) but
wavering in the form, ifiwcirs, or according to J 96. Obs. 9. \finmt. Imper.
fSma%.See below filepat.
This verb has likewise the causative signif. ( 113. 2.) to cause lo go, but
only in the Ionic dialect, and in Poets. The ful. act. /3nV, and the aor. 1,
ifintra have only this signif.
fiaXkoj, (I throw,) fut. fizhw, sometimes also fiaXkriau, ( 112. 8.)
aor. efiaXov, perf. fiifiXnxoc, pass. (SifiXnixai, (conj., see 98.
Obs. 9.) aor. 1. pass. lfi>,r>m.MED.
There are a few Epic forms derived from a syncopated aor. (ifix.**, see
110. 6. 7-) aor. %u/t!iXriTnt, (3 dual,) pass. ifiXwre, fiXr,r9xi, opt. fiXti/tm, fiXtio,
8tc. conj. fixmrm, (for (iXr.nrai,) and from this again a ful. trvftfiXxftftxi.
The Epics also make the perf. pass. fii/iiXttpixi, (as if from BOAEft.)The
plusq. i?.i;,>.f.Kin has with Epic Poets the signif. of the aor. [hit,) ex. gr. II, t,
66. 73. compare /3.', ifii^wn.
fixariôi, (I carry,) fut. fiaurxau, &c. taV.es the other formation
in the pass. ex. gr. ifiavzix^Vy ( 92. Obs. 1.)
BA^'ifitifti, see fidlw.
14 It maybe shortened, when contracted ; for instance, xttrifci as in Irvfu.
15 The old radical theme of this verb had an i, (compare rifiw tuuvu, r^tTo* rpcLx-w,
and below rx'iXXti.) This is evident from the derivative fiiXm, and especially from
the verbal frtx'trns in IxaTn/SiAiTXf, whence BOAEn, (sec 112.9.) and likewis
through the metathesis BEA, BAE, the forms (HfiXxxa, fSXufwt, &c. (110. 1 1.)
R 2
244
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fi'u/uti or i.'M, a Homeric fut. I shall live, which may be considered either as a
real irregular fut. (like n'tfuu, or like xiw, *i<*,) or as a conj. used like a fut.
instead of li'tu/iui, (see 139. Obi. 8.) Neither do we attempt to decide whe
ther it belongs to an old verb BEIfi, (whence, perhaps, /3<', />'>,) or whether
the pan. form of the verb/3*/ took the collateral meaning of wandering through
lift, that is to say, living, in which case Siuc/uu would correspond to the act.
form jiila, conj. for p*.
gippclexu, (J eat,) from BPOfl.
The part. perf. fit/Sfwun sometimes undergoes a contraction like that of
110. 10. whence Soph. Antig. 1010. fii/jjirif. See about the Epic aor. f/5f",
1 10. 0. The Homeric /i/3a;3( belongs to a particular verb, the intensive
/3i/3f9i, / devour.
fSi&eif (I live,) fut. fiioiooiMu, aor. Iplcoaa, and (aor. 2.) s/3uuv, /SicJvai,
part, finis, conj. fiiu, air, &c. opt. fiiymi, ( 110. 6.)
\ The forms fiiujKapai, and avafiiuricepeLi, have both the intrant, signif. Qo start
into life, revive, Plato Phad. 72.) and the transitive one, (to restore to life,
Crit.9.) It is merely in the latter sense that it has the aor. 1. ifiivra/mr,
(Od. 9. 4C8. Plato Pitted. 89.) in the former the act. ita^mmu is used.
BA, see fiiXXm.
fiXxarxvu, (7 sprout out, bud,) pKxtsrviaai, sfiXxirov, ( 112. 13.)
fiXciixoj, {I go,) has, as if from MOAft, aor. e/lmXov, mXuv, /j.o\o)v,
fut. tKokvvfxoLi, perf. u.ii.fi\coxx, (according to 19. Obs. 1.
for nAitXanta,) as if it were MAOfl, whence came the pres.
tense fiXtiuKu. See 110. 11. The pres. /xoXsu is sus
picious.
fitxu, (/cry, or callout,) always contracts i into a>16 in the Ionic dialect, fut. fiarefiui,
it then draws the accent back; aor. ?/W, and takes c in the aor. pass.
BOA, see
and fiiv*.ipeti.
/3d<rxfc', (Head to pasture,) fut. /So-rxtiew, &c. ( 112. 8.) MED.
fiov\oixxt, (7 )tZ/,) yu<. fiouXvioixxi, perf. fitfiouXvu-xi, aor. Ifiouvifiovk-J&w. (See about the augment, 83. 06s. 5.)
Homer lias also a per/". 2. /ii/Ssi/Jut, (v^fcfavXu, / prefer.) The first syllable
was likewise short in Homer, and the old language in general, in which case
it is written with an e, 0>Xir9i, ( 5. Obs. 3 )
BO, see buiit.
| BPO, see /S</3!.
fifX*"i 'fyu/C", an Epic aor. to wake a noise; different from fy'tîr, to wet, îû-Sai,
&t'X&*'*'t and ô^Swr;, to be wet.
I roar, bellow, dep. pass. The perf. act. has with Poets the signif. of the
pres. Compare unxatuai and /muufuu.See about the perf. fiifyix*, Buttm.
Lexi/ogui, II. 85.
15 This becomes evident on. comparing the verb /33u" for /3i3i", to aid. Com
pare below iiiu.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
245
r.
yxixtu, (J marry,) from TAMfi, fut. again yaixia, yaixu, aor.
eynux, yriixxi, 8cc.perf.ysyziji.mx, &c.MED. I marry, take
a husband. The form eyx/A-ndm, (whence Theocr. has yxu-tSeTax,) is a pure pass.
TA, see TENfi.
y'tyuva, a per/, with the signif. of the pres., I call aloud, proclaim. But most of the
other forms are made as of a pres. in m or derived from this per/. ; infin.
ytytnui, imper/. \yiyt,%vi, (for -tar,) 3 pert, iytyuiu, but also (lytywt,) yiymt,
which form consequently occurs as pres., imperf^ and aor. See 111.2.
TEN. This root, which corresponds to the Latin verb gigno, genui, has two prin
cipal signif. ; the causative, to beget, and the immediative or inlrans. to be born,
The forms are anomalously intermixed. Of the act. one there is none in use
but the per/, (yiyna :) all the rest in both signif. belongs to the medio-passive
form. The whole may, according to custom, be assigned to two different pres.
tenses :
1.) yim/iai has merely the meaning of bring born ; in the pres. it is Poetical,
to be begotten, and to beget ; in the aor. lyutm/wt merely transitive, to
beget, in both prose and poetry. Else the regular verb ymau is used in
this last signif.
2.) ytyve/ieu, (old and Attic, later yiufssu,) /ut. ytvfooftai, aor. iytveftrir, per/.
yiyifnfieu, or (in act. form) yiyna : un-Attic forms lytvnSni, ytynSwftxi.
All these forms are absolutely intransitive not only in the proper signif.
of being born, but also and even more frequently in the mere sense of
becoming, growing, the Lat. fieri. To this must be added the signif. to
be, since iyiiipm and yiyna serve at the same time as prtelerites of the
verb i!tcu. But whenever yiyna can be translated by the pres. tense /
am, it always conveys this particular meaning, / am by birth, or have
become.
There is for yiyna a Poetical form, (yiy&a,) pi. yiya/ztv, yvyittrn, infin.
yiyiifiit, (for -urai,) part, ytyaiis, Attic yiy*s, (see 1 10. 10.) It appears to
come from TAD, from which is also derived the older form ytyixtn, (for
ytynxuxi, see 111. 2.) in Pind.17lyitre, y'tm, (Hesiod, Pind.) is the synco
pated aor. for lyinro: see also the following article.
ylrrs, {he took, seized,) an old verb in Homer, of which no other tense occurs. In
other Poets it also stands for iy'mrt, Syim, from the preceding verb.
ynSico, (I am glad,) yv&ww, &c. ; per/, yiyrfta, is the same with
the pres. and more used.
yn%att or yntitxv, {I grow old,) /ut. yn(aee/ii, is regular after the first form, yet the
Attics prefer the form yneaiai to the infin. aor. yn(atai.
This ynfavai is the infin. of the more ancient aor. lyrirar, (see Buttm.
Compl. Or. Gr.) to which belongs also the Poetical part, ynfat, (It. j. 197.
yntaTtrn>, Hesiod, E. 188.) to which the aor. J2jv, from iilfdrxu, exactly
corresponds. See 1 10. 6.
" The anomalous form ytydart, (Batraeh. 143. Horn. Epigr. till.) may be
explained from the per/, yiyaa, (-dart for art,) having become the pres. tense, (see,
however, Buttm. Lexitogus, I. Note to Art. 2, I .) whence also txyiyitrrai, Hymn,
Ven. 198. ; the latter through a new anomaly as a jut.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
yiyttfjuu, ylvofixi, see TEN.
ytyvcioxv, (old and Attic, commonly ymtiaxv, I know, Lat. nosco,)
from rNOQ,fuf. yvdao/xai, aor. eyva/v, pi. eyvwy-ev, &c. infin.
yvutoti, imper. yvaiSi, yiurai, &c. opt, yvoi'nv, part, ymis,
( 110. 6.) per/, 'iyvaixa, pass. eyva/oiJ.au.
In the carnalive signif. ( 113.2.) to pertuurle, which the compound imyiyyurxa has, particularly with the lonians, it forms the aor. 1. xAyvuirx.
yiau, (I bewail,) aor. 2. lysn, II. ?. 500. ( 96. Obs. 5.)
y^nyt^lu, see tyiiooj.
TUN, see yiy&nx.
A.
AA,lulu. The forms belonging to these themes have four
principal signif. : to divide, give to eat, burn, teach.
1. ixiu, (I divide, particularly with a sharp instrument, / diitributt,) in this
form and signif. has merely the pres. and imper/. and is only Poetical ;
but the/ut. tare/tai, aor. tixtrdpw, as depon. med. have the same meaning,
and arc also employed in prose ; the per/, 13xr/txi has the pass, sense,
(lam divided, distributed,) and its third pers. pi. hixixrxi adheres again
to the root Son's/ for the sake of euphony. Compare (ix/s/txi i/ix/rdftxr,
>a!u \ixna.fi.r\i. The pres. txr'nftxi, (which see below,) bears the same
relation to these forms as rxr'ufixi to trxrxrSxi.
2. tietlvjfti, (I give to eat, treat, /east,) med. Ixlw/ixi, (I consume, revel,) 2 pers.
ieutvt, (see 107. Obs. 4. 4.) according to the analogy of verbs in nyu
makes its tenses from 2/<v, which, however, never has this signif. in the
pres. tense, Ixlra, ixiro/ixi, &c.
3. itt'm in the pres. tense signifies also to burn, kindle'6. In the per/, iilnm,
( 97- 4.) it has the intrant, sense of the med. ix'm/txi, (I burn, am on
fire,) aor. 2. (ihxtifiw,) 3 conj. oxtirxi.
4. AAf! combines the causative sense to teach, with the immediaiive one to
learn. In the first we have only the aor. 2. iSxst or ciixet, ($ 83. Obs. J.)
to which belongs also the Homeric SiSai, but in the sense of /earning, per/.
( -!5*at.) hixxiri, 3iSa;, aor. pass. iSo!>i, (properly was taught, i. e.learned,)
whence the new per/, hixnxx. (Jill- 3.) or iiixti/ixi, /ut. ixirtfuu: iiixx
as a pres. tense, gives (StSSo-Sau,) iiixxrSxi, to get to know, to investigate,
experience, Homer. This verb is merely Poetical, and has no pres. tense
in either sense, but the usual iilxtxu (below) comes from it.
The Epic Swu, onus, &c. an anomalous/ut. with the steady meaning 1 shall
Jind, also belongs to this root10.
Sotxva), (I bite,) from AHKfi, fut. Siô/xai, perf. SeXuxa, aor. Eoaxov,
112. 12.
"ixfixu, see VifAw.
18 It is from misunderstanding the passage //. i. 4. 7. that the intrans. signif. is
given to this form. Compare II. r. 206. 227.
" Compare xtiu in xupxt. Both are old /ut. from AAfl, KEfl, in the form of the
/ut. 2. instead of ia'ut, mm, with the contr. of the two first vowels, as in the gen.
xXuas, (from x\Um,) for xk'mvs. See 53. Obs. 5.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
247
Sg&v, (/ sleep,) fut. Sag&iiffo/Liai, per/* 5sSap&*i>ta, aor. eoo^&ov,

112. 13.
Poets use JJ{9 for iia^Bcv, ( 96. Obs. 7 ) and the compound with urs
sometimes takes in the aor., the form of the aor. past. rioagSii. xara3a{St/f,
(fatten asleep,) which form may be considered as aor. 1. for i3ir'{-3>i, (com
pare xtxafBxi for -trSxi, and *U!t*t in rt;9,) or as a solitary instance of an
aor. 2. pan. with 3, (see 100. Obs. 9.)
JaTia^tat/, (see huu 1.) aor. ]. in/fn. ixr'tairScti, Hesiod, E. 795. See 96. Obs. 1.
AAA, see iala.
Yittrai, see }oxreu.
| tfsT. see SiV
| liilat, see Sutrai.
ShWa", (I shew,) fut. hifa, 107. and 112. 14.)MED.
The Ionians make the fut. 0%*, ttiga, iStsy/tsu, (ixMixS*', see 27Ois.3.)
The med. hlxiv/iKi has in the Epics (//. <. 196. Hymn. Apoll. 11.) the sense
of greeting, welcoming, pledging to drink, and therefore the per/", also belongs
hither with a similar signif. to that of the pres. "iuiiyp.ni, (for liiuyum.) 3 pt.
iuitxuriti, 3 sing, plusq. as impcrf. iuiixre:iuxo.iu.ofd.a.1, itti'trxapttit, and
rxsp.xi are collateral forms, which all have the same signif.
iunu, /o /far, flWa, /u(. XsUsffu. The pfr/. Ji3*, ( 97- Obs. 1.) and isS/* (r,)
have the power of the pre: (I fear;) their alternate use was regulated by
euphony. Syncopated forms are made from liitot : i'tiipttr, i'iitn, 3 pi. plusq.
'
ttiiirat, and an imper. SiJiSi, (J 110. 10.)
The Epics also used iuiuxa, iuiix, (compare the preceding SiiSixâ,) and
5i/J/,ai, &c. and still more shortened (in Apoll.) part, luiaia. Hence came a
new pres. iiliu, which occurs only in these Poets, but from which all the above
tenses were formerly derivedWe find the aor. always written TOura in Homer ; this is the only instance
of a Hula" doubled in the augment.
The Epic I'm includes also the idea of flying from, escaping, (It. x- 251.)
of which the causative is to frighten, (\ 113. 2.) But it is very singular that
Homer renders this exclusively by the pass, voice, (i'ttrSat, conj. itvpai, &c.)
The act. of another form ilnfti, on the contrary, signifies to hunt, chace,
(iriUcat, II. r. 584) and the pass, is to fly from, run, (3/ivtix/, //. ^. 475.) The
infin. %'mrHxi may belong to both forms, and has both meanings, (It. p.. 276.
304.)
AEK, see %ukvu(jli and i'txo/tau
it/ut, (I build,) aor. Xlup.K, perf. ItS/tuxx, &c. (J 110. 4. and 11.) The form hl/aptr
in Homer is the shortened conj. aor. See Obs. V. 15. 103. MED.
The same theme gives likewise the tenses to iaftum, (I tame, subdue,) perf.
iii/mxa, aor. pass, iiapm, iS/awSh*,iap.Z and iapda are both pres. and fut. In
prose we find in this sense 2*,uaw, which is regular.
40 Several grammarians place the form Sn'Sin under iix'pjf, because they fancy
that the signif. to receive, welcome, is more readily derived from it. But the funda
mental meaning unquestionably is to reach the hand, and hlsm probably signified in
the origin simply / stretch out the hand, from which iixap.ui, Si^^tai. is very natu
rally derived. Compare iiiisixa, hitm, which also have the redupl. 3k, because the
radical syllable is likewise iu.
" That the true cause of the lengthened syllable, which occasions this reading
here and in Irtiituexrct, iHi'ii, is to be sought fur in a hitherto undiscovered digamma
after the 3, (dw,) has been shown by Dawes, Mite. 168.
248
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3i;x<< or 3iS*, (/ see, behold,) aor. ih;*m, (see 96. 04#. 70 also lifixm and
13!{^3>ii', all act.
Se'xoAtai, (/ take,) is in Ionic Îko/axi, and hither belongs also,
according to 112. 9. the Epic $eloxr,ix,ivos, (waiting, being
on the watch, II. o. 730. :) SeSsy/u-Evor is used in the same
sense, (77. S. 107. &c.) also 3 pi. SsâTai and plusq. as imperf.
eSeVwiv. Yet likewise e'Sexto,
as syncopated aor. in
the sense of taking.See SEiSsy/xai in mmw/m.
Siu, (I tie, bind,) see 105. 06s. 2. and 95. Obs. 4 the /ttf. 3.
fotir><7ou.zi, ( 99. 06s. 1.) supplies the un-Attic fut. 1. Ss&riMED.
liu, (I want, lack,) fut. li-nau, &c. is commonly impersonal : Se",
(it behoves, is necessary, French il faut,) conj. Se'ti, opt. Se'oi,
infin. SeVv, part. Xtov, fut. Strio-si, &c. The pass. Sbo/axi, Set),
or Se'ei, oe"rxi, &c. is always personal, (I want, need,) Serluofj.xi, ISEri&rjv.
The contr. u was sometimes resolved in this vert, even by the Attics, to
distinguish it from the preceding verb; as Isocr. Butir. 2. nniirw Jii/f, and in
Xenopho frequently 3iir/, 3ii9. But Homer has the aor. ??,(//. .100.)
and a peculiar form livipx,, hvnrtpxi.
il*, see Harm.
I
AHK, see <>.
[
}>!/, see AA.
Sioztrxa/, (/ teach,) loses the o- in the formation : Joa2[<u, Se$i'o*x'
&c. ; with Poets also SioWrWMED.
Comes from AAH. Compare the Aofe to a\u<mu.
Siopxaxa, ([ run away,) occurs only in compounds, (awoSiSgoio-xa;,
Sixotopxexu,) from APAfl,/itt. Ipxaoixxi, perf. o&paxxaor.
eS5v, 5f, a, ajtXEV, eSgars, 3 pi. E'S(35?Tav and eopav, ( 107.
06s. IV. 6.) conj. S, jtr,
&c. opt. opxiw, imper. opx$i,
infin. opxmi, part. opxs. See 110. 6. with the Note.
The Ionians have everywhere <i, liiîrxi, 'igneeptu, iifrf, &c. This verb
must not be confounded with the regular
(/ o.) which has /Irf. art.
aivr-.:, and nor. 1 .
: Si^dixec is common to both.
Zltyiixxi, (I seek, inquire,) is a form of fu, which retains the n in
the pass., 106. Obs. 3.
SixeIV, (to throw,) eSixov, is a defective aor.
3,î!, see p. 177.
I
see Jiru.
|
AME, see Hut,,
ioxrxi or Seztsu, (it appears,) aor. Soxo-axro, conj. Soxaatrxi, (-nttti,)
Homer.
Zoxiu, (I seem, think,) from AOKQ,,fut. 5o$ev, &c. The per/,
from the pass. SE'Soy/xai, (/ have seemed.) The regular for
mation ^wnioj, &c. is Poetical.
See the Kpic Vinn^tim in iiêfuu.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
249
Stm'iti, (to give a hollow sound, make a noise in falling,) per/. Hhu**, ($ 97. Obs. 4.)
aor. XhevrntK and tyinvrwx from a form raorn, which bears the same relation
to Sew'tai, as xrvxlu to ri-rru.
AO, see liiv/ti, $ 107>
ifxfiui, SiSô/ta, see TfiX"I
APA, see S'dsafKU.
St/va/Acu, (I can, am able, have power,) pres. and imperf. like
"<jr*IMu, 2 pers. pres. i&vxoon, Poetically Si/vri. See about the
conj. and opt. 107. 06s. III. 5, and 83. Obs. 5. about the
augment. Fut. St/v7)<70tan, aor . rfivvriSm, (also EXt/vato-S^v,)
perf. SeStjvnixat.
Verbal adjective, oVvaror, possible.
In Homer this rsro is a dejion. med. Imlrwi for OvntS*.
SiJiwj this ueri originally combined the immediative sign if. fo
in,
enfer, with the causative one, to wrap up in, inclose, ( 113.
2.) '
The pres. act. tin has only the latter, (lo wrap in, tint,) and retains it in
the fut. and aor. 1. act. Situ, tSutx, pan. iSc9i, ( 95. Obs. 4.) The MED.
Si^tta/, (I wrap myself up in,) Siaopat, Hhmrifust, took the intrans. {immediative)
signif. (to go in, dive, Sec) which again assumes a transitive signif., to enter
(a garment,) put on (a coat, i. e. to dress.) These signif. of the immediative
sense are retained in the act., in the perf. Siiixa, and the aor. 2. (see 110]
6.) tSit, 5?vj, 2if, imper. iZSi, iSn, con;'. 3m, (//. (. 180. Plato Crat. 413.)
opt. Sim". To this must be added a new act. form in the pres. tense Ji!,
which along with the aor. tint is preferred in certain connections and in the
compounds, to the form Sioftai, \Svfup.tit.
This is the basis of the general practice ; the modifications arising from
the different shades of meaning, especially in the compounds, must be left to
dictionaries and individual study. The aor. med. livtipm has with Epics a
collateral form, Oinn, Qiru, imper. Situ, see 9b'. Obs. 9. Hither belongs
also the part, Svrittmt with the signif. of the pres. in Od. *. 24. Hesiod, E.
382. Herod, makes of Situ Sutiivn, ( 1 12. Obs. 5.)
E.
iifSti, a Homeric form, either from rmt, (to bind,) compare \iynt, iaXm, or from
'{rtfuti, (see below,) for
commonly imre. See Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 87.
syelpoj, (I awaken, or rouse from sleep,) is regular in the act. perf.
synyeqxx, eyhysqix.au.
The med. has the signif. of awaking from sleep, being wakeful, watching,
and its aor. is iyfi/un, ( 110. 4s3.) The perf. 2. lypiytfx, (of which the
anomalous redupl. was probably caused by nyî/tnt,) has also the immediate
signif. like other perf. 2. (see 1 13. Obs. 3.) but acquires a new pres. signif.,
i. e. becomes a new pres. tense ; properly, I have been awakened, i. e. am
awaie, watch; the plusq. with the force of an imperf, iy^nyiftn. Pres. tenses
** Compare 107- Obs. III. 6. Hence UJJ/m for ixiiv/at, (like Su/ttt for Sun/tu.)
See Buttm. Uxi/ogus, I. 17. 10.
** See about the in/in. iyairSxi, (instead of typeUm,) Buttm. Complete Or. Gr.
250
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
derived from lytiyt^x in the same tense are, iytnytfii in Homer ; iyttiystiu
in the later prose ; and yer.yaiiu in the New Testament. From iyttyi^xrt
arises the Homeric form iytfyifii, (6 1 10. Obt. 5.) and from this again with
new anomalies the 3 pers. pi. lyfnyifSrxri.
liaij see irSi*.
|
ibovfj.xL, see V^ûu.
ItyiMu, xa&6ô/w.a!i, (/ sit down,) fut. xaêSowiai, ( 95. Obs. 16.)
imperf., tKx^sîixmv, used as aor.
See, for instance, Plato Meno. 26. p. 89. Xen. Anab. 5, 8, 14. This ren
ders the pre: xaBifrfuxi suspicious even in later writers. Compare below,
"Jp, and above, 108. II. t7r* and f.uxi, which forms properly all belong to
one root. See in Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr., in the List of Verbs,
Later
writers also used the pan. form
instead of IxaSiZopw.
e&e'Xw and &e'X<u, (I will, wish,) fut. e$i\7i<joj, t\-no~cn, &c. ( 1128.) perf. -hSeX-nxx.
(J am wont,) per/, fi'w&a, ( 97. Obs. 2.) Ion. HwScc, is alone
used instead of this pres. tense.
There is nothing left of the pres. but the Homeric part. 7S>, accustomed,
tfiv, (I tee,) an old verb, of which there remains nothing in this tense but uin,
Hut, 'iiitSxi, &c. as aor. of the verb
(which see.) But in the Epics there
is also iiJ in the same sense, (which as pres. of the indie, occurs only in later
Poets,) the pass, form ulofttu, lUctptriY, (iuirsifim, tuexftnes,') for to be seen, and to
seem, Lat. videri. See about the signif. of this verb, g 113. Obs. 10. and about
the special forms used in the sense of knowing, UTix, p2<i, uniuu, &c.) 109. III.
elxo/j perf. Eoma, (/ resemble, appear,) used as a pres. part, ioixws,
Attic slxois-, especially in the neuter eixos-, see the last Note
to 108. (Ion. oIkx, oIkuis, oixor,) plusq. soJxeiv. (Sj 84. Obs. 9.)
fut. ei'&y. (The verb J give way, is altogether regular.) Like
tWais, etna, and sixEvcti occur now and then in Attic Poets for
the sake of the metre.
The pres. uxa occurs nowhere, and the imperf. C!ki, (for U'*u,) merely II. t.
620. The Epic forms i'ixm, itxrnt, and mxrt, XixTt, have been more properly
ranked (in the Note just mentioned, and 110.9.) along with the Attic
U(y/ut, (Soph. Eurip.) among the syncopated forms of the perf. and plusq.
See the same Note about the remarkable form ifgan instead of Ulxmn, which
occurs in the Attic prose-writers.
ii\u, (I crowd, press together,) more commonly t'i\iw or etkiat,
fut. rieoj, &c. aor. 1. infin. ektou, tiXaxi, part. t\aa.s, perf.
pass. EsX/xai, aor. pass. iaXm, infin. aXfivat or d'krinsvxt, part.
dXels, (which forms are also fluctuating in our editions be
tween the spiritus asper, and the spirilus lenis.)
Compare irraXnr, rrxXmxi, from irrikXti : from the same root EAAft, in the
sense of pushing, pressing, comes also iXjtum, (see below,) in the particular
signif. of which to beat, strike, the aor. i).rai, (ex.gr. Od. i. 132.) occurs in
Homer. Hither belongs also, according to $ 112. 9. the plusq. ioXnru, was
crowded, pressed, Apoll. 3, 471. See Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 88. and 76. 7-
ANOMAIOUS VERBS.
t'lpucartti, see MEIPOMAI.
|
tlpi and u/ti, see 108. IV. 5.
eiweIV, (to say,) an aor. 2. indie, ifaov, (Epic eeiwov,) imper. eiwe,
(comp. w/xSeiwe, see 06s. I. 4. 1. to 103.) more usual than
the rather Ionic aor. 1. Eiirce, ( 96. 06s. 1.) imper. Twov,
(erroneously eittov, see J?A'c. /. ad Plat. Menon.) The Attics,
however, use e?War as well as elms, and preferably eIWte,
8ccs*.
With this aor. are intimately connected the fut.
(Ion. ifim,) from
which Poets use as the pres. tenseand of PEfl the per/, i&nus, ( 83. Obs. 3.)
paM. uftiitm, aor. pass. ip'pnSm and ippiSm, (un-Attic tl(i!h, fi;t9ni,)
pt&wa.$,fui. 3. as usual, /u/.
utfitrafim w. Verbal adjective, pnriot, pnrag.
*npu is used as the pre*, tense of this verb, (as we remarked above, 108.
I. 2.) on some occasions ay^tvtn, which properly signifies /o speak in public*
for instance, xaitut ayogtuav mb, tuutSf wrn :otyeîdn is alwavs used in
most of the compounds, ex. gr. i<rxyi(tiiv, I forbid, &*um, I forbade ; in
some Xiyu, for instance, ivnktyv, etvTUTov.
The Poetical imper. ia<rin comes from a collateral form with an inter
calated a. Compare Xwsn, uvxu, putyu.
The Poetical liwar or im'm is also very anomalous ; it is identical with.
ijvsjV, of which (wWitm) ivw-frM is to be considered as the aor., since we meet
with no pres. indie. iwV<r<u!', and the in/In. is circumflexed, (inrtruV, Od. y.
93.) //. iwtfsnja-Ai or Xtit^m 87.
efyyai, (/ exclude, shut out,) fut. s'tp%oj, &c.
elpywixi, with the spiritus asper, I confine, shut up, fut. t"pâ>, &c.
The ancient and Epic language has for both signif. l^yu, whence 3 pl.perf.
i!jvTO, and without the augment, tf^xrtu, they are shut up.
eijjWj see eiitsiv and e/jeo-&<jh. But in the sense of connecting in
order it is a particular verb aor. 1. elpx, (Herod. 3, 87. e%ipas,
exserens,) perf. 'ieppj-ai, part. EsgfisW, (Horn.) ipixhos, (Herod.
4, 190.)
u To assume the theme Erin, as is usually done, is needlessly adopting the ano
maly, which the augment u continues through all themooo*. A theme Einft agrees
perfectly well with a radical form En(whence i!r.)
a Grammarians increase the number of the themes of this verb, without any rea
son, by admitting i('m, which absolutely is either the regular fat. of
or the
pres. tense in the sense of asking, (see below.) It is assumed as a theme here on
account of i"gnx, and merely for this
is ranked among the verbs, which take
the temporat augment u. But as PEfl unquestionably is one of the themes of this
verb on account of ippr,r,v, pnpta., the analogy of tlkttQa, uua^reti, ( 83. Obs. 3.) is a
most natural inducement to connect wgqxac with the same theme.
m II. \. 839. and elsewhere Snrrw is conj. aor.
** Just as iiidrxu and iXvexv omit the t in the fut., so does Wicxu. This fut. is,
therefore, no argument to class iwVr here, (though from its form it certainly
might belong hither.) and as the pres. himn, and its kindred forms nVatri and
Itirtt, when they stand alone in Homer, never signify to sny, but to told, they
must be removed from the radical form u'sruV, and be stated separately below, (see
msTTw,) though there is also a pres. Ivtcrrai from fviVrw used at least in Pind. Pyth. 4,
358. where we have iv<VT for itiruy. See a more detailed account of both verbs
in Buttm. Lexihgui, I. 63. p. 27'J.
252
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tlu^tt, see
skai/va, (I drive,) fut. l\aau, (a,) &c. perf. i\v>\ay.a, pass. perf.
iXrikaixqu, aor. rik&nv. Verbal adjective tXaTor, (with later
writers e^Xot/mu, rikx&m, ekaaroi.)
The theme bJm seldom occurs in the pres. tense, but ix, IXpf, ixS, &c.
injln. ix, is in prose the Attic fut. ( 95. Obi. 12.) See also w/Ui, iXrxi, and
about ix>iXJTo. see p. 17C. the Note, and about ixnxdfwo;, (proparox. ex. gr.
Arat.l7C) HI. Oil. 2.
EAET6, EAe, see "nx't"*1(Xxu, I drag, augment ei, 84. 2. fut. \>$fii and iXuvau, aor. ti\%a
and t'lXxvaa, pass, merely etkxuaiucu, elkxiioSriv, fromEAKT^L
MED.
ikxco, (I give hopes, I cause to hope,) eXvojuuci, {I expect, I hope,)
perf. tohita the same with Xsro/*ai, plusq. as. imperf. suWeiv,
(% 84. Ois. 6. and 9.)
EA, see
'ea, see tJfut.
ENErK, eneik, &c. see fifu.
I
itirv, see uVur.
i>r,v&K, an old per/, which presupposes a theme ENEen, ENS12 : mmnOi, Kxrutr
mS-i, (it, tilt, liet on tomeihing,) Horn. See 97. Obt. 2. and compare above
l&sit, hSer, see XfXfuu.
Wittk, (I teo/d",) has two forms for the aor. in Homer, either Xtinrra, more cor
rectly Miiirw, (see Buttm. Lexilogut, I. f>3. p. 282. and compare above J 85.
O&t. 2.) or according to 85. 06. 3. with the redupl. at the end (3 pert.)
iiiV-rw, \Wvxu, see uViiV.
|
trw/it, see 108. 3.
liXwra, see i7x#.
|
i*rvf;r, iiruvgirKa/utt, &c. see ATP.
'En, see uWr.
iisiaraixxi, (/ know, understand,) 2 pers. sirlaraaat, Poetically
(see the A'ofe to Soph. Philoct. 798.)
imperf. vrtturriivm, (so far it goes after "ara.fj.ai, conj. and
o^j<. see 107. Obs. Ill 5.) _/u<. Imo-rTiffo/xai, aor. hniarr&rit.
Verbal adj. litiarfiros.
'izsw, (I am busy, or occupied, about something, see Schneider's
Gr. Diet.)
This old verb, of which some compounds, (especially S/is-ai,) have been re
tained in prose, has the augment u, (Jii7a-,) and an aor. JWtfv, nrtZv, mil,
(Itrimro, Wirruy, furarrin, but all this rather Poetical.) To avoid mistakes,
compare Imn and ivitrw in i#truV.
i'npj, (Ifollow, attend,') tMfiny,'^'/""! tuls tmdMe voice, which is much
used, has an aor. corresponding to that of the act.
excepting that it has
the spiritut asper in the indie. : inrt/tni, exteSai, evrev, (fxio, e*ito, Horn.)
which latter forms occur chiefly in the compounds, inVw, fee.
a See, about the difference of the forms ivtru and the fut.
Note.
the preceding
ANOMALOUS VERBS,
253
The old Poets have the i also in the other moods of the aor. 'Utuuxi. 'htt'itSxi, lr*{x!! *. But the pres. imrm, Od. i. 820. is a false reading for
l(XtTtti : see especially lafTn above.
ipxai, (I love,) Poetically sqaiMti, (after larafxat,) takes its tenses
only from the pass, form, aor. wqxvSw, (Poetically r,pa.<jxix-nv.)
The pres. tense ipZixoa, epiaSxt, ipwixEvos, is a real pass.
Another regular ifiu is used merely in compounds, igi;5ra/, to pour out,
Ketrifiotffai, &C.
EPm and ij3, see jltyt :i;y>, see also in t;>- v.
Epnxoj, to tear to pieces in the transitive sense, but in the aor. 2.
vqixov it is intrans. ( 113. 2.)
Ipeiitu, (I throw down, overthrow,) has this causative ( 113. 2.)
signif. in the fut. aor. 1. &c. ; iî^ro, plusq. pass. Epic,
instead of ip-hputro, 85. Obs. 1. but the aor. 2. and per/. 2.
ripmov, tp-nqnrct, have the immediative signif. to fall down
Epic med. d.yrtpîij.m,he carried off on high, carried away.
i;f, see uitut and \>W.)m.
h'Ku> (J s^r^ve> contend,) is regular, perf. pass, hp-hpiaixoti with a
strengthened signif. of the pres.
There is another form ifiScutu, and (according to 6 112. 13.) Xfiiitur^mt,
II. v 102. where the i is long for the sake of the metre.
eqeaScu, (to ask,) ôixm, tpwi^xi, imper. l%ov, an aor. fut. ipriaoixon.
The Ionians in their prose have also a pres. tense, ilfnuxi, but use the
imperf. ufofiw, with itftffSeu, thus accented, and this is likewise aor. in the
other moods, fut. ufrivepMi. The Epics have also igifda/ as pres. tense with
the signif. of tUwm. and farther the form ;; in both the net. and med.,
which must carefully be distinguished from the fut. \fu>, (see uVur:) conj.
XftUfUt, Epic for ifiifut. Whatever is wanting, is supplied in prose by
IfMTOil.
if'fu, (I go away,} ippwu, Upp'wx, 112. 2.
The Homeric ireipn is derived from this verb in its causative sense, to
sweep away. See Buttm.
I(u9ttiiv, {I redden, make red,) fut. ifvStwu, &c. ( 112. 13) Homer has also the
radical form
\fivf&, &c.
ifOxu, (I restrain, keep off.) aor. û'xa, infin. tft/xaxiijv, see 85. Obs. 3.
or tlfvi, 5, (/ draw, drag, put/,) is regular through the whole conjugation, fut.
again
med. \piep,xi, II. X- 454. See ,\ 05. 06. 17. Hesiod, (E, 81C.) has
also the in/in. uaiu%m of a form in p., (short.) The MED. "ni-.u-t, takes in
*9 On comparing the forms SWav, ffv'wSat, and iexo*, rî??, (from **,) with firAf,
J*-\it, iTripvv, rrMns, &c.,(see 5, 110. 4.) it becomes obvious that the former have
been produced by the same syncope. The spiritus asper in kV< and EXil, (I?*,)
was changed into an r, which immediately took its station before the following
consonant, thusi-'x"i l-r. The aspirated > in itTsfun is an anomaly.
254
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Epics the signif. to save, preserve ; in this sense some editors write the v with
one r, (lifiram,) when the syllable ought to be long, just as if the v had been
originally long ; and in the sense to draw, they spell it with a double r, (ifurraro,)
as if the u had been originally short. But as the is also found short in the first
sense, (ex. gr. II. I. 186. x- 351.) and as the signif. frequently run one into the
other, it is more correct to denote the lengthening of the v by two ff,withoutany
distinction. The collateral form fvtiUm, which simply means to save, liberate, has,
on the contrary, a long u in the Attics, lprirxrt, but with the Epics this, too, is
short, firi/tnv, II. . 29. and should therefore also be lengthened ippiriun,
iverxm, which, however, is generally neglected. Lastly, there is a syncopated
collateral form, ( 110. 5.) Iftirâi, tlpvirSxi, and purSau, commonly with long
IfvTo, (yet once tûro in Hesiod, 0. 304.) ttgOrt, ti^varxt, $v*ro} &c. alraoBt exclu
sively in the sense of saving, watching over, (except Od. x- 90. '"p"*', dragged,
putted,) which must not be mistaken for the per/, and plusq. of the radical
form i"fi/ictt, I have been dragged.See Buttin. Lexilogus, I. 18. with the Addi
tions in vol. il.
epyrp^M, (I go,) from EAEYfl, fut. eKivooiaxi, aor. rikuSov,
commonly ^X&ov, ( 110. 4.) kxhtlv, imper. IX&e, (see Obs. I.
4. 1. to 103.) &c. perf. tXwXvSa. Verbal adj. iXeuareov.
The per/, with the Epics is
1 per: pi. with the syncope
tly.jkou3ftir.
The Doric is nvS, lJW, see 5 16. Obs. 1.
. It has already been stated above, $ 108. V. that instead of the other moods
of the pres. from Ifx'/f', which more seldom occur, especially in compounds,
we meet much more frequently with those of upu, and that instead of ifx'r1"'
we more generally find the imper/. tut or f,x, and the pres. i!fu instead of
the /ut. \Xivrtpuu.
l<sb-ntJ.ivos, {clothed.) Ion. w&^svor, A tt. a defective part. perf.
U&lv, (I eat,) from JS, (Hom.)/f. <3,um, ( 95. OAs. 18.) per/. Whuxx, per/, pass.
Unhf/Aeu, aor. pass. flSte-Si* aor. act. tQayov, (from *Arfl.) J'crbal adj. I&ifrat.
Part of the forms of fia come from the old formation, fut. iliru, &c. ( 112.
Obs. 3.) where the i in the per/, act. was changed into o, (compare 97Obs. 1. 2.) which in Homer remains also in the paw. ihrHtfixi, iiriherai. Homer
has also the per/. JSuSa, and the infin. pres. tifutxi, ( 1 10. 5.) for
Wipusu.
isvrn, Xairtv, iffTo/inv, see hVmv and 2V.
ifi&&i, see uv-oavM.
tvlv, xaSivlu, (/ steep,)/ut. iv%nffu, xaSivlrifv, augm. zetSnvhv, xaStvât, and Ixs&tuitt.
tiflexu, (Ifind,) from 'ETPJ1, aor.
imper/. iiiet,/ut. ii(vrtt, &c. ( 112. 10.) nor.
pass. ifyStit, ( 95. Obs. 4.) Verbal adj. sipirii .Augm. $ 84. 04s. 2.MED.
Un-Attic writers form the aor. med. like the aor. 1.
instead of
tisi/tm, ( 96. Note to Obs. 1.)
(/ hate,) only in the pres. tense, and Poetical, whence a
MED. (cyj)ccwfj.zt,) aitiy$wy.tx\, (1 incur hatred,) fut: ineyslr\atnj.au, &c. aor. r,y^6ij.m, a.tZYiyjioiJ.r>)iao, perf. airriypriij.a.i,
I am hated. See 112. 13.
80 The infin., notwithstanding its aorislical signif., is always found accented,
artxSHrScu, but there is Ho pres. tense i'x&yuu in the ancient writers. See Buttm.
Complete Gr. Gr.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
255
eyju, (I have,) imperf. sôv, fut. H,ai, (with the spiritus asper,
see 18. Obs. 4.)aor. (as if it were from 2Xfl,) ta%ov,
ff5CE~v> conjff3C7>f> &c- (compounds noLpiayjo, irqtpdayris,)
opt. axotriv, (see the Note to Obs. II. 3. to 103.) imper.
X*S' (110. 6.) but in the compounds also wataa-%E, med.
<tx,om-)v, imper. ayrpv, (icxpdu,/f>v>)whence a new fut. ay/naca,
per/, \<symx, &c.aor. pass. ioxjtSriv. Verbal adj. Ixtojand ayeros.
The aor. *xl" has produced a collateral form of the pres. "fx"i which is
preferred in some particular signif. (to hold, occupy, &c.) to which of course
thefut. ex*'" raore properly belongs31. There is an old per/, of ix">
(U. /5. 218. msXKuU/*.)
We must also notice the following anomalous compounds of ix"
irix*. This verb, when it merely signifies to endure, bear, in the middle
voice ii',î<r3< has the double augm. in the imperf. and aor. nmxlfun, rinrx'pi'l
( 86. Obs. 6.)
i/trix", (/ wrap round, environ,) imperf. itmTxi't fut. ipfll", aor. Upr
!Tirx"i ifi'x1'' > MED. i/trix'f" or i/ttrirx'tu/tai, (I c/othe myself in,
wear,) u-pi%o/stt, aor. tipvirxopttiv.
itrirxnofiMi, (/ promise,) Ion. iricx'/""' (Horn. Herod.) fut. iirwx'"VM'<
aor. v*iffxop.m< imper. ua-orxov, perf. far'irxtuuu.
( / boil, cook,) fut. l^wu, &c. (Herod. 1, 48. has the imperf. tyii.) Verbal adj
i^nrus, iiôTOf, or ifStt.
'En and 'En, see 90.
z.
<aw, (/ live,) has (according to 105. Obs. 5.) <2, Ztfs, Zr>, &c.
imperf. e<uv, itynt, &c. infin. jv.imper.
We also meet, (as if from a form in pi,) the 1 pen. imperf.
and imper.
to which, however, the preceding forms were preferred. Thiser6 is
used by the classic Attic Writers as a defective verb along with the more
perfect tier* /Jim/. The tenses fwx or Zrrs/Mu, iZwx, Vjixa, occur but little or
not at all in the old Writers. The Ionians lengthened ru into
: this
produced with them a new formation, ruu, rmis,
( 105. 04*.
10.,/Vofe.)
*l See about the origin of iV^jn, eî"', from
the Note to Iirw. The ; in the
pres. tense "ex* supplies the place of a redupl. as that in /*>ftf, a-i'sr, exactly like
the i in 'trrtifii, only that in 1'X" 'he spiritus aper was converted into a lenis on
account of the (which was done much more frequently in the old language.)
M This is erroneously derived from OXOfi, and so is i"x***, (see ci'x'/""i) from
OlXOn. Its true derivation becomes obvious from the comparison with the subil.
inm%*i. The simplest perf. of %x* w
and with the augm.Zx*; thus that of
Oixn is ix*- Both were in the usual way with the Attic redupl. Sxt>x", tlxwx*,
(for the i of elxV' naturally occurs but once, as in iuhxn,) yet as of two aspirata
the second also maybe changed, ( 18. Obs. 1.)
t"x"x&, were both used, and
this form was retained for the sake of distinctness.
83 This form is not ^wr-wâ*, ipx-iex1"*, hut fyri-ffx", apri-fx"9, ^' should
properly be iftr-irx" ('ike iftir-iixni) hut 'n tue a"r- 'he ttugm. went over from the
verb to the prep, iprrexn.
256
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fyvrnuv-h {Ijoin,) fut. ZpVtfii, &c ( 112. 14.) aor. 2. pass. Ityynv.
tyrtvtu, (/ gird,) fat. Zohsoj, &c. per/. pass.eâja/juii, (112. 14.)
MED.
H.
see 108. II.
I
*>), see fn/u, 109. I.
iipim, (I sink.) The Homeric irtfssn/ums, (II.
491.) is most correctly derived
from this verb. It may be assumed that, whenever a verb began with a long
vowel, this vowel was shortened by the redupl. : thus i/ti/uiiui. The metre
required a doubling of the 6rst instead of which the Poets used
as is
done in other words ; ex. gr. uxixapyit from raXi/ttt,
for vin/ncs.
.
6AN, see Snirx*.
Hao/ixi, (I admire, behold,) this is the oldest principal theme, of which isolated forms
have maintained themselves in Homer and the Doric writers, (9<t>9<, 5MwS<u,
Dor. 3*w9u,) which have given rise to a double change: 1.) Sx'tifuu, Dor.
Sn'uuxi, Ion. 2.) the usual dicufuu, (fut. Sxitopeu, Ion. 3iri/uu,) Herod,
has the form iSmrt, (see 105. Note to Obs. 16.) though commonly with the
various reading i9uu"f. With respect to the signif. of this verb, Homer uses
it only in the sense of admiring, and never has dixrdz/: later writers use all
its forms in the sense of beholding, contemplating. This verb must not be con
founded with 9An, (to nw te, suck,) which see below.
Sxitrai, (I bury,) aor. 2. pass. Iritytw, ( 17. 6.) perf.pass. te'S/x6A*per/, as pres. rihi**, (I am astonished,) where the second aspirata is changed,
whilst in the aor. trctfn the first is changed, (see 18. 1. and 4.)
eAtl, an Epic defective verb, of which there occurs the aor. 1. act. 3>ii, (to nurse,
suck,) and the med. Siifa/, (see 105. Otis. 5. and 16.) SnVw9n, to suck, milk.
See Secouai.
Biitefiiti, see Saufzxi.
|
SHxm, see IS'o.v.
Sipo/xai, (I warm myself,) is a defective verb, of which nothing
occurs in prose but the pres. and imper. ; but Homer has
also the fut. bepo-ntxai, and the conj. aor. pass. (eSe^jiv,) Seêo/.
St'o-ffaffSai, (to obtain by prayers,) hiaaavro, &c. a defective aor.
Verbal adj. hinroi, (woXi&eo-tos-, &c.)
diu, (/ run,) fut. beuaoixai or Siuaovixxi,
95. Obs. 17.)no
other tense occurs ; see -reiyjti.
Sxicftai, see SAtpui : SwSai, see 8An.
|
eHn, see 6A*.
btyyiica, (I touch,) formed of &i'y H, fut. 3-<ô/xai, aor. t&iyov.
Svrio-Kto, (I die,) from ANft, aor. Eâvov, &vi$xwv, fut. Savovixxi,
:t The forms Siym, Siym, which occur, ought probably to be accented like the
aor.
ANOMALOUS VF.RBS.
257
avo^sxwvixn, perf. r&mxx, (as if it were from ONAfl, see

110. 11.) whence the following shortened forms, (according
to 110. 10.) in common use, r&vaixw, ars, t&vxo-iv, ete&v*o-av, r&vxvai, (rs^vavai, see ibid, the Note to Obs. 6.)
r&vxiwi, Te'Sva&i, part, rsSmxws, {Ion. r&vriais,) commonly
mane, and neuf. TE&vs&iy, (Horn, te&veiws-,) gen. uros, fern.
reSnaex, (see ibid. Obs. 6. c.)
There is an Attic collateral form of the fut. derived from rUnxa, riM&,
or nitrifefuu. Verbal adj. inris, mortal.
Sa{i?y, See Sfufxa).
\
Sîefai, see rriteufiru.
ePE*, see T(ifu.
I
ePEX, see tj
Spvirrco, {I break in pieces,) aor. 2. pass, srquipmi, ( 18. 1.)
Spwaxoj, {I leap, skip,) made of 0OPX1, aor. e&oôv, /u<. &ogo2//,ai,
Ion. Sopiofxxt, see 110. 11.
er*, see tbQ*.
| 9w, see J 18.04*. 2. and 95. Obs. 4.
I.
I'Sjsa, see^ 105. Ois. 6.
iJfiw, (/ place,) has in Homer and in the later xuvai the aor. I. pass. lifMn; as if
it were from 'IAPTNtlM.
"<v, xxSiû, (/ eo<, si down, Med. I sit myself down,) fat.
ktShZ, (for xx'bvvw, according to 95. 9.) MED. xa&i^rio-ofAau,
aor. ixdSiax, compare etyixxi.
IxviofAxi, (J come,) more commonly dipixvioij.xi, fut. "tô/xxi, aor.
txi/j-m, perf. Tyy.ai, apry/xai, infin. x<f>7y^rxi.
The Epics use in the j>rj. and imperf. the radical form
with the aor.
nj, ( 96. 9.) This prt*. 7m> has a long i, hence in the Epic all the forms
belonging to the act., which are merely the pres. and imperf., always occur
as long only. The aor. 2. ixipm properly has a short /, which is long in the
indie, simply through the augment ; hence in the Epics, who may neglect
the augment, it is sometimes short, and sometimes long, but in the collateral
moods, Qx'ulai, Ixtipm, &c.) it is constantly short. The derivative form
ixuiu has a short ; in the pres. tense. See about xtUktbi the Obs. IV. 3. to
103.
\\xaxoiJ.xi, (I conciliate, propitiate,) fut. \Xxaoixxi, (a,) from the
more uncommon "\afxxi, for which Homer also has \\io\xzi.
The act. had the intrans. signif. to be propitious, whence
Poets have the imper. "\r&i and 7x&i, conj. and opt. perf.
(as a pres. tense,) l\mu, IXrixoi/xi.
Ivcrafiat, see Tinfiai,
\
lanfii, see 109. III.
33 Compare 112. 12. and i/irm% under mist, and the Epic superl. l^vtTUTic from
115. Obs. 6.
258
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
trrniu, see 107. Obi. II.irirm/itu, see in E.

"r^(,see "tx.iI
1". see Sfu, 108. V.
K.
Kaa, 1.) xUur/uu, xUaifuci, see xxlwpxi, 2.) xixaXut, fut. inn, Ike. see
and
a9f/<j, la/n/l**, xitopxi, xxflZ", see ?

iZJ",
xttntiftxi, (I am of distinction, excel,) to this reri belongs the per/, xixtupcu, Dor.
xtxxi,ux. M, which has the same signif.
xiw, (7 burn, set fire to,) is transitive, Attic xxu, (5 and without
contr.)/uf. xxvaa, &c. ( 95. 06s. 9.) paw. aor. 1. exay&nv,
and aor. 2. kxxm, (x.) Verbal adj. xxvaribs, xxvtsros,xxvr6i.
The Epics have an aor. 1. without the c, ixnn, ( 96. 06. 1.;) whence
arises, through shortening the into i, the par/. *i; in Attic Poets, (. Esch,
Agam. 858. Eurip.
97-) With the Epics this i is again changed into
It, (compare rri'iu, ptlu, &c. 107- Obs. 4.) itnper. xuot, med. xuavrc, and the
conj. xtlc/in, (for xr.vpt,, see 04s. V. 15. to 103.) which is in the //. . 333.
instead of the fut. (see $ 139. OAr. 8.) The pres. tense xix, xtii, and in/in.
xxTxxni/itt, (//. . 408.) are doubtful.
xx\eu, (I call,) fut. xxXivai, Attic xx\w, xx\s<7x, xkxXrixx, ExKr,iM,
&c. (110.11.) per/, pass. xsxXm/^xi, (I am called, named,)
opt. xix\r,tx.m, xixXrio, &c. 98. Obs. 9.MED.
xaixvu, (I grow weary,) from KAMA, ( 112. 12.) aor. txx/xov,
fut. xxiaoviaxi, perf. xfxix-nxx, (as if it were of KMAX2, 110.
11. Epic part, xix^rtus, yen. otos and wros.
see iytv/n.
|
*!.>;, see 109. II.
xtXopiai, (7 exhort, command,) fut. xs'Kyivoij.xi, &C. aor. exexXVw,
( 110. 4. 6.) As for IxXe'o, see xkku.
xEvreoj, (I prick, sting,) is regular, but Homer has
337. the
infin. aor. 1. xhaxi from the radical form KENTfl, (whence
xovTor, a long pole.)
xepxvtvfxi, (7 mil,) or xipvxu, m/ai, old ; xiîu, ( 112. 14. 15.)
fut. xepxaoj, aor. ixepxaa : there is a syncope, or rather a
metathesis37, with a long a in the perf. xixqxxx, pass. xixpxtx.xi,
ixpoLbnv, Ion. xtxpYifxai. But xtxipxa^xi, xEQxor,\, were also
used.
Homer has the aor. 1. act. xfitxi, Od. K. 164. Observe also the accent on
the Homeric conj. n'fmnu, (11. 2. 260.38)
aThe signif. of these forms, and the analogy of imw, iicmtTt, iletiixrai, shew that
thev belong together.
The i not being omitted, but rather coalesced with the , whence it became ,
but i with the Attics, (as usual after the f.) Compare j 110. 11.
** This points to a form xifafuu, after the analogy of 107. OU. III. 5. Com
pare Xfl/ia,,u/il, xppuftxi, Conj. xtlpvux..
ANOMALOUS VEKUS.
259
xtptixhco, (I gain, earn,) is regular in the Attics, (aor. xeplxvxi,)

with the Ionians and several later Writers xep^riTOf^xi, Ixtplnax,
&c. per/. xexsqbxxx, ( 101. Obs.S. Note,) and -vixx.
xiu, see Kt7fx.eti, and xalu.
xriSw, (/ afflict, grieve,) xriSoixxi and xExuSa, (/ <afre care, care
for,) whence the Homeric fut. xixxSriuoixxi, (II. &. 353.)
shortened, (as rsSnXu, re&aXura,) imper. aor. med. x.r,liox
for -^xrai.
xiâvw and xiy^xno/xxi, (I reach, attain,) xiy/riô/xxi, Ixiyjtrfiwt,
aor. 2. exix,ov, as if of KlXfi. It has a collateral form of
the imperf. and the dependent moods of the pres. from
KIXHMI, which, inmost cases, keeps its -n unchanged:
exi'xn^-EV, ixixwriw,xix.'ivari, (xt%w,) xi%eia>, xiyjciw, xij^fifj
xiy^ri/jievos, SiC. fut. xiy_-n<yoij.ai, aor. 1. Exi^riâiu.r,v, aor. 2.
exixov, xt%uv, (as if from KIXO.) See about the quantity,
112. Obs. 8.
*%(*/" ***
x/, {I go,) occurs little in the iWi'c. /., but we meet sn much the more frequently
in Poets with the imperf. ixm, and the dependent mr,udi, ex. e/r. xin/a, pari. xm>,
which has the accent on the final syllable without being an aor., exactly like
of
of which verb in general these forms are to be considered as col
lateral, (iii, Kin.)
xXxty, (I clang, shout,) fut. xXiyôi, &c. ( 92. Obs. 1.) perf.
xkxXxyya, identical with the pres. ( 113. 06s. 14.) whence
fut. xixKii.yXiy.xi. Poets have also without the nasal sound
aor. txXxyov, perf. xtxXreyx, part. xexXtt/ovte*. See 111. 2.
See x\x%x in xXticn.
xXaiu, (I weep,) Attic xXxu, (i and without contr.) /ttf. xXaiaoixxi
or xXxvaovy-xi, aor. txXocuax, ( 95. 06s. 9.) The fut. xXanrtcia
or xXawu is more uncommon. Verbal adj. xXxvarios,
xXxvesros, xXxutos.MED.
xXxu, (I break,) xXdau, (a,) &c. the pass, takes the a, part. aor. 2.
Poet. xXas, (xwoxXus,) 110. 6.
xXtitu, (I close, shut,) is regular, perf. pass. xixXet/xxt and xexXeiThere is an Ionic collateral form xXtiv, xXjiV, Alt. x>.r,m, whence xixXx/icu.
The Doric kX'|, (properly *>.*,) ixAatj-a, comes from the fut. xXviri.
xXsco, xXsi'ai, (I celebrate, sing,) xXloyai, (I am celebrated,) IxXto,
2 imperf. for exXe'eo, ( 105. 06s. 7.)But xexXr,xx belongs
to xxXiu, and xe'xXeto to xsXoyxi.
S2
2G0
A GREKK GRAMMAR.
(/ hear,} a Poetic verb, whose imper/. ixXvn has the signif. of the aor. ($ 9G.
Obs. 3.) imper. x.i!i, xXu'iti, and xxS3/, *X?ti, ( 1 10. C.) or with the redupt.
( 83. Obi. 7.) xixXi/Bi, xixXin, part. pats. xXifiHui, (renowned,) 110. 0.
KMA, see >ip.
|
xtiu, see 105. 06. 5.
xopivwixi, (I satiate,) fut. xoqiuoj, &c. ( 112. 14.) perf. pass.
xix6qso~u.ni, Ion. xsx6pnu.xi, Epic par/, xsxop-nais, ( 97. 06s. 7.)
with the signif. of the pass.-xogiu, his, is the Ion. fut.
This verb must not he confounded with infut, int, I sweep.
xpiXoi, commonly xixqxyx, (I bawl out,) see 113. Obs. 14.
xixqxyu.sv, xixpayfti, &C. ( 110. 9.) fut. xexpxouMi, aor.
sxqxyov.
xpa.Uu, (Jfulfil, accomplish,) admits in the Epics a lengthening
in all its parts, ex. gr. sxpalxivsv, xqrmvxi, {aor. 1.) xsxpxxnTxi.
KFA, see xifetvvvfii.
xpsu.xmvu.i, (I hang up, suspend,) pass, xpsu.xnvu.xi, (I am sus
pended, hung from,) and as med. (7 hang myself;) xqiu.xu.xi,
(after larxu-xi,) I hang, intrans. and its conj. xpiu.uu.xi, opt.
xQiujx'iu.'m, and also xqiu.olu.riv ", fut. act. xqeu.xcrai, (a,) Alt.
xqu.v, f> > &c. The aor. pass. ixpBu.xa$wi is common to
the pass, and middle voice, and intrans., but the fut. pass.
xQtu.xo$rio-ou.xi belongs merely to xqtu.xiwu.xi : there is a
particular fut. intrans. xggâ-oputi, (/ shall hang loose, wave
to and fro.)
This repartition of forms and significations is, on the whole, confirmed liy
the Attic writers ; but it must not be expected that authors never deviated
from this analogy40. Kft/ixa as a pres. tense occurs only in later writers.
Kfi/mi/u is an Attic collateral form in the pres. and imper/.
xpuTru, x^vtxd-ko, see Obs. II. 1. to 103.
xrxou-xi, (I acquire,) perf. as pres. xixrnu.xi, (I possess,) and
'ixTwu-xi, ( 83. Obs. I.) conj. and opt. see 98. Obs. 9. ; and
about the opt. xsxra>u.m, see Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 98.
Obs. 17.
xrsivu, (I kill, slay,) fut. xtevcD, see 101. Good writers use
merely Exrova as perf. Homer has a fut. xrxvico, (see Buttm.
Complete Gr. Gr.) and its medium as pass. //. %. 481. xxrxxrxvisa'bs.
There is also a Poetical aor. turns, , a, 3 pers. pi. ixrxy, (for -,) conj.
xt'iu, (for xtZ, see 107. Obs. IV. 8.) infin. xrifut, ira/u>, (for *tiJ
* Aristoph. Vesp. 298. wf/w^S,, see $ 107. Obs. III. 5. and compare pafw/pnt.
In German the same happens with hangen and Artnên, erhiinate and erAt'jw ;
and in English with hung and hanged.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
261
part, xras, pats, txrx/ttn, xrxfiirti, xtxiSxi. See about all these forms, 110.
C. 7. Homer has also the aor. pass. 41 IxrxSny, and ixrxrBnt, ( 101. Obs. C.)
Independently of the very un-Attic per/, ixrxxx, there is another form
Ixrettixx, (5 1 12. 9.) of which the Atticism is doubtful.
url/ttiH, see $ 110.7.
I
xrimix, 96. Obs. 5.
xutiai, (I kiss, from KTf2,) xt/<r&(, ext/ffa, (v.)
The compound Tfmrxmix, (/ prostrate myself, worship,) is commonly regu
lar ; but in the Poets we also meet with -{ri!<r*i, &c. See particularly ano
ther .
xf/>e&>, (/ light on, meet with,) is regular, but has a collateral form
xupa. Deponens, xvqo/xxt, imperf. exugov, fut. xvpau, aor.
'ixvfioa.
xvco or xvioj, (/o be pregnant, to conceive.) TLvtsxai or -o/xxi, I im
pregnate, is regular in the second form xuitu, but the Poets
have also an aor. 1. med. exvadumv**. Compare xuviw.
A.
\<zy%a.M, {I obtain by lot or fate,) from AHXfi, ( 112. 13.)
fut. Xtiô/jloci, aor. Jxajjov, perf. eYxinâ, ( 83. Obs. 3.) or
\t\oyyjx, (as if from AErXft.)
The Ionians said in the fut. xx&pzi, (see J 27- Obs. C.) The Homeric aor.
XtXa%ui has the causative signif. to impart.
AAK, see xicxiu.
Xa/LA/3avw, (/ take,) from AHBfl, ( 112. 13.) fut. X^vJ/owî, aor.
Xa/3ov, imper. Xa/Se and Xos/3e, (06s. I. 4. to 103.) per/.
e.X<{>, ( 83. 06.5. 3.)MED.
The Ionians have XsXu'finxx, ( 111. 3.) and (from AAMBfi,) kx'p^tftxi,
Xav5av<v, more rarely X^Syu, (/ flm hidden,) Xyitoj, e'XaSsv, Xt'Xn&a:.
A/ed. Xav&avopuei, more rarely Xri&o/âi, (/forget,) Xrjffo/xai,
eXaSd/ar/v, XeXokj/u-cei.
Homer has in the aor. XiX9ir, XiXxSir^xi, but the former merely as a
causative of the middle voice, to cause to forget, make one forget, in which
sense he use3 the pres. XriSxvw. The Ionic dialect has in the perf. pass, x,
XsXxr/txi, ( 27. Obs. 6.)
Xoloxoj, {I emit a sound, speak, Ion. X-nxiat, Dor. Xaxlu,) from
AAKfi; aor. 2. s'Xaxov, and as med. XsXaxo/u.w, (Hymn.
Merc. 145.) whence, (according to 111. 3.) fut. Xaxyntxat,
41 This tense in common language was not used from this verb; they had, instead
of it, Wxw, i
in a pass, sense, (iriSxm It' xireu.)
" The usual reading xvmxjiXn rests barely on the seeming relation to Ixitx from
XVIXU.
2G2
A CRKF.K GRAMMAR.
aor. 1. s\acxwxa,perf. (as pres., see 113. Obs. 14.) >J\a*a,
Ion. \t\nx.x : ns an Epic shortening, XthaKvloi,.

Xiv, see X.
|
AErX, see Xxyînt.
Xiyu, to say, has no per/, act. whatever, and the per/, pass, is
XcXtyjuuti, eXeyfinv. But in the sense of to collect, in which
it has some compounds, the per/, act. is ei'Xox*) (otsi'X.ox,)
and the per/, pass, most commonly is ei\ev/u.xi, ( 83. 06s. 3.)
aor. tXEyrjy, (cr. j/r. xzrekiyTiaxv.) MED. SiaXeyo/x-sti, (/
converse,) has iistKeytMu, but in the aor. SieXexSw.
Homer has likewise the syncopated aor. ixiy/m>, Od. i, 335. joined, Xixra,
Od. 3. 451. counted.
nie old Poetical Xitai, {to lay down, put to sleep,) Xa$ar9w, {to lie down,
rest,) has along with this form the syncopated aor. 110. 8.) ixiyfitu, Xixth,
imper. Xsja, and according to 5 i)G. Oi. 9. Xi|io. But that this erri is a quite
different radical form, has been shown in Buttm. Lexilogus, XI. 78. 0. 10.
"Kiksf/jMons, (moving the tongue, licking, lapping,) a defective
part. per/, in Hesiod. See Buttm. Lexilogus, I. 1. p. 7.
Note.
XiXltifcm, {lam bent on, hasten, strive,) an Epic per/., which seems to belong to AJAfl,
but squares with none of the signif. of this radical form. Hence the explana
tion is very probable that it stands for XiXiXs/imos for the sake of euphony,
omitting the last X, from XiXdu, XiXx'upxi, {I desire ardently, strivefor **.) See
Buttm. Lexilogus, I. 21.
AHB, see Xxfi/iava.
|
Xn'S*, see Xx3xyx.
Xnxia, see Xxrxu.
|
AHX, see Xxy%xiv.
ATA, see XtXtripxi.
\i<saoix.ai, seldom Xlroixxi, (I implore, supplicate,) /ut. XiVoâi, aor.
VKiaxfj.fi\ and E>.irdpwv.
Xovu, (I wash.)
In this verb the Attics have, instead of the pres. forms with the short con
necting final vowel, shortened forms, ex. gr. 3 pers. imper/. [Aw, pi. iXouptv,
pass. Xwfiai, &C XeZrSai.MED.
The lengthened forms are a contraction of the old Xeim, (Horn, ixiwv, Xcir!,) but the shortened ones did not originate in a syncope, {Xto/txi like il/uu,
according to 110. 5. :) the accentuation lXsi//*!t, iXiurt, (not txn/m, tXwrs,
like ixim, ?{i/ro,) and the in/m. Xcvv, which also occurs, shew that they are
a contraction of the radical form AO!!, whence the Homeric aor. xit.
4_* The x in these forms is short, ex. gr. Aristoph. Pac. 382. The passage in
Aristoph. Nub. 410. (S,xXixwx<rx,) is a deviation.
U. ^'!c^ sacr'nces f analogy to pronunciation are not uncommon in a language,
which is just beginning to be' polished. We have a similar instance in the Poetical
word ixrxyXci, {dreadful,) which is admitted to be derived from ixxXxynvxi, not by
a transposition, but with the termination Xci, ( 119. 13 ) instead of txrXxyXts.
Exactly in the same way we have nliXss for vxCiXaf from *Xv, rt>.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
263
\vca, see 95. Obs. 4. and about \vro 110. 7. opt. per/, \s\vro
98. Obs. 9.
\>, (I wish, long for,) \tk, \y, 3pers. pi. \avn, a Doric defective
verb.
M.
txxlwfjLoci, (I am mad,) fat. fjtamviMU, aor. e/xzvw, perf. (with the
same signif. as the pres. tense,) fj.afj.mx. But the aor. act.
tu.mx, (Aristoph. Thesm. 561.) has the causative meaning, to
make mad, in which sense the compound sxixxivai is, however,
more usual, ( 135. Obs. 2.)
Theocr. (10, 31.) hu /u/tsirti/uu, ( III. 3.) with the signif. of the prei.
tense like /la'i.o/tai.
fixUftxi, see MAO.
|
MAK, see pnxiofixi.
U.xtQxvco, (I learn,) from MH0.fi, aor. %)j.zQiv, fut. fj.xHioij.xi,
perf. uuuuidwui, ( 112. 13. and 111. 3.)
The fut. paStZfix,, see J 95. Obs. 16.
ftaTlin, See fti^Tru.
p.xpv3n.xi, (Ifight, combat,) after "arxu-xi, has merely a pres. and
imperf., imper. ixxqiao, ( 107. Obs. IV. 4.) opt. napvol/xvv,
( 107. Obs. III. 5.)
Hxîrru, (Y catch, seize,) ixxp-âi, &c. part. perf. ixtixxpttuis, aor. 2.
(jfj.xp7rov,) u.e/j.x^'Jioy, and abbreviated Eptawov, //.zws'eiv, 3 pers.
pi. opt. ixsixxtiom, (for m-scwoiev.)
na.-xpij.xi, [[fight,) fut. fj.xyjfjotJ.xi, commonly fj^tyjovfj.xi, ( 95.
Obs. 15. 16.) aor. lfj.a-xnxfj.m, per/. M,Ep^.2XT"â' Verbal adj.
ixxyjcrkos and /xajâjTsor.
The //. produced the Ion. pres. tense fcx%laficti, and Homer has not only
fcxînu'.vc;. but even fteLûvptyas, both as pres. tenses.
Epic Poets use, for the sake of the metre, the fut. fia^r.tcfun, but the aor.
MAO, an old verb, which occurs chiefly in three signif. and forms :
1.) Perf. as pres. (ûm,) fttptelaffi, pctfiasot, (jjen. ftipavras,} and with the
syncope fcifcxfitr, fiXftari, 3 pert, pl.p/usq. fiifuctxi, ( 110. 10.) to strivet
desire ardently.
2.) Pres. med. u^y-u {I long for, seek or search for,) /uZj&iygf, contr. of ftuop.au,
but the prevailed : hence, for instance, infin. ur;<'-)n, and imper. fuiu,
(like /muh from pi *>,*., (uSttsu,) see 105. Obs. 10. Note.
3.) F(//. and aor. mer/. pae-eptai, tpxtrapw, belong to /&ai9peu,(Istir myself, seek,)
especially in compounds : thus in Homer the imperf. Wtuxlm, Od. i.
441. corresponds exactly to the nor. Wipna-eifimt, ibid. 440. Compare
dxiw UfaiffSttt, mlu vtiffourSoti.
a Some critics write also Ifix^ntxn, &c. for the sake of uniformity, contrary to
the text, which has been handed down to us.
264
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ixtbuu, (I am intoxicated,) takes its tenses from the pass. (IpieQvoQmi,

etc. :) the other act. tenses, except the imperf., belong to ixt66<?xw, (I intoxicate, make drunk,) tixs&vax, ( 112. Obs. 6.)
fMi'gojbuu, (/ obtain,) aor. E/ugxopov, perf. l/xixopx *s, ( 83. Obs. 2.)
From the causative sense, ( 113. 2.) of the act. MEIPfl, to apportion, allot,
(whence ftifti, a part, portion,) comes the perf. past, as an impersonal verb,
and with the syllable u instead of the redupl. ( 83.06*. 3.) ilftafrai, it hat been
ordained by fate, part, t'tfitet^tm. Mre also meet with pifieprat and fnftn^ftwt.
fj.i\\u, (/ intend, am about to do,) fut. /j-eWviTco, &c. See about
the augment, 83. Obs. 5.
ulsKu, (I am concerned about, take to heart,) is in its act. form,
mostly used in the 3 pers. /ae'Xei, /aeXolkxi, fut. fj-tXriasi, &c. ;
pass. ixiXoixzt, (/ have the care of,) more usually smixi\oi*xi}
IJ.sXrimfj.ai, E/AEV/iflnv.
Poets employ the pats, indifferently for the act.; instead of fi'iXii they have
ftlXtrtu, and the per/, in the sense of the pres. act./tiftuXst, and pass./iipliXir*,,
(Horn. Ilesiod,) which came from /tifti>.nrxi, according to 19. OAs. 1. and
by shortening, compare ftipm and .J..u-n.
M,Ev<u, {I remain,) has in the perf. iê^hwx, 101. Obs. 9. Verbcd
adj. M-svETEor.
From another MENfi, (whence pim,) which docs not occur in the pres.
tense, comes the Ionic and Poet. per/, pi/itm, (/ resolve, intend, compare
fiinet'itv.) This uiu.::-r. is related to pi/tatt, compare ytyam, ytyaat .
METIil, Ê/xETi/tAEvor, see 108. I. 5.
lx.nxxofj.xi, (I bleat.)
The old Poet, forms of this verb are part. aor. fsrnstm, per/, /ii/tnxa, whence
the Homeric shortened fii/i&xuTa, (>; 97- Obs. 3.) and of which, as it has the
signif. of the pres., there is again an imperf. \y.'ivr*r~, (111.2.)
furnlsu, (I pollute.) The aor. takes the . The Homeric puitfm, II. 5. 14li. is explained as the 3 /,/., for fuittmiti, /ti&rht : it is, more probably, the 3 dual of the
syncopated aor. (sing, i^'aev-r*,) dual ly >/.-.-?{ . \. nrîV;. 1 10. Obs. 3.
/xiyvtz/Ai, and yAiyyu, (I mix,) fut. y&,o>, &c. ( 112. 14.)
/ju/jLvriMu, (I remind.') from MNAfl, fut. /jt-vrtva, &c. ; pass, yuix,;-h<r*t>v-x\, (I remember, recollect, it occurs to me, I mention,)
siAv-noSm, lAvrioSrivoiAai, (j-vnaros. The perf. ixijxvnixxi becomes
the pres. (I recollect, still remember,) conj. ix.ifA.ya/axi, rt, %rxi,
&c. (see 98. Obs. 9.) opt. fx.efx.yrtfx.rtv, Attic fx.zfx.yoifx.ny, or
" AVemeet only with the 3 pers. ift/ufi in the old Kpic Poets, and in most passages as a distinct per/., like k'iktvtx,, ex. gr. Od. i. 335. Only in the //. . 278. it
is a distinct aor.
1 The Lyric passage in Eurip. Iphig. Aug. 1495., where fiifutm is the per/, of
the usual verb pi,*, cannot, as a solitary instance, be of any avail against the genera]
usage, not only of the Attic Poets, but even of Herod, in his prose, (6, 84.) and the
two verbs must be carefully distinguished, though they may be supposed to be etymologically connecled.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
fj.tfj.vuifj.Yiv, fj.efj.vuro, a contr. of the Ionic fjt.iij.vsafjt.yv, fj.efj.vecoro,
(II. 4-. 361^*8.) To this perf. belongs the fut. 3. fj.efivmofj.ai,
(/ shall remember.)
Abbreviations occur in Homer's flip**, (jtiptuu,) for /tl/tmrai, and in He
rod.'s imper. piftnt for ftifmm. Compare above /siftfUartu.
The simple form, (fuJuputt,) fuHftmi, is barely Ionic in the above sense, and
uvuiutvaf, ftreletn, ftyiiie, &c. (see 105. Obs. 10. Note,) are Ionic lengthenings.
But in the sense of to sue for in marriage, to woo, we also meet with ftyitrttu
in the common language.
f&eXuv, see (&\aiffx6).
fjutx'iofjMt, (7 roar, bellow,) from MTKO, must be noticed on
account of its Epic forms epuJxov, fj.ifj.ux.de. Compare fj.maofj.xt.
N.
valu, (I dwell,) takes its tenses from the pass, and med. from
NAfl, with short a, fut. vdaofj-ai, aor. evxoSnv or evxadfj-riv,
perf. (with later Writers,) vivaafj.ii. The act. evaaa, (evao-aa,)
has the causative signif. to cause to inhabit, to settle.
' vxao-ai, (I stuff,) va&p>, &Cvtvxafjuxt, vxctros, ( 92. Obs. 2.)
vifjM, (I distribute, apportion,) fut. veixu and ve/j.r]o-u, aor. eveifj.x,
perf. vBvifj.vixx, &c. aor. pass. evefj,r)$yv and tvefj.i$r,v.MED.
ntt, 1 .) / heap up, occurs chiefly in the pre: and imper/. only with the Ionic and Epic
lengthenings mm,
int'u>,fut. w, aor. itwa, Ion. Itmtx, &c.
2.) J ipin, is regular, men, &c. The contractions c, m in the prei. tense
are not in m, but, contrary to analogy, in * : tin, vuvths, &c. The new
prei. is ir.tu.
3.) I twim, Jut. nvfefieu and nvtovpat, ( 95. 06. 17.)i*if^ &c.
4.) The Poet, verb liitln, (to go away, return,) has commonly the signif.
of the fut. in the indie, pret. tio/txi, or nS/uu, 2 peri. lileu, (5 105. Obs. J.)
vlty, (I wash,) takes its tenses from the verb vi-nru, which is less
used in the pres. vi^/u, &c.MED.
vos'w in the Ionic dialect contracts the on as in fSoxco, ex. gr. vdio-oj,
evaiax, evivuro.
vvo-txôj, (/ nod the head with drowsiness, I sleej),) vuarduoj and
wo-niôj, &c. ( 92. Obs. 1.)
O.
oa>, (7 smell, viz. emit a smell,) fut. otyov, (Ion. 6e'<w,) &c. : the
perf. oSwJa has the power of the pres. tense,
oiyw or o"yvvfj.i, (I open.)
18 See about all these forms, Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 98. Obs. 1517.
266
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
The Epics separate the diphthong in the augmented forms, iiynnn,

The following compound is most used :
inly* or iitiywfti, (/ open,) has the augment in the anomalous way stated
in 84. Obs. 8. imperf. irttiyai, aor.
in/in. ijs'^xt, per/. 1. i;;iva.
The per/. 2. itimyx has the signif. of a neuter verb, I stand open. The forms
Myw, helong to later Writen.
cTi, see J 10!). III.
o\'ofj.xt, (/ am o/ opinion, mean,) imperf. ubfj.m, the I pers. sing.
is also oT/xsti, imperf. a,fj.-nv 4t, fat. o'nlmfj.xi, aor. ci-hhm,
ornSrjvai.
The Epics make also nse of the act. form, and resolve the diphthong; ?>,
i.iuti, (<,) whence
ittfai, &c.
oi%o(Aoti, (I go away, am off,) o\-/^r\aofj.%i, perf- u%nfj<xi or oiyaixx,
(see the jVo/e to ejû, X<u,ca-)
Homer has also fo>ix*, *,*{*';ti"t> *. 252.See about this reri Buttm.
Complete Gr. Gr.
01, see siopai and
dXi(T&iva), commonly -xltu, [I slide, slip,)
Z\io-$oy, ( 112.
13.)
oXXvjxt, (I ruin, destroy,) from OAfL,fut. b\u, aor. uXtaa, perf.
bXciXixx.MED. oXXvfxat, (I am undone, perish,) fat. b\ov(axi, aor. ai\iix.nv, to which belongs perf. 2. o\u\x.
The Poet. part, ix'spua, *i;.iunv. becomes an adj. with act. signif. ruinous,
pernicious : the collateral Epic form ixjn* came from the perf.Compare
$111.2.
oyutvii.1, (J swear,) fut. bfj.oviJ.zi, s7, tXrat, &c. bfj.ita'bai from OMfl,
( 112. 14.) aor.uiJ.iax, perf. hjj.aiij.onci, perf. pass. bfj.aifj.oaiJ.ai,
but the rest with the aor. more usually without a, bfj.difj.orxi,
Altc&m, as if from OMOQ,.MED.
bfj.bpyvufj.1, (I tvipe off,)fut. bfj.bf%u, &c. 112. 14. MED.
ovrmfj.1 i0, (/ benefit, am of advantage to,) aher"ior-nfjA, it has no im
perf. active, (for which wtpi\ow is used ;) it makes from
ONAfl, ovhaai, wmtsa..MED. iritafJMi, (Jam benefited, derive
advantage from,) aor. 2. irhpvm, (jiao, nro,) or uvxfj.riv, opt.
bva.ifj.-ni, infin. otzahzi.
The indie, inipni is used by later Writers, and in Homer belongs to Sts/tn.
The old grammarians observe that the forms, t.ftmi,
were used only of a
firm conviction, which Attic urbanity thus stripped of the harshness of a strong
affirmation.
80 This is derived from ONAfi through a redupl. with (which, as in myu, &c.
does not take place in the aor. 2.) whereby the redupl. of verbs beginning with a
consonant, lilitifu,) is imitated in the same way as the redupl. of the perf. by what is
called the Attic redupl. Compare &rrriXKmt and hrirnm, from araXis and onTO
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
ovo/uuti, (7 insult,) radical form ONOfi, whence the pres. and
imperf. after S/Soâi, the 2 pers. sing, otaaai, imper. ovooo,
fut. ovouofjion, aor. moa^m and Snoiiywi.
Homer has from the still simpler form ONfl the 2 peri. pi. pres. oSnrh, aor.
V
On, See ifioi.
osw, (/ see,) imperf. Ion. upun, commonly sdûv, ( 84. Obs. 8.)
per/. Iwâxa51, aor. eTXov, ISeTv, ISwv,
iJe, &c. Med.
EiSVnv, iSsa&ai, iSoy, (and as an interjection ISou, lo .'), see
above e"Su,fut. oô/aou, (I shall see,) from OnTft. Pass.
perf. idipij/.%i, or Zij.ij.xi, u-^xi, Znrai, &c. ZipSai, aor. u/p^m,
oip&wai, (in later Writers also opaSwai.) Verbal adj. hpareoi,
apacros, offTtir.
Tlie per/. 2. Srwrx, (/ Aoi'f teen,) belongs to the dialects, and the Poets.
See about Homer's burnt, 105. Obs. 1C. with the Note.
The antiquated iru-^cfuti, aor. Wiu^xpny, selected, must be carefully dis
tinguished from ixi^s/txi.
ofwiM, (I rouse, excite,) from OPX2, fut. op<j*>, aor. 1. uqvoc,
( 101. Obs. 3.) Med. oqwumi, (I rise,) aor. txipi/j.m, 3 pers.
sing, uqzto and Zpro, (see 110. 8.) infin. oftctt, part. og/xevos-,
(for bqiabcu, 6pifj.iws,) imper. oqao, and according to 96.
Obs. 9. opaso.
The perf. 2.
belongs to this intrant, or immcdiative signif. ( 113. 2.)
I am risen ; but <?uj(, (see 85. Obs. 2.) is aor. (w. gr. Od. r. 201.) like
i'jKjnv, and most generally has, like it, the tramitive or causative signif.
(As excited.) The poji'e-like form !t; agrees in sense with the
Compare above iftu>m, iîfuti. Lastly, Homer has likewise the pres.
and imperf. of Use/tici and iru/tmi, I hasten, move about, (Od. J. 104. //. />. 398.)
but they are attended with some difficulty : see Buttni. Complete Gr. Gr.
oa<pqal)iofj.xi, (I smell, trans.) oo-Qp-no-ofizi, aor. wo-tppoij.m, 112. 13.
Ion. o <j<p$xfj.w, (Herod. 1. 80. 26.) according to 96. Obs. 1.
with the Note.
sv>.i/t!ias, see S>.Xuui.
I
eSttfti, see oveptti.
ovpico, (I make water, stale,) has the syllabic augm. ioi/pvv, &c.
84. Obs. 5.
ovtqloj, (I wound,) oiirrtiai, &c. aor. syncope, (ovrav, 110.6. 7.)
3 sing, ovra, infin. ovrifj.sv, (for ovrdvati,) part. pass. ourdfj.svos :
ovrxae, ovraaiAhos , belong to ovrdôj, a collateral form.
IfiiXii, 1.(1 owe, ex. gr. money,') 2. (Iought, am to,) fut. lûxfi'", &c
The form Hfi^ty, n, i, (commonly Sfi\n,) occurs merely as a wish.See
81 In Attic poetry it was either pronounced as a synizesis in the Ionic way
Sixkh, or written aud pronounced iieaxa.See Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. 84.
Obs. 11.
5
263
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the Syntax, 150. Homer has also opiXXw, (It. <r. 200.) for afuXo, and for
<SpiX for the sake of the metre fiXXv, (7/. ?. 350.) which forms must not
be mistaken for tyixxtiv, to increate, magnify. Homer also uses this verb in
an anomalous way in the opt. opr. 1. ifiXXtm, 3 pert. ting. (11. <r. 651. Oil.
0. 334.)
'ipXrxavo>, (I am guilty, condemned,) fut. otyX-haw, perf. (p\r>xa,
aor. uiphov,
n.
itaiû, [I sport, joke,) fut. na.iifly.ai, itai%ov(Azt.
In later Writers we also find after this formation %r<Li%tt, ^riTmy/uu, &c.
but the correct Attics always have irate*, trimr/uu, notwithstanding the
similarity of the tenses of the following verb :
mlu, (J strike, beat,) fut. iralacu and nouwoj, but the rest of the
tenses are 'iitaiax, itittama., eitnlaSyv.MED.
IlAP,<r;uV, see in TnjiiV.
itdaaaSxi, (to acquire,) iitaaaixw, perf. itiit%f3.cn, I possess, dif
ferent from lita.aiix.rn, itina.aij.xi, see ifririoixxt.(I suffer,) from nH0fl, aor. s itaSov, from nEN0fl, perf.
niitovSa, fut. ntlaoixai, (according to the rule, 25. 4.) Ver
bal adj. ita^-rtros.
From mien are also derived the less frequent forms rveefim,
and
the perf. (s-irnfe,) whence the Homeric nrahix.See about tiirmh for
mrittmn, $ 110. Obt. 9.
Tartztrffu, see xknfffv.
itaTioixxi, (I taste, eat,) iitaaxfAm, itiitaa[t.a\, compare âreo/j-ai,
SxazaSai in iaiu.
ittlbu, I prevail on, pass. I believe, obey, to which belong itslaofjuii,
itiitiiaixa.1, but the perf. 2. iteito&a, I confide.
The Poetical forms are, Wmt/tn, plutq. belonging to vixeifa., aor. 2. "sriht,
irlduir, -r'fxiln, &c. There is a new form tlr,*u, iriemra, in the sense of
obeying, following, confiding.
ittUu, I shear, comb, fut. iti%o>, Sec.MED.
trtnmi, see $ 105. Ob*. 5.
[
xuvouat, see xi*%at and qrti'fo.
ittXzôj, anciently its\du, (i" approach, and in the old language
cause to approach,) has with Poets the aor. litXaS-nv, (long a,
incorrectly iitXiahm,) and iitXrifj-nv, both in the sense of
approaching, formed by the metathesis of 110. 11. 2. {itiKa,
ItXiOL.)
xikti or -TiXi/im, (I am.) This Doric and Poetical verb suffers a syncope, when it
takes the augment : 3 peri, imperf. fa-Xi or strXm, 2d. ftrXu, iirXiu. There is
no other tense occurring. This verb has also this peculiarity, that the imperf.
of the middle voice very commonly has the signif. of the pret. (irXiu, thou
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
269
or/, &c.) To the same verb in its more ancient meaning of I turn, drive,
move about, (the Latin versor,) belong with the same syncope the compound
Epic part. iriT>.9/*i!ni, ri^vXtyiiw.
nENe, see
xl-rao>, TiToaiiv, rio'gvraj, See *4{tiy.
tri-TTu, see vciffu.
ngA*, (/ go over,) regular, xuit* with i, (Ion. riftr*,) but the Epic xititsi with
i, belongs to nrfifsm, (/
which see below.
vsp^M, commonly Tieploiâi, aor. eWgSov, fut. notifi-h'soiAa.t, perf.
irsftu, (I lay waste, ravage,) aor. swpo&oi, ( 96. Obs. 7.)
Homer has also a syncopated passive-Yike aor. in the in/in. ri(txi of \tieifim,
properly rt(t-tmi, (or wipim,') like
5 110. 8.
nri^lIV, see tr'ucru.
iriaou, irirrco, {I cook,) fut. ireû, &c. from iskitrai, which occurs
only in later Writers in the pres. tense.
weTstvvu/Ai, (/ spread out,) fut. istriiu, (Att. Tteru,) &c. ( 112.
14.) perf. pass, neirraâi, ( 110. 4.) but the aor. pass, is
again iirErda^m.
nkroy.'i\, {I fly with wings:) from this radical form arises by a
syncope an aor. sitro^m, ursa^tn, &c. ( 110. 4.) fut.
ntTfiaoixm, commonly nr-naoixnu. There is a collateral form
in fu, IvrxiMU, aor. iitrai^nn, irrdaSai, &c.
To this must be added from the act. form, which is never used in the fret.
tense, a synonymous third aor. i*rnt, rr^MU, Trii, &c.
The pres. trin/uu and mritfuu with the aor. I<rtru<r3r,t, (ex. gr. Anacr. 40.
6.) belong to the Poets and the later prose ; mxirn/uu alone appears to have
, been used as perf. Poets employed also the pres. rinu/tai, truritfieu. (See
112.9.)
nET, see mV-nw.
\ xifoo/tett, see xvvSaioptLi.
vriipvov, eiretpvov, (killed,) is the reduplicated, and at the same time
syncopated aor. ( 110. 4.) ofÊNfl, (whence (pivos.)
The part, of this aor. has the accent, contrary to analogy, on the first
syllable, x-'tQvuv^. Pass. perf. vrtQupxi, fat. n^sVv/uu : compare rutu, rirecfim,
101. 9. and about iripnV/t<t<, $ 99. Obs. I. See also below 4>A.
n-hywiM, (Ifasten,) with later Writers also m-hatsu, mrru,fut. it-nipi,
&c. ( 112. 14.) aor. pass, litiynv, perf. 2. irivnya, intrans. /
am fixed, fast, (113. Obs. 3.)MED.
irlfA.v\v>ixi, (I fill,) wi/xwXavai goes in the pres. and imperf. after
"rw/At,
icXwoj, 8k. perf. jjass. niis'Knint.sa, aor. pass.
a That !, is a real aor., is obviously evident from the context in the two
passages, //. <r. 827- ( S39.
270
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
inX-na^m, from ITAAfl or vXi&cv, of which the latter, how
ever, has only the intrans, signif. to be full, in the pres. tense.
If in compounds p. immediately precedes the first <r, it is omitted in the
reduplication, iprlrXapxi, but replaced again, whenever the augment comes
between, ivixtfttrXx^xv.
Poets for the sake of the metre employ both forms with or without the p,
contrary to this rule.The form in , ((ri^rXiv, yimrAan,) is UD-Attic,
except in the same instances as in "fn/u.
With respect to thepaie-like aor. IrXn/uif, opt. srXt/,iij] M, imper. rXr.r; &c.
see 1 10. 7., it was not unknown to the Attics. (Aristoph. ipx-Xt/iuis,
The intrant. <r\nu has a.so a Poetical per/. a-i'trXxSn in the same sense,
(lam full.)
mifjt.'tc^Dixi, {I burn, trans.) iti^Ttpivxi, follows 7y7);uu in the pres. and
impcrf. ; the rest comes from nPAfl, or w%v&w, (Horn.)
ex. gr. inpri&m.
With respect to i/ixlrr^n/u, irir!/t*(xfuy, it is the same as with rifirXx/u,
and also with regard to the form in iu.
Ilesiod (e. 856.) has a remarkable abbreviation r;m for iwfim : the
analogy of ixl/trfx/itt would lead us to expect an a.
nlyu, {I drink,) from FIIO, fut. -nioixai,
95. Obs. 18.) aor.
ewiov, <ni{\v, &c. imper. commonly
( 110. 6.) The rest
comes from ITOfi, perf. isimoin-a., perf. pass, icinati.au, aor.
pass. IwoSnv. Verbal adj. Korios, kotos.
The 1 in rltpuu is usually long, (Athen. 10. p. 446.) but in inn, &c. short.
The fut. viovftect belongs to the later Writers, ( 95. OAs. 1G.)
The forms Titru, imtx, have the causative signif. to give drink, came to
drink. Their pret. tense is Tur'irtu.
nmgiax-oj, Ion. wnrpwxu, (I sell,) fut. and aor. are wanting.
The forms in use are, riîu, rirfiftai, ixîS, nx(an/uti, which fut. 3.
is used instead of the un-Attic fut. 1. x^xStrcftxi, and even the perf. xtxgir$xi is frequently used in lieu of the aor. reaSitai. The Ionians have all
these tenses with .
The common language supplied the tenses, which are wanting, by artiircfuti, ixihiprii: the old and Epic language had the fut. viykeu, i, whence
the contractions xifu, m^v, aor. ixififx from rtfxu, which we have seen
above in a cognate signif., and with A in its conjugation. This n(xrxi after
wards gave the remaining forms through the metathesit, which has been
stated above in 110. 11. 2. and in the Note to xtgimipu.
wi'tttw, (/ fall, f, whence the imper. hmts,) made from IlETfi,
(see 112. 16.) fut. (in the Doric way,) WiaoviMu, (Ion )
neaioiJLzi, aor. 'iireaov,
96. 9.) perf. niitvuxtz.
s The reading a-xî* appears to rest on a false analogy. But even in lieu of 1/
the diphthong i might have been expected, since the form xi/txXxtxi presupposes a
radical verb n.\A(J. Yet x("> which comes from xiut (5ee I"110"')) llas likewise
fifiln in the opt.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
271
Poetical abbreviations of the pari. per/, are Attic xiirtiis, (compare litfyarts
from /3t0;xa, and itittkui.) The latter points to the original form trimsm,
(from nETfJ, like JiS^x** from Sip*,) whence came rixraxit by changing the
vowel. See Buttm. Lexiiogut, I. 63. p. 295.
We also meet with the regular aor. of IlETn, aor. 1. inm, Eurip. Troad.
291. yi/c. 465. aor. 2. fTov in the Doric dialect, (Pind.)
mryiai, (I /a#,) aor. 'eVitvov, ( 96. 06s. 5.) But iti-nxco, mirvTi/xi, is the same with vsrayvvpu.
wXaâ;, (J c/iase about, pass. / roue, wander,) fut. v\xy%a, &c.
( 93. 06s. 1.)
tTA, see tri\n.
| IIAA, iXriHa, see iriXitJur and a-i^rXn/u.
irXew, (I navigate,") fut. trXsvaofxai, irXtuaov^.xt,EVX-st/ff*, &c. pass,
flreTrXEfTptai, iwXet/J&riv. Verbal adj. nXiusios.
The Ionic dialect has tXmh, r'trXuxit, &c. ; whence the verbal adj. rXurii,
and the Epic syncopated aor. i<r\*r, us, a, ufity, &c. far/.
see 110. 6.
with Ob$. 1.
nXr^tsoi, ttXyitto), (/ strike, wXiiyvy/xi is a more uncommon form,)
in the aor. 2. pass, it retains the w, luXriynv, except in those
compounds, which denote a striking with dismay, e^sirXdym,
nanv'KiLym.
The Attics do not use the act. of this verb, in the sense of striking, but
rurarea, which thej' never employ in the past. The per/. 2. trirkxy* has
with later Writers a pass, signif. ( 113. Obs. 4.)
Homer has also the aor. 2. act. and tned., but with the redupl. r'urknyw,
miu, (I blow,) /ut, vrnvfeptai, vrvturov/teti, iTHvffet, &c. aor. pass. IrnvrSttv.
The per/, pass. rimS/uu, 98. Oos. 4.) is merely Poetical in a particular
sense, (to be spirited, wise ;) and according to the same analogy, the syncopated
aor. Stfi.irtv'rt, (Homer, for avivyvrt, 110. 70 and a/*irrvv$ri, (for KviTyuSv,
compare tiîu, ii(iiSm,) and the imper. ufixm.
vrtSiu, see 95. Obs. 4.
voptTv, (Hesych.) tiropov, (gave, supplied,) part, woqav, a defective
aor. with Poets.
The same theme in the sense of supplying has produced, according to the
principles of metathesis, ( 110. 11.) the per/, pass, mtrûrai, (it is decreed by
/ate,) part. xitûfiXiot.
Pind. Pyth, 2, 105. has an infin. tniraîTt or <rr{fiV in the sense of shew,
ing, exhibiting, which ought rather to be derived from a different radical
form, and written n*a(ut. See Boeckh.
rJO, see w'nm :irnrwSi, see irar%ai.
nPA, sr^tjSw, see xivûrxu and trlpirgnfti.
itpiaa'boti, (to buy,) a defective wr6, of which the forms are used
only as aor. of aitticfocti, viz. Efl-îayxw, conj. n^loiixai, opt.
7i%ialixv)v, imper. wpiaoo, irpi'a/, infin. npiotoSau, part, mpix^ms.
The pres. ind. -xûp&i, stated in Dictionaries, is not met with anywhere i
272
A GRI5EK GRAMMAR.
i<r{/^>i must therefore be considered as a defective aor. 2. med. after the

analogy of Wra/tut, (see rirtfuu.)
nPO, see ritiif.
nTAnTO, see wtrmnvfu, rirt/txi, vrittu, and (riVrw.
itT-hvaw, (/ crouch,) is regular, but has with Poets some forms as
if from riTAfi, part. perf. xvxvnus, and 3 pers. dual aor. 2.
itr^rm, {% 110. 6.)
iruySxvovLxt, (/ learn by inquiry, hear,) from utihoixai, (Poet.)
fut. xtvsou.'m, aor. ixvSiixm, perf. icivvaixit. Verbal adjec
tive Hivark^s, nivarbs.
P.
palvu, (I sprinkle,) see about pxaa&TB and Ippilxrai, Obs. 4. 5.
to 103.
ffla, and s'So,, (7 do,) M fifr, or (from EPm,) Ipfy, &c.
per/, eogyct.
piu, (I flow,) fut pev<nij.i, aor. tpptuoa. We find, however, in
the same act. sense, only the aor. 2. pass, tppvnv with the
fut. puwoixai, and a new perf. formed from this aor. tp'pumtx.
( HI- 2.)
I>E, see si' tsTv.
'priytuixi, {I rend, trans.) fut. pri%a, ( 112. 14.) aor. pass. Ippxynv,
perf. 2. sp'puya, ( 97. 06s. 2.) with the intrans. signif. I am
rent. See 113. 06s. 4.
piylu, (/ shudder,) perf. ep'piyx, ( 97. 06s. 4.) identical with
the pres. 'tense.
ftylt, see $ 105. Obt. 6.
piitru and pinrlu, (I throw,) both forms are in use in the pres.
and imperf. : the rest of the tenses are derived from the first
only, piA"> &c. long i, whence ^rjrrf, pT-^n, aor. pass, spplipwy.
See about pinTxtxav Obs. II. 1. to 103.
ftiZarxi. see Obs. II. 1. to C. 103.
i see
(itfuti, see iji/ai.
| pnr, see pnyfufu.
pdmufxi, (7 strengthen,) p"aiau, &c. ( 112. 14.) perf. pass, eppuixxi,
imper. eppuao, [farewell !) aor. pass, ip'pwabnv.
2.
oa\TilZ.w, (I sound a trumpet,) fut. axXirlyû, &c. ( 92. 06s. 1.)
aaXviau is a later form.
rtt'ov, see cuCv.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
273
axat, an old form for o-rdu, (I sift,) whence we find (in Herod. 1,
200.)
al3hvv/ja, (I extinguish,) a$iau, &c. ZafSsaixeu, e<t/3e'<t3w.The perf.
sff/3w3c, (with the n,) and the aor. 2. eafinv, pi. e'ct/3i/êv, infin.
ofirivai, have the intrans. signif. to be extinguished, which else
is expressed by the pass. ofiiiwiMu.
n'm, iium'iatxi, see Obi. II. 1. to 103.
otuaj, (I push on,) has most commonly the augment in the same
way as the verbs beginning with g, ( 83. Obs. 2.) and takes
no a in the aor. 1. "iaaiva, lamvaqi/m, perf. pass, ioovâi, (I rush
forth, I strive, I require,) part. iaouittws, (proparox., see
111. Obs. 2.) plusq. evav/awv, which form is at the same
time a syncopated aor. ( 110. 7. with Obs. 4.) whence ovto,
avfj.evos,2pers. pi. effavo, (for taovao, see Obs. III. 2. to 103.)
aor. pass, (of the same signif.) eaouSw, (Sophocles.)The
forms with a single a, (ex. gr. huS-nv, eH-sauSv),) are less fre
quent, and those without any augment, (aeva, euro,) belong to
the Ionic Epic dialect.We also meet with a syncopated
pres. pass. ( 110. 5.) ex. gr. oivrau, (Soph. Trach. 645.)
but more commonly with the change of the vowel into ov,
aoviAat, (I hasten, run,) imper. aovao, aovabai, aovaSre, (calls or
exhortations, used in common life.)Hither belongs lastly,
that Laconic imianovx, (he is gone,) known from Xenoph.
Hell. 1, 1, 23. which is explained as aor. 2. pass, (for iaavn.)
GKtS&wviM, (I scatter,) fut. <jxild.au, axttiu, &c. perf. pass. eaxeStto-pux., ( 112. 14.)
axiXku or axs\sa>, (I dry, desiccate,) pass. (I am dried up.) To
this immediative sense of the pass, belong the act. forms
aor. ssxKw, axXwat, axXxim, ( 110. 6.) perf. erjxXnxac, I
have been dried up, and the fut. oxKriaoixat.
The Homeric rxnXfii, (aor. 1. in-xuXu,) points to rxuXXn, (which has the
widely different signif. to dig, scrutch,) whence come, through the mctathetis
2KAA, stated 110. 11. the forms nkjw, axXa'm, &c.
07x30*, (J wipe,) aixris, &c. see 105. Obs. 5. fut. owvu, &c. ;
but the aor. pass, always is eoixvixSm from the non-Attic
pres. aix-nyju. Verbal adj. ai^mros.
ctvfiat, &c. see ffiuu.
| s9rCv, ffTitrSxi, see V.
oitivlw, (I pour out,) o-wsiW, saveienai, ( 25. 4.) MED.
2TA, see iVx,<.
| rniasm, see p. 199. Note.
creqiu, and anpiaxu, (I deprive of,) the first is regular, fut. areT
274
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
pir.au : in the pass, the simple form <;i%oy.a.t in the sense of

/ am deprived of, robbed.
Homer has it with , m-iim, and Poets have, instead of j>iSiif, an aor, 2.
pais.jrrtfius.
grxurtti, vnvtTcu, mure, see 110.5.
orophwfAt, aropwî, and arpwmvy.t, (I spread as a bed,) give both
sopeau, efopsax, and rpojau, trpuax, perf. pass. ergw/Aai, aor. 1.
pass, tfopiabm. Verbal adj. sûros.
There is an obvious metathesis, ( 110. 11.) in the forms fûru, eûrm/u.
arvyiu, (I dread, hate,) is regular ; but has in Homer also the
aor. 2. eruyov, ( 96. Obs. 5.) and in a causative sense to
cause to be dreaded, the aor. 1. esv%st, which later Poets, how
ever, employ again in the first sense.
auû, (I save,) has in the old Writers in the perf. pass, beside
eiauay.a.1, also aiaufMU, and in the aor. l.pass. always eadSnv
from the primitive form aaou, eaxriSw.MED.
The Epics have from nw, 1.) the regular formation rttueu, Iriura, &c.
2.) pres. and imperf. contr. (ettiu, <r/;,) ttuu, runt, &c. whence came the usual
form <r*u, with Epics also riu, 3.) the 3 pers. imperf. (craw,) and the imper.
(<rwi/,) again contracted, would be iru,ru, but the Epics lengthen these forms
again not with , as is usual, but with a, (exactly as in murium, see 105.
Obs. 10.) thus, tiu, (for
and r*fi.)
T.
TAr, see TAn.
| rxxiu, see TAAfi.
rmiu, I stretch, bend as a low. The pass, takes <r : the u is short in the conjugation;
the fut. is again ratiu, Od. <f. 174. See 95. 04*. 12. The pass, with the
Epics is likewise nauiuu.
rapdaau, rru, (J disturb,) has a contracted collateral form :
1.) with the Attics the pres. tense bpdrru, where the r be
comes a
and the vowel is lengthened ; hence the part,
neut. to Sgarrov : 2.) with the Epics the perf., but with an
intrans. signif. Ts'-rgnx,*, (/ amfull of trouble, in a commotion,)
where the Ionic n supplies the place of a5*.MED.
rxflit and rxfhxi, see 3itt and 6A#
TAthe seeming radical form of ru>u, rirtxa, &c. ($ 101.) To a similar root in
w This long vowel is produced by a metathesis like that mentioned $ 110. 11. 2.,
in which the first a passes over and coalesces with the second to form a long syllable,
exactly as in ^<tX*i,-,pAaJ-, fiKixss- The change of t into > is effected by the
aspiration, which so readily combines with the { : yet it is an anomaly, since it does
not take place in other instances. (Sec the Note to p. 30.)From this verb is
derived the ailj. rjiîf, Ion. rpizii, {rough, rugged,) and not the verb from the adj.
See Buttm. Lexilogus, I. 52. p. 210.
ANOMALOUS VERBS,
275
the sense of seizing, taking, belongs the imper. t5, (lahe,) to which is related
(from TArn,) the Epic part. aor. 2. rtdupl. rirxym, (seizing.) See Buttm.
Lexilogus, I. 41. p. 162.
TEK, see Ti'xri.
T[Ava>, (/ cut,) fut. re(i.w, aor. ete/xov, ( 112. 6.) per/. rkryvntut,
pass. ririJ.-nfj.ai, aor. 1. It/ajiSw, ( 110. 11.) See about
the conj. perf. pass. ' 98. Obs. 9.
The aor. Irmpm is more uncommon. . The Ionians say also rtZ/ivu in the
prts. ; and Homer has the radical form rip*!, (11. . 707. -rt/ui, Buttm. Compl.
Gr. Or. 92. Obs. 13.)There is an Epic form r/iny*, aor. irprfa, and
trfuzyav, pass. STfidynv.
Tifs, 1 delight, has in its pass, form viprs/tsu, {lam delighted,") three different aor.
in the Epic language, irlfpim or 1t^3jj,iripcw, whence with a trans
position ( 96. Obs. 7-) the conj. rguriiu for tx^tu,and aor. med. (\rx^rfi.nt,)
tiraprofinv, conj. rapirwfitSic.
riffi/tm, (I get dry, dry up, intrans.) infin. aor. 2. pass, rtfrivai and rtptfUMuj
TioauUu, Idry, trans. Wigirmct, &c. is regular.
riTftn, JriTjwy, (I met by chance,) a defective aor.
virttfifv, see rsgiw.
\ rirftuw, see nv^du.
nix. Two kindred verbs must carefully be distinguished, viz. :
1.) nig*, (I make, fabricate,') a Poetical regular verb, rtuû, Itiu^x, rlri/y/txi,
ITlJ^SlJV, TUXTOf Or riVKTOS'
2.) ruyxxtu, (I happen to, hit the mart,) fut. Ttfyfixi, aor. Srux", (Epic,
WiiXnrx,) perf. nrixnzx, (112. 13. and 111. 3.) The signif. of my
X*'" arose from that of the pass, of nix*, whence the Epics have the
pass, forms rirvy/tui, iri/^Siiy, which nearly agree with rvyxaw, trux",
and the perf. rirwxx, of which the part, has in Homer the pass, signif.
of Twxut, (Od. p.. 423. see 113. Obs. 4.) takes altogether the signif. of
the pres. Tuy%atu\n Herod. (3, 14.) and in the xsml.
The perf. Tirvyfu/i has also the diphthong m, whence in Homer 3 pi.
nnvxetTut, and the fut. 3. merely rirU\ofixi.
To nix" belongs, with the Ionic change of the aspirata, ( 16. Obs. I. e.)
the aor. 2. nrvzut, tituxUSu, (to get ready, prepare.)See especially rirrai
for rvxttv.
TIE, nriiftxi, (I am sad.) Tho part, is nrn/Umt and in the act. form nrm*!,
(j 97. Obs. 7.)
rtxru, (J bring forth,) from TEKfi, fut. riâ, commonly ri$piMu}
aor. etexovj (Poetically steko/xw,) perf. rlroxa.
We also meet with rlnyfuu and ItIx$m in the later Writers. See about
the fut. nsurSw, f 95. 04*. 16.
ir/iw, see t/.
rtrpoM, (I perforate, bore,) from TPAH, rpwu, &c.
The Attics, however, make more use of the collateral form rtr^xnu, WT(nt. The perf. always is, from the radical form, rirftxa, t/t^x/mei.
rirpcoaxoj, (I wound,) rqdaoj, &c. ( 112. 10. 16.)
The simple T^mu in the more general sense of hurting, damaging, is iu
Homer. Both are connected with rtfur through the metathesis TOP, TPO,
see J 110. 11.
T2
276
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
rlu, (I honor,) is in this sense merely Poet, and regular, pari. per/, past. t<t,uUi;.
In the sense of expiating, it is merely Epic in the pres. and imperf., but
lends in prose the rest of its tenses to the following form :
,
rim, (I expiate,) ful. rim, per/, rivixu, per/, pass. r//m, aor. 1. pass,
irlrlhi*. The Med. rUafjMt, (rletfieu, iTiTaur.f, annretfitt*,) has the signif.
to punish, avenge. The Ionic pre*, is vlnupu, v'mv/ttu, ( 112. 14.)
The i in rim is with the Epics long, with the Attics short, 1 12. 06*. 8. M
Attic Poets also shorten the first syllable otr'mpi. See Buttm.Gmip/. Or. Gr.
112. 04*. 19.
TXijvai, (to endure, bear,) etXtiv, rXrivxi, t\xiw, t\5?&i, ( 110. 6.)
fut. rXriToiMxt, perf. rirXriKX.
From this per/, are again made, according to 1 10. 10. the forms vlvXxftn,
&c. nrXxtcu, opt. rirKxlm, imper. virXaSi, and the Ionic part. nrXnv:, but all
of them only in Poets and in the pres. tense.There is an Epic collateral
form aor. 1. irdyara : the pres. tense was supplied by iviâum, or hrtfUm.
TM, see Ttfjttu aud rtvps*.
\ vftf,yu, see rl^m.
rifui, (I pierce,) ire^n, ($ 90. Obs. 5.) a defective aor., compare virfurxu.In the
kindred sense of penetrating, having a clear loud sound, we meet with the Jut.
ritsff.su, and the pres. veplun in Aristoph.
rittm, an aor. the same with vv%t~t, ofwhich Pind. Pyth. 3, 48. 4, 43. 10, 52. has the
part, rivffa.%, and the compounds Xvlvuti, ttirwn;,
TfflTKw, See rlorru.
r(iru, (I turn,) see, about rirgafx and rlrâifn, 97. p. 161.
rpifyoj, (I nourish,) fut. bpiâi, ( 18. 2.) perf. tetqoQx, perf.
pass, ri^pafA/xai, Tspa(pxi, [rtTpoiipSou is incorrect,) aor.
pass, irpattpny, more rarely Ibpiqfow. Verbal adj. SpewTOf.
MED.
In the old language rpf* had also the immedialive ( 113. 2.) signif. to
grow thick, strong, tall, and the pats, has the same meaning ; hence the aor. 2.
act. and the aor. 2. pass, are used in Homer indifferently one for the other,
ex.gr. irfxQt the same with ir(a'pu, and rftupifut, (vfaftit,) the same with
the usual r^xQwaj, see Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr. : rirfafu has both signif., (see
the Note to $ 97. p. 161.)
f^X">U r""d less commonly takes its tenses from itself: fyl&futi, iSfifo ($ 18. 2.)
more generally from APEMfl, aor. Xi^xfun, /ut. $(*/iu/fitu, per/. iil(ifmita, (see
$111.3.) Epic iOttftx.
TPT*, see 9{i/V.
t/iiIx", (I 'rub to pieces, consume,) forms its tenses from the less
common rpw/jxa, Irpvyjaax, Tsrpvxt>j(j.ews, &c.
rpdyai, (I eat,) fut. tô/xxi, aor. erpxyw, (from TPHrO.)
rvyxaia, rtrvxuv, see riv%v.
runroj, (I strike,) has with the Attics commonly ruitrwu, mvicr^xi, ru'BTvirioi, aor. pass, hrvvw MED.
55 The statement that the / in the conjugation of vim, is short in irma from rim,
proceeds from ignorance of the Comic metre in Aristoph. Eccl. 45. f'esp. 1424. where
the i makes an anap.xst.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
277
tuQw, (I raise a smoke, set on fire,) Jut. Sii^co, &c. ( 18. 2.) aor.
pass. ETWpw.
T.
jrifXtifwi, see ix*.
PAr, see ii-Mv.
falm, intrans. / thine, trans. / shew, aor. ifmm, per/. 1. *ifuyxu, jxiss. fxinftai with
aor. 1. ifdr9m, lam shown.MED. The putt, faln/iai also signifies / thine,
appear, aor. 2. Ifdint, fut. farov/txi, and with per/. 2. rifma, (see 1 13. 0i. 3.)
The Homeric iterative fintxt, {shone, appeared,') is rather anomalously formed
from the pott, ifxtm. Homer has also faatSn for it"9wotv, in the sense of
thining : compare xâ/tu.
*A, fitxu, see pnî, ( 109. 1.) faint and i-ENtl. Homer's nffot/iai beloDgs some
times to fan*, and sometimes to *EN1J, I thai/ shine or be killed.
*ENfi, see vifnr.
<pipu, (I carry, bear,) has its tenses from quite different roots,
Jut. ol'acu, and an aoristic imper. dive, about which see 96. 9.
farther aor. 1. weyxa, aor. 2. we-yxov : from the former are
used especially the indie., and those terminations of the
imper., which have the a, and from the latter chiefly the
infin. and part. perf. h4)ioyjx., (compare 97. Obs. 1. 2.)
perf. pass, hriveyixxi, aor. pass. ,hiiypr,t, fut. pass. Ivzyp-hvolâi or 'nn^-ncoiJ.xi. Verbal adj. oisios, olaror, (Poetically $epT.)MED.
Thelonians have aor. Unix*, buion, pats.imixQ**- The theme inixx occurs
as a pres. in Hesiod, A. 440. (Vvmh/xm-u.) 'EnyxiTt is erroneously considered
as a compound with i> : it is like iyevyn, iXaXxut, &c. ( 85. Oif, 2.) a
redupl. of ErKO, of which again ENEKfi, ENEIKn, are lengthenings, (like
AAKfi, AAEKO.)See Buttm. Iêxilogut, I. 63. 23. Homer has in the imper.
pi. fi{ti.See about fe(tTt, 1 12. 9., and about ftfhai, $ 105. Obt. l(i. There
are a few other rare forms derived from e'm, viz. in/in. aor. 1. itifrtu and
the verbal adj. aidims in Herod. (I, 157. Cj G6.) where the a is not gram
matically correct ; and the perf. r^tiiarai in Lucian Parat. 2. of which the
diphthong m, unchanged by the augment, rests on 84. Obt. 2. f(i, see par.
ticularly below.
tytuyai, {I flee, escape,) fut. <pevôf/.ai and (pevôv/jLai, aor. cipuyov,
perf. nityivya. Verbal adj. Qsuktsos, (peuxrof, (jQvx.tos, Horn.)
Homer has also the part. perf. past, rifvy/i'ms in an act. sense, escaped;
and a part.perf. fxfuTjim, (compare fu 2>, flight,) fugitives.
qfozw, (J do, previously to another, anticipate,) see about the
quantity of the , 112. Obs. 8. aor. 1. tipbaax and aor. 2.
etp&yiv, tp&oj, (f&iivai, (p$af, 110. 6. fut. <p^riô/j.ai, perf.
Elp&ajta.
278
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
There is //. . 346. wm^xfUlmi, an uncommon form of the opt. for -tun,
Buttm. Complete Gr. Gr. I. 537. Ao/e.
qbeipui, I spoil, trans, is regular ; but the per/. 2. tySopcc, htySopx,
has, with the Ionians and the later Writers, the signif. / am
spoiled, Attic have spoiled, the same with tySapxa.
Homer has the Jut. tpi'ipi : fat. 2. med. XtLfUfUfuu, intrans. with the
Ionians.
fill, in tliis form is merely a Homeric verb with transitive and intrans. signif. to
waste, destroy, (It. r. 466.) perish, (Od. /3. 368.) The other forms are more
in use, vet, on the whole, more Poetical. Qilvu and ifsm are merely
transitive. But the derivative
Pres. tense <p</
is commonly intrans., and takes its tenses from the middle voice of ftm, viz.
fut. filrtfuu, per/. Ifti/uu, plusq. iffl/art, which latter form is at the same
time a syncopated aor. 1 10. 7-) and has therefore its own moods : opt.
pfifun, 7s, It; (Od. x. 51. \. 330. See the Note to 107. Obs. III. 6.) in/in.
yi'taiiti, part. QfiifAuos, conj. ^Ciwu-'.,. shortened ft'io/tai, y6'nreu.
The i in both pAVv, &c. and the pres. film, ( 112. Obs. 8.) is always long
with the Ionians, and short with the Attics : ifli/juti, &c. is constantly short.
QiXiw, (Hove,) instead of the regular aor. of this verb Homer has
also, with a long t, the medial forms eQiXaro, imper. ipIXai,
(deponens of the simple form <J>1 Afi,) in which the i is long,
in consequence of the nature of the aor. See 101. 4.
Qpdôj, (J say , point out,) has in the old Poets an aor. vifypa&ov,
iititypoi&w, infin. ntfâSistv, and a per/, pass. srt'pgaopiai.
Qppioi, used only in compounds, ex.<ppz7v, ela<ppt7y, hatyotiv, (to let in,
out, through,) (ppâu, &c. imper. tiaippis, ( 110. 6.)MED.
(pi'<TTa>, peirru, (/ shudder,) fut. <p%i%u, &c. pcrf. nitpplxoc, from
$PIKfl, (whence also the subst. Qfxii, Sec.) see 92. 8. 2.
*TZ, see fliyu.
(pupco, (Imix, knead,) fut. old tpvâar, efvpax, commonly <pv%eu,
&c. Ion. Quqwu, perf. pass. Tti$vpy.zi aud W<pi/p//.ai.
$va, (I produce,) <pu<rw, eipvaa. But the perf. iriipuxac, and the
aor. 2. <pyv, (pyvai, conf. tpvw, part.
( 1 10. 6.) have a
pass, or intrans. signif. to be produced, to arise, for which
there is in the pres. and fut. (fyuvyjii, <pvaofx.ai.
Un-Attic Writers use instead of fvtui, tp'us, &c. an aor. pass. Qinitai, fuiis,
&c.See about the Homeric forms rtfiun, -rifaii, 97. Obs. 1. and about
the opt. <pin,, l io. p. 242.
X.
commonly x*lt**', (I give way,) is regular, but has in
Homer an aor. 2. with the redupl. and the change of % into
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
279
x, xexxtieoSxi. The act. xexxish, (xexx'Saiv,) with a particular

fut. xexa$ri<rci), has in Homer a peculiar transitive signif. to
deprive of, bereave.*(See xexa^vmi^xi in x-nlu, and ex^Sov
in jâvSava;.)
%itivu, see %oirxv.
yjiigtn, (I rejoice,) fat. yi<nprnsca, aor. (from the pass.)
and
from this again a perf. with a more intensive signif. of the
pres. xiyâts-nxx or xiy^xpn/Mcci, ( HI. 3.)
Poets hnve also of the regular formation xix^/if, acr. I. med. i^r^d/mv,
and aor. 2. with the redupl.
The fut. x*!*'"/*'" belongs to the
later Writers ; Homer has xi%*fnrtt and sfuu.
Xxv^xvoj, (/ contain, hold,) aor. xaSov, ( H2. 13.) perf. xs'âvJa,
(the same with the pres.) fat. yjEimix.au, (Od. a. 17.) as if
from XENA.fi, (compare <nre'v5 anfoet, and winovSx
<Ktlmfj.ai.)
X&axcv, (I gape wide, yawn,) forms of the pres. tense %xiw,
which is not used by ancient Writers, the aor. eyxvovjfut.
Xjzvovn-xi, perf. xiymx, I am open, yawning.
X'tn, fut.ximv/tai, aor. lîta and
perf. xix'ia, ( 97. 4. a. C.)
%uff9ficu, see %scviscvw.
yjiu, (I pour,) fat. again %koi, x&>
fut. med. x*W"> (see
Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr., and above 95. Obs. 8.) aor. 1.
Ex,sa, ( 96. 06s. I.) \xiai> *Xse> (v>)
3GE''> imper.
Xeov> Xst*ra,> &cxsjefxa.
pass. xixvix.xi, aor. pass.
*X&w, ( 98. 06s. 4.)MED.
The forms X'"r"i ix""*, are unusual, though they were the primitive
ones, as appears from the itibst. xtt/px, and the forms ixuht, iîm, &c.See
95. Obs. 12. Note.
The Epics have the aor. few*, (of which the conj. x%!m bscomes afut., Od.
ft 222. see J 139. Obs. 8.) syncopated aor. pass, ix"f">h Sec. ( 110. 7.)
Xptxiaix.tiv, (to aid, help,) sxpxffx.ov, a defective aor., whence came
again x(%inâait Jâ/a/wiiTcr, ( 111. 3.)
jCga'a/. There are of this verb five different formations with dif
ferent signif. ; all of them with the contraction commonly *j,
Ionic (contrary to analogy) a.
1.) xi'"' deliver oracles,) is regular,
&c. pass. x\x%r,tpou, ixtfrfai.
See the contraction into n in Soph. El. 35. CEd. C. 1ST.
2.) Kixfufu, (/ lend,) goes after Isrripi, x{***>, 1x^n<rtt, &c. MED. xlxz'f^'t
(/ borrow,) xt**p"".
3.) x{i/im, {lam in need of, employ,) x(* (2 '?) X(*TC"i XV"^1' &c" :
the rest is regular, aor. ix(mri/t>t*, perf. xixgnpai M. Verbal adj. îttrr'ut,
Xt**r>s.
* This perf. is used by the Epics in the sense of / want.
280
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
See J 105. Obs. 8. and 15. about the Ionic forms of the pres. and imperf.
being sometimes with a, and sometimes with i.
4.) ^jii, (it is necessary, Lat. oportei,) is impersonal, and conforms partly
to the verbi in pi, infin. xt*""> opt. xt''*>
X.(V' Parl- () W*' *)
imperf. ix(H>M, or
(never ix(v,)fut. xp"u5.) x^;>i. (it is sufficient,) un-Attic ircx(x, pi. ixtx(*rn, in/in. i-nxg.>,
part. ixiX(it, Zrx, , imperf. iriX(n,fut. imX(vm, &c.
Xfclvvvni, (I dye, color,) fut. xp*aut &c- ( H2. 14.) perf. pass.
X<wvvf/Ai, (I heap up earth, make a bank or mole, 112. 14.) is
regular in the old Writers : yj>u, infin. xvv> Y/iaai, &c. perf.
pass. xexuafAai.
This verb must not be mistaken for the Epic x^'f^h (J am an9r9i)
XxutifLw.
if.xu, see i 105. Obs. 5.

tyx-ty*V> see 100. Obs. 8.
a.
ubico, (I push,) has the syllabic augment according to 84. Obs.
5. (Eftz&ofv,) fut. u^ri'su, and (from flfi,) ciioaisuaa, Zaxi,
euaixxi, &C.
ivt'c/iAai, (/ buy,) has likewise the syllabic augm. lmouiJ.rtv, &c.
But instead of employing its own aor. (Itrrnoaipwnv, uvwdfJLnv,)
Attic Writers used the forms subitum, wgiaa&ai, &c which
see above.
115. Of the Particles.
1. The particles are called in Latin inflexibles, because they
admit neither declension, nor conjugation. Whatever regards
their formation and derivation, belongs to the chapter on the
Formation of IVords. There are, however, some particulars
intimately connected with the inflection of other parts of speech,
or pointing at some reciprocal bearings among the particles
themselves, (as comparison and correlativeness,) or little varia
tions occasioned by construction and euphony, which are better
" See about this pari. 57- 3. As this impersonal verb evidently comes from
X(iu, this part, is explained by the Ionic conversion of mt into i, ( 27. Obt. 10.)
but the accentuation must be noticed as very anomalous ; and since the Ionians
changed in general the verbs in tw into i, this accounts for the 6 in xt''"' (compare
s> This anomalous accentuation instead of
(j 12. 2. a. and Obs. 1. to j 103.)
rests ou ancient custom.
PARTICLES.
281
treated separately, being in some degree analogous to what is

called inflection in general. They are therefore brought here
under a distinct point of view.
2. We first separate from the particles in general the preposi
tions, viz. the following eighteen :
a/xty), xvz, avTi, dwo, Sii, lis, h, e, in\, Kara, fJ.trx, isapi,
orelit, 7tpo, irpos, aw, virlq, vno,
which have always been especially considered as the prepositions
of the Greek language, and which we shall denominate the old
prep. They alone form compound verbs in a simple and regular
manner, which is not the case with other particles, which are also
prep,, as avev, ZveKa, syyus, us, (at,) &c. Whatever concerns
these old prep, with regard to form, will be stated along with the
other particles ; but their combination with the casus is eluci
dated in the Syntax, 147.
3. The most general adverbial form in Greek is the termination
us, which may be considered as a part of the inflection of adjec
tives ; for it occurs only in adj. and participles, and there are
very few adj., from which this form could not be derived. It is
perfectly tantamount to the termination of the cases, and we need
only change the final os of either nomin. or gen. into us, observ
ing at the same time that, whenever the end-syllable os of the
nomin. has the accent, the termination us of the adv. retains the
accent, which becomes a circumflex. For instance,
(plXos <pl\us, <70(por aolpus,
outpûv, (autppoyos,) autfponus, xapi'eis, evros, yjxgihrus, ibhus,
tos, whius, part. XvairtKuv, (serviceable,) ovvtos, XvatreXovvrus,
dXySris, ios, contr. ous, aXr&ius, contr. a\r&us.
Obs. 1 . All adv. derived from adj. in tit, us, should properly have a circumflex on
the syllable us as being a contraction ol'ms into*;. Some, however, are paroxytona,
and formed from the nomin., which has the same accent without any contraction,
ex.gr. itxiSnt, M$*t, compare 121. 9. 1. and above 49. Obs. 4. Adverb) made of
adj. in tut mm, have the accent after the same analogy, as the adj. in their
declension, ( 36. Obs.) thus from iStiusMus iSius, but agreeably to the following
Obs. better luwnZt.
Obs. 2. Adj. of one termination, which, as it were, waver between subst. and adj.,
take first the usual termination of adj. to form their adv. in us, ex. or, te/taiixus,
t&axixvs. Compare J 63. Obs. 3. and the Note to 66.
4. Particular cases and forms of nouns frequently supply, by
virtue of a power to be explained in the Syntux, and by an ellipsis
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the place of particles, and when such a form occurs rather fre
quently, it passes altogether for an adv. ; ex. gr. the dat.
xo/aiSti, properly icith care, hence very much ;
onovbri,
with diligence, difficulty, hence
hardly, scarcely,
beside a number of adj. feminine, where originally the dat. 6So;
from h oSor, the way or manner, was understood ; ex. gr.
tte^t), on foot, xoivij), jointly, il'lp, privatim, privately,
$mj.gcitp, publice, publicly ; and the like. Compare
in the following , Obs. 7. aXXri, and the like.
the Accus.
dpXjW ana" *"wv *PX> properly, in the beginning, outset,
hence wholly,
voo1x.it, gratis, without compensation, (from voaii,, a gift,)
paxgay, (oSov,) far, far off.
See also Obs. 3.Theneirter of an adj. is also an adverbial accus.,
when in the sing. pi. it supplies the place of an adverb. But
excepting the compar. and superl., of which we shall treat pre
sently, this is chiefly peculiar to Poets, (see 128. Obs. 4.) and
there are also a few adj., which are used adverbially in the neut.
gender in prose ; such are, for instance, rxx", quickly, ixtxphv or
fj.tx.pa., little.
Obs. 3. There are many particles, which originated in this manner, whose radical
noun is not in use, or used only by Poets. Datives of this kind are written without
the / subscript ; ex.gr. ilxn, in vain, 3i^5, doubly, compare the following . Of this
kind are also the gen. Ijjij, in order, iyx'o, near, hp.w, together, (adj. iftei with the
Epics ;) the neuters trXwiev, near, (adj. xXneUt with Poets,) grtfti^n, to-day, aveis* /omorrow; and especially several in , like^Xa, xiifrx, greatly, i<xx, separately, rdx*,
quickly, perhaps ; and many more.
Obs. 4. If beside the neuters ti$i and l&u, we also meet with iv3vt and l%s as
adverbs, (see 117- 2.) it is only accidentally that the latter form is identical with
the nomin. masc. of the adj., and in these words as well as in \yyvs, the s is as much
a part of the adverbial form, as it is in ap.fi; from iftfi, f"x;'f ôr f^Xt'i "T{'/"a[5 for
Obs. 5. Some are cases of nouns preceded by a prtp. ; ex. gr.
**i*Xt*tMt immediately, on the spot, (properly at the thing itself,")
xxBx and xxSxrtf, (for xxf H, xxf Vsj,) as,
iii, (V S,) where/ore ; but iiin, (S/ , t<,) because, comes from iia rmrt, en
rftugytu, (for
i(yv,) literally for the benefit of the thing, (see J 147- *{,)
that is, for the purpose.
and among these too there are some, of which the noun is not in use by itself,
ex. gr. V^xipm, suddenly. Slight differences are to l>e observed in the spelling and
accentuation of some compound expressions of this kind ; ex. gr. ixmlin, out of the
teay, aside, (for Ix riSSt,) tftvsUn, in the way, a hindrance, (this is at the same time
PARTICLES.
283
contrary to syntax, instead of f !ra-!,) iT^sjai, (for , from a noun,

i*
order, successively.
5. With respect to the degrees of comparison, it almost gene
rally is the case, that
the neut. sing, of the compar., and
the neut. pi. of the superl.
serve at the same time as degrees of comparison for the adv. ;
ex. gr. aoipuTepov moiî, thou doest more wisely, aioyysx iiereXtaey,
he lived most shamefully. The degrees of comparison of the
adv. are very seldom formed by annexing us to the degree of
comparison of the adj., and when it is done, it is to heighten the
expression ; ex. gr. xocWtivais is not merely more beautifully, but
in a much more beautiful way ; hence ^tyiKus, magnificently,
can have no other comparative than iahQvus.
6. There is an old adverbial termination to instead of us, whence
ovrus and ovru, ( 26. 4.) This termination is peculiar to adverbs
derived from adj., which are not in use, as atyvoj, suddenly; hniaoj,
behind, backwards ; and also to some adverbs formed from prep.
as e%oj, without, outwards, sau or etau, avai, xirtu, ngoau and
itop'pw1. These form their degrees of comparison in the same
manner, iiuripu, dmrdru. And degrees of comparison are simi
larly formed in some other particles; ex. gr. Zico, {far from,
117. Obs. 3.) diturdrai, (very far off, most remote,) IvSov, (within,)
iilorirai, ixar, (afar,) txaariû, o\yytfv, (near,) tx.yjrpTa.Taj, /xscxgstv,
(far off,) âLiiporipu.
7. The analogy of adj. in the formation of the degrees of cornparison is strictly followed in all particles, which are susceptible
of degrees of comparison without being derived from any adj. in
use ; ex. gr. lyyvs, (near,) iyyuripu or iyyvrtqon, &c.or syyiov,
'iyyisx, and they are liable to the same peculiarities and devi
ations, which we have just noticed. (See Obs. 6.)Compare in
particular with the forms of 67. 3. and 68.
*VX'> (ne<*r>) iaaov, a.y%â,
i**ka,, (greatly,) fj-aXKot, //.aSXira,
and the following adverbial form of the compar. rtaam, ( 68. 2.)
viz.
tfo-aov, tjttov, (less,) Hxifot, (the least.)
Obs. 6. We must also notice the peculiarities of the dei/rees of comparison in
' These two particles and the intermediate Doric
are properly of the same
signif, but in common use $rga<rw means before, in front, and x'ttû, {voisu,) at a dis
tance, far.
284
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
orifa, ( 117* xi^ttir'ipu or n^ctWiây,
vcktifftav, TXvtfiatTi^v, and -/riMr,
rUKTVfy tuxrixtrleoy,
and from l&h, (straight-forward,) comes the Homeric i9i!ranc (instead of l&urxrx,
see 114. p. 280. Note.)That some of these adverbs, on taking the degrees of com
parison, become real adj., has already been noticed above, 69. 2. and the Note.
Obs. 7. Some verbal forms, by being in constant use in the popular language,
were also converted into particles, and chiefly became interjections. We have already
mentioned m> p. 205. Note : <5piAi>, see the Anomalous ifilk*, (and below J 150,
among the particular locutions:) rri, see the Anomalous TA:j'Jou, lo .' seethe
Anomalous Mm :there is an old imper. of similar signif. Mil, abbreviated is and
m :S.yi, f'tfi, "S>i, >y(u, signify all four, come on, well.'See also i/tikti, 150. All
these imper. generally retain the sing, form, even when addressed to many indi
viduals, except "n and iy^.iri.
Obs. 8. The adv. Jsujo, hither, is also employed as an imper. for come hither, in
which case it has a pi., when addressed to many : hart, which is explained as an
abbreviation of JtSj' in, which occurs in full, ex. gr. in Aristoph. cc/. 882.
116.Particular Correlative?.
(Compare 79. the Adjectives.)
1. Some localities are expressed by means of annexed syl
lables : on the question
whence? by &ev, ex. gr. aXhobsv, from another place,
whither ?
cte,
aXXoai, to another place,
where ?
Si,
SuA, in another place.
There are some differences in the vowel, which precedes these
terminations ; they are best learned by practical observation ; ex.
gr. 'ASwwpev, ougavo&ev, ocypobi, in the fields, country ; morkpoJbi,
on which of the two sides ? Tnriqojae, to which of the two sides ?
kriquSri, on the other side. Most of them keep the accent,
where the radical word has it, or as near as possible. Only those
in o&ev are generally paroxytona ; ex. gr. irivros wovtoSev.
Obs. 1. But these derivatives of oTxos, -ras, &X\os, XtSoi, Iktis, as "*.'><, xitrm,
aX>.c9i, UnSty, follow the general rule.
2. The question whither ? also admits the
enclitic Se
to be annexed to the word, and always close 'to the unaltered
accus., ex. gr. ouphvovfe, into heaven ; aKxls, (from a\s,) into the
sea; eê/SotSe, from to eê/Sos-, &c.
Obs. 2. In ix5, homeward, lo the house, and piyatt, to flight, (ifvyr),) the a comes
from accus. of metaplastic forms of the 3 decl., as those in 50, Ois. 8., and in
'A9>Si, en'/iaji,
PAHTICLKS.
285
the 3 along with the r of the accus. pi. is become a , (according to h 22. Obs. 2.)
There are, however, a few words, which take the without being in the pi., as
Obs. 3. Homer sometimes subjoins an adj. to the acciis. in this form, ex. gr. KiutV
ilmiifiUr,!!, (II. g. 255.) and even repeats this local termination, as if it were the
termination of a case in o5i ii/urh, (to his house,) from St Huts.But when the same
Poet appends this is to the gen. in aiiiirh, it is because this gun. generally is ellip
tical : lit S7it, viz. iiutt, ( 112. Obs. 9.)
3. On (he question where? the termination o-iv or at is annexed
to several names of cities, viz. r,<si when there is a consonant
preceding, and Sat in case of a vowel, and retaining the accent
of the radical word, ex. gr.
'ASwrxri, ITXarstiaffiv, 'OXy/xTTiaffi,
(from 'A5i)vs!i, ITXseTaia!, 'Ols.vtx.7tix '.) A few other words take
the termination 01,
eyotqot,
from 'laSixos, TluSw, ra. Miyxpa, This termination always has
the circumflex, except in oi'xoi, at home ".
4. The following three interrogatives refer to the three localities
stated above, viz. :
wo&ev ; whence? itol; whither? nov ; where?
of which the first only agrees in form with the terminations stated
at 1, (with Poets also woSj and nons, see Obs. 4.) But these and
some other interrogatives, of which the most usual are
97-oTE and timixx. ; when ?
itus ; how ?
itri ; in what direction, in what manner ?
stand with their immediate correlatives, (indefinitum, demonstraiivum, relutivum,) again in the same analogy, which we observed
above 79. with regard to the correlative adj.
1 The termination tin is very generally spelled with the / subscript, and 'Amr,n is
considered as the Ionic dat. ; but the termination an shews that this way of spelling
is incorrect. Yet these terminations certainly come originally from datives pi., only
that the form was altered for this special purpose in pronunciation, and applied
also, (like the termination ?,) to nouns in the sing. See the reverse of this in the
following Note.'OXvpxtiet with a short belongs to it 'Okufi-rmt.
- This termination is in Hu!H the real dat. ; in the other words it is the some
what altered dat. of the 2 decl., which was also applied to names in the pi. (Miyxfx,)
and even to other words, as i\tti/3ar from UthvHx, (see Text 6.) These forms must,
however, not be mistaken for correlatives of the following m?, whither, though this
very iTai& sometimes actually answers the question whither; ex.gr. in Aristoph.
Lys. 508. Plat. 608. ; and we must recollect that in the common language the
correlatives of the different questions in general are easily confounded one with the
other. See the Note to Soph, Philoct. 481. and about hra.u3s7, Buttm. Cumpl. Gr,
Gr. $ 116. 06.28.
28G
Interrog.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Jndef.
all enclitics
1T0TE,
irou,
TtOl,
Demonstr.
Relat.
simpl. compos.
rare,
OTE,
OWOTf,
iron ;
Of,
07T0U,
nov ;
oi,
onoi,
not;
o&ev, oaro^tv,
TO&EV,
wo&ev ;
irus,
ru s,
irus ;
US,
OVUS,
t
<* s,
vri,
t),
(Mm
t[7\ ;
minx, hnmU*.
Their signif. are supplied by the analogy of 79. ; for instance,
aroTe, once, nobh, from any place whatever, &c.And in the
same way as the artic. posfpos. or, independently of o<mr, is also
strengthened by inp, (oanip, &c.) Several relatives of this kind
add irep for the like purpose: &Weg, tfireq, ovmp.
Obs. 4. Of the Poetical forms we will only just mention (for trail, &c.)
vfoi, WflSJ,
c&j,
J'Si, and eired*,
and (for <* and ?iri/,) xin, irirt, which forms are analogous to their particular
correlative; (Text 1.)
5. The demonstratives in this table are the primitive simple
ones, like 6, ri, to, among the adjectives ; but tote, then, at that
time, is the only one in common use ; the others occur merely in
some particular locutions, or in poetry. Sometimes we also meet
with us as a more uncommon demonstrative instead of rut : it
then takes the acute accent to distinguish it from the relative us.
('). But there are some other demonstratives, which, instead of
t, have a very different root, and particular meaning :
exeT, (Poetically fxeiSi,) there, eV-eIêv, thence, e'xeIVe, thither,
answering the interrogalives nov, ico^tv, and no~,
(Ion. and Poetical; also xeiS, xe~&ev, xeTje:)
Se5o, hither, answering the interr. itoX;
vDv, now, answering the interr. irire ;
To which must be added the following two,
Ev&st, here, there, ev&ev, thence,
which are at the same time relatives synonymous with o5 and
oSev, and commonly used in prose.
7. Of the demonstrative adverbial forms, which we have men
tioned, there are five susceptible of being strengthened in the way
stated above in 79. 5. whence are derived the demonstratives
generally used in prose, in the following manner, (compare 14.
Obs. 3. with regard to their accentuation,)
See about the , lubtcripl in these instances, 06s. 8.
PARTtCLES.
287
rmlna,
-rnvixxis,
rmtKawrx,
e'v&a,
'vhx&z*,
ivSavra, Jon. svrau&a, All.
Ev&ev,
e'v&e'vSb,
ev&eutev, Ion. ivrevSev, All.
rri,
t^Xe,
rnvrn,
us,
5Se,
ovtms, or ovru.
See about the two last series Obs. 7.
8. Part of these demonstrative adverbial forms take moreover
the i demonstrativum, ( 80. Obs. 3.)
for instance,
ovruai, (from oi5r<uij!v, see 80. Obs. 3.)
EVTEU&EVI, EV&stSl, OlSJ,
Seff1 from Se5ô, vt/v! from vuv.
However E'vrau&a, in this respect, forms, besides EYTa^!, more
commonly ewauSoT, see the Note to 116. p. 315.
8. The relative adverbial forms, (like the adj., 80.) to gene
ralise their signif. more intensely, annex
ovv and IriHart,
for instance, bnovodv, wheresoever, wherever, hituaovn, (and with
the insertion of ti, Sswutiouv,) oTroySriôTE, &c.
OA*. 5. In the same way as the corresponding adj. !> 79. form other oorre/atives
by adding their characteristic terminations to other general expressions, (a &X\olot,
wrrmt, &c. J 79. Obs. 2.) so do the adverbs ; ex. gr. aXXtrt, at another time, aXAj,
(on the question xn,) in another way or manner, &c. tuitus, tiirn, (as responsive to
<rSi, <rn,) in every way, entirely, &c. abrtu, ccbrMi, (answering to rev, ireJ>/,) in that
place, there, &c. But the adverbt derived from
rtXvi, trxt, and
are
commonly strengthened by the insertion of the letters a#, for instance,
etWttôv, elsewhere, vmirtt^tv, irtkXa^gv, in all, in many placet,
'ixaraxfoii, from every side, ixXa^-J, &c.
Obs. 6. There are likewise negatives made of most of these forms : from iron, r>i,
and r/f, by a mere juxtaposition,
at/iron, fti-rm, never, tSvut, fti*vs, in no way, by no means.
These last forms in Homer throw the r off before a consonant, (t, /inV*>, 11. y. 306.
{.422.) and must, in that case, not be confounded with the particle of time
{mxu, finru, not yet.) But the negatives are more generally derived from the old
adj. ol^tz/xti, ftxlxpof, none,
tvh*pi, by no means, not at all, s'lihmpjf, abitsfiiv, ivlaftftw, &c
Obs. 7- The simple demonstrative and relative forms are obviously derived from the
artic. prapos. and postpos., of which they partly are real cases, rji, S, v, and for Z,
(compare the 2d Note to 1 16. p. 315.) but the others are adverbial derivations from
them for just as ui, it, and rui, are adverbs of quality derived from ', ti, so are
4 This demonstrative it must not be confounded with the it, which answers the
question whither, (see above 2.) though the ancient Authors themselves have some
times been guilty of this confusion even in the very word ttSah. See the Note to
Soph. Philoct. 481.
283
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
9i, in, formed from them with other terminations5. The forms rairr,, rrSt, turns,
//.- . i ;.>.-. :, derived directly from other pronouns, and cvtcj, JSi, (from 3t,) have
the adverbial form for us. To answer the interrogative* rrr, and
ixtivd? gives
Uii'i and Uuj'vwf. The forms t.-S. rw,
&c. and others, of which there is no
nomin. occurring, as Tuvrn, <ra>ra%av, Sac. follow the analogy of the others.
Obi. 8. The iota subscript should properly not be placed under r,, according to
J 1 15. Obs. 3. in those forms, of which there is no real nomin. as the radical word ;
therefore it should be vn, tin, vetim, ikXa^n, but , rn, raurri, aXXtj. The former,
however, are frequently written like the latter for the sake of uniformity.
Obs. 9. Whenever the forms rin and in occur twice, (and sometimes even only
once,) for tr*rl
tm-isometimes
sometimes( 149.) they are accented nri,
in
Obs. 10. Dialects, a.) The Epics double the r for the sake of the metre in i***s,
ovrin, &C.
b.) the Ionians substitute a * in all the above forms for the r, for instance,
KUS, K9V, *XVS, OXoSl*, 0VX*l, SCf 6 16. Obs. 1. C.
c.) the Dorian9 have for **n, in, &c.to, fas, &c.ibid.
d.) the Poets have the shortened form Si, ex. gr. uXXiSt, ixrtrSt.
e.) instead of * there is an Epic form J%i or Jjgi.
117.Mutability of some other Particles.
A. In the Letters.
1. There are some steady rules for varying ou, ovx, ov% and e,
'x, according to 26. for euphony's sake ; and some particles end
for the same reason in a moveable v or s. This is sometimes
attended with a difference in the signif. Of this kind are
icipav, {trans.) beyond, chiefly of rivers and waters ;but
TTEga, (ultra,) over, across, farther, where the object is
considered as a limit or boundary. Both are preposition
and adverb: see Buttm. Lexilogus, II. 69.
ivrixgy and avnxpus, (with a different accent.) Homer uses
the first form in all signif. indiscriminately ; but with
respect to the Attics the grammarians state it as a rule
that avTixgi is employed only in the physical sense overagainst, straight-forward, but Zvtixqvs in the figurative
sense, straight-forward, without any ceremony, &c. But
there are numbers of contrary examples each way. See
Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr.
euSbs and tuhv, (see 115. Obs. 5.) as adverb of time, (im
mediately,) sv$us alone is used ; but as adverb of place,
(straight-forward, directly to,) it is commonly ei&, (e;r. gr.
8 Compare the gen. of the same terminations in some pronouns with the termina
tion S : see $ 72. Obs. 6. 5.
PARTICLES.
289
sJ&o Auxelov, sb$u 'EtpeW,) but before a vowel rarely

euûs, (Eurip. Hipp. 1197.) The Ionic forms
i$b,
are used indifferently, and barely as adverbs of place.
2. The following varieties take place, without any difference in
the signif. ; they belong to the Attic Poets, or are used by them,
though Ionic forms :
lav, fa, av, if, (see 139. 8. :) av is never long in the Tragic
Poets.
<t?)'/xeov, Alt. -ni/xEgov, to-day, yfth and exes-, yesterday.
auv anciently %bv, with, sis, Ion. is, in,
ev, Ion. Evl, in, see below, 4.
mi, Ion. and Poet. aU) and aih, always,
svExst, or evexev, (the latter even before a consonant, ex. gr.
Xen. Hier. 3, 4. 5, 1.) Ion. s"vex, eivsxev, on account of,
eVeits, Ion. e'wsitev, afterwards,
in, in the popular language, (Aristoph.) and orm, because,
compare 77. Obs. 2.
instead of ot), not, no, and va\, yes, the Attics emphatically
use ovy)> (Ion. olxi,) vai'%i, 11. 06s. 2.
Obs. 1. There are some other varieties in the dialects;
for etfii, {to, at,) anciently erêri, Dor. ), for fttra, {with, Sic.) JEo\. <},
for Jy, (therefore?) Dor. and Ion. ,
for J3;f, (again,) Ion. aunt,
for xi, *!v, (an enclitic particle used by Poets instead of it, 139.) Dor. *,
for yi, (at least,) Dor. yet,
for ii, (i/j) Dor. ml, which the Epics also use, but only in a! xt, <*<
and
There are besides some Epic forms iii for S, (or, /Aan,)inih for iriiSi, (a,
since,)in>, sm, for U or iv/.
A few prepositions, especially xitta. and Jiri, take, in the old Poets, the ter
mination ai instead of at and e, tretêu, l-reti.
See some other dialectic varieties in the preceding Section.
Obs. 2. The conjunction fet, and the prepositions sraji and itk with the Dorians
and Epics frequently throw off the vowel even before a consonant, &(,
t, (or
it,) ex. gr.
but tpfita!, wif Ssi, at 3t.
When in this case it comes before a labial letter, the old practice is to write, instead
of it TiXnyct, it p'tya, and the like
ecfiTi&etyes, ifeptyet :
see 25. Obs. 4. The same apocope takes place with the prep, xurk, but as no word
can end with a t, this prep, is closely joined to the following word, and constantly
converts the r into the following consonant, which consequently is doubled, or if it
be an aspirata, (according to 21. 3.) with the kindred tenuis before, thus,
xetrret, xcttVt, xctfipitv, xecyyotv*, xeterQa?.&pii,
for atari ret, xarct ii, xara [tit, xeeree yew, xttret faAaâ, &C.
1 It follows of course, that, in this single instance, yy is not pronounced like ng,
but like gg.
U
200
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
The Doric w!, (for irjof,) does the same, but merely before another r, ex. gr. rerrit for ) *. All these changes also take place in the compounds, as :
avfavrif, avn/r, aAXidU, u.y\rtstt[*u,
MTTetfiifai, xarâv'Tv, jta/3/aaf, xaxxtto>rt;, xcXX/T0y,
xa.fifiv*, xanivfat, xarfriffi, xappt^v. xxit/aj, and on account of the meet*
ing of three consonants xaxran, xae%t$i, for xaxxrun, xder%tSt,
and the prty. i and n are abbreviated in the same manner in compounds, but
only rarely and merely before kindred consonants, iwri/irur, u/30xxu.
B.Mutability of the Accent.
4. Several disyllabic prep., which have the accent on the final
syllable, as naâ, into, arcgl, &c. draw the accent back in the
following two instances :
1.) When in the
Anastrophe *,
they stand behind the noun, which they govern, ex. gr.
rovrov wt'gi, for eje! tovtqv,
&c3 ov/co, for aTCO &<3y,
the prep, septal, avrl, Sici, and did are, however, excepted ;
2. ) When they are employed instead of compounds with the
verb elvai, or rather, when this verb being omitted, they stand
alone as adverbs, in which case the common language also has
the Ionic e>1 instead of lv, ex. gr.
Eyci ndpa for zsdpeif/u,
E7TI, EV, V<B0, for EWSO-flV, &c.
to which belongs also va for dvdar-nhi, up ! up !
Obs. 3. Strict critics accent the prep, in the same way, even when they come in
poetry after the verb ; ex. gr. Xjwji n for inkairr, and when they attend the
verb as an adverb, ex. gr. rlfi, very, pre-eminently. We likewise write in, when
this prep, does not merely signify from, but severed from, at a distancefrom, (com
pare 115. 6.) There is, however, as yet no uniformity in our editions in this
respect, or with regard to the exceptions stated above. Another rule is that, when
in the anastrophe the prep, is elided, it is not to have any accent whatever ;
ifr"not
ii'but not in the second instance, ex. gr. d yif ?' i>{, (for "<rt.) See the mutability of the accent in monosyllabic prep. 147. Obi. 14. and
about i| and !, it and if, and the like, 13. 4.
* Many modern Editors write separately aft <riXay, xii ii, xka- fii, xmy yitu,
rtr v, and so on ; whereby writing separates what pronunciation combines. If
we wish for consistency, we must, since we part the EMIITPI of the ancients into
! ari/fi, write also it mXaya. But then xir 11 follows of course, and this is objec
tionable. It is therefore better to write xxiii, narttt, and the like, as we write
SaluctTio*, ouri. Xy'i'ou., and the like.
This denomination was already equivocal among the ancients, since it was used
for the withdrawing of the accent in both the instances stated. See Buttm. CompU
Gr. Gr.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
291
Ob: 4. The interjection Si has likewise a double accent, the circumflex only in
the sense of a call or exhortation, consequently before the vocative, but in the sense
of an ejaculation, that is to say before any other case, the acute or grave accent ;
ex, gr. Soph. Aj. 372. u ^W^;. S; ^f3*sx, (oh, how unhappy I am /) riif etvxiisix;,
(oh, what impudence .') A pui, (woe it me .') and the same in the Epic exclamation
& w'mt. But it is with this rule as with the preceding ones : see Buttm. Compl,
Gr. Gr.
118.Of the Formation of Words.
1. The formation of words, in the full sense of the expression,
is not within the compass of grammar. The analogies of the
primitive stock of any language are generally so obscured and
disjointed by time, and the intermixture of tribes,they are
combated by such a variety of contradictory opinions, and so
difficult to be cleared up with any reasonable degree of certainty,
that they require extensive and deep philological researches,
which are necessarily kept distinct from the theory of gramma
tical forms. Grammar presupposes the existence of a number of
words to be found in dictionaries, and leaves the investigation of
their relative bearings and analogy to individual observation.
2. There is, however, a kind of derivations, (which on that
account may be considered as more recent,) so complete and
steady, that they may be brought under one point of view ; this
facilitates and accelerates so much the knowledge of the language,
that grammar cannot refuse to them a place, especially as the
analogies of this kind of formation of words are mostly grounded
in the analogy of inflections, and may even be regarded as a con
tinuation of the inflections 1.
3. This Section, however, is necessarily confined to verbs, sub
stantives, adjectives, and adverbs; the other parts of speech
belong to the primitive stock of the language, and have already
been partly investigated in other Sections. Derivation itself re
gards either, 1.) the terminations of words ; or 2.) their compo
sition.
119.Derivation by Terminations.
1. The annection of terminations was regulated in Greek by
two principles ; the endeavour to give similar terminations to
similar signif, and the wish to adapt that termination to the
1 We only give a general outline ; the filling up is left to individual study and
observation. Several distinct, but less extensive analogies have purposely been
omitted, that the review of the main points might not be too much encumbered.
202
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
radical word in the best manner possible. But the collision of

these principles tended to confuse the analogy in two ways :
1.) The same signif. is frequently allotted to several different
forms ; 2.) Terminations confined at first to particular forms of
radical words, (ex. gr. verbs'm i<a from a,6u from or, ov,) passed
also over to other radical words, whose form did no longer square
with them, (as iu from as,ou from a, &c.) whenever a certain
fixed signif. had been attached to several words of the same
termination.
I. Verbs.
2. Our attention here is chiefly directed to verbs derived from
nouns, (substantive and adjective.)
This derivation is most
commonly effected by the terminations,
aai, iu, ooi, tvu, a.Z,u,
aivai, uvco.
These terminations take the place of the final syllable of the
nomin., when the radical noun is of the first or second declension,
and, if the noun be of the third declension, whenever its nomin.
ends in a vowel, or a s preceded by a vowel, ex. gr. tiiaw nîu,
wtsôv 7rrEoftf, bauiiJ.x Sxv/jiccQcti, d\v>$ws dK-nStvai : in other words
of the third declension the verbal terminations take the place of
the or of the gen. ; ex. gr. xa\x% xoXaxeucu, w2g (irv^bs) itvooca.
Ob$. 1. The nomin. of the third declension in a, as, and it, which take a conso
nant in the gen., can only pass over into kindred verba/ terminations, (a and ( into
mitmif into <>,) ex.gr. Sxifuc Sttv/taZ," and Sxiifuci'y*, ixrit iXri'â : any other
termination, which is not congenial to that of the noun, is appended to the con
sonant of the gen., ex. gr. ipvyas Quyalivet, xfifiet, %nfiart%u.
3. With respect to the signif. of these terminations, we can
only refer to the common use of the language, and notice the
fundamental meanings of the majority of the verbs of each given
termination.
a.i'<w and i6u : these verbs are derived fronralmost all termi
nations, and denote chiefly the situation or the action of him,
whom the radical noun designates, ex. gr. xoi'gavoy, a ruler,
xoiqxviai, to rule; xoiwtos, a partner, xoiwveat, to take a
part, to share in ; o*ov\os, a slave, lovXiva, to be a slave,
to serve ; xo\a$;, a flatterer, xoXaxtvu, to flatter ; d\n$ris,
true, oK-rfytvu, to be true, speak the. truth ; (SxaiXtUs, /SasaCKivcu, &c. most commonly they are intrans., but some
times also trans, as <pl\os, a friend, tpiXiu, I love.
These two terminations are in general the most frequent
derivatives, and denote besides a great many relations,
DERIVATIONS.
293
which also are partly expressed by the following termina

tions, especially the practice of what the radical noun de
notes, ex. gr. woXe/xeTv, a&XEiv, noixnivta, yppivtiv, (povevetv,
/3<wXei/eiv, or what is most usually done with the object, which
the noun designates, ex. gr. ai\os, a flute, avXuv, to play
on the flute ; dyopd, a public assembly, dyopsveiv, to address
an assembly; lirwsveiv, to ride on horseback, &c. The
termination ecu, as the easiest of all, is mostly used in
compound derivations, as evrvxico, eviêipeco, o!xoSo/xe'<u,
lpyo\a$ew, fAvnoixaxiw, &c. ; and most verbs in ecu are
generally intrans.
b.ia> : These verbs come most naturally from nouns of the
first declension in a and -n, but pass also to others, and
express chiefly having a thing or quality, and performing
an action ; ex. gr. xo//.n, hair of the head, %o\ri, bile,
xo/xjtv, to let the hair grow long ; yoKav, to be bilious, or
irascible; X/wor, fatness, fat, Xi7rv, to be fat ; /3ori, a cla
mor, yios, grief, mourning,fiofiv, yogiv, toK/mh, boldness,
toX/a^v, to be bold. Hence, when any of these verbs is
or performing such an action on another; thw, honor,
trans., it denotes the applying of such a thing to another,
ri/jLpv riva, to honor any one1.See also below the verbs
denoting diseases, 5. 1.
c.oca, mostly from nouns of the second declension. These
verbs denote, 1.) making the object, to which they are
applied, the thing expressed by the radical word, hvXou,
to make one a slave, Irikou, to make known, (from lr,\os,
known;) 2.) converting into what the radical noun ex
presses, or imparting the qualities of that noun, by labor :
Xpvaoai, I gild; /aiXtow, I stain, or color with red, (/x/Xtoj-,
red-lead ;) nvpou, I set on fire ; roeyaca, I turn with a
lathe; 3.) providing with the thing expressed by the
1 It may be a matter of surprise here, and in similar instances, that the abstract
noun should be the parent of the verb ; but this frequently is the case, when the
subsl., as is very usual in all languages, is derived from an old simple verb, and then
forms a new verb, which renders the old one obsolete. This is evidently the case
with rm, rifai, riftiu : we may therefore presuppose it in others, as fa*, /. Ana
logy, at all events, requires us to derive, if there be no other reason, the fuller ter
mination from the lighter one ; though it may occasionally happen that such a
word as fain existed before, and that the simple word fab was derived from it
according to the analogy of others, which were exactly the reverse.
294
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
noun; oTe$x\ow, I crown ; irrsqiu, I furnish with wings,

(vrepbv,) arxvôoi, Icrucify, &c.
d.iZpi and i^wthe first termination is most naturally
used with words in a, n, as, &c. ; but for the sake of
euphony also with other terminations. Both terminations
comprise so many meanings, that they cannot be reduced
to particular classes, (ex. gr. Sixxû, xzip-z&t '?'i^> ix-^l^,
Sepify, Xaxriû, &c.) It may, however, be noticed that,
when these terminations serve to make verbs of the pro
per names of individuals and nations, they denote adopt
ing the manners, party, and language of those persons or
nations ; for instance, MnS/êiv, to have the sentiments
and opinions of a Mede, 'EXKmifav, to speak Greek;
Aa>gia;iv, to speak in the Doric dialect, 3>iKi3-wi'eiv, to
be of the party of Philippus : see also 5. 2.
e. aivw and vtu :this last termination always is derived
from adjectives, and denotes imparting the quality of the
adj., ex. gr. ^St/vsiv, to sweeten, atixvvmv, to make venerable,
revere. The adj., whose degrees of comparison in iuv,
iciros, seem to presuppose an old positive in vs, form their
derivative verbs after this positive, ex. gr. auayjios, (alo^/a/v,
from AI2XT2,)ulay^vu, and //.axgor, xxXhs,y.-nxvw,
xaWuw, &c. The verbs in aitu frequently have the
same signif., XEuxaivEiv, to whiten; xoiKxlmv, to hollow
out, &c. Yet several of these verbs are also neuter :
XaXswcei'vsiv, Si>(TXE/>av6iv, to be angry, &c. and sometimes
they are derived from subst., especially from those in tx.it,
(arif^x anyixlw, IsT/j-x Sti/âi'va/,) with various signif.
4. There is another peculiar way of making verbs of nouns, by
merely changing the terminations of the latter into a, in which
case the preceding syllable is, according to its consonant, strength
ened in the manner, in which we have seen pres. tenses strength
ened above 92.
Thus itoixiXos gives iroixiXKu, ayyihos iyytWw, xxSapos xxSalpw,
ixaha.xr>s pakatsau, tpxgjj.xxo)i (ftx.fiJ.%aau, n-iiKiyps jxeiXtaaco, nv^tros
w^taaai, %a.\s<nos y^Kivru, &c. The signif. is constantly derived
from the most general signif. of the radical noun.
5. To these must be added the following more limited classes
of derivative verbal forms :
1.) Desidcratives, verbs expressive of a desire or longing
DERIVATIONS.
295
for ; they are most commonly formed by changing the/wr.

(of the verb, the purport of which is desired,) auinto a
pres. tense, <tejo>, yeKetaslw, J long to have a lauyh, should
like to laugh, zsoteixwatito, I wish for war, long to fight, &c.
There is another form of desi/leratives in au or iiu,
which properly comes from substantives, ex. gr. Savarfiv,
to wish for death, desire to die; arqamyifv, to wish for
a military command, desire to command an army. But
they are also made of verbs, which are previously con
verted into subst., ex. gr. aivsTaSai, (wvnTris,) wmrifiv, to
desire to buy, long to become a buyer ; tikaiu, (xXa5<nr,)
xXavaipv, to wish to weep.
This form of verbs very naturally passed into a kind of
imitatives, ex. gr. rvpanngLv, to play the tyrant; but it is
very improper to rank verbs, denoting diseases, in the same
class, as oip&aX/wi^y, vlspigLv, -^wpplv, &c. which rather belong
above to 3. b.
2.) Frequentatives in <u, ex. gr. ârraÊiv, (from îVreiv,) to
toss about, MED. to toss one's self about, be uneasy ;
<TTEvseeiv, (from (tte'veiv,) to groan very much; alruv, to
ask earnestly, alri&v, to beg alms ; eweiv, to creep, wi/eiv,
to crawl slowly.
3.) Inchoatives in axu, 112. 10. Obs. 6.
II.Substantives.
6. We begin by those substantives
A. which are directly derived from verbs. We must, how
ever, previously observe in general,
1.) That the terminations and inflections, especially those
beginning with a a, conform themselves to the analogy
ofthe/uf. 1. ; those with y. and t to that of the perf. pass. ;
and those with a vowel to the analogy of the perf. 2. but
that this conformity is a necessary one, only in instances
grounded in the fundamental rules of the language, ex. gr.
of the subst. in an with the fit. in au, in l^rdûiau
<tais, Tgifiu, Ti\J/&i rpi^ts, of those in ixbs, hqc, tm, with
the 1 pers. perf. pass, in wXexu, wiis'kiyy.ai, n'hiyy.ai, &c.
In all the others, where the rules are less steady, there is
a frequent, but not necessary conformity between the ter
minations of verbs and of subst. derived from them, of
which the principal varieties are stated in this Section.
296
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
2.) That the terminations beginning with a vowel, (as

~os,
evs,) are formed from verbs contracted in ta> and da in such
a manner, that the e and a are dropped =, excepting, how
ever, the smaller verbs, which cannot lose their vowel,
since it belongs to the root, but can only change it, Qiu,
pov.)
Obs. 2. A <r is inserted before r and ft in the per/, and aor. 1 pass, in words de
rived from verb), whose characteristic letter is a lingual, excepting a few Poetical
forms, ( 102. Oil. 1. Snufuvris.) But those derived from what are called verba
pura, sometimes insert the r, and sometimes not, without any regard to the inflec
tion of the verb. When there is no r inserted, we may on the whole conform in
all terminations to the analogy of the //., r-r. gr. in Siurris, >i^, HZ/ia, the vowel
is long as in Sixrofuu, Sir*, yet with this limitation, that the terminations beginning
with c and t, sometimas shorten the long vowel, especially when the verb itself
shortens it in the aor. 1 pass. See above, 6 95. Obt. 4. with the Sole, and below,
Obs. 5. and 7. But those beginning with ft conform in this respect almost generally
to the analogy of thefut. 1 . neglecting even the per/, pass. ; see 1. a.
7. The following terminations chiefly denote the action, or
effect of the verb,
/U.0S-, tv.7i, imoc, ms, due., 7) or a, os masc, os neut.
a.ixos, y.% or ixri,
gen. ros. These terminations may
be compared with the perf. pass., but those in pis, when
there is a vowel preceding in the radical word, take gene
rally the a, whilst the other two do not always take it,
even when the perf. pass, has the a, and those, which do
not take the a, retain the long vowel of the fut, even when
it is shortened in the perf. pass, (yet so that some are
fluctuating between r> and e,) ex. gr. Ti&n/xi, (teêi/aou,)
StofMis, î(x.a Or hrifAa, Se'&i, (Xe'Je/xsn,) SiafAos, oVâ,
SiocSrjpia, yiyvaioxoj, (eyvwoy/ai,)yycl/i^nûoj, (XtKvft.a.i^)
"Kvixa. With respect to signif., the nouns in mos properly
denote the real abstractum, ex. gr. TtaKKta na'kfv.os, the act
of brandishing ; o'SJgojtAai olv^ls, the act of wailing ;
olxTEipoj olxTiqixos, commiseration ; Xuû, (\6%ai)') \vy(A.os,
sobbing; miu, asia/jibs, trembling. The termination px,
on the contrary, rather denotes the effect of the verb as a
concreium, and even the object itself, so that it corresponds
It follows from the Note to p. 293, that there must be some reason for supposing
that the fuller sounding verb was in existence before the subst. It is moreover
obvious that, when the fuller verbal form is merely a lengthened old form, it is per
fectly indifferent whether we say, for instance, that KTrnn comes from xtum, and
xTwxiw again from the latter, or whether, for brevity's sake, we rather consider in all
such cases the usual verbal form as a radical form.
DERIVATIONS.
297
most to the neut. part. perf. pass., ex. gr. upay^x, what
has been done, deed, business; /xl/x-niLx, imitation, that is
resemblance ; airelpu, arnkf^x, what has been sown, seed,
&c. The termination y.fi fluctuates between both ; ex. gr.
IM-hfx,a, memory, eiti<srriy.-n, knowledge, rif^ri, honorartyix.ri,
a point, yga/u/x.'H, a line, which differ only in collateral
meanings from ariy(Ax, mark, y^dixixa, a written character,
a writing.
Obs. 3. Some words in pis of the primitive language have merely the vowel before
the /t without the t, ex. gr. hi/tis,fear, x^vui;,frost, cold ;or they have a 3 instead
of the ff, ex. gr. ifxtSptos, dancing, from lf%U/icu, pvxviSpos, xXetuSftof, ftrivfifios, &c.
/35,it, (properly, stepping, from /Ww,) hence itep ; even after the p, as rxa^/ii;,
from rxu'itaj3.
Oil. 4. The above differences in point of signif. must be noticed as a basis ; but
always remembering, that not only in Poetry, but also in popular language, the
meanings of words in the abstract and concrete frequently run one into the other.
Thus for instance, Xx^f's, (compare 23. Obi.') xt*'f*'f, do not signify casting lots,
delivering oracles, but lot, oracle, whilst fîvi/ta signifies mind, intelligence, inclina
tion.
b.ais ma. denote the real absfractum of the verb with very
little deviation ; ex. gr. pi/Xmii, act of imitating ; wpafys,
acting, action ; o-x^n, &c; Soxi/xWa, trial, examination;
bva'ta, sacrifice; sônXiala, &c. In some compositions
ma. denotes the action rather as a permanent property ;
ex. gr. o'|y/3Xe\J/ia:, vLayjfya, which forms imperceptibly
pass into similar ones derived from nouns, which see below
at 10. 4.
OA*. 5. Some forms, which belong hither, deviate from the analogy of the/ut. in
point of quantity, as a'iprif, yittcts, Siffi;, tivis, Xvats, Qvvis, %utts, Svriec. See 06s. 2.
Compare the verbs in the list of Anomalous Verbs, respecting the short syllable in
Tt'tris and tpStns.
The following have not such a distinctly marked signif, but the
idea of an abstract generally predominates in them :
c.n and a, mostly oxytona, ex. gr. sv%-h, prayer or peti
tion, from
eQayri, slaying, slaughtering, from
otpdrTu,SiSa^j teaching, doctrine, from hSiaxu
X<*?<*, joy, from %aipu,and with a change of the vowel

into o, (in the way of the perf. 2.) to/aw from riixvu, <popx
from (pSelpw, aoiM from dtiica, &c. Some of them take a
redupl. corresponding to the Attic redupl. of the perf. and
8 Compare also the derivations from in, C/ti"Spu, step, pace, and trS/ili, (pro
perly walk, way, hence) narrow neck of land between two seas, isthmus ; and from au,
to breathe, irSfix, difficulty of breathing, asthma.
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
constantly having an u in the second syllable, ex. gr.
aycoyh from aya>, eXoiS?) from eSu, (soViSa,) oxw%) from t%oi,
compare the Note to p. 242.
Some are paroxytona, as fiXifin, damage, from fik&vrco,
fSKifiu,
battle, from fiix^fii vixn, victory, from
vixw. To this class belong also the words in -', which
are formed only from verbs in cuto by changing eu into ei,
ex. gr. -rcailtix from irxtlSeuco. They always have a, and
consequently the acute accent on ei.
Obs. 6. With respect to the accentuation of all nouns in w, compare first 3-1.
06*. II. 3. and keep to the following rule :
The fern, of oxytone adj. in is, ex. gr. His, tiSux, are properispomena.
].) The abstracta of arf/. in ns, ex.gr. i?.i>nz, (see 10. a.) jSaiiStut from /3>g3J;,
and 2.) The /em. of noum mmc. in tut, fx. ^r. I'tstm, priestess, (see 12. 3. d.) are
proparoxytona ; and the just-mentioned abstracta of uerii in are paroxytona.
d.or masc. By far the greatest number of these words
have in the principal syllable an a, either naturally or
changed from an s, ex. gr. xporos, clapping of the hands,
from xporia ; (photos, envy, from tpSroviw, \6yos, speech, from
Xeyai, poos, (povs,) from pso*,yet also 'i\eyyj>s, refutation,
from tKiyyâi, tvhos from ruitru, itikos from itaKXco, &c.
To these may be added the subst. in ros, which com
monly are oxytona, ex. gr. a/xmros, harvest-time, xojkvtos,
wailing, partly with some little alteration as vtros, rain,
from voi, wotyETor, ice, from wftyvuiu. The accent is drawn
back;, for instance, in filoros, life; kotos, drink, (from
irtvw, irino/xxi .)
e.os, neut. ex. gr. to xSjSor, care, from x7)o&;, \i%os, lot, from
\atyyjivoj, zsgayos the same as wpayiâ, &c. These verbal
nouns never have an o in the principal syllable ; hence
to ysvor, offspring, but h yovos, generation.
8. The subject of the verb, as man, is denoted by the termina
tions
a.r*ir, (gen. ov.) Tng, rap. The termination rns after the first
decl. is the most common, and the words are in part oxytona,
and in part paroxytona, ex. gr. dSXviTws, athlete, wrestler,
from a&X.Ea) : îz^nrris, disciple, scholar, from /ao&eiv, Starris,
spectator, from bedo/tai, Xixsto-Trir from 5W<y, x/>irr from
xiv(u, &c. but xi/#Egv7)TW, pilot, from xvfiBpvdai, irXdo-TTts
(from IthtXTTU, WwXaiT/ASEi,) \vid<STi\s, ^d\Trns, &c.
rr/g and Tug are more uncommon forms, which frequently
DERIVATIONS.
299
occur in the dialects and in poetry along with rris, but are
also in use in several words of the popular language, ex. gr.
auriip, deliverer, p-hrup, orator, (from eaciw and 'PEft,)
iaTijtTwp, &C.
Obs. 7- Some shorten the vowel before the termination, (Obs. 2. b.) er. gr. WuJStiis, Siirrif, Sim, aSfim, particularly derivatives compounded with tubst. and
hy'iopou, as oirtyirnsj "titUuffnytrM or Mowratytrris.
b.eus, ex, (jr. ypatpeus, writer, (pSoptus, destroyer, seducer.
Obn. 8. The terminations under a and b have also been partly given to things,
which may be considered as agents or subjects of an action ; ex. gr. &r,rm, a gale of
wind, WtMrni, upper tunic, r^wrri^, alorm, %uarrYt, girdle, \;j.',-> dibhic, bolt, piston.
The use of masc. forms in connection with fern, ones, is a syntactic licence, see
123. Note.
c.or, mostly in compounds only, ex. (jr. %uy%q>or, painter,
sraTgoxTovor, parricide, &c. ; but rpatyos, (b, r],') one who
educates, aoiSbr, singer, and some old words like ag%ar,
leader, (Horn.)
d.ns and as, gen. ov, only in a few compounds, as /xygoTtw'kris, TQiriqdgxps, (and -or,) ogvi&o&r/gas'.
9. The names of tools and other implements, necessary to the
performance of an action or operation, are derived from the pre
ceding denominations of subjects or agents, or at least presuppose
them in point of form ; especially
rripiav, rpov, and rpx, from the termination rwg, ex. gr.
Xovrwqtov, bathing-tub, Kovrpov, water for bathing, a bath,
axgoarrigiov, hall ofaudience, lecturer's room, i,uarqx,cumjcomb, hpyjharpct, place for dancing.
jibv, from the termination sus, ex. gr. xot/gslbv, barber's shop,
from xotigsir, barber, and this from Kilpeiv, to shear, shave,
rpo<pe7ov, recompense for educating, from rpo$sus.
10. Another principal species of subst. are
B. Those derived from ad,}, and attributes, and chiefly for
the mere purpose of expressing the abstractum of the
adj. Of this kind are the terminations
a.ia, constantly with 5, (Ion. n,) ex. gr. aofyos, wise, oofyloc,
wisdom, and xaxi'g, SsiXi'*, &c. Also ^Xctx/a from @k%%, euSaiptovia: from sv^xiixuv, ovos, ayog/24, from it-hp, avSgor, WEvi'a
from Trims, oiror, a/xaS/a from a/xa&flr, lis. The adj. in vis
4 The reading itlptlx, though frequently occurring in our editions, is incorrect, as
appears from the above analogy.
300
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
commonly make their subst. in six, as will be seen pre
sently.
Compound adj. in ros very generally change the t into
a in the subst. ex. gr. dSavxTos dStzvaoltz, SiWewror Suo-
From the termination la come the subst. in

e<8 and out
through contraction ; but the a then becomes short, and
the accent is transferred to the antepenultima, eia from
adj. in ns, bos, for instance akv^tiix from atoSfis, oix from
adj. in ovs, as avoia from avot/r.
Ohs. 9. The abstracta of some arf/. arc also merely in n or a, (yet always paroxylona,) ex. gr. from neurit, (fern, ton,) ax for xaxia, from
(/
i'^â, enmity. Hence from the adj. in its, ex.gr. erics, curies, cunts, tubsl. n crla,
law, duly, ilia, worthiness, ctiria, cause, blame, which forms happen not to differ from
thefern, of the adj.
b. ms, gen. mros, fern. ex. gr. looms, equality, from tons,
nayiir-ns from na.yjis. They are all paroxytona with very
few exceptions, as tayjims, SViottis-, gen. r>ros.
C.o-uvT), ex. gr. o'lxaioovvn, tiovkeavvn, mostly from adj. in
m, ovos, ex. gr. awtypoovvn from autppwv, ovos. Those which
have a short vowel in the fourth syllable backwards, take,
as is the case with the comparatives in rspos, an u in the
antepenultima, but excepting hgwauvn, priesthood, there
are only a very few words of this kind of the later lan
guage in Demosthenes ; see Fischer ad JVeller. 2, 40.
d.os, neuter, especially from adj. in us, ex. gr. fZdSos, depth,
from fiaSus, ra.%os from rx%\i% : hence also from those
adj., whose degrees of comparison seem to presuppose such
an old positive, ex. gr. to xdWos, oiXeyris, ftvhxos, from xakos,
(xaWiwv,) x'to%pos, (alVjîdTor,) fjt.tx.Kpos, (iawxiotos.)
11. With respect to subst.
C. derived from other subst.
we must first notice some terminations formed after the analogy
of verbal nouns, thus
1.) The masc. in ms, (of which those in Ims all have f,)
often denote an individual, simply relatively to his occu
pation, which is expressed by the radical word ; ex. gr.
troXims, citizen, from wokis, city ; ovXlms, armed soldier,
from owXov : \iticbms, horseman, from "mnos, ytvaiSms,
DERIVATIONS.
301
bearded young man, from yimov, (Qvklrns, one of the same

tribe, from tyvk-h : and (according to 63. Obs. 7.) they
are even used as adj.
2.) Those in eus have the same signif., ex. gr. lepevs, priest,
from legov, temple, (or from ra Uqx, sacred things, victims,)
yqnttis, oKievs, fisherman, from ysXnos, net, aKs, sea, yt-af/.&c.
12. The rest may be stated under the following classifications :
1. ) Those, which denote a place consecrated to a divinity,
with the terminations iov, aiov, eiov, ex. gr. Aiovi/o-iov, 'Acpoo5i'<T(ov, "Hpaiov, Moycralbv, 'HfaxXsiov*.
2.) Those, which denote a place, where certain objects are
in great numbers, are terminated in an, gen. Zvos, (masc.)
and una, ex. gr. itîctKuv, vineyard, poluma, rose-shrub
bery, avSgeiv, the men's apartment, ixs\sruv, aplace ofstudy,
or practice.
3.) Female, or feminine denominations,
a.rapx, Tgict, and Tgir, gen. rp&os, properly from masc. in
and rap, but also from some in -rns, ex. gr. aureipoc,
female deliverer, op%-h<jrpix, female dancer, aiXnrqls,female
player on the flute, (o^xnarw, avX-nr-ns.)
b.is, gen. iSoy, is the most common termination for deriva
tives from masc. in ms and as of the first declension ; for
instance, ârsarfis, master, Isanons, mistress, ixims Ixins,
2xi)Sir 2xoSir, ix.u%oitu\v\s fjLu%oiciu\ts, (female perfumer.)
c.ana, chiefly from masc. in m, ex. gr. Siqaircov, (ovtoj-,)
bepazsaiva, maid-servant, \iuiv, (ovros,) \sxivx, lioness, tsxtwv, (ovos-,) rixrxiva, workwoman, Aaxuv, (aiyor,) Adxxiva,
likewise from some in or, ex. gr. Sec* Sixwx.
d.sia from two masc. in ibs, ex. gr. Uqsix, priestess, from
Uptvs, (&xaiknx, queen.
e.aax from several terminations of the third declension,
ex. gr. ftctaikiaax from -tvs, nivniaa from -vis, avaicx from
'iix\, Kl\tui7x, qyaax, {Att. Qqxrrx,) from KAi and
gipôr pp%.
[* Where the forms in tut and in seem to be convertible, we are to understand
that the paragogic form in iw is Attic, and the hypocoristic form in In is Hellenistic,
the former more ancient, the latter more recent ; but Attic Poets, guided by metri
cal considerations, often in this instance, and in instances ot'ftm. noum in uo, use the
/tgpocoriitic forms iu In and In.E.H.B.]
302
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
4.) Gentilia, denominations derived from one's native coun
try. These are A. masc. H.fem. and C. possessive {adj.')
A. Masc. or for Males.

ios, and ofthe first declensiona7as, ex. gr. Kog/v&ios-, Tgoir|wor, 'Aoovpios, Bvâvrtos, (from Bvâvnov,) 'ASwaior, Aaqiaactios, partly with some alteration in the radical word, ex.gr.
from fAtXnros, MtXriaw, and from names in ovs, ovvros,
not only 'Owouvnos, but even from 'A/j.a$ovs, \ioiis, 'Av*yvpovs,'A/AaSouatos, <$>\id<rios, 'Avayugaaios.
mis, avis, Tvos, used only of towns and countries out of
Greece, ex. gr. Kuîxnvby, ISagSiocvbr, Ion. SapSwivos-, from
Papists, ,Aaiavls, Tagavrivof.
irns, vrrns, Urns 6, turns, ex. gr. ,A0Sr>pirvis, jteppovnolms,
Aiytvnrvs from Atyi)ia,TlisaTr\s, "Lzsapnirns, (Ion. nirwr,)
SixeXi&ztw, or in
si/s, ex. gr. AioXevs, <t>uxeus, (inhabitant of Phocis,') Atupteus,

MeyagEuf from Miyapa, MavTivcir from Mayr/vcia, IlXarxtevs from IIXizTaiaEi, Qcoxulevs, better <f>a>x.aevs, (Phoctean,) from wx.aix, E.vI3oeus from EJ//3oia.
B. Feminine, or for Females.Besides the usual conver
sion of the termination os into w and a, ex. gr. 'Aawh,
'A&rjvaia, they either merely change, (according to 3. b.)
the vis of the masc. termination into if, ex. gr. Swag-nanr,
-- 2u/3agiVif, &c. or they annex is- and as, according to
euphony, to the radical name itself, ex. gr. Alohls, Awpls,
Miya^ls, <$>a/xls, O&'xair, AnXias, (from AiiXor,) and all
these names may be applied to a female or the country,
supplying either yvvh or yri.
C. Possessive gentilia, (x-rriTixa,) is the denomination of
adj. immediately derived from the gentilia, denoting only
a reference to them, but chiefly possession. They almost
all end in xls, see below 13. c, ex. gr. Hufixprnxhs, KogivSiaxos, AaxEoai/xomcdr.
* The rule that the x in the gentilia in inn is long, must therefore not be ex
tended to instances, in which there is no derivation from any radical word, aa in
2{,Tjf, Sarmattan, (Lat. Sarmaia.)
DERIVATIONS.
303
5.) Patronymics, expressing the name of a family, or descent

(origin) of an individual.
A. for males. The terminations
i'5V, aSns, tains, gen. on, are the most usual forms, and
tins may be considered as the principal, being applicable
to most final syllables, whilst dlys is used only for names
of the first declension in as and ns, ex. gr. Kexgo-vJ- Kexgom'oWj Kgovoy KgoviJior, 'AXxaios 'AXxai'oW, Hopias BopEccSns,
'lititorris'l'Knora.'S-ns. The names in ior probably gave rise
to the termination tilys for euphony's sake, ex. gr. Mevoi'nos MsvomaoW But the pleasing rhythm of these termi
nations, (<j u,) and especially their fitness for the hexametre, caused this form to be used for a variety of names,
which had a long syllable before the patronymic termina
tion, ex. gr. ^>E^riridlrts from Qipns, yros, TeXctpuwyiaSVir,
'A&zvTiaSnr, &c. The dramatic iambus on the other hand
preferred the common form, which is likewise applied to
such names, ex. gr. YlaWavrllrts, 'AXxâtmilris, HeXowtlns,
' tm, gen. uws, (seldom ovor,) is a more uncommon colla
teral form, but barely with Poets, ex. gr. Kgov/wv, 'Axroplm.
The quantity of the is regulated by the metre.
Ob>. 10. The patronymics of names in tt* and xX?; have originally itivs, and hence
in the common language by contraction tUns, ex. gr. n*xi!lr,s, TMivs, 'H;*Ai/J>w,
from nr,\iit, Ti/Siiif, 'HjaxxSt : and it is the same with the termination in, ex. gr.
nr,\t!uv. The Dorians retained the resolved form, ex. gr. Kpf&iti* K;9sftcf. The
Ionic declension lis, gen. r,ts, gives the Epic form Ur.}.nu.ir.;, &c.
Ob*. 11. The is contracted in the same way with the i in n*,tiins, Autc'Jik, from
HctvSaos, (nai>9/f,) Ar,TU, its, (JLa/Ofla.)
Obi. 12. It frequently happens that the very name of an individual bears a patro
nymic form; ex. gr. VtXriitns,
Aii/xaA.i'>, and sometimes the same name has
a double form, as ESpum and Ebfvrim. This induced the Epic Poets to presuppose
such a form, even of names, which commonly do not end in m, that they might
derive from them a patronymic suited to the metre, ex. gr. from 'Azfirot'Anjmw
i<S, from 'litnns'JartTmlins. But from the same motive they likewise omitted
the hi in the patronymic! of names, which actually had this syllable, ex, gr. AtvxxB. for females. The patronymics of females correspond on the
whole to those of males ; tins and oilns give forfemales \s and as,
ex. gr. TavraXiy, ' ArKavris, toias : ei'oVjy gives n\s, ex. gr. Nnfnis, and luvtaivn and ivn, ex. gr. 'Axpiaiuv-n, 'AS^marlvn.
6.) Diminutives, of which
a. toy, (to,) is the principal termination, ex. gr. waiS/ov, little
301
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
boy, ouiAxTiw, little body, pxxtov from to pixvs, &c. To

render the diminutive still less, this termination often takes
an additional syllable, particularly in the following way :
iSiov, aiov, vWiov, vSptov, vipiov, ex. gr. irivxxlo'iov from ir'mx%,
waiSagiov from Texts, fjisiqa.xvWiov from /AsTga^, ixs\u$piw from
to iîiKoi, ^tuufiov from <2ov.
Obi. 13. Of these diminutives, all those, which have four or more syllables,
(to which contracted words, like tx'iim for /W5/, also belong,) and most trisyllabics with three short syllables, are proparoxytona ; the other trisyllabics, which
make a dactyl, are paroxytona, with but few exceptions.
Obi. 14. The termination Urn is contracted with several vowels, as fitiim, y*Sw,
properly y&m : withuand with i it becomes f ;mdr. ex.gr. l-ûSm, Sim, from !x$ht,
vi, luxritm from l/tarm. Hence the first i of radical words in it, gen. tmi, is long ;
ex, gr. fnruiat, (from pirn,) for the reading Tim or ulm in several of such words is
doubtful. The a. in the termination a;i is always short.
Obi. 15. Many words in iet have completely lost the power of a diminutive; ex.gr.
Bf!n, animal, from
.1.
book, from >.
b. loxor, laxri, ex. gr. orifyxvlaxos, itxiSlaxri.
c. is. gen. iSor and rSor, ex. jrr. SEgawaivir, (from Sepxnxivx,')
nn/axis, (from h nlvxÊ,,) axpivls, tSos, from aypivos, &c. The
termination i'Siov above is the intensive of it.
d. iôr, (rather Doric,) ex. gr.'EpuruXoi from "Egtyr.
e. iSti/f, merely of the young ones ofanimals : acrtHevs from
dsros.
Some peculiar diminutives, like rooXi'xvr, from zsoXn, tsAxxm
from zs&os, must be learned by practice.
Ill.Adjectives.
13. Most adj., which clearly bear the stamp of an analogous
derivation, end in or, but the letter preceding this termination
must be carefully attended to.
a. ios is one of the most general terminations, which is
directly derived from mostly primitive nouns, and denotes
what belongs to the object, concerns it, comes from it,
&c. ex. gr. ovqxnos, aorxynoi, ^s'vior, (pdvior, lentigos, &C.
This termination is also particularly used, when a new adj.
is derived from an adj. in or, ex. gr. eXtvSzpos, free, eXsoSiptor, liberal, becoming a free man ; xa&agbr, clean, xx$iptos, cleanly.
Obi. 1C. When the termination ; is appended to a word having a <r, this is some
times changed into r, ex.gr. 'uuuri$, gear, Imvaw, annual, ix*,, orro;*ixov<rta;t See
also above, 12,4. A.
DERIVATION.
.305
By connecting the t of ins with a preceding vowel, it gives the

terminations
aios, eios, oior, uos,
ex. gr. aryopouos from ayopa, 'A&nvasior from 'A&jyai, aiSoibr,
wiior, from aiSwr, oor, iwr, oor, oTrovotTos from ctwovS'm, (in
stead of <T7rovSii'or.) Practice, however, sometimes gave
to one of these terminations a peculiar and more expres
sive meaning, ex. gr. zs&rpios, what concerns one's fore
fathers, ancestors, or country in general; ssccrpwos decidedly
what concerns the father, paternal, to which latter form
fjirtrpuos, aanrisibos, were made to correspond. But the
termination -tios is particularly used in adj. derived from
words denoting particular species or individuals of living
beings, ex. gr. avSgaJicior, human, Xvmios, ofor belonging to
a wolf, iv'SqiTos, yvvatxsXos, &c. ; it is especially the most
usual form for adj. derived from personal names, when
ever the last syllable of the latter admits of it, ex. gr.
'0//.jgsior, 'Knixoupetos, TluSayoquos, TLupmlbeios, &c.
b. eoj denotes chiefly the material, of which something is
made ; it is contracted into our, see above, 60. 6.
c. xos has the same latitude of meaning as ir>s, and extends
also to verbs, (ex. gr. yqaQixos, axixor, belonging to,
skilled in painting, qualified to govern.) The most usual
form is ixos, and when at comes before, it generally
becomes a'ixos, ex. gr. rpo%a.'ixbs from rpoyjiios. Words
in us give uxor, ex. gr. SriKuxbs, but terminations, which
have an i before, give axos, ex. gr. 'OXuv-vla, l\tos,
'OXufAiciaxos, 'l\iaxos, aTiovtiios o-flrovSsiaxoV. This termi
nation taxos, on account of its more sonorous rhythm, is
frequently preferred to the simple termination txos,
though it properly is a double derivation, ex. gr. Koptvbos
Koplvbtos, a Corinthian, KoptvSizxos, (in Latin Corinthiacus.) Compare above the termination iHds.
d. vof, an old pass, termination, (like rios, to,) whence
Seio.c, terrible, dreadful, oz/jlvos, (from aiô(x.ni,) venerable,
arvyws, hateful, &c.
ivos as a proparox. almost constantly denotes a material,
ex. gr. Iji/Xivor, wooden, made of wood, Tu'Sivor, &c. There
is one exception in d^puTmos, which has the same latitude
V
3(16
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
of meaning as avbguireios. As oxytonon, it gives adj. of
time, ex. gr. ^/XEgivbr, yfieanos, (of yesterday, from
arsSrvoy and the words in eivhs denote abundance, complete
ness, OTsSivor, (viz. all a plain evenfield,) quite level, bpuws,
mountainous, Et/Sieivor, quite serene, &c.
Ivor, anoi,mos, are only gentilia, see above 12. 4. A.
e.Xor, an old act. termination, whence ohXoj-, afraid, who
fears, (timid,) enirayKos, (see . 114. Note on XeXw/uuzi,) who
frightens others, (formidable.) But the lengthened ter
minations n\bs and uXos are the most usual ; they denote
habit and custom, diracTn'Kbs, deceitful, aiAaproiX'os, one
addicted to evil, &c.
f. iptor. Adj. of this termination are almost all verbal
ones denoting act. and pass, properties, qualities, orfitness ;
the termination is annexed according to different analogies,
ex. gr. ygnoifMs from j^gaopcai, useful, Tpo$ii*.os, nutritious,
nourishing, bxnalai/xor, deadly, "botihos, potable. This ter
mination is also sometimes lengthened : aTos, ex. gr. virog. gor, spIs, npos, denote mostly, filled with, ex. gr. olxrpbs,
mournful, <p&ovEgbr, envious, voawpbs and voo-Egw, sickly.
h. aXios has pretty nearly the same signif., ex. gr. Sotppaikios
(from Suppos,) pcoiMtXlos, Seii/,aXeos, ^cv(>x\ios, &C.
i. te'oj and rls, see 102.
14. The remaining terminations of adj. are :

a. en. svror, with , v, or o preceding, denote fulness, plenty ;
%ai's(f, graceful, vXweis, woody, shaded tvith woods, zsvpoeis,
fiery, full offire.
That those in r,eis and oejj admit of a contraction, has
been stated above, 41. Obs. 5. and 62. Obs. 3.
b. ns, is, gen. ovs, acts as a derivative only in compounds,
( 121.) and produces the singular termination dirts,
>$ts, gen. ovswith changed accent from osi'SW, (from
e?$os,form, shape, kind,) ex. gr. atynxu&ns, wasp-like, yvvcuxdfas, woman-like, effeminate. But they usually denote
quantity, abundance, and frequently in a sneering, criti1 With respect to quantity, there are but few instances in poetry, where mt is
employed as long, as iru^nis is in Homer.
DERIVATIONADVERBS.
307
cising sense, ex. gr. \J/a/u.puSr)r, ai/xseT&)oV,y, iXvuSns, full of

sand, blood, mud ; sandy, bloody, muddy.
c. [t.m, gen. ovor. Verbal adj. after the analogy of the
subst. in /xa and derived from the latter, mostly denote the
act. property belonging to the verb, ex. gr. vornxuv from
voeTV, intelligent, sensible, Bokvnpdyix.aiy from taoKus and
apxynot or apdrrvv, engaging in a variety of affairs ; Imi\rtaiAm, forgetful.
Lastly, there is a great number of adj. obtained merely by
composition, as we shall state in the following Sections:
IV.Adverbs.
15. Independently of the simple way of forming adverbs by
changing the declinable final syllable of adj. into cos, as stated
115. there are the following terminations of adverbs:
a. ow. These are all verbals, denoting the manner of the
action of the verb, from tvhich they come ; the termination is
annexed partly in the same way as rios, ros, yet with a ne
cessary change of the characteristic of the verb, and never
with a a, ex. gr. ovXKrif&m, taking all together, viz. sum
marily, on the whole; xgt}/3ojv, secretly, /3a'Sv, step by
step, faltim, licentiously, without restraint, (from anVi//.i,
avEToy :) partly in the shape of dim appended to the radical
word with the change of the vowel ; ex. gr. owopdSm,
scattered, zsporpondSriv, ((peyyEiv,) to flee with backs turned
to the enemy, without looking back, &c.
b. Sov, tiSov, mostly come from subst. and refer chiefly to
the manner and outward shape ; ex. gr. iysXrôv, by herds
or flocks, fiorqvtiov, in bunches like grapes, zyXivSnTov, (from
wXiv&os-,) laid in the form of tiles, xvimlov, like a dog.
When they are verbals, their import is the same as of the
adverbs in Snv, ex. gr. avstpavSov, openly, manifestly, in sight
of thepeople.
c. i or ei*. These denote a circumstance connected with
the action mentioned in the sentence or proposition. The
verbals in particular end in
* This double pronunciation was regulated by euphony, and in poetry perhaps
also by the metre, since i may likewise be used as short. In our editions it is regu
lated by the MSS., or influenced by the number of examples.
X3
303
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
ti or tsi, which are appended in the same manner as to?,

ex. gr. ovo/Aitari, by name, (ex. gr. to call one up by name,)
iyp-nyopri, watchfully, especially when compounded with a
negation and other meanings, ex. gr. dyeXxari, without
laughing, tintpurl, without sweat, labor, d^x^-nni, without
fighting, dx-npunn) or ti, without a proclamation by a
herald. It is hence and from what has been stated above,
3. d. of the verbs in
that adverbs in isrt denote the
ways, manners, and language of a nation, class ofpeople,
or an individual, ex. gr. 'EWwtar], in the Greek fashion,
in Greek, yvvxtxiar], in the manner of women; andavfyxxgroSiim, /3oi'<TTi, &c.
Adverbs made of subst. have merely i or e! in the place of the
declinable termination; thus in exovti, voluntarily, dvxrti, without
injury, from ), the t belongs to the radical noun. Most adverbs
of this kind are compounds, ex. gr. wav&w/xEi, as if it were as a
tvhole nation, altogether, in a body, xvtowxei, (from an old de
clension, vbi;, xyj)
very night, a/xajÊi, without a contest,
airoyêipt, with one's own hands, a/xia&l, gratis, without compensa
tion, vwoivi, (from the negation vn, 120. Obs. 12.) with im
punity, &c.
d. %, an uncommon form, which generally attaches itself
to palatals, and takes an adverbial signif. ; ex. gr. vapii,
promiscuously, confusedly, itot%xKKa%, alternately, oxXi,
(from oxKiû,) with bent knees, squatting, 6&a, with the
teeth, (from oSoi/j.)
120.Derivation by Composition.
1. The first part of any compound word is a noun, verb, or
indeclinable word.
2. When the first word is a noun, its declinable termination is
generally changed into an o, which, however, is usually elided,
whenever the second word begins with a vowel ; ex. gr.
XoyoTtoibs, <na.tSoT%l$%s, GU\xxroû\a.% 'lyûaTtuXw; (from
i/or,) hxoyqxfot, (from S/xn,)
voiAxqx**, (from vofxos and a%%w,) ^^xyuyor, (from ayco
dycoyh,) HxyjQx, (from xccxis, sîf.)
But in most instances, where the noun ends in either v or i, there
is no o assumed ; for instance,
e<5$i/Sixof, woXvQxyor, noXinopôs, (from euSus, vokiis, woXir,)
DERIVATION BY COMPOSITION.
309
the same after ov and acu, ex. gr.

fioutyop0os, vav/xay^lx, (from fiovs, vaur,)
and frequently also after v, ex. gr.
lxOs<x.yypX'ia, itxsX.a/A'ffEwXoy, (from iîkas, avos,) tiaîyos, (from
mas, mavros.)
Obs. 1. The t sometimes remains before vowels, especially such, of which It may
be supposed, (according to 6. Obs. 3.) that they had the digamma in the old lan
guage ; far. gr. psmouoît, fitieuxns, ayetSotfyef. But in the compound! with igyot or
EPl'n, the a is usually contracted with the < : tnfiieugySi, \ursvtyit.
Obt. 2. The comes from the Attic, or the contracted declensions ; ex. gr. nmift,
(from nai;.) c^tuxo/ios, (from o^tlsj gen. oîus,') xgtufoiyesi (from xgiecs, gen. etai, ut.) In
all the compounds of yn, earth, it becomes yut, ex. gr. ytnygeifas, instead of ym*.
from the old form I\AA, (sec $ 27. Obs. 10.)
Obt. 3. Some primitive noun* in px, gen. arts, frequently simply change their a
into a, or drop it altogether ; ex. gr. aiporaynt, rrûakyia, from aiâ.. vrofitt.
Obs. 4. In some compositions, especially in Poetical ones, the form of the dat. sing.
or dat. pi., is taken into the compound word ; ex. gr. crtitfrveut, >vxtixI(k, yxTî/iafyet,
l[>inifto;, (from eôs, isf.) vecvfKroga;, ly%tffif*aitf.This latter form is frequently
shortened into if, (from it, gen. if,) ex. gr. nXiff
rttxinrdXn, from ri t'iXss,
ffaxsf.
Obs. 5. There are some other peculiarities, which must be left to individual
notice; ex. gr. ftsrstnreXMt from fi'trae, aioiiropos from a5c k^ylxws from i^yhs or yog,
*rohwrT* from orayf rolls, asjavoAo; from ixôf, Brtfietylvris, ftttfnyms, IXaQjif&oXas,
XxfcTtt.ivfioa;, Bn'Sx, ftoif/t, from ikafos, Xx/ivcti,and the tf of the nomin. seemingly
retained in Biirlmi, Xaorircoi '.
3. When the first word is a verb, its termination is generally
made either in s with the unaltered characteristic of the verb
before it, or in m, ex. gr.
ap%ix.ax.os from ap%eiv, Saxe'^f/xor from Santa, s'Xaxov,
Xvalmoms from \vu, TgsvJ/i'xgci/r from rîitu, \yspalyppos from
iytlû.
Here too the vowel is elided, ex. gr.
tpiqaviris, ptâamts.
Obs. G. The instances are less frequent, where the i is without the t, as in ti{t/xUxum;, and in several compounds of ceî/v, cj:. gr. afx&ia/gos, or where the verb
also takes the , as in almost all compounds with Xu'rw, ex.gr. Xwrmfyti.We must
also notice the form Tx/iu-i^fm, (from xi/mi, irx/tn,)
(from XuV, iXnrtr,)
and the shortened one in fif'sr/int, (for fi;m'/3;.)
4. Indeclinable words remain unaltered in composition, except
ing the changes effected according to the general rules, and in
1 It is important to remember that there are neither datives nor nomin. to be
looked for in the above compounds. Vowels and the letter r are the natural con
necting medium. Distinctness and euphony determined the selection. In both
nXsrfiftt and StSrtmt the t is only a strengthening sound ; \yx,wifut{H has at
sonorous fulness, &c.
310
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
prep, by elision ; ex. gr. d.y%la\os, (from ay%i and b\\s,) ira\atyevris from itcthai, ivx^xhu, avs'g%o/xai, from dux, eê'fjôptaii, xj3ai'vft/,
from e, itpoiyu, nefixyu. ( 30. 2.)With respect to the v in
compounds with h, avv, ni\iv, and ayav, see 25. ; and about
5i- and Sis--, ti- and tûsee 70. Obs. 2. with the Note.
Obs. 7. The prep. r(i sometimes makes a crasis ; ex. gr. trjai/^M, âusrraf, for
nrja
TossTra,-, particularly with the augment, see J 86. OAs. 1 . See about fjaJSee
and the like J 17.and about the abbreviated forms irjSi/tiyf, iifimt, natâXuf,
and the like, $ 119. Oii. 2.
Oi*. 8. That <ri;i does not lose the i in composition, follows of course from 30. 2.
But a^pi too, frequently retains it, cx.gr. in i/ufiaXas, i/tQlint, from <SAf, frat. The
rest of the prep, particularly in Ionic Epic poetry, retain the vowel in some com
pounds, which originally had the digamma before the second word ; but with the
Attics only iu i&iifftttrSeu, isnafxuy, ( 108. 3.) and Wmxns.
Obs. 9. With respect to the separation of syllables, the rule is that, when the prep.
ends in a consonant, the latter always continues with the first syllable, as hVifXofuti, ntHn-iyu, U-oi(si, it-if%efitu. But when the consonant in the prep, begins
the second syllable, it begins this syllable even when the vowel is elided in the
compound ; ex.gr. <x-uayv, a.-xeurui.
5. The principal inseparable particles are
which denotes
difficulty, contrariety, and the like, (ex. gr. tiuo-fixros, of difficult
approach, inaccessible, Iva^xtôuia, a contrary fate, misfortune,)
and what is called the
privative,
which has the power of a direct negation like the Latin in and
the English un, in, and less, ex. gr. qtfixros, impassable, a-irxir,
childless. This a generally takes a v before a vowel, ex. gr. ami
nos, (innocent, guiltless,) from air/a.
Obs. 10. Several words beginning with a vowel, especially those mentioned in
C. Obs. 3. as having originally begun with the digamma, take, however, merely
the i, ex. gr. anVrnTaf, ecxuv. amies, &c. : hence it is liable to contraction, as in ixtn,
{unwilling,) for iixm, ijyif, (idle,) with altered accent, ( 121. Obs. 6.) from S.i^yos.
But the remains before a consonant in irv'iQiXet, ifUfanU, (from a and Qnp'i.)
Obs. 11. When we find it stated that this at has also other meanings, and even a
magnifying power, this most not be understood as if we were in all instances at
liberty to explain it as such. It has these signif. barely in some old compounds,
which must be remembered singly ; we will therefore notice the most important,
and leave the rest to Dictionaries. The a has the magnifying power in inns, (intensely fixed, speaking of the eyes,) from ti'hoi, to stretch, distend; /i(t/Uf, icxtXtis,
(very dry, hardened,)
currtyts, *\<iX's, (thick-wooded.)* It expresses a com[* " In p. 10. of the Thesaurus they detail nearly the whole of that long Digressio
a Theochteis on the intensive power of a, whereas all that was necessary, was to
give a simple list of the words, in which a. seems to exert this power, with a refe
rence to Valckenaer's Dissertation ; more particularly since it is after all very doubt
ful whether the vis intensive raD a be not a fiction of the Grammarians:that it is
so, seems to be the opinion of the acute and learned Porphyry, in his Quastionet
Homerica, and Mr. Kidd has, in our opinion, successfully explained away the in
311
bination orjoining into one in iyiXxxrts, (foster-brothers and titters,) iyiareee, AJiXfit, ixemt, irxXxtres, literally of the same weight, viz. equal ; ixeês, (from xiôf,)
stances, which Valck. has adduced." The Quarterly Review, No, 44. p. 340. See
Wassenbergh's Selecta e Schol. Valck. in N. T. 1, 141. 31 1. Schafer, ad Dionyt. H.
de C. VV. 203. New Greek The: 8393. d. 8401. c.
" The Editors have not at present access to Porphyry's Homeric Questions, which
are to be found in the Preface to Barnes's Homer. Mr. Kidd's opinion would cer
tainly have been noticed by them, had they been acquainted with it at the time,
when the article in the Thesaurus was written. They suppose the Reviewer to
allude to this passage in Mr. Kidd's Review of the Grenville- Homer
' Much as we revere the erudition of Valck., we cannot assent to the result of his
investigation of what is denominated the intensive power of x. Xttpx iSXnx(r)
denotes a hand not formed to sustain the assaults of war ; ru%ta Hxvxffi, //. 6. 178.
walls unfit to withstand the impetuosity of Hector, and Ixtxret HXnx'es,
1^4the dissolution of a person not experiencing the agonising pains of premature departure,
but ripe in years and virtue, dropping into the grave like a shock of corn in hit teuton,
' animam senitem mollit extolvent sopor:'' see particularly Cic de Sen. 19. Schol. A. ad
it. e. 178.
So would I live such gradual death tofind,
Like timely fruit, not shaken by the wind,
But ripely dropping from the taplett bough,
And dying, nothing to myself would owe.Dryden.
In Soph. Tr. 106. iixxavrajf denotes incessantly streaming with tears, and Antig. 88.
rer/iet xixxflvref, a fate exciting tears never to be exhausted ; //. X. 155. *A$yXy i/Xji,
if' rts tikis t\uXtteira, Schol. A. ; Callim. H. in Cer. 26.
Ti S' aura xxXef xXtfas lireirirxfre TltXotffye'i
AivSouTH ififtXxfis' itx xtt fteXts Xfiat eiffret,
Ovid. Met, 8, 418. ' quod nulla ceciderat alas,' Eurip. Hipp. 75.
" E*** aSrs Got/Am i\tat f'iv&itv Caret,
Ovi' rtXft era* ffj3fiff.'
The Critical Review for June, 1803. p. 128.
This opinion deserves attention, but the Editors are not at present prepared to
assent to it."
Barker's Arislarchus Anti-Blomfteldianus, Lond. 1820. p. 43.
The opinion of Porphyry, referred to above, is given in Villoison's Scholia Feneta
ad It. A. 155.: 'H aWXij, vpes rrtf u\uXer, art ereXXot; ixie%xs trxrixtr' at f&tf yet? rrtf
tpuuin ifoitiuxetffif' ol it, rrtf ereXu%vXar' CtXrtof it if' fit a'uius VûXtfxra, us 'He'teies,
TtiXi yeut i%vXtn xxrtervhra xrtXtx trta/f.
'Aî/Xy TaXuûXat, if' its ovhtis VûXte-xre, ivx irXrtSes t%et %vX*ar, xcu ix eruXxtau rftrthiffx,
\rtearxrrt xett eraas xxufftf trtrnittx. 'AXXaes, Xlaafuotaw i\uXer itXtir, ai (tlr rrtf rraXvûXar
ifeitiaexxa'tf, [at b\ |i/X*v,] ai it rut cll^vXo*' inXet yeu*, fxn, ra ot xett ra a/Lao, is tart
reu otKaXevias, iffrt yxp afjtaxtXtules' xett iCpa/tei ifxx Gaefiej, xeu iixxoi xfjtx ixxv. a'JTUs xat
iXa%es xett ixatrif r) efteXt%es xett efiexatrts' xett i%uXes auf, it ofia\uXas itot ra Tvxrar \u.et it
iaxtt i%vXe Xtyttt, alt xetret manartf reu ZoXett, (tarxyit yet*, ai it rt ixftret Toogetât erf
arreua-tr,) iXXx xetret a-rtartfftf reu \uXi8X9ixt, net y i\uXas iiXr,, t\ its alius ** iûXtujxra,
raurtsrtf if' its %uXer oiiiits txeTpt* xett it ixetnt it xat r) iXoês, at; ifjtet ioxit, xvtiats ft
Txohftxn Xtytretl, rapot re Xi%evs trteeu fieri u.iretf%ltf u.tjit xeirn;, Toioe xett Xtytt, Keuotitrts
etXo%ev, rtit ix eretpfavtets, iXX' ov Xt%aus Xrteav ptrettrxoue-ns' Xaerof i' ft xxrotxanfts xett tart
revs etXXavs fitrnyetyiv. ua^rta xv^taes ra iXtyiffatt ra vertff reef iXo%atf Ganfatf, Xtytt yeut 'Ejtreef,
AXX' irx fiat Tûatf iXe%ovs xxt fnertx rlxfx
nâfâttees avatgit,
XetTof it If xxrx%griffit ytyofif tart reu exufavf ffufjt/jtxxtre. xxt re itonXet is erua, aux iffrt
ra fttyxXainXaf, iXXx re iivXaeratef, i| ay o-ftftxnu re ifxftertxaf' eurais yeut ifn, vu it
xrttfttf it itiXees, ifctfiuf xxt iinXeut iroiejf' ait xxxats it xxt 1t\rat it inXef iroitiotxtf, ra
t\ xirtXau IptTtaaf. 'H erxoxZeXn euf eeoos rrtf ffUfi%ttxf ruf ertvrafruf' rt i' oûrtaer ft tuxtfnrartfaf rueas ; B. The Homeric Questions are appended to 'Oftftaau'E^nynriis, Humeri
Interprcs, Argentorati 1539. 12mo. and in p. 49, 1 find the article in question with
certain corruptions and variations: xxt eutxuet x/ix tuxnifteXtxreesitx ra ertxeev
rrtf a-rtttttrtrXii if' },sxxi xxetns ii xx) fiXfl^fl! Iftet iexti xuatait it xxphftxri Xiyutxi
rit xXXxtUrifrtfXi. E. H. B.]
v
312
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
atoXeuSsi, (from *iA.<i/3sf,)

{level, even,) i/3XiT, (to meet,) and in all these in
stances it probably comes from the aspirated i in irXtii and Slths. But there are
still some cases, in which the it is superfluous, or of doubtful use and signif., as
adf%iTof,
afitos, airnôf, and others.
Obi. 12. There is another negation less common than the m privativum, viz. the
inseparable particle , ex.gr. x'tmik unpunished, rUmi, fatting (from miand 15*,)
wrti/xtf, (from vn and ovofta.)
Obi. 13. The inseparable particles, igi, and , have each of them the magni
fying power; ex. gr. ifirprbt, very distinguished, iplfyepts, loudly roaring, sounding,
a/cuw, very mettlesome.
6. When the second word in any compound begins with g
preceded by a short vowel, this according to 21 . 2, is gene
rally doubled ; ex. gr. taoppewns from iVor and piitu, wepippiw,
iwbp'pnros, apjmros (from a and pnros).
121.
1. The form of the latter part of a compound word determines
the whole word, which accordingly is either a verb, or a noun, or
a particle.
2. The most usual composition of verbs is that, in which the
verb continues unchanged, and retains its peculiar conjugation
with its augments and terminations. Strictly speaking there are
no compound verbs of this kind, but with the eighteen old pre
positions, ( 115. 2.) d/j-pt, dvx, avri, o\ltb,
elf, ev, 1%, 6*7, xqctx,
fjLsri, zsapd, cteoi, zjqo, wgoy, abv, i5weg, i/wo : and in fact this is no
real composition ; the prepositions are merely considered as
adverbs closely connected with or joined to the verb (in the sense
of up, into, forward, away, &c.) A similar connection or com
bination of the unchanged verb with real adverbs and other kinds
of words is considered altogether as a juxta-position, and is
therefore generally written separately, as sS upirreiv, xanus voieta.
Obs. 1. It is only in ancient poetry that some verbs, especially participles com
pounded with a particle expressive of a peculiar distinct meaning, are written as one
word : ex. gr. aUfVm for aZ tfiwm, they bent backwards (the neck of the victim,)
traXi/irXxyxSlirxs, and the like, and even the accus., which is the government of
the verb, ex. gr. ixxpvûiv. See F. A. Wolf's Prerf. ad II. noviss. LXI.
Obs. 2. It is precisely because the usual composition with prepositions is to be
viewed in this light, that such compounds in poetry are liable to what is called a
tmesis; see $ 147. Obs. 11.
3. But a real composition, by which one word coalesces with
the other, and is closely joined to it in an altered shape, as well
as compositions with inseparable particles, can take place only in
verbs changing their form so as to beget a new compound verbal
313
form, with a derivative termination, which most commonly is sa> :

and such a composition is, as we shall see below, (4,) generally
grounded in a compound subst. : for instance, tpyov and \a//.|3av<y
give iqyokifios, whence spyoKzfiHv, sZ and e$u, (EPTfi,) give
ivepytTw, (a benefactor,) whence luapysTtiv, (to practise benefi
cence,) tiiif and apitsxo) gives ovaxqsaros, (morose,) whence Swyzqeo-teTV, (to be displeased,) and when instead of <pei$eo$M, (to spare,)
the negative idea not lo spare, to disregard, is to be expressed
with the a. priv., the adj. atpsioris- gives <p6i5tiV. There are,
however, compositions with prep, also formed in this way ; ex. gr.
avnfiokw from avn/3o\ri, from avri and fidWu, vneî*M%m, (from
vitiqii.at.yjis,) from unzip and ^%ojj.ai.
Obt. 3. When the verb remains unaltered in such compositions, it is owing to an
accidental agreement of the derivative termination with that of the radical verb,
ex.gr. ruin, I mate, fuXtruis, piXi-ruiu, (/ compose tongt, write poetry:) thus (ivstruX'iu does not come from pi^n and nXiu, but from pjtroj.i:;.
not from i
and f^niu, but from Ztffm, &c. neither is in/tax from rifidu, but merely a collateral
form of ut.scxZw from m/ue
4. Only in compound subst. a proper coalition takes place,
though the second part frequently is the unaltered noun. But
even when the two words are unchanged, they always are con
sidered as a single word, and never separated by a tmesis ; and it
seldom is the case in such compounds, that the last word conveys
the principal idea modified by the first word. This mostly hap
pens only in compounds with prep. : ex. gr. s'vor, host, guest,
wgoljevoj-, public guest ; llos,way, coming, autoSos, meeting; h/j.6Soi/Xoj, fellow -slave. Adj. only are commonly modified in their
signif, when compounded in this manner ; ex. gr. marls, worthy
of belief, 'imaros, unworthy of belief ; <pl\is, dear, cherished,
vnipîkos, doated on. But when, for instance, an abstract subst.
like ti/at), honor, is to be negatived by the a priv. (dishonor,) there
is first an adj. ctnixos made, and from it a new subst. anîx.
In this kind of compositions the adj. in Is generally take the
termination vis, ex. gr. -hlbs, pleasant, dr,or)s, unpleasant, fSzqus,
ohofixpys, and the like.
5. But in most compound nouns the second part does not
convey the principal meaning, or the subject of the proposition,
on which it is founded, but merely its object, though this second
part frequently is the unaltered denomination, and this is the case
whenever the noun itself has a termination, which is not in con
tradiction to the gender of the new noun to be formed. Thus
314
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
avoixos, SEiaiSai/iAfciv, is not an 01W or Sanptiuv modified by the

first part of the denomination, but the former is one who
is ana rov oixov, distant from his house, the latter one who
Scjuar robs Sai'piovser, fears the gods. Thus atrais, one who
has no child, childless ; tâxôyî^, one who has a long arm ;
h&tos, inspired by a divinity ; itnyjiîxaxas, one who eîxnipn
rots xxxoTs, delights in the misery of others, &c.
But when the termination of the noun does not correspond to the
intended denomination, the noun takes the most congenial final
syllable of a declension, viz. either a bare a, or the terminations
or, us, gen. u, ns, gen. ovs, ir, gen. Sbr, or eov or cap produced by
the change of vowel stated in 63. 2. ex. gr.
aHaxpvf, (from Hdxqv,) tearless ; TÊxs'&Eiwvor, (h"om *f*%u
and Ssiirvov,) one who hunts after dinners ; ev^vîxos, who
practises strict (Sim) justice, an upright judge; annos,
stripped of (ti(j,yi,) honor, dishonored ; (piXox^/xaTor, who
loves (j^priv-a, xprif-arx,) money ; euyecas, of a good soil,
{yvi, ysca-) fertile; Xeiifo-y^cas, who quits his ship, {yavs veais,)
xaxonSw, of a wicked disposition, (jios,) arnXxis, (Sor,)
cowardly, (d\xri,) GuiQquv, of sound understanding, (if>gv>)
tvttiraip, horn of a noble father, (pxrwp,) noble.
Compare 63. with all these forms. This is the origin of a great
number of compound adj., or attributive subst.
6. Generally when a compound noun is to be formed with the
help of a verb, the verb comes last, and takes the termination of
a noun, and the first word contains either the purpose or the
object of the action of the verb ; ex. gr. epyoXdfios, who undertakes
a work; iwvor%6<pos, who feeds horses. The simple termination
os is the most common in compounds of this kind, and for subst.
the terminations *ir and as after the first declension, (see the
examples, 119. 8. d.) but for adj., -ns after the third declension,
(e.r. gr. EiVa&Tir, neut. Is, apt to learn, who learns easily ;) and,
also the other terminations of nouns, (stated in 119. 8.) ex. gr.
vopoo&ETns- from vojxor and ti'&h/ai, &c.
7. Other derivative words are again formed from such primitive
compounds, as oWioai/xovio, vo/jLoStaia, vofjuoSerixhs, Sec. and from
the compound verbs, stated sub 3. as limorpotpica from lirirorpoipos,
tvnahica from tuxahris, &c.
8. The most remarkable of the alterations, which sometimes
occur iji the second word, is that words beginning with a short
a, or with 6 and o, commonly take an n or u, but this never is the
case with verbs compounded in the manner described, sub 2.
with prep., though it is done with attributive nouns derived from
them, and with the compound verbs of the second kind, (see
above, 3.) ex. gr.
vTrnxoor, obedient, from vitaKovu, arpccr-nybs , military com
mander, from OTQaros and ayca1, xarviyopos, xctrnyopiu, (from
xard and dyopd, dyopevu,) an accuser, to accuse; evrmftos
from ave/Aor, ^vartKarot from l\a.vvv, dvu/jLoros from optvi/pu,
&c.
and the compounds of ovo/xa change moreover the second o into
v, dvawôs, iuuivv/aos, &C
9. With respect to the accent, the general rule is, that the
accent of the simple word is, (according to the analogy stated
above, 12. 2. a.) in composition, drawn as far back as the nature
of the accent will allow. Thus, for instance, (piXoTExvor, q>i\6$sot,
come from texvov, bear, ovvodos from oSor, anais ocTtoii&os, from vsaTf
sjaiSbr, ArifAos from riptio, (piXiTaigor, tvlfdpbtvos, from iTscigor,
wagSivor, zsavxioXos, (extremely various, changeable,) from a.\oKos,
(various,) ina.l'Swros, duairaiSevr'os, from aaiStvrhs, &c. We must,
however, remember that
1.) The termination of ad;', in -ns, ej-, has also commonly the
accent in compounds on the final syllable ; ex. gr. (piXoptEiSflr, zypoafyi'kws, dno&vis. But several of them, and espe
cially the compounds with rihos, ij.rix.os, Ts~iyj>s, dgxiw, draw
the accent back : tvr&ms, ewnSes, auragnnr , &c. Those in
-ulw do the same. 119. 14. See Buttm. Complete Gr.
Gr.
2.) Verbal nouns in rt, d, w, t\p, ei/s, and sir, which, as simple
words, have the accent on the final syllable, keep it there,
when compounds ; ex. gr. InivoiJ.-h, ovfjLtpoqd, oixooo/n.^, avv,^Maarris, avyypsttyivs, iinrt^-nrios. Subst. in ptor, as Siaavp(a.'os, napoZvaitbs, &c. with the exception of the compounds
of Ses/aos-, as Gvvlzay.os, &c. do the same. Compound adj.,
in Tor, (compare 60.) most generally have ros, tov, with
the accent drawn back, rarely rbs, rri, tov : no rule can
be relied on in this respect, ex. gr. dvofik-mos, s%al%eroi,
&C. but XfZ&cXTOf, T"h, tov, &c.
1 The words derived in this manner from uyx and aytu/ii, have also in the common language, partly an , ex. gr. \>x,iyit> wK*y-
310
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. Words, not compounds, but derived from compounds,

(wapxavnêru,) follow in their accentuation the general
analogy of their terminations ; ex. gr. the abstract verbals
in ri and a, as auWoyri, wo<r(poga, from ouXkiyui, aôolfspu,
uSixnTDt'os from aSixoy, aSfXEiv, zsaâifjayôs, from zsxpotyyu,
zsqoaSiKDTos from sspoa'SoK^.v. (See, however, Obs. 7.) But
when such words receive an addition in their composition,
they again draw the accent back, ex. gr. dirpoo-Soxnros.
4.) Those compound words, of which the first part is a noun
or adverb, and the second a transitive verb, with the simple
termination or, (not ros, ms, or the like,) have in general,
when their signif. is an act. one, and the penultima short,
the accent on this syllable, but when their meaning is
pass., the accent is on the antepenultima ; ex. gr.
XiSo/36\oy, throwing stones,
Xi&o/3oXor, pelted with stones.
Orestes is fx.vtrpox.r6vo!, but Medea's children fj.mrp6x.ronoi,
Sixoypxtpos, one who writes indictments, 'kswToypa.tyos, finely
written ; and so on generally, even when there is no other
than the act. meaning possible, as in o\xovo[a,os, ohoyjtos,
Toiyjupvyps, from opiaau, aSrtipxyos from ccSm and fyctyuv,
and the like. But the accent passes over to the final
syllable, whenever the penultima is long ; ex. gr. ^vyônoix,m'os, gkvto&ôs, i7tltofioa>tos, XiSot/Xxir, (from eXxw,) pteXoflroiir,
(from OUm,)
Obs. 4. There are no compounds of this kind proparoxytona, contrary to these
rules, except a few Epic epithets, (<VjroJii/i, enx'u-iruXst, rrtXlvifia,') and the deri
vatives of a few verbs beginning with a vowel, as hv'i>xt> (from ir'ut ix"y) '*i*(X*t
and this is likewise the principal accentuation of the perispomena, as St3S^-, (from
iaix tx"0 iwuvfyt, mnSfyt, from Eprfi: the other similar derivatives of this last
verb follow the rule, iyaStngyls, kiSiufyis, &c
Obs. 5. When the ner&has an intransitive signif., it adheres steadily to the gene
ral rule. Hence we have ai/rtxTovc; (from tfixurov stii'w.) but ai r>.u. oXet (from aires
i;a',>.*v.) and also iVaâcraf, ia^vâfiosj and atptvpfaes, tufA'affovs, w^xttusj and the like,
because the verbs fut, nun, are intransitive in these words, and the nount are only
datives.
Obs. C. Some compounds are become oxylona, contrary to the general rule, because
their derivation has beeu lost sight of, ex. gr. irâtris, aJsXpif, /3m/Xktm, i^yis. See
above, J. 120.
Obs. 7. Practice mnst point ont the few isolated instances, in which words com
pounded with prep, do not draw the accent back, or in which the mere derivative of
a compound does yet draw the accent back, as is the case in particular with several
words in t, ex. gr. IgcjprM, (s-Zxhttu,-, ixixrt;, vtfffurst.
SYNTAX.
317
SYNTAX.
122.
1. Syntax teaches the use of the forms, whose formation has
been treated of in the first part of the Grammar. It follows for
that purpose the grand division of the parts of speech, as stated
above, 31.
2. We therefore shall treat: 1.) of the noun in itself and other
nominal forms ; 2.) of the noun in combination ; 3.) of the
verb; 4.) of the particles ; 5.) of several particular constructions
and phrases.
123. Of the Noun.
1. Whatever is joined to a noun, subst. adjectively, (adjective,
participle, pronoun, article,) must agree with it in gender, number,
and case.
2. There is a seeming deviation from this rule in Greek by the
Attic writers : adj. &c. with a masc. termination are joined to a
subst. fern, in the dual, ex. gr. Xen. Cyrop. 1,2, 11. Kai jxi'av
Plato Phadr. 237. 'H/*<2v h
txccGTa Suo tive savoy Y&ia. ttpypirz xai ayovTE, oiv EWop(.E&a. Thus
frequently rai &e and roIv $eoTv, (Demeter and Persephone,) from
7)
But since we have seen above, ( GO. 3. 4.) that the adj.
in os often are communis generis, especially with the Attics, we
need only take for granted that this is usually the case with all
adj. in the dual.
Obs. 1. Poets sometimes allow themselves to construe attributive auist., which
are kmc. barely in form, ( 119. 8.) with nountfem.; ex. gr.bUvirxt 'Unfit 'SSf,
'Efuvl; \vfiyirnftt, vraftfiatnfx yetix,, ftXuv %iu$$6biu to a female, liurip. Hipp. 602.
(see Valck.)
The intermixture of forms in the dual and pi., chiefly takes
place only on connecting the subject and the predicate. See
129. 5.
3. But the adj. may also stand without a subst. not only in
reference to a subst. in the same context, but very frequently also
without any subst. whatever : the sid)st. then either is actually
omitted, or the idea of a subst. (as a man, woman, thing,) is kept
318
A GREER GRAMMAR.
in the mind. Such an adj. acquires in that case all the properties
of a subst., ex. gr. b oofy'as, loise (man,) vi awHpos, viz. yy, desert,
(earth destitute of water,) n ofiw, viz. bios, straight, (road,) ol
otoXXoi, the many, multitude, people, ra. e/*a, my things ; and also
the pronouns ovros, Ixsivor, rir, &c.
Obs. 2. In this last way most subst. have originated in all languages ; hence in
Greek many personal denominations denoting trade, conditio*, office, (as a shepherd,
judge,) are still used, as it were, as adj., with the addition of the word ittif, when
they apply to one individual only. Thus, for instance, trtifiii; (shepherd,') stands
alone only in reference to his flock; but
m/ttit, where we commonly say merely
a shepherd, when the strict sense is, a man who is a shepherd; and again, Awi{ riâtttt, a man who belongs to the family of a ruler, of a sovereign, (as Hipparchus, brother
to Hippias, the actual ruler, tyrant, of Athens.) See also &rti(
132. 4. 2. a.
When directed to several individuals, it is a respectful address, ex. gr. Sjis imxrrai,
j/e judges!
Obs. 3. The adj. may sometimes supply the place of the adv., and some adj. in
Greek are almost always employed only in that way. Of this kind are, IBtKctTtis,
voluntary, (l3iXcr<r)ii arnti, he went away voluntarily,) Ht/uns, willing, (cur/tit* tiiârt,
she accepted it very willingly; and several adj. denoting time, as t{it7 iflxctTe, they
arrived at the end of three days ; rxortun S
he came in the dart.
4. Whenever a compar. refers to another quality, the latter, as
in Latin, is not in the positive, but likewise in the compar., ex. gr.
Eurip. Med. 490. sspoSu/j.os (x,a\\ov $ Bo(pairiqx.
124.Of the Articulus Prapositivus.
1. Whenever a noun subst, is to denote a definite object, it
generally is construed with the art. b, ri, to, which corresponds
exactly to the German der, die, das, and with the English the,
for the three genders.
2. The indefinite art. of modern languages is never expressed
in Greek, but when an indefinite object is distinctly to be denoted
as an individual object, in which case the pronoun rls, ri, supplies
our article indefinite, ex. gr. iWor erexs \ayo)v, a mare brought
forth a hare ; yuvh ns opviv bTjêv, a woman had a hen ; ti xogn eylveto daxos, the girl became a leather-bottle.
3. Even proper names commonly have the art. ex. gr. b Swxgottw, at "A&yivai. But it is frequently omitted, and never used,
when there is a qualification following with the art. ex. gr. 2,a>xgaTTir b <ptK6ao<foi.
Obs. 1. Languages differ in the use of the article definite. The Greek in parti
cular has it before several pronouns, where the English and German languages omit
It, or even use the article indefinite. For instance, after a general description, the
Greek says, i rewrit
si* v frn fyUxat : this expression then includes all such,
SYNTAX.
319
whilst we should say, such t. man cannot please me. When prefixed to an inter
rogative, the article denotes that the answer is expected to be a definite object, ex.
gr. to Tr ; but which f ra xt7x rxvrx ; which do you mean ? In confidential con
versation we even meet with, awû Si Bav/iurit' to t/ ; something wonderful hap
pens to him. And that itwhat f The art. is essential in Greek with the pronouns
possessive, for ex.gr. ris SouXf, (as well as icvXistsu,) can signify only, a slave of thee;
but o tit
(as well as i hikis tto,) means thy slave.
Obs. 2. The remaining instances, where the Greek has the art. prapos. instead of
our article indefinite1, may be reduced to the following two principal cases: 1.) When
an object, which in particular instances is or may be an indefinite one, is considered
in the abstract or in general, and consequently appears as definite. We do the
same, for instance, in comparisons ; we may say, " He is like the physician, who
should visit the sick without knowing any thing of physic," (Xen. (Ec. 15, 7-)
Again, when an indefinite object becomes a definite one in a particular relation, or
occupies a definite place, we say, " The matter between you and me is still so doubt
ful, that we want a man to decide it," but the Greek has, n to? tuutf$nStrn trt Su,
we want the man who will decide it, viz. the third man in thiiparticular relation, who,
ficc." 2.) On relating a current story, which is repeated as being well-known, and
having been frequently told, ex. gr. Plato Charm. 7- ^tfarxris I K(*t!xs, Si Crtr,
M rtu xxXeC k'tyur uttiiis, Critiasis very wise, who (according to Ike well-known story)
said in reference to a beautiful boy."
Obs. 3. The Greek prose-writers frequently omit the article, where we should use
it, especially in expressing general ideas, ex. gr. Plato de LL. 5. Bt7n yif &yx3r rcu
n/ih, Honor however is a divine good, Ckarmid. 18. 0* Sfx tuftumi xv i"v alias ;
Theart. 23. AltSwis fit inrifiv. See also Schsef. Melel. p. 4. And the art. was
very often omitted in the common language before the words Slot, dig), fitteikm or
(t'tytts /W/Xiuc, (both denoting the king of Persia.) See Heind. ad Plat. Eutkyd. 8.
Phaed. 17. 108.
Obs. 4. Attic poetry has a greater freedom respecting the omission of the art. than
the Attic prose, but not so much by far as the other species of poetry, which gene
rally may use or omit the art. as they like ; and there is not even an art. properly
speaking In Homer, as we shall see below 5 1 27. Obs. J.
125.
1. The art. is frequently separated from its subst., not only
through the adj. (5 xaXor itxis,ol vvzi>xovr* vo/xoi, the existing
laws,) but also through other more particular modifications of the
subst., ex. gr. inAixmro rris h iawI? liar^rts, he remembered the '
time spent in madness, in which case a participle as ytvoixivn and
the like may often be mentally supplied ; ex. gr. t> vphs Ta\a.rtt.s
ixix*, the battle against the Gauls ; v) itply acgtu qcvtov d^rr,, the
virtue which he shewed be/ore he reigned, (Xen. Ages. 1, 5.)
Obs. 1. The Ionians even insert the pronoun ris between the gen. dependent on
it and its art., ex.gr. rut tit liftm instead of rut luisn vis.
1 See Wolf, ad Reix. de Accent. 70. Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 1.
s In the passage, which is quoted, Plato Phadr. 4. ru tcscZtn ought, I think, to
be actually taken iu a definite sense, as Socrates is clearly meaning himself.
320
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
2. If the intercalated modification begins with the art., there

may be two or three articles one after the other, provided this
produces no cacophony, ex. gr. to rr>s apery; x.ah'Kos, the beauty of
virtue, h ra. rns tioXeus <npa.ytx.arqc. mparruv, he who manages the
affairs of the state, rov to rris 'A&nvay ayak/xx E%yao~x[j.evov)'ivoyôs
e'sw tu> tt)S raiv iKivîqun tpBoqai vo/xu.
3. But the modifications of the subst. may also come after
for emphasis, or distinctness, in which case the art. must be
repeated ; ex. gr. rov TratSa rov aov, thy son, 5 yjXlapyôi 5 ras dyye\ias eio-xo/xi'&>v, the military tribune who has to bring in the re
ports. It may, however, be omitted in the first place, ex. gr.
OWEI//.I av&gtuwoir toiV aya&oiV.
Obs. 2. The repetition of the article is necessary with the part., because the pro
position would else constitute that particular construction of the part., which is so
usual in the Greek language, and of which we treat below 6 144.The article is
very seldom repeated before the next following gen., i <h i <rr,( KuSfym, Anacr.
Obs. 3. When the adj. without an art. stands close to a tubs!., which has the art.,
without, however, coming between the two, the object is not distinguished from
others, but from itself with different modifications, ex.gr. Ssrs Eiri rXcmr'ms tV
xoXlrui! does not mean, he rejoiced at the wealthy citizens, but, he rejoiced at his citi
zens, when they were, or, as far as they were wealthy; W axîi mil Sfinv,onthe moun
tains, where they are the highest, i. e. on the top of the mountains;
t tuxrm, the
whole night ; i%u tcv t'o.ikuv o^tirxrey, which we can only translate by, he luis a very
sharp axe, but the exact idea is, the axe which he has, (and ought to have for the
undertaking,) is very sharp.
4. When the subst. is understood from the context, it is com
monly omitted, and the art. stands alone before the modifications,
ex. gr. b t/xhs itarr^p xai a rov <pl\ov, (my father and that of my
friend.)
5. There are certain customary omissions in such cases, ("as
above 123. 3. with the adj.) ex. gr. ' Axiâvlqos b $>tht<n<nou, (viz.
vTos, son,) oralso alone, ex. gr. 6 "Zu^qovlaxov, the (son) of Sophro- niscus, i. e. Socrates. Again eU rw <S>i\imrov, (viz. yjvpav,) into
the country ofPhilippus ; rarns noktus, (viz. TCpayn.tt.ra, as above
123. 3. ri .!,) ol ev atsci, the people in the town ; raxara Tlavtfavi'av, as for Pausanias, what concerns Pausanias ; ra t\s rov md~
Xe/xov, ol auv to fiaaikti.
6. As any indeclinable modification may be declined with the
help of the article, adverbs are converted into adj. by the mere
addition of the art., ex. gr., ixera^v, between, 5 (xirx%u rortos, the
intermediate place, the place situated between ; itiXas, near, al
<ni\as xw/azi, the neighbouring villages, ol tote avSpeovoi, ol itxkai
SYNTAX^
321
eopol avoÊf, r) avco itoXis, the upper town, sir tov uvuitxtuj ronov,
(see 115. G.) v) l%sziq>vv)s ixtTzsoLvts, the sudden removal, &c. 1
Under this head comes also od liiKuais, and the like, see below
148. Obs. 3. Or the adverb comes after, and the art. is re
peated : "Orsev syeiprta^s ex tSs- u^Xuxs raums rr,s ayav, when you
awake from this excessive remissness.
7. If the subst. being sufficiently known from the context or
idea itself, be altogether omitted, the adv. assumes the appearance
of a subst., ex.gr. aupiov, to-morrow, omitting the word r^j-ipx, day,
gives vi avpiov the morrow ; r, At/Sis-!, the Lydian music, {xpixotioc
being understood,) ol tote, the men of that time; is rovnitsw, (for
to Wiaot, with the probable omission of n-ipos,) backwards, towards
the hind part; Anacreo has, To oTj/xEgov /ae'\ei /u.oi, I care only for
to-day, i. e. for what is to-day, what, occurs to-day ; for it is not
always possible to supply a definite subst., when the art. is neut.,
nor is there any occasion to supply a subst.
8. The instances, in which different forms, and whole sentences
have the appearance of a noun subst. merely through the remain
ing article of a subst., which is omitted, are perfectly distinct from
the following two instances, in which such words and sentences
become actual subst. by means of an article belonging to them :
1.) Infinitives, ex. (jr. to v^xttsiv, the acting, being engaged
in business, to xaxwr Xiyeiv, the evil-speaking, back-biting,
r!SoM.ai rep vepiirotrsiv, I find pleasure in ivalking. The
use of the inftn. as a subst. is very extensive in Greek, as
will be seen 140.
2.) Any word or phrase, considered in itself as an object,
ex. gr. to Xiyu, i. e. the word Xiyu.Plato Protag. 345.
Tlept imuTou \iyn touto to Ikuv, Phtedr. 129. K-xTa^qriax<T&ai SeT ayTov to, Il<3r S1 av tyui toioo-Se roiai^s iiay^sipnax, lis
must make use of this speech, how could I have attacked
such a one !
Obi. 4. Any word denoting an object, is generally considered as of the neut. gen
tler ; bnt in grammar it is customary to give to every word the gentler belonging to
the denomination of that part of speech, ex. gr. as we say h irrmofun, (the pronoun,*)
we also say lyu, (the pronoun iyu,) and i \-rti, because of o evrhef**;, (conjunction.')
Obt. 5. There is, however, another peculiarity to be attended to. The article r
with its accompaniment, omitting any connection, becomes adverbial, ex. gr. to tiXttn-xtitfJtnaUy, rasZv, (properly tic ?,) now, ri axi rauh, henceforth, (compare beloiy
1 The Latin lansjunge not having any nrt., mrst resort lo a kind of juxtaposition
to usq such expressions, and that onlv in Comedy, fieri semper leiiiias, Terentius.
Y
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the accus. 131. 8.See about nuu tcu T^ta, the Note to J 132. 4. 2. c, and about
some other expressions with the art. tc or t, below the adj. neul. 128. and the
accus. 131.
Oil. 6. In an elliptical sentence the article sometimes stands even before a pro
noun relative, ex. gr. To i/uu/BU T(it tc f ifttu&ri, (Plato lie]). 510.) the thing compared
controlled with that, to which it it compared, where i*u"o might have been used
instead of ro : Ou3t -rov, era, alcûvn, iri Qi^cvra, (Herod. 3, 134. :) Tats tiott nfui %u\iTn
h itifuKârlx, to men like us, (compare below \ 143. 6.) a democracy it prejudicial,
(Xen. Hist. Gr. 2, 3, 17-:) T (ruvcvrimi) SSn it ffni/uirciTti t"n, (Plato Phadr. 34.)
to vrxif Kifvt, the wailnul-like thing, (Pollux 7, 75.;) and the same before other
words connected with a subsequent proposition, ex.gr. To tots iu Tdyu, ItSatxi /a,
literally, the when one ought to speak teach me, i. e. teach me when it it proper to speak ;
"En in XttTirat, tc r,v vrtlo-u/tt, tVa;, i. e. a case still remains, this, namely, if we could
persuade you, (Plato Rep. 1. p. 327.)
126.5, ii, to, as Pronoun Demonstr. and os, i), 8.
1. Both the artic. prcepos. 5, v, to, and the artic. postpos. Sr, o,
were demonstrative pronouns in the primitive language instead of
oZtos or exeiW. When the language was polished, and became
more copious, their use was more confined, but even in common
prose both retained in several definite instances the power of a
real demonstrative pronoun.
2. They were most frequently used in this sense on making a
division and distinction ; in that case 5 /aIv comes first, and then
6 Se follows once or several times, properly only in speaking of
definite objects, thisthat ; but also of indefinite onesthe
onethe otherone more, and so through all genders and num
bers ; ex. gr. Toy i*.ev eti'juux, tov Se oi, this (man) he esteemed, that
'not ; To ju.ev yap avoajTov, to Se /ntjcvixov, one is a silly trick, the other
a mad one ; Ttvv TroXe/xiuv, (or oi vokiixioi,) oi /xev E&atvjuuiôv to.
yiyvd/AEva, ol S' Ifiowii, oi Se avvEaxtuxfyvTo, some of the enemies were
astonished at what happened, others screamed, others prepared
for their retreat ; Ta/v tvtvv to. ij.Iv exei ^ro&as, T* ^' e'tJv anoSa :
KijEio-croy xakus xe'vEH&ai $i xaxus nXovreTv to /xev yap eXeov, to 5' Itcir'lfjLntm <ps'gsi : Isocrales says of the Athenians, who had sent out
colonies, because their country was over-peopled, that in this way
they,vE<Ttvo"ctv d/j.!poTipouf, xa\ tous a.xo\ov$r\aavTa.s xa\ tovs imoy.dvaiiTxs' to'iV /xev yap Ixavrtv rm oi'xoi %iipav xars'îTTov, toiV 5e nXtiu
tra vita^yovoms knopioav.We find in the same manner, o /xev
avTavoi Se, some of themothers. See about 5 ptsv, 5 S' o5,
149. in (xev.
3. The genuine Attics seldom use the artic. postpos. in this
way, (os /xev, or Se, &c.a. u.h, a Se, &c.) but later Writers, like
Plutarch, very frequently.
SYNTAX.
323
Oh. I. There is an instance in Demosth. pro Cor. 248. Reiske, UoXtn 'EWrMas,
if pi* ivtufvvj us &f Si tous Q}vyaChxs xxroiym, destroying tome Greek cities, bringing the
exiles back to othert.
4. In a narrative 5, fi, to, frequently stands but once with Se in
reference to an object already named, ex. gr. h 11 eiWe, but this one
said ; tw
d.<zoj(fiipn<J<ii, (the accus. with the infin.) that this
(female) then ivent away.
5. When the question is of persons as subjects or agents, such
a proposition may also be connected with xat, in which case the
nomin. always has the form of the artic. postpos. or, o?, a":
but the accus. (with the infin.) takes the form of the artic. prcepos.
rov, &c. ex. gr. Kai or, oatouaas ravrx, eWev avrov ex rris rxêats,
the other, having heard this, pushed him out of the rank, Kai o?
ita\vbhres, iaifiauvov Is ra\s mas, Herod. Kai tov vttkHiaai Souvai,
and the other ordered it to be given to him.
Obi. 2. Hither belong also the expressions used in relating a conversation : S tit,
Maid he, (see 109. p. 231.) and the elliptic xatl It (viz.
on which the other laid.
Obt. 3. When there is a prep, in the sentence, fin and Si frequently come imme
diately after it, ex. gr. 'Et /th rsTs ffvuQuvovpw, h Si voTs ov, on some points we agree, on
others not; lsocr.Paneg.il. E/'j ph reus ifyi&rrti, rat l\ iouXsintrts. See Reiz. de
Accent. 13. 69.
Obt. 4. The distinctions, however, are not always so marked and so corresponding
as in the preceding examples; ex. gr. u uir is frequently followed in the next pro
position by Tivis Si, Um Si, or by a name or any other designation, as the learner will
observe in his readings; and sometimes el n'ti is not expressed, but mentally sup
plied and presupposed on account of ' Si, and the like, following.
Obs. 5. From the ancient signif. of the art. the expressions rov xtu toy, ro\ xatl rk,
and the like, are derived ; they correspond with the English this and that, and are
particularly frequent in Demosth.
Obs. 6. The ancient signif. of the art. accounts likewise for the Poetical dat. ru
adverbially used, therefore, on that account, II. . 815. Tiywo-xv tl, Sii,Ty toi xtpfan'ms lei* tTes, therefore I will candidly tell you, which may also he expressed by the
accus. (compare below 131. 7) y< 176. *AXX roiy oitx lytvovro, to xai xXalovga
titjij!*, therefore am J melting in tears.
Obs. 7. But the use of both articles as demonstrative pronouns is far more general
in poetry, especially in Epic poetry, and o, h, to, in Homer, (excepting the instances,
in which to, rot, &c. stand for S, h, &c. according to 75. Obs. 2.) are almost every
where to be taken in this sense. To be convinced of this, we need only to look at
the following passages, II. a. 340. 1.399. i-715. .407. Od. i. 106., which read super
ficially appear to have the usual prosaic art.; but the attentive reader, who does
not know of any such art. in Homer, very soon perceives from the context that in
all these passages, and many similar, it is the demonstrative pronoun; the demonstra
tive power of which, however, may be dispensed with here, and is therefore weak
ened. In but few passages this little word denotes an object merely as well known
and distinguished, or as very much present to the mind of the Poet, or where the
demonstrative power really is so weakened, that its dwindling into the true Attic
art. becomes obvious, (11. . 167. 412. p. 289.)But we must be particularly on
y 2
324
A GUF.EK GRAMMAR.
our piinrd against taking tliis form for the art., when it U separated from the subst.
by the verb and the whole proposition, as, 'H ftiv a*' ut uvavr uri&vi tralxs MUt'lgi* 1
for here n as a demonstrative pronoun is to be rendered by she, whose name is men
tioned after in the Poetical way, thus she spoke, and departed, the swift-footed Iris.
This is proved by those passages, in which the real pronoun J, (Jo him,) is followed
in the same way by the subst., ex. gr. Od. . 108.Thus even in Homer this sulst.
nature of i, i, to, apparently raises an adj. to a noun subst., ex. gr. 11. f. 80. ri
the bravest, u. 33. S y\ûi,theold (man,) and frequently ci IXXu, tccXXk. In all these
instances 1, fi, to, as subst. has its adj. along with it, and the sense properly is, him
the bravest, he the old (man,) those, the others, that, the other. But here too the pro
noun demonstrative, as it may be dispensed with, is often weakened, and its dwindling
into the usual article very evident.
127.PronounsAdj. was.
1. The pronouns demonstrative olros and oSe are sometimes em
ployed instead of adverbs of place ; ex. gr. Plato Rep. 1. (in the
beginning,) 'Hgoptrjv onou sir), outossQw, ovfy^tv vqoaeqxsra'> I asked
where he was ; there he comes, said the other, behind you. The
demonstrative oSt is chiefly used in this manner by Poets, (Od. a..
185.
367.) and in particular very frequently by Tragic Poets,
(Schaef. Meletem. 77.)
2. The three principal signif. of the pronoun airos, ( 75. 2.)
must be carefully discriminated.
I. It signifies self,
a. when it belongs to another noun, so as to be in apposition
with it, that is to say either behind it, or even before the
article, ex. gr. MaXXov touto ^>o/3ou/Aai r> fbv Gavarov avrov,
I fear this more than death itself; Kvron tov /SauiXsa ditoxT6~vai efioukm, he wanted to put to death the king himself.
b. when, the pronoun personal being omitted as sufficiently
known from the context, it stands for I myself, he himself.
In that case it is chiefly in the nomin., ex. gr. euros cipr),
he himself said it ; Tcx^yivoix-nv uinos, I myself got there ;
it is used in the oblique cases only, when the sentence
begins with them, ex. gr. ccutov yxp eISov, for I saw him
myself.
II. It is employed instead of the pronoun personal of the
3 pers., but merely in the oblique cases, as in English him, her,
it, to him, &c. (in Latin eum, &c.) In this sense it can come
only after other words of the sentence or proposition, ex. gr.
E'Saixsv auroTs to Ttvq, he gave fire to them ; ou% iupaxxs avrov ;
have you not seen him ? To $ioxs Aivir*) eSxsv, ZxiTvos $<= vt<i
SYNTAX.
325
xaS-nXaaev, he gave the skin to JEeles, but the latter vailed it up.
See also 7.
III. It means the same, when it is immediately preceded by
the article ; ex. gr. 6 airos avr/g, the same man ; exiXsvtn to avro
(or recvri) woieTv, he ordered him to do the same. (See its con
struction with the dat. below 133. 2.)
! Obs. 1. Hence il follows that the nomin. aires, &c. never signifies he alone, &c. But
under the second head must also be ranked those instances, in which the subject,
according to the Greek construction, is stated in an oblique case, especially in the
gen. absolute, and with an infin. in the accut. ; the oblique cases of aires must then
be rendered by he, she, it, ex. gr. ltrj*u/tfwf Havre**, hut as they rushed in ; ptm\
raura aX9s~> aire*, that after this HE departed; Soph. Philoct. 777- (pray) ftrj roi
yiv'iffSoti srsXvernet aira, (viz. ret r'e\a, the bow,) that IT be not troublesome to you.
Obs. 2. The Kpic Poets also employ aires without the article, for i aires and
sometimes it is used even in prose for fuives, alone, ex. gr. aire) yi^ \e-fin, for we are
alone; the English we are by ourselves, abra ravol rm ve^meât, to observe only what
is before your feet, Xenoph. Laeed. 3, 5.
3. The pronoun auras loses its emphasis in the reflective pro
nouns iixauTov, asavrov, &c. ( 75. 3. :) i5tov al meaus thyself,
but aeavr\ simply thee as a reflective pronoun, (which, however,
in English is expressed with self,) ex. gr. e&iê axvrh, (in French
barely accoulume-toi, but in English accustom thyself.) Thus
the pronoun reflective of the 3 pers. answers to the Latin se, and
like this, it is also used when it refers to the first subject of two
connected propositions, where we still say him in English ; ex. gr.
No/xi'ei rous noXtras unr^srsiv exvrai, he thinks his fellow citizens
are subject to him. But in this last case it may also be simply
air\ or , (o5, &c. aifsis, aipHs, &c.) In the good Attic prose the
latter pronoun used in this way is altogether confined to the reflec
tive signif. (see 72. Obs. 1.) The choice between the three,
(ixvrov, abrhv, %,) was regulated, as iu many other instances, by
distinctness, emphasis, and euphony.
Obs. 3. The Attics use !, &c, in this combination chiefly 1.) when there is no em
phasis, and when it would be the enclitic /a in the 1 pers., Plato Iiep. 1. (i'hiV.)
Kartlay nftas HeX'ifAap%es Ix'o.ivn iâ/ievra roi -ratia viftftuiai t xtMorai, he bid the
slave tell us to wait for him ; in the same way we have , Xen. Anab. 3, 1, 5. Plato
l'hcedo. p. 117. Prolog. 310. rtfe,*, Xenoph. Hell. 5, 4, 11. &c. But 2.) when, in
a speech alluded to in sermone oblijuo, the speaker himself is mentioned, this pro
noun is frequently used in opposite propositions and the like, entirely as i/ii. See,
for instance, Plato Iiep. 10. p. G17- where e-fas, eS, !, occur in this way.The sing.
of this form is altogether very rare with the Attic Writers, but the pi. was familiar
to them both ways ; they have even the nomin. e-ftTs, when in a quoted speech or
opinion, the speakers, or those who give their opinion, are themselves the subject,
ex.gr. Xen. Anab. 7, 5, 5. Aiyuv ix'iXlvev, on oio*iy ay tjrTov fftyits ayayonv rny rtevrmf,
they bid them say that they would lead the army on equally well. Iu this case aire)
326
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
might be used, but it would rather signify they themselves : in the ting., howevert
nothing but xirii can be used in this case both for he and he himself. See about the
nomin. 1 the Note to 72. 3.
Obs. 4. Examples of 1ut or alrsv thus employed are found in Isocr. Paneg. 12.
Oi y.'i (/ Sfarai) 3rr Tiatn raus iBXnreig ixvrZv (rixa wanevwrecs, where ietvrut refers
to the spectators, to which corresponds exactly in the next following sentence, Oi it
( aSAqrau) orxv iiSvpr'Jixffi*. on Tmrif iwi tw fîriêtf Stuelav rinovfivtf^lTig**,
(formed of the simple !, irft^.) which refers to the combatants : again in Eurip. Hipp.
977- Xenoph. Mem. 1, 2, 52. Plato Phadr. 259. But in many instances of this
kind avrn may also be used, in which case the proposition is stated by the writer as
his own view of the subject. See Exc. X. ad Demosth. Mid.
Obs. 5. The reflective pronouns of the 3 pert, have sometimes the power of a gene
ral reflective pronoun, which stands also for the 1 and 2 pert., as lavriu, itirsS, for
Ifixurtu and axvreu. This has been perfectly ascertained and is acknowledged by
the ancient grammarians, (see Timams with the Note of Ruhnken, p. 92.) and ex
tends likewise to prose ; but the passages occurring in prose-writers are still open
to critical examination. The Attic tenariut is an instance in point, ex. gr. Soph.
CEd. T. 138.
'YTtf yk^ cii^t ruv avevr'tfu
'.\/.>.' aitrit atvrav, tout aorotrxiiu fjLVffos,
for the take of mytelf, for my take. Other Poets go still farther ; not only use rfiTi{ without any distinction of pert, or number in the sense of one's own, but also i,
T, Us, Apoll. partly (like the Latin e) for the pi., and partly as a pronoun reflective
of the 1 and 2 pert, (see Wolf. Proleg. ad Horn. 247-)
4. The pronoun indefinite tit is also used for the German man,
French on, English one, they, people, ex. gr."AvSpaitoii avails-ego*
ovx at Tir tvpoi, one cannot find a more impudent man; even when
it refers to a whole assembly, ex. gr. "HSn ns stt^sikvutco Ixvtov,
now one must distinguish one's self, (every one of you must dis
tinguish himself.) See about the neut. ri, ^ 150. The pronoun
interrog. ris, ri, is also used as in English for an indirect interro
gation : riQojrx y.i ris ewiv, he asked me who J was.
Obs. 6. Hence rlt, ri, is likewise employed with some verbt denoting merely
inquiry or investigation, instead of SW/j, o m, Xen. Anab. 3, 3, 18. "H <wt lowu^wfuBa, tint aiiTut tr'txxtrai n<pii%'mts, if we now inquire or examine ivhich of them have
tlings.'
5. "A\\os without any article is the Latin alius, 'another;'
'Inpos without the article is the same, but denotes a stronger diffe
rence, but 5 erepos always makes a distinction only between two
objects ; it is the Latin alter, ' the other,' see 78. 4. In the pi.
aWot means others, and ol aXXoi the others, ' ceteri;' ol erspoi sup
poses a more distinct separation into two parts, the other party.
The sing, h a\\os denotes a whole exclusively and in opposition
to a definite part : r> aXk-n y^Lpa, the ivhole remaining country,
the rest of the country, all the other parts of the country.
SYNTAX.
327
6. Most pronouns and the adj. nas and a.<nas come either be
fore the article or behind the subst., ex. gr. rovruv rav avo/v, of
these men ; b avrig ovros, this man ; Hum stive ravvnv, he suffered
this punishment; nivrss ol "EXAwer, all the Greeks; ra Sti/aw
airavrt, to the whole people. But seldom and rather emphatically
iras is between the article and subst. ol iravrEs,
re xa! <Woi,
Plato. When <kxs is without an article in the sing., it is com
monly used for exaarot, ex. gr. irat avhp, (the French tout homme,)
every man.
7. The pronouns possessive of the 3 pers. (or, atpereôs,) are
seldom employed ; the genitives of the pronoun avrbs are pre
ferred, ex. gr. ri y^riy-tira avrov, avr-ns, olutuv, his, her, their for
tune. The gen. is also frequently used instead of the pronoun
possessive of the other two persons, but in the sing, merely the
enclitic one, ex. gr. 5 vlis /xoi/. If there be any stress in the idea,
the possessive pronoun must be used ; but if there be a strong
emphasis, liMtvrdu, &c. may be employed.
124. Obs. 1.) See,
for instance, Demosth. Mid. 36. where it occurs twice. Some
times a gen. is added to the pronoun possessive, as an apposition,
ex. gr. li&piti'CpvtH ri hy.i, rov xaxoSa/ôvor, they plunder my
effects, (the effects) of an ill-fated man. But with words expres
sive of constantly relative ideas, as a son, father, friend, master,
the hand, foot, &c. the pronoun possessive never is used, but sup
plied by the article alone.
See about the premised enclitic gen. y.ov, aov, 133. Obs. 4.
$ 128.O/fAe Neuter Adjective.
1. The neuter of all kinds of adj. is used alone without a subst.
or even as a subst. for any indefinite or vague object, and in many
instances it is, as in Latin, in the pi. when we should use the
sing.: eiWe ravra, he said this ; ri xoCKi, (the beauty, the beautiful,
viz. all which is beautiful ;) oils ri avayxaTx SiWvrai woieiv, they
cannot even procure the needful, (the necessary things.) Hence,
ra e/xa, for instance, signifies not only my effects, but also more
indefinitely whatever concerns myself.
2. The neuter in the sing, rather denotes the abstract idea of
objects, ex. gr. to xaXov, the beauty, (the beautiful abstractedly
considered in itself;) to Sstov, the divinity, (any divine nature, of
which we have but an obscure notion;) to rws yvvutxbs JoSAov xal
328
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3-EctweyTiito, the slavish and submissive condition of women.

Whence also the neuter of a part, is employed as an abstraetum,
ex. gr. to o-fyxEXa'ixs'> the yielding, i. e. an indulgent, yielding
disposition.
Obs. 1. The neuter of the article alone with the gen. ii still more indefinite; it
denotes a mere reference, derivation, and the like : Ti ii rZv ^git/txrut pix*?*
jraSiTri axovreci, troa-a xxi ar&it fs-/, with respect to the money, you are particularly
anxious to hear how much it is, and whence it is to come ; Demosth. T* rut Slut opieut
iiT, we must bear what comes from the Gods.
Obs. 2. Hence comes a particular circumlocution peculiar to the Attics, that of
Loth to and ri with the gen., which will best appear from examples. Thus they
often say ri rr,; Tv^m, when we should simply say fortune; Demosth. 01. 1. Tapxrtu avrit ra rut eiTTxXh/Y, the Thessalians, (whom he distrusts,) fll him with care ;
to. rut fcaefrxfvt iriy aTira Qvffti, barbarians are naturally distrustful ; ri rns ***Xias
yinatot xxi sXtCBisct is-/, the nature of the stale is something noble and free, Plato
Menex. 17-; and on describing a beautiful place, -xatrut Si xoîrarot ri t*s x-sac,
but the most beautiful of all is the grass, Plato Ph&dr.Hence the nexttcr of the
pronoun possessive often serves in this manner for the pronoun personal : ri l/iit for
*yu, properly what concerns me, my person.
Obs. 3. The Greeks can also use litta, (like the French their tout, in tout court,
tout fuit,) for every one ; er.gr. Eurip. Tut frxgfixtut yif isiiXx rdtra rXtit i'is, among
the barbarians all arc slaves, (in French lout est esclave,) except one, i. e. ri rut /3{fiufut rxtra, for oi fittofiagci tatrit.
Obs. 4. The neul. of the adj. instead of the adv. is seldom used in prose excepting
the compar. and superl. ( 115. 4.) but it occurs frequently in poetry, ex. gr. itnit
fioxt, to cry out dreadfully, SxrxyXa piAiiV, to love excessively.The adverbial signif.
of pronouns and similar general adj., as ri rat, entirely, totally; ri ToAAet xxSivhi,
he is mostly, (the greatest part of time,) asleep, &c. is easily understood. We may
also notice rodro pit
revro it, on one hand, on the other hand; ret pit ri 10,
partly, partly ; both forms being perfectly adverbial : ex. gr. Demosth. Lept. 474.
Xenoph. Mem. 1, 3. init.
129 Of the Noun in connection.Subject and Predicate.
1. The nomin. neut. pi. commonly has in Greek the verb in the
sing.; ra. %aa t^'jî, the animals run; ravrd tarn dya$a, this is
good; 'A&rjvat'wv r,u%zro t ujgzyfj.zra,tan ravrx, this is, i. e.
that is true ; ruv ovtojv rx fj.it tariv e(J>' Ti/xiy, ra 5' qvk t vimy, (t)l
our power.)
Obs. 1. Rut whenever the subject stands at some distance from its verb, and
denotes animated objects, the /)/. is again preferred, (Xenoph. Ages. 1,21. <r<t,5f<a,)
and even without this there are numerous instances of the natural construction,
especially in Poets.
2. Whenever a verb has for its subject several individually
named objects, which come after, the verb frequently is in the
sing., ex. gr. Eari xxl ev tx7s aXXseir moXtatv zpxpvris te, xal ^rj/xos :
SYNTAX.
329
if apyptrts stood alone, the construction would necessarily require

Plato flep. 3. p. 363.
Obs. 2. One instance, where the verb comes after, occurs in //. {. 386. Tainan
TBj xttiftetl Ti, *obl; TIXligif r*, oQSaXfitl TI TfttXifftnTo.
Obt. 3. Some dialects allow themselves to construe the verb in the ting, also with
the pi. of nouns mote, and /cm. denoting things, which peculiarity, as it is much used
by Pindar, is generally called schema Pindaricum. This construction is a little more
natural, yet still uncommon, when the verb comes first, as in rns 3' h rtiTs xipuXai,
mentioned above in the Note to 108. and in such a construction we even meet
with the proper names of persons. See in this respect Lesbon. 184. Herm. ad
Find. 01. 8, 10. 11, 5. Valck. ad Herod. 5, 12. Hither belongs also the usual ex
pression ?r/ d, &c. See 150.
2. Nouns collective, viz. subst. in the sing, including the idea of
several subjects, have often the verb in the pi., ex. gr. a>s (pxaxv w
nXiiSus, (Horn.) thus spoke the multitude; to oTqccroveSov mv/^tligow, (Thuc. 5, 60.) the army fell back1.
3. A single person sometimes speaks in Greek of himself in the
pi., the same as in Latin, and particularly often in Greek Trage
dies ; but when a female speaks, the predicate always is in the pi.
masc. See in this respect Herm. ad Viger. n. 50.
5. As the dual is not a necessary grammatical form, ( 33. 2.)
any proposition about two objects may be expressed in the pi.,
and when the subject is expressed in the dual, the verb may yet
be in the pi., and versa vice, and the different predicates and
references to the subject may again interchange the two forms
according to the exigency of euphony.
Obs. 4. Nouns strictly belonging together require the uniformity of 123., except
that 1.) the numerals tie and ifiQa are sometimes construed with the pi. (ii/sir ti/tt{,) and 2.) the construction with the pari, shares the licence of the verb, ex.gr.
Aristoph. Ran. 573. y"hurturoLt anrti^ffetfiiv, Eurip. Ale. 903. Sua *pu%at g-ur'tr^tr
s/idiia/SavTt. (The uncommon instances of a dual instead of the requisite pi. are
stated 33. Obs. 8. and 87. Obs. 6.)
6. When the adj. as a predicate is separated from the subst., it
often is in the neuter, though the subst. be either masc. or fern.,
and in the sing, though the subst. be in the pi. The object is
then considered in the aggregate as a whole, as one thing ; hence
we may always mentally supply the idea of a thing or something,
ex. gr. 7) agsrri lariv iwatverov, virtue is praiseworthy ; oux aya&ov
zzokvx.oiptf.viri, Horn.; ei'S' vitii, tlr aviagbv TraTSer yiyvovrai, dyvoiT,
Xaksirh dxpozrw uouvstos, where we could say in English more
1 Even as genitives absolute, nZ rn'xm-Xiovt*, in a deposition (evidence) in
Demosth. Mid. & 45.
330
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
fully, a stupid hearer is a disagreeable thing,Aristoph. Eccl. 236.

"Xq-nfJuiTtx wogi^fiv elmoquTaTov yvirt. It is most usually done when
the adj. refers to several separate objects, which have been named
before, and which are all, or the greatest part of them, things:
Tov aiiyjiai xti rriv xetpaXw (pxivti xf)^pv<tuy.im, Herod. : 'Amp
YLapiiivios xa! xt/aiv dîrtâ. dypiojTa.ro., ./Elian H. A. 3, 2.
7. The subject, as in Latin, commonly is not expressed, when
ever the termination of the verb and the context sufficiently shew
it, and when there is no particular stress on it, whilst in such a
case we always use the pronouns personal, I, thou, he, she, it, &c.
Obs. 5. Yet something may be added to the pronoun, which is omitted by way of
apposition, ex.gr. 'O it Mami rrif"ArXarrts iteuconvpai ttur7s, And I the ion of Maja,
daughter of Altai, tcait on them, Lucian.
8. The noun of the subject is likewise omitted, when the verb
denotes the usual occupation or profession of a definite individual
known by this occupation, ex. gr. aqikitifyi or mjxa/vEt, the trum
peter gives the signal ivith the trumpet. Thus Demosth. says,
dvayvdnsTzi vy.w, he shall read to you, (speaking of the usual
appointed reader,) and Herod, in speaking of usual occupations
at sacrifices, the chace, &c. (2, 47. 70.) Compare below, Obs. 6.
9. The same is done, where we say it, meaning some effect of
nature, or the result of circumstances, ex. gr. Cei, it rains, (where
we must not understand Zsus, although the Greeks often said
6 Zeus Sei, and the like :) zspotmixaivu, it announces itself, (ex. gr.
in the atmosphere ;) e^riXuas Se, and so it shewed itself, (Xenoph.
Mem. 1, 2, 32.)
10. Impersonal verbs, that is to say, verbs which have no refer
ence to any person or subject, are of a very difierent nature ; the
subject with them is not a kind of mystery, or left in the dark,
but the action, to which they refer, whether it be expressed by an
infin. or any dependent proposition, is the real subject of such
verbs, of which verbs the peculiarity consists simply in their sub
ject not being expressed by a noun or infin., with an article, sup
plying the place of a noun : ex. gr. e'J-eitti ixoi iiriitxi, i. e. to dmhtxt
s&o-Tt /Aot, (to go away is permitted to me,) it is permitted to me
to go away, (I am at liberty to go.) Of this kind are StT, ygh,
dvoxqn, Soxei", (look for all these above among the Anomalous,)
zjqevet, it becomes, iî^rai, it is possible, and others, of which
some also admit of personal constructions, which are easily under
stood ; hence complete phrases, like e%ei Xoyov, (consentaneum est,)
are to be considered as impcrsonals of this kind.
SYNTAX.
331
11. The French on is most commonly rendered, (according to

127. 4.) by the pronoun ris, in some cases also by the 2 pers.,
ex. gr. <$ains at, {on diroit,) ' you would say ;' or, as in Latin, by
the 3 pers.pl., or by the pass., chiefly in the expressions xn\,
Xiyerai, but also in other expressions, (Thuc. 7, 69.) "Oweg <niayjzvaw it tois (/.tydKois dyaiait,
Obs. 6. The word r)t may also lie omitted, and consequently the 3 pers. ring, used
alone, if by the French general pronoun on, the Eng. one, we understand either
1.) the person who performs theaction, (compare 8.) ex. gr. To* ?.T7â rrpvtnyxarta,
(qu'on apporte la lanlerne,) " let the lantern be brought" Xenoph. Symp. 5, 2. ; or
2.) the indefinite subject of a preceding verb, ex. gr. Olx fn> 9i[ S}ytT<rBai, ikt
t)(hi/tif Ji, if is impossible to be a good commander in chief, if one be not prudent, Plato
Meno. 38.
12. But when the nomin. is without a verb, we generally must
supply the verb swat, ex. jr. "Ex.Xw eya, I am a Greek,ra riv
(pi'Xiwv x'ottx,Sipta/vi'Sri oi3 p^Stov dnntriit,ootyhs yap xal SiTos b avrig.
Obs. 7. Some words are seldom construed otherwise, than in this elliptic manner,
as especially Xrotfios, ex. gr. xctyu *d?%w> ortovv 'Itsi/aos, iav TavS' ovrut 1xr"> Demosth.
and even without iyv, Lucian Cutapl. 10. Km} ft*, tyyvnras vp.7, 'irotfiat votpitirx^Btu,
Somn. 6. see Heind. ad Plat. Phadr. 60. Valck. ad Phmn. 076- Homer has in the
same way Ixihimi, wanting, destitute, ex.gr. II. i. 481. 1.225. See also f(win, 160.
The nomin. x*> and it&yxn, necessity, Srtfui, right, are used in the same manner as
impersonats, omitting is-i,it is necessary, it is right : ti xai rtum itxyxn ; is not this
also needful ! See Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. C8. The verbal adj. neut. nn is used in
the same way in the nomin., ex. gr. mrrin, "faciendum est," one must do, it must be
done. See J 134. 10.
The nomin. absolute is different; stated below 145. Obs.
130.Object. Oblique Cases.
1. The person or thing, on which an action is performed, or to
which that action refersthe objectis always in one of these
three cases, gen., dat., accus., which on that account are called
dependent, oblique cases.
2. The proximate object, or necessary relation of the transitive
verb, without which this verb cannot be conceived, commonly is
in the accus., Xa^lidtai tot affwi'Sa, / take or seize the shield; but
the remote object named along with the accus. and with intrans.
verbs, is connected by a prep., haixfidta/ tot daittb'a iwb rov zsaasd\ov, I take the shield from the nail ; tarnxa ev tu eo~d<ptt, I stand
on the ground.
3. The relations of more remote objects, which return most
frequently, are generally expressed by a mere casus, which in
the European languages, which have cases, is chiefly the gen. and
332
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
dat., ex. gr. I (jive the money to the man, he assured me ok his
benevolence.
4. But languages differ greatly in this respect ; what is ex
pressed in one by one case, is rendered in another language by
another case ; and very frequently one language employs a prep.,
where the other simply uses a case, or some may use either the
prep, or the casus: ex. gr. in English, / gave the letter to him, or
/ gave to him (he letter.
Obs. 1. This must be steadily kept in view to form a correct judgment of the
nstances, where a relation is expressed in Greek by a case, which in the English
and oilier languages requires a prep. These instances are commonly explained, as
if there were a prep, omitted, which formerly governed that case. This may often
explain such a sentence, but it is by no means necessary that such a prep, should
always have been actually employed in that connection, and that it was omitted
only for brevity's sake ; and very often it is not even possible to specify the exact
Greek prep., which in that instance governed precisely that case. It will, therefore,
suffice to bear such a prep, in the mind, and to assume that it is comprised in the
form of the casus. All the three oblique casus are used in Greek in the way stated
in the following Sections.
5. Nothing, however, is more common in the ancient lan
guages, (and it may be considered as one of their fundamental
principles,) than that, whenever the object has already been
named, and the reference to it is abundantly apparent from the
verb itself, (hey do not express either of the two objects, (just as
in other instances they do not express the subject and the pronoun
possessive,) and thus avoid that multiplicity of pronouns, which
greatly obstructs our modern languages. It will be sufficient to
direct the attention of the learner to this particular nature of the
ancient languages with the addition of a] few examples : 'Ev ri
S' at rut tyvXwv zsXeTaroi watv &v$ptxojraTo.i, liraiwvam oi zsoXTtxi, (here
we must mentally supply ra-vrnv before inawovait, Xenoph. Hell.
3, 4, 3.) 'EwayyEiXa/AEVoy tov 'AynatXdou rfa ar^rslxv, (when
Agesilaus offered himself to command the army,) SiSdauiv oi AaxeSai/xovioi (viz. avrcf) ooairegi rrrnati : Athen. 339. *Ov fa '.'fy, Tar
Xiiquf ow dyif-treu (viz. avrov.) But in this, as in all other in
stances, where it produces an emphasis, or harmonious fulness,
the pronouns may be equally well used.
OLs. 2. Another kind of omission of the object is that of the refleeiive 'utvni,
ifiicu<rc>, &c. which may take place or be understood, whenever a verb, which else is
altogether transitive, becomes intrans. in particular combinations, as, for instance,
several compounds of a5.11>, to lead, where the intrans. idea of going is the fundamen
tal meaning, commonly, however, with the accessary idea of going with pomp, or in a
crowd, ex. gr. 'i'v^î rns
rfttiyems rsii rveamp, he went out of the road, when
SYNTAX.
333
the tyrant approached, (as if it were, moved toward) him.) Such cases belong to Dic
tionaries, and we must remember 1.) not to be too ready with this explanation, and
not to adopt it in prose-writers in particular, but when we are fully convinced that
the phrase in question is really customary ; nor 2.) ought we to consider the omission
of iauriv as necessary in every instance, since in a great many verbt the assumption
of their primitive, immcdiative, and causative signif. (according to 113. 2.) is the
most philosophically correct, ex. gr. in if/up*' to ruth forth, excite.
Obs. 3. Properly it is only the part, of a verb, which can he construed with the
same case, as that verb governs. Subtt. and adj. derived from a verb, convert the
case of the latter into the gen., or necessitate a circumlocution. But we frequently
find in the Attic Writers the accus. as well as dat. of the verb joined to the noun
with a peculiar energy and precision, ex. gr. ixuXsuBnrixii rm, prone to, Si ixari? Jivfuftt, the action ofdistributing to each, Tfls Wftifyi rois
fora display to strangers ;
rk puriuett ffnnrvs, one who meditates on superhuman things, Plato Apol. 2. from
^mti'i/ n, to meditate on ;'Aviizmv ittat iw ys %3tTâ. ti xai trg&ij*a yiyunftiia, not
hearing ofsomething, which had occurred, Plato Alcib. II. 7. (usually utvixmj utai t/.)
The adj. !{<mmi is always construed in this manner, and hence combined with the
verb subtt., it signifies to deny, and, (like ijnj"V3a/,) governs not only the infiu. (i'>si;
situ ToTyirat,') but also the accus., ex. gr. %-xus l\a^vos ifit a *vv Xtyus, Plato Eulhyd.
283.
O'js. 4. Many verbs may be construed either with an object, or in its stead with
another sentence or proposition by means of a conjunction. Sometimes both con
structions are found together with one verb, Plato Gorg.TJ. Kai xfipaT* rxsxrxwdZvraj xai Qt\vt, xtti ovu; etv Zfftv ui T&Mwrttrst Xiyuv, Rep, 6. p. 490. T> ToXXut
ixavuf, iiotrt; rtit pMvlav, xai ert eiiius alrui wiU vytis fârTU.
131.Accusative.
1. The most natural use of the accus. to denote the proximate
or immediate object of the verb, ( 130. 2.) requires no further
explanation. We will merely state the instances, in which the
Greek deviates in this respect from other languages.
Obs. 1. Individual instances, where the object is in the accut. in one language as
proximate to the verb, and in the other as more remote in the yen. or dat., or con
strued with a prep., can be learned only by practice, and from Dictionaries ; as, for
instance, to imitate a person requires in German {nachahmeii) the dat., while in Greek,
Latin, French, and English, it governs the accus., ex. gr. tufuTrsu r 'HâxXia,
imitatur Herculem ; or when we say in English, he swore by the Gads, the Greek has
Tils Bull S/ism. The following are a few of those Greek verbs, of which the go
vernment differs from that of the same verbs in German: xtXaxiCtn, to flatter,
XavSavuv {rivit,) to be concealed from, atiixuv, to do injustice to, uQtXiiv to be useful to,
[sXan-Tuv, to hurt, uvalfyufxuv (t(v,) to run away from ; all of which govern the
accus. in Greek.
2. Verbs, which properly have no transitive signif., (verba
neutra, intransitiva,) may sometimes be taken in a transitive
sense, and then govern the accus., ex. gr. of piTv, to flotv, you may
say in Greek, al wrr/ai piovn yikct xai /xeXt, while we should say,
331
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the fountains overflow with milk and honey. There is no diffi

culty in such cases, which belong to the Dictionaries.
3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek language to give to the verb
a subst. denoting the meaning of the verb in the abstract, chiefly
for the purpose of adding another modification, ex. gr. xivlwsvau
roy-rov rov xt'vXt/vov, (/ will risk the risk,) I will expose myself to
the danger ; X$ i'ov ti'Xkttov, he lives a very agreeable life ; ipavequs
rov woXs/xov woXe/xtjito/xev, we will war an open war ; ri aSix/a, ?jv
rdlxouv at, (the wrong, with which I wronged you,) the injustice,
whichl didyou, (compare 5.) yXuxvv vnvov xoi/xa7&asi, ItstiAeKovrat
vsao-QLV ewi/xi\Ei(zv. The Greek thus avoids the powerless accumu
lation of our to do, make, cause, have, &c. (See the same con
struction with the pass. 134. Obs. 2.)
Ob. 2. Even the predicate with the verb SSuu sometimes has such an additional
Jtindred accut., ex. gr. Aiixie iri rat /uylrai huXilai. The excellence of such ex
pressions becomes eminently conspicuous by the fruitless attempt to render them
as energetically in other languages. In verbt, which actually are Irani., this con
struction mostly is contrary to logic, but by no means obscure or difficult to be
Understood, as ayveitt ayvotuv *lff%trny.
4. The Greeks also use the acctw. in several phrases for the
more remote object ; for instance, the proximate object of otoieTv
is the action, of Xiysiv it is the words ; the more remote object of
both is the person, to whom something is done or said : neverthe
less the Greeks always say xaxus zsotiiv rtva, to do harm to any
one, kxxSs \syuv nva, to speak ill of one. But there are also
many verbs, which may be conceived as having two different
relations, both as proximate objects, and consequently both in
the accus. ; ex. gr. to wrap, I wrap the child (up in a cloak,) and
the cloak (round the child.)
5. These two cases explain the peculiarity, that all such verbs in
Greek often have the two relations at once in the same sentence
in the accus., or to use a shorter expression, that they govern two
accus., of which one in most instances denotes the person, and
the other the thing, to which the action refers ; ex. gr. ri woiri<r<u
avrov ; what shall I do to him? raoXXa ayaS'a n?v raoX.iv ejtoiWev :
SiSairxot/ji rovs raaTJar auippoavvriv, (exactly as in Lat. docere aliquem
artem :) nfizlous xghy.dra. vi-msay. The same is observed with
the verbs ' to clothe,' and to * take away :' evWeiv two. rov yyrwvx,
vwoo'sTv Tivse xa/3/3^rt'var, (to put coarse country-shoes on one ;) ov ryjy
^vyr^v apciXsro, (whom he had deprived of life;) eregoy xsaXox
ixSt/owr yjTuva, tov east/Toy exsTvov /A<p'E<7V :~Toy* woXe/xiwf rnv yaw
SYNTAX.
335
aTTEffTE^rixa/XEV : and touto

avdyxxî /xe :ov as d-Tloxû-^/ai rat
Epiar SuGTrqaylaf : and likewise the verbs 1 to require,' ' desire,' and
.others '.
6. The accus. is a still more remote object, when, as is fre
quently the case in Greek, it denotes only a part, circumstance,
or more definite object, to which a general assertion is limited,
ex. yr. xaXos sari to ow/ax, (he is handsome in his body,) he ii of a
fine figure ; sjoSar aixvs, swift-footed ; otoveiv ra. axiXvt, to feel
pains in the legs ; akyw ras yvxScus :Savfiaaros ra. rov zsakiixov,
amazingly clever in what concerns war ; 'S.vqos -hi rm n:a.rqlâ, he
was a Syrian by birth, (by his country,) Sa/xqims ramoâ, So
crates by name. The names of fights and games are also con
strued in the accus. with the verbs referring to them, as Sga/*E~v to
oradlov, nxjni 'OXv/juzhx, eantpavuaîfi ITi/Siae.
Obs. 3. This is the well-known Greek construction so frequently imitated by the
Latin Poets; ex. gr. ' os humerosque Deo similis.' In English this often requires a
prep, like by, &c. and even in Greek the prep. u is frequently used in such cases
with the accm. : hence the Commentators often supply
in such instances, ns
if it had been omitted. But it is better for the learner to accustom himself to con
sider the accus. by itself as the case of the more remote object in Greek : see 130.
Obs. 1. (See the same construction in the past. 134. Obs. 2.)
7. But even verbs, which never have subst. of this kind in the
accus., take this case, whenever there is, instead of the definite
object, a pronoun, or any other general expression, ex. gr. ri
Xpwixac.1 aurai ; what use shall I put it to ? ovx. oTSa, oti aoi /jpuy.ai,
properly, / do not know what use I shall put you to, i. e. what I
am to do with you; zsana. Ei/SaiptovEiv, to prosper in everything,
and the like.
Obs. 4. This also (viz. Text C. and 7 ) explains the two accus. in those cases, where
not the person, but the thing, is the more remote object, as, for instance, in phrases
like, Tij, iv MaaaSim ^(û Ttvt (ZetffSttgovf ivixvfi* i<ra filytret w^tXfjrfrf Triv vroXir :
xcXXi fit rjJ/xuxiy, he has injured me in many things. In some of the verbs mentioned
above (5.) as liitttrxut, \ditn, it may appear doubtful whether the person or thing is
to be considered as the more remote object ; the most natural supposition, however,
is that both objects wese primitively considered as equally proximate.See about
the accus. with the pass, and middle voice, 134. 135.
8. Hither belongs also the accus., which, as in Latin and Ger
man, expresses the duration oftime ; ex. gr. noXuv %oov iraqinemv,
he stayed away a long time with him ; xabr,vro ev MaxeSovix rqns
1 But this does not mean that all such verbs, or that the above verbs are always
constructed in this manner. We only direct the attention of the learner to con
structions, which are general, or attended with some peculiarity. The use of any
verb in particular must be learned from individual study, and from consulting good
Dictionaries.
33G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
oXoyy n?vir, they tarried three ivhole months in Macedonia ; (fa

zjoWo. xs&euoei, and the like, are stated above, 128. Obs. 4.)
The measure of a distance is likewise stated in the accus., ex. gr,
uTtiyjEi St'xo; arxVious, it is at the distance, of ten stadiums.
Obs. 5. The accus. is sometimes added to a proposition as an apposition, when its
meaning is tantamount to which is or will be, ex. gr. II. a>. 735. 7 nt 'A%xiZt 'Ttyv
(awTsy) etro Tv^yw, >.uyooy oXtSpoi, which is a miserable death; Eurip. Orest. 1105.
'Xik xrirafttr, MiviXiu xitrm Tixtiv, we will kill Helena to the bitter grief of Menelaus.
Obs. 6. A proverbial expression is commonly designated by inserting before it in
the context to Xiytftiw, ex. gr. Plato Gorg. init. *AXX' , to Xtyt/twv, Ketrttn ie^rr.s
iiuftn ; do we come, as the saying is, after the feast ?and in the same way, ri rm
tmirio, before a passage from a Poet, and the like. The analogy of other phrases
shews that these are accus. of the neuter gender, which in other languages are ex
pressed by a prep, with its proper casus, (according to the Poet,) &c It is the same
with the adverbial expressions roiifAvrlat, on the contrary, (ex.gr. ourss it, trecy tmyxv
t'iov, ttfiovXiro fiiit, wx nluHsrs Sj8,) raiiro revro, exactly so, and the like.
132.Genitive.
1. The proper use of the gen. with another subst. is shared by
the Greek with other languages. We shall, therefore, state only
its accessary significations, and especially when it is joined to adj.,
verbs, and adverbs.
2. The fundamental idea of a gen. is that of derivation, pro
ceeding from; it has the import of the prep, of or from and out of.
Obs. I. This principle is of the utmost latitude with Poets ; hardly any combi
nation, requiring in common language iri or ij, may not be rendered by Poets in
the gen. only, Aral. 185. of a line, sroSss <; vSba. rilm, from one foot to the other.
3. But, though the Greek language uses merely the gen. in
many instances, in which other languages require a prep., it does
not follow that this same prep, always is omitted, or understood
in Greek. On the contrary, when we occasionally meet with
such a prep., it ought to be considered as having been added only
for the sake of distinctness.
4. The gen. then is employed in Greek,
1.) with most verbs denoting freeing, keeping off, desist
ing, deviating ; ex. gr. aitaWxTrta riva vouov, to free one
from a disease ; Ei'gysiv rivz tth Scckxaaris, to keep one offfrom
the sea; ssûbiv tivs otovwv, (properly to make one cease having
jmins or troubles,) to put an end to one's troubles, {to give
him repose,) Xriy^v rrts Syiqxs, {to have done with wild beasts,)
1 The accus. i/ifirtfa is very different. See 150.
SYNTAX.
337
to leave off the chace ; ufj-xprtTv o'Sov, (to miss one's way ;)
Siz/pepeiv ruv aXKuv, to differ from the others ; ap%m aya&or
ouSev iiatpipei zwrpbs dya&ov, (see about this ofiSev 131. 7.)
2.) With expressions denoting selection or choice, excep
tion, and in general portion or pari of a whole, consequently,
a.) with adj. and pronouns, when they serve to sepa
rate or distinguish an object from others ; ex. gr, ptovosdv^quvuv, the only one of all men ; oiiStis 'Exkmuv, not one
of the Greeks ; ol pgovi/aoi ruv dvSqunruv, properly the sen
sible part of mankind, i. e. barely sensible people ; ruv
dv&puv rots xaXo'iV jtaya&oTV oupsrurspov S"( &avsiv *> SouX.ei/Eiv.
See also above, 130. 5. the instance, *Ev ri S' ay ruv
tyvhuv, in which of the (different) tribes, i. e. in which
tribe.
Hither belong also naturally all superlatives; ex. gr.
rt y.ty'wn ruv viauv dvaiinx :xmyidruv ssivruv rifj.iura.rav
EffTJV dvvip tyikos avvtros re xgu evvous.
Obs. 2. Just as in the proposition expressed in the pi. u
rZ, it3(*rm, the
genders agree, so they do in the sing., when part of a whole likewise in the ting, is
to be expressed. This part, then, is not in the neut. gender, but in the gender of
the word expressive of the whole in the gen., ex. gr. i nXXh rrjt TliXavmnfu, molt
part or the greatest part of the Peloponnesus ; o nft-tws *ov %f>ovov, half of the time ; and
also with superlatives, ex. gr. h SfShrirn rnt fxiûit, the most correct investigation,
Plato Crat. 18.
Obs. 3. The phrase ismrxTis mturiZ
you vjere superior to yourself, is likewise
conformable to this rule.
b.) with adverbs of time, and adverbs ofplace, consi
dered as parts of a more extensive time or place, ex. gr.
rqU rns vfJiipas, three times a day ; Swote rov %rovs, at what
time of the year ? zsoX yris dtyixofAviv ; whither on earth have
I got ? (like the Latin ubi terrarum ?) nxvrxyzjni rSr
dyoqai, everywhere in the market ; zsip'pu rrn n'Kixlxs, far
advanced in years.
Obs. 4. Hither belongs also the expression, E/'f D tttutjffnrUst rfifiifinzt, to this
degree of impudence :Tîs rmra zai/ev Txeiri rk ^rfiyfiarx, to this crisis are matters
arrived, and the like.
c.) with a limitation to a part or portion, (jt,enari /moi
ruv zsqacyfj.iruv, I have a share in the affairs of the state,
am a partner in the business; and hence in all expressions,
where the idea of a part or share is understood, or can be
supplied, ex. gr. sluxx aoi ruv yjpvuA.iruv, I have given to
you of my money, (viz. some or part of my money,) and
338
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
xxrixyx rris xztyaXrts, (properly I am broken in pari of my
head,) i. e. / have a fracture in the head '.
d.) in verbs denoting eating, drinking, and enjoying in
general, or deriving a benefit from, ivhenever the thing
enjoyed is mentioned; ex. gr. Io-SYeiv xêwv, to eat meat,
wiveiv vSaros, to drink water, (eo-SVeiv ra xpia, would signify
to eat the meat tip, and wi'vEiy Sitvp might mean to drink
water habitually,' ' to be a water-drinker /') airokavnv twos,
to enjoy something, (French jou'ir de,) &vho~&xi nvos, to
derive benefit from.
3.) The gen. is further used to denote the material or stuff
of which something consists, ex. gr. o-TEpavoj uaxi'v&wv, a gar
land of hyacinths, or made of hyacinths ; ex. gr. Ivor \&ov
zsav TtzirotnTzi, the whole is made of one stone.
4. ) The circumstances or peculiarities, on which things are,
as it were, dependent, are expressed in the gen. Xe'vSov zjoWwv
erav, a tree of many years (standing;)
yip iîufAaros
tuyakou, for he was of great distinction, of high rank.
5. ) The following kinds of words are generally construed
with the gen. :
1.) Adjectives derived from verbs, have the object of the verb
in the gen., ex. gr. from liriaraSai ri, to understand something,
comes s9rr?iju.aiv rivoy, experienced in a thing ; from E^ra^siv
t, to investigate something, comes E^sraanxos nvos, skilled in
investigating any thing ; oi Wfaxnxol t<2v Sixxlaiv, (from ra
Sixaict.)
The exceptions, when the adj. retains the case of the verb,
are stated above 130. Obs. 3.
2. ) All words denoting plenty or want, worthiness or unworthiness, ex. gr. êros- op6j3ou, filled with troubles, full of
tumult ; (A?iv In to tiv (pgovriSoJv :SeXaâi yl^viij.aruv, to be
in want ofmoney ; aior T(/x?jr, worthy of honor.
Owing to the idea of wanting, needing, Seio-&i in the sense
We may in this way understand many instances of gen., by which a verb refers
rather indefinitely to an object, (Henri, ad tiger. 881.) especially the Homeric
as if it were to run through part of the plain. Thus also the expression
}Uki Ttv *-for<u, to goforwards, onwards, as if it were to go part of the farthermost road,
Xen. Anab. 1, 3, 1. Soph. Aj. 731. with Lobeck's Note But it would be rather
overstraining to explain the Homeric expressions, ex. gr. *t'irS Mtaftoie, vrfirxi
vruÛ, as a part or portion, and it is probably more accurate to say of these, and other
similar Poetical expressions, that the gen. in the old language denoted any general
relation, whenever the proximate one was obvious of itself, pretty nearly as is the
case with the prep, **tA and the accus.
SYNTAX.
339
of requiring, asking, intreating, is construed with a gen.

of the person} we are in need of the person, whom we
implore.
3.) Several other verbs, especially those denoting
reminiscence and forgetfulness, ni/xmiAxt rov %powv, rris
care, contempt, admiration, as tvêXnoSxh x-no'taSacl twos,
to take care of one, i\iyupsXv, KtzratypoveTv, S^t/piaÊiv, &c.
sparing, (petisaSai tivot,
desiring, itxiSeuaiojs eit&vfjiETv*,
ruling over, excelling, dvfytiiruv a%%w, JiSovvs x^xrstv, mpieivzi rov sjfipov,
indicting, condemning, xxmyopsiv, xarayiyvwaxeiv,
but not without many exceptions and limitations ; for several
of these verbs may also be construed with the acciis., partly
in the same sense.
The gen. is likewise construed with most of the verbs, which
have a relation to the senses, excepting the sight; oeiv y.vpm,
to smell of perfumes, vExgou i*ri iirreaiat, not to touch a dead body ;
robs SoliXovs tyevce rris e\eu$epixf :dxouai naidtw xXa/ovror, / hear
a child crying'.
4.) But it is especially
the Comparative,
which always has the object, with which the comparison is made,
in the gen., ex. gr. ptpi^wv 1/u.ou, taller than I, autpurepoi lyi rov
tiitiaaxoiXov, he is wiser than his master, xaXXiov lixov aSeis, you sing
better than I do ; a%zrr)s ouSev xrrifjLx eV> <je/xvoteov.
Obt. 5. The more complete construction of the compar. is with 3, {than, Lat. quam,
see below the particles, 149.) but it is used only where the gen. cannot be em
ployed. The Greeks are so fond of this latter construction, that they even put into
the gen. the object, to which the comparison does not directly apply j ftti^nx IfUS
iit-rget%t* :Aristoph. Eccl. 235. trir'ut Tls rris rixouefis ptaXkov Wit'i/mûi* av ; (who
more than the mother ?) The ambiguity, which sometimes arises from this con
struction, can only be explained by the thing itself from the context, Herod. rio{ftt&u. BLtiXi'Xir* raXXor itAssu rtv rrarôf, which was much smaller than his father 9 or
smaller than that which his father left behind?The following construction is of a
different kind, Mijy t uxovrt yiynmi (Ikafin rod xiToiitxoTos, i. e. n rS trtTainxon.
Obs. 6. The words a\X and iti{ sometimes imitate the compar. ; ex. gr. aXXtf
ipw, another than J, 'ingot rovraiv, different from this.
* Hither belongs also the verb
ti, to love in the sense of desiring, seeking
after ; whilst Qt\u Tim is to love in the sense of having an affection for.
3 ixeutu most commonly governs the accus. of the sound, and the gen. of him, wb.0
produces it ; there are, however, exceptions in both instances. See Steph, Thtt.
Z 2
340
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
6. In the following and similar more distant relations, a little

consideration soon shews that the construction with the gen. is
easily accounted for from the gen. itself, though it is a more ready
explanation in grammar to assume that there is a word, and com
monly a prep, omitted or understood.
1. ) The more precise sense of a general expression, where
we say ivith regard to, with respect to,' Kyyvrarx avru eI/lu
yimvs, I am very nearly related to him, (with respect to
family, with regard to origin, descent,) Herod. ; amaus Appeven
wa/Xa/v, childless with respect to male descendants ; vxfiiws
a/pxloc yxfj.iv, (ripe with respect to marriage,) marriageable ;
Sawr St'v&giuv. Hither belong also the expressions, where
Evfxiz, on account of, because of, is usually supplied, evSoiixo'Aiû <re row tqoicov, I account you happy, because of your
disposition ; olxniqa as rov TraSovt. Compare the infin.
140. Obs. I.
2. The relation of value; when the value itself, or the
price may be in the gen, (genitivus pretii,) $payyj.w dyogxêm
n, to buy something for a drachm; irXi'wv rovro Tipiwpwti, J
esteem this of the greatest value; and the merchandise or
article purchased may equally be construed in the gen. (geni
tivus mercis,) tqeTs y.\xs xxrsb-nxe rov luttov, he paid three
minas for the horse ; yjriiJ.xrx rovrav n^xmrxi, (he stipulates
money for it,) he gets paid for it : see ad Plat. Meno. 28.
3.) In verbs like to seize, fake, the relation to the part, by
which a tvhole is seized, is put in the gen., Xafiew, more com
monly Xa^lrs^xi, nva tzooos, %Eigof, to seize, or take one by the
foot, hand ; rr,s xeipor aye, lead him, take him by the hand,
(by his hand ;) rov \vxov ruv Sirorv x%xr>, I hold the wolf
fast by the ears. But KzfisTv nva xE1' means to seize one,
lay hold of him with the hand.
4. ) To the question when ? but only of an indefinite time
of some duration, (compare 133. 3. 4.) wktus, îqas waisiV
ri, to do something by night, in the day-time ; vtoXkvv riix,tqm
ov ^ns\lrrtxx, T have not practised for several days; exeIVe
ovx xtpixvztrxi etojv /Mutant, he will not get thither within 10,000
years, Plato Phcedr. 248.
04s. 7. In this sense the prep. rt(),of, (Lat.t/e,) is sometimes omitted ; Od. A. 173.
E;Vs Si
ti kx) mitt, where the gen. may be explained, ' this concerning my
father,' for the this never needs to be expressed, when the thing itself follows.
See the Nole to Soph. Philoct. 439.
SYNTAX.
341
Obt. 8. Sometimes the omission of the word, to which the gen. refers, is very
plain to the understanding, and easily supplied ; ex. gr. in the following expressions :
nun o'uk itnir\is rnQoi, (exactly the French, Cela n'esl pas a"un homme sage,) this is
not the pari, the act of a wise man ;>h txiris utm, not to be every man's business,
(i. e. not to be so easily done;) rut ii/xJy is-iir, it is one of the unjust things, (i.e. sim
ply, it is an injustice.) Hither belong also the instances above, 4. 2. c. d.
Obs. 9. The word >'*, house, is most commonly omitted on putting the name of
the owner or tenant in the gen.; ex.gr. u-'?u..\ us 'AXKifiie&ov, we went to Ahibiades's
{house.) Hence the expression iv Shiv, us Stw, properly in or to the house of Hades,
(i.e. in or to the shades below. )The instances, where the article of the word omitted,
(<,
&c.) is retained, are stated above, 125. 5.
Obs. 10. The omission is not so evident with exclamations ofastonishment or sorrow,
sometimes with an interjection, ex.gr. oif&ai rm xotxuv, alas, what misfortunes ! Z Ztv,
rns rxtsotyias, O Jupiter, what cunning ! and sometimes without, rns rv%ns, 0 fate !
(0 wretched fate!) rUs Ka-îrrirat, " wât stupidity !
See about the gen. ftto, trsv, &c. before their subst. instead of the dativus commodi,
133. Obs. 4.
133. The Dative.
1. The dat. properly is the opposite of the yen., since it denotes
an approximation. It is pretty nearly the same in Greek as in
English, and comprises like this several relations, which are more
distinctly expressed by the prep, for, towards, to, &c. and require
no explanation, as lowxi rm, to give to one; tyfiôs rm, hostile to
one ; nifota'Sai toIV toiôis, and the like.
2. But the dat. is used in Greek
1.) with verbs denoting coming together, meeting, oixikw
rivi, to have intercourse with one ; iîyââi rm, to fight with
one.
2. ) with words, which signify equality, similarity ; ex, gr.
o[aoi6s rm, like one. Hence the dat. is put with
6 auras, the same :
olros Efiv o avros exefaui, this is the same as that, similar to
that.
Obs. 1. Just as we have seen above that with compar. even the indirect object of
the comparison is in the gen., i ubris also takes the dat., when this pronoun simply
refers to a common third object ; ex. gr. rk mirk tiox"
I experience the same us
you ; tivu* etra StiXr,;, xark raiirk, (for rk aura,) rais fyiptrit, to suck the breast as
infants ; Gvtrtvs Kara, rot etvrot xgo'tot 'Hâz\ii yitofittos, Theseus, who lived at the same
time as Hercules. But here too ambiguities may arise, as rk airk xiyu \ntltf, I say
th esame to him, or the same as he says.
3. ) with words denoting any action, which has a tendency
to be useful or hurtful, (dativus commodi et incommodi,) see
Obs. 2. 3.
342
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. The dat. further denotes

1. ) the tool or instrument* used. The Greeks say in
general yghabai tivi, (to make use of,) and in particular,
ex. gr. itxrinnm pzf&w, to beat with a stick ; a/xiXri wsiroivt^svov, made tvith a chisel ; riTpduxErat /3e\Ei sr tov wixov. Add
to this that, wherein or whereby one is or does something ;
ex. gr.
nlv eôwrlx ruqxvviX, rout sbspytaixis Sn/x-aycoysr, by
his power he is a ruler, but by his kind acts a leader of the
people ; naai toiV toioi/tois-, (the virtues of the Lacedemonians
having previously been enumerated,) iraftx ait rtymxio oavTov,
Plato Alcib. I. 38.
2. ) the manner, Txvrx lyivtrn toiSe rSi r^hita, this happened
in this manner j Spbixa naprixSw, he came up running ; ixzyxKf
onouo'-ri itxvrx iHqxmTo.
3. ) the cause, <p6fioj ewgaTTov, I did it from fear; xz/uueiv
voao; tivi, to be afflicted with sickness ; dXysXv rm, to be in
pain, grieve about something; ts'^vtixev airo^-Xnî'a :ov yap
qtypoixlx wpxTTtii tovto.
4. ) a fixed definite time, Tltxpnv rri Tgir/i vixiqx, he came on
the third day ; ry vstqaix rm jiovkm ixikouy, on the follow
ing day they assembled the senate.
Obs. 2. The dativus commudi et incommodi comprises that relation, which is ex
pressed by the dat. of almost all languages, such as it is, for instance, in Homer's
Ho-scl at Kara K?.a3ifymofiivM tvniwv (icttr-'ivrircii) what the fates spun fur him, (good
or bad,) at his birth; MuiAaw 5i srXcw is-i<Aausv, Soph, for the sake of Menelaus we
proceeded on this voyage. On this basis rests also the lighter dat. commudi et incom
modi, which is added in relation to the design or will of a person, ex.gr. 'Etru&f
ri%irx iti/rtii il xcuits ra Uyiuit* \unucn, as soon as her children would have been
sufficient here, but the mbrut refers to the expectation of the parents. The dat. like
wise refers to the frcling or sentiment, which an action excites in one, Piato Lys. 'H
ftr,-r,* ice ffi Tmiy t, n ct, fiotjXri, 5V xvrn paxafies fy, here that thou mayest be happy /
was enough for the understanding, but the airj is superadded for the feelings : and
it is the same on speaking of a prejudice, Plato Sophist. Ol rxTitts nit wuf nfesputSouvrxi, cret, ecvrots iâfia^rnvuffi, where we must not seek in the oivtoTs the precise
direction of the trespass (against them, to their prejudice,) but merely a collateral
relation to the feelings of the fathers. It is from such passages, that we must learn
correctly to understand others, where the dat. fie), !, &c. is inserted, in a manner
particularly familiar to the Greeks, merely to interest the feelings. There is a
striking instance of this apparently useless dat. in Od. I. 569. where Menelaus is
told that the Gods (664.) would send him to Elysium, OtW t%us 'Eximr, xal crtp,,
yttfAôs Ates \atri.
.

Obs. 3. It is also owing to this dalivus commodi that the Greeks add the dat. to
4 The Latins in tbis instance use their ablative, and thence call ablativus instru
ment! what in Greek must be called dativus instrumenti, (or dativia xei intervientis.')
SYNTAX.
the proportion instead of the gen. belonging to the subst. ; Herod. 1, 81. 'E) <rns
apifyis 3> eft *xSlv* r> pwiit 1 them, instead of their mother sat on the waggon. Hence
there is sometimes a real gen., as if it were carelessly put after such a flat. : see Od.
j. 231. 232. And a dat., which does not at all belong to the proposition, is some
times used with words expressive of relationship and kindred, instead of the gen.,
(such as a relation, friend, guest,} Plato Soph. 216. Too %t*v ^n> tiitui y *ruv$tzvoi/iiiv.
Obs. i. But frequently the gen. of a pronoun personal belonging to a subsequent
subst., is used instead of the dalitms commodi or incommodi, Plato Phardo, towards the
end, 'Ey env fixgos iv rois e-xiXtei yivrtrtti, where rev, which belongs to ffKiXttri, stands
instead of rot with the verb.Again, A/ rS fttv av$*s u xurtu irvvBctvovrxi, here pou
has its full signif., but it comes before, because it stands at the same time for /til.
See the Index to Plat. Meno., Sfc. under Genitivus; aud about the dat. with the
pass, the following Section, No. 4.
\M.Of the Verb. The Passive Voice.
1. The influence of the verb in its primitive and simple form,
that is to say in the act. voice, having been sufficiently shown in
what has been observed of the construction of the noun, we have
now only to notice the pass, and the middle voice.
2. The pass, from its nature has as subject in the nomin., what
ever is as object in the accus. with the active voice. The subject
or nomin. of the act. now becomes the object, by which I suffer,
and when this is mentioned with the pass, in Greek, it is generally
done by the help of the prep, viio with the gen. ; b 'AîUrof ktsivej
tov "Exroga, is in the pass, b "Kxruq xreiysrai irno rov 'AyjXkius,
Hector is killed by Achilles.
3. Instead of u-no the prep, mps likewise with the gen., is fre
quently used ; Trgos- anitrm SteqzirEveoSixi, to be respected by all;
and sometimes mapa, Plato Symp. 175. Olât yxp y.E <n<xp aov
cosines usX-nqcah-ni^xt, and 1% especially by the Ionians, Herod.
El' ri o-oi xeâgioYxivov e| e/xou e&wg-nbn, when something agreeable
has been given to you by me ; ibid. To mmSrlv ix. rov av&qos.
4. But very often the pass, is construed with the dat. only,
without any prep. ; Demosth. Oh yap {is iCEôuaiat litpirmo avroTs ra rr,s nokitas, the affairs of the state were transacted by them
not to their own advantage :Mamv fiixiv nina. Trovsirai.This
construction is most usual with the perf. pass. KaXus xiXtxrzl
aoi, it has been beautifully said by you, i. e. you have beautifully
said.
Obs. 1. The Greeks make a very frequent use of this pass, construction to supply
the per/, act., which in many vrrbs occurs little or not at all, as just now xixiâ,
which would have been required in the above expression ; see 97- Obs. 6.That
this construction is liable to frequent ambiguities, is unquestionable, (trr n
344
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Xta.i*r<u, you have said all f all hat been taid to you ?)but a careful attention to
the context easily removes the ambiguity.
5. According to the general rule it is only the nearest object,
in the accus. with the act. voice, which can become the subject of
the pass., and this rule is strictly observed by the German, Latin,
and other languages. But as many an object, which in Greek
stands with the act. in the gen. or dat., actually is from its nature
its nearest object, or at least can readily be understood as such,
a/AeXtTv Tivor, to be neglectful of one, wirsi/Eiv nvl, to give credit to
one, the Greeks allow themselves to say likewise in the pass, ri
rovrov Trpxy/AccTac ifjkiXciTat viro ruv &e<v, (are neylected by the Gods,)
o \J/Et/jK oil mriverxi, (the liar is not credited,) whilst in German
we must say, to the liar no credit is given, &c.
6. The pass, in Greek may also be construed with an accus.
Whenever the act. (according to 131 . 5.) has two accus., and
the accus. of the person becomes the subject of the pass., the
accus. of the thing continues to be used for the object of the joass. ;
ex. gr. o! irxtSu JiSaoxovrai aojôautm, the boys are taught modesty ;
a(paige&is- rv apyjhv, who has had the command taken from him.
7. The two last-mentioned instances are frequently found com
bined in one proposition, so that the dat. of the person, which
stands as the more remote object with the act. becomes the nomin.
of the pass., and the accus. of the act. continues to be the object
of the pass., ex. gr. effiTgeVeiv to? 2,wxpa.rtt rw Siairav, (to entrust
the arbitration to Socrates,) becomes, h "Luxpa-rns ewiTge'irsTai tm
S/aiTav, Eurip. tw 5' ex %sg<Jv ocp^xiô^xt, she is snatched away
from my hands, Plato Tim. 60. Tb 5e uito nu>s to vorepov max
ii,apirxa^h, this from which all moisture has been withdrawn by
the fire ; Se'Xtoj- iyyeypaixîyn %v&v)IJmtx :faro -aoKius rr,y nyt/j.ovi'ctv mit'îvTO :nôiMfibei/s vti derov EKelpsro to fiftctp, (where xei'êiv
signifies to tear from :) exkoweij robr otpâX/x-ovi.
Obs. 2. In some instances belonging to No. 6. the construction of the accus. with
the pass, may also be considered in the way described in 131. 6. where kxtx is
usually supplied; rktTTt/iai rii> xifukti*, lam beaten on the head.In others the
verb, (like the act. according to $ 131 . 3.) governs even as paw. an accus., which con
tains the import of the verb as subtt., to add an additional determination adjectivety j
Ti/ari-iTKi trXnyif r,kkit, he is struck many strokes.Lastly the aor. pass, too fre
quently governs the accus.ia its medial signif. : see 136. 2.
8. The verbal adjectives in reoi and tos are pass, by their
nature, and correspond to the part. pass. The verbal adj. in teo*
conveys the idea of necessity, and corresponds to the Latin part.
SYNTAX.
345
in dus : (piXnTEor, amandus, one whom one must love, who is to be

loved. The verbal adj. in ros corresponds in meaning and form
to the Latin part, in tus, and has also the same signif., but not
the same construction ; for with regard to the latter it is a mere
adj. ; ex. gr. vXexros, plaited, rpiwrhf, twisted, icomros, made (by
labor,) KaraaxevQcôs, prepared. But it generally conveys the idea
of possibility or ability, like the Latin adj. in -His, in German
bar:for instance, syjEWror, versatilis, (drehbar,) 'flexible,' blurbs,
visibilis, (sichtbar,) ' visible,' inovsos, audibilis, (horbar,) ' au
dible.'
9. Precisely on account of this their pass, nature, (the verbal
adj. rbs, however, merely in its second signif.,) they refer in their
connection to the subject of the act., which is in the dat. in the
way mentioned above, at 4. ex. gr. Touto ou fmrov ey/ iMt, this is
not to be spoken by me, i. e. I dare not say it, 'H -noKis d'QeXnireot
ml lyi, the state must be assisted by you, i. e. you must be uscfid
to the state. But frequently this relation, as being of a more
general nature, is omitted, when the sense is, one must, one can ;
Auriof o roiovros voptoy xa oi5x lareos xt/gior blvoh, this law must be
abolished, and not permitted to be valid.
10. The neut. te'ov in this way, with or without lyiv, corresponds
to the Latin nomin. neut. in dum, Xexte'ov iylv, or merely Xexte'ov,
it must be said, one must say ; it then assumes all the relations
and connections of the verb, ex. gr. iperm e'xsiv wsigaTEOv, one must
endeavour to be virtuous ; rots Xoyots too-exte'ov tov vouv, one must
apply the mind to the speeches ; ravroc tiivrx noi-nriov fjuot, all this
must be done by me, I have all this to do. The corresponding use
of the neut. rov, (but without any such verbal connections,) is,
ex. gr. fiiurov yi, one can live ; roTs oux. e&tov syi, who cannot go
out, Hesiod. . 732.
Obi. 3. The Attics employ the verba/ rin in the same sense in the pi. : frciirU, it
it neccttary to go; iBriiim iri rrtt rîya, the leet mutt be drunk along with it. See
Anom. mm. (Compare also 129. 1.)
Obi. 4. Another Attic peculiarity is the verbal adj. in rim, which, as it were by
virtue of its intrinsic meaning 1t7, sometimes has the subject of the act. in the accut.
instead of the dat., Plato Gorg.501. Ton fiaoxifuup tvlalptm iTv< rvfprujti* "hwxr'm
xai itxnr'ui, (Heind. ad Plat. Phxdr. 128.)
*
Obi. 5. Verba deponentia (!) 113.) being also employed paitive/y in some of their
forms, also give verbal adj. in the same sense, as if they came from regular
active! ; ijyajâ/, / work, icyatir, what can be worked or it worked, Ifyat'm, one must
work, the work mutt be done. Even in some verbt, whose pan. or med. assumes a
signif., which may be considered as a new simple meaning, and as active, the verbal
adj., in some current or familiar connections, also has both meanings, that which
346
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
proceeds from the real active, and that which proceeds from the past, or med.; rutin,
one must convince, from xiiSv, and one must obey, from rti3np.ni.But it is very
remarkable that in Tfirepai, (I turn to, go to,) the aor. 2. past. \rîrr,i forms a par
ticular verbal adj. in this sense râmr'uy.
35. The Middle Voice.
1. Before we enter on the use of the middle voice, we must first
distinguish its signif. from its form, because the particular mean
ings of the pass, and 7iiiddle voice are not regularly distributed
even among those tenses, which have a double form, and the
middle voice does not always immediately convey a distinct idea
of its form and signif. But with regard to syntax, the Greek
verb called medium or middle voice is a verb, which along with a
pass, form, has a medial signif.
Obs. 1. Hence the aor. pass., which, as we shall presently see, has in many verbt
the medial signif., is in all such instances comprised in the middle voice. For, though
its form, according to the most general analogy, is not a pass., but an act. one, yet it
is completely removed from the act. by its use, and ought to be considered as a real
aor. pass., which, like other tenses of the pass., is again susceptible of the medial
signif.
2. We have seen above 89. 1. that the main signif. of the
medium is reflective, and that this very naturally proceeds from
the pass. A verb has a complete reflective signif., whenever the
subject of that verb is at the same time its nearest object, which,
in the act. stands in the accus. Thus, for instance, of Xouu nua),
I wash any one, the pass, is Xouju-ai, / am washed, and this as
medium means / wash myself or bathe. Again aitayyâ, anay%xi
riva, to strangle, hang one, medium anzyyiahai, duxy^scahai, to
hang one's self;o\tik%u\, anoay/iv, to keep off, medium atnixtabai,
to keep one's self off", abstain from. But it must be remembered
that this first and proper meaning, though apparently the basis of
the use of the middle voice, constitutes a real medium in a very
limited number of such verbs only, as commonly occur in this
reflective sense, viz. besides the above-mentioned verbs, chiefly
those which denote an usual operation on one's own body, like
clothing, cleaning, shaving, brushing, crowning, &c. When the
same relation is to be expressed in any other verb, it can be done
only by means of the reflective pronoun i/uavrbv, ia.vrov, &c,
3. The reflective sense may very often easily be conceived as
a new simple meaning, that is to say, as not reflected on the sub
ject ; oriWtiv, to send, ariKKeabxi properly to send one's self to
some place, i.e, to travel, and thus the medium in several verbs,
SYNTAX.
347
becomes a real intrans. ; wxueiv, to set at rest, irxieoSat, (to set

one's self at rest,) to cease, desist ; ttXzêiv, to cause to wander,
nXz^soSxt, to wander ; tvaxeiv, to regale, sdc*xle'iaqit, to feast, &c.
Obs. 2. These media bear the same relation to their act. verbt as the immecliative
verbs do to the causalivet ; hence there are some passivo-media, which having such
a simple signif., appear exactly like deponents, as yiuipai, I taste, tnrt/iai, I rot,
ik<reftxi, I hope, of which the actives, which seldom occur, can be expressed only by a
circumlocution with causing to : ytuv, I cause to taste, give to taste ; critu, 1 cause to
rot, make putrid ; fotrw, / cause to hope, give hopes. See also fixi'iifixi in the Anom.
4. But the medium also becomes a trans, just as easily. For
exactly as the pass, frequently has, (according to 134. 6.) an
accus. as object with it, so has the medium. This is most readily
the case, when, as in the pass., one of the objects of the active
continues with the medium ; evWsiv nva xtruvx, to put a coat on
one, med. hduaa.a^xi yj.rma., to put a coat on one's self. But the
medium may also have an object of its own, when a new mean
ing, as we have just seen, arises from the reflective action of
the verb, which is conceived as transitive; heqoiiovv wa, to carry
over, (across a river,) med. Tti^cciouadai, (properly to carry one's
self over,) to cross over, pass ; hence it then has the river in the
accus., irepxtovoSat tov T/ygiv, to cross the Tigris :fyofiitv nva, to
frighten any one, tpofiziaSctt, (properly to frighten one's self) to
fear, likewise ipofitToSai tows- Seous, to fear the gods; t/XXsiv, to
pluck, riXX.ET&ai, to pluck one's self, pull out one's own hair ; and
as this is an action, by which one mourns over a person, riWsoSai
nv, to mourn over any one (by pulling out one's own hair.)
5. In all the instances mentioned, the medium arises from the
usual trans, construction of the act. with the accus. (tpoôvât, for
syu <po@j ê.) But just as, (according to 134. 5. 7.) the pews,
proceeds sometimes from the construction with the more remote
object, namely the dat., so does the medium; and the other
object, which was in the accus. with the act., is put in the accus.
also with the medium, ex. gr. n%oniQwo-xi tivi ti, to acquire some
thing for any one, (ex. gr. a country for a state,) w^GriQi-rwa.&a.i ti,
to acquire for one's self, appropriate to one's self; MaaaSu rm
âlvnv, to loosen one's girdle, Kovaaabai rw xsipatXriv, to wash one's
own head.And of the middle voices of this kind, there are several,
which, for us at least, have a new simple trans, signif. ; "nopifaSxl
ti, to procure something for one's self, i.e. to acquire something.
Qbs. 3. Hither belongs the difference between Sum tifuvs, to impose laws, (pro
perly said only of a despotic ruler, who it not subject to the taws,) and 3i<r9/ yi/nm, /*
348
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
propose laws, (said of a state, which gives to itself its own laws, or of a ruler who sub
mits to his own taws.) This difference, however, is not always strictly observed by
the Greek Writers.
6. Thus the most common signif. of the medium is that of the
act., with the addition that the action is for the speaker or agent
himself. And a verb, which has two accus. in the act., may retain
both in the middle voice ; aWw <te rovro, I ask this of you, (leaving
it undetermined whether it be for me, or for another person,) but
aiTovixal <te rovro, (positively,) I request this of you for myself.
7. In general any distant reference of the action of the verb to
the subject may be expressed by the medium; InoxtTivw, I con
duct the water up by means of pipes, iitoy^revoôLi, I draw to
myself; xXaisiv ra ttabn twos, to bewail the sufferings of any one,
exXavadf^w to. nxSv), I bewailed my sufferings ; ov/x^Mtôy xoieToSxI
rtva, to make an ally or confederate of any one, and the like ;
xaraarriaaâi QvXxxas, to place guards over one's own effects ;
ai'gEiv n, to lift something up, ai'gEff&ai n, to lift up something icith
the vieto to keep it ; iuqlma>, I find, Ei5giVxo/u.ai, / find for my own
me, i. e. / get, (' nanciscor.')
8. Another kind of reflective action is tohen something is done
to me or for me by my orders, which is expressed in English by
the verb ' to get,' ' to get a thing done.' Thus xsiponxi signifies
I shave myself, but also I get myself shaved, the pass, xapwai
refers only to a state of passiveness, ' to be shorn,' like a sheep.
Here too the more remote relation occurs ; itdparfotiMti rpivEâv,
I get a table set before me ; fuaôw, I let out for hire, (HKj&oC/xai rt,
J hirefor myself; SiSa|a7&ai u'tov, to get one's son taught ; xara5<xa'ffai rivet, to condemn one, xoLTtSixotaxwt aurov, as it were, / have
<jot him condemned to my advantage, i. e. I had him cast, I won
a law-suit against him. But we also meet with a medium of this
kind even without any reference to the subject, when it ought to
be rendered simply by the infin. act. with the verb * to cause' or
' to get;' Cyrop. I, 4, 18. where it is said that the young Cyrus
took the arms, a o vaicnos iittnomro, which his grandfather had got
made. Hence nâfcuw, I go as ambassador, vêo-fieuofjixi, I send
ambassadors.
06s. 4. The above instances are sufficient to give a general idea of the refteetive
power of the middle voice, and to shew that the nature of the relation to the sub
ject always is determined by the nature of the verb, and by the context, which must
be learned by practice and comparison. But it must be observed that the relation
to the subject frequently is very remote and weak, so that its designation might be
omitted without impairing the sense, especially when it is pointed out by the nature
SYNTAX.
349
of the verb itself ; and in some verba and individual instances, the relation has com
pletely vanished ; ex.gr. Hut and the Poetical MirSai are exactly the same, and so
are in prose kartQtutm and ofToQatmrSxi, to manifest, prove; vaptxtiv and Tcti%iffett,
to afford. The medium is also often used to express some shades of meaning, or in
combination with collateral signif., as in mirth, to take, alpirSxi, to telect: XstfriTf and
XMjiir&tu. and others. But these instances must be particularly treasured in the
memory, like other peculiarities and anomalies of the language ; this requires a care
ful attention, because a relation may be imperceptible to us, which was instantly
perceived by the Greeks.
Obs. a. But it must not be supposed that there actually is a middle voice for every
verb, which from its nature and signif. is susceptible of one. The best Dictionaries
must be consulted whether a verb has a medium,' and whether this medium has &
particular signif.
Obs. 6. When the more remote relation to the subject is, for the sake of distinct
ness or emphasis, expressed by a pronoun, (like tûurou, ipls, &c.) the medium, if
there be any, is still employed, though it is not requisite in that case. Thus
Demosth. for instance (i Mid.) says, Viyexftfitci Xulivtu TnZra, I have noted that
down.
Obs. 7. The reflective signif. comprises also the reciprocal. Thus (ItuXiitit signifies
to advise, plan, favktuieSai, to consult together, (but likewise, as usual in the middle
voice, ' to follow one's own counsel,' ' come to a resolution,') iixXvut, to reconcile others,
make peace, ^luXvtffSm, to get reconciled.
Obs. 8. But those mediums, of which there is no active verb, must be considered
simply as deponents of the old pass, form, as li^sfuti, (/ take,)
xirSuvs/ixi,
{I am sensible of,) rifSJ/itiv.
136.
1. We have seen above, 89. that the tenses, which commonly
constitute a real medium, are, the pres., imperf, perf, and plusq.
pass. ; and the fid. and aor. with a particular medial form.
2. With respect to this medial form, it must be observed that it
has nothing whatever to do with the pass, voice in point of signif.
But the aor. pass, has at the same time the signif. of the med. in
many verbs ; xxrecxXiveaSrtii, lo lie down, xoctixX&w, aitxXKirTcff&ai, to get away, iTtrXXa.yrti,irsxrfrrwui, 'JtXayyfirivat, (from
wXa^sTâi,) Ei3o<x.)!)^vai, 7[epaiai6r,)iat, tyofcrfivuiai, WEitf&rvai, havTiojSSvai, xoi/xn^rivai, o^&r,vai, xaranXaymxi, and others : ex. gr.
Kims T-hv TroXtopKia.v ScnrikXayn, he raised the siege, and marched
off,xoi//.7)07)-n, go to sleep,ri<rx.ri8wv rayy/m, I exercised myself in
that art,xa.mc\iyn tov <J>iXi7T7rov, he was afraid of Philippus.
Obs. 1. The medial form of the aor. in such verbs is obsolete or antiquated ; in
some it has a peculiar signif. : rriAXir&u, to travel, rraXmcu:oriXXiirSai, lo clothe
one's self, and also to sendfor, mikarSm.
Obs. 2. Several of these verbs, of which the signif. is rather pass., as Qtfrue&xt,
xnrtiTXtrrttrSai, might be considered as pass, verbs with an accus. ( 134. 6.) But
such passives always have a third object in the accus., while those, of which we
speak, -have the subject of the act. in the accus., ex. gr. 'o
xetrtrXonm
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
(frightened) xlrn ; if xarirXiynr, in the sense of he leaf frightened, afraid, were a
real pan., it would in this instance be, KktitA>>i Iri rtv tiXlrro,
Obs. 3. When the aor. med. is in use, the aor. pan. may also be used as the pass.
of a peculiar signif. of Ihe med. ; yfafsU, written, from yfafuy, but also accused,
from yfifirBm, ysi^tttSai, to accuse.
Obs. 4. The use of the fut. med., and even in some few cases of the aor. med. in
stead of that of the pais., has been stated above, 113. 5.
3. That the per/, and plusq. pass, exactly like the pres. are the
real per/, and jylusq. med., is unquestionable from a great many
examples, of which we had two in the preceding Section, 8.
tTrsTiolriro, and Obs. 6. yEygaptâii : Cyrop. 7, 3, 14. 'Axivzxnv
watXai ffageffXEt/aiTfAcVr) aQzrrei ia.vrr,v, having long before provided
herself with a sword, she killed herself, 7, 2, 12. SiawewâyjAai,
I have obtained, accomplished, Isocr. eiriSfSEiypievor t^v ttwng/av,
having given a specimen of his malice, Xenoph. Symp. 8, 25.
fAE/AKTS-avxEvor xôv' one tt/'^ âs 'a&era apiece of land in farm, &c.
See 1 13. Obs, 3. and 4. compared with 97. 5. and 06s. 5.
about the perf. 2. commonly called perf. med.
137. Of the Tenses.
1. As the pres., imperf, perf , plusq., and the fit. of the Greek
verb, agree in the main with the same tenses in other languages,
we shall only elucidate the aor. and the fut. 3. of the pass.
2. To know the aor. we must compare the other proeterites.
The perf. does not narrate at all ; it merely connects what has
happened, as past, with {he present time, {ex. gr. I know it, for I
have seen it,) though this connection is not always expressed, but
the perf. itself conveys the idea of it, / have seen it, i. e. / am one
of those who saw it. Now that I speak it is already over, it has
happened i. The aor. leaves the pres. entirely out of the ques
tion ; it carries us to the past, and relates successively what has
happened'; Hippos b fiaaiXEi/s oSei/ojv eve'tu%e xuvi <p$ou%ov)/ri vexpbv
xxl exiXtuaz puE&" iauTov xo/x/êiv, and so on. But in the midst of
the narrative it is sometimes necessary to state the circumstances,
It will always be found that the pure perf, such as it has particularly main,
tained itself in Greek, is used only when the consequences of the performed aclion,
or even of its ceasing, are still connected with the present time. He who says,
/ have known it, says at the same time, / do not know it any longer. He who says,
liipvxx, conveys the idea of the house bring still standing ; but if he says,
iKoiiunirtt, he leaves it at least undecided, and he uses the same expression, when he
positively knows that the house is no longer stamlmg.
2 Thus the Greek aor. alone expresses by itself what less copious languages express
by one of the other pratentes, the Latin by the perf, the English by the imperf
SYNTAX.
351
by which the thing, which happened, was attended, when it hap

pened ; this is done by means of the imperf., 'OXiyair Se utteôv
7>fj.ep<xis l^traais ri\ xxi nzghv a xi/aiv, iSoiV 5e toiis (foveas l^t&fiaixx,
(this again aor.) and so on; and if that, which was also already
past, or had already happened at that time, is connected with the
narrative, it is done by means of the plusq.
3. Thus the three other prceterites presuppose some fixed time:
the perf the pres. time, and the imperf. and plusq. the time when
the related occurrence took place. The aor. narrates what has
occurred without any presupposition or reference. But if this be
sufficiently apparent from the context, the aor. may also be used
instead of the perf., and in the narrative instead of the plusq.
Hence it is used most frequently instead of the perf. ; Xen.
Memor. 1, 6, 14. Socrates says, Tour S-naoLvpoui rav isi\an aotpuv,
ovs sxeivoi xxrlXnrov 6V fiifihlois yptzôaTis, Siip%ojMai, where the sense
obviously requires the perf, which they have left behind in books.
In every discourse, in which there is much mention made of the
past, and always in such a way, that the mind connects it with the
pres., the Greeks most generally use the aor. instead of the perf,
which is generally used alone in our modern languages; and it is
only when the speaker lays a particular stress on the time of an
occurrence, that the Greek employs the perf, and in a narrative
the plusq. : all this is, however, greatly influenced by euphony.
The uncertainty, or indefinite notion, from which the aor. derives
its name, is properly limited to the timepasf.
Obs. 1. The aor. is used instead of the plusq., Cyrop. 5, 1. her husband was am
bassador in liactria, "Evt/t^t Vi avrev o 'Afffft/gu; Ttfi ffv/fi&%!ets, had sent him, Time.
Oj 'ASmouat tvSv; iTu^n uvi'^tvortravîfifjta^tt iy'tvsvrs. Poets use this aor. far more
frequently than the plusq. itself.
4. The time, in which the narrator states an occurrence to have
taken place, must necessarily have some duration, (all were
asleep, when a scream was heard,) for even when an occurrence
is quite momentary, (/ teas just opening my mouth to call him,
when he entered,) it cannot he conceived in the mind otherwise
than as having commenced a moment before. Thus the idea of
duration is of itself connected with the imperf, but with the aor.
it is the idea of what is momentary. Hence arose a second usage
in the Greek ; and the imperf. was employed in the progress of a
narration not as marking the same time with the aor., but as alter
nating with it, whenever the related occurrence is to be described
352
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
as having some duration; Anab.b, 4,24. Tour ixh ovv <Ktkrzara.s

eSeZavro ol fSccgfixpoi, (they received them, momentary,) xal iixix^ro,
(and were fighting with them, a duration,)
V iyyls vaav ol
ovXZtou, (as they approached, natural imperf.,) irpxicovro, (they
took to flight, momentary,) xa! ol iteKrxarai svQus eiVovto, (pur
sued them, duration.) This often points to a difference in the
sense, which is easily overlooked ; for when it is said, for instance,
'O xvaiv ii,tlpaij.e, xal xa&uXaxrei adrouf, it necessarily conveys the
idea of a continued barking ; but if the expression be xaSoXaxrvxre,
it would be the barking of an instant, as momentary as the ee'S/jiz/asv. The imperf. is thus constantly employed, when some
thing, which was customary or done habitually or frequently, is
related of a time, which is gone by ; M/Xwv 6 KqoruvtxTw riaQn
/Avar xqeuv uxoai, Milo of Crotona did eat twenty minas of meat,
i. e. used to eat.
5. The aor. is restricted, chiefly in a narration, to what was
momentary at a time which is past, but of course this is not
limited to what really occupied only a moment's time ; it barely
means that the narrator uses the aor., whenever his mind con
ceives the occurrence at the same time as completed, or when
he wishes to describe something as momentary. But this differ
ence between what is momentary, and what implies a duration,
occurs also in the time present, and in the future. The language,
however, has no double form for it in the indie, but in the depen
dent moods the Greek language can always make the distinction.
These moods with regard to time may be considered in Greek
under a double point of view: 1.) each mood has the particular
time of its indie, but 2.) in the pres. tense and in the aor. the
dependent moods do not mark any time whatever, (just as in Eng
lish the pres. of the infin.,) and it is only Avhen it is necessary, or
as far as it is necessary, that their time is indicated by the indie.,
of which they are the dependents in the discourse, or the mind
of the speaker or narrator. In this case there is a double form,
which is perfectly indifferent with regard to time, twteiv orrtnf/ai,
q>i\ris or q>i\rtay!, &c. ; and the Greek Writers avail themselves
of this double form, so as to employ chiefly the moods of the pre*,
tense to denote an action or occurrence of some duration, and the
moods of the aor. for a momentary one. For instance, when
Demosth. says, (Phil. I. p. 44.) TgirifEir vsnrrixoyra itapauxivxfaodai ^ryju 5e7v, err' ai/robs ovroi rxs yvu(j.as ejE<v, he wants the
SYNTAX.
353
men of war to be immediately equipped, hence the momentary

aor.; but the feeling or disposition, which he recommends by
Ytilj.<xs 'e'xe'v, has some duration. Again, (p. 45.) "Iv* v> Sia tov
9<>/3ovwvyjxv 'ixVi *> f*^*** faura apuXaxToj Xi<pflT), it is obvious
that here too %i has a duration, and xf9^ is momentary. The
case is the same with the imper. (p. 44. init.) 'EwsiSav awavra
uKouaTiTe, xpivare, xa\ txv) Teporeqav wy>oX.a/L*./3avsTE. Here the moment
of xgi'votTE is distinctly marked, but the forming of an opinion is
something gradual, which the speaker did not conceive as momen
tary in his mind ; hence rgoXa/A|3asvTs. See Herm. ad Viger.,
n. 165. b. But the distinction frequently depends altogether on
the view of the speaker or writer, and in numberless passages it is
perfectly indifferent whether we have Xiyetv or \i%ai, Kiye or \i%ov.
The distinction, however, is not the less true on the whole.
Obs. 2. Even an action of a long duration may be in the aor. in the dependent
moods, whenever its completion is taken into the account, and considered as its
final purpose; Plato Crit. 15. Twy fra/Swv ivtxa flovXu jir, ",x tevrelif 'ucfytyfis xeii
6. The part, of the aor. constantly denotes time past, and be
comes a complete part. perf. ; iitofiaXwn, who has lost, and con
sequently possesses no longer at present,nxSwv, who has learnt,
and consequently knows,&av<wv, who has died, deadol nivai-cis,
those who fell, the dead.
Obs. 3. Thus Demosth. (in Mid. 52. p. 57C.) the true author of a speech full of
merited reproaches, 'O *tcfff%nxue ri
tvx trxtpp-ivis
e fttpu-vnras ret %'ixa.nx.
yXyui, i. e. if he who has provided the deeds for it, not he who has prepared himself,
and taken care to say what is proper. Here we have fUfutnrsii quite parallel with the
tenses of the perf, evidently for the purpose of avoiding the less pleasing sound of
flifAtfiflllUHff .
Obs. 4. All, which has been observed of the aor., refers chiefly to the Attic
Writers. In Homer the distinction between the tenses is not yet so marked, and
the imperf. in particular is still frequently confounded with the aor., which was
only, as it were, at its birth. We leave the examples of this assertion to the indi
vidual observation of the learner3. In Herod, too, (and perhaps in the Ionic dialect
in general,) the imperf. is often used in a progressive narration as an aor., that is to
8 We will, however, point out a few passages, where the imperf. is connected with
aor. without any difference in the action legitimating the distinction, //. . 437- 438.
465. /3. 4345. For it would be absurd to suppose that the landing of the sailors,
cutting the meat, using the large mantle, had been conceived in the mind of the
Poet as occurrences of some duration, while leading out a number of animals to be
sacrificed, putting so many pieces of meat on the spits, girding on the sword, should
have been thought momentary by the same mind ; and Xiiri, . 107. compare 106. is
still more decisive. But it must be acknowledged on an attentive perusal of Homer
that most of the decided imperf. mixed in the narration denote the repetition of
actions, which are necessarily of some duration, and that we do not easily meet in
Homer with aor., when there is a co-existence in the lime, or where it is a repented
action.
2 A
354
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
say, for the relation of momentary occurrences, of which the existence with other
events does not necessarily appear from the context, 3, 28. ixXu, UtXti/i, and fre
quently (ra, if/ufrm, &c.
Obs. S. Whenever any habitual occurrence, or any cvttomary event, is mentioned,
without its being an express narrative, the Greeks frequently have, instead of the
fret., by which it is stated in other languages and even the Greek itself, the aor.
(which then marks an indefinite time in the strictest sense,) Demosth. O/ynlh. 2.
M/xffiv vraiefia <KvijViri xeu iiiXvei -ratm, a small mistake overthrows and destroys all
affaui ; Mid. 21. Oil yi( ttxXnyn rufiemri vlir i^yh*, AXX' i itifjtia, tl%t to Ti*rnrd*M
S#ri inter, i>.>.i ri if' ifyu, where Irri shews how the preceding racirrr.ri is to be
understood. Isocr. J'aneg. 12. (speaking uf the great games and meetings of the
Greeks contrasted with the continual concourse of people at Athens,) A p\t 5xxi
wartiyvfitic 3we TsXXoy %ce*ov cvWiyutrttt Ta%lvt liiXbStiraii, r. Vi x. r. >.. See also Heiud.
ad rial. Phced. 49.
Obs. 6. There is another instance, where the aor. seems to lie used instead of the
pres., viz. the indie. aor. after the question ri
ex. gr. T< six iT<iiî ; literally,
' why have we not done this ?' i.e. let us do this .' Ti six extras, i. e. tell me instantly.
(See Heind. ad Plat. Oorg. 120.)
Obs. 1. The Greeks obtained a great latitude in the choice of tenses by intro
ducing again the pres. in a narration, whenever the true time is evident from the
context, and not only in whole passages, as is done in French, to. add to the liveli
ness of the narrative, but in the midst of a proposition, nay even iu the midst of
the sentiments of another, which are obliquely introduced ; viz. the pres. indie.
Anub. 1, 3, 14. Elf ii tin, trTgurryaii ix/rdffj XXw vs **XierM,i u ftr) ficvXtrm
Kxio{xf iriyui. The same Author, 1, 7, 10. relates that the army of Cyrus came
to a ditch, and then he immediately adds, T<turn> it rht riftn fimriXtls p'iyi <rui7
ivrt l(vftm<r*s, iru3* ruySuvirat Kvoev xêeiXnvvavrx. Any other language would
necessarily have used the plusq. twice.
Obs. 8. But some verbs have something in them, which seems to disturb the
succession of the lenses. Especially nxu, I eome, Is constantly to be considered as a
praterite, 1 am come, that is to say, I am here ; Plato Criton. init. "Ajti n xu; <rXa/.
In the same way
properly I go away, stands commonly for lam gone, am off",
whereby the imperf. *xirt has the appearance of the plusq. Again, t/*tii tni has,
besides the signif. of begetting, that of being the parent of any one, whence it must
frequently be understood as a per/. : UtXXtv rt 9>utm> Syn r'usm xxrif.
Obs. 9. And just as there are in every language certain expressions introduced
particularly in daily intercourse, which appear contrary to its general laws, because
their natural origin has been obscured by time, there are in Greek expressions,
which cannot be brought under the rules stated about the use of the tenses ; they
must be remembered without disturbing the rules derived from the agreement of
the language in all the rest. Hither belong the h (x instead of the pres. in argu
mentative observations. See Heind. ad Plat. Phtrd. 36. originally probably, ' thus it
always was, (and is still,). . .and I observed it not,' and farther in conversation some
isolated aor. 1 pers. instead of the usual pres. as nrSxi, \wr,nm, to express the decided
sensation or feeling attendant on the action. See Herm. ad fig. 102. and Buttm.'s
Mote to Soph. Pkiioct. 1289. 1314. See also the Epic irXir in the Anom. v'tXtu
Obs. 10. The circumstance, that the pres. and imperf. constantly denote a duration
without completion, has given birth to the custom, by which several verbs, of which
the action is only completed through the concurrence of another individual, as one'*
giving by another accepting, one's sending away by another going away, are used in
those tenses merely of one part of the action, or as is said de conutu, (which expres
SYNTAX.
lion, however, is neither accurate, nor sufficient,) Herod. 7) 221. Asmiin: pi(<ff lm,
(here tantamount to m according to Obs. 7.) <r} pixiriv imn'/itrtir, 'list in ttmuiiXnrsii
ffQtj 0 St ckroTtpTifiive; eturos fitv tux arriXiiri, (forsook him no/,) ran il Krouiai^rt^rs/t^t,
where the last aor. forms the antithesis or contrast to the preceding pres. Thus
Viivei, iiiitu, must frequently be rendered by offering ; z?u'3ti is properly only suadet,
not pertuadet. Consult the examples stated in the Index to Demosth. Mid. sub voce
Prasens.
Obs. 1 1 . The per/, has also a conj. and opt., and the future has an optative, which
are really used, whenever that kind of uncertainty or contingency, which is peculiar
to these moods, (see} 139.) agrees with the time of these tenses. For instance, E"9i
vits titixnm, OA that my ion had conquered .' 1" mte uViXuXi/duH, if (by cAance) some
had entered, ti^rtv Srt r&i hîoa. rîrri, he said that he should come the third day. But
the moods of the pres. and of the aor. assisted by the context being sufficient in most
of these instances, and the indie, being also very frequently employed in sermone
obliquo, (compare Obs. 70 the former are used only for the sake of distinctness, and
therefore require no particular elucidation here. And even then the periphrastic
form, ex.gr. mfiinxu! Z and tint is generally preferred to the conj. and opt. perf^
ex. gr. vifikr.xii; Z and wish. The imper. perf. occurs in its principal 2 pert, chiefly
in such verbs only, of which the perf. has the signif. of the pres., as xixfjifcSi, xix'f
pin, (see the Anom. %u<rxv,) fti^ntt : the 3 pers. especially of the perf. pass., marks a
conclusive resolution, let it then be done .' and frequently supplies an energetic ex
pression, ex. gr. NJ h rturc rirekftirû iWur, be it dared, Aristoph. Vesp. 1 129.
mxhivdaSu, be it attempted, i. e. attempt it.
With regard to some other peculiarities in the use of the aor., imperf., and fut.,
see below in the Moods.
138.Futurum 3.
1, The fut. 3. in both form and signif. is properly composed of
the perf. and fut. ; it transfers into futurity what is completely
past and accomplished ; Plato Rep. 6. 'H YoKirdx teXsW xtxoaf/.riairxi, lav 0 roiovros avrm eariuxowp (puXa, ike state will have
been perfectly arranged, (not be arranged, Lat. adornata erit
civitas, not adornabitur.) when it is superintended by such a
governor. Aristoph. Nub. 1436. ilsltw 6/1*0! xexXavosTat, (com
pare 121. 4.) then shall I have wept in vain. The perf. fre
quently denotes a situation ivhich is still continuing, ex. gr. eyyiyga/xju-ai does not mean simply J have been inscribed, but also
/ am inscribed, am on the list. The case is the same with this
fut., Aristoph. Eq. 1371. OiJSslr xztcc anovliai tiTeyyi>ixQno~eT<xit
*AXX' Siantq riv to zsqarov, iyyiypz^zrai, none shall for any consi
deration be transferred from one list to another, but every one
shall continue inscribed as he was at first.
2. Hence this is the proper fut. of such perf. as obtain a par
ticular signif., which may be conceived as that of a pres. ; Ju'Xeiwrai, it is a remnant, XeXei'4/iTai, it will be a remnant, (XeitpSwtTat,
2 A 2
356
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
it will be left behind, xixmiMu, I possess, fM/uurci/uuu, / remember,

xsxrnaofjiai, /*E/Av)<Topi,a.
3. The Attic Writers, moreover, employ the fut. 3. in the pass.
voice of several verbs as a simple fut. pass. Independently of the
verbs Se'm and viicpinxu, (see the Anom.) this is chiefly the case
with niitcLva<ni.%i, xExovô/xai, which ought never to be taken by a
forced interpretation for the original fut. 3., nor ought this to be
done with other verbs, in which this fut. (with Attic Writers)
sometimes has the usual signif. of the fut. pass., as fiefSkwoixxt,
XeXe'Io/azi, and others, which we leave to individual notice.
Obs. This fut. 3. has, however, a particular emphasis in some verbs, and denotes
either I.) it shall be, I will have it so, Soph. Aj. 1 141. Menelaus' speech, "E tu Qoitu,
ritV Irrif ir/i Barrr'tt,is answered, 2v 5' *raxoiVn Ttvrtv it nSaêrai, where the
usual rmpntirxi would not have been so energetic by far ; or 2.) hastening, ppx^s,
xttl <nT(a|iTu, (Aristoph. Plut. 1 026. cf. 200.) properly, speak and it shall be done,
I. e. it shall be done instantly. And it is apparently from such passages, that the
ancient denomination of this fut., paulo-post-futurum, was derived.
139.Moods.
1. The Greek language has seemingly an advantage over other
languages in having the opt. mood. But on comparing its use
with the remark stated in 88. 3. that the conjugation of the opt.
agrees with that of the historical tenses, and the conjugation of
the conj. with that of the principal tenses, it will be found that the
opt. is pretty nearly what the conj. of the imperf. and plusq. is in
Latin, German, and English; for this conj. is actually wanting in
Greek. To express a wish, Germans and Englishmen say, Had
I but ! though the real time is the present ; and in a narrative we
say in both languages, he inquired after everything, that he might
know : the Greeks in these and similar instances use the opt. and
conj. in those cases, where we too mostly say, / be, he have, and
the like.
2. Hence the opt. constantly accompanies the historical tenses,
and the pronouns relative, as well as the particles, (except those
compounded with av, see below,) which connected with the pres.
orful. take the conj., whilst those connected with a narrative have
the opt. ; ovx. 'iy^co or oux o7$a oitox rpinuij.ii, (' non habeo quo me
vertam,') I know not which wag I am to turn, oux iT^v, ovx t!Seiv
iitoi TgawoiVnv, ('quo me verterem, non habebam,') I did not know
luhich way I was to turn, isipinu, "tx. \lu, lam here, that I may
see ; zszpvv, lya i'Soi/ai, / was there, that I might see.
SYNTAX.
357
Obs. 1. Seethe exceptions to this rule in Ilerm. ad figer. n. 250. Helnd. ad Plat.
Prolog. 29. But they cannot shake the rule. The same liveliness in narrating,
which, as we bave seen above, introduces the pres. tense into past occurrences, must
also frequently betray the speaker into forgetting that his proposition depends on
time past.
3. And it is for the same reason that the particles and pro
nouns, which in sermone recto are construed with the indie, gene
rally have in sermone obliquo of a narration the opt. : "Hgs-ro
si oirus ex01' he asked whether it were so; e\ei jaoi, 3t w bibs
ps'goi eis ttiv -noKtv, riWEg bptom, &c. (See the exception in 137.
OAs. 7.)
4. The conjunction titois, when it refers to the fut., has either
the conj. or the fut. indie. and retains them even in connection
with time past, Thuc. 2, 3. HuveXeVovtootra/s i^ft lii tZv bluv
(favepol umv litres, 3, 4. "Eirgstvabii otzus Tir /Sori&Eist vOfiy Hley
managed so that assistance should arrive ; 1, 65, Ki/vE/3oi/Xt/Ev ovra>
TtoieTv, few? b airos &vTrjj7i ê etdvised to do this that the provi
sions might be sufficient. The case is the same with the strength
ened negation ov ixri in every sense, ( 148. Obs. 6.) ex. gr. in a
request, Eurip. Med. 1151. ov
oW/aevt)* saei <pl\ois, be not illaffected to your friends, I pray ; Soph. El. 1035. *AXX' ovwot e
e/xov ye iJ.ii ixtiSris toSe, you shall never learn that from me1.
Obs. 2. The conj. may, however, become an opt. in a narration, as with ",
Xenoph. Laced. 2, 2. "E'it/xiv hlvtv pMrriytôôus, *V*f Tip.uô!ti (t(Js iraf3f,) ti Sim.
See also the example below, 06. 3.
5. An accurate knowledge of the two particles e! and at is
highly necessary for the proper use of the moods. These par
ticles are variously employed, either singly or in compounds.
6. The conjunction si has two principal meanings, if and
whether. Correct Writers construe it in both signif. with the
1 Compare the Note below to Obs. 8.
* In consequence of remarks, which were however of too narrow a compass,
Dawes bad laid down as a rule that the particles ins and ei fib never are construed
in good Attic Writers with the conj. aor. 1. act. and med., but constantly with the
fut. indie. This rule was found to be frequently confirmed by MSS., and in conse
quence many passages have been altered in modern editions even without the au
thority of any Codex, the alteration being but trifling, rji into rut, mf.it into n/itr,
&c. But it was soon discovered that there would be no end to correcting, and that
there are passages, which arc not so easily mended. Hermann and others have
raised considerable doubts against Dawes' rule. The employment of the conj. aor.
lias unquestionably been owing to the necessity of expressing completion : Eur. Troad.
445. strut ytifitwp.tf)x, Plato Rep. 6'09. Ov ya^ to yi ayaScrfiwrsri n a-'xaXir^. And 1 so
far agree with Dawes, that I think that the con;', aor. 2. at least was employed with
a kind of predilection, and that, where there was not any such tense, the/W. of the
indie, was used preferably to the conj. aor. 1.
358
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
indie, and opt. only, not with the conj. ; excepting, however, the
Epics and the non-Attic Poets.
7. The particle av, (instead of which the Epics also use the
enclitic xev or xe, which has exactly the same signif..) may some
times be rendered by the English by chance, but cannot be fully
translated in any language. It gives to the proposition a shade
of uncertainty and bare possibility, which partly modifies, and
partly strengthens the conj. and opt., but influences likewise the
indie, and other verbal forms, (except in most instances the pres.
and per/.) This particle always comes after one or a few
words, and thereby distinguishes itself from av, the abbreviation
of eav, of which we are going to speak immediately.
8. The particle av is annexed to all pronouns relative, and to
certain particles, with some of which it forms but one word, as
especially, oteoVav, eweiSÊWEiSav, and with tl it makes liv,
which is abbreviated into the perfectly synonymous ojv or av.s
The Epics combine the above words likewise with xe, 8te xev, &c,
and instead of lav they have also ti xev, (or al xev.) The addition
of av to all these words, gives to them the idea of a bare possi
bility ; they are generally construed with the conj., and the pro
positions, when connected with the time past, or an oblique
speech, either remain unaltered, or the simple words, (e<, ote,
EffsiS'r), or, tarts, ouor, &c.) supply their place with the opt. ; napigo/axi sa'v ti Se'ti :<pn irxpiaeaSoii e" ti Jeoi or Se^ôi. Thus in the
example quoted above Obs. 2. we have ote Seoi, instead of oVav Ji-n,
which would be required in a direct speech.
Oii. 3. The Epics have also the conj. with tl, and the opt. with the particles com
bined with it or 1, Oil. n. 315. But there are instances in the Attic Writers, where
particlei and pronouns relative combined with St have the opt. in a dependent sen
tence without throwing their it off : Cgrop. 5, 5. mil. 'ZrirnkXtt airy
!*n
rvufioukts ylytura, a, <ri av "itxem vpetrruv, he sent word to him to come to advise what
might appear to him proper to be done. See also Demosth. Mid. 5. not. 2. and cm in
.flSsch. Pers. 448. The passages, however, are scarce, and particular attention must
be paid to see whether the opt. is not used in one of its peculiar senses, viz. 1. with
the idea of the action of the past having been repeated, see below Obs. 6. for this
cpt.it not altered by it, see the examples in Mattbise's Greek Grammar. ( 521. 06*.
1. p. 715. Engl. Transl. 4th ed.) 2. when the opt. with it forms the ful. conditional,
(which we shall see below, text 13.) as in Plato Eulhyd. 9. 'Tpus Irri, {' St it
xikXirrd tis aM fiiSei, here ftaSsi St belong together, might or could learn.
9. The Greek has an uncommon variety of expression in hypo8 See j 117. 2. As tliis| shortened i< is generally placed like ii at the head of a
sentence, it prevents its being mistaken for the radical particle it.
SYNTAX.
359
thetical or conditional propositions. What is most important to

be observed in this respect, is this :in every conditional proposi
tion the condition is either possible or impossible. The possible
cases either express at the same time an uncertainty, or not, and
if they be attended with uncertainty, the speaker either alludes to
a future decision and determination, or not. This gives rise to
the following cases :
1.) Possibility without any mention of uncertainty, e! with
the indie. Ei iôvmae, xal warpa-i/tv, if it lias thundered,
it has also lightened ; si ti e'x6'*. Sor, if thou hast anything,
give it :
2. ) Uncertainty with the prospect of a decision and deter
mination4, ictv with the conj. 'Eav ti syjutxev, ^duofj.iv, if ive
should have anything, we will give it to you ; *Ea'y rls nva
ra/v CltaQXpvruv v<V*v
xaXus ejêiv riyrirai, y^xînâi, if
any one should think any of the existing laws improper,
he may propose a new law. (The idea here in the first
part of the proposition is, and that will be seen, it will be
seen whether there is any law, which is improper :)
3. ) Uncertainty without any such accessary or collateral
idea, si with the opt. and in the conclusion the opt. with ay,
ex. gr. E" ris ravra npxTToi, y.iya /x* av wtytk-ham, if any one
should do this, he ivould render me a great service ; E!' ris
ravra xaS"1 avra lifiraantv, tvpoi av, if any one should ex
amine the thing itself, he would find. (There is no acces
sary idea here in the mind of the speaker, except, perhaps,
but I do not know whether any one will examine it:)
4. ) Impossibility or unbelief, or in general when the expres
sion is to convey the idea, that the thing is not so. In this
case the Attic Writers almost invariably use the imperf.
for the present or indefinite time, and conclude with av,
E? t e*xev, eSi'Soy av, if he had any thing, he would give it.
(Here the idea in the mind of the speaker necessarily is,
but he has nothing, &c.)
10. When in the fourth case the first part of the proposition
and the conclusion are both in the time past, the aor. is neces
sarily used instead of the imperf, at least in the conclusion,
* See Herm.'s sagacious explanation, ail Vigcr, n. 312.
3G0
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
tt ti E<r%ev, eowxsv av, if he had had any thing, he would have

given it.
But the two sentences may refer to dissimilar times, Ei eW<x3*iv,
owe av nppuorow, had I obeyed, (complied with advice,) I should
not (now) be ill.It follows of course that a proposition, which,
if not hypothetical, would be expressed in the perf., is rendered
by the plusq., and the pres. by the imperf. ; Ei yap aurdgKn ra.
^nty'iap<ara w, oi5x av QtWivos Totyovrov vpplxei j^povov. When the
conclusion (in 4.) refers to the past, but is at the same time to
convey the idea of duration, it is rendered in the imperf. with av,
Herod. 7, 139. Ki
EyiVETO VTtQ
Ylipanai, Demosth. Mid. 523. Reisk. <nivr av '{\iyzv outos- tote.
11. All these cases are modified according to the principles
stated above by the connection with the prceterite, and must be
explained accordingly ; Kai, ei'ti
ixiKtuae SoDvai, and if he
had any thing, he ordered him to give it. Here exe'x.eu<ts does not
belong to the conclusion, but to the preceding context ; the opt.
is used merely on account of the connection with the prceterite,
(according to 2. above,) and Souvai contains the conclusion.
12. When the particles and words combined with av are con
strued with the conj. of the aor., the latter constitutes a presup
posed praterife, and consequently, if the context points to a time
to come, it becomes a future prceterite, (in Latin futurum exactum,)
Xgri 5e orav /xev ti'&jkt&e tous voyiovi, ovotol tive'j e'io"!, o"xoweiv, EffEiSav
Se Si<jSe, (ptAaTTEiv xa! j^5jo-&i, (but when you have given them ;)
hicti&av atcavra axovartrt, xeivare, when you shall have heard all,
(then you may) judge ; avrn fi icapaaxtvii Sia/XEtvai oWria-sTai, ius
av wfgiysv^/xE&a tv hySpwv, until we shall have overcome the
enemy ; SiatySepet $, ti av
In this construction the idea of
the future lies in the whole proposition, and the aor. has only its
peculiar prceterite.
13. The opt. construed with av is (according to 9. 3.) merely
the conclusion of a supposition ; when the latter is not expressed,
the opt. is frequently used alone, and is therefore employed in any
simple proposition, which is to be represented as barely possible,
and which is rendered in English by can, could, may, might, &c. ;
To auixaronlis tirrtv ov rn av avJ'aiTo, the corporeal is what can be
touched, (if it be requisite, if one chimes, and the like ;) Te'voito
S' v wav ev to nzxpa xpovu, all may happen, may be done in time ;
glials av $eaaalv-r,v ravra, I gladly should see that, I could like to
SYNTAX.
361
see that ; d\\' ovv eYmi tu av, but some one might say, iWs- ay ouv
rives iirmit-nauzv rots eipnpiroir, some perhaps may find fault with
what has been said.Hence it comes that, owing to that modesty
or moderation peculiar to the Attic Writers, this construction is
used for the most positive assertions and predictions ; Ou yi% av
ra ye nSy yeyevnueva tti vuvl jOior&eip. xuXuaai oW/i&eitipc.ev, for we
probably can no longer hinder what has been done, by giving now
our assistance ; Owe av Qevyois, you will not flee : and this expres
sion is very commonly employed for the usual fut. The case is
the same with the imper. Xiyoa av for \tye.
14. Any conditional contingent, or uncertain expression, or any
thought, Avhich is expressed hypothetically, may, owing to its con
struction, be rendered in Greek by the infin. and the part, with
the addition of av. This advantage of imparting the power of the
opt. or conj. to the part, and infin. gives to the Greek a great
superiority over all known languages ; Oi'ovrai dvocfAax^ccaiat <*v
gviaiaxxous TrpovXafiovres, they think that they should repair their
defeat, if they had allies, {iyatAa%eaai.tr' av, el Xifiotev,)Tk\x
aiunZ, noW' aveyuiv eliretv, while I have yet much to say, whilst
I could yet say a great deal more; Herod. 7, 139. Nyv Se 'Ab-nvzious civ rts \{yojv, {one who might say,) aurrâs yeviahai r'rts
'EXKaSos oux. av \%aix.aqTot : Plato Crilon. 9. Ol paSiais dnoxrivvuvrer xat dv*$iaax.iiA.evoi y av, el oioi r r\aav, who lightly put to
death, and would probably restore again to life, if they bu t could,
(avE/SiwirxovT av.) This addition of av often gives the sense of an
infin. and past fut. ; Demosth. Phil. 1. Oux. euriv eva avSg* av
oûYr&rivai nore inxvrz rxvra wgaâi, it is not to be supposed that
any man should ever be able to perform all this, (SuvriSwvai itare
without av would allude to time past.) See also the example
from Isocr. below 144. 4. a. This is the usual way of express
ing the fut. after ofto-9ai, eXirifytv, and the like.
Obt. 4. The place of it in the sentence depends entirely on euphony, or also on
the intention of rendering the uncertainty sensible cither a little sooner, or a little
later. This requires particular attention, that the it may always be referred to the
word, to which it belongs according to the context ; Plato Phadon. 116". Olfi*i it,
is
Aiya*, *r/V, here the it belongs to the opt. wtwt, thus, ttfuu, iremt it, is \yi
\tyu. The case is the same with, 'Eisxu it b/ut hilvf rr 3ja<r;oa/, where it be
longs to the infin., it appeared to ut that he would gladly perform all, (iiarîûtt it :)
Demosth. Olynth. 1, VA. Ti alt it tis tl-rai rctvrx X'tyus bftiit tvt ; for, Tj alt, iur tis
it, Tuvra X. b. t., where, if there were the requisite comma after ovt, it would seem
to be employed instead of tit, which, however, cannot govern the opt. : Plato Tim.
3G2
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
p. 2G. 6. Outt it tit ii ionti/ttit ixettret it fi*r,fity trmXn XafZttt, whether / could, 11 J*
mlfitit it, viz. if I were asked ; Demosth. c. Aristocr. 680. 'Ex rtvrtv rill ^vflr/ixnt
xvgwS'v/Tae it, ii fin it hft-Bti, tiUxritrs d /3riXiiV, i.e. 11 r Tf/nQurfttclxtiguSri, (without by,
compare above 10.) ! (SxriXtTi iiUxntr' J, (would be injured or wronged.) uptn ii tiftit,
(if it were not for us, see J 150.) In a complicated proposition it is often repeated
two or three times without any additional strength to the sense, merely to render
the limitation of the proposition more sensible, several parts of the assertion being
affected by it at the same time. See Heind. at/ Plat. Pliadr. 130. Herm. ad Figer.
n. 283.
Obs. 5. The part, it frequently gives to the indie, the signif. of being habitual, cus
tomary ; Demosth. pro Cor. 301. None of the ancient orators has been of such a
various influence, aAX* e pit yâût ovx it itrf'iefiivit, i Si zoio-frii.wv vx it iy^tttyt, it
was not usualfor him, who proposed laws, to be an ambassador, and versa vice*.
Obs. G. Another particular use of the opt. Is that of being employed in the first
part of a proposition instead of the indie, of the past for something, which had hap
pened several times ; Ots fait liei ti/raxrvs xai rmêti letras, TîetXauvuit auroie, olrmt
iTi sfaira, *i (tii friStin\rr\tu, which he saw, i.e. as often as he saw any, to which
the itii <xfonrt must be joined ; Il.fi. 108. "O* 3' &Z ijpeu r avi^x i3i, (itt*tra r ipiv(H, whatever individual of the people he saw, i.e. every man as often as he saw one;
iX{TTi> i SJ<m xbri, he did whatever every time appeared proper to him;Cyrop.
1) 4, 3. Or lr({*T/T, rxû xxix(tvxrt, he every time replied quichly to whatever he
was asked; Antipho, "ttrifSn ii%it hrir it atrru iixrtiflu, he had an upper chamber,
whenever (as often as) he stayed in town. See also above Obs. 3. The uncertainty of
the opt. in gucli cases serves merely to prevent being understood as speaking posi
tively ; hence when the circumstance has still its duration in the present time, the
conj. is used. See the two corresponding examples in Herm. ad figer. p. 900.
Obs. 7. The conj. is never used alone in Greek, but in the 1 pers. by way of
encouragement, as 1-pu, let us go, (to which the 2 and 3 pers. opt. correspond ;)
and also in the sing., when the verb is generally preceded by tp'tti, well then! Kurip.
Hipp. 865. f'tfi1i, well then ! I will see, and in doubtful questions partly with,
and partly without being preceded by fitiku or 9i\Hf, (will you.) BsiiXn olt e-xorafttt,
will you that we examine f Tlfoiy /Wxti xo%a>[jtxi ; by what will you have me to begin ?
Anacr. Ti e-oi 3i?.ns Tamrst ; what will you have me do tri *row\ what shall I do?
rjj fieU ; wot rca.Tbip.cti ; whither shall I go t which way shall I turn? itrai ovt am tI
x"ti; shall I tell yuu the cause t (Plato Theml. 17-) tot axiom aid,;, must I hear
again ? (Iiucian Dial. Murt. 30, 1.) These examples are to prevent mistaking
the 1 pers. conj. aor. 1. for the ful., which the sense of these phrases approximates;
hence we sometimes meet with both tenses together ; eje.gr. urip./u. 758. utru/m
n ciyufut; H ti iexrt/ut. Such instances do not readily occur in the 2 and 3 pers.,
but in general expressions, such as *o7 tii Sxiri : whither is one to go ? Demosth. Mid.
10. 'Oroiouros xinox ftt] it ilxnt ; is such a man not to be punished ?
Obs. 8. In Homer there is a still greater relationship between the conj. aor. and
the fut. ; he freely uses the conj. of the aor. for the real fat., II. a. 262. Ob yie <r
rfvi fist ititxs, mil ftu/uu. In several cases of this kiud these conj. may indeed be
considered as doubtful fut. (I probably may not see any more,) and the origin of this
usage may thus be explained. But this conj. is in many passages in the midst of the
most decided fut., Od. /*. 383. iorc/cxi lis 'Alius, xxi ir nmnm fxuni. Hence also
with the shortening of the long vowel, (see Obs. V. 15. to J 103.) which sometimes
5 Compare also Soph. Philoct. 29002. Aristoph. Pac. 640. Anab. 1, 5, 2. Sehn.
SYNTAX.
3G3
gives rise to a form corresponding to the indie,fut. and pre*.; //. 52931ixx'
wrot St* rvxri Qt/k*%0fii9,
iliy.iaifjtiv ezi/v "Aîja8.
Obs. 0. There are some other peculiarities on this head, at which we merely hint,
by remarking in general
1.) that the pari, ii is also frequently omitted, whereby a mood sometimes gets
into a construction, to which it is -a stranger, and the opt. in particular is
used alone instead of the fut. conditional, and the imperf. instead of the suppotitious pret. See Heind. ad Plat. Goig. 37. Schsefer Melet. 55. Ind. in
Plat. Mem. &c. V. t.
2.) that in Homer and the Epic Poets the distinction between these moods is
not yet so marked ; they are frequently confounded one with the other in
many of the above-mentioned expressions. The conj. often is construed with
t Instead of the opt. with it for both the futures simple and conditional, (//.
. 184.)
140. Of the Infinitive.
1. The infin. is used in Greek in all the instances where it is
used in Latin, and where we often have in German and Engl, the
conjunction (dasz,) that, (expressed or understood,) or the par
ticle (zu,) to, with the infin.
2. The Greek infin. is also frequently used, where the Latin
language has ad with the gerund or participle in dus to denote a
jmrposc, object, or destination ; "ESwxsv auro SovKoj tpoprtaai, he gave
it to a slave to carry ; b avSfwwor iriQuxi tpiteTv, man is born to love ;
ntxQiyjii 1/jLdcvrov ipurfv, I produce myself to be examined ; 'iirmv
waqiifoe ra oivtipi dvafi-nvoci!*.$ov iSsiv as : Anab. 2, 2, 3. 'E/xo!
&fo/xhci) livxi Effl tov ftaaihia. ovk lylyviro ra. hqi, when I sacrificed
to march against the king, (ivhen I made the usual sacrifice before
the march,) the sacrifice was not auspicious, and farther on, 'Is'vai
Se traqai rovs K.vpov <pl\ous, it&vu xotka. n/ji.Tv ra) lepo) r!v, but to go to
the friends of Cyrus, (to join the friends,) the sacrifice was very
propitious to us ; taken from the common expression, txaXXifyei
ravrx mpirrui, Herod. 6, 76.
3. Allied to this is the infin., which is construed with an adj.
* I take this opportunity to adopt Hermann's sagacious remark, that the Greek
future rather comes from the aor. than the latter from the former, and I clearly
trace this derivation in Homer's way of using these tenses. The usual Greek fut.
is unquestionably nothing but the conj. of the aor., which it approximates in both
forms. A doubting prediction, which is the most natural, gradually became a de
termined one, through which this conj. became an indie. There is, I think, a ves
tige of this primitive identity in the double construction of the particles %<rvs and fiM
with the conj. and fut.; and the Latin confirms this theory by the almost per.
feet agreement of the fut. of the third conjugation with the conjunctive. But this
remark ought not to do away with the grammatical derivation of the aor. from the
fut. i this has greater facility and uniformity in its favor, and all grammatical de
rivations, as we have frequently observed, are merely practical.
364
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
(or subst.) as a determination or modification ; 'Hicir-nSeM woisw

n, apt, able to do something; ou Setvos e<tti \iysiv, aW' xSlvaros
atyxv, he is not clever at speaking, but incapable of remaining
silent ;Eurip. Seivoci yuvxTxis EugiVxeiv rijyixs, women are apt to
invent, (use stratagems.) Or with a pass, meaning, (where the
Latin has the supine in w,) px%os mr,axi, easy to be observed, nokis
yjxKac-h Xa/3s7v :ribl dxovtiv, delightful to hear, (suave auditu.)
Homer 'bxvy.x lil&eti1, wonderful to be seen, (a tvonder to the
sight, " mirabile visit.") The infin. pass, is likewise used in such
cases ; SvXuQavris oforimi, of feminine appearance, (like Horace's
niveus videri.)
4. Whenever an infin. destined to determine or modify the
preceding expression,, would not be distinctly enough connected
with it, especially on account of other words coming between, it is
generally introduced by the conjunction ai&re, (more rarely as,)
which, if the proposition be complete, may also refer to a preceding
pronoun demonstrative ; rHv Se venailsuixtvos ovrais, uare <nxw
pailais e'xev xqkovvtx, he had been brought up in such a manner,
that he easily had (procured) what sufficed him ; îkort/xirxros w,
uare itdvrx litoy.ii-ixi rov tnsxntiahxi ivsxx, he was uncommonly de
sirous of distinction, so as to put up with anythingfor the sake of
praised; vedirepot ttait ri even EiSe'vai oluiv jrxrepaiv earipnvrxi,
they are too young to know of what fathers they are deprived; is
/xixgov tAiyaXw uxiaai, (a kind of parenthesis,) to compare small
things to great things.
5. The Greek infin. is moreover employed like the German as
a subst. neut. ( 125. 8.) But the Greek language enjoys a still
greater latitude in this respect than the German ; the Greek gives
the article not only to single infin., but also to entire propositions,
and uses them in all constructions, of which the noun subst. is
susceptible, to connect them with the rest of the discourse ; To
<pv\xûi rdyxhx rov xrriaxoSxt y/ikenurtzoi, to keep a fortune is
more difficult than to acquire one ; To /u.ev out iitiopxon xbXeTv rnx
anv rov Ttt Tten^xyfj-ivx ^tixvuvxi, XoiSogia eotiv, (Demosth.) to call
one a perjured man without proving what he has done, is an
insult; To \eysiv, us 5, ixiyiarov eo-ti o-nfAiTov rov <pgovE~v tl:To
wXoiteiv earl* h rtb xqvhsSxi /aocXXov ij ev ru xsxrr>ij$xi. The Greeks
thus can employ a prep., where else a conj. would be required;
1 This aorist of the middle voice is, according to the practice of the Epics, simply
active, ($ 135. Obi. 4.)
SYNTAX.
365
'A&nva epptê tow au\ous Sia to twv o\J>iv avrfif woieTv aixoqtpov,
Minerva threw the flute away {for its rendering her face ugly,)
became it deformed her face.
6. They are besides at liberty to insert subordinate propositions
between the article and its infin. ; To Se, oaa y' ^SeW v \J>i/xr> Si'x6ra.i, TauTx ixavui exttoveiv i$oxif/.afy, but that as much as nature
takes with pleasure, should be sufficiently worked out (by exercise,)
that (is what) he approved of.
Obs. 1. The infin. with the article in the gen., sometimes, but generally only in
whole propositions, denotes a motive, purpose ; Oix isr*\Si, nd /tii itxiir i/aiiit, (not
to seem neglectful.') "Ehjs* is commonly considered as omitted and understood. See
Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 30, and compare 132. 6. I.
Obi. 2. The infin. of some short interpolated expressions may be derived from the
alKjve-mentioned constructions ; ex. gr. from_Text 2. ia-xif UTiTr, to be short. Thus
\/t*1 ItxCt, in my opinion, which infin., though without re, supplies the place of an
accus., (compare 131. G. and Obs. 6.)ixaurat fiiv tvwtrl, va.yxa.Xu; i%u, to hear it
thus, it is excellent. These expressions may also be introduced more or less with
its, "fit yt vTua\ axsvrai, and the like.
141.
1. Whenever the infin. has a subject of its own, the rule is that
this subject is in the accus. This is the case with the infin. with
to, To ecfjfiQrdvetv dvbpujtovi ov Sxv/jLaoToii, that men do err, is not
to be wondered at ; Oi5Sev eirpiy^ri, Six to exE~vov ixvi wagsiVaci, because
the other was not present; OuSinore oft&s ejêi, (see 150. s'xeiv,)
to xaxui trdaypvToc a/LAuvEd&ai avriSpuvrx xaxus, that ivhen one has
suffered wrongs, one be revenged by returning the evil.
2. The Greeks have, like the Latins, a peculiar construction of
the accus. with the infin.
after verbs, on which another proposition is immediately dependent,
especially after verbs denoting to say, believe, &c. they put the
subject of the dependent proposition in the accus. and its own verb
in the infin., whilst in German and Engl, we use the nomin. with
the con/., or either conj. or indie, with the conjunction, (dasz,)
that ; Ol iA.v$o\6yot <paa\, tov Ovpavov Suvaortvaai vqurov rov tlxvros,
mythologisls say that Uranus first ruled over the universe.
3. But very often the subject of the infin. is not mentioned, if
it be already stated in any way with the first or preceding verb.
This is done not only where other languages do the same, (the
Germ . and Eng. at least, with zu, to, Aioixai aou ttx^xixivay, I intreut
you to stay, Suveiweiv 6/A0X07&/, I confess to have assented,) but also
in general, almost always when the preceding proposition has the
366
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
same subject, vE<f>7) ovovtidQew, he said that he was in a hurry,

where even the Latins prefer repeating the word of the subject,
dixit se festinare.
Obi. The Greeks likewise go farther than the Latins in the ue of the infin., when
they quote the words of another or in any dependent sentence, by more usually con
struing the relatives and the first part of a proposition in the same manner ; Plato
Alcib. 1,40. "E^ <rn(iXSuv
nv xnXtiv tv$ iinû^lavs Zuvtiv' he said that he
had paned by a country, which the inhabitants called the Zone' Herod, 'fl; ti itgx
TgoTTr.vai tovti, uvctmvx&wet is rÛ im/ietffeu 20AQN, that when this recurred to his
mind, he three limes repeated the name of Solo with heavy liglis.Plato Phmdr. 84.
IviwXW*'1 8th (.1 implore with you,) uvtf &fimn vnv' tyuV
thvtu ylyvtrSw.
Xenoph. Mem, 1, 1, 13. Suxoatrrit fSi//tartv, ft ftn Qetvigev xiiriis \rrit, iti rauret oti
ivfetroit irrty uifytuvot; xlîiv' tin! xa) rive /Atyurov Qgavovtrets irt tu arigj rauruv kiyuv ib
ralri UlZur here the first part of the proposition comes after with iiriJ, as is usual
in such a connection, for the second part is contained in what goes before ; this the
author had stated directly in his own name ; he now states the first in Socrates's
speech, and declares it by the infin. used on quoting another's words. See also Plato
Alcib. 1, 55. {Note 7.)
142.
1. When other modifications or determinations than attributes
or predicates are joined to the infin. in the shape of subst. or adj.,
it follows of course that, if the subject be in the accus., they also
must be in the accus. ; Tlu.m <a irapstyxi ptovov : "Aitmira v(v*/o(U.ev rm ym atyaX(>3.y elvat.
2. But when the subject of the infin, is not expressed, the
Greeks have a very peculiar construction called
Attraction,
by means of which these additions are not in the accus., but in the
same case, in which the object is expressed in the antecedent
proposition ; they are, as it were, attracted hy the preceding verb,
the word of the subject not being mentioned. There are, how
ever, two cases to be distinguished,
1.) If the subject of the infin., which is omitted, be at the
same time subject, (nomin.) of the antecedent verbum finitum, on which the infin. is dependent, the additions to this
infin. must also be in the nomin.
o 'A\s'l;avSgor tipauxEv eivaci Aibr uior
(in Latin, dicebat, se esse Jovis filium,) which is likewise the
case, when the subject is not expressed with the first verb,
tnuax avrovs eivai Sem, / persuaded them that I teas a
God,
SYNTAX.
367
Jvo/aiovTo ody avroi auSJaeaSoci, they thought that they

themselves could not be saved.
II. S. 101. Ei/jso S' AviXKuvi,ps%nv ixa-ro^mOixaJe voor-haas, Vow to Apollo to offer him a hecatomb, when returned
home. Here mswaas as added to pi%eiv, is in the nomin. on
account of the el concealed in slixto.
2.) If the subject of the infin., which is omitted, be only
the proximate or remote object of the antecedent verb, the
additions of the infin. are in the same oblique case, in which
their subject stands as object of the verb ; thus, for instance,
in the gen.
tllovro avrou tlvau xpoSv/j.ov, they intreuted him to be
zealous ;
or in the dat.
(just as in Latin, licet Mis esse beatis ;) 'Aweiwev avrots votirxit
sivai, heforbade them to be mariners; Tals woXtm touto /xaXXov
\vaiTe\eT, r) HouXom o^r,vxi ytyvofj-ivous :
or lastly in the accus., in which case it comes again under
the principal rule,
xe'Kivu <a eivai vôbv/Moy.
See about this attraction 151. 1.
3. The same attraction takes place, when the proposition with
the infin. has the art. to before it :ITgor to aviJitpipov %wat Sia to
<pi\avTdi elvai, they live for their own interest, because they are
selfish :A*if/.oo'&6'v7)r aiy.\mtra.i ru yqoctyEts diroifuyiTv, Demosthenes
boasts of having been acquitted of the charges brought against
him :Oi5 yap ixwi/JLTlovTai swl rai SouXoi, (JXV Vt ra> o/*0(Oi toiV
XsnropiEvoir sivai, (speaking of colonists,) they are exported not to be
slaves, but to be equal to those, who are left behind ; etf r,^1t eyl to
imnxiai xat <p(JXoif mtu, it rests with us to be virtuous and de
praved. But if the subject of the infin. be as accus. in the first
part of the proposition, then the infin. is as usual construed with
the accus. / 'Ette'JeiJIe ris noKirtiaf itpoiyj>v<scts ru 'Sixa.ioripas eTvat,
he shewed that states are superior to others for being more
righteous.
4. The infin. is likewise construed with the nomin. in the con
struction with <3y, if the first part of the proposition requires it ;
OuSeiV rvtXixovros ifu vtttp v/mv, <2ye Tour votxous napxâs /u.*) Souvari
S/xnv, let none be so great among you as not to be punished, when
he transgresses the laws.
3G8
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Obt. 1. From these statement!!, it is obviously incorrect to suppose that the sub
ject of the infin. is a nomin. in expressions like, 'Tsriîn atirit vewm. In all such
instances the subject of the injin. is not expressed ; what is in the nomin., is merely
its modification or determination as here, uut'is i the noun omitted is the subject,
and can be supplied only by a pronoun perianal, which is likewise w anting.
Obt. 2. Whenever the Writers think proper to add the pronoun persona/ itself, it
stands, in spite of the nomin. belonging to the antecedent verb, in the accut. ; at/**,
/t\v Xv(i7y fit, Plato Charm. 45. (Heind. ad Eulhyd. 79.) but it is as seldom done in
Greek, as in Latin. In general, however, it must be borne in remembrance that,
whatever is stated here of the attraction of the infin. and of other peculiarities of
the Greek language, is always subject to the exigencies of emphasis, euphony, and
distinctness. Thus in the following proposition there is yet an accus. after a decided
gen. merely for distinctness' sake: Iaocr. Aitfjttu ifjtut, Juuivtu rih Xtyt/tltiv USuftndfpwf iniAllah. 3, 2, 1. "E)ip twvitt 9r?s$vXM*Ms nwrttf^twmt rvyuuXut <rus f*g*rtirttf, Memor. 1 , 1 , 9. "E<p %u<t, & fCu fLtAttrut trtiCt tittntn el
ftmvdtinn. Here
rut ktifiwtH must be mentally supplied as added to ftaxtn, but for all that the
accut. fixSitrct; is not altered here. Compare below 144. Obs. 5. an almost similar
proposition in the same passage, in which proposition kt&ptwtu is expressed, and the
attraction attended to.
Obt. 3. On the other hand the attraction really is sometimes so strong, that the
express pronoun personal is with the infin. in the nomin.; but I know of no other
instances than where two infin. are dependent on one verb with different subjects,
of which one only is the same with the subject of the first verb. Demosth. Mid. 55.
(p. 579. Reishe,) 'Eui slirS? ifiTt tSrsSrtn, i/uTi 8 tstuirBsu, (here on construing the sen
tence t'u-St must come first alone, which then has the same subject with the second
infin. vtfiurSai,) you think that I am always to contribute, and you always to consume ?
and farther on : Na/ti iifh^S? pit ttrtiptrftsUStti, ?v 3i tvVt <rauffis%ai, but such in
stances belong to the very numerous cases, in which Attic Writers were induced by
a specious analogy to carry any peculiarity of the language beyond the proper bounds
of its nature. Compare Sehaef. ad Soph. Old. R. 958.
Obs. 4. Whenever Tumuli*, rtlStrBu! rm, is followed by a proposition, of which
the subject is the object of the above mentioned verbs, it is also construed in the
infin., and the pronoun alri; is omitted ; Plato Charm. 18. 'O/itnp/ runuus xaxit
xiyut, Pkcedr. 124. Mn <ru9/2tS' nuriii, r'x*>i yoifyui. But whatever belongs to
the omitted word of the subject, is likewise in the attraction ; Cyrop. 3, 3, 24. OiS*
it roureis X-Xivrxutt ip-po'tais utoit.
Obt. 5. The infin. is sometimes used in a quite independent way instead of a wish,
request, command, in the 3 pers. either with the subject in the accut. //. y. 285. T^Zxs
Wiiovtcti, then are the Trojansto give bach, Hesiod, yuju.no* ttrsiût, yvfivot St {souruv,
where the subject is to be supposed an indefinite 3 pertonr)iwhich is omitted,
though Virgil has the same recommendation in the 2 pen. ' nudut ara,tere nudus,'
or with the verb being impersonal, Herod. 5, 105. Tfl Ziu ixytvifSat pot 1ASnttttavs
rirmrStu, that I might be allowed. But we have still more frequently the
infin. instead of the imper.
of the 2 pert., and in this case the subject, and what belongs to it, if it be expressed,
always is in the nomin. 11. {. 692. 'AXki eiy T^' 'AîXii', Su>> iwi twt 'AxtuZi,
EiTtTvPlato Soph. 218. *At 2' SiBot ri Tif fttiMU trttSt ^3tj, ph
ainafBtu toutm,
(then do not impute it to me.) Verbt like hi, uifttari, &c are usually supplied, but it
is better to do without them. See Dorv. Vann. 341. Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 18.
Matthias's Or. Gr. 544. p. 824. Engl. Trans. 4th ed.
Obt'. 6. The infin. with and jvithout t, sometimes serves as an exclamation ex
pressive of surprise : 2i ruura dîeta, ' that thou couldst do such a thing !' Ti A/*
SYNTAX.
t/tlZut, Sir* mXMiuTn), ' that thou, being ofsuch an age, canst still believe in Jupiter."
Aristopb. Nub. 816.
143.Construction with the Pronoun Relative.
1. The construction with the pronouns relative oV, ovas, oTor, &c.
(of which the construction with the part, is but an abbreviation,)
is not always used by the Greeks for a mere connecting purpose;
the relatives sometimes shew the cause, reason, motive, or any
thing, which might properly be expressed by a conjunction;
seu/Aayov iroieTf, or vifjuv ot/Ssv o\'5W, thou behavest oddly, who
givest to us nothing, i. e. by giving to us nothing ; Herod. Al
'AqysTxi E/xaxasgiôv rriv fjunrigx, olojv texvwv ex.vpvi'ss, i. e. on toioutojv
t. e. the women of Argos esteemed the mother happy for having
such children. And especially with the conj. or fut. (in the same
way as formerly 7v,) to denote a purpose or utility ; ' H vuvs wqlo-fisis
ayei, o'luep rot atfirepx (ppotacuaw
ktwvtcci, oIr dfAvvovvrxt rovs
dSixovvrxf:
Obs. 1. The pronoun relative is not so frequently used in Greek, as in Latin,
instead of the corresponding demonstrative, and of a connection with what went
before, and probably always is expressive of some emotion, 07 itw isxmtn *le%mn
Tn trokn rifiixnn, Plato Apol. p. 35. and other examples quoted by Matthias, $ 477.
whilst passages like that of Apollod. 1, 1, 3. Kjo> <rr> /tit 'Eriat tannu, it
Anfjinrêt* *a) "Hja*, ft&' as XlXourma km Xlsruivva, where this form simply serves to
vary the connection, belong to a period, when the Greek language had already lost
its purity.Instances, like the following, are somewhat different :T(!x tj.t
cSwxir,
nrnffttrt avrov, here we should say being as much us he had requested of
him.
2. The nature of the construction with the pronoun relative
requires properly that there should be with the first verb a noun,
and with the second the pronoun relative, which refers to it, and
each in the casus, which the proposition demands, to which it
belongs ; Ourdr sfiv b avrtq, ov ilÊi :MeteSo/kev
hzvtojv, oux
Vaqriv :<fri'Xoy ovk z%oj, wtiw ittstvaxi av Suvxlfxnv. But the subst.
of the first verb is frequently omitted, and added to the second
part of the proposition with the pronoun relative in the same
casus ;
OVTOS EflV, OV ElOEf otVOQX,
ovk eViv, Tjvriva oi/x vtfît aqyjhv, there is no magistracy but
what he has exercised,
and the last sentence is very often put first for the sake of em
phasis :
ov ifJef aiipx, ovrof ify,
2 B
370
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
3. Here too an
Attraction
takes place, similar to that of the construction with the infin.
When the pronoun relative on account of its verb should be in
the accus., but the noun, to which it refers, is in the gen. or dat.
and is not attended with any pronoun demonstrative, (like q&tos,
exenw,) the pronoun relative is attracted by it, and takes the
same case instead of the accus.:
MtretSiSas ahru rov ui'tou, oSarej avyos s%siy, thou givesl to
him of the bread, which thou hast (thyself,)
where oSweg stands also in the gen. on account of alrov, to which
jt refers, instead of being in the accus. oymp, which the verb t^fiv
required ; again
Eu wgouêgETai toils <pl\ois, oh 'x> he conducts himself well
towards the friends, which he has.
Anab. 1,3, 16, Tw wyE/Acm aririiino^tsv, c3 v Kvgor Sd!, for Sv an
K. J. : Expdrwe //.eyxkm yrffnfj.if.rm, Siv 6 J?i\uv entrtzaniTO aura.
Even when the requisite accus. properly is that of the remote
object, Demos-th. Mid. 35. AUm <Sv av dSitcrdri ns Xapt/3avEiv, of
the expression a aJixoD/xai, by which I am injured.
Obt. 2. The ear being once accustomed to this construction, the pronoun relative
was mostly put in the same case as the pronoun demonstrative, even when the latter
was expressed in the first part of the proposition ; Plato Gvrg. 452. Ol tnftuuty)
vovrm, uv Iwyviru i to uko>.i6i tro/sVaf JTenoph. (Ec. 2. 'Tt* y\ tcvrw, uv rv o*ts<ranu*
*Xi~e ei xiXveptui, which is at the same time an instance of the accut. (iirtrunis,)
which is dependent on the second proposition, being also placed in the attraction.
4. In this instance too the noun frequently is removed from the
first part of the proposition to the second, so that it remains along
with the pronoun relative in the casus, which the word governs, on
which it is dependent :
MfTaoVoW aura, oiireq xvros Xe,y airav '
EJ WgOffpe'gETCtl, oh ejei <p&ots :
iltoKavu, ait tyja aya&cJv :jrJpaii/.etoi ols efffov irc.oard.Tais, i5Sa///.ovEf
%oat, (from %7iT&ai irpoardr'n, to have a leader, patron,) whilst
they had the leaders, whom I mentioned, they were happy. This
1 This form of the proposition as the most perfect is usually considered as the
fundamental one, but through my investigation of the attraction in general, I at
least am arrived at the conviction that this is erroneous : (see $ 151. I ) It was the
omission of the pronoun demomtrative, which alone could be an inducement to con
strue the pronoun re/ative with the preceding word, and thus to round the whole
expression. But when the Attic Writer, to whom this construction was familiar,
still added the pronoun demonstrative for emphasis's sake, we can very easily conceive
that he had no occasion to recur on that account to his original combination.
SYNTAX.
371
construction appears still more strange to us, when the proposition

is an inverted one ;
OTr e'xs' <pi>-oir, eu nqoaipêTxi, towards the friends he has,
he conducts himself well.
5. When the noun conveys no precise definite idea, or when
it has been mentioned once before, it is frequently altogether
omitted, so that the pronoun relative stands alone in a casus, to
which it properly is a stranger ;
ME/xv7)(xe'vos- uv swgaÊ,
for yn^vnn.iws ruv Hfxytxirm, 8v %npx$fiv, and this for a eVgaÊv:
Aeivote!X eViv, a ixiWu Xiyuv, uv eYpwKx, (for iuvirtpx exeivwv, &
i'l'pvtxa :)MET9rM-"'T0 aKXo s%xnvii.a, Tiqos 'u upou&ev eê, (for
vpos t<5 f^xnuixxTt, o v. t.) And being inverted
oh e'x<u, yûâx,
for a. %, rourois yjpu^Lxi.
6. There is one instance, in which the nomin. of the pronoun
relative is likewise liable to this attraction, viz. when the nomin.
of the pronoun relative oios ought to be construed with elvxt in the
complete proposition, Yixvv rîais yjaôvrxt avSi toioi/to, oTor oil
sT, they very gladly do an agreeable thing to such a man as you
are, not only the pronoun demonstrative, but also the verb tTvxi
is omitted, and the pronoun relative is so attracted by the principal
proposition, that, along with all the nomin. eventually connected
with it, it adopts the case of the noun, to which it refers, and is
even intercalated before that noun, YIxvu riStus x^f'ty' oup aol
Mpi, The noun itself is also frequently omitted ; XaXeTiov rôu,
xat o'/oi ye e/aoi airopov, difficult is what you ask, and to a {man) like
me very perplexing. The instances, where the article of the noun
omitted is left standing before such pronoun relatives, rots o'loa
w/juv, have been stated above 125. Obs. 6.
7. When the pronoun relative by means of a verb like to be,
to be called, &c. requires another noun in the same case with itself,
it usually agrees entirely with this in gender and number, and not
with the first noun, to which it properly refers ; Tldpew xvrco
po/Sor, a\lu xaXouÊv, a dread came on him, which we call shame,
Plato Crat. 48. Tbv ovpxvov, our Sr( <noXavs xzXovow : or leaving out
the first noun, KlaU iv qpuv, as Wwitas ovo/hô/x.ev, there are in us
(emotions,) which we ccdl hopes.
See below 151. 11.4. an instance, where one pronoun re
lative refers to two propositions, which properly require two
different cases.
2B 2
372
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
144.Construction with the Participle.
1. A very considerable number of tenses being provided with

participles in Greek, this language employs them much more
frequently than any other language. This gives to it the immense
advantage, that by connecting the construction of the part, with
that of the pronoun relative, and that of the infin., the Greek can
entwine several propositions, one with the other, without creating
any confusion ; 'Extivas /aovov Sieêi, a. robs iSovrstr rrytxro TcS'VTjXE'vai.
Here a is the object of iSovrar, which itself is again the subject
of Te&vTjxE'vai, and this is dependent on reyilro. We should be
obliged to say, he related only that, of which he thought that those,
who had seen it, were dead. Demosth. Ti/aSte auraovx i\a<sows w
ojov xsera&Eis Ttxvaerxi rr\s ufipcaif, punish him with no less a fine
than such as will, ivhen he has paid it, abate his insolence.
2. And not only the verbs, which are connected with others by
pronouns relative, but also almost any verb, which is subjoined
by means of the particles ' as,' ' since,' ' after,' ' so that,' and the
like, of which the subject has already been mentioned along with
the preceding verb, may be changed into a part, without the
incumbrance of any of these particles, and this participle then
takes the case of the noun of the subject. This is done as often
as it does not obscure the sense, which may be impaired by this
construction ; 'Eireaxairoixm tov sratpov voaovvrx, which according
to the context, may mean not only ' I visited a friend, who was
sick,' but also ' when he was sick,' or ' because he was sick ;'
1a> n.iyiku /SauiXEi oil nirpiov iariv dt^pos dxpoaaSaci fj.rt <spoaxuvhffavror, the king of Persia is forbid by the manners of his country
listening to any one, who does not prostrate himself before him,
(or if he does not prostrate himself:) Xenoph. Mem. 1,4,8.
To auixot
aoi, fj.ix.pov fAt'gor Xa/3ovTi sxdarov, your body is
so put together, that you have got a small portion of each.
Obs. 1. Hie participles in the sense of after, or whilst, are frequently better placed
in translating (from the Greek as well as Latin,) before the verb connected with
them, and joined by the particle ' and;' Demosth. oSra hi <ras ytsifUH 'x"'t **
}>!, rkiur'm tit ras vails aire's iftfiarm, here the pronoun personal i/ur, belonging to
rXtiv'm, is, as usual, omitted, for ain7s here means ourselves, and belongs to the
participle, and along with this to the
which is omitted : we must make up our
minds to take to our ships, if necessary, and to sail.
3. The participle of the fut. is particularly employed in sen
tences, which we render by ' to,' ' in order to,' ' for to,' ' that ;'
SYNTAX.
373
Taarz //.ac^wv b K't)or eVe/h^s tov r/3t/av eVovJ/o^wvov, Cyrus hav

ing learned this, sent Gubryas to see:Tov aSixouvrat zsapa tous
SmaiTois ayciv Set Si'xnv SaJo-ovra, //ia he may suffer a punishment :
Demosth. Toi/r avy.y.a.yftvs Ss7 oaJ^siv, xal tows' touto ?joiio-ovTar
arpanuTxs inviiMcm, here the article, according to 124. Obs.
2. 1. stands with the indefinite object, and to send soldiers to
do it.
4. Some verbs, of which the principal will be learned from the
examples, govern in Greek a participle, where we introduce the
proposition merely by using the conjunction that, or to, for, of.
Such a part, considered as a verb, as in the other constructions
of the participle, either has the same subject with the preceding
verb, and consequently is in the nomin., or has a different sub
ject, and is therefore along with this subject, as the proximate or
remote object of the preceding verb, in one of the oblique cases.
a.) Examples of the nomin.(here the proper subject may,
as usual, be wanting,) Ala^vvo/Mti txvtx tooicDv, or roooga-ay,
/ am ashamed of doing this, or of having done this;
(whilst aisxi/vopiai rooisiv means / am ashamed to do this,
yet hesitating about doing it ;) Me'/Awio"0 av&gwjror uv,
remember being a man, that thou art a man :Oi5 ouvlsoxv
(idrmv wovouvTsr, they did not perceive that they labored
in vain :Herod. 3, 1. Aia#E/3xipi6W oh fiaifoxms j do
you not understand that you are deceived ? Demosth.
Mid. 18. 'Ev rt yap auras u$xif/.&n ^5ei yzyovas iro\iTtip,
in which slate, (i. e. the state, in which,) he knew that he
had been happy ; (olla yeyovvs, I know that I am be
come ;) Isocr. ^KOitovixims svptaxov odSafJLws av aXKus
rovro iiavqaîiAeios, weighing it in my mind, Ifound that
I could not accomplish it otherwise, (compare 139. 14.)
Hence also in particular with passives, (arising from the
following construction,) 'Y.ZtXw'htyx.tai r,ix.as dvaruv, he has
been convicted of imposing on us ; amnyyibS-n o 4>i'Xwrwor
rriv "OXfvSov z3o\iopxw\, it was reported that Philippus
besieged Olynthus.
b. ) Examples of the accus.OI Yltpaai titafit.wnn.oiievovm tov
Kugov e'xovTst (pvoiv, the Persians relate that Cyrus had,
literally, they remembered him as one who had, hence in
the pass. 'O Kvpos Sia/Avr/novEuETai
see the preceding
construction :OTla auvoTaov tw ra. îXnarot eIwovti, I know
that it will be advantageous to him, who shall have given
374
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the best counsel, from the impersonal expression ovixtfipi,

it is expedient, profitable.
c.) Examples of the genitive and dative,'HaSo/Am a&ruv
o<o/xe'vccv icti (Toipft/TaTwv, / perceived that they fancied
themselves very wise, aoûrirut for -ovs, because of the
attraction according to 142. 2. 2. :ObU-nort ;AtTEpteXnui
aiynaxvn, <piy%antva> Se zsoXXdxir, (from fêra./j.\tt
ix.01, 1 repent,) I never yet repented having been silent, but
frequently that I had spoken, a saying of Simonides :
Plato de LL. 857. Oilh
aixixpov iJ^sXopiEyy, it is of no consequence, makes no differ
ence to the thief, (viz. when he undergoes his punishment,)
whether he has stolen much or little.
Obs. 2. With verbs construed with the pronoun reflective, as cvniix ipxurZ, I am
conscious, this part, may stand in two different cases, Stiv3 i/txvrlj nfit it, Plato,
and, 2autu vvtnius xltxoZvri, Demosth. :'Eamor ovhis iftsXtyu xxxov^yst it, ( Gnom.)
might also hare been xxxtiifyn Strx.
Obs. 3. There are other verbs, which, contrary to the usage of other languages,
have the dependent verb in the part, in both the ways stated above ; the verbs denot
ing ceasing, giving over, must be particularly noticed as greatly deviating from our
construction ; 'Erxvrxn xb+it t^xntynmrx, literally, you made him give over being a
commander, i. e. you look the command from him ; Oi /.'! XK'(mt> ' shall not cease
rejoicing.
Obs. 4. The participles of verbs, on which a nomin. is dependent, as iltxi, xa\t7a!bxi,
generally change this nomin. into the casus, in which they are themselves ; "t/tXt ii
evffm 'ASntaloi; ait Tsirti. it does not become you, who are Athenians :'Etrogtvotrtha
Htkntfiyai, xxXivfiiyui BfaxSt, (on resolving this sentence Bexxti is the subject of
Obs. 5. The constructions of the part, become more complicated, when the pro
position as an in/in. is again dependent on a vert, so that the part, is attracted ;
Eijorsi xbmis irxtrxt liSih ânXtornfiimii, they have teen summoned to meet here to
deliberate, Aristoph. Lys. 13., here the dot. is used, on account of ahrits, instead of
the accus. before the infin. irxtrSt, but imrin fiwXwrifiim is to be explained by
Text 3.Xenoph. Mem. 1, 1, 9. (compare above 142. Obs. 2.) "A rut itSpirit
fivxxt oi Bui /txSwri iiaxcitut, what the Gods permitted men to decide from their own
knowledge. Here fiaSsZri does liot belong directly to itdfitrtis, hut to lixxpltut : it
is, however, in the dat., because of itSiuvm.
Obs. 6. When the part, precedes the other verb, there is sometimes eSron, irurx,
or iTtoi, inserted between the two for the sake of emphasis ; Demosth. Mid. 20.
xvret, ri oitx xtxXiffxotTx, Sffvtg lyii, otru fti x$xiUffxt rr)t ttxnt, by expending
his own (fortune) like me, he thus (i. e. by this expenditure,) must snatch the victory
from me :Xenoph. Hier. 7, 9. "Ot /' xtfyxrci t&tpysnTr&xi Tfis rust iynrst/atti,
intrx TcZrn tti ri/ix ixmrit twtunumi, when men, who think thut they have received
benefitsfrom one, afterwards, (i.c.in consequence of this conviction,) continually (have
him in their mouth praising,) load him with their praises:Anab. 1, 2, 25. Oi imxfttm
lifi'y txs itsvi, urx x-Xxti/iitci inXmrt, unable to find the road, they went astray and
perished. Sec below 149. about the particles irurx and tin.
Obs. 7- A relation of time properly is the basis of all constructions with the parti
ciple. Whatever may be the connection of the action of the participle with the other
SYNTAX.
375
action, it is almost always conceived as co-existing, or anterior or posterior, and

stated accordingly in the requisite tente. But there is frequently another view of
the matter possible than that, with which we are familiar, and ttius it happens that
we often find in bonks the pari, oof., where we expected the pari. pres. and versa vice.
For instance in Homer's, "ft; ilriit r(iin
xai Uvu.it ixirw, we expect the pres.
xiytir: for, whilst he is speaking thus, by his speeches the commander encourages
his soldiers, but he must already have said something affecting, when they are
affected. Hence we have also in Xenoph. Mem. 3, 6, 2. TWJt Aiga; xarirêr etiirov.
-The part. pres. may be used, when both actions have a duration, and are con
tinual/;/ repeated ; Xenoph. Mem. 1, 2, 61. (speaking of Socrates,) HtXrUvf yeig irotiii
ins nyyiyrsftittvt iririfvriv. Here mmrxt would refer to a thing, which happened
but once, but the meaning is, he (constantly, every time,) rendered those more happy,
who came to him, and theft dismissed themThe part. pres. is also used for several
actions necessarily connected and almost co-earisting with the following action, as to go,
run, lead, bring ; OixaS' i'> Mu^/ttiitis-rit <m, //. a. 179. go home and rule, H
Sta/y, It. 707- Aff ran and placed himself, ty%9$ irn^s fifut rrpos xlovet. Od. %. 127- he
carried the spear and placed it against the pillar, Kxi ui xad/u ayvr, Plato Charm. 2.
he leads and places me, Herod. 8, 118. Ttvt 2 = rfoexvvUrra; ixxniiuv, because prostration is conceived as inseparable from leaving the king. Others, however, are real
deviations, proceeding perhaps from negligence or some practical necessity, as rffijyriffctf, o%x{ itraju, i. e. as strategos, archon, while the part. pres. would, in this
instance, denote the actual action of the verb. There are other deviations, which
we leave to the individual observation of the learner. See Aet5Mn in the following
06s. ; and also especially the examples of the by no means uncommon anomaly of
the participle of the aor. being superadded to the car. in Herm. ad Viger. n. 224.,
and in the book itself, p. 343.
Obs. 8. Sometimes the principal verb is construed in a part., which is made de
pendent on another verb, and thus supplies the place of the adverb. See Greg. Cor.
p. 35. 36. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 86. The following in particular are such col
lateral verbs:
Tvyxtitut, and with Poets >*fl!>, (to happen, come to past;) 'fit 31 f\Sn, Xtiix**
he just went away, when I came.
Aa>3vm, (to be concealed,) Tavret rrsnirttt foadiy irtxfvyaiv, this done he escaped
privately, or in reference to the subject itself, T
XmSavu fslrxur, he
unconsciously supports his murderer, (he does not know that he is supporting ;)
"EXaSi ririt, he fell unawares. According to a very common anomaly, the
aor. of the part, is used merely because the cr6 itself is an aor. ; thus we
have also XaSi friit&s, live unperceived.
(to do any thing previous to another?) "E^3 a$iXwr, I took it away
shortly before, (see also 150.)
liariKut, (to continue, persevere.) AianAii" T*i, he is continually there. It is
the same with hayuv and iiaylyneSoti.
X*'i(in, (to be delighted,) Kxhwrn hrssasStrtt, they gladly praise, (take pleasure
in praising.)
(Compare a similar case in iBU with the injln. $ 150.)
^ 145. Casus Absoluti.
1. In the instances hitherto enumerated, the part, was depen
dent on one of the nouns belonging to the principal verb, and was
therefore construed in the same case as that noun. But if a new
376
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
object is introduced as subject, it is construed in the same case

with the part., which case is independent of the principal verb ;
whence this construction is called casus absoluti.
2. The casus, in which such words stand, commonly is the
gen., and these
genitivi absoluti
are the same as what are called in Latin ablativi consequential.
Their original signif. refers to time, the gen. denoting the time
according to 132. 6. 4. and just as vuxror means by night, so
does, "E/Aoy xa&ci/SovTor ravrx eye'veTo, this happened, when Islept,
(at the time when I was sleeping :) T\dvraM ovv aiwnwvrwv slve
toioeSe :MsTa ravra xt/ftsti'vovTor ^Sn rov TleXoilovvrianixiv woXs'/xou
stteiue tov 5r,piov, Ktgxygaioir aTioartTkau fivnStiav. When this time
is denoted by an historical person, the gen. often is attended by
the prep.
ex. gr. 'Ewi Kygot/ fixoiXevovros, (Cyro regnante,)
in the reign of Cyrus. Hence 1*2 generally is considered as
omitted, when the question is of time, (see 06s. 2.)
3. But this construction goes over to any other connection by
means of when, as, because, whilst, &c. For instance, 'Esj-ixEipUwv
Se t<v no\sy.im T-jf woXfi Xi/iAoj- rinnro rwv 'Paifjixlu-n, when the
enemy assailed the city , famine attacked the Romans ; TeSwcotosrov fiaaihiws tu vlu avrov eve'tiê, the king being dead, (as the
king was dead,) he addressed himself to his son ; eou SiSovtos-,
ojJSev 'layjiii <p$6vos, when a God grants (a favor,) envy is power
less ; Tovruv ovrus lyjnruv, /3e'Xtiov earai tte/jijae'veiv, things being
so, (as things are, in these circumstances,) it icill be best to wait.
4. When the noun is sufficiently obvious from what was stated
before, the part, may be construed alone in the gen. ; Yiapdtra.
tov wyEptdva tiSouvto, disovros 5e WEXyaivov, where the avrov belong
ing to anbvros, ' but when he was absent'Any verb used imper
sonally, i.e. without its subject being expressed, is construed in
this connection with a participle in casu absoluto. See Obs. 6.
and 7.
5. Dativi absoluti are used, partly to denote time, Xenoph.
Hell. 3, 2, 18 Tltqiiotin ru hiavrai HxXii (palvovot Qpoupiv eVJ rriv
THXiv, the year drawing to its close, they again called out part of
the army against Elis ; partly in locutions derived from the
dativus instrument, as, for instance, Xenoph. Ages. 1. "Et xai
vvv ro7s <npoyowi% ivoâô/îvois aMo^rônvirai bnooros a(j>' 'HjaxXiovi lyk\tro, naming his forefathers.
SYNTAX.
377
6. Lastly we have to notice the datives proceeding from the

d-alivus commodi with the verb etvzi or ylyi/tabai in such expres
sions, as, E* aoi ^So/Aeva; eari, if it be a pleasure to you ; aiaoi fiovXo/ae'voj e<tti, if it be your wish, and the like.
Obs. \. Strictly speaking, there are no casus absoluti but the nomin. abtoluti; for,
as the nomin. can only be the subject or predicate with respect to the verb, it follows
that, when such nomin. are nei ther subject nor predicate to the verb, close to which they
are, they must stand alone, (absolute,) for themselves. But this can happen barely
through an interruption of the chain ofthought, and all nomin. absoluti &re, therefore,
more or less belonging to the anacoluthons, (see 151. II.) The practice in this
respect is not steady, and isolated instances are easily explained, Xenoph. Hell. 2, 3,
54. ExsTrn 3s (el ivitxa) urtXtimi cuv roTs tmigiretig, nysvfUnv ubvm 1u<rupu, ilsri? i
K(nias, (where this construction is preferred on account of the gen., which imme
diately follow.) Such constructions, bearing the stamp of unconstraint and energy,
impart a peculiar charm to poetry, as in Homer, 3" iyXminp nmiSiis, 'Pi'/âJ yoiim
Obs. 2. The three other cases never can be casus absoluti in this sense ; in the
instances quoted above, they rather are only remote objects and relations of the
verb, to which they are annexed. We have seen above, J 130, that the oblique cases
may in some combinations stand instead of prepositions with the case of the prep. ;
not that such a prep, be omitted, but the termination of the casta acts the part of a
prep.; tunrit,
Now such gen. have the same relation in sentences likei
Ki(ev /5sw<XiiWs, tfisi raftmt. And just as other forms denoting time were ex
tended to express causal relations and others, these gen. were employed for any
relation, which is expressed in English by as, when, whilst, &c. which properly are
also adverbs of time. Hence it was very natural to add in some particular instances,
when the relation of time was to be more strongly stated, the prep. Wi : "En-i Kvfti/
fieurtXtvefrtft
Obs. 3. But the common character of all these constructions is that the participle
is not a modification of the noun, but an essential constituent of the thought, and
that the pcr6 in this shape forms with its subject a complete proposition, which we
express by the abstract noun of the verb, ' in the reign of Cyrus,'' in my presence.'
The case is the same with the datives, which, though they should not be called
casus absoluti, are yet agreeing in this essential respect with these gen. &c. : TeZri
ut'i ttt bit/lit*, does not mean that serves you, who are rejoiced, or when you are re
joiced, but that serves to rejoice, delight you, and <rifiihn iriuwrZ not this happened in
the year, when it ended, but at the end of the year,
Obs. 4. An additional modification or determination is sometimes expressed by
absolute accus. or absolute nomin. Herod. 2, 41. Till /3?j $i*Tiun, tx xigxTtt irt^l%a*rec,(so that the horns project,") 133.
oi (to him) ivultxu 'irtot eirri \\ \rim ylftiTKt,
a! tiixTti ltf*ifsu Tmiftnsu, (the nights being converted into days.) On comparing such
instances, we find that there is here properly a partial apposition ; for v/t't(M is in
the nomin. on account of y'mrai, and xifctrx is to be considered as accus., because of
QccTTovtrt.
Obs. 5. When a motive is presumed in another individual's mind, which influ
ences him, it is generally done with the conjunction if, (since,) or mf, (as if,) and
with absolute accus. or absolute gen. To catch the right meaning of this short pro
position, we must always insert a sentence in the translation ; 'Ec-mtx, it xit<rits
itlsreu, or Tecvra/y ulorvi, he was silent since (he thought) all hnew, &c; 0/ wa-rtîf
tiqywri TOVS OIUS KT6 rt 1T9ttl*9 itfyviTVf, vf TJ0V TOVTm ofitXiav h&XvfflY OVfav a^trijf,
378
A CREEK GRAMMAR.
parenti keep their children from wicked men, tince {they are convinced) internum
with them it dettructive of virtue; Plato PAtcd. 'EtixO.ivh ^tutixhi <rui>, it fiKtnfietf fityierrtis ourtis fttwiKns '. Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 3. Tarn HtXfSt apiXtZetr, vmg 1* tmJrut aii yiympitout QiXevt, as if no friends were to be made of them.
Obs. 6. Any real impersonal verb, i.e. of those, which have but a mysterious sub
ject, ($ 129. 9. 10.) becomes as casus abtolulut the gen. ting, of the part. ;
o,-,
at (the trumpeter) sounded the trumpet, ilovrot to\>.u, (from iiu srXX, viz. Spfigy,)
at it rained much, Xenoph.
Obs. 1. Those impersonal verbs, or impersonal constructions, where the proposition
dependent on such a verb, (commonly an in/in. or a sentence with Sri, and the like,)
properly is the actual subject of the verb, ( 129. 1 1.) are treated as catut absoluti
in two different ways :
1.) When it is a mere relation of time, it is fhe gen. This happens chiefly
with pats, verbt, denoting to say, announce, declare, and then is the gen. pi.,
(where t3i of t?i may be mentally supplied ;) 'O nijixXSt xit ir) Kki!,
IrayyiXSivrajv oti bohiftrat itits itrtarKisvnr, at it had been announced, (ifyiyyixStt,)
Thuc. 1, 116.
2.) In any other combination we have the accus. neut., Ei;nî aimit ruftTtut) tb% Hxtvri, they do not come, though they have been told, (ilfnrxi,) to be pre
sent, and this is the case with all verbs commonly called impersonal ; Oik ri pout,
ueriiveu, why do you stay, when you are at liberty, (it is allowed to you,) to go f
(i|$rr;: irufti -riXn, Ui/>a> itxtSr, (viz. l/t\ t-riittu,) I thall go back, because it
seemt good to him, (loxu.) Plato Pheed. 28. Ais recti rt)s t nvrk tifnxtf, is tu
vritv ivTtemn true oiaiv auru plkoi rov rttovTou. Hence it happens that the
part. rti%it, (from Itv-î; it happened,) is used as adverb, properly since it to
happened, by chance, and consequently also perhaps. Even the adj. ivtttrit, (with
the part. St omitted,) is used thus, Plato Rep. p. 019. Utirrcfttt
ivvotrot aifToTt etpHivat, (viz. ?,) we will contrive that they thall live worse, while
they might have lived better. Herm.orf Viger. n. 214.
Of the Particles.% 146.
1. Adverbs partly have, like the adj., which they resemble, the
noun, to which they refer, in a particular case, 'A%lu>s hfAuv <nokili.wo(jLtv, (we will carry on the war in a manner worthy of our
selves.) They do the same in the compar. and stiperl. ; Madras
TtdvTuv, most of all; Ol ifivnrts run tiSaiptovoiv iJjaXKov iuvxvrxi
ieStetv te xxi xaSevtiitv, (better than the rich,) see 132. 5. 4.
2. Prepositions properly are adv. having a constant reference
to a noun, (while with adverbs, this is only partially the case,)
and merely denoting a certain relation without any other power
or energy. Thus we have particles, which sometimes are mere
adverbs, and sometimes real prepositions. For instance, o^tou and
a/Act both signify together as adverbs; but they frequently are
construed with the dative, (like the kindred prep, abv,) and they
then, as prep., signify together with. Others, and especially the
adverbs of time and place, govern the gen. ; iyyvs, near, eyyvi
rnos, close by one ; %up\s, apart, separately, -/aipis rims, except
SYNTAX.
379
One; Sifca, doubly, apart, Si'x nibs, apart from, i.e. without;
tvSii, straight-forward, euSu twos, in the way to meet one, Lat.
obviam. (see 117. 1.) &c. There is a great difference between
the particle us, 1.) when adverb and conjunction signifying that,
as, &c. of which see 136. ; and 2.) when a prep, signifying to
in answer to the question whither ? but referring constantly to
persons', ElfrijX&ev diis eft,e, he came in to me, atriy^-naoLi us tov
fiao-i\ix, they went, (journeyed,) to the king.
3. There are adverbs referring to verbs and whole propositions,
which serve to connect two sentences, especially the relative;
ITagsVofAat oTroTa Ke\evaeis, I shall be there, whenever you bid me.
This is the origin of conjunctions ; any connecting particle should
properly be called a conjunction, especially when it has on (he
verb an influence similar to that of the preposition on the noun,
and requires one of the dependent moods according to circum
stances. Thus
or ms'xs'j **>* and sari, (both in the sense of
until, and in that of so long as,) govern the conj. or opt., when
there is any uncertainty, and when there is none, the indie. Yleqt(/.etu, eats av or f^ty^pis av eX&ti, {until he comes ;) Ylolnaov tovto teas
en e%e<JTi, do this so long as it is allowed ; At rotavrat SeWoivaj
oinrore "Kvtyovatv aixiô/tAEvai ris -^v%as ear' av apyjuatM avTvv, Xen,
CEc. I. extr.
Obs.l.*A%ai and pixv properly signify at once, at a continuance, without inter
ruption; in connection with a verb ' as far at, until,' in connection with a gen.
' continually up to,' or simply ' until.'IlXn> means except, and may be connected
with a proposition, ri.m il, except if; but it also takes the gen, : HXb> tin ixiyuw,
with the exception of very few.
Ob>. 2. Strictly speaking, those particles only, which commonly are used alone, and
without any reference, should be called adverbs; those, which usually are construed
with a particular case of the noun, prepositions ; and those, which generally connect
whole propositions, conjunctions. Thus, fur instance, inv and iru, without, ittUrm,
before, (in later Authors,) and x*t"i " account of, (the latter of which, like the
Latin gratia, almost always comes after the gen., as well as inn*,) and others, are
real prepositions governing the gen. It is true that x*(" properlyis asubst* as well
as iixm, in the manner of, Lat. ' instar,' (llxnt vrerxpZt, and the like ;) such words
are not adverbial suhst., but rather subst., which are become prep. Those mentioned
above never occur without the case of a noun, and therefore are still more justly
called prepositions, than some of the single words thus named, which sometimes are
employed adverbially without governing any case, 147- Obs. 8.)
1 Modern critics make it evident that, whenever passages occur in good Wl iters,
in which if does not refer to persons, they are probably corrupt ; u; is the correct
reading in such instances. The particle v;, however, is not one of the old prep.
strictly so called, which are stated in the following Section ; it does not make any
compound verb : see 115.2.
* Hence Poets also] ay i/thf, rhr x*("i U"or m3 'ahe, your sake,) instead of l/uv, ?
380
A GRKEK GRAMMAR.
4. Some adverbs serve at (he same lime -as adj. ; TlXnalov tori,
oTycL uti, he is near, he is silent ; Horn, axw iyhoiro, they were
silent. That particles by being construed with the article become
noun*, has been noticed above, 125. 6. 7.
147.Of the Prepositions.
1. Besides those mentioned in the preceding Section, the fol
lowing are the old prep, expressive of locality in general, with
their cases :
avri, into, e, (ex,) nph, govern the gen.
ev, ouv, the dat.
iti, sir,1 the accus.
the gen. and accus.
fj.<pl, il, peri, itaî, irep!, wgbr, ifoo, the yen. dative and
accus.
2. Those, which govern different cases, generally have the
accus. to the question whither? and the dat. to the question
where ? The jren. suits most significations, but chiefly conveys
the idea of a removal, (from, off, out.)
Obt. 1. The most simple and easiest of the above prepositions, in point of signif.
are
iri, from, of,
ig, out of, from,
ill, in, into, to the question whilker,
it, in, to the question where,
rrfi, before,
e'vt, with,
for though they have many collateral meanings, these, with the exception of a fenpeculiarities, are easily deduced from the radical signif.: as when t denotes a
cause, and may lie rendered because of, ix tsutsu, on thai account, or when it merely
denotes a succession of time, Kvv yt\au.iy ix <rr TjerSiv httcfvir : again when us, like
the Latin in, denotes towards, against, or when it simply means with respect to, T*
til <r>Xiû> iTiirrr.fuM itrlt : lastly when
is the Latin pro, for, (hut only in the
sense of protection or advantage,) biaxiihutiCut <r{i tsu /W/Aur. Cyrop. 4, 5, 44.
Ovk ioxirs* T^drrw, v(t vpvj, 'i, ti at Sir, I shall not be able to do what is needfulfor
you,for your advantage. Compare Tfivfyw, 6 1 15. OA*. 4. See below Obt. 7- a
very particular signif. of tit.
Obs. 2. The signif. of the following prepositiont must he more particularly remem
bered :
iti is originally up, (compare &tv, and the compounds,) and in this sense it is
also construed with the dative by the Poets, (//. a. 15. Od. k. 128.) But the most
usual signif. in prose is in, on, through, both in point of time and place; 'Ati
rnt yyt, all over the country ; 'H ftp* r.^Btt iti ens xs\tt, the report spread through the
city ; i iti tI triiitt, those iti the open fields; 'Ati Tarat viit tiftifxt, the whole day
through. But when there is no article, and Sf consequently is tantamount to
ixams, ( 127. C.) it refers to a number of days, years, Sic : iti tytt{r, daily,
every day ; Cyrop. \, 2, 8. iti nit trat, every year. Herod. 5, 114.
1 See about the prep. if, $ 146. 2.
SYNTAX.
361
ari as a single prep., has lost its original meaning of towardi, against, (see
Obs. 10. about compounds,) and most commonly signifies instead of, for, in the sense
of exchanging, bartering, buying, valuing, &c.
iut rev, through, in point of space and of ways and means ;3*i ra, o/i account of,
Aia. AuxihaifinUvs ifuysv, they were driven into exile on account of the Lacedemonians ;
Aii si nXScr, I came for your sake ; hut also through as a cause, A;x nit Sui; il crtarra,
through the Gods lam doing well, I am well off.
fii-i ts, after, Lat. post;fitra no, with;pith rS, only with Poets among,
Lat. inter.
i/if) and !{! rh, about, to both questions where and whither, for the dal. to the
question where is rather uncommon. Hence they denote any approximation ; 'A/up)
Tet Isn Xyiitn, he was about the mountain ; and ktt*)\ or trtst rt or rni 1%m or Jmsi
mean to belong to something, to be busy about something, &c. ( 150. t%ui :) rtt) rf
conveys the idea of care, and is used with the verbs to fear, contend, to be easy, &c. :
i/Lipi and (Tif! no mean of, Lat. de, to tali about something ; farther ftpus-Sai, pXtMinus <ri{i' rmt, and the like. But ipfi is less frequently used in this sense than <rt(l.
M( t, over, beyond, Lat. supra, ultra:Jtrij no, over, above. Hence the latter
also conveys the idea of for, chiefly in the sense of protection, defence, or care, &c.
troarrut, iivut ofrij no xsnw, to act, speak for the public welfare; urtSecrtir iwtf no
qtiXtv, to diefor one's friend.
Obs. 3. That the gen. preferably conveys the idea of proceeding from is particu
larly evident from these three prep. {, T(it, M.With the accus. and dal. they
retain their principal signif., but with the gen. they are mostly to be rendered of or
from. The following particulars must be remembered about them, viz.
trmfi ris, to, towards; but to the question where, near, close by. It is also the
Latin prater, besides ; "Extn tyn <rji rit &(nr, to have vegetables besides bread ;
'Ertiu
nil iXXto;, he performed more labor than the others ; TaZri trn
not rZr df*7y Strftelii, that is against the divine laws, against the order of things esta
blished by the Gods ; Htt(i 5|, beyond expectation, (Lat. prater opinionem ;) Hafi
ru is merely near;{* rsi is from with the verbs ' to come, bring, receive, learn,'
&c. and sometimes with the pass. ( 134. 3.)
trsit, to, near, has preferably the accus. to the question whither, and the dot. to
the question where .- trfii <riv is towards in both senses ;
no, from, by, with the
verbs ' to hear, to be praised or blamed,' and frequently with the pass. (v 134. 3.)It
is also used in the form of asseverations ; lifts tjJv 3i, by the Gods !
litri rir, under, (with motion ;) inrt ry, close under ;ivi no, from under, by,
most commonly with pass. ( 134. 2.) but likewise with act. having a pass, signif.
as tr*r%ut itself, and ex.gr. Haiti* Inri vntt, to meet one's death by one;futStut It'
aviyxnt, to be taught by necessity ; Demosth. Cherson. 94. *A S* utriruv tniv/iaruv pit
iuttifttt*, prevented by the winds. Even actions can thus assume a pass, form ; 'Emlwi
nvn iftri iUot, he did it out of fear ;If' iftrvs vfotrrun rt, Herod. 8, 1. or if the
pass, state of the object is uppermost in the mind, Soph. Philoct. 11 17. tiii yi isXn
tsx u99 Xtioo; ifta;, (the same with s-vyt irx&ns itXv.)And even with the gen. iiTt
sometimes retains its principal signif. under, iri triiit, Plato Protag, 321.
Obs. 4. The prep, ttrt and xt require the most careful attention :
iri chiefly signifies on, to the question where f commonly with the gen., some
times also with the dat., \<p' 'Ixrto i^tisStti, and, Kwi; ip' 'Artru i-rtaivm: to the ques
tion whither, with the accus. 'Eri Xtfn rnu xantQiiyu, he flies on a hill. But at the
same time its signif. becomes more general, and it may be used for near, into, and
to the question whither, for to, towards, whenever the context suggests this mean
ing; and with the accus. in particular it denotes the direction to, and towards. Instauces will occur to the learner iu his readings. We will only observe that the
382
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
gen. is also used to the question whither in the sense of to ; 'Erestvevre isri isleiim
'Anyevre, (thej/ tailed,) iri ris Xiev :'A*rier\turtv it' tixev :It) rev frequently fixes the
time by some contemporary circumstance, and more especially by a contemporary person ;
if'
in aur time, (compare above 145. 2.) It) rm tifurifw ereeyevuv : it) , in
point of situation, denotes clou by ; itJ rn rdfey, on the brinh of the grave; Xlv'ytvs
1 r. rZ totoluk atxe$e/*ii. Like xgis it denotes to, in addition to, 'Erl xifj Tai/ra/f tXbôV
iv'mni pM. Very often it means purpose, condition ; era^xjsxtva&atx.t it/ rm, to pre
pare for something i 'Et ivxlty xxvrx trovav IxCHiitq: 'Eti revrei; uewriv ieroinexvro, on
those conditions they made peace, (compare below J 150 if' .) Lastly ieri rZ expresses
power in such phrases as if' i/tiv irri, it rests with us. See examples 12!). 1. 142.
3. The accus. too often denotes purpose, but mostly with this difference, ikSuv St)
T*yry, to effect it, ikSiiv it) rtvre, to fetch it.
xxrx. The principal meaning of this prep., as appears from the comparison of
xa.ru and its compounds, is motion from above downwards, with the gen., down from;
Kxtx reev titjwv f'trrtiv rivi, to throw one downfrom the rocks ; "HXkavra xxrd too rujC'Vf. It is also under in connections like afavlZjeSai xxra rxs Sxkxreiis, (to tinh
under,) Herod. 7, 6. K<tr rev, however, occurs more frequently in the signif. of
against, chiefly with the verbs ' to speak, think,' and the like ; uViiV to ikniu xxrx
rival, to speak the truth against one, give a true evidence. It is less rarely used in the
sense of praising, "Etww xxrx rev evev, Plato Phadr. 200.
xxrx ret denotes any locality in general, when the particulars of the situation
are not to be, Or cannot be, attended to, or when they are sufficiently known ; xxrx
yiiv xxi xxra Sxkxrrxv, by land and by sea / el xxrx rtiv 'Ar'ixv vera f&xeiXti Herts, those
who are in Asia under the king. Hence in general, lime, place, and circumstances,
which are obvious, are denoted by xxrx, Olxevn xxrx xeifea;, they dwell in villages, Lat.
vicatim ; 'Ee-xxvevv xxrei rx%us, they were encamped ill battle-array ; hence xxri, ivs,
two by two ; Txvrx fjiie iyivire xxret rv)v v'evev, this happened during lite illness; Kxrel
raurnv rh> iixfeexv evreev Xaxibxifienav ere.es A^nvxtevs, during the dispute of the Lacede
monians with the Athenians ; At xxrx re eZfix rêvat, the pleasures of the body ; Kxrei
eravrx rtrfvânrxt, they are in every respect worn out, and many other relations of this
kind. Kara frequently is the Latin 1 secundum,' according to, Kxrx revrev ret \'eyev
xfiuyev irrtv 3i, according to this statement it is better thus; Karat UXceruvu, according
to Plato, i.e. as Plato says: Kxrx rnv xxBirev, perpendicularly ; Uomeu xarei ret rsv
(Sanxim y^xfi/txra, I shall act according to the king's letter ; &u/ixi aiirti xxrx exavres
roe-rev, I want him every way, need his assistance in any way.
Obs. 5. The prep, us referring to persons, signifies to, but always meaning the
persons dwelling, Horn, its 'Ayxii'ipvovu, to Agamemnon, to his tent ; xaXtu ri ftiv us
I txxffres, every one inviles him to his house ; Lysias, EiftkSeev us rev erxriâ. rev ifitev,
coming to my father's house. Ei'f with the elliptical gen. (J 132. Obs. 9.) means more
generally, into lite house of Alcibiades, &c.
Obs. 6. The prep. U is also used by the Dorians instead of us, with the accus.
(Pind. I'yth. 2, 21. 5, 50. See Greg. Cor. Dor. 159. with the Notes.)See about
ieri employed seemingly for i>, 151. I. 8.
Obs. 7. \Ve shall see below, 151. III. 1. 6. that prep, are sometimes separated
from their cases by an intercalation. Sometimes the object of a prep, seems to be
wanting, when a reference has taken its place ; Soph. Philocl. 469.
wjii, tj(
it ri ret iariv fikev, where u n (according to 149. u,) is used for e, n and the requi
site gen. to wees (<rxvres) is wanting, by thy father, (I implore thee) byif any thing be
dear to lhec, \. e by all which is dear to thee.
Obs. 8. And sometimes the object is not expressed, because it would he repeating
what had gone before ; most languages then make an adverb of the prep, (wherein,
therein, etc.) and if the prep, itself is used, it is only adverbially. In prose this is
8YNTAX.
383
done in Greek only with the prep. tffis, ex. gr. xxi rel;,
il, und beside; &c. and by
the Ionians and later Writers also with fttri : pira it, but afterward: But Poets
have also ra(i, along with il, 1, within, and the like, and the prep. rtei or rt(i, fre
quently is with the Epics an adverb: very much, ery, ( 117. Ob*- 3.)
Obt. 9. All compounds with prtp. originated in this manner. They all consist
of the radical word with a prep, taken udverbiallg : imfiaitu, / pass through, cross
aver, and the like, 121.2. The meaning of all such compounds is easily discovered
from the signif. of the prep. We will only remark that the compounds with Atj
chiefly convey the idea of opposition, against ; imrdrnn, to oppose, &tri\iyut, to con
tradict:those with Awe mean up, and those with xari down ; itafialtut, xarafialtut,
to go up, down. Of the collateral signif. or of such compounds, which are not clearly
obvious through the meaning of the prep., we must particularly notice :
i/ifi, when it means on both sides ; afififieXes, ambiguous, equivocal ;
hti, frequently means back again ; itxriut, to sail back ;
tut, conveys the idea of the Lat. ' dil,' separation, taking apart, or aside ; iiatrat,
to pull asunder, iixZivytitai, Lat. ' disjungtrt,' to disjoin, separate ;
iy, frequently answers the question whither ; iyxitt, to pour into ;
xara, most commonly conveys the idea of accomplishing ; xxTxxeaTrut, Lat.
' perficere,' to accomplish ; rrttfin, to turn, <wr;iîii, to finish ; n/treatxi,
to burn, xaTanp.rei.txi, to consume byfire. Hence the idea of ruin, destruc
tion ; xxTxxvfiivut rnt ebt'ixt, to lose one's fortune at dice. In both it corre
sponds to the Latin per, Germ. tier.
turi, denotes transposition, change, Lat. trant ; pint/3//3i, to transfer, remove ;
fitrxrait, to change one's mind ;
rasa, sometimes signifies, like the Lat. prater, the idea of missing, doing amiss,
in some compounds, as rxâfialtut rout tepevs, to transgress the laws ; raêeat,
to see wrong, overlook ; raeitratiet, who violates a treaty, (tretiai)
Obs. 10. It is because prep, are properly adverbs in compound words, that Poets
frequently separate the prep, from their verbs by putting other words between, which
is called a tmesis, eta n ptfextSai iri^ne. for xxi itapffiatSai, and even in the Ionic
prose, especially by instead of tit, Herod. 2, 39. 'Ar St ihtrt, for iriietTt eZt.
Homer in particular parts the prep, so completely from its verb and lets it follow
after, that that prep, sometimes comes before a case or noun, on which it has no in
fluence ; r'eXlfJut rift TttSt /fvyetTtf, for rteiQvyotTts refit ret cro?.isv :ix 3vp.it l\ioSxt,
for i%lXitSxi Hvpot IKara fievc vrtfietes 'HO.U.o "HtStetl i*apiZ.t ar' stTtx, (more
correctly are, see 117- Obs. 3.) for inti(iet Una, and the like. The reading of
Homer becomes less difficult by assuming that he has no compound verbs, only
simple ones with adverbial prep, more or less distant from the verb. Hence the
Ionic prose, in the moving repetition, which we shall state below in 6 150. under
put, merely repeats the prep, instead of the compound verb, Herod. 3, 126. 'O 3! xxri
p.it ixTtitt MfTfo/Secrtaxara it rot Mireefcartei raita. Even in the Attic prose the
intercalation of the limiting ri, (somewhat, in some degree,) coming after the prep,
ire, (Lat. SUB, a little,) which limits or diminishes the signif. of adj., belongs hither ;
ire ti iinfiii, somewhat irreligious, vt't rs ireret, and the like. Heind. ad Plat,
Phadr. 43.
Obs. 11. But even in common prose there arc some prep., which must be con
sidered as separate and distinct, though in compounds. This is particularly the
case with re}; and tit. Any verb, whether a compound or not, may receive the
addition of either of these prep, merely to shew that the thing happened in addition
to something, (rêe,) or in connection with some one else, (tit nti,) tvtrârtvepixi tat,
I go to war along v-ith you; Hvti%atgii aiireie XiXXxtiat, helps them to conquer Sellasia,
(Xeuoph. Hell, 7, 4, 12.) 'Aja xxi -{sr5/3Xi til, but he has slandered me into the
384
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
bargain. Other prep, are less frequently used in this way ; ififuXirZi, \yyufniir3z<, to exercise or practise, Plato Phcedr. 6. 'O *i;3/'; iiByira.ru tji 'A>u>Sr inf
ytXafiur xej iiTii{*/"> 4>i/w5Km/, Phidias made his Minerva for Demosthenes to benefit
by her, and to commit perjury in her name, (.flSsch. c. Ctes.) Thus avireXifiuv, a
compound, which perhaps occurs nowhere else, means in Plato (Phaidr. 260.) ia
reference to a home, tofight on horseback, i.e. downfrom the horse, being seated on it;
r^S>, to live on, (see below, 150. #.) And afixraerx u, Demosth. Mid. 35.
srtufilkut, xritxiiKtit, ibid. 23. All other compounds with prep, or other words were
regulated by practice, or introduced, when a compound idea was particularly called
for.
Obs. 12. And not only in the above-mentioned compound expressions, but also
frequently in others the prep, governs, under certain combinations, its own proper
casus, though compounded ; iviTtmi t;w, to be in or within something ; afurrmttxi rntt,
to be separated or disjoined from something; dmtnintar Imgarar, they deserted
Socrates, and the like;whilst in the higher styles of writing the prep, is repeated
again before the case or noun. This occurs frequently in Homer, and confirms what
we observed before, that each compound verb in Homer must be considered as sepa
rated, so that the prep, sometimes is merely an adverb, which it properly is, as we
have seen above, and sometimes a real prep., II. -J*. 121. J$u n/ueav, they fastened
(the wood,) so that it hung down from the mules.
Obs. 13. That the Greek prep., on changing their accents are sometimes placed
behind their case or noun in the anastrophe, and sometimes used instead of com
pounds with iTmu, has been already remarked above 5 1 17- 4. To this must be
added the inversion of monosyllabic prep., as ig, 13. 4. 'AfTtfiiii %ir, Horn.
148. Of the Negative Particles.
1. There are in Greek two simple negative particles, ovx and
piv, with which all other more decided negations are compounded.
Any proposition, in which one or more of these negations occur,
negatives generally in the same manner as if the simple negative
particle was used alone. Hence, whatever is observed about ou,
applies alike to ol>5e, oul'sh, oilanHs, &c, and it is the same with
li-h, ^SEir, &c.
2. There is, however, a great difference in the use of oix and
n.ri, and of their respective compounds, which requires an atten
tive study, and of which we can only give the general basis '.
1 Compare Hermann's view of this distinction, which he has ingeniously deve
loped, ad Viger. n. 207. He states it as a general principle that dx always denies
the thing, and fin only the representation, which is made of it, or that box denies
objectively, and subjective/ij. I readily acknowledge that this theory may com
prise the greatest numlier of instances, where these negative particles are employed,
and that nothing can be more useful, or more calculated to sharpen the intellect in
grammatical investigations than soberly to pursue such a philosophical principle,
and even to endeavour to find it confirmed. But at the same time I must confess
that I have not yet succeeded in bending every occurring instance so completely to
this rule, as to render it impossible not to bend others, which do not occur, equally
to it. A comparison with my statements will shew that I have made use of Her
mann's views. To devise a better basis was not in my power, yet 1 did not wish to
force into it what in my opinion is not susceptible of admission. My collateral re
marks may be studied with those of Hermann, or be thrown into the shade.
SYNTAX.
385
a. Ovk is a straightforward and absolute negation, which

denies directly ; ovk e&e'Xco, ov ipiXu, I will not, I do not
love ; ovk uyaSov esiv, ovSeis- waprtv, &c. In any independ
ent proposition, in which there is something directly denied,
ixrt, n-ribtis, never can be used.Yet a proposition with ov
may also be uncertain, Ovk av /Sot/Wjunv, / should not like ;
or interrogative, T yap ov itx^tsi ; why then is he not here ?
b. Mi is altogether a mere dependent negative. Hence it is
used in all propositions, which state a negation not as a
fact, but as something dependent on the conception or
representation of any subject. Thus it is used in negative
conditions and suppositions ; Ob X-nôixai, t\ /j.y> ov kzXsvsis:
EI'ti Tan tote vuv (*r, dîoy^psui* Soke? Eivai, eoz/xsv, ifany of
these objects should now appear insignificant, we will let it
alone. Thus txri is always joined with gj, if, lav, fa, '6rav,
es-iiSav, ims av, &c. because all these speak of a thing not
as a matter of fact, but as a supposition ; and it is joined
with ote, owote, &c. whenever they are in a similar pre
dicament. But im\, EWEiS?), (as, after,) take ov, because
they always refer to facts, //. <p. 95. Mr! /xs ktsTv, ewe! ov%
o/xoydarîos "Exto^w i\(m 2.
* We meet with passages, in which 1/ is construed with il. I am not inclined to
lay any stress on a few Epic passages like //. t. 1G2. Oil. .;. 274., because I think
them sufficiently accounted for by the observation, that the strict rules of grammar
were not completely settled at the time, when those passages were written. The
case is widely different with regard to examples from the Attics. Hermann (ad
Viger. n. 309.p. 800. ; and ad Eurip. Med. p. 344. 3G1.) explains the latter by observ
ing that d is not used by itself, but forms a compound or collective idea with the
word which follows. I admit this explanation in passages like Soph. Ajac. 1131.
Ej nif Bxtitrns cux \2( Sirrut Txfiiy, forbiddest, Lysias in Agorat. 135. Ei pit
eii irekXot titoit, xecS-' Xxatrrtt it -riî etiirut ixtviri, if there were few. Hither belongs
also the tux iT>i in the comico-philosophic passage of Athen. 3. p. 99. But I think
this explanation admissible only in expressions, where the negation is, according
to a long standing usage, employed, as here, to denote the contrary, so that they
may be considered as a kind of compounds with oux. This appears to have become
the rule with tS Qipi, J faixnt, so that even lit was joined to it. See below, ;; 148.
Obs. 2. In other cases, where the unconditional six is used preferably to pl>, this
preference must have a sensible foundation in the context. Thus in the example
taken from Andocides de Myst, p. 5. Ej li tvhit tipatprtiral pot, xtti rturt vp.it atrthlxtupt 9tt$ut, Vitpeu ttpZt aura Qattgot rtTs ' Ki./w< TOLfft troir,veii, it is obviously the
speaker's intention most positively to assert his innocence, since, as is well known la
every body, I have not failed in any thing. In Eurip. Med. 87- E/' nurh, (his chil
dren,*) y %utH; outix eii rri^yu vrttriif, the ti/ rri^yu expresses this relation as a noto
rious one, and ii refers merely to the stated cause ii5f aunxa. The case is different
with the three examples in Herm. ad Medeam, p. 344.361. They all three belong
to the construction with pit and li stated below, the second half of which proposi
tions constantly is the real object of the thought, while the first barely is its coun
terpart or contrast. We transcribe the passage of Thuc. 1, 121. verbatim :
2 C
38G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
c. As intention also has its foundation merely in the con
ception of the speaker, m-w is constantly used with the par
ticles ha., us, onus, urn, whenever they really announce a
purpose or design. It is also employed in any proposition,
containing a wish, request, or prohibition. In all these
instances it answers to the Latin ne, and begins the pro
position like this, the idea of a wish being mentally under
stood, Mri yhoiro, may it not happen !
d. Any thing, which is stated in sermone obliquo as the opi
nion, argument, or supposition of another, appears indeed
to he a dependent proposition, but as it distinguishes itself
only in form from a direct assertion, common usage pre
fers ovk in most instances, and we meet with No;u'ei ov
xaxbv tivai,Oux. e&e'Xeiv <pn<Tiv, and the like. Mw, however,
may be used in many such instances ; Xenoph. Hell. 3,
2, 19. 'EvoAtiuav avrov /xt> @ou\eaat piaXXov j fx?) Si/vauScti,
and the dependent or indirect question with eI, whether, is
commonly attended by /xve. To the conditions and suppositions mentioned at (b) be
long likewise all pronouns relative, when they refer not to
defined objects, but barely to the conceptions of the mind.
We thus have, for instance, Ovltis XriÊTui j^'/Aara, BVir
ixv> TMcpirzi, no one shall receive money, who is not present ;
but, OStoi e3<tiv, o'i ovV otioDv rous woXe/xious- jSXavroi/n, Cyrop. 6, 1, 28. positively, these are those, who do not hurt
the enemy in the least.
H
> tin, ii o'i /tin ixiivAfv %ufiftu%at \rt lovXitx tyi aiiruv ^t'âvrif cvx Atttfevcn,
flfitil It iri t TiftMfwpivoi Tois KC'H6'^' *a' "'J~7'' *t** fvie$ett, tlx aou. i&vavnftfm ;
The tux here ia the first proposition is necessary and natural, because the fact is
notorious; hut in the second proposition evx is indeed strange and extraordinary,
the matter being actually considered as impossible, in which case pii appears as
necessary as in the similar proposition below, 149. (Alr%eb lrrn t)
/inH
Tttis xiyovf
.) The case is the same with the two passages of two very different
Writers quoted by Hermann, p. 361. which introduce similar double propositions
with imit (', in the second of which ob appears equally strange and extraordinary.
There must be a general cause for it, which I consider to be this : the proposition
Sum ii, which expresses some astonishment, insensibly becomes, after the first half,
an angry interrogative expressive of the utmost surprise, by means of ii. Hence
the proposition in Thuc. closes with the question, d* Ufa !twi/ii> ; in Herod.
7, 9. with"Exxjvf Siov Tifiuonffifitâ ; and in Andocides de Myxt. 13. *K v/it*
ai evSnrifim ; which appears to me a very natural ethos. Criticism will be able thus
to account for other similar cases, which are yet unexplained. In Herod. 6, 9.
(iim vnwwn,) the M SS. have ,itn'. In Eurip. Cyclop. 428. i"r' it X.(*X.tni >> "as
the signif. of whether, which is susceptible of both constructions. See the Note to
Plato Meno. 23. and Herm. ad Eurip. Med. p. 344. where in the passage quoted
from Plato Prolog. 77- "' tlx itir^Ctcfteii, whether I am not ashamed, six is suggested
by the direct question, tlx !r%m;
SYNTAX.
387
f. Hence all those short phrases, which may be considered

as one of those dependent constructions, are always stated,
by /am only. Thus in particular the articulus prcepositivus
as an abbreviation of the pronoun relative with the verb
tlvai, ex. gr. ra. jam xaXa, i. e. driva jam xa\i eViv, whatever is
not beautiful. Thus Anab. 4,4, 15. it is said of a veracious
man, that he always stated ri jam tvrn as ovx ovra. Here
r /am ovra is the abbreviation of the dependent propo
sition, anva jam mv, what was not, untruth ; but ovx ovra
is the participle of the positive and direct negation, ovx eVi:
for, as a finite verb, it would necessarily be, ra. y.ri ovra. ovx
e'riv, (what is not, is not.) Again, the participles, even
without an article, whenever they are an abbreviation of
one of the above constructions ; "HSiov av hy^puium r>
'AXxi/SiaSr) jamSev xextmjae'vg;, / should be better pleased with
my intimacy with Alcibiades, if he were not wealthy, (si
/amSev IxE'xTTjro,) but oi/Sev xextm/aevw, who has no fortune.
g.) Any negation governed by another verb, is also a depen
dent one : hence all infin. (except those mentioned at d.
as being in sermone obliquo,) are most generally construed
with jam, of which the reason is already apparent in part
from what we have stated above, since most infin. may
be converted into such propositions ; To jam n/j-xv yipovras
uvoatov Ian, if one does not honor,consequently it is a
supposition. But even when the negation is positive, the
infin. yet takes jam, ex. gr. Tb jam ntto-Swai jaoi a'irtov not
ruv xaxa/y, (that thou didst not believe me.) Thus jam
comes not only after Jeo/ausi, xeKiva, vitio-y^bvy.ai, &c. but
also after SsI", avdyxn, and the like, even when these words
do not denote any obligation or necessity dependent on the
will of any individual, but bare physical necessity.
h. ) Most instances, respecting which some Grammarians
pretend that ov denies whole propositions, and jam only
parts of a proposition, may be brought under this rule ;
T'n ovv rpoiios rov xaXus re xa\ jam ygs<ps<v. Here indeed
jam denies merely the xaXus, but even alone the sentence
would be, Tir ovv rgoVoj rov jam xa\Hs ypitynv, and
the jam is merely used in consequence of the depen
dence of the infin. ypdipeiv : complete it is, T/r ovv rpiwos,
e" Tir @ou\irat /am xahSis yqdipeiv. (See also similar pro
2 C 2
388
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
positions, 151.1V. 3.)
Thus in the question, rAga SsI*
ixt vxqoiytviaStzi, ri tx-n ; the latter means, ' or must I not?'

the /A?) then denies merely the infin. napaywioba.i : the
force of Iti is not destroyed, but I am obliged not to be
present; if the words were fj ou, the Se7 would be denied,
% at It"; or is it not necessary ? Plato Phcedr. 70. Toirots
E^tfTTi *XEV TTEl'&Eff&a:!, EÊOTI 5e //.)
Obs. 1. It is, however, frequently at the option of the speaker, whether for the
sake of distinctness, distinction, or emphasis, he treats a negation, which in itself is
dependent, as if it were a direct negation involved in the construction; and vena
vice, many a positive negation implied in a construction with the parr, may on that
account be expressed with fii. We meet with an instance of the latter in Demosth.
pro Cor. 276. TH* 3t (i Q'faxxss) svt it th 3Xttj t*t xfurrm vfuit, svr lis rht
' Arnrtxv* iXBitv iuvetrit ftrtrl QtrretXtir ixaXsvSsut'rtiv, fivin &rfiuiuv SiMrrMv: the latter
part means, as neither did the Thessalians follow him, nor the Thebans grant to him a
passage. This comprise* facts, and the negation is not dependent on any conception
of the mind or anything else ; in any other case the part, would have been con
strued with <0ri. But slri had gone before, and as in Greek, (as we shall see
below, Text 0.) when, after a negation, the same negative particle is repeated, it
always refers again to the first-mentioned circumstance, the meaning, if we had
here oJn instead of /sin, would necessarily be, Philip could not come to Attica, neither
in case the Thessalians followed him, nor if a passage were granted to him by theThebans. It is therefore merely by way of a distinction from the preceding Srt,
that we have here ftvrt in a negation, which, though not dependent, is yet subordi
nate.
Obs. 2. The particles nix and have in some expressions the power not only of
denying, but even of asserting the contrary. Thus in particular tl Trim must not
be rendered not quite, but bg no means; 5 fitfii is not / do not say, but J say not,
deny ; Ovx tfaffxv litsu, they refused to go ; Obx v*i*XsZ9Tt svssttTnWtn, they declined
the im itation, Xenoph. Symp. ]. 7-; Ol% Inlixiro, refused, Herod. 3, 50. That p)i
should have this property in a dependent proposition, appears to be the case only in
later writers; Plut. in Gryllo, I. *A it ftri <pZn>. In Plato Apol. Socr. p. 25.
( 12.) Bekker has restored from the best MSS. d ipUrt, instead of \ii c< fin,
so that even si itself comes after lit : (compare above, the Note to p. 385.) Lysias
in Agar. 137. always had, 'Eat i' li firxri.
Obs. 3. Both six and uii are put immediately before subst. to render them nega
tive, and make a kind of compound words, (compare the same case with other
adverbs, above, 125. C.) For instance, fi clx i<rSiu\n, In tb hikorn, the non-demon
stration, non-dissolution, non-destruction ; w /th tfitx, the non-species, n fiM l/tuwlm,
non-experience, in-experience. Both are abbreviations of propositions having either
tlx or pit, ex. gr. i si Itikjtett rZt yiQogZr, the non-destruction of the bridges, the fact
that the bridges were not destroyed, (a direct and real negation with eb :) Si Vrrn
h p-ii i/*rti('iK, it is grievous to have no experience, it is a sad thing when one has no ex
perience, (a mere assumption with p*.)
3. We have just seen (2. c.) that fj.ri is used in particular with
the verbs 1 to ivisk, request, command.' Whenever it is construed
with a ivish, it requires the opt. ; Mi yiyoiro^ !'Soir touto, that
SYNTAX.
389
you may not get to see it! In a negative requestor command

it requires the present tense or the aor., according as the action,
which is requested or commanded, is of some duration, or momen
tary, (which, however, is frequently optional,) according to 137.
5. but always with this restriction, that
of the present it only takes the imper., and
of the aor. only the conj.
consequently, jiri /as jiiXKs or /xi pta /3aXrir. To the very few
exceptions from this rule belong some passages in Homer, (//. S.
410. Od. -n. 301. . 248.)
4. The idea of apprehension or fear, which we express posi
tively in German and English, lam afraid that some accident will
happen to him, is introduced in Greek as in Latin, with a nega
tive ; AiSotxx ix-n n W&ri, vereor ne quid illi accidat, which is
also done in French, je crains qu'il ne lui arrive quelque chose de
fdchcux. That this conj. becomes an opt. in connection with
time past, and in a dependent proposition, appears from 139. 2.
OA*. 4. Expressions of fear or precaution are likewise frequently construed with
the /ul., Plato Phileb. p. 13. *o/W|Ki liîri/tn, Aristoph. Eccl. 486. trij/o-xoa-ni/ftitm ft-rt ytnrim.
Oh. 5. In the sense offear or apprehension fih sometimes makes a proposition by
itself; M>i tiVti SxXms
Such expressions are readily explained by understand
ing mentally Qcfiovpxt or fyet, {look to it,) I am afraid it is otherwise, or took to it, it
may he otherwise. This assumption, however, is sometimes awkward, and it may
be stated at once that the Greek language forms through this ph with the conj. and
a certain emphasis of utterance, sentences expressive of care or admonition, just as
there are sentences expressive of a wish, request, and interrogation.
5. Mi frequently is merely an emphatic interrogative particle,
of which the negation has vanished, and which mostly answers
to the Latin num, somewhat stronger than
Mi Soxe? <roi
ToiiTo eTvxi tvr&Es ; does this by chance appear foolish to you ?
Oi5, on the contrary, is the negative question, by which the speaker
gives to understand that he affirms, Ou xxl xaXov Itm to ayaSov;
is not what is good also beautiful? This interrogation expects to
be replied to by yes, whilst that with /xi commonly expects no.
6. When other relations or modifications of a genera! nature,
as ever, any, any one, anywhere, &c. are to be added to a nega
tive proposition, they are commonly compounded with the same
negative particle used in the proposition itself; Oux so*Ws rovro
cI/Sh/ao'v ouSsU, no one ever did this anywhere, Plato Parmen. exfr.
TasXXa tcDv ix.% ovro/y oySsvl ovâfxr, ou^xt/.us oiSs/niav xoiyaiyiav %si.
And the negation of parts of a proposition is added in the same way
390
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
to the negation of the whole ; Ov Hvxrcu out sS Xsysiv, out tl voistv

rovs QiKous, where we should say in English he can neithernor.
Accumulated negatives do not cancel one another, (as in Latin
nonnunquam and the like,) but rather strengthen one another.
Obs. 6. The two distinct negative particles tlx and /t)i are joined in tome phrases
merely to strengthen the expression ; viz.
1.) tii firi in protestations or assertions relating to futurity, (whence the con
struction staled $ 139. 4.) and in the confidential request arising from it.
Both connected particles may also be separated by other words, and the com
pound negatives, (tlTA, tlitit, &c.) may be used instead of tlx. See the in
stances in $ 139.
2.) ft* tl, but only in their simple form, and not separated ; most commonly
before injin. instead of p.* alone ; lUTay vrctfxp&ity wttzms xlru, ou%t t\<ruru'i ; what so/ace willyou afford to him, that he may not despair t mr%vtfuu pn
ti rtnTi TtSrt, I am ashamed not to do this. Sometimes they are put before
participles instead of tl pn with the verb. (Schsef. Mclet. 108.)
Obs. 7. But in this respect, and with regard to the rule that two and more nega
tions only strengthen one another, there are two principal exceptions; Greek
negations actually cancel one another, as in Latin,
a.) when pri has one of its particular meanings, (2. c.) expressive of intention,
fear, apprehension, &c. For instance, II. a. 28. where Chryses is ordered to
go away and threatened, H yv rti tl %{xirpyi t-xntr^ty xai trippx StsTt, that the
staff and the fillet of the God be not unavailing to you. It is frequently the
same with the idea of fear ; Gofaiptu pr) tl xakiy n, (vereor ne non honestum
sit.) Here pri retains its power, though we should render it like the Latin ne
simply by t hat expressed or understood, neglecting the following negation :
/ am afraid it is not decent.
b.) when the two negations belong to two different verbs, even when one of them
is in the part., Horn. tlV tlx !9ixr* px^trBcti, but commonly one of the
negations is then for the sake of distinctness strengthened by pti tl, exgr. Mn
tl%i pifiti etlrii tlx ay %uytupny, not to hate him is not in my pourr, i. e. Imust
hate him.
Obs. 8. Hence the negations cancel each other in the expression, sliut trnt tl,
(nemo non,} because the verb unci generally is here omitted after the first negation.
It should strictly be, for instance, tliui (sc. hue) ifit pn Xifou, there is no one, who
will not do this, i. e. every one wilt do it. But this omission of in is so completely
forgotten, that not only ph becomes tlx, but excepting the nomin., the tliiU is
attracted in the construction, (according to a particular form of attraction, which
will be stated below, & 151. 1. 4.) to the following principal verb, and we conse
quently find, for instance, tlhyi irtj tlx isitrxu, ' netnini non placet,' there is no one,
whom it does not please, i. e. it pleases every one.Demosth. (c. Aristocr.} 'Tpt'i pit
at ti. 'A, olViyx trttviuxxri ri, tpiktty, BlrraXti H tvi'lt* *r*ira9' oynvx tl (sc. trftvotaxat)
i. e. they have betrayed all their friends3.
Obs. 9. But the Greeks being so accustomed to the idea that an additional negative
merely serves to strengthen the other, a verb, in the signif. of which there is already
a negation, Is yet construed with an additional negative particle, "Hyxtraidn' mlrS
pnl'ty raw c{i rivs ytptui, I opposed him, i. e. / prevented his doing any thing con* The omission of for in this phrase in Xcnoph. Symp. I, 9. is doubtful; see
Schneider's Obs. But it is unquestionable in the Oracle in Herod. 6, 60.
SYNTAX.
391
trary to the laws; Anab. 1, 3, 2. Mi*ga l%i$t/yt rou fin xxrx-rirp/Swsu, he scarcely
escaped the danger of being lapidated. See Ind. ad Plat. Mem. v. p.ri. Exc. XI. ad
Demosth. Mid.
Obs. 10. The expression il SI (A, but if nut, should properly come after affirmative
sentences ; but it is so familiar as a complete contradiction to the preceding pro
position, that it also stands after negative sentences, andconseijuently affirms in such
cases; Anab. 4, 3, 6. See Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. 134.
See the following Section about tbUi and finH.
149.Of some other Particles.
1. The use of the Greek particles is so various, and in part
attended with so many difficulties, that it will be proper to review
the most important ones with particular attention.
us as a relative adverb has the following signif. :
1 .) as, when ; hence 2.) in speaking of time, us II r,\%y, ov
ira$r,]i, when I arrived, he was not there; 3.) it strengthens
the superl. especially of adverbs, us rdx'ôc, as quickly as
possible, and also the positive of some, particularly us otknSus,
most truly, us eriqus, very differently, and some other ex
amples in Heind. ad Plat. Apol. S. 23. Prcef. The in
stances, where it comes after an adverb, hxvixûs us, vwzp(puus us, are explained below, 151. I. 5. 4.) About, nearly,
ois irevr-nxovra, about fifty. 5.) To prep, answering the ques
tion ivhither, ear}, ei's-, môs, ex. gr. 'KTroqevero us in\ rot mora.f*ov, it gives the signif. towards, ' versus,' (properly, in the
direction as if he wanted to get to the river.)Thuc. 6, 61.
'AttsVXeov fAETa T7)s 2aXay.iviar ex rr,s 2ixi\ias us es 'A&ogvar.
This expression properly denotes merely the direction taken,
and leaves it undecided whether the place was reached.
Hence it may always be employed about a journey, which
is not yet finished, Soph. Philoct. 58. nXsis Fus irqos oTkoy,
you sail homewards.
As a conjunction, it means 1.) that, Yldvrss optoXoyo'y/x,6v, us
vi dpsrv) xpxTifov eVi : 2.) in order that with the conj., opt. or
fut. of the indie. 3.) so that with the infin. (more usually
aire,) see 140. 4. 4.) since, (see 145. Obs. 5.) hence
also 5.) the Latin ' quippe,' for, Kânyov sVai auyûpriasct, us
av SoxeIV owe afprjtreiv pes, it will be best to yield, for you seem
not to intend to release me.
About the prep, us, see 147. Obs. 6.
wf, (with the accent, 116. 5.) for ovrus, is very usual with
Poets, especially the Ionians ; but in prose it is chiefly used
392
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
only in the expressions xi! us, even thus, i. e. even in these

circumstances, and its opposite oul' us, not even thus, yet not.
onus, as adverb, also signifies as, when, and as conjunction, in
order that. We have seen its construction above, 139. 4.
and only notice here that it also supplies the place of an
energetic imper., onus saeoSe, Anab. 1, 7, 3. be by all means,
i. e. take care that you be.
"vat, as adverb, ' where,' as conjunction, ( 139. 2.) likewise in
order that ;"vat ri ; wherefore, tvhy ? (as it were, in order
that something be done.)
airs, so that, commonly with the infin. ( 140. 4. 142. 4.) with
the indie. &c. it means even so, but may also be rendered
therefore, Lat. ' itaque.'
on, that, instead of the Latin accus. with the infin. We must
also notice the peculiarity, that it is used before the very
words of another quoted, 'AwsxfivaTo on fixvitelxv ovx av
SeâiVnv, he ansivered, I will, &c.
It also means because; elliptically for Sia rovroori, or its abbre
viation 5ion : ( 115. Obs. 4.) but later Writers often have
Son for on, that.
It strengthens all superlatives, (compare us,) ex. gr. on peytsos,
as great as possible, on //.aXiya, &c.
rouvexx, (barely in the Epic Poets,) on that account, therefore.
ovviKat 1.) wherefore ; 2.) as conjunction, because, (for tou evexx,
ov ivsxx. But Poets also use ovvsxa 1.) for eyex*, for the
sake of, 2.) for on, that.
o&o^vsxa, (see 29. Obs. 10.) in the Tragic Poets, as much as
ov-iixx, because, that.
ei, 1.) if;2.) to the indirect question whether, see 139. 5.
and 148. 2. b. When e! comes after "Satvtutû, and some
other verbs expressive of feelings, it should be used of un
certain things, (ex. gr. if you are not sensible of it,) but the
Attic custom, to avoid being positive in speaking, has
caused this particle to be employed not only for very
probable, but also for very certain things, consequently for
on, and the like. See the instance above, 141. Obs.
Demosth. Mid. 29. Ovx fiax^'n 6' toiouto ***
to,
he has not been ashamed to bring such a misfortune on
Aisch. c. Ctes. (537. Jieiske,) Oux iyanjt t\
Si'xtiv eSwxev,
he is not satisfied with being left unpunished.
SYNTAX.
393
eI mi, with the indie, though. But xa! si, and xiv el, if even,
suppose even. The last is construed with the indie, in spite
of av : see the Note to Demosth. Mid. 15. Hetnd. ad Plat.
Soph. 69.
tins, sin, properly if any one, any thing ; but this expression
emphatically supplies the pronoun oyir, ex. gr. "EtpSeipov em
Xew/jwv *Sv tv ru weSi'w, whatever. Compare 147. Obs. 8.
si yap is also used to express a wish, O that ! else e&e.
tvel, after, 2.) since, Lat. quoniam, French puisque.
before interrogatives and imper. it means for; 'Ewe! w&r
av SiaxîWi/xEv aci/to ; /or Aow e/se could we discriminate it ?
'Ewe! biacaai aurhs, for look only yourself.
otiov, where, (there where,) 2.) as a conjunction, since, if indeed,
Lat. siquidem.
oitbrt, is also often used for since, like the Lat. quanduquidem.
v, (Poetically xe, xev,) see above 139. 7. etc.
ixv, 59v, av, Srav, ETrsiSav, see the same Section.
Estv in particular has after verbs signifying to investigate, exa
mine, see, the power of the Latin an, ' whether, if;1 2xowe tav
Ixavov y, look whether it be sufficient. But frequently the
verb is wanting, and must be mentally supplied. MtiSe toDto
appwrov tsu ixoi, Eav <si icws itilau, neither will I leave this un
told, (to see) if I can prevail ivith you. See Ind. ad Plat.
Meno. &c. Schneid. ad Xenoph. Mem. 4, 4, 12. Homer's
ai'xE, ( 139. 8.) II. a. 420. is employed exactly in this way.
i, or, which signif. it always retains even in questions, Ovrus Eyiv,
% ovx om ; so it is, or do you not think so ? wo&ev wei ; }j SijXov
on e dyopas ; whence comes he ? or is it certain, (and then
the question is unnecessary,) that he comes from the market
place ? See Ind. ad Plat. Meno. in V.
In comparisons it is than, Lat. quam ; 2ol rovr'o /xSXXov a'gE(jxei, ij Ejtxol, this pleases you better than it does me.When
the compar. refers to a proportion, we have v) ic%bs or y)
xara, ex. gr. Me/^wv i) xar atv&giuwov, taller than a man usually
is ; 'H So^st Eyiv sXxttuv v) irp'os to xxt6$$wij.x, the glory is
less than is due to the deed, (Lat. ' quam pro.')
Quite different is
y\, which originally signifies truly, certainly ; it is most commonly
a mere interrogative particle, Lat. num ?
xal and te are exactly the Lat. el and que, and xz) afso signifies
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
also, even, &c. If re comes before xa!, it means not only,
and xa! then means but also ; Autos re rugavvos iyivero, xa!
ToTt ifmai rriv Tfpavvi'Sa xMrikintv : in other instances these
particles signify as ivellas. But this double connection
is often used where we simply have once and.
re is very frequently redundant in Epic poetry. This
arises from the circumstance, that in the old language this
particle imparted to several words the connecting power,
which these words retained in the more polished lunguage
without retaining the particle itself. Hence we frequently
meet in the old Poets with pte'v te, Se' te, ya te, and even
xai te, {also,) for fj.lv, Se, ya, aud xai alone. But the
particle re most commonly comes after all kinds of rela
tives, because in the old language they all were merely
forms of the pronoun demonstrative, which through this te
obtained the connecting power, and thus became the rela
tive, which. As soon, however, as these forms were ex
clusively allotted to the relative signif., the particle te was
dropped as superfluous. Hence we often find in Homer
3s- te, oitov te, &c. instead of os, 8<rov, and the like. The
particles use and are, and the expressions olos re and ef'
te ( 150.) of the common language 1 are a remnant from
the ancient usage. (Respecting r1 Ipx see toi.)
But xai alone in the sense of also is often introduced
in familiar conversation, seemingly without any necessity ;
Plato Alcib. \, 6. (I admit all your questions,) "vol xai e'tlu,
o, ti xa! EgtIV, where we should use different particles, ' that
I may know what you will say.'
Before jj.i\x and wdvu it has a peculiar energy; ToCto
ya xa! /xatXa axpifius, I know this, and indeed very accu
rately.
xi, in comparisons, like the Latin atque, see Ind. ad Plat
Meno. cet.
xa!Se, see after Se.
Se, (but,) is far from having a constant adversative power ; in most
instances it is a mere transition and connection to announce
1 This is, in my opinion, the best way of accounting for the above-mentioned
Epic expressions. Yet I readily grant that there may be other suppositions to
account for them. But I cannot agree with Hermann in explaining all this by an
hypothesis of Ms own, that xcu and ti, and the Latin et and ciUE, were originally
different, and that rt signified the Latin forte.
SYNTAX.
395
something new, where we use either the copula and, or no

conjunction at all. The Greeks employed it, where they
could not make use of any other particle, merely to avoid an
asyndeton, i. e. a new proposition unconnected with what
came before introduced in the midst of a speech such as
good Writers never admit, unless it is to produce some rhe
torical effect. In the old language Xe also served for other
conjunctions, especially yap, (Od. S. 369. :) particular atten
tion must, therefore, be paid to the context in Homer to be
able to judge which of the three principal signif.
and, but, for,
it has in a given sentence. Homer also frequently uses Se
merely for a limitation of time, which else is connected by
us, ore, &c. Od. /3. 313.
Whenever xal and S are together in a proposition, xal
can only mean also, xal ovros Xe 7ragr,y, but this also was
there. But they likewise frequently signify and also. As
xal xal cannot be used in Greek, Se supplies the place of
xal in such instances, NSv ttiÎ -^vyjuv ruv v^triqut eutiv
6 dyuv, xal itt^l yuvatxZv $e xal te'kvwv. Were xal Se to
be rendered here literally, but also for your wives and
children, it would give a false emphasis to the context.
The meaning is simply this, now you have to fight for your
own life and also, (and additionally,) for wives and chil
dren. In common language, the expression can take
place only when the principal word, to which xal refers,
comes before Se, but in Epic poetry xal Se constantly fol
low close on each other ; II. e. 700. KaîraXlixas <irph veSv
ejê'/xev Xdov te xal lltltws 'Orpvvuv, xal S' auras hi mpoîXflim yLayâhai.
/Av and Se are two particles, which go together, and serve as Se
alone. They connect like it is truebutand are much
more frequently employed, as they merely combine two dif
ferent propositions, without denoting any contrast or oppo
sition. Thus a Section, Chapter, or even part of a whole
Work, often ends with, for instance, Ka! ravra /*sv ovrus
eVe'veto, (things happened so,) when the next Chapter, Sec
tion, or Book, must necessarily begin with something like,
Tri S' varepala, (on the following day.) It is only when the
context clearly requires it, that ixh is to be rendered, it is
true, indeed.
30G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
Two propositions often are united by ix.lv and 8e, of
which the second alone belongs to the context, the first
being premised merely to give more effect to the second
by its contrast; Demosth. Olynth. II. 'A\X.' exeTvo $xuImxôj, e! (that) AttxeSaifx,oviots /ae'v iron, Z avSgEj 'AOmaToi,
vniq ruiv 'Ex\nvixtc<v Sixxiuv avrriqtxre, xacl,"na o< &Wot
rvûat ruv Sixatwv, ri vft,ers^x avrZv dv/ikioxirs e\atyi%ovrts,
wit S' oxveite ejeWi, xal /xeWsrs (delay) elatyeqgiv vitlp
rut vfj^Tipaiv avruv xm/*iTOv. Demosth. here is not sur
prised at the first proposition, that the Athenians once
defended the rights of all the Greeks against the Lacede
monians, but at the second proposition, that they, who
once acted thus, would not take proper measures for the
protection of their own properly. Alaygbv lanv, si eya)
p.lv robs icbvovs, vfj.eTs Se /xj5e robs \6yovs abruv &VE%iaE,
pro Cor. 281 : it is obvious that the first proposition here
is praiseworthy, and the second alone shameful, not in
itself, but in contrast with the first. The following ex
ample, which is misunderstood by most Interpreters,
shews what attention it is necessary to pay to such con
nections, Eurip. Iph. T. 115.
Ovroi /Aaxgov fj.lv %\ofjLev xdnrrt itopov,
'Ex TEffAStTftIV Se VOUTOV dgOl)fJ.iV waXiv.
Here the negation properly belongs only to the second
proposition, and the first as a contrast may come after,
we will not, when ice are at the goal, sail back again, after
having performed such a long voyage. The connection of
the two propositions is still more striking in this sense, it
shall not be said of us, that we performed a long voyage,
and went back again, when we had reached our destina
tion. It is the same if we take the whole for a disap
proving question. See Seidler2.
This jA.lv SI affords an emphatic way of connecting
two ideas belonging to the same proposition instead of the
more usual rl x%\ so that one word of the proposition
is repeated ; Xenoph. Mem. 2, 1, 32. 'F.yu 5e ctuvei/xi fj.lv
8 The same phrase is also used sometimes in Latin, but agreeably to the syntax
of that language, without such pallida: Horace, Sat. 1, 2, 4.
Quod venale hubvt, ostendit ; ncc, si quid Aonesti est,
Jactal, hubclqu* palam ; qvarit quo turpia cclfi.
SYNTAX.
397
Seoit, (Ti/veijxi S' avSqurxots rois dya$o7t, instead of the cooler

ot/vi/Ai Seoit te xai a. t. a. And even without (j.h in the
first part of the proposition, when the usual connecting
form would require simply au. See Soph. Philoct. 827.
and about the repetition of the bare preposition of com
pound ceri* in such a phrase, 147. 06s. 11.
Strictly speaking jaev never can be used without 5e, or a
particle of similar import, (aXXa, /ae'vtoi,) corresponding to
' it in the subsequent proposition. Yet 1.) from rhetorical
motives the second proposition is sometimes omitted, or
differently expressed ; 2.) in some usual phrases, where the
second proposition must be considered as having com
pletely vanished, ixh is used alone, (like the Latin quidem,)
to isolate a person or thing, and remove any thing, which
else might be expected ; thus in particular iyw yuh, (equidepi,) and the like. See Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 36.
Tliecet. 49. In Epic poetry jaev also frequently occurs
for ix.r,v, which see below.
We have already seen above, ( 126.) the expression
o /aev 6 Se or or (j.h or Se derived from |U.ev Se.
The same particles afford similar distinctions for adverbs;
and not only demonstrative and relative, but also indefi
nite forms are thus employed : itori yuhnorl Se (some
timessometimes ; or at one timeat another time ;)
it is the same with tote and 6te(see 103. Obs. 9.) and
ty) jXEvTip Seor wyj /xevnit li(in this wayin that
way,) Ev&a jaevev&a Se, and others. In such distinctions
it sometimes happens that, for instance, 6 /aev, 6 3" o5 are
without a verb in reference to a preceding proposition,
when fjih appears to have an affirmative signif. nearly like
the English much, indeed, Tldnrocs <îkr,riov, aXX' ov rlv ia.Iv,
tov oil, we ought to love all, not one much, and the other
not at all ; Tlxqriaxv ol% o M-ev, o S' ov, a\\a natures, there
were present, not one indeed, and the other not, but all.
ovte and ij.vre.
oei and /xtjSe. Both forms serve to connect negative proposi
tions, and correspond to the Latin * neque,' neithernor;
with this difference, that ovrs, pyre, affect parts of proposi
tions, or represent the negation as belonging to that, with
which they connect it, whilst oi/Se, /x*jSt, rather serve to con
398
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
nect whole propositions, partly as a strong contrast, and

partly as a transition. Oi/'te and ixyits are more copulative,
like x.al, when it is not employed in a negative proposition ;
otd and /at,Se more disjunctive, like Si. Whenever oSte or
/j-rtre is repeated, the negations generally refer one to the
other, as in Latin ' neque'' neque'neithernor; but
when oiJSe or pir,Se is repeated, it only gives successive nega
tions of the same kind as ouSi alone.
Besides being connecting particles, ouSe and fxwSe also
correspond to the particular signif. of xai, just as this sig
nifies affirmatively 1.) also, 2.) even, so do these signify
negatively 1.) neither, 2.) not even, and always have the
latter signif., when they are in the middle of a proposition.
Originally ouSz and ixvtSe signified * not however,' and
must still often be understood thus in Epic poetry ; they
then are frequently written separate ob Se, /xri Si. In
common language the coalition of e with the negative par
ticle was avoided, either by placing these words differently,
or by employing aWa or ctrag.
iKKa has the intensive signif. of Se, and is at the same time the
English adversative 6m/. It is, however, applied in various
ways in a lively style, which are only learned by study. It
is especially used abruptly at the beginning of a speech, or
even of a whole work, when it often is intranslatable, and
may but seldom be rendered yes, truly, indeed, or the like.
dWa, yag, see the Notes to Soph. Philoct. 81. 874.
y*%,for, always comes after other words, like the Lat. enim. It
has a very varied elliptical use, especially in conversation,
when it must be mentally prefaced by / believe itno won
der, or the like ideas, which a careful attention to the con
text easily suggests. It is likewise used interrogatively.
This particle often appears superfluous to us in a propo
sition, which has been announced by a preceding pronoun
demonstrative ; Xenoph. Mem. 1, 1, 6. 'AxXa ixfiv eoto/ei
xal to!Se itpas rovs ezSLTYiSelovi, ri /aev yap uvayxata avvc@o6\tue wgotTTEiv, and so on, here we should say simply, he
also did this, (or what follows,) for his friends, he coun* Even in Ionic prose, Herod. 5, 35. ntkxJtt iTî ixrlitt /uriietr&xi, (to be dismitted,) M SxXxrettt, pit 2i ttanper n <riurn{ Tf MiXirrw, (but if Miletus did not
attempt any thing grievous, i, e. a desertion,) tvlx/ix, . t. X.
SYNTAX.
399
selled them tvhat was necessary, &c. (See also Plato Lys.
14. Heind.) In these cases ya% only explains what has
been stated before, as is sometimes done in German and
English with namely,
olv, consequently, therefore, follows only after other words. See
about the o2v, which is annexed, as Iothjouv, &c. SO. I. and
116. 9. From this are derived
ovxovv, ovxovv. The particles ovx and ovv used affirm
atively, imply a conclusive negative, ' consequently not,
therefore not.' Hence in familiar language they were ap
plied in different ways, which appear from the context,
and are partly denoted by the accentuation. 1.) When
used interrogatively, the negative conveys the affirmative
opinion of the speaker. Eurip. Orest. 1238. Ovxovv oveiStj
TceSg xkvm pvau rixva ; will you then, hearing these re
proaches, not save your children? Plato Phcedr. 258.
Ovxovv, sav fjiev ovros i/j^/xivri, yeynâs ifigj^trat ix row &Easrqou ', does not he then, when this is abided hy, go pleased
from the theatre? This question, in consequence of being
heard habitually as meaning the negative affirmatively,
became itself 2.) an affirmation without interrogative.
Soph. Antig. 91. Ovxovv, orav M
aShat, ittTtavooiAxi,
I therefore shall give over, when I am no longer able.
Plato Phadr. 274. Ovxovv to
Tty^vnt ts xa\ areyylocs
Xoycuv iTEgi \xxtus eyîrco, thus then we have said enough of
skill, and want of skill in speeches. Very different from
this is 3.) ovxovv, when, without being conclusive, it merely
is an intensive negation. Soph. Aj. 1336. 'Ak\' avrov
tunas ovt' eyw ToiovSt fx.oi Ovxovv xTi/Advai//.' ai, but though
he behaved to me in this manner, I should not like to insult
him by any means; Philoct. 872. Ovxovv 'ArgeTSai tout'
trXnoav tvnoQCDS Ovvcos Iveyxiiv, cuyxdol arpxrriXolrai, the
Atridce did not bear this easily, &c. The similarity of
the accent in the first and second ovxovv, as contradistin
guished from the third ovxovv, has been traditionally handed
down to us by the generality of editions; and (he state
ment of the ancient Grammarians agrees with it. See
Herm. ad Viger. n. 261. to which may be added Apollon.
de Conjunctione p. 496. 9.Phrynichus Bekkeri p. 57.
All admit a different accentuation only for the conclusive,
400
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
and negative expression 4. The accentuation of the affir

mative and conclusive negation ' consequently not,'' ovxouv,
is generally not different from the accentuation of the third
form. But as it is customary to distinguish the unaltered
signif. of compound particles by writing them separately,
I think it is also proper in this case, and by no means
repugnant to tradition : Plato Phtedr. 275. (after having
told Theuth that man would become forgetful through this
security, Thamus continues,) Ouxovv, (more correctly ovx
out,) why-nt, bXk' vTtofj.vnatais (^xqix-ocxov cugEf, then it is not
for memory, but for recollection, that you have found a
remedy ! Eurip. Orest. 1640.
Men. "OdTiy Se Ti/xjc /xhte/>' Or. EiJSaiâiv etyu.
Men. Ouxouv, more correctly, (ovx ovv,) auys, then you
. .
(do) not?
Ura. and 'iirnrx, signify both afterwards, thereupon, 2.) then, (see
Herm. ad Viger, n. 239.) Both are often used to express
reproaches in a scolding manner: 1.) stating the motive of
anger or surprise first, Tavra o\g roX/xozs Xiyeivelr eyca aov
pEi'do/xai ; you dare to' tell me this, and then (after all that,
nevertheless, or yet) I am to spare you ? 2.) beginning a
speech in reference to what had been said by another, just
as we say, you will thenshorter then, Lat. itane, Erra
ToXi^riaen tov u'iov diro^vrirrxovTa tioopgiv ; then you will take it
on you to vjitness the death of your son?Xenoph. Mem.
1, 4, 11. "Eweit' oux oi'ei auxiQen3 (sc. tous &E0ur tcuv uvSpdituv ;) oi wfwTov ij.Iv (viz. when they yet first, &c.) Both
particles are also connected with participles in all these
signif., as we have seen above 144. Obs. 6. But the instances, in which Eira and suhto. are considered as dependent
on the subsequent participle, (see Herm. ad Viger. n. 219.)
admit every one of them likewise a reference to the participle
which preceded, which ought to be preferred as more natural.
al, 1.) again, anew ; 2.) on the other hand, contrariwise ; 3.) far
ther, and also.
* It is only in recent editions, that Hermann and others have begun to distin
guish the conclusive interrogative by accenting it mi, but I cannot approve of it.
The first and second form have in the main the same affirmative signif. ; the accent
of the interrogative is an ethic accent, which is not marked in any language by a
grammatical accent. Both kinds of tradition are against the practice, for there is
no mention made by Grammarians, in any of the passages just quoted, of the inter
rogative signif. in this connection.
SYNTAX.
401
wglv, before, is in point of signif. a compar., and takes, therefore,

when it refers to another proposition, the particle v>, com
monly with the infin. ; Tlplv rj eX.$eTv e/xe, before I came.
But frequently ri is omitted, and -xplv itself becomes a con
junction, np\t eX&eIv EfAe : wpw av e\$u points to the future.
vuv df>, now, at this time ; and particularly with prmteriles, 'just
now,' ' shortly before.'
moi and wwtfors. The principal signif. of these particles is till
now, hitherto ; but they are never joined to affirmative pro
positions in this sense. Their use is confined to the follow
ing cases.
They are most commonly joined to a negation, and ex
press yet, Lat. dum; oinru, wita, not yet, ' nondum,' but
they must not be mistaken for the similar Epic forms, see
116. Obs. 6. YlwwoTs, however, is seldom annexed to
(he simple oil or tx-n : it is always ou^cHuhotb, lArdinwnors,
never yet. This is mostly used alone in reference to the
]Mst, so that the form without itvouHemri, neveris com
monly employed only generally, or with respect to the fut.
See Wolf ad Demosth. Lept. 76. and Lobeck ad Phryn.
458. Both itii and itunon may be separated from the
negative particle by other words between.
These particles are also sometimes emphatically used
with interrogatives, relatives, and participles, which shorten
this latter construction, Thuc. 3, 45. rts ma> ; Demosth.
Phil. I. "Oaa. nwitoxt ntarfca/xgy, what we ever hoped for;
Plato Phced. 116. Aptaros ruv ituicon Sst/go dtpixofAiva/v.
wa/jxaXa, see the following Section.
eti, alone is yet, still, farther ; and with a negation, ovxin, (xnxe'ri,
no more, no longer.
(ii and V7), are particles of protestation, which always have the
object, by which we swear, in the accus. ; ex. gr. v-h Ala, by
Jove !A protestation with vri is always affirmative ; but
/xos may take either an affirmative, or negative particle, (ml
/xa Alx, and oi5 nd Ala :) when i*, however, is alone, it is
merely negative,
Ala, no, truly not; no, by Jove ! far
from it !
2. But these and other particles are put in Greek to a variety
of uses, which must be studied with the utmost attention, as they
2 D
402
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
cannot be stated here. This is in particular the case with several

particles, which formerly were called particulce expletiva, though
their use alone can be called an usus expletivus, and this too must
not be misunderstood. There are in all languages particles,
which serve only to complete the sense of a proposition, or obtain
a certain harmonious fulness or redundance, yet never without
their proper import, though they might be omitted, since that,
which they are to denote, is often understood of itself. Greek
particles of this kind require still greater caution to be judged
correctly. Their complete and primitive signif. generally has
only been weakened, and merely gives to a proposition a slight
shade of meaning, which can only be felt through an intimate
acquaintance with the language, but which may be greatly as
sisted by the knowledge of their fundamental signif. This is as
follows.
ye, (enclitic,) properly at least, (for which yovv is more generally
used.) It is also commonly employed, whenever a single
object, or a part is named relatively to the whole or greatest
number. Hence it is so often annexed to lyw, (sya/ye,)
whereby one opposes one's self as it were to the rest of man
kind : exactly, / for my part. Frequently it may be ren
dered certainly, indeed, Lat. certe.
4gct, (in the Epics &p and pa, the latter of which is enclitic,)
always comes after other words,8 and signifies 1.) most com
monly consequently, 2.) where it appears to have no power,
conformably to nature or good manners, Lat. ex ordine, rite :
hence it serves as a transition to a proposition, which was
expected ; 3.) after si, ev, and the like, by chance.
The interrogative particle apac, which always begins the
sentence, is the Lat. num."
ro), (enclitic,) is properly an old dat. instead of t5, and means
therefore, certainly ; but these signif. are forgotten, and
Toiyag, Toiyagroi, roiyagouv, are strengthened expressions of
to/ : toiWv is used when an argument is continued, and so
on, as if it were, / say farther, but notv To! alone only
serves to strengthen an affirmation.
5 If {* or {' oSv here and there begins a proposition, it ought always to be con
verted into i(x in prose, which in all such instances simply is a question supplying
the place of an affirmation. See Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 27.
* Attic Poets, however, interchange the quantity, and use i(a for therefore, and
{ as an interrogative particle ; but its place in the proposition is the same.
SYNTAX.
403
xai toi, and certainly, and truly, 2.) and yet, 3.) although.
//ivroi, to be sure7, hence 2.) but indeed, however; it is a more
emphatic form for Xe'.
t'
r' ag, (see 29. O&x. 8.) with Poets apa. strengthened by rot.
properly at present, now, (for which
is used )) hence it
serves in various ways to enliven a speech ; aye M, come on
then; ri Syi, what then?It also means forsooth, truly, and
After the pronoun relatives, <S<rnr
%icou M,8 whosoever
it may be, wherever it may be, &c. ; or any one, I know
not where.
(Doric niv, Epic /xev and //.av,) is l.)an affirmation, truly,
indeed, 2.) but indeed, yet, Plato Soph. 1. Kai'ôi SoxsrSeor
(xev ovSa^Zs eivai, SiTos j^wjv.
Te pew, (Epic ye ij.h,) true, certainly ; hence it is also a more
powerful St, see Exc. 1. ad Aral. Ki f/.w, Lat. immo, yes,
by all means ! and opposed to a contradiction, it is the Latin
atgui, and yet.
After interrogatives following an interlocutor's negation
wore fim, when then 9 ris /aw, who then ? (i. e. when, who
else then ?) whence ri /aw is as much as why not ?
w /ativ, (Ionic and Epic % fx.h,) is the common formule
of asseverations and protestations, sometimes with the
indie. ?! fj.w eyu eW&ov rovro, (I swear that I have suffered
this,) sometimes with the infin. dependent on other verbs,
as oimvim v (Am Swo-eiv, (/ faithfully promise to give ;) and
also in the 3 pers. 'fYwel'e,aro r> /xw pri diropeTv avrovr rqoiprtt, he took it on himself, faithfully promised that they
should not want food.
oil /xw, 1.) yet not, 2.) a negative protestation, answering
to the affirmative r> y.w : in a dependent proposition pit pwiv.
(enclitic, peculiar to the Ion. and Dor. Poets,) is also an
affirmation, conveying pretty nearly the idea of / should think
so ; hence it is used especially in an ironical and sarcastical
sense : 3
ov m, even so, not so I should think,
w, vwv, short and enclitic, used only in the Ionic dialect and in
poetry, 1.) properly the same with vuv, for which it is some' This particle is derived from /trit, (Epic
and ), compare 150. 1.
6 They are generally written separate, but whenever they receive the addition of
the strengthening ttri, (see <} 80. Obs. 1., and 118. 7.) they are most usually
written as a single word.
2 D 2
404
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
times used ; 2.) for ouv, therefore, now ; 3.) like the English
too, Qvnros Ss vo x%\ ou rerufa, thou too art born mortal,
K it. 622.
v\p, (enclitic, and probably derived from ntpi in the sense of very,
147. Obs. 9.) quite;hence uowep properly means entirely
asKxiwep, though ever so much, i. e. although, in which
sense we also have wiq, alone.
r<m, (enclitic,) at any time ; used interrogatively, it expresses
surprise : Tif itork eutiv ouros ; who can this be, who may
this be ?
vou, (enclitic,) 1.) somewhere, anywhere; 2.) by chance, perhaps ;
3.) in conversing on putting indirect questions to found an
argument on the affirmative answer of the interlocutor. See
Ind. in Plat. Menon. in v.
A-nmv is the same as <noh, but more emphatical, and if
a little irony is used so as to hint that the opposite is impos
sible, it is SrivovStv. Demosth. Mid. 26. 'Eordvai yx$
eÊUTai SnrrouSev aurai, for I should think that he ivill be
allowed to stand there.
150. Of some particular Locutions.
ou ur,v dWx, or ou pivroi d\\x, (compare 149. 2.) is properly yet

no, but no ! rather ; but it commonly means merely yet,
however ; sometimes also rather.
oux on and oux farus. These two phrases are generally
considered as identical, while they rather are antithetical :
the verb \iyw, or some such verb, must be supplied in both.
When the phrase with on follows, the proposition is af
firmative ; Xen. Memor. 2, 9, 8. Kai oux rt t*vf 5 Kpi'vm
ev fouxJip
dWd xai of pi'Xoi aurov, (where /aoW belongs
only to KîT&iy.) Theophr. Oux %rt ^tyu av, aXXd xxi
lvxu%eoripx* xasi xxXKious htomoe, it would not only have
blown, but also, &c. Dio Cass. 42. p. 285. Aavsiô//.svof oux r' VxPx T<"v iSiwro/v, dXkd xxi irxpx ruv itoktuv,
not only by private persons, but also by cities. When
this phrase is to introduce a negation, the negative must
lie already in the proposition itself, and may then be
heightened by dW' oJSe, Demosth. c. Timocr. 702. Oux
on rut ovTft/v dittaTtp-rui.it xv, d\\' os/S' av ew, Thuc. 2, 97.
Taurri Se, (Scytharum potentiee,) diiinxra t%toovo$ai oux
SYNTAX.
405
on ra ev rri TLupdirri, aW* o$>* ev rri 'Aala E&vor fv itqos ev oi/x

eo-tiv, x. t. X. Whenever the negative is to be expressed,
oi/jg onus is more usually employed, in which case onus,
how, as, means that not, Demosth. c. Polycl. 1225. 'H Se
yr\ ovy^ onus nvi xaqnov rivsyxev, dWa xxl to uo*uqex twv
(ppedruv eniXinzv, not only the earth no fruit, &c. Xenoph.
Hellen. 5, 4, 34. 'ESiSaoxov tov Stj/aov, c!>r oi AaxEoaifAovioi
oL% otts/s Tiy.uphau.mo, aXha. x*l ETTaivE'ffaiEv tov SôSgi'av,
that the Spartans not only would punish, &c. 2,4, 14.
Ou% onus dtiixovvres, a\\' ot)S' ini5riy.oinirts, etpvyatitvoi/.eS'a,
having not only done them no harm, but not having even
entered their country, we were banished. Ovxow, (i.e. oi5x
ouv, see above,) onus fjLvrioSrrvxi av ns etoX/xhjetykavqov ri,
dXX' ai ev otpâXnotsfcaaikkusIxaoros Sie'xeito9.
oi5% oo-ov and oi% oTov are, but less frequently, used in the
same sense, the former for ov% on : Thuc, at least, has
it with an additional second ov, 4, 62. for the negative, Ol
//.ev ovy^ offov ova ri/Avvavro, d\\' oi55" iaurio~av. 05j o7ov is
used for oly^ onus : Polyb. Oix iov utyikstv Suvxir av robs
IplXovs, aXX1 oi)S' aiirobs autyiv.
Whenever oti and onus are introduced with u.ii, vno\i$r\
ns may be supplied, or they may be understood like the
Latin ne dicam, and are thus stronger than the preceding
expressions, but both in a negative sense. Cyrop. 1, 3, 10.
Mi) onus ogÊTu&at ev puSfAu, aW"1 out$' opSovvSai eSdvaaê,
3, 2, 21. Ovx av firsts datpaXus sqyaôlfAiSx, //.ri %ri rfiv
rovruv, dW' oJS* av t*iv rifjurtqav, Memor. 1, 6, 11. KaiToi
Toys IptaTiov ri ttft oJx/av oiJSsvi av y.ri on npoixa Sams, dW'
oi5S' av EXaTTov tt/j a^/ar Xafidv : all which connections are
easily supplied and explained.
When v.* on follows, the expression is still more inten
sive, and is to be understood like the Latin '. nedum,' much
less, much more. Plato Crat. 427. Aoxe!" o-ol pdtitov tfvai
ovru nxyjj /u.a&Eiv StioDv npayfAX,
oti toctoutov o Sri Soxe? ev
toiV /XEyio-Toir (Atyiarov tivoa. JPhccdr. 240. *A xal Xoyu
ejtiv dxovEtv olx entrepnes, f/.rj on Sri spyu. Xenoph. Hell.
' The example quoted by Viger 7, 10, 5. without mentioning whence it is taken,
01% ems rtvs *eXi/t!tus, *
where !>x J*"* " employed affirmatively for not only,
unquestionably is not genuine ; and the passage of Atheuaeus with the negative ti%
'in, quoted by'Budaos, p. 911. without specifying where it stands, (QpX V**
rnk rîr^Xxrtrru, iXk' eiVt aX/UXoff,) is of an unknown period.
406
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
2, 3, 35. Ot5Se wXeiv, M.'n 3ti avaigei<xS'ai Tot/r avS2ir SVvsttov 3v :Lucian has ob% %vus in the same sense, Dial.
Mort. 27, 5. OuS' iaravai ja/jiail ox avus /3a5i'iv ISiJvaTO.
oux oti sometimes serves to introduce a seeming objec
tion, which is immediately after refuted, (commonly with
a\\a,) not thatbut; when there is no refutation, ov% on
also signihes although : Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 37.
Protag. 66.
3ti f*7i after negations means except.
to oe, an elliptical expression, not easily supplied, which
introduces a proposition opposed to what has been stated
before, nearly like the English as however, but as yet,
Heind. ad Plat. Theact. 37. Buttm. ad Menon. 37.
to iu.i, more commonly to
oi, with the infin. as much
as wan yuri, so that not, that not, Lat. ' quo minus, quin.'
See Exc. 11. ad Demosth. Mid. 142. Compare also too
ni>, 148. Obs. 9.
t1 frequently becomes a limiting or also generalising particle, * in
one degree,'' in anything hence oSti, p.in, no< a
;
but these particles may be separated, oSVe ti ^<y*, II, a. 115.
See about the tmesis with ti, (ward t,) 147. 06*. 10.
fATiTi yt, mucA. Zes, Lat. nedum, probably derived from (tri on.
oi5 steoi, eat. gfr. Ov irepl rod rifjLupyiaaa'bai, dXKi xal, to say no
thing of revenge, (i.e. revenge is out of the question,) but we
will even, (Thuc. 4, 63.)
8<rov oi or boovou, (Lat. ' tantum non') nearly, almost ; Tov /xix*.ovt xl bo-ovou <xxp6ir stoXe/aov, the war which is imminent
and almost at hand, i.e. only just so much is wanting, that
we are not actually at war.
oo-ov alone is used elliptically with an infin. in the following man
ner, AiavEipi-Ev exdaru oaov ao^v, he distributed to each as
much as each could live on :Thuc. 3, 49. 'H ^te'o vavt
slpSaae tououtov, '6aov Yldx'nra avEyvwxEvai ro xJ/ijipio'pMt, the first
vessel arrived only a very little earlier, as Paches had already
proclaimed the decree of the people,
oaos, ti, ov, in SaufAaorot otrov, and the like, is the Lat. ' mirum quan
tum,' wonderfully much, i.e. a very great deal. It is used in
the same way before or after superl. of words expressive of a
quantity; nKiiara. cW, oW nXsTara, Lat. ' quamplurima,' a
great many. See 151. 1. 5.
SYNTAX.
407
facet foipai, daily, (Plato Charm. 51. extr.) and also oaos with any
limitations of time. The former is also written close toge
ther, and contracted oroptigoei.
v&' <5v, (according to the rule of 143. 5.) is used for avri exe/vo/v
aex. gr. ActCs rovro xvb' wv e'Sojxar jôl, take this for that,
which you have given to me. But it is also used for dvri
rourov on, for this, that, Xagiv aoi olla, av&' Sin tjX&ej-, I thank
you for this, that you are come,
etp' a, is properly for iiti rovru, o, but commonly for ir rovru
iis ; and as etti with the dat. conveys the idea of a condi
tion, Eip' S> means on condition that; \k%u aoi e<p' S> aiynatis,
I will tell it to yon on condition that you be silent.
E<f>' wte is the same, (for ewi rovru, elan,) but is more
usually construed with the infin. ; ex. gr. 'Htp&wotv i<p'
wte avyypd^/ai vo/aous, they were chosen on condition that
they should make laws,
tare, (not eY te, for it is used instead of es ore, Dor. eute,) until, as
long as, 146. 3.
oios, before an infin. means of such a nature that, such as; O!
wgd<T&v oSdvTEr Tteiai tâiois oToi refj.veiv eiViv, o'i Se yd/xpioi 0101 Iraqi
rovraiv SslaptEvoi Xebiveiv, (of such a nature that they cutthat
they receive of those and bruise,) or with a negative, Ou yip
i?v ohs aitb wowtos xe^Soc/veiv, he was not one (not such a one)
who is ready to do anything for the sake of gain,
oios te (oIotte, oIoute,) means, in speaking of persons, able,of
things, possible ; Oios te etti jrdvr d<jrohTâ.i, he is able to do
any thing ; d\\' ovy^ oldv te toSto, but that is not possible.
This phrase differs a little from the preceding one only in
practice, for oios and oios te are, properly speaking, the same.
See in the preceding Section te.
olov slxus, as may be imagined, as may be supposed,
oilcv oTov properly there is nothing like, (French, 4 il n'y a rien de
tel,') whence, for instance, OiJSev oTov dxouaai rSii \vya>v avrav,
i.e. the best thing we can do, is to hear him, there is nothing
like hearing him.
aXKo is used negatively or interrogatively to strengthen
an affirmative proposition, in which case there generally
is a verb omitted, Cyrop. 1, 4, 24. 'ExeTvos ovoiv aXXo r
rovs veitruxoras neqitXavwn t^taro, Memor. Socr. 2, 3, 17.
408
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
1 < yag aXXo i xivSuveuaeis imiet^M, av f/.sv yjiftarostitan,

x. t. X. When aXXo is spelled with an apostrophus in this
connection, it commonly loses its accent: Plato Apol.
p. 20. Ai' ov$ev aXX' v 5ia aotpiav rivi rovro to ovo/xa say/nxa,
Pluedr. 231. "flare oi/Xev viroXelnerxi <XX' ^ woieIv wôS'yjxair o, ti av, x. T. X. Menon. 9. "Oti oi?S"ev aXX' ri emrirreis,
because you do nothing but command. jEschin. c. Tim.
"flare /xrjSav aXX1 ^ ris aiayûvxs aurai vepieivai. This
accentuation gives to aXX' the appearance of the abbre
viated aXXa : hence it frequently is accented aXX' in such
instances.
To these phrases belongs also the interrogative expres
sion aXko ti : Plato Gorg. 81. Ei jaev yip rvyydvei rxvra
aXuSi) ovTac, a Xe'veij, aXXo ti ij
0 f&los d.vareri>ai*.y.ivos
av e"*i ; if this loere true, would not our life be destroyed?
The particle ri is also frequently omitted in this interroga
tive : Plato Rep. 369. "AXXo n yeaiqyos //.ev els, 0 5e 01x000/xor ; is not one a husbandman, and the other a builder ?
These connections gave rise to aXX' n being used for
the Latin 'nisi,' unless, bid except, Aristoph. Ran. 1105.
OiJx rnrlarxtr aXX' vi //.dlâii xaXtVai xal pvTHixnxi eiweiv.
But in most cases there is an abbreviation of the thought
before this a'XX' i, which it is impossible to supply by
words ; Isaeus de Aristarch. Hered. 261. 'O vopuor ot/x e
run rr,s eirtxk-hpou xvqiov eTvjxi, aXX' r; robs naTSas xgaTEiv
rioy /^prtfj.iruv . Plato Phecdr. 89. T/vof /laev ovv evexa
xxv ris, us e'nreTv,
aXX' v run rotovruv wSova/y evex ;
See also Aristoph. Acham. 11 12. 10
TaXXa for ri aXXct, in o<ner respects, otherwise, ex. gr. "JLariv
Sarais, TaXXa EiJSai/xovET, Ae is childless, in other respects he is
happy. Hence ri oe aXXaand in the next proposition xai,
as in generalso in particular, T te aXXa euSsm/ôveT, xal
sraTSW e%ei xarr,x6ovs avru, (compare xal and re in the pre10 This evidently shews the affinity between all the above-mentioned phrases. The
accent, according to general custom, should therefore remain unchanged on ixx'.
But the expression iXX' S for m'i is too abrupt, particularly as there are passages,
in which the word
is already used once in what went before, so that the ellipsis
before ixx' v is not clear ; Plato Apol. p. 34. Tim XXn xlyai
/StnScitTH iftti,
aXX' S ej9v ti xai ilxtun ; even the ancient Grammarians seem to have derived
this iXX' 3 from ixxi. As it here loses the accent, the latter is commonly also
omitted in the other above-mentioned phrases, which are connected with it.
SYNTAX.
409
ceding Section,) whence the elliptical phrase rx te aXK% xxl

properly among others, but it may always be rendered by
in particular.
aWas re xxl, also in particular, especially ; and has the same
origin as the preceding.
dixtpcTEpov, used by Poets adverbially, (or elliptically ,) and means
both, as wellas, asas ; yjuaxro V xlvus 'A/xôregov vi'xmj
te xxl 7X,r %uvia%&. In prose it is the same when the
accus. dnQorepx unites two preceding modifications, expressed
in a different case, Aixtpepovres vj voiplx ri xxWst % dôrspx,
(Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 3.) and also in another correspond
ing instance, Sxrspx, Plato de LL. 6. p. 765. "Ecru nelson
yvrjuiov warri(3 /xxKiarx /asv vUaiv xxl Svyxrequv, el Je //.ri, &iTEoa, if not yet one of the two.
rxvTo toSto, ToiJvavTiov, to X.EyoM-Evoy, and similar intercalations,
see 131. 06s. 5.
ohms, avrvt, as exclamation, see 76. Obs. 3.
xxl rxvrx, and that too ; Urikixaurriv jjrag&e'vov ev xe<px\v> e^gaâr,
xxl rxvrx evowXov, Such a viryin (Pallas) have you had in
your head, and that too armed !
touto ijt.lv, toSto Se, is often used adverbially. See 128.
avru, xvry, omitting ouv, always is along tvith. Homer already
hns Ivtti Ihttoi xvtoim o%e<piv, two horses along with the
chariot; and so have all the succeeding Poets and Prosewriters ; 'Aira/XovTo xi wes xvrois avSgamv, along with the crew.
avro Seiêi, xvto awiixnT, the thing tcill shew it, the deed will prove
it.
Ttqo rov, better nâtov, formerly, ere this, (&po rovrou or exelvou rov
%/>ovoi>,) see ad Plat. Alcib. 1 , 14.
tov Xotmu, (sc. xpowv,) hereafter, (compare 132. 6. 4)to Xoiwbv
or merely Xoinlv, henceforth.
TtoWov Se7, impersonal, 'far from,' (French, ils'en faut de beaucoup ;) personal, noXKov liu, I am far from, ex. gr. Xeyeiv
rovro, (see the Note to 151. 1. 7.) Frequently it is in the
infin. absolute, ( 140. Obs. 2.) iroXkov Seiv, very far from it,
most certainly not ; ToSto yip noWov SsTv el'irot ris xv,for
most certainly no one would say so.
The contrary is yuxpov or oXtyou leT, Seiw, $eiv, nearly, very
near, Lat. ' non multum abest quin,' wanting but little,
almost ; bxlyou Jiw EiffEiv, I had almost said, was very near
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
410
saying. Frequently bklyov or /xix/joD alone is used in this

sense.
irepl iroWov e<tti (/.oi, or ittp\ iroWov voiou/xou or yiyovt4.ui, I make
much of, value highly, it is of importance to me, I wish very
much ; -ffEgl nXtlovos, ttspl itXiiarov is the same, and trip] ixtxpov,
&c. the contrary.
AtaXXov Se, when alone, is always to be rendered ' or rather.'
(j.i\t<sra. /xev, (in reference to ei is v.% coming after,) it would be
best, if possible, properly indeed ; KarayiyvaJirxETE aurov
ixoCKimx /xev S'avaTov, ei Se ami, deityuyixv, it would be best to con
demn him to death, but if not, to a perpetual exile.
When fj-aXiara. is used interrogatively, requiring a more
definite or precise answer, it lias nearly the same meaning
voaot ixaKtara ; how many then exactly ?With numerals
it denotes their probable upshot, ('Ev rtaaapiMira i^dXtura
hiJ.eqa.is,) affirmatively indeed, (most assuredly, certainly,)
speaking from conviction, yet so as to give to understand
that the matter is not absolutely, positively certain ; hence
xr>, nol, and the like, are frequently added. See Ind. ad Plat.
Menon. in v. Wessel. ad Herod. 8, 65.
ituôCKa, originally, how so ?" hence, by no means.
&\n$Es, (accented in this way,) ironically, indeed! is it so ? do
you think so ? Lat. itane ? Brunck ad Aristoph. Ran. 840.
iipeXov, (non- Attic oQtXm,) properly I ought ; hence it denotes a
wish, partly alone ; M-nvor wipEXov wois'iy, had I but never
done it! and partly with as or ei'&e, ai yap, (O that! ivould
to Heaven ! Lat. ' utinam ;') 'fir citytkts <naqetva.i, 0 that
thou hadst been present ! ei yip a/peX.ov SavEtv, O that I had
died ! It is only with later Writers that it is an indeclinable
interjection.
ay.iXii, do not mind; hence 1.) an asseveration, unquestionably,
no doubt, truly : 2.) a confirmation of a more general pro
position by a particular one, and indeed.
oloSx, do you know ? when used by way of advice, or as a wish,
it is construed with the imper. and the pronoun relative after
it ; OTaS" ouv o S/iauov ; do you know now what you must
do?
11 It is far more natural to suppose this form derived from rZt pi** than to de
rive it with Grammarians from the rather uncommon Doric ri for rfou.
\
SYNTAX.
411
6UTI, comes before pronouns relative of all kinds : tarn ore, Lat.
'est cum,' i.e. sometimes; ejtiv or, Lat. 'est qui,' i.e. someone.
It is even used in this way before a pi. ; Ki tarn 6t avrwv
iTirpdaicavTo, and some of them were wounded; "Eo-rtv oTr
oii% ovrus e'SoI-ev, to some it did not appear so, (but we may
also say eialv o'i,) Anab. 1, 5, 7. THv Se run aro&(j,u\, 6vs itaw
fjLz.x%ovs riKuvKt, he made some of these halting stations very
long. This phrase was afterwards considered as a single
word, and thus interwoven in the speech ; Ei ya b rîrcos
iVriv o!r duatxpeaTeT, for if the manner displeases some ; xXewtiiv Se EpiixEvifo-nv a, but he allowed them to steal some things,
(Xenoph. Laced. 2, 7.) OUavrep etSov e<ttiv ottov, which I have
seen somewhere.And as an interrogative, "Eo-nv oven-tats
thfopw'jiovs rsâv/jiaxas ewj ootplgc ; have you ever admired any
man for his wisdom? Xenoph. Mem. 1, 4, 2.
owe eartv onus, it is impossible, inconceivable; 'H dfiKampnyôavvn,
vtf-hs owe eunv onus kavyja.v ayjnoei, the great attention to busi
ness, which will not let him remain quiet. (Compare about
i5<p" is, 147. Obs. 3.
eVnv, eÊo-Tiv, Eveo-Ti, sra'gEffTi npxrreiv, (with the dat. of the person,
or in general,) all signify, it is allowed, in one's power. But
eveo-ti alludes to physical power, it is possible, E&sriv to the
moral power, it is lawful; san is between the two, and
means indefinitely it will do, it may be done ; ndpeartv the
same, only that it conveys the additional idea offacility, ' it
is at hand, may be done without ceremony, any difficulty.'
Whenever eêo-tiv and htan are used one for the other, it is
merely from rhetorical motives, just as we say by way of
strengthening the expression, J cannot possibly do it, instead
of dare not or may not do it ; and J am allowed to do it, may
do it.
us hi. In this expression eh, (according to 117. 4.) is used
for titan, it is possible; hence before superl. its eh y.i\iort*,
as far as it is any way possible,
is twos eiwelv, so to speak, Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. Maj. 11.
us tovsXovti [sc. Xoya") eiweTv, also without us, (compare 140.
Obs. 2.) and simply avnXovri without e'nrew, to be short.
iy rots. When these words come before a superl., they mean the
Latin ' omnium,' of all ; 'Ev rots wpurot <na.%haa.v ol 'ASnwot,
412
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the Athenians were there the first of all; Touto lyii ev toit
fSaqvratra. av syeyxxiuu, I should be the greatest sufferer ofall.
To resolve this expression we must supply after h rots a
participle suggested by the sequel of the proposition, here in
the first instance ev roTs vxôuain, in the second cv rots {ixpius
(pepovow avro. But when the superl. is an adverb as here in
the second instance, we must be careful not to construe thus,
'Kyw rovro av eveyxaiixi ev rots fiaqi/rara tpipouaiv avrb, which
would weaken the idea, (I should be one of those, who suffer
the most,) and which is incorrect, as is evident from the in
stances, where this construction is inadmissible, as in ev toIV
itpairoi.This ev rots is used even before nouns fern. ; Thuc.
'Ev toiV <n\ttarai vrtts Trap' avrots kyivovro, and, 'H ardats ev rots
mpwm Eys'vETo.
ol dn.<pt, or ol wept, with an aceus. ; ol iptpi "Awrov, commonly
means not only those who were about or with him, but,
Anytus with his followers, party, &c. ; ol d/Aipi a\riv, Thales
and other wise men of his time, (Plato Hipp. Maj. 2.)
Attic Writers employ this indefinite expression, even when
they chiefly allude to only one individual, leaving it at the
same time for some reason undecided and in the dark,
whether they mean that individual alone. Thus ol a/xp Eu$u<p$ova, (Plato Crat. 36.) means only Euthyphro, but hints at
the same time that there may be others of his opinion and
party : ol dfttpl i/xiaroxXix, (Menon. towards the end,) like
the French, ' les Themistocle ;' again ol irspl Ke'xgoara, (Xen.
Memor. 3, 5, 10.) Cecrops only, but the obscurity of the old
tradition seems to be hinted at.
t! /xt) Sia, with the accus., literally if not for, had it. not been for ;
Ka! dn&avtv av e<
5ia rov xuva, he would have perished,
had it not been for his dog. See also 139. Obs. 4.
(jLtraZu, among, between. This particle commonly stands as ad
verb before a participle in this manner : /xsra^v iripiTtarut,
while walking; iMrafcu Semvovvra ttpoveuoev avrov, he killed
him, ivhile he was at supper ; (Lat. inter ambulandum, inter
cwnandum.)
evexo!, often means as far as concerns ; "Avbv rov rikiov, Ivsxa rat
triquv aurûv vv% av v>v &el, without the sun it would always
be night, as far as the other constellations are concerned.
SYNTAX.
413
Hence dpyv^lou evsxa, as far as money will do it ; roirou yt

Evsxas, if it be nothing else, if it only depend* on that, if (hat
be all. (Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 14.)
a/Ax, and in the second part of the proposition, xa!, as soon as ;
"An.x dx-nxoaijUv Tt x$cl Tpmgdq-xpus xxîarxixev, as soon as we
hear any thing (of the enemy,) we shall appoint the com
manders of the ships. It is also employed like pura^v, ex.
gr. "A/xx rxvr eiirani aviary, having said this he rose.
iroKKcuus, after some particles like el, py, means the Latin 'forte,'
by chance, as will happen. Helnd.adPlat.Phced.il. Ind.
ad Plat. Menon. cet.
o >. When this expression comes before a participle, del always
means every time; o del riSixfljAEvos, who has every time,
{whenever the opportunity occurred,) been wronged; 6 del
ag%m, the then Archon.1*
<f>oySor is construed as a verb, etvxi being omitted, he is- gone,
18 [TEsch. c.Ctes. Tout iluXxyooxs too; Ail UuXttyoôuvras, " who should at any time be
deputed to execute these offices" Lcland ; " 4 Pytagora quotquot in posterumfuturi
sunt' the Pylagorce always for the time being." Stock. " 'Ai< has here a peculiar
use ; it does not signify perpetual lime, but refers to the persons, who at certain
times fill any office. Oi iti ixanCnm, ' they who have the consulate, each at his
own time.' " Hier. Wolf. Whoever happen to be in office.
E. H. B.'s Select Orations o/Debiosthenes, Lond. 1830. p. 112.
The word never has this meaning of perpetual succession except when iii is placed
between the article and the participle, or between the article and the noun, whether
subtt. or adj. ; in other cases it has its ordinary signification of always, perpetually,
except in cases like Cyrop. 6, 3, 6. "O it ixsvfstt rswvm ixtlvsv; stir \xiXsvt fsinrrmt itr)
TttiiToui Tout vxefctti, o, ti xv iti xxivov oouo-iv, iêtyytXXtty. a 'Ail is here used, as in a
previous passage, in the sense limited perpetuity, indicating something to be done
always, but only so long as things remained in the state referred to."
E. H. B.'s Cyropardia o/Xenopho, Lond. 1831. p. 204.
Cyrop. 3, 3, 48. 0/ f t?Ayov oti i%ionv Tt S>| rut to7( o-rXsi;, xeti TCxparaTTOi ctlirsus
avToi o GlfiXsiit s$w if, xai tru^stniXtvuTt fstf iti TSif iti \\o> sZn trokXa Tt xeti tr%voi,
u; tfao-at Xiyut tsus ixouotras. " 'Ati est ' suhinde,' ' de terns en terns,' et verba verti
possunt, Ut quisque ex castris prodiisset et accessisset, ila regem eum hortari, ut ap.
Thuc. 3, 77*
iffxtviôvro Tt i^nxotTet taus, xai Tag iti trXngovfttvecf !;;tii:t* <rgof
Tti/s tfetfTtcvf, Ut quajque ornata el instructa erat, ita earn mittebant contra hosles."
i. F. Fikchkk's Comment, in Xenoph. Cyrop. Lypsia 1803. p. 230.
" Qua? primus ex Oxoniensi Alarmore publicaverat Jo. PiucJiUs Ao/i' in Am.
Apol. 63 , sic exhibuit leviter emendata Edm. Chishull Antiq. Asiat. 131. 'Aw
yitatffxevrt/v it Tetv tTtiXat xttT ivtetuTor ei TO*' iti xofftotrit it roie iiTtptviott. Paulo ante
ri i(%L4t, curia, fuerat t* xitftMi memorata, et Hierapytniorum et Priansiensium ;
in harum tedium superioribus conc/avibus, ut puto, publice formula foederis, (insculpta
columns;,) quotannis erat ah nno magistratuum legenda. Piucus dederat cl
roxmt male; Ciiish. si to x' iti: scribi debuit, ut puto, ol tox' iti xoo-fiotrts, i. e.
toti iti x'oo-fAM ovTtt, qui tunc quiquc postea futuri essent magistratus. In Hcracteenti
Tabula, cujus Inscriptionem luculentam grati Neapolitano debemus ecclesiastico,
Mazochio, v. 86. memorantur, Tai trsXuttitoo* to) its tori tu trtoc, i. e. ti iti rirt
AtuvofAovyTti. Hoc est istius Swfnxai initium, '! 'E$o(m 'Apictmvo; ft-wo; 'AxW
triXtt xa) Ti) nXmsifUt. In Inter. Corcyrea, quam in Diario Italico, multo minus
accurate, quam fuit Heracle'insis, descriptam, vulgavitMoNi'FAUCoxius p. 413., et
414
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
vanished away ; oy5of yip S dviif, for the man is gone,

<Ppov$a irdvra, it is all over: (compare 129. Obs. 7.)
dpi,d^vos, ex. gr. duo aov dp%diA.e*os, and you above all. In this
phrase the participle always joins the principal object in
question ; "<ttiv oarn 'AS-nvqctuv iito aov dp%d[/.tvQs, /xaXXov
SfâtiT' 3 Sov\ot yiviobai % otaKorms, is there any one among
the Athenians, and you above all, who would rather be a
slave than a master f irdvnr otrei dub rwv wpwuv dp^dfu-svoi
ovhls ituiton rêêv dotxixv. See Ind. ad Menon. etc. in v.
Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 60.
/xe'XXeiv, to be about to be. A Greek auxiliary verb, used with an
infin., whereby the action of the verb is removed to a future
time ; thus ixiWu woieTv, / am one who sliull do it, it being
left undetermined whether it will be my voluntary act, (/
intend to do,) or not, (J am to do, I am appointed, com
manded to do ;) rittsWov irdaxav, I then had the prospect of
suffering. The difference between the pres. tense or the aor.
of the infin. employed with //AXeiv lies again in the duration
or momentary performance of the action ; but Ihefut. of the
infin. is also commonly used by a kind of pleonasm ; Demosth. Mid. 21. and he did all this in the presence ofpeople,
olaurov Inaiviaiaâi i^sra raxirx S/xeXX.ov, (Lat. ' qui eum erant
laudaturi,') where we should say more precisely, of rvhom he
could foresee that they would praise him. Out of this natu
ral signif. of fMsWsiv arise two other meanings, which must
not be confounded, 1.) the supposititious conjectural meanalibi, dicuntur, Oi \x**riiui Veins i^mn. Ubiqua in talibus iti adhibetnr, cujua
vis sic in Romano Senatus-consulto exprimitur ap. LiviuM 39, 19, 6. Consules
pratoretque, qui nunc essent, quive poilea fuluri essent, curarent."
L. C. Valckenabr's Digressio a Theocritcis, p. 272.
Heracleensis Tabula I. p. 210. ntri%tm ei w^myyim r*Tt wsXmriputs rw> iti iri rwv
trim Irrtitgn, " adducent vero prades polianomis ut quique (succedentibus) annis sunt,
sive creati reperiuntur. Eadem enim particular iti vis est hoc loco, qua) Thucydidi
familiaris est, qua?que per ul quitque commode exprimitur. Nam hie 1,21. nji t>
iii rtcpttrut <ri i'utrit /liXim slrut, Rebut, uti quaque in prasens urgerenl, five, ut qua
que inciderent, consentanea loqui ; vulg-o, Secondo eke accadono. Sic etiam 3, 77' T"
ii r>. r,o<,uut*a; (imvs) (XEcrEjUTfl*, Naves uti singula instructor erant, (vulgo, A mitura
che si trovatsero arredate,) emittebant in hostes. Ill hisce locutionibut ri iti perpeluitatem successions notat, tamquam si barbare diceres, successive semper. Eadem plane
locutio in liac ipsa Tabula reperitur vv. 62. 69. 107. 130."
A. S. Mazochiui.
The passage in Li v v suggests to us that the Greek phrase si iti is an elliptical
expression, signifying those (who were then in office, and) who would be for ever
in office, (while the office existed,) i. e. they and their successors in office ; somewhat
like oiu- English phrase, the then mayor, the mayor for the time being. E. H. B.]
SYNTAX.
415
ing, Horn, ovrtu nov Aii' /xe'XXei'tp/Xov efvaa, consequently it

probably will please Jove; 2.) the meaning of to delay,
postpone, leave to futurity, ri S' oit /xiWei; ri S' outc ejaeXXe ;
why should he not ? i. e. most certainly he toill. But the
meaning is the same without the negative, ri /ae'XXei ; why
not f i. e. to be sure, by all means. Heind. ad Plat. Hipp.
Maj. 17.
'ipjjiff&ati, 'thai, with the participle of the /uf. : to be going to, to
be on the point to ; "Oittp %x epHv, what I was going to say,
(French, ' ce que fallois dire.')
e&e'Xeiv, (never SeXeiv,) before an infin. must very often be con
sidered as an adverb with a finite verb, ' spontaneously,'
' willingly ;' SvpeiaSai ebiKovai, they freely bestow gifts,
(Xenoph. Hier. 7, 9.) KtJgai !it/u.ev lîK-hva^ras 'KifoeoStzi robs
/xev, Cyrop. 1, 1, 3. where the part, (according to 144. 4. 6.)
is used merely because of 'tatxev, "lapey on r&ikwqiv miSso-Sat
that they obeyed willingly. Compare a similar instance of
the verbs rvy%*vw, &c. construed with the part. 144.
Obs. 8.
(pâvEiv, to come before, prevent, anticipate. This verb, inde
pendently of its proper signify is used in three different
senses.
1. ) In a positive sense with the participle of the prin
cipal verb, ( 144. Obs. 8.) it means to do a thing sooner
than another, or before another occurrence can take place ;
'Iq&aax avTov <jta.%tham, I arrived before him, before he did
arrive; %<p$m dmuw, I had gone away before. Hence it
is also used to express celerity ; Herod. 3, 78. OSavn ra.
2.) In a negative sense also with the part, and con
nected with another proposition by xai, it means hardly,
no soonerthanOvk e^&vhu.ev eX&ovtej xal vooois eXtjP&mixev, (Isocr.) we were no sooner arrived than we were at
tacked by diseases ; Oux E<pSr/<Tav vfxsis KaraôvXcaaifj-ivoi xat
Ttpdirov avrov (puym xariytaaaiv, (Isocr.) they no sooner
had subjugated you than he was the first, whom they con
demned to exile. Compare above iixoc.
3. In the negative sense with the part., (or the part.
being mentally supplied from the context,) but without
any necessary farther connection, it means to be ready, not
41G
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
to fail, which imparts to the verb in the part, an idea of
unavoidablencss and rapidity. <D&avEjv in this sense occurs
only in the opt. with av ,s, and that a.) instead of the im-
per., ovx av (pâvoir \eyuv, do not tarry, hesitate telling to

us, i. e. tell to us immediately, b.) as a sure foretelling,
promise, &c. Ovx av <p$avotu.i, (the answer to a request,)
/ will not fail, am ready ; Ovx av (pbavot aTso^v-naxuiv, he
ivill not escape death, tvill not fail being killed, is sure to
be killed : EI ovv /X7) Ttiûpri'nijhs tovtovs, ovx av <pdvot to
wXr/ôr rovroa roXs &r)gi'oir SotAsuov, if you do not punish
them, the multitude will infallibly become the slaves ofthese
brutes.It is as obvious, as it is striking, that this negative
sense is the same witli the first positive or affirmative one.
To explain this contradiction, we must assume that ovx av
p&avois is properly an interrogative formula instead of a
direct imper. (will you not immediately?) and that it
gradually lost its interrogative power in familiar inter
course. Hence the oil comes after in poetry; Eurip.
Heracl. 721. if&avois- $' av ov.And as soon as oix. av
(p&avoiy passed for a direct imper., it was very natural for
the people to begin to say in the same sense, ovx av tpdiivoi/ju, and ovx av (pSdvoi. Thus the meaning was unques
tionably altered in practice ; but all non-interrogative
sentences beginning with ovxodv are in the same predica
ment : for just as ovxovv aittiî is the same with aTtei^t ovv,
so is ovx av fSdvoifu iroiuv identical with (pJatvot/x av votary.
tlvai. This infin. seems to be used redundantly by Attic
Writers in some expressions, especially in ixwv eTvai, (which
probably was a complete phrase originally, so that I am free
to act,) i. e. willingly, of one's own accord, &c. ; Ovx av extiv
eTvat \J/6uSoi/xr,v, / will not intentionally tell an untruth.
The stvai in to vvv slvcu, for the present, is different : to
T7i/u.fov eivai xpriaoixtS' avru, to-day at least ive will make
use of him. (See about all the formula', belonging hither,
Reiz ad Viger. n. 178. ed. Herm.)
exv, with an adverb, means to be circumstanced, but may gene
rally be rendered to be ; xaXas
it is good, it is well ; us
ii"Xf) as he vat, (ex. gr. undressed.) It is often used with
"The only instance, which Stephanus adduces without an npl. is the secondâbove
tub 2. garbled.
SYNTAX.
417
a definite gen. ; us t*xe v-?f$r,s, (in shape or size,) us riypvs

u'xovro, they followed as quickly as they could. It is the
same before prep. 'AptQl rr,v xiijuwi e'xsi ri moKXi, he is
mostly to be found near the stove ; ol unQl y'-nv txovrES> hus
bandmen ; rTy&o/iEvoi to iap\ to If ov cjôvTa; vo/xov, the law
concerning the temple, Herod. 2, 1 13. Poets sometimes
employ this verb in the same way before adj. and pronouns
e'xei txut'ov, it is all one, all (he same, Eur. Or. 308. i'x' wx05'
Med. 550.
Sometimes %6,y makes an emphatical circumlocution
with the part, of the prceterite; YlaXni
e'x<", (for
SaviJix^w,) I have long been wondering at, Soph. El. 590.
rovs VAtSus exftxkov*' exs,f> you have rejected your children ;
Plato Ale. II. 5. SiEiV/jipoTEf 'i-xoust. _ See Valck. aci Phwn.
712. Herm. aci Viger. n. 183.
X*'V 's added to some verbs like \-npsiv, .vapih, ituiQii-i, in the
2 /)prs. to make a good-humored observation ; as, you are
joking! (waiÊif exuv>) lJnu trifle! (X-npus f'x^v.) The ori
gin of this expression may be traced to the interrogative, ri
f'xiwv SistTfi/3Eif ; what rriakes you loiter? Compare Ruhnk.
ad Tim. 257. Brunck ad Aristoph. Thesm. 473. Herm.
ad Viger. n. 228.
ri itxbwv and rl y.a$uv, are both angry interpellations instead of
the weaker rl alone : why ? why then ? The former may
be accounted for from Aristoph., where we have Ouros, ri
irclvx"5 i you yonder, what befalls you, ivhat is the matter
with you? Again, Ti jtsu&wv t\uiqovs rvicras; what busi
ness have you to strike free-men ? The expression seems
to have been originally directed to check ebullitions ofpas
sion, bordering on madness. The second expression, which
is analogous to it, is more ironical : ri /na&aiv ;what have
you learned? what has got into your head? where have you
learned that? (Seei Wolf ad Demosth. Lept. 348.) And
just as the positive %yjuv comes from the interrogative rl e%<mv,
so is /xa&aiv also used in positive sentences, but only with
oti, Plato Apol. 26. 1 i a%tos s'i/ai inorlaat, oti (jlxSuy ev tw
f&iu o&x wvxw X0V > nere M-^&fcv distinctly conveys the
idea of determinate intention, What penalty am 1 deserving
for having absolutely enjoyed no tranquillity in my life? If
2 K
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
the object, which is wanting with na&iv, were to be supplied,
it might be, "On /xaStov ouk ofS" o, ti, ritvyjav oix. e?)(,ov. Not
that the complete idea of ptaJhiv, such as we have just de
veloped it, was in the mind of every speaker, who used the
expression ; this or something similar only gave rise to it,
and 3t n*a&wv became a more passionate on. Compare the
remaining passages in Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. 30. Com
pare also in Herod. 3, 119. TiW '%ovsx yvciiMnveiXei/,
x. t. >.., which is nothing but a gentler t wSovsa, how do
you come to think so? 14
fe'goiy also appears redundant in some expressions, but always
denotes a vehemence of purpose, not altogether free from
blame; 'YwEjSaXEv lat/rov (pEgwv nâ/oir, he pit himself
(rashly) into the power of the Thebans, (Êschin. 482. ;)
Ely rovro tyiqav Teeqii^nae rot irpdy/xxnc, he has (irresistibly)
brought affairs to that point, (474.) Compare Herm. ad
Viger. n. 228. 15
14 As it is obvious that the three upbraiding expressions, rl ix*">
fLt&iv, are
essentially the same, and must be resolved in the same manner, the most natural
explanation of on (uLn is that, which, without stripping on of its connective nature,
treats paSi*, when considered alone, in the same way as i%ar alone. This is the
reason why I cannot alter my statement, notwithstanding all which has been since
said of this expression, and which I have duly weighed. Were I to make any alter
ation, it would be simply this, that I would no longer attempt to fill the chasm after
in fu&in, but should barely observe that in such phrases as ri 1%** tmrtifiut ; v!
/tx9in r(triyfa^*i roZro ; nothing was thought of but the moral power of the par
ticiple, and no particular regard paid to the grammatical connection, so that the same
turn of expression was adopted in other combinations, in which it is not exactly
grammatical, but to which the same energy was to be imparted, which distinguishes
those interrogative expressions.
1 [ " il>>y irifiirrwi. Taylob thinks that the participle fiem in such cases
implies a change of things to the contrary, effected by the contrivance of the speaker,
and thus it may be translated contra. He refers to . 45. Tav Si ,- yr.v fiyi/tmut
afiti*
anSnxi BnQetlat;, Ab Atheniensibus ab/alum impcrium Thebanis e contra
deluiit : 46. Hôri/*tî ty'ioui roy xlv^vvov UTetgccrxtva/ t55 to\u : 33. TlaXir vixt Qtfo'u-sves
lit rm invrtu Quffiv, and, 'Aitxnffxs 'h/irrr.. xaxiih* a-xtiâs, L*'&el\iv lauroi $iauv
&i)xtete. He particularly refers to Luciah Hermol. Zxrouvrnj yag rtfiZv, o'lrms aXrthuourn/ It QiXoraQliz, ffv rovro vrpox^vcLgx;, tl&xxf Qtgur rots Ztru'txoif. VlGER 6, 2, 5.
improperly considers Qifm as redundant iu this passage of j95schines, but adds :
Ubi tamen notandum ett participium illud, nescio quam verbo significationem addere,
aliquando VolunTaBU, aliquando pr.kcipitis, aliquando fatalis impetus. This
participle, as well as ayur and lx.tn, are only so used with verbs signifying motion
towards tomething ; and when tpivyut and tji^ are so used, celerity of movement is
indicated. See the Notes on ViaBO."
E. H. B.'s Select Orations of Demosthenes, p. 98.
So ViRo. /En. 8, 609.
At Venus athereos inter dea Candida nimbos
Dona FJEBEXS ADKBAT.
E. H. B ]
8VNTAX.
419
151.Some peculiar Constructions.

I. Attraction.
1. Though we have seen the two principal cases of attraction
above, 142. 143., it yet deserves to be considered here under
one general point of view ; for those two cases, and a few others
in single instances, have evidently a common principle. An
elegant conciseness was what Attic Writers chiefly aimed at ; to
this they frequently sacrificed the strictly logical correctness.
They studied as much as possible, not only to state successively
two connected propositions, but also to concentrate both into
one. Hence their frequent use of participles even .in cases,
where the nature of the proposition seems to require a different
construction. (See above 144. 2. etc.)
2. But participles could not be introduced everywhere ; it was
equally necessary to resort to the construction with the pronoun
relative, which consists of two successive propositions. To give
to these the appearance of one proposition, the pronoun of the
second was made a common pronoun by annexing it in form to
the first, whilst it naturally belonged to the second proposition ;
MsTaSi'Swr tov airov ovireq abro! txfis, the gen. oixiq makes the
whole second proposition a kind of adj. to eirbv, and it is merely
giving way to our habit, when we separate by a comma propo
sitions, which the Greek Writers so visibly studied to combine
into one.
3. Again, whenever the subject of the infin. is already stated
with the preceding verb, it produces a connection in the sense,
which the Greek Writers wished to render sensible also in the
form ; they therefore merged, as it were, both verbs into one
compounded for the thought, (yitioyjTo noirioen, efs"i yevioSeu,)
and by letting all which belonged to the subject of the infin. be
attracted by the subject of the first verb, they effected the appear
ance of a single proposition, (o avrig vmiayjira itoirioetv rovro avroi,
e&W fxoi yeviabcu sySai'/xovi,) which with similar absurdity is
parted by a comma.
4. When this principle of attraction is admitted, it will be
found that there are many other phrases dependent on it, of which
we will notice the most important, and first of all the instances,
where the first coming word is attracted by the following pronoun
relative ; Xenoph. Yen. 1, 10. MeXiqiypos Se ras ripis, s tXafte,
2B 2
420
A GRF.EK GRAMMAR.
Qanspai: the proposition here is, jtl Ti/xa!, as M. e'Xafe, Qxvtpai

(sItiv,) but, the premising of one subject, (M. St,) which the con
trast renders necessary, is the cause that the other subject,
attracted by the pronoun relative as, is now put in the accns.
Plato Menon. 3(5. "Eêis e'tireTv xWou brovout n%xyij.xTos, ou 01 tyxaxovres SiSatrxaXoi swxi bfj.o\oyouvrxi ouk ETtisxvSxt to irgiyixx ; here
we should have, spÊir i'l-veTv xWo otiouv nqxyi^x, ou, x. r. X. can you
name any one thing, of which the professed teachers are generally
acknowledged not to understand it '? But the pronoun relative ou
converts all the preceding accus. along with it into gen. (See also
ad Plat. Menon. 41. Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 40.) The ear of the
Greeks had accustomed itself to this neglect of the true construc
tion by instances, where it is merely a pronoun, or a general idea
like aXXos or tripos, that comes before the pronoun relative, and
where the attraction consequently is more sensibly felt, Xenoph.
Hier. 7, 2. l avrx itoiovai ruqxvvois xxt aXXov ovTiva Ti/AaJui, where
instead of a\\n we should have the dat., And to every one else.
Demosth. pro Cor. 230. 'Ete'^sj S' oto xxxm n Xa/o-o/xEv ^tsiv,
i. e. irzpnv 11 r,T6iv, otco.These instances, it is true, might also
be explained by a slight inversion, ^titeiv, otu eripuxaxiv ti lcj130fj.1v,
TtoiovGi Tuâivvoif xai (fxajyo;,) ovnva aWov ri/Jiuaiv, but the ana
logy of the other instances makes us adhere to the attraction,
especially those, in which vxs is the attracted word ; Xenoph.
Hell. 1, 4, 2. AxxeSxiixiuoi nxvTitiv cuv SeovTai naipayons Etuiv.
This could not be explained by any inversion without producing
the most unnatural harshness, and the attraction, A. itiupxyoris
Eisi itxvrx uv Ssovrai, is perfectly clear.To the same kind of
attraction belongs also the expression, ouSsvi 'iru ou, quoted above,
148. Obs. 8. Attraction likewise operates on adverbs by con
founding the correlatives of the different series, ( 116.) Plato
Criton. 4. IToXXaôii m-ev yip xxl aWoat bVoi xv xQixri, dyxlfnôuai
gs, for iroWxypu xWxypv, onoi, or iroWxyôuomi aWoai at
aî'xri.
5. Thus it is obvious that all phrases, in which an expression
ol surprise and exaltation seems strengthened by an appended
pronoun re alive can be explained only as attractions. When
(according to 150.) we lind, au/xxiov oaov nôuy^âi, this must
be considered as if it were Sxuftxrov (es-iv,) o-tov irpouxdnrnvrii,
astonishing how far he has advanced. But if the pronoun rela
tive be in another form, the preceding word passes over to the
SYNTAX.
421
same form ; as, for instance, the neuter xvv.x<>ov becomes fern.,
ayju-ats-^ tan -h Trgoy^dpvws avrov, and the proposition may be
inverted, 'Hv 5e ri irôyjli^nais avrov bav/jt-sc^ Znv\, and thus the
same form was adopted in other phrases, which are not so easily
resolved, or are incapable of being resolved ; 'AXV iv f xvtov
ojtf.os vvepQvw oaos, (Aristoph. Plut. 750.) EWev avT& <n\t7tx.
oux, and the like.But if the adverb as is the relative, the same
adj. assume the adverbial form ; xvuxaiiv (eViv,) as &\ios ysyovs,
becomes Savuxolas as a&Xior yiyo-jsv, and in the same way virtp<pvs as, and the like. This is confirmed by the unaltered form
really occurring, Herod. 3, 113. 'Airify1$***ioto* if wiv.
6. There is another kind of attraction, when to such words as
o?Sa, dxovco, Xiya, if they be not followed by an arms, wilh the
infin., the subject of the following verb is joined as object in the
accus. OrS* 7?iv, onom eW, instead of olox, ovoavt eV! yv, I know
how great the earth is, Aristoph. Pac. 603. E! 6ov>.eoS' xxovaxt
ttivS1, otcws xitaKero, for dxovaxi, oitas noe d.nu'KzTo: see also an
instance above 138. Obs. and ad Plat. Menon.21.This attrac
tion is very different from those mentioned above, since there are
actually two propositions, and we only have, instead of the casus
of the one, which is in its natural connection, a new casus, which
must be mentally supplied with the first word. Yet yv is evi
dently attracted by ol$x, and thus two propositions, which were
merely in juxta-position, become as it were interwoven, so as to
be nearly one proposition, especially when they are placed in the
following order, T^v buian es-Iv EiSs'vai, Xenoph. to know how
great the earth is ; tovtov oW e! ytyovev $Seiv, Dernosth. Mid.
' of him, I did not even know that he existed.'
7. It is likewise an attraction, when certain cdj with so-tiv, in
stead of being in the neuter, also receive the subject of the follow
ing verb as their subject. This is most striking with Sixxtos: for
A/xaiov euTiv ejae tovto h^xttui, becomes Sixaior si/j-t tovto irgarTEiy, (I am just in doing this, for, it isJust, it is right for me to
do so /) Demosth. pro Cor. Tovtov Tr,v x'nlxv ovros <m Slxxios e%eiv,
it is just that the blame should fall on him, Cyrop.i, 1, 20.
Alxaios it avTixag/Êff&ai riiMt, it is just that you should do us a
favor in turn. The case is the same with aO-ios, 5, 4, 20. "AO-tol
ye ixitroi eit/juv rov yeytYniAtvov irpayitaros tovtov, (of a mishap
occasioned by imprudence,) dvoXxvaat ti dyxSh, to /âbtTv, x. t. X.
422
A GREER GRAMMAR.
not we deserve,' but a&ov eutiv, it is proper*. Adj. like SrAor,

tpxveqof, have in that case the following verb'm the part., Demosth.
Mid. 9. Eoti Se exeivo oiJx aSrikos epuy, for ouk aSnXov so-nv, au-rbv
(gEn/ ekeiVo, it is evident that he will say what follows, or also with
on. See Sturz's Lex. Xenoph. in SijXos, p. 660. b. extr. In order
to form but one proposition in all these instances, the subject of
the principal proposition attracts the common adj.
8. There is lastly an attraction, when a relation belonging to
the noun, being attracted by the verb, becomes the relation of that
verb : thus the relation answering the question where ? being
drawn on by the verb, is made to answer the question whence ?
'O exeT&ev woXe/xos-, livpa rfei, the war there will come hither, Thuc.
5, 35. the Lacedemonians demand that the Athenians withdraw
their partisans from Pylos, waitip xa! avrol robs dirb paxtis, as
they will withdraw their troops from Thracia, Theophr. Char.
2, 4. "Apasn tvv aito rys rqairiQns. The same is done with the
relation whither, Herod. 7, 33. 'Er rou TlpojreolXzw rh Ipov, rb es
*EXaio>vTa, (for to ev 'EXaiouvn,) ayivEo/ttEvatr. See Heind. ad Plat.
Gorg. 61. et ad Pheed. 2. et 57. where there are other instances
of such constructions (with vift%, vept.)
II. Anacoluthon.
1. An anacoluthon, (avaxoXou&ov,) is a construction, of which
the close does not grammatically correspond to its beginning,
though it has yet been intentionally used. But we must be care
ful not to be over-ready to apply this explanation to any passage,
of which the construction is rather uncommon, or which has
been corrupted by the transcribers. Any anacoluthon is suspi
cious, when its origin is not natural, and the proposition has not
gained any thing in point of elegance, distinctness, emphasis, or
conciseness.
2. The usual kind of anacoluthon is that of a Writer com
mencing a period in the way, which the process of his speech
requires, but afterwards, and especially after some interpolations,
which make the hearer forget the beginning of the construction,
passing over to a new construction ; (Plato Apol. p. 19.)
1 Exactly in the same way, TJtXXtv 3t~ i,ui *m~i, (much it vanting that I do it, I am
very farfrom doing it,) was the origin of the more customary, nXA.5 3t vuuv.
8YNTAX.
423
ToiJraiv ixaarof oiout' ettiv, luv sir Ixafrwiv .toiv noXiun, rovt tkovs, ots
tfcvri rav izurcJv nokiruv TtqoTxa %uve'Am c5 av f&ov\wra.i, rourovs
vreQovsiopitfi ^t/veivau. Here the toutoiv in the beginning refers
to some sophists named before, and both the process of the
speech and its emphasis required the new period to commence
with, Any one of them is capable of persuading young people,
&c. The following proposition must then have had the infin.
wei'&eiv to correspond to oioar eartv. But farther on, the mention
of the young people being interpolated with circumstances ren
dered necessary to establish a contrast, (the young people, who
are at liberty to have a gratuitous intercourse with any of their
fellow citizens, whom they like,) the Writer forsakes his first con
struction, of which the grammatical junction is now obscured, and
finds it more natural to refer with a second rourovs to the ve'oit,
and to commence a new construction, rourovs vsfoovaii. e. those
sophists persuade the young people, &c.
3. We will take another example from Plato Pheedr. 17.
(p. 207. Heind.) Toiavra. yaq o 'epois ittiS&lxvvrai' $varu%ouvras m.ev
a fj.rj \i)<nm rots StXkois "juxqiêi, dvizpa ttoieT vo/iiieiv' evruypvvrats Se
xal ra (Jj-h vi&ows a|ia itap' kxslvm Eltalvov dvayxscQet rvy/JoiW. such
are the effects of love, it makes the unfortunate consider as sad,
that which gives no displeasure to othersthe Writer now wishing
emphatically to establish the contrast, (it forcibly causes even in
different things to be praised.) But the logical order in that case
required the second proposition to begin with, Flag' evrvxovvruv
Sethis, however, would have destroyed the symmetry, At/art/Xovvrxs /xevmap1 tvrvyovvrtav 5ethe Writer, unwilling to sacri
fice either symmetry or emphasis to logical order, retains the
accus. ivrw/j>X)vra.s, which the analogy of the first proposition
demanded, as an accus. absolute, and refers by means of itap' exsivuv to the same object to be enabled to close energetically with
htaUov dvayxi^st rvyyjivuv. It is only to us, who are not accus
tomed to such transitions from one construction to another, that
such a double reference seems obscure.
4. The motive of the following short anacoluthon is still more
obvious; (Plato Alcib. I. p. 134.) *XL yd% v eipvaia. fx.lt r wii
o QovKtrax, voDv Se ix-h ejM1> T' e'*f ovijifixfaiiv ; Here two propo
sitions are dependent on one relative, which each requires to be
in a different casus ; to put it twice (&S /aevos St) would have
impaired the symmetry and distinctness of the speech. The
424
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
anacoluthon renders the period far more compact, the second

proposition being appended as if the relative had gone before in
the nomin., which is immediately made evident by the nature of
the second proposition, (voSv Se ixri e'x?-) The case >s the same
in Phcedo, p. 82. 'Exelvoi oir ti ixihti rr,s exvruv bv%ris, aWa. /jlvi
acifj.xrac TfXarronis ^Sai. When the second proposition presup
poses the relative in an oblique case, Horn. "Hi 'im <noXk' i/xoyriua,
<S6azv /xoi uUs 'Aâ'^Vi Plato Prolog. '313. TIeaiTayogots ov oute
yiyvuTXEis ovts SjeiXeQcei oj/oWa/fi'OTE, the object (avrov, avrai, &C
Horn, e, juiv,) may be considered as omitted : it really occurs, for
instance, in the following propositions, //. a. 79. or niyd. nxvruv
'Agyu&iv xparin, xal ot ttei'Sovtch *A%aioi, Plato Men. 27. Flags
TooTft/v, oi //.7)te npovnoiovnoti SiSaoxaXoi tivai /j-tit earn aiiriCn
ixxSvtws olSfiV, though this does not improve the anacoluthiu.
See Herm. ad Viger. 28. 707.
5. A very common anacoluthon is that of a period beginning
with the nomin. and passing afterwards over to another casus,
Plato de LL. 3. p. 686. "A9ro/3Xe'\J/af yaq <nqbs toutov Toy oroXov,
ov nici SiaXEyo/HE&a, e'SoSe' /jloi ndyxa\os eneu. Here the speaker
mentally considers himself as the subject, since he is thinking,
I believe ; he therefore uses the nomin., but this does not prevent
his employing afterwards the more adequate expression %So$i pot,
through which that nomin. now becomes anomin. absolute, (com
pare 145. 06s. 1.) We see the reverse of this in the following
example, Thuc. toit Suqaxovo-lou xardv^r^ts ovx b\iyv tyivtro,
bûvres. The nomin. absolute placed alone at the head of a
proposition for the sake of emphasis is somewhat different ;
'ExeiVo* 5e, ov Stc/uoi avTco oJSev, which must be rendered, but as for
him, I shall give nothing to him. Lastly the instance, when a
noun has no verb of its own, because it has been construed in the
casus of the following relative, has been considered above under
the head oi Attraction (I. 4.)
6. The instance when a singular is immediately added to a
plural to define the latter more precisely, can hardly be con
sidered as an anacoluthia ; O't Se oi/Seij avru môaiiyjit, which is
more emphatical than, Tav Se ovlus meoa{i%i, of those, however,
no one attended to him.
SYNTAX.
425
III. Inversion.
1. Inversions and involved constructions are on the whole far
less common in Greek, even with Poets, than in Latin. In some
instances, however, the inversions even in prose are more strained.
This arises from the anxiety, peculiar to Attic Writers, to place
together the words of one or two propositions, which resemble,
oppose, or refer one to another. Thus, for instance, they would
say, riavnwv yip nasi irivrcs ej^&kttoj eiui Ka^7)Jdnoi 'P&i/xaioir,
for TravTsr K. itivruii syftiaroi e!<ti itdai 'P.Plato Phadr. 141.
Tloixi'kri /u.ev sroix/Xour ^vy^ xai iravaqixoviovs SiSouj- \iyovs, air).ovf Se
x<n\y. To attain this, they even sever the article from its noun,
K\<jyjjvii Tti\tv Try avrbs aiirovand prep, from their casus, ev
aXhore aXXr), for aWore ev ciXXri : 7ra' olx.
iSehoviD, Od. e.
155.
2. Inversions are also caused by the very natural endeavour to
enounce first that part of a proposition, on which the stress is to
be laid ; Demosth. Olynth. III. p. 37. To niv vqSroviyammov
r,t irupa. Toy Syj/Aoy TiSv aXKuv Ixavru xal Ti/Lcijr xxi a.pyr,s xai dyzSov
Tivor lAtTotkctfitiv, vSv Se ruivavr'm. Here the dat. txiaru is depen
dent on dyxTrifiTov rfv, (formerly each of the other citizens was
highly pleased, when he obtained honors from the people, now it
is quite the reverse,) but nxpi rov 1-nn.ov, which is dependent on
m.etsiXj!/3eTv, has the greatest stress, and therefore comes before it.
3. Thus the emphasis sometimes removes the adverb, which
should come after the relative, before it, NDv iti a. eXtyov, ichat I
said before, Plato Euthyd. 288. which sometimes may cause
ambiguity, Theocr. 10, 17. e%eis- itikqn uv tiriSvixtis, where itaKai
does not belong to ty&is, but to lnt%(ni.ns, (compare Spalding ad
Demosth. Mid. 30.)
4. In the following instance obscurity is avoided by the inver
sion, Demosth. 01. III. towards the end, 'Ai<2 vyLxs/xti sragaj<yE~v rris rd%eus, w v/mi ol Wgoyovoi rris dêrrii /xerd noWwv xai
xaXwy xivSuvwv xmadixsw xare\tirov, here the gen. rrts apery; is
dependent on the other gen. ri%eus, (raj-is- Tr,r d^ryts, the order of
virtue,) but both together would have created confusion.
5. But it frequently happens that we perfectly feel that a pro
position has gained by being inverted, though we cannot elucidate
it by any of the above observations. Take for example that
beautiful passage of Plato Phcedr. 10. Tlaireq ydq ol rd iretvuvra
426
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
bptfj.fj.uira &aXXov ri rtvx xqcqirov irpoazlovrts ayovai, ah lfj,o\ "Koyovs ovreo

irpoTilwvpaivsi neqtdêiv, &c. where ol is the article of npoaeiovrtf,
and ri arEivfl/vra bqiixfj^ra depend on dyovaiv 8 : Cyrop. 6, 4, 8.
"Heiv aura at Tcdkli 'AqdaTrou avXgse x.a.1 wtaroTeqov xa! dixtivova, where
jroXt; strengthens the compar., and the yen. 'Aqianou depends on
them ; exactly as in Demosth. Mid. 49. OI Ik ^n/j.cofj.ivoi Sii
woXKcp rovruv eldiv eXdrru 7rqdyiJ.1x.Ta, instead of riniJ.uij.ivoi tlal Sisi
nqiyix.(iroL sroXXw sKdrrw rourwv.
6. In the forms of supplications wqos &e'o/v, yovdrwv, and the
like, the emotion of the mind puts the perianal pronoun as first,
without placing it before the prep., because this orthotoned em
phasis would announce a contrast, which does not occur. It
is therefore inserted between the prep, and its casus : Si upos at
yovdruv, aspos as Ss<2v, (viz. luereuu, which mostly is omitted,)
Soph. (Ed. C. 1333. Tlpos vim at xpmuv, ispos &e<uv hfjioyviuv AiraS
vi&taxi '.
IV. Ellipsis.
1. Ellipsis or omission opens a wide field in the Greek Syntax.
We shall confine ourselves to a few general remarks. It is com
monly used only in cases, where the words omitted are easily sup
plied from the nature of the proposition, or from the context, as
in all phrases like x.oin.aaha.1 fia&vv {sc. uctvov,) Tsortqxv rpaitviati
(sc. oSbv,) hrunrtro troXXis (sc. itXrtyis,) and the like.
2. Those instances of ellipsis, where more or less words of the
first half of a period are to be repeated in the second, are easily
supplied, though the Greek indulges in a greater latitude in this
respect than other languages ; it frequently has only the particle
or pronoun, which introduces the proposition. Thus we find
sYzstp or tizstp aqa, (if by chance,) instead of, if it be so, or the
like ; in Plato Euthyd. 296. the supposition that something might
mislead, is answered by, Ovkow hfj.asyt, d\\' titaspat, i. e. not us,
but if any, you, (if it could mislead any one, it would mislead
you.) The relative is used in the same way in Plato de LL. 4.
! But I leave the reader to chuse between this explanation, and that by anacoluthia, viz. that the writer commenced with i,to employ the part, iyetru, but after
wards preferred the verb iyamrn to avoid the clashing encounter of two participlet
(11"#/tij ayswTif, liat. if quiporrigendo ducunl.)
" See Matthias's Gr. Gr. j 465. 3. p. 671. Engl. Iratul. 4th edit. Porson's Adv.
220. That a\ must be left enclitic in this connection, is evident of itself. But even
correct Editors are very often in fault in this respect.
PYNTAX.
427
p. 710. Tlavra o-%eSov ivtlpyaarai to &6, oWej orav fiovknSri

itatyepovrais eS raga^cei Tiva otoXiv,
Aas 6een done by the god what
(he is wont to do,) when he intends to render a state peculiarly
happy. Again, E! Sri rta aotfwrepos <palr,v mou, rovrco ay, (sc. <paw)v
Eivai,) I/- I could think myself wiser in any thing (ra>,) it would be
in this.
3. Thus negations are used with the omission of that, which is
denied, which must be supplied from what has gone before. Mtj
often comes in the middle of a period, (see 148. 2. h.) so as to
be before other words, and thus renders the proposition obscure
to the unlearned, Tov ipuvrx te xai pri xpivow-Ev, where xal mrt
stands for xal tov y.-n epHvra :Tir ovv rpo-asos rou xaXus xal
ypatyav ; where xx\ws is omitted after fj.ri :'Aya&oi ri //.ri avSpts,
good men or such as are not (good) :Kai oatote, xal fx-h , for xai
hiron /Art, Plato Alcib. I. 13.
4. Attic Writers are very familiar with a striking ellipsis ; of
two opposite conditional propositions the first is often left without
a conclusion. But this is done only when the first proposition is
understood of itself from the nature of the thing, and the speech
therefore hastens to the second, on which alone everything
depends ; Plato Prolog. 325. (after the pains, which fathers take
for the education of a son, have been enumerated, Kai sdv vXi
exdiv TTEi'SriTai, e! Se f/.ri, ciazsi(> û\ov Siaorgepo/AEVov euSuwvaiv amikats
xal wX-nyxTs, and if he readily obeys(here the conclusion is indif
ferent, it is good, nothing else is required, or the like,) but if not,
they make him straight again, like a warped piece of wood, with
threats and blows.
5. After a proposition beginning with the artic. posfpos. 8, a,
the rovro eotiv or rayra eo-tiv, which refers to it, is also commonly
omitted; Kal o ptaXio-Ta miaai /j.e,'6n xal cwei'Siêv /*e, and what vexed
me the most, (was) that he abused me. Or even without on, see
Demosth. Mid. 2. b. where Taura eo-tiv is to be supplied after a S'
ev v(mv eo-tiv vitokoiita, and then the proposition is resumed as in
the beginning. The most usual phrases of this kind are with a
superl., partly with, and partly without oti, for instance,
o Se wa'vTiuv SfiivoTaTov, <5ti zjgor rovs /3a/3ago/r av/xfjiay^lav
hsoi-haa.ro, (where first eo-ti, and then touto eutiv is
omitted,) but what is the most grievous of all, is that
he has formed an alliance with barbarians.
428
A GREEK GRAMMAR.
xosi o nxvrui ytkoibrxroi, xxi tov ximx rri( 'Hgiyovnr xvriyxytv,
but what is the most laughable ofall, he has even raised
vp the dog of Erigone, Lucian Deor. Cone. 5.
The particle yxp is usually interpolated after this ellipsis, to us it

is superfluous ; 'O 5e niytorov, ov yxo %$c'Kev) &c. (Compare
above 149. yxq.)
6. The words rovro e<xtiv alone are omitted, when a premised
adj. has the urtic. prapos. To $s /xtyiorov, trxtrx rxvra y.bms xxreipydaxTO :Kai to zjxvruv xioyjarov, aôai-^ritplaxaht. And the same
takes place in the expressions, Ttx/xîov ai, or 'S.nfji.iTov St, (sc.
roiiTwv Jorl toto,) the proof of it is, and the like. For instance,
2ty/.Eiov $e, toIV -TrovnqoHi \vvovaia^t, a token that it is so, is that he
associates with wicked people. This phrase too is commonly con
strued with yxp. Demosth. Androt. towards the end says, the
people ofAthens have always valued honor more highly than money,
TEX/XTjfiov Se', Yjpy\y.xrx txev yap llXiinrx run 'EXXtiwuv vote ayaiv
rx WavS1 vvs\p <piX.OTt//.ixs av)\aio-v.
(See the formules to XeyopcEyov, and the like, 131. Obs. 6.)
APPENDIX.
Lists of Words for the Deelensions and Conjugations.
iytfx, market-place,
'Ayx'ms, ('">)
h?iir%nt, prattler,
'Adjra, JHincrva,
Amixs, jEneas,
HxxvSx, thorn,
aftiXXx, contest.
if(X, ploughedfield,
ifx'Xlx, busineu,
yxXr,, weasel,
y*, earth,
yXurax, tongue,
Mix, opinion,
f^Srit, viper,
%vtn, girdle, J
iîja, dag,
SxXxrru, sea,
Si^x, (,) door,
Kixperllm, (?,)
xtfxXtt, head,
xXitrrni, thief,
*'ti 9'rli
xtirh{, judge,
xrirhs, founder,
Xxifx, lane,
xintn, (5,) grief
fix^tirhs, disciple,
(tiXim, bee,
FIRST DECLENSION.
pAftftrm, care,
m;j,, (,-,)
ft-ti^x, share,
tlxn, (I,) victory,
wfupn% bride,
i(*iSt3f,(x{, gen. x,fowlef,
nifirjif, Persian,
TXiuea, side,
*ixrr,i, pugilist,
info*, (,) gate,
f'Z*. root,
nm, shade,
2xi/9>!S, (p,) Scythian,
vTiyn, roof,
ffrtx, portico,
rtyxifx, globe,
ffipZ^x, hammer,
rx'Xtl, leisure,
rurnfix, preservation,
rxuixt, steward,
ng'K, artist,
Sx, (,) wood,
piX'i*, friendship,
Xx,a,joy,
XXxhx, upper garment,
X^C) country,
tux*, soul.
SECOND DECLENSION.
Feminines in .
1. Besides the trees, (see 32. 3.) the following plants,
It /3<0X, or fivfiXif, and
i, i, TxTvâ;, papyrus,
* The lists of examples for declensions and conjugations are arranged in alpha
betical order, that the learner [may exercise his own judgment, which of the rules
stated in the Grammar lie is to apply to each word.
430
APPENDIX.
h xixxst, kermes, but i xixxtt, any berry, and especially the tcarltl terry of
the kermes,
rx<"">s, rush,
spikenard, fafanf, cabbage.
To these words may be added,

fivrrts,fne linen, [cotton, sometimes silk, K. H. B.]
:'.:~,>.n and W/.rn, booh,
ioxif, rafter,
pal&ai, rod,
f</.ini and Mtitj. acorn.
2. The following stones and earths,
i, h ,::>;, in the /em. chiefly precious atone,
ufyiXtc, clay,
xfifmXXtt, crystal, but I xfirtXksc, ice,
ILfQaXro;, bitumen,
fîXres, redhead,
fieLrctns, touchstone, trial,
reirtpufss, sapphire,
ytjypos, plaster,'
fffitapayies, emerald,
rlXlxTfes, (also <ra tlXtxroav,) amber,
titsuh, chalk.
To these may be added :
ti.y.u.-,;. ûfjLfLos, clfiuBef, <êLpaSos, sand,
J*n$os, pebble, vote,
wxhSog, tile,
It./.' : . glaSS,
liXif, clod or lump of earth,
xirge;, dirt, mud,
Sr&H, dung,
cxo&ii, ashes,
irftsXst, soot.
3. Words of objects proper to enclose something, to put it by, &c.
xt(ZuTos and
Xnrog, vat of a wine-press,
X*X.if, chest,
&xar$t, (, kind of boat,
ve^s, coffin,
fi/ats, (A, ,) pitcher,
Z'tf'X'fi basket,
Xn'*u3, oil-Jlati,
K'itfioTo;, kneading-trough,
re'X"t, r('X'"h ewer,
&fMfur&sft bathing-tub,
xu/imi, stove, oven,
nui\o;, pail,
Stkn, (i, ,) cupola.
4. Words relative to a road,
oiis and
Srfant and <r(Ifisf, footpath,
ntXtvUn, way,
TMffss and xiwmt, ditch.
'Wj (> >) vatK
5. The following isolated words,
X^g6i ana" nvuâi, continent,
ftnpi&tt, cord, small rope, packthread,
vrtrof, is/and,
Tzfittvof, Roman toga,
veffos, disease,
Pi(fiirss, (n, ',) lyre,
ireros, dew,
rdftsrtt, runnel,
yntSos, jawbone,
yifetsst, crane,
xtpxo;, tail,
xifvitc, Mft&mXit, lark,
f'Ttif, (w, },) shin,
*%>'!, (o, fi,) cockle, snail,
yf-i*3cs, (n, ,) mat of rushes,
and with a difference in the signif.
fi Xixi&tt, yolk of an egg, i kixi&tt,
431
APPENDIX.
LIST OF WORDS TO BE DECLINED,
ti pnXos, apple-tree,
iyyiXt, messenger.
fuXifat or piXutfits, lead,
itrtt, eagle,
ftifim, small part,
contest,
tiros, south-wind,
iSXn, reward of a contest,
vX, wood,
h afiTiXos, vine.
Sixes, house,
a&oefjpos, man,
trtutin, young child,
igyvMt and
polo*, rose,
aoyve,e, silver,
triongtf, iron,
i'fym, work,
ffTxfffiof, spasm,
tops, east-wind,
<rroa.Tos, army,
Zfyvfos, west-wind,
bull,
iftanav, garment,
Qayiitxn, medicine,
In, violet,
h ifttyis, beech-tree,
xa^xivos, crab-fish,
Qodt'hv, load,
KMrriTipt, tin,
X*Xxis, brass,
xi(xns, cherry-tree,
Xôcris and
x'vrnes, wild olive-lree,
Xior'ui, gold.
/tfact, apple,
THIRD DECLENSION.
List of the Words, in whichthc Syllablepreceding the termination ofthe Casus, t' long*,
in is and us those which have a J in their inflection,
yi xyriftts, shin-bone,
h ->pis, vault, arch,
xgnsris, pedestal,
fi*>.,l',s, barrier,
f'tpavi;, radish,
xtefis, sea-crabfish,
^*$is, little stone,
xnxts, moisture, juice,
iayt/f, doll :
xrtkis, blot,
xXriic, (Ion. for xXtts,) key,
those which have a
ri HyXis, cloves ofgarlic,
ri ft'ifus, cord, siring,
o, it, epis, bird,

xupvs, bundle of hay :
those in is and 01, which have an r,

ti, if, fibre,
i fit, nose,
uxtis, ray,
i yXux'is, point, edge,
'KXtvris,
?aXapis,
Vogrus,
'bofxvs,
i, b, 9)f, heap, shore,)

i SiXfif, dolphin,
n mOuf, child-birth,
1(o.xis :
in at, vv, oc{,

0 -xaietv, pavxn, hymn,
1 pirvv, wooden tower,
i vij. starling,
i Ki{, Carian :
8 Teachers must here pay a particular attention to the accent with respect to loth
its place and its mark according to the general rules, and to those stated 38.
432
APPENDIX.
in , gen. rti,
ri f(>*(, well,
ri rTietf, suet :
in {, gen. xn,
/jxij, /5X*, simpleton,
Z, tiller of the rudder,
i 3 . ; tl. armour for the breast,
euâ^, filth,
i tit t~. hawk,
^.'t-. impostor,
i xifiui-, hind of dance,
bettetZ, Phteacian,
i XufyaQ, pike, voraciousfish,
i "J, insect,
n
S/ihinr.
>'. Pf&j, shuddering,
n i\, wave,
i /. j. branch,
. /3i,u/5i*, whirlwind,
i e k \, chervil,
i A;, partridge,
.,ti vffTtthz.
1 '. J- -,, branch
V/ III ofthe palm-tree,
i
Phoenician, palm-tree, purple-colur,
I :.'u.',:l. silk-worm,
I
sea-bird,
i Sjj'Sy!*, pestle,
*r>S"li herald:
in J, gen. yiy
*i
grape-stone,
in pant, scourge, h Tip^t*, bubble, I r'ttri^, cricket,
i v. ,y y.~':_. Cuckoo :
in I, gen. x't, i
crumb :
in gen. rtt,
i lip,
are the names or some insects,
i fty, twig of the willow-tree,
I y'v-i', vulture,
I yfl\f; griffin, gryphon.
WORDS TO BE DECLINED.
The tatters before the termination of the cases, which are not known ffrtri tnt rules
given in the Grammar, are stated in a parenthesis.
The vowels a, /, v, before the termination of the cases, are short; [thf Words, in
which they are long, are in the preceding List.
1. Examples of words, which have a consonant before the ter
mination of the cases :
i etyxui, elbow,
c fyixvv, (t,) dragon,
v) ittiwr, (#,) nightingale,
ii'EXXai, (3,) Greece,
i an(, (,) air,
'"EA.Xr, Greek,
i >3i{, (i,) pure air,
ii iX.Tii, (S,) hope,
*
(>->) 9al>
i t(n, (5,) strife,
i u>fyui, (it,) statue,
e lr.
(ovt,) servant,
i |<wv, (9f) axle of a wheel,
i
ipas,
(rr,)
teather-strap/
auXag, (*,) furrow,
(f,)
ladder,
i fcl<
cough,
i x\*i, twig,
v'f*"> ("ri) "Id man,
xiôi, (3,) helmet,
i
(<r,) griffin,
e
xrtif, (if,) Comb,
iaif, (t,) feast,
i xvXj\, (*,) chalice, cup,
ri lit, (J,) torch,
to xvua. billow,
APPENDIX.
433
i Xx7Xx\]/, (,) tempest,

0 Aaxatv,
e \iovy\, (y,) throat,
a Xiftfii, (i,) harbout;
1 Xixrf, (*,) lynx,
o pnv, month,
TO nxrug,
0 ovv\, (x,) nail, claw,
1 S{ti$, (y.) quail,
to ovSxg, (r,) udder of animals,
S rtvni, (<r,) poor man,
i rifag, (x,) wooden tablet,
o roifinn, (*,) shepherd,
fl TTifuZ, (y,) wing,
(x,)fM,
fi rifl, (,) flesh,
fi nji. Siren,
to trre/m, mouth,
fi 2tu|, (7,)
* sf>'?S> (y>)
A T,'{1/f, (9,)
i pSi/, louse,
fi pxty, (/?,) vein,
fi
(y,)flame,
0 tpatfi, thief,
to Qui, (r,) light,
1 X"*-"^! (0>) '')
c xt'rl*'yt winter, storm,
fi îXiS**, (0,) swallow,
i x*', goose,
fi x3"i ()) tar/A, ground,
"
(>) "o,
^Xac/ni/f, (5,) military garment,
fi
eye, face.
2. Examples of such words, as have a vowel before the
ter.
mination of the cases, and are more or less contracted.
Ta a&ag, flowerj
I ittlt, mule,
0 fiirgvt, bunch ofgrapes,
to ops, mountain,
ro ytns, race, family,
fi o\ffis, face, sense of seeing,
* yhvs, jaw,
fl sri/3v, persuasion,
to cx'i-ra.;, covering,
a trtXsxpf, axe, ( 51.)
it fyvf, oak,
to rrtvtî, pepper,
0 iTTtusj horseman,
fl v'itvs, pine,
r xouut, gum,
fi voinfis, poetry,
v Aij-ri, Latona,
fi vûîs, action, deed,
e ficams, prophet,
a rotx"*, ear of corn,
0 pus, mouse,
fi Qvo-is, nature.
ADJECTIVES.
Examples in or of two and three terminations, to apply the rules
of 60. 2. and 4.
All Adjectives, which are not of two terminations by any fixed rule, may be assumed
to have the three terminations.
ayettnTOi, beloved,
right,of the right side, (dexter,)
udtx.',; . Unjust,
SjjAaf, manifest, evident,
*SXms, wretched,
hetk&ot, ornamented with precious stones,
afiaôfj invincible,
ttcttpetiee, diverse, different,
mfyof, worthy,
ViKOLiaS, just,
m^'irtpos, what is on the left hand,
2i/*Ttff, possible,
tXatpfo, light, nimble,
âffiXiKU, kingly^ royal,
iftrdg^f, red,
yivgyixos, belonging to agriculture,
tuxouiioi, opportune, seasonable,
yvfivoj, naked,
^nXorvtoi, jealous,
2F
431
APPENDIX.
fifiiyv/aaf, half-naked,
Uxttuunn, wonderful,
Si7s, divine,
Sjjît, warm, hot,
Btfirof, mortal,
JSf, proper, peculiar,
h(is, holy, sacred,
xxSafSt, clean, pure,
xanot, common, general,
XaXts, loquaciom, talkative,
Xitts, tmooth,
Xuixit, white,
futXaxit, toft, tender,
filvos, alone,
liw, strange,foreign,
c^vSvpcf, irascible,
straight,
rtXvtyiyot, voracious,
*(i$vfut, willing,
nftvlf, venerable,
exXnsit, hard, rough,
rsfts, wise,
erxms, rare, scarce,
rrtiw, narrow,
nXxirign, miserable, harassing,
rvfXii, blind,
fiXinxrn, loving children,
%*xit, lame.
LIST OF REGULAR VERBS.

Prefatory Remarks.
1. Any verb, of which nothing else is stated, makes its aorists
and perf. according to the first form, and its conjugation is suffi
ciently obvious from the rules laid down in the Grammar. The
same is to be observed with regard to any single tense, which is
not expressly stated. If, for instance, there is merely aor. 2.
marked, this alludes barely to the aor. act. (and med.,) but the
aor. pass, and the perf. act. must be made after the first form.
2. Wherever the aor. 2. pass, is mentioned, the aor. 1. pass.
must always be made, because it very often occurs as a more
uncommon form along with the aor. 2., and the verbs, in which it
is not used at all, cannot be stated with any degree of certainty.
3. The perf. act. is not in use in a great many verbs, but these
verbs too cannot be enumerated with absolute certainty j it ought,
therefore, to be conjugated in every verb according to analogy,
and the perf. pass, is to be derived from it.
4. The pass, may be formed without hesitation even in intrans.
verbs, because there are constructions, in which the 3 pers. pass.
are also used of intrans. verbs.
5. But to make a middle voice of verbs, in which it is not in
use, would be a practice of barbarisms without any utility.
Wherever there is a medium, it has been carefully noticed ; yet
in many of these verbs the middle occurs only in some compounds,
which must be looked for in Dictionaries : the simple verbs will
answer the purpose of practising their conjugation.When the
APPENDIX.
435
syllable MED. alone announces a middle voice, its aor. and its
flit, are made after the same tenses in the act.
6. All verbs are considered regular, of which the forms conform
to the above rules, without attending to their signif., or any ano
maly in their signif. Hence we have admitted, not only the
deponents of the pass, and med. form, ( 113. 3.) but also those
verbs, in which some single tenses deviate from the form in point
of meaning. This, however, has been noticed in all cases of some
importance.
7. The statement-fut. med.immediately after the act. de
notes that such a verb takes (according to 113. 4.) its fut. from
the middle voice, though in an act. sense.
8. The expressionpass, takes the aalludes everywhere to
the perf. and aor. 1., but is used only of verbs, where it is not a
matter of course, ( 98. and 100.)
VERBA BARYTONA.
iyslkkm, I adorn ; Med. I strut about.
UkXc/tin,dep. med.Ileap, see 101. Obs.2.
ayy'iWu, I announce.Med.aor. 2. act.
and compare Anom.
and med. are little used.
i/tfiXvm, I blunt.
uyiUw, 1 assemble.Redupl. Att.Med. i/ui/Su, I alternateMed.
*7Xui l'tranyle, trans.; Med./ choke, ipXXy*, I milk.
intrant.
ip.it*, 1 ward off.Perf. is wanting.
Sin, contr. of iill*, I sing, fut. med.
Med.
afyoiZu, I collect.
irw, / complete, finish, 05. Obs. 3.
iSifti, I play, sport.
Pass, takes the a.Med.
Hwra, I light, kindle,
u'ik'.'Coi, I use ill, mutilate.
aW.aaijj.ui, TTefittt, dep. med. 1 speah ambi ifrn, 1 bind together, Med- / attack,
touch.
guously or enigmatically.
aflat, I water, moisten. Pass, only pres.
m1(n, I lift up, see 101 . Obs. 2. and com
and imperf.
pare Amn.-^MlD,
itm, act. and pass. dep. I rush out, sally ifftorroi and iop'oû, I join, adapt,
Med.
out ; Att. eteau or ttrrv.
BiVî/re, / shame ; pass. I am ashamed. iai*, I draw up, goes like <>iw-Med.
ifX*, I rule overM ED. I begin.
See $ 101. Obs. 8.
it*, I hear, only pres. and imperf.Aug autTxlîfia.i, dtp. med. I embrace, greet,
ment 84. Obs. 2.
aavx'iû, I palpitate, struggle.
ixovu, I hear, listen to, fut. med. perf. iavîxT*, I dart lightning.
ixqxoa, plutq. nxsixtsu,
85. 2. 3.) &&%*, 1 walk, fut. med.
Pass, takes the a, perf'. past, with $i*Tu, I plunge, charact. <ppass, aor. 2.
out redupl.
l&ctXX*, / milk.
>
iXu/.utu, to thout for joy, fut.
92. fcnaau, ttu, I cough.
Obs. 1.
fsuigifuti, dep. med. Iforce, pass, see ^113.
Obs. 6.
ikiif*, I anoint, perf. 85. 2.Med.
ixxitr*, 7Ti, J change.Pass. aor. 2.
jikaxru, 1 hurt, charact. /3.past, aor, 2.
2F2
43G
APPENDIX.
fix'!**, I look at, pass. aor. 2. J 100.

Obs. 7.
1flow, gush out.
fiti/Uiu, /advise.Med.
/3{Z&i or fyietu, rrti, I boil with violence,
ferment, winnow, ful. tuP*ift, I resound, no aor. and no per/,
ftyxu, / wel, bedew ; pass. I am wel ; has
the aor. 2.
yip*, I am full, no aor. and no perf.
y\uu, I give to taste; Med. I taste.
y>.ifu, I carve, grave, augm. of tbe perf.
see 83. Obs. 1.
yvuû, I recognise.
yfifv, / write ; pass. aor. 2. 100. Obs.
CMed.
(/, / weep.
iavil%*, I lend on interest ; Med. / borrow
on interest.
Stf&i, /flagpass. aor. 2.
c:-t^v; I command,
iive*, / moisten.
li%tftcii, dep. med. I accept.pass. See
113. Obs. 6.
2ixa, /judge, administerjustice.Med.
iuixa, (not a compound) /pursue,
'hou'/.ivbt, / serve,
lo'ircv, / pluck, gatherMed.
i'j '. 'Oj. I accustom, augm. u.
tlxuâ, I conjecture, augm. 84. Obs. 2.
tlitu, / give way, augm. 84. Obs. 2. and
4. must not be confounded with the
Anom. EIKH.
urym, / exclude, augm. 84. Obs. 2 and
4. see also the Anom.
ixiyX", / refute, redupl. Alt.perf. pass.
$ 9S. Obs. 7.
iXiVm, rr, / wind,augm. u. perf. act.
does not occur ; perf. pass. uXiyu-ai
and iXriXiyfuti.Med.
\ 'f y-u, / drag, augm. u.Mkd.
iXtji, / hope, lAfrw, see Anom.
\o%riû, I keep a feast, augm. 84.
Obs. 9.
tTtiyn, (no compound,) / impell, pres. ;
pass. / hasten.
XiirrMiu, / am diligent, augm. 86.
Obs. 5.
Ifyi^cjiju, dep. med. / work,augm, Ut
pass. See $113. Obs. 0.
Ifiliu, 1 prop.redupl. Alt.Med.

tpffv, rraf, I row, fut. ffU.
ipivyu, / belch, cruet, vomit,'aor. 2.
Med.
i/<u, /strive, contend, vie with, rival,
redupl. All.
Ufcr.ni, / explain, interpret.
?0T*, / creep, augm. ei.
irx'iv, commonly iiraw, / put to the
proof.
/ make straight.
isviHai, dep. med. / pray, augm. } 84.
Obs. 2.
5, /delight,
nxu, I come, am here.
SiWu, / sprout or bud,perf. 2.
SaXtru, / warm.
Bauuxfc, / admire, marvel, fut. med.
StXyv, / charm, beguile.
/reap.
Snyv, / whet, sharpen.
Sxl/ia, / sjueezcpast. aor. 2. 100.
Obs. C.
$pstua*, / break in pieces, crumble : pass.
takes the tr.
3vu, see the Anom.
T&avu, / place, set.
ISvtu, / direct, make straight.
ixtTtuu, / implore,
act. and pais. dep. /desire, wishfor.
Wtivv, /ride on horseback.
lff%vu, / am able.
xttSaigv, (no compound,) /clean: aor. 1.
takes the r. Med.
xultu, / kill, aor. 2. ; perf. is wanting ;
pass, only pres. and imperf.
xecXuTru, I conceal, veil, Med.
xufirru, / bend, pass. perf. 98. Obs. 8.
ku, / shear, crop, pass. aor. 2.Med.
xiXimv, /ordei; bid ; pass, takes the a.
xiXXat, / come into port, land, fut. xiXvu,
$ 101. Obs. 3.
xnffvrfv, ttu, / proclaim, publish,
xiviunvw, / incur danger.
xXilv, see the Anom.
xXirru, / steal, pilfer, fut. med.perf.
97. OAs. 1.pais. aor. 2.
x\', / recline, lie down, 101. 9. pass.
aor. Land 2.Med. rare.
xXi/'w, / rinse.
APPENDIX.
1 exci/e an itching, scratch, burn.

xsXtiû, I chastise, Jut. med.
xtXeCu, 1 maim, pass, with and without
the r.
xtplgu, I bring, Med. / receive, obtain,
xetiu, I cover with dust, (xotieu, xsxiHfuu.)
mvtu, I cut off, hew.perf. 1. (Epic
per/. 2.)pass. aor. 2.Met>.
x^nUu, /finish, fulfil,
xpivu, I judge, try as a judge, 101. 9.
Med.
x(tu, I hnock, push ; pass, takes the tr.
Med.
mfum, I hide, charact. /3.pass. aor. 1.
and 2.Med.
xtiû, /found, establish.
xvXlu, J roll; pass, takes the a.
xuXvu, / hinder.
Xiyu, I sag, Med. See this verb on
account of some of its compounds
in the List of Anom.
KsSfist, /spill, shed.
Xslri, Heme, aor. 2.perf. 2.Med.
Xiru, I peel, scale ; pass. aor. 2. accord
ing to 100. Obs. 7.
Xriyu, I leave off.
Xoylî/tai, dep. med. I reckon, conclude.
Xefuunt, I corrupt, aor. 1. takes n, Med.
Xiiu, see Anom.
uutvoftat, see Anom.
umXtunrt*, ttu, / soften.
/tafxim, / wither, aor. 2. takes i, pass. /
am withered.
fi\[i$iif*.cLt, dep. med. / blame,
fUtsi, see Anom.
C-io'iZw, /distribute, Med.
ftnrvu, /point out.
fusum, /stain, pollute, aor. 1. takes n.
/xo>!uvu, / defile,
tiu-u, see Anom.
nuu, / nod.
ynX,'f"i, Med. / swim,
vifu, / snow.
rtufyu, / am of opinion, think.
Manfiai, Med. / lament.
cixtuû, / pity*
sitMfi, / bewail, 92. Obs. I.fut. med.
exiXXu, / land, trans, and inlrans,
JjA, / make sharp, exasperate.
intiiXu, / reprove.
437
otofedt^tv, / name,
trXlZv, I arm, furnish with arms, Med.
Ifiyu, / stretch forth, reach, redupl. Alt.
Med.
lf%", / mark bounds or limits, Med.
sfvrest, ttu, / dig, redupl. Att. Med.
trxilivu, / educate, Med.
fretXmtu, / wrestle, pass, takes the
vaXXu, / brandish, pass. aor. 2.
vaveu, / sprinkle, fut. au, Med.
vttTttgeu, see the Anom.
txuu, /put an end to, pass. aor. 1. 100.
Obs. 1.Med.
ruStv, see the Anom.
xt'.û, / pierce, pass. aor. 2.
*lfiTu, / send, perf. 97- Obs. 1. perf.
pass. 98. Obs. 8. Med.
mtc/iai, / am poor, only the pres. and
imperf.
rsfitst, / accomplish, aor. 1. 101. 4.
Med.
/ press.
rjmw, /believe.
xXioru, ttu, / form, fashion, fut. ru,
Med.
tx'ixu, /plait, twine, pass. aor. 2.Med.
trxitu, / wash, 101.9.
mlyu, / suffocate, trans,fut. med.pass.,
/ choke, inlrans. aor. 2. $ 100.
Obs. 6.
irnfivu, / transport, conduct, pass. / travel
by land.
rsfll^tt, / procure, Med. / acquire,
x/tttffffbv, ttu, I do, act, find myself, has
everywhere the long, $ 1. Obs. 4.
perf. 1 . / have dune, perf. 2. trtrîy, / have found myself, (see, how.
ever, Buttm. Compl. Gr. Gr.)
Med.
Tf>i<ru, / am becoming, only act.
rû, I saw, pass, takes the i.
crrxiu, / stumble, trip.pass, takes the r.
xrwau, / shrink through fear.
tffTtecu, / pound, fut. eu.
XTvetru, Ifold, Med.
ttiju, / spit, pass, takes the <r,
m$u, / putrefy, (i,) pass. / rot.
fdrru, / sew, stitch.
fi*u, / incline to.
fi*ru, see Anom.
438
APPENDIX.
taint, I wag the tail, flatter, only act.

aor. 1 takes n.
txiftt, I sweep, aor. 1. takes , but: per/.
2. has the peculiar signif. I grin, as
a pret.
tifafttu, dep. pas: I revere,
ttiv, I shake, pass, takes the t,Med.
ttifictlw, Ipoint out by signs, aor. 1. takes
ti, Med.
tnxu, I make putridpass. I become
putrid, has aor. 2., to which belongs
also per/. 2.
tfafuu, I damage.
txaXfii, I limp.
txxtru, I dig, charact. f. pass. aor. 2.
exitu, 1 cover.
tx'iTro/zxi, dep. med. I survey,
exivx^m, I prepare, Med.
exnfrrai, act. and med. I lean on.
txatvrM, I mock, ridicule,
truû, I sow, pass. aor. 2.Med.
(r<r
see Anom.
tvtvbu, Ihasten.
tmvhxra, I use my endeavours,/ul. med.
trxru, I drop, 92. 04s. 1.
frlyu, 1 cover.
trufiu, I tread on, pass. aor. 2.
mfc*, Iproceed, aor. 1 and 2.
triXXst, I send, pass., aor. 1 and 2. Med.
tr'ui, I groan, only the pres. and imper/,
trivx^m, I sob, 92. Obs. 1.
tr'sgya, I love, am contented with, per/. 2.
tripu, Ifill to the brim, I crown, Med.
tTKî^n, I fix, strengthen, 92. Obs. ].
Med.
tro^dôfioii, dep. med. I conjecture,
trpxriuw, act. and med. I march against
the enemy,
erîfu, I turn, twist round, 98. Obs. 3.
$ 99. Obs. 3.pass. aor. 1. and 2.
Med.
tv^'ifa, I whistle.
tbfm, I drag along, pass. aor. 2. Med.
t<py.>.tn, I deceive, pass. aor. 2.
tQecrrai, 1 slay, kill, pass. aor. 2.
tfiyyv, 1 makefirm, constrain, pass. per/.
98. Obs. ^.
ttv&, J throb, {'palpito,') 92. Obs. I.
'XlZ"s I split.
'XtlM%>t, I am at leisure.
rttaottru, rru, see Anom.

raeta, rru, I arrange, pass. aor. 1 and 2.
Med.
riyyu, I bedew.
Tumi, I stretch, $ 101. 9.
rixpxifv, I determine by certain limits,
aor. 1. takes n.Med. Idemonstrate,
prove.
nxrx'nv, I work in wood, aor. 1. takes n>
riXKm, an old verb, which occurs chiefly
in compounds, ex. gr.lriri&Xtt, /en
join, $ 101. 8. Med.
nv^M, see Anom.
nxti, I melt, so/ten, pass. I am melted,
has the aor. 2., to which belongs also
the per/. 2.
1 pluck, 101. 4.Med.
rim, see Anom.
rnirtm, I shake, Med.
T(ifiu, I tremble, has neither aor. nor
per/.
rpru, I turn about, 97. Obs. 1. 98.
Obs. 3. 100. Obs. 3. ; the aor. 2. is
most in use in the act. pass, and
Med.
rg'upw, I/eed, see Anom. Med.
T{//3*r, I rub, pass. aor. 2. 100. Obs. 6.
/ chirp, /ut. per/, rirfym.
ifyla>, I insult, abuse,
hyxiiu, I weave, aor. 1. takes n.
um, I rain , pass, takes the r.
Qaiw, see Anom.
fx^xtm, fro, / treat with drugs, give
medicines,
(psi&ouxi, dep. med. I spare,
f&'tyyeuxi, dep. med. I produce a sound,
per/. 98. Obs. 7.
qSiioa, see Anom.
$\iyv,I burn, trans.; pass. aor. 2. 100.
Obs. 7.
I say, point out, Med.
qîtrtru, ttoi, I enclose, pass. aor. 2. Med.
Qpltrrw, ttm, I shudder, charaot. *, per/. 2.
Qgovrllû, 1 disquiet myself/or.
Qgvyu, I broil, toast, pass. aor. 2. 100.
Obs. 6.
ifv\xtru, ri-ai, / guard, Med,
pv(, see Anom.
Qutiuu, I plant.
xatffyptiu, Igratify, dep. med.
APPENDIX.
4guw, / dance,
xtfi&i 1 have ne'd of, wish for, only the
pres. and imperf. (compare Anom.
Xt'"y I anoint, pan. takes the r, Med.
^xXXx, I play on the guitar, ting,
^tciv, I touch, pat. takes the tr.
439
îyv, I blame, censure.

^tulet, I delude, Med. / lie, deceive.
I calculate, reckon, Med. / de
cree by vote.
^vx*>, see Anom.
uh'nti, I writhe with pain.
VERBA CONTRACTA.
poxv, J cry out, bawl, 95. 5.fut. med.
1' AycLTiiat, I love,
fcouxoXiu, Ifeed herds,
ayvoi*, I know not, fut. med.
fyovrcZa, I thunder,
iiixlu, / do injustice,
athioft*,. pass, and dep. med. lam ashamed, yiXetu, I laugh, fut. med.the a. is short
in the conjug.pass, takes tr,
fut. utfixi, perf. and aor. pass, take
ytvveiv, I beget, Med.
the t,
^Taiiiw, act. and pass. dep. I consume,
nSfUtrsst, I stain with blood,
spend,
alaiv, see Anom.
Itfyiaftxi, dep. med. I take by the right
alriv, I demand, Mr. I).
hand, receive hindly,
,V<*V*., dep. med. I criminate,
ixUftni, dep. med. I heal, cure, fut. Ire $ta>, see Anom.
ItiX'm, I hurt, Med.
/mi, perf. takes the tr,
'cr./-'-'v, I make known,
etxaXav^tai, Ifollow,
iicurau, (no compound,) / arbitrate, past.
axgtfia*, I know accurately, Med.
I live or dwell in a certain place,
axgoetopeu, Med. / hear, listen,
augm. 86. Obs. 6.
aXtu/iai, pass. dep. I stray,
hxxmai, (no compound,) Iserve, waiton,
iXy'm, I am in pain,
augm. $ 86. Obs. 6. Med. with the
iXetxei, I thrash, 95. 5.
same sign if.
iftatu, 1 mow, Med.
i/ifurfinTim, I dispute, am of a different 'hr\ -/.u, I am thirsty, 105. Obs. 5.
"iauXov, J reduce to slavery, Med.
opinion,augm. before,
ittau, (no compound,) pass, with thefut. 3{, / do, perform, different from the
Anom. i.doarTKM,
med. I am grieved,
iuvrvx'ia*, I am unhappy,
alii*, I value, think worthy,
itravrx*, J meet, fut. med.augm. in the laai, I let, leave, augm. u,
lyyvav, I pledge, Med. / make myself
middle,
responsible for another,
nr. (no compound,) / deceive,
tyxuotv, 1 deliver into any one's hands,
itruX'm, (no compound.) I threaten,
augm. (> 86. Obs. 5.
Kfaefttti, dep. med. J pray,
ikiw, I pity,
agiSfi'to/, I count, number, Med.
a^xiu, I suffice,i in the conjug.pass. ifisi, 1 vomit, in the conjug.redupl.
Alt.pass, takes r,
(with the same signif.) takes the t,
httvriaep.ui, dep. pass. I oppose, resist,^
apUficti, dep. pass. I deny,
augm. before,
&eiti, J plough, retains the t in the conjug.
t.w;,st/. dep. pass. Irevolve in mind,
redupt. All. pass, without r,
augm. 86. Obs. 5.
a^reiv, I suspend, fasten, Med.
\:<y ~/,\u>. I molest, augm. 86. Obs. 6.
afx'tu, I exercise, practise,
ixiBtift'ui, I desire, augm. 86. Obs. 5.
aixiu, I play on theflute,
i(i"> see Anom.
(iiiti, see Anom.
440
APPENDIX.
iîvvav, art. and med. 1search, investigate,

l^r./ziv, I lay waste,
uuStri*. I blush,
i^wrxu, I interrogate,
imxv, I entertain as a guest,augm. u,
tintysTis*, I practise beneficence, augm.
4 86. Obs. 2.
ivrijSiu, / am pious, augm. $ 8G. Obs. 2.
tivîu, I regale, pass. I am entertained,
augm. 86. Obs. 2.
Zeit>, see Anom.
Z'if, I boil up, inlrans. retains t in the
conjug.
&>.iw, I emulate,
lu,i, 1 punish,
&nrin, J seek',
Zvyg&fiu, I paint,
'njtiu, / am young,
tiyitftM, dep. med. 1 think, believe,
Yipiaobi, I tame
hrraouxi, merely pass. I am worsted, de
feated,
KX'"i I lound,
Sxffiu, dofr'ui, I have confidence in, take
courage,
Stawfou, dep. med. I contemplate,
$ngei*i, I hunt, fat. med.
Skitj, J bruise, crush, the x is short in
the conjug., pass, takes the t,
/ bewail, lament,
Ho/nit), Jfumigate,
Ovfus), I irritate,
ituuxt, dep. med. 1 heal,
lift*, I perspire,
I draw, (as water,) / draw up,
Med.
jV{i, / learn by inquiry,
xxxou, Jili-trcat, injure,
ueLuxaejiM. dep. med. I boast,
xttriai, / sling, prick,
xniu, 1 set in motion, excite,
xXilst,} break, the a is short in the conjug.,
pass, takes the a, not to be con
founded with xXdu, x\u'iu, see Anom.
xXrîu, / chuse by loi, Med. / draw lots,
xiix, 1 gnaw, grate, 105. Obs. 5.
tuifiiu, 1 put to rest, pass. {Epic med.) I
sleep,
xima,, I ntake common, communicate,
xutmiu, Jpartake,
xo>.kuu, I glue, paste,

xoXuft&Ui, I swim,
xtfii, I sweep, different from xtînvfn,
see Anom.
xtgfiXu, / adorn, adjust,
xot'iu, act. and med. I am angry with, re
tains the i in the conjug.
xfxri*, I have power, holdfast,
xferte*, Ibeat, clap the hands,
xrvr'iN, I resound, make a noise,
xuUîu, I govern, steer,
XitXiv, J talk,
XfTaeiu, I beseech,
>.o'ssoiu, act. pass, and med. I rail at,
Xurin, I grieve, afflict,
>.wii>u.xi, dep. med. I ill-treat,
XvQin, J relax, desist,
fietorvfitt, lam a witness, attest,
piihiiv, I smile,
fttrfiu, I measure, Med.
pnNbpuH, dep. med. Iplan, invent,
futUtfutt, dep. med. I imitate,
fitifftu, I hale,
tin, see Anom.
mjmmv, I conquer,
rtiti, I meditate,
ycuSsriu, I admonish,
\im, / scrape, plane, retains the in the
conjug. and takes <r in the pass.
sixiv, I inhabit, dwell,
olxth/t'ui, I build, Med.
ixt'iu, I am slow, am reluctant,
ifuksyin, I assent, confess,
Inw, / roast,
I erect, Med.Comp. ittfSiti,
augm. 86. Obs. 6.
o^fixu, act. and pass. 1 am eager, advance,
ifjAiat, I ride at anchor,
ifx'i'f"", dtp- "led. J skip, dance, '
/ drive a carriage, pass. J ride in a
carriage, intrans.
trxftnitt, I act indecently under the in
fluence of wine, augm. 86. Obs. 0.
xmriu, I tread,
iruntw, / am pressed with hunger, J 105.
Obs. 5.
irufav, I attempt, try,t;isoi, with
fut. med. and aor. pass. I endeavour,
undertake,
trtftUtf see Anom.
APPENDIX.
**iuv, I leap, fill. med.
T>.aidw, I mislead, pass. I wander about,
TXsav'ttr'tu, I am eagerfor gain,
nt'ui, act. and vied. 1 labor, toil, fut.
viru and tffu,
rrsfttj, Ifurnish with wings,
Taik'tv, I sell,
['{J*, I cause to take root, pass. I take
root,
nfuiiv, J designate, Med.
ciyiu, I keep silence, fut. med.
rnitfuu, dep. med. J eat, dine,
twiti*, J am silent, fut. med.
ffxi^rttu, I leap, hop,
fffidcai, see Anom.
esrxu, I drag,the a is short in the
conjug.pass, takes the r, Med.
ffrtQavoot, I crown, Med.
cv\uu, I plunder,
ffipîyeiat, I swell with rage,
rik'tv, Ifinish, retains i in the conjug.,
pass, takes the <r. Med.
441
7-*!, / observe, watch,

Tifteta/, 1 honor, Mei>.
mpugliu, I assist, take vengeance, Med.
raXftaat, I dare,
Tfiiu, / tremble, $ 105. Obs. 2. retains the
i in the conjug.
Tguflraw, / bore, perforate,
TguQetu, I live luxuriously,
T(ufiv, I render insolent, pass. I urn in
solent,
fSii:, I envy,
fiXia, I love,
Qofiio/txi, dep. pass. Jfear,
Qairttu, I visit, frequent,
quaiti, I blow, (as bellows,)
j;>.ii, / slacken, relax,the a is short
in the conjug., and the pass, has
the <r,
xutfv, act. more commonly Med. / sub
jugate, conquer,
X"(l"> I retire, give way, fut. med.
îv, I rub, 105. Obs. 5. Meu.
The Greek Technical Grammatical Terms.

Sroijêia, letters : tywhevrx xai auntywva, vowels and consonants ;
atyma., (mutce,) hf/.tycovu, (semi-vocales,) vy%a', (liquidcc,) Saoiz,
îXa, fj.io-(t, (aspiratce, tenues, medics,) ivimfMy, an ancient letter,
used only as a numeral figure, see p. 9.
isôacjiliai, accents, but they commonly comprise also quantity,
spiritus, apostrophus, and hypodiastole, ( 15. 2. ;) h%uct, fixptix,
'mpiairutxkfn, grave, acute, circumflex ; Kvci/xacra, spiritus, SxaiXac
xal -îXri, (sc. wgoo-wSia,) asper and lenis ; any/Art, rikilx anyu.ii,
full stop, y.iat\ ffTiypwi, colon, vTioany/j-ii, comma ; %ovoy, quantity,
auXkxfiii ol%povos, (' anceps,') doubtful syllable; %aaixuî(x.,J
hiatus.
Parts of Speech : ovo/xa, noun, ('ivopx w%orrnyopix.av, substantive,
EWi&eTixbv, adjective,xvpiov, proper name,) iremvyua, pronoun,
apSpov, article, (wgoTaauo/xEvov, virora.aa6fji.cvov, pra:positivus, post1 They are also called i/ari^nXx, because they undergo no change on being de
clined and conjugated.
* To write this word xxr/cmSlm is incorrect; there is nothing of 3* in it ; the
word comes from %xc(a!ihtu,fttll of chasms.
442
APPENDIX.
positivus,) /xetoj^, participle, priixa, verb, sitlppnixa, adverb, irpo&e<Tir, preposition, aviliîxos, conjunction. {Interjections are com
prised among adverbs.)
yhos aguEvixov, bri\uxov, oi/Serepov, masculine, feminine, neuter
gender, dp&ixos Ivixor, Jui'xbr, tiKdSuvtixos, singular, dual, plural
number; xXims, declension, icrdxus, case ; ipri or idSzTa, or also
ovo/xaffTiJcri, nominative, yevixij, genitive, Sonx^, dative, ainxrixri,
accusative, xXwnxw, vocative, itruans ic\ayixi, casus obliqui.
ovoy.0, anoKiKviximy or aitoKvrov, also awXoi/v and &etixov, the
positive, avyx.piTvx.ov, comparative, vitip'SiTixov, superlative.
ovZvylx., conjugation, which in Greek means only the different
classes of verbs, which are conjugated alike ; ex. gr. the verbs
K **> i ? : what we call to conjugate and conjugation, is injSreek
the same as declining, xX/veiv, xKiais.Siixa, tkema, see 92. 6.
itpboojnoc, persons.
av%ri<sis ovKkapixw xal %%wixri, augmentum syllab. et temp. d\aSfwXaffiaupiof, reduplication.
Sia&suir, the nature of the verb, in consequence of which it is a
prifj-a EVEgynTixov, itahrinxbt, /ae'<tov, activum, passivum, medium,
aiiroTtxhes, intransitivum, aXXowaSsr, transitioum.
tyx\l<sus, moods ; bptanxvi, indicative, vnoraxTixr,, conjunctive,
Evxnxri, optative, Trpouraxrixri, imjierative, aTiapiy-tpxros, infinitive.
^pomi, tenses ; hearais, present, na.%oiyjriy.ims, prccterite, y.iW<vv,
future; ita.pa.xiiy.ws, perfect, wagstto; rixor, imperfect, vnspauvriXixbr, plusquarnperfectum, dipiaros, aorist, (itapirxais, duration,
extension, avvreXna, consummation, perfection, momentaneous
action.)
auvbsan, composition, nxî'îsis, juxtaposition, jrapocavvêrx,
words derived from compounds.
Flourishes and Abbreviations.

For understanding the old editions of Greek works, it is neces
sary to be acquainted with a far greater number of abbreviations
than those stated p. 9, which are met with in the printed text of
modern times. A complete list of all the flourishes, which occur,
would only confuse the learner ; the selection of the principal in
the following Table appears better calculated to be retained by
the memory along with the explanation, and to be consulted on
APPENDIX.
443
occasion. It contains, 1.) some simple characters or figures,

which frequently recur in the more complex ones ; 2.) such as
will assist to explain others, which are not stated, by analogy.
The first row or line contains the forms of letters, which no
longer occur in common writing ; they are found in old manu
scripts only as elements of greater flourishes ; particularly the two
forms of e, which will be recognised in the abbreviations of ev and
69rl in the fourth row, and the form of the a, which will be found
in the fifth row, in the abbreviations of aa, <ro, aw. But both
letters are also the elements of other flourishes or figures not
mentioned in the Table.
The learner must especially guard against mistaking the rather
uncommon character of x in the first row, 1.) for as element
of the flourish m in the second row ; 2.) for the flourish n at the
end of the same row, particularly when the upper part of the
figure is not sufficiently leaning backwards, which is the case in
some printed books.
The first of the three forms of v in the first row was formerly
very much used ; the second is the same character with the con
necting stroke to the right. It is obvious that this letter in this
form bears the same relation to the usual ^ as N to M. The
third form of v was used as a final v, and occurs in several very
current editions, especially in those printed at Basle in Switzer
land, for instance, in Eustathius ; it must be carefully compared
with the flourish for aa in the fifth row, to guard against mistaking
it for that character.
The second row places together some flourishes, which are
not easily guessed at ; they are selected from the alphabetically
arranged third and sixth rows. This might also have been done
with some of the flourishes beginning with
in the fourth row,
but it appears preferable to leave them together in order to faci
litate their comparison.
The third, fourth, fifth, and sixth row contain flourishes, of
which the initial letter is easily guessed at with the assistance of
the first row ; they are in alphabetical order except the last ep,
which has been added to complete the Table.
I. >v
yap
ST
v.
TV
TO
odx
Ttaâ.
yfrT yy
tsri
Hip
)S yaq
etti
ft) y
*
T
y
8
nr.
T
SO
if
>e VP'
xarx
(J
TfO
TW
TtSv
T
/XE&
G
car
fWV
ftev
G>
yutnos
2^ 5*
row
/AET
y
r
(1*T
THE END.
Ttt/
til
Iff
&m
OJT
JV5 H
TOO
tj)
iro
at
(*
t>
ft
TO
too*
XElpaiXaioy
ri
oTov
hrl
VI.
V
V
TTtf
OVTOS
$>
Se
IXMV
MTI
cufb *iro
C
MM*
n
HHP Mretor,
if
fM)
1*81/
>^
(T
that
?)
a
oX>.
s
eX
IV.
HI.
X3.
oV^
yap
f
tr
\
ei
H
V
iu/ <T
*
ov
Ml
X*
reu
X"
a/
rats
6>
ENGLISH AND LATIN INDEX*.
Abbreviated nominal forms, 56. 57.

PP-75. 77
Abbreviation or shortening of contrac
tions, 2. p. 9 ; pp. 442. 443
Abttractum becoming eoncrclum, 1 19.
P. 297
Abundant, \ 56. p. 74
Accent drawn back, 1} 12. p. 26
45.B. 65.; 103. p. 172
Accusative with the passive, 134. p.
344
after tVhx, ixtii, &c, in lieu of the
subj. of the following verb, 151.
p. 421
as apposition to the whole proposi
tion, $ 131. p. 336. Ois. 5
Adjective instead of subst. 123. p. 318
instead of adverb, $ 123. p. 318
as predicate, 129. p. 329
without a verb, 129. p. 331
before a genitive, J 132. p. 337
instead of the neuter, 151. p. 421
Adverb instead of adj., 125. p. 320
instead of subst. 125. p. 321
Ampliativa, (subst.) \ 1 19. p. 295
Anacoluthon, 151. p. 422
Anattrophe, 117. P- 290
Aorittut, Alexandrian in , f> 96. p. 137Note 1
in <rm, ci/int, 96. p. 140. Obt. 9
syncopated, active in n, t, &c, {. 96.
p. 140. Ob: 8
passive (Xi!to, Hxtc,) 110. p. 218
Aorittut, Syntax, 137. P- 352
2, with reduplication, t) 83. 85. p. 113.
Obt. 7- p. 116
forms new themes, 1 1 1. p. 223
Aorittut is wanting in contracted verbs,

96. p. 137
2. throws the accent on the termina
tion, 103. p, 173
Aorittut pan., as med.tj 136. p. 349
med. as pan. 113. p. 233
Apocope, 117. p. 289
Apottrophut, 30. p. 46
Article, (crasis,) 29. p. 44
in Homer, 74. p. 101
Atpirata, $ 17. 20. pp. 31. 34
Atona, 13. p. 27
Attraction, 142. p. 366. ; 151. p. 419
Augment prefixed to the preposition of
a compound verb, 86. p. 117
Barytona, 10. p. 23
Cases of the verb with the verbal adj.
$ 130
Caesura, 7. p. 20. Obt. 16
Canon Dawetianut, 139. p. 357. Note 2
Cautativa, 113. pp. 230. 231
Characteristic of the verb different from
that of other words, } 92. p. 126
Comparative, Syntax, 132. p. 339
Composition, or compound words, 120.
p. 308
Conjunctive, its formation, 88. p. 120
in lieu of the indie, 103. p. 177-Aro/e
in lieu of the future, 139. p. 362
in vpi, $ 103. p. 177. Obt. 13
Conj. perf., 98. p. 146. ; 137. P- 355. ;
OA*. 11
Conj. aor. pass., J 103. p. 177- Obt. 14. 15
Connecting vowel, 87. p. 119. Obt. 1.2
Consonants, see tenuet and aspirator
Contractio, $ 28. p. 41
* It is by no means the author's intention that this and the following Index
should save to the learner the highly useful and necessary task of making himself
familiarly acquainted with every part of the Grammar, so as to be enabled readily
to turn to any subject, on which he is occasionally desirous of information. Either
Index is merely to afford to him a little assistance on topics, to which it is not easy
to assign a systematical place, and the finding of which, by means of the Table of
Content! in front of the work, might be attended with some difficulty.
440
ENGLISH AND LATIN INDEX.
Coronis, 15. p. 30
Correlative 78. p. IOC. ; J 1 16. p. 284
Dative with the pass., 134. p. 343
Declensions, originally identical, 50.
p. 75
their difference, 33. p. 49
Demomtrativa strengthened, J 79. P- 107
Deponens, 113. p. 232
Derivation of verbs from substantives,
o 119. p. 292.; of subst. 119. p.
295.; of adj. 119. p. 304
Desideraliva, 119. pp.294. 295
Diaresis, 15. p. 30
Dialects, 1. p. 1.; $16. p. 30; 27p. 39. ; 28. p. 42. ; 34. p. 52. ;
35. p. 54.; 116. p. 288. ; 117.
p. 289
Diastole, 15. p. 30
Digamma, 6. p. 14
Diminutives, i 119. p. 303. 304
Diphthongs, 5. p. 12
Double themes, 56. p. 73
Double letters, 21. p. 34
Doubling of consonants, J 21. p. 34. ;
95. p. 133
g of vowels, 528. p. 42. ; 105. p. 187,;
M 11 4. p. 260.
flpial instead of the plural, 33. p. 50.
Obs. 8
Syntax, 129. p. 329
Ejection of a consonant, 28. 'p. 42.
Elision in the middle of a word, 53. p. 71
on the meeting of words, 29. p. 45.
Obs. 10
Ellipsis, 151. p. 426
Epiccenum, 32. p. 48, Obs. 3
Epic, Epics, 1, pp. 2,6.; 114. p. 236.
237
Extension, 28. p. 43. Obs. 3
Feminine gender, see Dual
Final letters, 20. p. 37
Frequentativa, 119. p. 295
Futurum, derived from the conj. aor.,
139. p. 363. Note
Syntax, 139. p. 357
Futurum Atticum, 95. p. 134
Futurum secundum, 95. p. 135
Futurum tertium, 99. p. 146

Syntax, 138. p. 355
Futurum med. instead ofact., 1 13. p.233
instead of pan., 113. p. 233. 234
Genitive with t and ra, 128. p. 328
of the pronoun being premised, 134.
p. 343. Obs. 4
Gentilia, 1 19. p. 302
Genus of the word expressive of the
whole, p. 337
Heteroc/ita, 56. p. 74
Hiatus, 29. p. 43
approved of, 6. p. 14
Hypodiastole, 15. p. 30
Hypothetical construction, 139. p. 358.
359
Jmitaliva {verba,) 119. p. 295
Immediativa, 113. p. 230. 231
Imperativus, tert. plur., 103. p. I74
nor. 137. p. 352
per/. $ 137. p. 355
fuluri, 96. p. 140. Obt. 9
Imperfectum, Synt., 137. p. 351
Jmpersona/ia, 129. p. 330
Inchoatiua, 112. p. 228
Inclinatio accentus, 14. p. 28
Indicativus pras. 137- p. 354. Obs. 7
lnfinitirus aor. sec, 103. p. 173
with , 139. p. 361
as a request, as a command, 142.
p. 368. OA*. 5
absolutus, 141. p. 365
Intercalation of consonants, 19. p. 33.
Obs. 1
of vowels, 28. p. 42
Jnterjectiones, 115
Intransitiva and transitiva, see Ferba.
Inversion, 19. p. 33. Obs. 2
Ionic forms in contr. verbs, 105.
p. 168
Ileraliva, 103. p. 173
Labials changed into u. 23. p. 35
Lengthening of vowels, 27. p. 40.
Liquidie, easily doubled, 83. p. 113
Masc. of the adj. with a subst. fern.,
193. p. 317
Medium, 69. p. 122
KNGLISII AND LATIN INDEX.

Melaplasmus, 56. p. 7 '
Metathesis, 110. p. 221
Moods of the pres. perf. and aor. (Syn
tax,) 139. p. 356
Muta cum liquida, 7- P-16
Names of towns, in mt, 32. p. 48
derivation from them, .
Names of animals, 32. p. 48
Nasal sounds, {. .|. p. 12
Neulrum, Syntax, 128. p. 327
of the comparative as adverb, 116.
p. 283
Negative particles, 148. p. 384
Negative verbs, 148. p. 390
Neglecting the aspiration, 18. p. 32
Nomina propria, their declension, 56
in mi from nis, J 36. p. 55. Note.
Nominativus with the in I'm. 142. p. 367
abso/utus, 145. p. 377
Numerals, 2. p. 9. Obs. 3.
Object not expressed, 130. p. 332
Omission of the subst. 125. p. 320. ;
132. p. 341. Obs. 8.
of the verb, 129. p. 331
of the object, 130. p. 332
of the dependent proposition, 151.
p. 427
of the articulus pra-positivus, 132.
p. 340.
Optative, its formation, 88. Obs. 5.
p. 121
in v,
y 103. Obs. 3. p. 174
in /' and 6/***, 107. Obs.6. p. 200
aor. in us, &c. 103. p. 174
perf. v 98. p. 146. Obs. 9.
447
Passive signification with the active

form, 113. p. 232. Obs. 4
Patronymica, 119. p. 303
Paulo-post-fut. see fut. 3
Perfect with the signif.of thepres. tense,
113. 114
syncopated, 5 97. p. 143. Obt. 7
becomes a present tense, 1 13. p. 234.
Oit.18
without reduplication, 83. p. 112
2. or med. 113. p. 231
pass, changes its accent, 103. p. 173.
as med. 136. p. 350
Person, the second of the pass., 103.
p. 174
3d pi. pass, xrai, art, 163. p. 175
Personalia, omitted, 129. p. 330
Plural instead of singular, 72. pp. 99,
100; 129. p. 329
Plusquamperf. act. Ionic and Attic forma,
103. p. 174
pass, identical form with the aor.
110. p. 219. Obi. 4
Position by spirilus, 6. p. 14
Possetsiva, 127. p. 327
neuter, 128. p. 328
Prepositions shortened, 117. p. 289.
Obs. 2.
their accent, 117. p. 290
omitted, 130. p. 332. Obt. 1
before a pronoun personal, 72.
p. 99. Obs. 3 f/,etrfore tt,7.
Present tense, its form strengthened,
112. p. 225
of the indie, Syntax, 137. p. 354
Obs. 7
Pura, 28. p. 40
Quantity, ex auctoritate, 7. P- 17
Participia, 88. p. 121

of the impersonal verbs, 145. p. 378
of the aor. 137. p. 353
with &,, 139. p. 361
Neuter of the participle in lieu of
the abstractum, 128. p. 328
Particles inseparable, {. 120. p. 310
expletive, 149. p. 402
Farts of speech, p. 441
Passive tenses in deponents, 113. p.
233
Radical vowels, 10J3. p. 208

Reciproca, 74. p. 102
Reciprocal influence in the formation of
the language, 96. p. 140
Reduplicatio prasentis, 112. p. 230
peculiar instances, 83. Obs. I. p.
113. ; 85. OAs. 2. p. 116
Rrjlexiva, 74. p. 1 1 1
Pronomina, Syntax, 127- p. 325
omitted, 130. Obs. 2. p. 332
448
ENGLISH AND LATIN INDEX.
Reflective signif. of active forms. J 1 13.

p. 231
Reiatwumconstr., $ 143. p. 3C9. ; J 151.
p. 419. 420
with the article, 125. Obt. C. p. 322
Resolution, 28. 0A. 2. p. 42.
Root, 39. n. p. 57.
Schema Ibyccum, 129
Pindaricum, 129. p. 329
Semivowels, J 4. p. 11
Separation of diphthongs, see Resolution.
of syllables, 120, p. 310
Singular instead of plural, 129. p. 328
Spiritus, interchanged, C. p. 14
asper, 6. p. 14
Subject omitted, 129. p. 330., of the
following verb, object of the pre
ceding verb, 151. p. 421
Subslantivum, 119. p. 295
Syncope, 47. p. 66
in conjugation, 109. p. 213. 214
foundation of the form in
106.
p. 193
Sgnizesis, $ 28. p. 42. ; 29. p. 45, Obt.
11
Tenses principal and historical, 81.

p. 110
their terminations, $ 87. p. 1 1 8
formation, 93. p. 129
in use and not in use, $ 104. p. 178
Tenuei instead of aspirator, 17. p. 32 ,
Themes, 92. p. 127
not in use, 92. p. 126
Thessal. gen. 35. p. 54. Obs. 4
Tmetit, 147. P- 383. Obs. 10
Tragic forms, $ 100. p. 148. Obt. 4
Transposition of letters, $ 19. p. 33. ;
110, p. 221
Verba inlransitiva el transitiva, 113.
p. 231
Verbum intransitivum governs its abstractum in the accus., 131. p. 334
in the plur. with the sing., and in
the sing, with the plural, 129.
p. 328. 329
Verbal adjectives. Syntax, $ 132. p. 338
in rut and rsi, Syntax, 134. p. 344
f'ersut ixifxXu, 7- p. 20. Oil. 15
Vocalet ancipitet, 7- p. 15
pttra, 28. p. 40
GREEK INDEX.
The Numerals refer to the Paget.
A, *, Doricum, 52. fiXa.au, 134. Obt. 8, aarts, 243
, changed intoi, 187. Obt. 8
>>. in romp. 37- Obs. 3
, after i, i, f, 50. 84. 132
tyt it,, 403
a and o, before vowel in tu and n, 39. ctyWriru, 283
Obt. 2
aiixt7t, with accus., 333. Obs. 1.; with a
, for n, 39. Obs. 6.; 51. Obt. 2. ; 133.
double accus. 335. Obs. 4
OA*. 7
iii, *it), 289.; Its), 413. with the Edi
S, for n, 39. Obt. 6
tor's Note
, for i, 39. Obt. 9t with Note by the
inflect. 128. Obs. 1., derivation, and
Editor
signif. 178. 294. d
a, privativum, 310. ; with adj. fem. 85. iniiir, 75. Obs. 7
Obt. 5
'aSamrtf;, 20. OAs. 15
_ augmentative, 310. Obs. 11
'ASfi.S, 51. OAs. 1
a, quantity, 61. 62., in the accus. -aSir, -3i/y, (verbs,) 228
sing. 70. 52. Obs. 1., in the adj. <, pronunciation, 12
-at, elided, 46. OA*. 5. ; three similar
fem. 84
verbal forms in tu, 173. Hole 3
-, as adverb, 282. Obs. 3
ui and short, 25
aixTcs, 237
GRKEK INDEX.
449
alio;, athv, 75. Ois. 8

220. Oij. 5
rnStin, 133. Ois. 4
oJiti, 140. 04s. 9
alym, (verbs,) inflect. 149. Obt. 2. ; de
<, changed into i, 39. Oij. 10.; 53.
rivation and signif., 173. 294. e. ;
Oij. 5
from verbs in du, 228
2 pers. pass., 174
cus, -im, 39. Note
a-'fi*, 133, Obs. 4
(verbs,) 149. Obs. 2
Strut, Syntax, 327
aor. 149. Obs. 2
irufyi, (augment,) 115. 04s. 4
it*, augm. 115. Obs. 2
artful;, 33. Ois. 3
143. Oit. 3
ecrXug fjViTy, 365. Oi. 2
axsui/>, constr. 339
aVi, shortened, 290. ; airo, iiit/. ; words
axfodapxi, 133. Oij. G
compounded with, 384. Oij. 12
akakxlv, 139. Oil. 3
itHi\irxut, with accus.,333. Obs. 1
aX3i(, 410
'AjroXXa.., 64. ; with long , 20. Oij. 15. ;
aXn-KiQx, 143. 06. 3
accus., 73. 55
iXXi, aXXa ya(, 398. 404
dritiit-'iai, (long a,) 20. Oij. 15
aXXs/tai, aor. 149. Oil. 2
druTarv, 283
axxr, iri^df, 326
*?, <Je, 289. Oij. 2. ; 402, ; a(a and Zta,
ixxa 3, ixx' r, 407. ; with the gen.
402. ; 5;' jJv, iota". AWe
339
({>i,) and iert, 20. Ao/e
aXX ti S, 408
5iTii and "Aftu, 92. AWc
aXX; rt not), 409
"A*,;, (5,) 20
aXt, 58. iVo/e 3
'j|aîwf, Syntax, 414
aXfi, 77. Oil. 3
a'^t/df, dgvrv, 113. Ao/e G
a\*xn%, 58
adv., 282
ajitu, (ai.) Syntax, 413
a,-, quantity, 52
v.u'o.n, 410
r$/ut, 297. AW
ajui-iû, 33. Ois. 3
local termination, 285
a/ift, dfitftt, 282. Obs. 4.; 0/ 7t^<, 412
-artsy, temp. Herat., 174
dufinp*, W>. i Syntax, 409
airtra, etcfa, 105
f.v, 106
lent, 283
, iar, n>, 289.; Syntax, 358.; > with the -<r*(, -arff, 3 pi. pass., 175
infin. and particip. 361. ; with the drigot, 45. 04s. 5
indie. 362.; Obs. 5.; at omitted, ar, 237. Afae
363. Oil. 9
drft/ut and aVfijuaf, 38. Ois. 2.; 282.
a>a, shortened, 289. Ois. 2
Obs. 4
an, U/>, /'' 290
arra, drra, 105
*, vocat. 65. Oil. 5
I, 400
dtdyxn, Syntax, 331. Ois. 7
aira^xiK, gen. pi., G8. 1) 49. Ois. 4
aviitrTM, (augment,) 115. Oij. 4
aire;, 101.; Syntax, 324.; casus obliq.,
20. Oij. 14. ;
64. Oil. 1.; >,
325. OiJ. 1.; compounds, (/,) 39.
with personal denominations, 318.
Ois. 11.; dat. without rut, 409.;
Oij. 2
phrases, ibid. ; i aires, construction,
J., 407
341
at'ta, 19. Oi. 10
afaigtTeSal ritd rt, 334
;, quantity, 59. Oij. 1
a$vn, n, 52
atvu, dturu, 133. AWe 6
d%t&v, sura, 239. ; dxaxlû
(twin,) quantity, 229. Oil, 8
-ax'v, 287. Ois. 5
277.
x(i and
37- ; Syntax, 379
a'Ti{f, 94. iWe ; dtUTtft/, 283
dm, with change of a into 1, 187, Ois. 8
2 G
450
GREEK INDEX.
Jut, derivation and sign if. 179. 293

deiiderativa, 295
>. changed into
S3
/J, inserted, 33. OA*. 1. ; 221
/3, arising from /i, 221
/5t, inflection, 129
fsxr.i.iirutt. 95. OA*. 2
BaV, numeral, 9
/Swi., 140. Oh. 9
pxmrrtn, with accus., 333. OA*. 1
/3xi|, 91. Notes 221. JVo/*7
J&Xw9i, 39. OA*. 3
/3<(mc, 0#af, 51. Obi. I
fiiC/.'u w, augm., 113. Oil. 5. ; jSwXu, 175
68
fm, 68
y, (nasal sound,) 10. 12. 148. Note 3
yif, 398. 428
yy, before u in theperf. pass., 148. OA*. 7
yi, 402. ; yi ftu, yi />i, 403
yt >!.>, 245
-yix/f, adject, compos., 88. Obi. 5
yi{(, 72.; yi{4, t, 43. 06*. II.; 78.
Obi. 3
yiv, 309. Oi>. 2
yS, 51. OA*. I
yS{f, 72
y>.i{ti. 78
yXip.., 18. Oh. 8
yfttvf, G8
2, characteristic, 127
}, inserted, 33. Obi. 1
64. 45. Obi. 1
2f, ft) 43. Obi. 11. ; 75. OA*. 5
-3t, 29. OA*. 2. ; 284
21, Syntax, 394
litiiypai, hiitzra, 247
2ii, phrases with, 409
2i~<r9/, with gen. of the pers., 338
iimra, 52
2iZ*, 284. 06<. 8. ; 286
tun, 284. Oi>. 8
2ii!tt(, 97- Abfe 2
2i.va.. 219
2i,133. OA*. 4
Si, Syntax, 403
2qXr i.>,, Syntax, 422
-3b, -2, adv., 307

Mmm, appended, 287
Wwav, 2if<T0t/3ly, 404
2T, (*,) 84. OA*. 1
iidyur, lixyiyvif&m, 2/riXl"r, with part.,
375. Obi. 8
ilxeuos tlfiii Vfarrtii, 421
2j, Syntax, 379. OA*. 2
2/J, SV<, 282. Obi. 6. j 392
trf$t, 186. OA*. 4
2ww, 3u0', 95
ttxmr, absol., Syntax, 378. Obi. 7
2>(i/ft, 54. Note 1
tuyx/tai, augm., 113. OA*. 5
2>*tc>. Syntax, 378. OA*. 7
2i/f, compos., 1 17
2î., 140. 0/,. 9
2i, 77. Obi. 3
i, for a before liquids, 39. OA*. 9
i, in verbs in an, 1 87. Obt. 8
i, inserted, 42. 101. 104. OA*. 2
i, connecting vowel, 119. OA*. 1
i, for ii, 39. OA*. 3
i, changed into u, 37. 39. OA*. 1
, for,, 177. OA*. 15
!, Syntax, 325. OA*. 3
-i for 206
-tai, tt, 2 pers. sing. pass., 174. 175.: com.
pare 187. OA*. 7
liy, fit, at, 358. ; compare 393
tan, 3 pi, 175. 187
\ainh, Syntax, 326. OA*. 4. ; omitted,
332. OA*.2
idu, retains the a, 134 OA*. J
i/3nVir>, 140. Obi.9
iypyagSi, 220. OA*. 5
lyia, \yZftai, 45. OA*. 9
ii*/**, 136. OA*. 18
ii^/iai, 136. OA*. 16
IMtm-*, 140. OA*. 9
lirraro, 204
n, from ilfu, 206. Note 9 .
<5f, 79. Ao/e
i'JiXM, Syntax, 415
iSmn, 169. Note
k, dipth., 12. ; resolved into <", 39. OA*.
8. ; In disyllabic words, 186. OA*. 2
it, augm. temp., 114
.
u, 2 pers. sing. pass. 175
QREEK INDEX.
451
u, with indie, and opt., 359. 392. ; u fiMt, Uixx,it>}.ru, &c, 115. 04J.6. J fx, Txk,
214. Note
385.; <; 3i fill', 391. Obi. 10.; u (A
iio, 412.; :.' yao, t* xai, 393.: use, XoXnre, 250. li'Aa/
iof, a, iy, 100
(nomina,) 52. 298. 301
tlx, lias, &c, opt., 174. 06s. 4
la-apii, 33. 06s. 3
Us), 393. ; iTf, 289. 06s. 1
signif., 234. Obi. 10
'Itsitx, lintrn, 289. ; after participles 374.
At, 205. Note 5
06s. 6.; compare 400
t"y, from lT/u, to go, 208
<Z9i, 24. Obt. 2
Xwtm, 140. 06s. 9
'ixi, for irtm, 290
u'xaai, augm., 118. Obs. 2
lixan, y, 37. 2G
'f' r,
fn 407
ir/Ji^f, 331. 06s. 7
i/*iy, 75. Obs. 7
217. 06s. 1
114. 06s. 1
in, instead of -m, 203
fy and p/iury, 339. Note 2
iTmm, rerbum omitted, 331. ; uyai, infm., ' ]' :': ;. "Ejttyjf, 51
Syntax, 41C; iW< and iirri, 206.;, i'/iiti;, 251. lijw
if ci, 329. ; itj, phrases, 41 1
ippdo'arai, 175
ifiiafiat, 133. ATote 8
i"<r>;, elliptical, 426
IfXuHmi with particip. fut, 415
lit, with persons, 382. 06s. 5
-irt (,) im (,) 05. J 46. 06s. 2
tVSa, 208
r, 374. 400
Irnmi and iffrajay, 199
lira, icrs/ra, after particip., 374
Im, 407 .
tin,, 393
Im, see flyou
(augm.,) 114. 06s. 1.; 143. Obs. 2 Ux*<ns, 94. 69 . .
l*,seeij, in unaltered before all the con
lTi{rf, 108. 06s. 2
sonants, 34. J 20. ; 36. 22
Vt{, 106. ; Syntax, 326.; with gen,
\xartaos, 'ixnSTHi, 106
339. 06s. 6
Xxaffriou, 283
1
tmrtsu, si, 52
1*3S;ki, 249 . Note 22
in, 401
tru/us, Syntax, 331. 06s. 7
Ixl7, txtrdty, Xxtiffi, 286
Sxi/vn, Utrwfi 288. 06s. 7
-iS and -r, (vocat.) 24
ixi^n{<'a, 33. 06s. 3. ; 262. Note 44
w, for m, 42. 06s. 5.; 136. 06s. 17.;
iTyX, 262. JVott 44
149. 06s. 1
to, instead of n in the fut., 134. Obs. 9
Sx>iXii3a, 143. 06*. 3
il, words compounded with, 117
U/u>s, 37. 06. 3
I/a) imut, 365. Obs. 2
t
241. a '
i, remains unaltered before r and f, 37. ti$v and ivS&c, 282. 288
06s. 3
iff, 42. Note
iy, instead of ils, Syntax, 382. 06s. 6.; -tin, (verba,) 178. 292
it nTf, 411
iXia, 18G. Note
\y}oTarSj 94. Note; iyW&rw, 203
lxui, "tXuv, Syntax, 416.417
iv'r>u'ji rivec ri, 334
tfny, prat., 21 1
ixa, 289. 412. ; omitted, see prspos.
i^Jy, accent, 280. Note 68
%nxn, before consonants, 289
i^vym, 148. 06s. 8
tu, 39. 06s. 10.; 53. 06s. 5.; 280. Note
f, fnrri, 289. 411
Ma, Mil, 287
57
S|, (V?,) 27. ; If and !x, 38. 288. ; with the -iu, 178.292. ; disyllable not contracted,
pass., 343. o 134
186. 06s. 2. ; instead of 226
it}tun, etc., 115. 06s. 9.; 215. AW*.
t|ef, 333. 06s. 3
JJim, 289. 411. j
378. 04s. 7
'ins, Syntax, 379
452
creek Index.
5, 10. 35. OAs. 2. ; characteristic, 127

-It, 35. OAs. 2. ; 284. OAs. 2
Xfr, 180. Obs. 5
-Z", characteristic, 127.;frequenlutiva, 295
a, pronunciation, 10
!, for x. 39. Obs."].; in the crasis, 45. ; in
the first declension, 52. IV. ; in the
verb, 134. Obs. 7. ; in verbs ending
in*'*, 186. Obs. 5
i, for 4, 52
ti, for i, 30. OAs. 8
T, Ac tairf, 212
S and , Syntax, 393. ; S ^m, Syntax,
403
r.-ti. 2 perf. pass., 175
V It, 212. ; compare, 323. Obs. 2
m for S, 289. 06*. I
67- OAs. 4.; 281. (words com
pounded with)
for u, 39. Obs. 8
ma, J*, only imperf.,209. 210
xnitrx, 283
So, Syntax, 354. Obs. 8
ixl, vocat., 80
m
354. OAs. 9.; m in lieu of i>i'3i,
284. OAs. 7
r'.i' iyi, 212
rvi,
284
;;-.-<jv, 139. OAs. 3
-of, nom. heteroel., 74. OAs. 4
'Mm, instead of present, 354. Obs. 9
tin, 3 pers. sing., 193
w, local termination, 285
r,nrm, 93. AW 3.; -gravr, (tt,) 283
Jr, 25. OAs. 3. ; in the crasis, 45. OAs. 8
no, diphth., 12. 5
lXh 288. OAs. 10
3, from the crasis, 44. OAs. 4
S, instead of before p., 297. OAs. 3
Sit, see rta
BavTn, 129. OAs. 5
Site*,, 92. OAs. 7
Sariû, 44. OAs. 5
Sau/ix, Svupa, 39. OAs. 11
Savpaa *e> tfVay, 406
9ir< and Sim, 33. OAs. 2
9i<V<, 177- AW 9
SMsus, Syntax, 331. OAs. 7
and -St, 38. OAs. 2. ; 284. 11C
SâTje, Sloans, 76. OAs. 8

403
9*rAu,189. AW
-3,, imper., 177. OAs. 13. ; 190. 218. OAs.
2.; adv. 284. $ 116
BcificcTin, 32. OAs. 2
Sfiatrfu, 32. Ao/e
Sfurra, characteristic, 129. OAs. 5
see Suyxi
verbs, 228
i and v, long in the penult, of verbs in ~,
19. OAs. 10.; augm., 114
i, elision of, 46. OAs. 3
-i, termination of adverbs, 284
i, demonstr., 37. 109. 287
i, subscript, in the crasis, 44. OAs. 2.b.;
in the local termination nri, 285.
AW I. ; in &c, 288. OAs. 8 ,
-i, quantity, 62
m, m, nominal forms short, 19. OAs.
10. ; long, 299
-u'w, verbs, 149. OAs. 2
-ixai, desiderat., 295
!i(iu, contracted, 187. OAs. 6
tuai, Syntax, 415. ; uvai vsu xoie-u, 338.
AW
-,'t>, 178. 294
Irv, ilia, 282. OAs. 4
Mtrara, 284. OAs. 6
"Xi*f, 39. Note
iy.:v. Ifiiiett, 208
?, pron., 99. OAs. 6
-ii, termination of the nomin., 58. Note
"llOL, IMC <rt, 392
-, quantity, 41. OAs. 1
-mi, (verbs in.) quantity, 229. OAs. 8.;
from If, 228
Tin, 140. OAs. 9
Viv, 177. OAs. 15
"a-Tf, , 48. OAs. 3
>00f, tipot, 42. OAs. 5
ir*>ur, 297. Note
!<rxv, 215. Note
-Urn*, verbs in, instead of %u, 227
Ins and 7r, 20. OAs. 14.; 40. OAs. 13
(verbs in,) quantity, 19. OAs. 10
-m, in verbs ending in it,", 135. OAs. 14
*, of the perf. I. dropped, 143. OAs. 7
x, for r, {xWi,) 288. OAs. 10
GREEK INDEX.
xxim, 282. Oi>. 5
xxi, (crasis,) 45. ; Syntax, 393. ; xxipxXx,
xxi xxw, 394. ; xxi is, 323. OAs. 2. ;
xxi ii, xx* ii, 393.; xxiii, 395. J xxi
txutx, 409. ; xx) /tiit, 403. ; xa/xtf,
104 ; xxi s, 392
xx'm, inflection, 134. Obs. 9
xxxlu, inflection, 135. Oil. 12. ; 222
xxXTx, 19. Obt. 10
xixis, 20. Obs. 14
xowcs, shortened, 289. Oil. 2. ; supplied,
344. Obs. 2
xxrxtxirlxi, passive, 234
xxTixyx <rrts xityxXns, 338
xi, xiv, 289. Obs.
xixXeQx, 142 Obs. 1
xixrnpat, 113. 04*. 16
xsXaive;, p'iXxs, 31. OAs. 2
x/jotf, 71. tj 54
xijjim;, 149. Obs. 2
xwf, 101. OAs. 2
-xi and -ju, 38. OAs. 2
xXS), 75- OS*. 8
x\xlv, inflection, 134, Obs. 9
-xXin,*, xXfff, 71
KXu/3j, 43. Obs. 11
xXitst, 151
xXSA, 218. Oil. 2
xvaa>, xvj)*, 186. Obs. 5
xgiXxvxi, 149. 06f. 2
uXmivw, with accus., 333. 131. OAs. 1
xmx, 19. Oil. 10
Kirn, numeral, 9
inflection, 129. Obs. 5
*{!{, 72
xj7, 77- OAs. 3
xpmy rx xfirix, 80
xîiu, 151
Kfoxw, xfoxx, 75. Oil. 8
{, 129. Oil. 5
XTl/cW, 151
xcfxiwr, 73. Obs.
xuvrlgoy, 95. OAs. 2
xvftTt, with particip. 375. OAs. 8
x, dropped, 262. ; XiXupuu.
X5a, X2f, 64. 44. Obs. I
\xiixmi, with accus. 333. Obs. I. ; with
particip. 375. Obt. 8
XIXT9, 219.
453
Uim, Horn. 146. OAs. 9

xijw, 140. Oi. 9
Xutrtx, ri, 51. Oil. 1
Xivmmu, 149. OAs. 2
Xayfti, See vavtfixt
XiVk, x/t, 81
Xlrrtfixi, inflection, 129. OAs. 5.;aor. 2,
138. AW*
Xa/Tfly, Tfl?, 409
inserted, 33. Ois. 1
/t, dropped in the reduplication, 270,
^x, Syntax, 401
fuMfuu, 136. Obs. 16
ftxfaiv, f'l, 417
ftxxgxi, adv. 282
ftxXirrx, 283.; ftaXttrray.iv, 410
pxXXn, 283.; /XX Si, 410
/uf, see jufly
-/<, for -/tit, 176. OAj. 7
(t&tri, fixjTiy, 76. Ois. 8
Itxcr-'iZ,*, 128. OAs. 1
ftxôZfixt, 136. OAs. 16
îXi, (vocat.) 81, and Note
ptXXun, augm. 1 13.; Syntax, 414
pifmiixi, 113. Obs. 16
/titJi, constructions, 395. 396. &c. ;
(tit for /t)ii, see (*ni: ftUrei, (crasis,)
45. OAs. 8. ; Syntax, 403. ; pr, 45.
Obt. 8
-pa, .fuuu, (infin.) 176. Ois. 9., 201
/its, for -pttt, 176. Obs. 8
-ftttrPx, -fttirtov, ibid,
ftirxres, 94. Obs.
fUTxlu, 412
t"Xt'> /"';'> 37- 282. Obs. 4. ; Syntax,
379, Oij. 1
fA, constr.385.; with conj. or opt. 389. ;
uh, in questions, 389. ; independent,
391 . ; fin before subst. 388. Obs. 3. ;
t*t) ib, 390. Obs. 6. 7. ; fu\ uh, 403. ;
fih, ellipt., Syntax, 427. > i" Syn
tax, 405. ; rt /A, 406.; <rov pr), 365.
Oil. 1
fui, subst. see
(inii, 397, i"l3l I'f, 95
fctihis, fxMut, 95
^tiixiT/, Syntax, 401
pw, Syntax, 403
454
UREEK INDEX.
tm*vn, 287. OAs. 6

(tnm,2ff]- Ob: 6. Syntax, 401
stuVi, Syntax, 397
Wl, ^[CHTi yj, 40G
instead of 193. OAs. 10
plot, 51
pamuj 149. Ob: 2
fu/i.uirla.1, with accus. 333. 131. OAs. 1
/tit, tit, 30. 100
py, instead of ftp . 256. tyitw
p. - i t. fttx, 51
y-iy-}
31. 06s. 2
-/, <7tf, (subst.) 290
ftcvcrit, /toulamit, 45. OAs. 9
, at the endôf words, 37. OAs. 4., 109.
Obt. 3., 288. 117.; in theimperf.
of coi&racted verbs, 180. Ob: 3. j
> altered in the pronunciation, 37.
OAs. 4. ; v inserted, 256. (4/tu> :)
before the termination of verbs in
>, 228. ; in , 229. ; in the perf.
pass. 151. ; > before ?, 151. Obi. 8. ;
with a. privat. 310
tnix'i 24- Ob: 2
tiares, ttixros, 94. OAs.
m-, 312. OAs. 12
401
Him, 94. OAs.
tlrtrtfttu, 132. Note'
ti'fx, rtif, 76. OAs. 8
toirfi, it, 26
-ri, 3 pi. 176
-ru, m, 26. ; Syntax, 403
tu/ti, from 229
tut, tvt, 28, AW ; tit 3, Syntax, 401
|, termination of adverbs, 308
|, instead of <r in the fut. and aor., 132.
OAs. 2
| and v^, pronunciation, 35. OAs. 1
\ and \, nom. siiAs/. 58
lit, words compounded with, 383. OAs. 1 1
, in the perf. 142. OAs. 1
o, changed into cu, 39. OAs. 1
e, for 40. OAs. 13
and a before a vowel, see a
S, ellipt., Syntax, 427
i, article, 102. ; *ti t, 323. OAs. 5. ;

i /tit Hi, 322. ; ' i^fi, a-iî, 412. ;
tf/ TOTf, 320
Hi, 324
u, contracted into &>, 244. /W
45. OAs. 10. ; Syntax, 392
a, pronunciation, 12
oi. for < and ev, 39. OAs. 4
-< and -xi, short, 25
-ti, local termination, 285
-7 and -tv, (vocat.) 24
oThtz fft on, 421
tin, 175. OAs. 3
-tint, 174. OAs. 3
-tut, 54. 62
una, 214. Note
clxali, 284. OAs. 2.
and !*, 25. OAs. 8. 285
o7, omitted, 341. OAs. 9
at/toi, 25. OAs. 3
-no, 54
o7, with the infin.407- ; used in attrac
tion, (e7a 71,) 371.; <"flv UK01, 407
We ti, Syntax, 407
Sis, 69. OAs. 6
-oTtrct and luo-as, 188. OAs. 13
-ticx for -ou^-a,
for outi, 176
oVt, 140. OAs. 9
eio-lx, with imper. 410
i"zo/tai, Syntax, 354. OAs. 8
oXikiu, 266
oXiyoo-rof, 97- iVo/e
oXcTxii, 49. ; of the 1st decl. 51. ; of the
3d, 67. Ob: 2
S/tvu/ti, with accus. 333. 131. OAs. 1
ecu, 103. OAs. 1
os-aSonrif, 108. OAs. 1
ixort, 393
otov, 393
Vm, 357. compare 392
ojySvai, 149. OAs. 2
189. jVo/e
opto, 140. OAs. 9
-f, for -cv;, 54.; in the nom, Bing. 65.
Note
05, purum, 60. 65. 66
is, 322. 369. ; If' S, if' Sri, itC ut, Syn
tax, 407-; Ss/titSi li, 322.; Sli
x&trm lutWarot, &C. 427
OKEEK INDEX.
Iras, 406. ; tnt tb, 406
ofat, elliptically, 406 .
irm, with opt. 358. 04s. 3
, 288. 04s. 9
trim, irttiji, 105. 06s. 4
im, T;ii, 392. ; ?rj pn, 406
w, diphth. 13. 06*. 3
oi, six, tix, 38. ; Syntax, 384. ; ti before
a subst. 388. Obs. 3. ; tb pti, 357. 390.
06s. 6. ; tb pttn, 403. ; tbfiht ixxi, i
îTsi iXXi, 404. ; sravi/, tu tftfn,
388. 06s. 2.; tb
Syntax, 406
J, see !
Syntax, 397. ; tbii A, 95. j
fa,
392
JJi!f, Wiif, 95.; tbhis imi tb, 390.
Obt. 8. ; ev2i ,, 407. i
sU*- b,
407
tbxin, Syntax, 401
oukouv, tbxtit, Syntax, 399
tit, 399
tut, 287
titixa, 45. ; Syntax, 392
titrtri, cSxtj, 287- ; Syntax, 401
-flyf, 0uvrdf, 60. 06*. 5
-mm, names of places contracted from
40. 04s. 17
Sri, Syntax, 397
tin, Syntax, 400
tuns, heut! 104. Obi. 3.; Syntax, (as
adv.) 324. ; phrases with, 409
tint, after particip. 374. Obt. 6
bx ^T'y '"X ""-i 1 405. 406
ov^j, 289
175. 04*. 3
em, forms lengthened with, 188. Obs. 11
(verbs,) 178.293.; in the 1 pers. not
contracted, 186
trnlut, t'i, 417
9aXit, before a consonant, 37. 06s. 3
trofi, shortened, 289. ; a-oji with the
pass. 343. ; ttiftt, 290. ; trofmi, 289.
OA*. 1
xtLattxiiLi.a., 282. 04s. 5
nifim, Syntax, 411
Syntax, 327. > trmra, every one, 336.
Obt. 3
van;, 64. 45. 04*. 1,
irniwim, with particip, 374. Oi, 3
455
ariJi for îts, 289. 04s. 1

xcjvt)*1, 186
rsrSteu, 149. OAs. 2
TsTe/tipa, 142. 06s. 1
x'mth, 220. 06s. 5
TiTrxfLeki, trstrrrtits, t'ittukk, 113. 06*. 1
rt{, Syntax, 404?; a-i, 103
iriga, trisect, 288
rif!, omitted, see prcrpos.; n^), Syntax,-412. ; i
406. ; *i{) <riU.tv,
410
tnii, 218. OAs. 2
mVaj,136. 06t. 18.; <ri/>j, 136. 06s. 16
A-iii, 93. Note*
trxht, rXtit ii, Syntax, 379
trXitu, 151
trii,, 217- 06s. 1
Talaris, 108. OAs. 1
wtt'ut, 133. 06s. 4
wiTy rttti rt, 334
(mUUUt,) ra TtXXa, 336. ; 5TXA.5 Su, "hut,
409
rtxxixis, Syntax, 413
treWtrres, 97. Abie.
nm3u>, accus. 73
5rfTof, rtfrmii 108. 06s. 1
xdt) and ru, Syntax, 404
aw), 289. 06s. 1. ; abbreviated, ibid,
trims, (,) 84. Oi*. 1. ; 89. 06*. 3
T($*s, 89
sr{/, Syntax, 401
{, (crasis,) 117. Oi. 1
T(tii>, adv. 282
<rff, with the pass. 343. ; words com
pounded with, 383. Obs. 11.; r(is
<ri iiSt, 426
r(tfrixtt, (augm.) 115. Obs. 4
trtitu, zsriffu, 283. ; tsu n'ittt (i'imm,) 338.
Note.
rtri, 289. 04*. 1
rftni, Syntax, 409
ttetisytu, T^tixlytu, 45. ; Obs. 9. ; adv.
282. 04*.5. ; Tôu^yixlriptt, 284.
06*. 6
<rr, characteristic, 127
xisXts, 262. Note**
risls and ({,) iriî,-, 18
> and i
Syntax, 401
vtijioKn, 410
45G
GREEK INDEX.
;, with a following, 50. 84. $ CO.; 217.

Note*
easily doubled, 34. 21
f, 'ft, 14. 34. 312. ; ft and tc, 31
fan*, verbs ending in, 149. 06*. 2
p'ia. pun, 94
ftyiu, contr. 187. Obs. 7
f'irrm, inflection, 129. Obt. 5
c, added, 34. Obt. 4. ; c added, 37. ; with
alteration of the meaning, 2!)8. ;
-c in the perf. pass. 145. Obi. 6. ;
urthe aor. 1. pass. 147. Obs. 1.; a
strengtbeningaddition,228.04*. 7- ;
in composition, 309. Note; in de
rivation of subst. 296. ; doubled in
aor. 1., 133. Obs. 5. ; dropped in
pass, terminations, 219. 04s. 3
-nil, ci, 2 p. pass. 174. 191. Obs. 2. ; 201
2*ftTt, numeral, 9
ri, for Z, 31. Obs. 1. g.
-ci, adv. 284. $ 1 16
-cum, verbs ending in, 295
cnf-i^t, rxfLiow, 289
-cla, 176. Oil. 8
-ci, en, with names of towns, 37. 20. ;
285
-ci, cn, 3 p. pi. 176
-a, cn, 3 p. sing. 1 77. Obs. 13. ; 193. Obs. 1 0
as, -cut, subst. abstr. 297
CXXTTV, 129
-cxn, -cxi/nt, temp, iterat. 173. 188.
Obs. 12. 200
, verbs ending in, 227
epi*, CfiMv, 186. 04*. 5
c/ui, -ftts, subst. 296
cc, rr, 31. 04*. 4. 128
crxyls, cr!%ti, 76. 06*. 8
craX,m, Fr/iiâ, friôi, 128. Oil. I
see ;
36. 37
cmnttnt, gen. pi. 68
ûpctKovcxt, Hvfettticitf, 40. 06*. 1 6
cvcx'icixi, pass. 234. 04*. 9
o-p-, enclitic forms, 28
<rpi/~f, 325. Obs. 3
cQmptt, 327. ; oien, 326. 04*. 5
fffi/Jw, inflection, 128. Obs. 1
#i;,218. OA*. 2
'Xl'i'i 174. AWe*
C5. 04*. 3
my, 89
t, see t
rS.kl.ic, Syntax, 408
rir, 45. 06*. 8
TVj * T8f, 82
r" and {*, 45. ; Syntax, 403
Titi TsJro, just so, 336. 04*. G
ri, 394
Tifadrai, 144. compare 110
rtym-w, 32- 04*. 2
ti<V, ti, 99
nltm, 151
nxufffeu, 136. 04*. 16
ti, raw, 105. 04*. 3
-ri**, verbal, 152. 344
*i, <t, , 100. 06*. 7
TtfUl, 71
rirXafto, &C., 220
riT;!f, 143. AW
titjShu, 149. 04. 2
TiTfjja, 143. 04i. 1
t5, 101. 06*. 2
-Tvts, rik*, rwf, subst. 298
-TWfwv, rf*,, 299
r, Syntax, 406. ; t< în, 403. ; rid with
aor. 354. 06*. 6. ; tj %g/isu aurm,
335. ; ti **, Tipxiin, 417
rixnn, Syntax, 354. 06*. 8
rU, Syntax, 326. 331. ; indirect, 326. ;
between article and subst. 319.
125. 06*. 1. ; omitted 331. 04*. 6
r!t,'ri, accent, 27. 04*. 2. ; quantity, 60.
06*. 3
ri, ri, Syntax, 322. a;?. 328. 04*. 1. ; ad
verbially, 321. 04*. 5. ; 328. 04*. 4. ;
joined with] the gen. 328. 04*. 2. ;
ri firi, reu /uii, 387* sqq. ; ra Ti, 406. ;
re H fiXytcrat, 428. ; ri fytw, instead
of iym, 328. 06*. 2.; ri Xtyi/utit, ri
nv mmreu, 336. 06*. 6. ; with the
infill. 361. ; ri xm ri, 323. 06*. 5
n), (crasis,) 45. Syntax, 402. ; rt). rt! tut,
&c, ibid.
rMtcci, 104. 06*. 2
-ris, verbal, 152.344
rmM, 288. Obs. 9
rmmr'm, on the contrary, 336. 06*. 6
GREEK INDEX.
nZm, with gen. 337. OAs. 4
<rgau/ix, Tfuu/at, 39. Obi. 1 1
T{"f>if> gen. pi. 68
tt, see rr
Tuyxatti, with particip. 375. 04s. 8
rims, rvmlni, 108. Obi. 1
ti/t, 13C. Note'0
ti>X"i Syntax, 378. Obi. ^
u, in the augra. 114.; instead of to in the
perf. pass. 145. Obi. 4
vi, diphth. 12
-upi, (conj. and opt.) 200
-KM;, quantity, 59. Obi. 1
-via, (verbs,) 178. 294. ; from verbs in
in, 228, ; quantity, ibid.
l**i, 289. Obi. 1
bii, shortened, 290. ; with the pass. 343. ;
u<T9 for vTim, 290
-0(e;, adj. (;,) 18
-on, (verbs ending in,) quantity, 19.
Obi. 10. 132. 133
<fu>xi, as prteterilum, 21 1
<fyi(is ilfii, Syntax, 422
(pifrt*9f, ipiftrref, 95. Obi. 2
fifn, Syntax, 418, with the Editor's
Note.
f(linn, Syntax, 415
-<fi, fit, 37. 76. Obi. 9
4>/g, GO. Obi. 2
fji,-, imper. 218. Obi. 2
129. OAs. 5
Qavly.tOY, 32. Note,
/ppsZits, 32. Obi. 2.; Syntax, 413
x, before ft 34
Xu(i, with particip. 375. OAs. 8
and %0mf*uXii, 34. OAs. 3
Syntax, 379. OAs. 2, with AWc
ij./5i, 75. Obi. 7
457
93
inflection, 133. Obi. C. ; contrac
tion, 186
indeol. 77. 280.; Syntax, 331.
Obi. 7
gen. 83. Ab/es
Xftemt, 52. III. 1
V-i ?, origin, 35, 22
îv, <^fir, 18C. OAs. 5
inflection, 148. OAs. 8
in the Attic termination, short, 25. ;
compared with the 3d dec]. 75. Ab/e;
for a, 40, OAs. 13. ; for a and au, 39.
OAs. 4.; in the particip. perf. 176.;
contracted from , 244. fitiv; in
composition, 309.. Obs. 2. ; - for -us,
(adverbial termination,) 283
-u, uv, us, nomina, 75. OAs. 6
and "> 891. OAs. 4.; <S pixt, see
- t>, see rat
ZxXm, 45. OAs. 6
kmrmsi, (decl.) 72. 75. OAs. 6. 7. ; 301
<ra, &c. 45. OAs. 10
ayrnait, (accent,) 29. OAs. 2
-, (2 decl.) 55. OAs. 3
a , 291. OAs. 4
-(, -if> (adv.) 281
-us, nomina, 55
<lf, us, 27. ; Syntax, 391. ; prsepos. 379. ;
with casus abiol. 377- ; "s tti, us ins
urCi, 411. j i'j
404. ; Jm, 392
-sJs-m, shortened and contracted, 135.
OAs. 13
an, diphth. 12. 101. OAs. 4
firif, 40. OAs. 11
ufiXuf, with accns. 333. ; with double
accus. 335. OAs. 4
tftXn, 284. OAs. 7.; Syntax, 410
ERRATA.
The following Errata have escaped the Editor's eye in reading the Proofs for
the Printer :
Pago
Pfipe
Pago
vi. I am informed that 239. SAX,
268. i;Wn
270. also
Mil. Keic.hti.ey has
Lexitogus, II. 86.
abandoned his inten 239. <u( should have been 2734. ffrignru
tion.
printed in the same 278. *tir
vii. to judge of it."
type as aiîu.
287. ulait *
9. Obs, 3, after the 1 the r, 242.gTa&;;i]id augushould
tjjretvry
(here railed Bav, I'uu,
have been printed in 288. i*'
not rr,) after the 1
the same type as 297. p-npm
the
(Kcrra,) and
312. ivi :
after
should have been 315. aratg
(Jûm.)the* ti the J 245. yniiai
printed in the same 321. triXit
10. V* ,
type as yivroy and 322. walnut.like
17-, cur.v.uttcv. mulberry
ynpuu in the same as 325. fftAuratavror
it
rig
28.
yafttai.
331 . T TAfV
29.
246. ia/txai should have 332. instances
"EBtGeflt, StOffTl
been printed in the
Tyjv ffTâTltttv
40. places in ifrra
same type as laxw. 334. WifiiXomrtti
41.
247- him should have been 346. read $ 135.
printed in the same 352. fivtis
42. <pi\iriipiXn: ( 103.)
43. instances"Afytur
type as hlitjwfu.
44. finii its
248. 5i should have been 354. Jjxt/f 11 vciXttt
45. Ctffii- I CTU CI/T VI- I 61;
printed in the same 360. f/A/wrra;
55. Obs. 3. flirt*;, T7lri*'
rl 'Ekkai iylvirc
type as 2<^?y.
50. S{.
253. Vfp* should have been 301. fl/ t* ng'av
65. "Ageup,
printed in the same 362. T0VT6V TOU
78. 'ArcXXm,
type as fpirteu.
'O toiovtos
79. yovurtv,
254.
and tuplex* 373. T5t
80. Dor. G%ittros$'t{*>il4t
should have heen 377- Oi rsri(i;
printed in the same 386. "H 3i/va
82. . ,
printed in the same
Svrtrlt 8
88.
$iVtft/,
type as xxirvpuu.
394. Aid. arf P/af.
91. affray/Vrartfj,
W}.l$u\u should have been 401. "Agtffret
93. fttyiffrofj
printed in the same 405. iXX'
105. or'tonrtv
aXX* us
type as tvr&tt.
\QR. TOiOS 1 OTOffOSy
269. <rtpshould have been 406. 7 Ara/.
133. xgdofitecij
printed in the same 420. relative
135. Oi*. 14. w.
type as vivfoputt.
421. "E3vx
146. TiTUÔtlj
258. (as 11.)
422. 'JEVt;
160.
262. Xtyiknfuu
trtXt/tuf
106. lervftai,
266. &ftt;v
424. (rXflw-T'tfi'Tif "
215. Sfl"T(,
428. t<
irlj
267. fjwfh (compareîîj- 431.
217. V;>i,
226. fr7 7W.
432. T*TTi| f
237. aaamf, (.--.,)
ADVERTISEMENTS.
I.
A GREEK and ENGLISH LEXICON, for the Use of Schools and
Colleges, containing a variety of Critical, Philological, and Scientific Matter, not
hitherto found in any Greek Dictionary. Also, an ENGLISH and GREEK LEXI
CON, comprising a Number of Idiomatic Phrases, for the Use of more Advanced
Students. By George Dunbar, A.M. F.R.S.E., and Professor of Greek in the
University of Edinburgh ; and E. H. Barker, Esq., of Thetford, Norfolk.
Edinburgh, 1831. Maclachlan and Stewart; London, Simpkin and Marshall; Dublin,
J. Cumming. Price 25. boards.

II.
The First Volume of PARRIANA, or Notices of the Rev. Samuel
Parr, LL.D. Collected from Various Sources, Printed and Manuscript, and in Part
Written by E. H. Barker, Esq., of Thetford, Norfolk.
London, 1828. Colburn. Price 16*.
The Second Volume of PARRIANA, or Notices of the Rev. Samuel
Parr, LLJ). Collected from various Sources, Printed and Manuscript, and in Part
Written by E. H. Barker, Esq., of Thetford, Norfolk.
THE PRINCIPAL CONTENTS :
1. A Letter from Jeremy Bentham, Esq., respecting John Lind, Esq., Dr. Nath.
Forster, and Dr. Parr; 2. Notices of Dr. Nath. Forster, with Extracts from his
MS. Letters ; 3. A Full and Complete Vindication of Dr. Parr's Conduct towards
Bishop Hurd, including Sketches of the Warburtonian Controversies, and Notices
of Francis and Henry Coventry, and T. Green, of Lords Chedworth and
Hailes, of Drs. Berdmork, Hallifax, Johnson, Jortin, Leland, Lowth, J. Tay
lor, and Tucker, of Markland, Potter, and Toup ; 4. Notices of Jacob Bryant,
Provost Cooke, N. and Geo. Hardinoe, Prof. Hermann, Capei. Lofft, Archbishop
Markham, Montesquieu, Porson, Bishop Shipley, Gilbert Wakefield, and
other Literary and Contemporary Characters ; 5. Dr. Parr's Observations on the
Etymology of the word Sublimis, approved by Dugald Stewart and Dr. Copleston, with a Refutation of them by Dr. John Hunter and Prof. Dunbar; C. Dr.
Parr's Character of G. Wakefield; 7. Dr. Parr's Critique on G. W.'s Edition of
Horace ; 8. Dr. Parr's Letter to the Editor of the British Critic, on certain
Interpolations in Horace ; 9. Notices of the Ossianic Controversy, including the
Opinions of Adeluno, C. Butler, Dr. Nathan Drake, Gray, T. Green, Hurd,
R. P. Knight, H. Neelk, Parr, Chr. Saxius, J. Scott, Sir Walter Scott, Lieut.Gen. Vallancey, Warburton, Wordsworth, and others, with Comments.
London. 1829. Black, Young, and Young. Price 11. Is.
III.
Complete in Two Volumes, Ato. Price 5Z. 10*.
Dr. WEBSTER'S DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE,
INTENDED TO EXHIBIT
1. The Origin and the Affinities of every English Word, as far as they have been
ascertained, with its Primary Signification, as now generally established; 2. The
Orthography and the Pronunciation of Words, as sanctioned by reputable usage,
and where this usage is divided, as determinable by a reference to the principle of
analogy ; 3. Accurate and Discriminating Definitions of Technical and Scientific
Terms, with numerous Authorities and Illustrations. To which are prefixed an
Introductory Dissertation on the Origin, History, and Connection of the Languages of
Western Asia, and of Europe, and a Concise Grammar of the English Language.
Edited by E. H. Barker, Esq., of Thetford. Norfolk, with MS. Additions and Corrections, communicated by Dr. Webster.
It is not a mere improvement on Johnson's Dictionary, but an original work, the
labor of forty years, and contains 12,000 words more than any other similar Work.
In respect to etymology and affinities, it supplies the grand desideratum in English
Lexicography.
ADVERTISEMENTS.
IV.BIBLIOTIIECA CLASSICA, or CLASSICAL DICTIONARY,
containing a Copious Account of the Proper Names, mentioned in Ancient Au
thors, with the Value of Coins, Weights, and Measures, by the late J. Lemprieke,
D.D. The 3d Edition, 1797. Re-edited and Revised by E. H. Barker, with the
Extensive and Valuable Corrections, Improvements, and Additions, above 4000 in
Number, indicated by Brackets, from the 1th American Edition by Charles Anthon, Adjunct Professor ofLanguages and Ancient Geography, in Columbia-College,
New-York :To which is Subjoined by the present EniTOK an Appendix, containing
1 . A Table of the Greek Calendar, 2. A List of Places, in Latin and English, in which
Classical Presses have been established, 3. Notices of the Arabian Medical Writers.
The 2d. Edition, Corrected, Improved and Enlarged.
London, 1832, Black, Young, and YouNff. Price \Ss. bound.
" Very considerable corrections and alterations, improvements and additions, have
been made to it, and the Editor believes that the literary community will view with
much satisfaction the changes, which have been effected. Many verbal substitutions
have removed gross or coarse expressionshave given more perspicuity to what
was ambiguous or obscureand conferred more elegance and harmony on what had
little pretension to either. Much, which concerned bibliography, has been rectified
or added ; and much, which related to chronology, has been put into a more authen
tic form. Further sources of information on the several topics discussed, have
been indicated, and the reader can hardly fail to observe the desire to verify facts
by referring to authorities with scrupulous accuracy. That Tearfulness, which
men of erudition were accustomed to feel in quoting this work, from the careless
ness of facts, the imperfections of narrative, the errors of chronology, biography,
and bibliography, and other defects, which they discerned in it, may now be dis
missed, and the work merits honorable mention for the several purposes, to which
they make it subservient in reference." " With alterations so numerous, and
additions so extensive, the Editor may be excused for the presumption of thinking
that the large improvements in this Edition almost entitle it to be considered as a
netowork; and therefore the purchasers of the first edition should not be deemed
worthy of much sympathy, if their desire to avail themselves of these improvements
oblige them to purchase the reprint, as the Editor has often found himself in the
same situation, and never demanded the commiseration of his friends, but rejoiced
to displace one edition by another, if the latter were much better suited to his literary
wants and purposes."Preface to the Edition of 1832.
V.
BOUCHER AND STEVENSON'S GLOSSARY OF ARCHAIC AND
PROVINCIAL WORDS. :
Part I. price 7s. 6d. of
A SUPPLEMENT to the DICTIONAEIES of the ENGLISH
LANGUAGE, particularly those of Dr. Johnson and Dr. Webster, containing
1. A Large Collection of Words, occurring in early English Authors of reputation,
not to be found in the Dictionaries of Dr. Johnson and Dr. Webster, with Authori
ties and Illustrations.
2. Additional Illustrations of some Words, which are found in those Dictionaries.
3. A Large Collection of Words still used in many parts of England, though not
admitted into the Dictionaries, relics of the old Language of the English Nation,
with ample Illustrations.
4. An Introductory Essay on the Origin and History of the English Language.
Edited, by the Rev. Joseph Hunter, F.S.A.
London: Printed by W. Ciowiss, Stamford-street.
I .. ,

Buttmann. Intermediate or Larger Greek Grammar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Buttmann. Intermediate or Larger Greek Grammar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acerca de este libro

This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

Biblioteca Ateneu Barcelonis

DR. PHILIP BUTTMANN'S

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN

EDITED, WITH A FEW NOTES,

1. If " it cannot be denied that the author of a Grammar,

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

tinguished themselves as the authors of the Greek Grammars in

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

he is now allowed to fill as a Greek philologian. The supe

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

And in the new edition, dated AllenbiiTg, May 1825, Matthijb

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

" M. Matthi/e ne parle ici sans doute que de la Grammaire

PREFACE OF TUE ENGLISH EDITOR.

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

name of Dr. Cyril Jackson1 as a ' tower of strength,' and was

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

would quote the following passage from James Harris's Philo

manded ' what fleet?'

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

P. S. Ia concluding the Preface, the Editor would direct

PREFACE OF THE ENGLISH EDITOR.

THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE

This my Intermediate Greek Grammar is calculated for the

deeper critical inquiry into the Greek language will be found in

Doctor Philip Buttmann was born at Francfort on the Main,

Physician at Strasbourg in Alsace, through whom he was intro

OF DR. PHILIP BUTTMANN.

Secretary to the Royal Library at Berlin, and in 1800, accepted

pronounced a Funeral Oration over his grave on the 23d of the

OF DR. PHILIP BUTTMANN.

The learned world is also indebted to Buttmann for

bearings, and mastered it to his entire satisfaction ; and his un

1. Of the Greek Language, and its Dialects in general.

Object; Casus Obliqui ; 131. Accus.; $ 132. Genitive;

I.Of the Greek Language, and its Dialects in general.

OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE,

excelled in refinement all the other Greek dialects, by avoiding,

AND ITS DIALECTS IN GENERAL.

OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE,

AND ITS DIALECTS IN GENERAL.

exaggeration, to prevent this, and in their schoolbooks contrasted

OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE,

AND ITS DIALECTS IN GENERAL.

people and of the lower ranks, whose language, owing to the

WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION.

DIVISION OP THE LETTERS.

quently supplies the short w, which was wanting in Greek ;

ei, NsTXof, Neilos, Nilus ; Ac/xeTov, Lukeion,

6i, BoiaiTt'aj Boiotia, Boeotia.

ui, (like the French ui or tty in lui, tuyau.)

au, rXauxor, Glaukos, Glaucus,

u, (oo) Moura, Musa, Mnsa. (long u.)

with regard to the apostrophus, ( 30.) and to the moveable v,

make a true position. The penultima in the following words, for

}.u{vssvt spoilt booty,

Obt. 10. Another rhythmical lengthening was occasioned by the ctesura. Me

plXl *at- | aiyiti- | ti xlpi- | */, 51,pi- | kit

common life, and it was undoubtedly at a far later period that

6. According to 10. 1. the antepenultimate can take only the

two principal cases. It is modified through the dependence of a

plXl at- | aiyiti- | ti xlpi- | /, 51,pi- | kit